XC60

RECHARGE

O W NE R 'S M ANU AL
VÄLKOMMEN!

We hope your Volvo will give you many years of happy motoring. owner's manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile
The vehicle is designed for the safety and comfort of you and your app (Volvo Manual) and on Volvo Cars support page
passengers. Volvo strives to design one of the world's safest pas- (support.volvocars.com).
senger vehicles. Your Volvo is also designed to meet applicable
We also encourage everyone to always use seat belts in this and
safety and environmental requirements.
other vehicles. You should also not drive if you are under the influ-
To increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you ence of alcohol or medicines or if your ability to drive is for some
read the instructions and maintenance information contained in this other reason impaired.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
OWNER'S INFORMATION YOUR VOLVO SAFETY
Owner's information 16 Contacting Volvo 26 Safety 44
Owner's Manual in the center display 17 Volvo ID 26 Safety during pregnancy 45
Navigate in the Owner's Manual 18 Creating and registering a Volvo ID 27 Occupant safety 45
in the center display
Drive-E ‒ purer driving pleasure 28 Reporting safety defects 46
Owner's manual in mobile devices 20
IntelliSafe – driver support and safety 29 Recall information 47
Volvo Cars support site 21
Sensus - connection and enter- 30 Whiplash Protection System 48
Using the Owner's Manual 21 tainment
Seat belts 49
The Owner's Manual and the envi- 23 Software Updates 33
ronment Buckling and unbuckling seat belts 50
Data recording 33 Seat belt tensioners 52
Terms and Conditions for Services 35 Resetting the electric seat belt 53
Customer Privacy Policy 35 tensioners*
Important information on acces- 36 Door and seat belt reminders 54
sories and extra equipment
Airbags 55
Accessory installation 37 Driver/passenger side front airbags 56
Connecting equipment to the 37
vehicle's data link connector Occupant weight sensor 59
Technician certification Side airbags 62
38
Viewing the Vehicle Identification Inflatable curtain 63
39
Number (VIN) Safety mode 64
Volvo Structural Parts Statement 39 Starting and moving the vehicle 65
Change of market when importing when it is in safety mode
40
or relocating Child safety 66
Driver distraction 41 Child restraints 68
Infant seats 70
Convertible seats 72
Booster cushions 74

2
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE
Top tether anchors 75 CONTROL Center display overview 114
Lower child seat attachment points 77 Displays and controls by the driver 86 Handling the center display 116
in a left-hand drive vehicle
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors 77 Activating and deactivating the 119
Instrument panel 88 center display
Integrated booster cushion* 79
Instrument panel settings 90 Navigating in the center display's 119
Folding up the integrated booster 80 views
cushion* Fuel gauge 91
Hybrid gauge 91 Handling tiles in the center display 123
Folding down the integrated 82
booster cushion* Hybrid battery gauge 92 Function view in the center display 126
Trip computer 93 Moving apps and buttons in the 128
center display
Displaying trip data in the instru- 95
ment panel Symbols in the center display sta- 128
tus bar
Resetting the trip odometer 96
Using the center display keyboard 130
Displaying trip statistics in the 96
center display Changing keyboard language in 133
the center display
Trip statistics settings 97
Entering characters, letters and 133
Date and time 98 words by hand in the center display
Ambient temperature sensor 98 Changing the appearance of the 135
center display
Indicator and warning symbols 99
Turning off and adjusting the vol- 135
Instrument panel licenses 102 ume of the center display system
App menu in instrument panel 108 sounds
Handling the App menu in the 109 Changing system units of meas- 136
instrument panel urement
Messages in the instrument panel 110 Changing system language 136
Handling messages in the instru- 111 Changing settings in the center 136
ment panel display's Top view
Handling messages saved from 112 Opening contextual setting in the 137
the instrument panel center display

3
 LIGHTING WINDOWS, GLASS AND
Resetting user data when the 138 Lighting control and panel 156 MIRRORS
vehicle changes owners Windows, glass and mirrors 170
Adjusting light functions via the 157
Resetting center display settings 138 center display Pinch protection for windows and 170
Table of settings in the center display 139 Parking lights 158 sun curtains
Driver profiles 140 Daytime running lights 158 Reset procedure for pinch protection 171
Selecting a driver profile 141 Low beams 159 Power windows 171
Changing a driver profile's name 141 Using high beam 160 Operating the power windows 172
Protecting a driver profile 142 Active high beam 161 Rearview/door mirrors 173
Linking a remote key to a driver profile 142 Using turn signals 162 Adjusting the rearview mirror dim- 174
ming function
Resetting driver profile settings 144 Active Bending Lights* 162
Adjusting the door mirrors 174
Messages in the center display 144 Rear fog light 163
Panoramic roof* 176
Handling messages in the center 145 Brake lights 164
display Operating the panoramic roof* 177
Emergency brake lights 164
Handling messages saved from 145 Auto closing the panoramic roof* 179
the center display Hazard warning flashers 164 sun curtain
Head-up display* 146 Using home safe lighting 165 Wiper blades and washer fluid 180
Activating and deactivating the 148 Welcome Light 165 Using the windshield wipers 180
head-up display* Interior Lighting 165 Using the rain sensor 181
Head-up display settings* 148 Adjusting interior lighting 167 Activating and deactivating the 182
Voice Control 149 rain sensor's memory function
Use voice recognition 150 Using the windshield and head- 183
light washers
Voice control for cellular phones 152
Using the rear window wiper/washer 184
Voice control for radio and media 153
Using automatic rear window 185
Voice control settings 154 wiping when backing up

4
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL CLIMATE CONTROL
Manual front seats 188 Climate 204 Activating and deactivating front 219
seat ventilation*
Power* front seats 189 Climate zones 204
Activating and deactivating the 220
Adjusting the power* front seats 189 Climate control sensors 205 heated steering wheel*
Storing positions for seats, mir- 190 Perceived temperature 205 Activating and deactivating auto- 220
rors and head-up display* matic steering wheel heating*
Climate control system voice 206
Using stored positions for seats, 191 commands Activating auto climate control 220
mirrors and head-up display*
Air quality 207 Activating and deactivating recir- 221
Front seat massage* settings 192 culation
CleanZone* 207
Adjusting front seat massage set- 193 Activating and deactivating the 222
tings* Clean Zone Interior Package* 208
recirculation timer setting
Adjusting* front seat cushion length Interior Air Quality System* 208
194 Activating and deactivating max 222
Adjusting front seat side bolster Activating and deactivating the air 209 defroster
195 quality sensor*
settings* Activating and deactivating the 223
Adjusting front seat lumbar support* Passenger compartment air filter 209 heated rear window and door mirrors
195
Adjusting the passenger seat from Advanced Air Cleaner* 210 Automatically activating and deac- 224
197
the driver's seat* Air distribution tivating the heated rear window
210 and door mirrors
Folding down the rear seat backrests 198 Adjusting air distribution 211 Setting the blower speed for the 224
Adjusting the rear seat head restraints 199 Opening, closing and directing air 211 front seats
Steering wheel controls and horn vents
201 Setting the temperature for the 225
Air distribution options 213 front seats
Adjusting the steering wheel 202
Climate system controls 216 Synchronize temperature 226
Activating and deactivating power 217 Activating and deactivating air 227
front seats* conditioning
Activating and deactivating the 218 Parking climate 227
heated front seat*
Preconditioning 228
Activating and deactivating the 218
heated rear seats* Starting and stopping preconditioning 228
Preconditioning timer 229

5
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Adding and editing timer settings 230 Locking and unlocking 240 Antenna locations for the start 261
for preconditioning and lock system
Lock indication 240
Activating and deactivating pre- 231 Locking and unlocking from inside 262
conditioning timer Lock confirmation settings 242 the vehicle
Deleting preconditioning timer 231 Remote key 242 Unlocking the tailgate from inside 263
settings Locking and unlocking using the 245 the vehicle
Pre-cleaning* 232 remote key Activating and deactivating child locks 263
Starting and stopping pre-cleaning* 232 Settings for remote and inside 246 Automatic locking when driving 264
door unlock
Climate comfort retaining function 233 Closing and locking the tailgate 265
Unlocking the tailgate using the 247 using the buttons*
Starting and switching off the cli- 234 remote key
mate retaining function when parking Setting maximum opening height 267
Remote key range 247 for the power tailgate*
Parking climate symbols and mes- 235
sages Replacing the remote key's battery 248 Operating the tailgate with a foot 267
Ordering additional remote keys 252 movement*
Heater 236
Care Key – restricted remote key 252 Private Locking 269
Parking heater 236
Care Key settings 253 Activating and deactivating pri- 269
Additional heater 237 vate locking
Activating and deactivating the 237 Detachable key blade 253
Alarm 271
auxiliary heater Locking and unlocking with 254
detachable key blade Arming and disarming the alarm 272
Electronic immobilizer 256
Start and lock system type desig- 256
nations
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* 258
Keyless locking and unlocking* 259
Keyless unlock settings* 260
Keyless tailgate unlock* 260

6
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver support systems 274 Cruise control standby mode 290 Activating or deactivating Curve 313
Speed Assist (CSA)*
Speed-dependent steering wheel 274 Adaptive Cruise Control* 290
resistance Curve Speed Assist (CSA)* limitations 313
Adaptive Cruise Control* controls 292
Electronic Stability Control 275 Passing assistance* 314
Adaptive Cruise Control* displays 292
Electronic Stability Control in 276 Using passing assistance 314
sport mode Selecting and activating Adaptive 293
Cruise Control* Collision risk warning from driver 315
Activating or deactivating Sport 277 support
mode for Electronic Stability Control Deactivating Adaptive Cruise Control* 294
Switching target vehicles with 316
Electronic Stability Control sym- 278 Adaptive Cruise Control* standby 295 driver support
bols and messages mode
Adjusting set speed for driver support 317
Connected Safety 280 Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations 296
Setting time interval to the vehicle 318
Activating or deactivating 281 Switching between cruise control 297 ahead
Connected Safety and Adaptive Cruise Control* in
the center display Drive modes when using time 319
Connected Safety limitations 281 interval to vehicle
Symbols and messages for Adap- 298
Road Sign Information* 282 tive Cruise Control* Auto-hold braking with driver support 319
Activating or deactivating Road 283 Pilot Assist* 300 Lane Keeping Aid 320
Sign Information*
Pilot Assist* controls 302 Activating or deactivating Lane 322
Road Sign Information* display 283 Keeping Aid
Pilot Assist* displays 303
Road Sign Information and 284 Selecting type of assistance for 323
Sensus Navigation* Selecting and activating Pilot Assist* 304 Lane Keeping Aid
Speed limit and speed camera 284 Deactivating Pilot Assist* 305 Lane Keeping Aid limitations 323
warnings from Road Sign Information* Pilot Assist* standby mode 306 Lane Keeping Aid symbols and 324
Activating or deactivating warn- 285 Temporarily deactivating steering 307 messages
ings from Road Sign Information* assistance with Pilot Assist* Lane Keeping Aid display 326
Road Sign Information* limitations 286 Pilot Assist* limitations 308 City Safety™ 327
Cruise control 287 Pilot Assist* symbols and messages 310 City Safety sub-functions 328
Selecting and activating cruise control 288 Curve Speed Assist (CSA)* 312 Setting a warning distance for 330
Deactivating cruise control 289 City Safety

7
 Detecting obstacles with City Safety 331 Rear Collision Warning* limitations 347 Park Assist Camera* 365
City Safety in crossing traffic 333 BLIS* 348 Location and field of vision of Park 366
Assist Cameras*
Limitations of City Safety in cross- 334 Activating or deactivating BLIS 349
ing traffic Park Assist Camera trajectory lines* 368
BLIS limitations 350
City Safety steering assistance for 334 Park Assist sensor field 370
evasive maneuver BLIS messages 351
Activating Park Assist Camera 371
City Safety steering assistance 335 Driver Alert Control 352
limitations during evasive maneuvers Park Assist Camera symbols and 373
Activating or deactivating Driver 353 messages
Automatic braking during delayed 335 Alert Control
evasive maneuvers with City Safety Park Assist Pilot* 375
Selecting guidance to a rest area if 353
City Safety braking for oncoming 336 the Driver Alert Control warning Types of parking with Park Assist 376
vehicles has been given Pilot*
City Safety limitations 337 Driver Alert Control limitations 354 Using Park Assist Pilot* 377
City Safety messages 340 Distance Alert* 354 Leaving a parallel parking space 379
with Park Assist Pilot*
Steering assistance at risk of collision 341 Activating or deactivating Dis- 355
tance Alert Park Assist Pilot* limitations 380
Activating or deactivating steering 342
assistance during collision risks Distance Alert limitations 355 Park Assist Pilot* messages 382
Run-Off Mitigation with steering 342 Cross Traffic Alert* 356 Radar sensor 383
assistance Activating or deactivating Cross 357 Radar sensor type approval 384
Steering assistance during colli- 343 Traffic Alert*
Camera 386
sion risks from oncoming traffic Cross Traffic Alert* limitations 357
Camera/radar sensor limitations 386
Steering assistance during colli- 344 Cross Traffic Alert* messages 359
sion risks from behind* Recommended camera and radar 389
Park Assist* 360 sensor maintenance
Steering assistance during colli- 345
sion risks limitations Park Assist front, rear and sides* 361 Camera and radar unit symbols 391
and messages
Symbols and messages for steer- 346 Activating or deactivating Park Assist* 362
ing assistance during collision risks
Park Assist limitations 363
Rear Collision Warning* 347 Park Assist symbols and messages 364

8
ELECTRIC MOTOR AND STARTING AND DRIVING
CHARGING Starting the vehicle 416 Shifting gears with automatic 432
General information about electric 394 transmission
Switching off the vehicle 418
vehicles Using the steering wheel paddles* 433
Ignition modes 419 to shift
Charging the hybrid battery 395
Selecting ignition mode 420 Shiftlock 435
Charging current 396
Brake functions 421 The kickdown function 435
Charge cable 398
Brakes 421 The Launch function* 435
Charging cable residual current device 399
Brake Assist System 423 Automatic transmission symbols 436
Charging cable temperature moni- 401
toring Braking on wet roads 424 and messages
Opening and closing the charging 401 Braking on salted roads 424 All Wheel Drive (AWD) 436
socket cover Maintenance of the brake system Drive systems 436
424
Initiating hybrid battery charging 401 Parking brake Starting and stopping the com- 437
425
Charging status in the vehicle's 403 bustion engine
Activating and deactivating the 425
charging socket parking brake Drive modes 438
Charging status in the charging 405 Settings for automatically activat- Changing drive mode 443
cable's control module 427
ing the parking brake Energy distribution using map data* 444
Charging status in the instrument 408 Parking on a hill
panel 427 Leveling control* and suspension 445
Parking brake malfunction 427 Leveling control settings*
Stopping hybrid battery charging 410 448
Auto-hold brakes 428 Adjusting suspension settings
Hybrid symbols and messages in 411 448
the instrument panel Activating and deactivating Auto- 429 Polestar Engineered*
hold at a standstill Low Speed Control
Long-term storage of vehicles 413 450
with hybrid batteries Hill Start Assist 430 Activating and deactivating Low 451
Braking assist after a collision 430 Speed Control using the function
button
Regenerative braking* 430
Hill Descent Control 451
Transmission 431
Activating and deactivating Hill 452
Automatic transmission 431 Descent Control using the func-
tion button

9
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Economical driving 453 Programming HomeLink®* 479 Audio, media and Internet 486
Range 454 Using HomeLink®* 480 Sound settings 486
Hold and Charge 455 Type approval for HomeLink®* 481 Sound experience* 487
Preparing for a long trip 456 Compass* 482 Apps 488
Winter driving 457 Activating and deactivating the 482 Download apps 489
Driving through standing water 457 compass* Updating apps 489
Opening/closing the fuel filler door 458 Calibrating the compass* 482 Deleting apps 490
Refueling 459 Radio 490
Fuel 461 Starting the radio 491
Octane rating 462 Changing waveband and radio station 492
Emission controls 463 Searching for a radio station 492
Overheating of engine and trans- 464 Storing radio channels in the 493
mission Radio favorites app
Battery drain 465 Radio settings 494
Jump starting using another battery 465 RBDS 494
Retractable hitch* 467 HD Radio™ 495
Detachable towbar* 470 Activating and deactivating the HD 496
Radio™
Driving with a trailer 472
HD Radio™ sub-channels 497
Trailer Stability Assist* 474
HD Radio™ limitations 497
Checking trailer lights 475
Towing using a towline SiriusXM® Satellite radio* 498
476
Attaching and removing the tow- 476 Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio* 499
ing eyelet Settings for SiriusXM® Satellite radio* 501
Recovery 477 SiriusXM Travel Link®* 502
HomeLink®* 478 SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Weather 503

10
SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Notifications 505 Using Android Auto* 521 Connecting the vehicle to the 539
Internet via a Bluetooth-connected
SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Fuel 505 Settings for Android Auto* 522 phone
SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Sports 507 Tips for using Android Auto* 522 Connecting the vehicle to the 539
Media player Phone 523 Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi)
507
Playing media Connecting a phone to the car via 524 Connecting the vehicle to the 540
508 Internet via vehicle modem (SIM card)
Bluetooth for the first time
Controlling and changing media 509
Connecting a phone to the car via 526 Vehicle modem settings 541
Media searches 510 Bluetooth automatically Sharing Internet from the vehicle 542
Gracenote® 511 Connecting a phone to the car via 526 via Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering)
Bluetooth manually No or poor Internet connection 543
Video 512
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-con- 526 Deleting Wi-Fi networks 543
Playing video 512 nected phone
Playing DivX® 512 Wi-Fi technology and security 544
Switch between phones con- 527
Video settings 513 nected via Bluetooth Terms of use and data sharing 544
Streaming media via Bluetooth® 513 Disconnecting Bluetooth-con- 527 Activating and deactivating data 545
nected devices sharing
Connecting a device via Bluetooth® 513
Handling phone calls 527 Data sharing for services 545
Playing media via the USB port 514 Handling text messages 528 Hard disk storage space 546
Connecting a device via the USB port 514 Text message settings 529 License agreement for audio and 547
Technical specifications for USB 515 media
devices Managing the phone book 530
Compatible file formats for media Phone settings 530
515
Settings for Bluetooth devices 531
Apple® CarPlay®* 516
Wireless phone charger* 532
Using Apple® CarPlay®* 517
Using the wireless phone charger* 532
Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* 519
Certificate for wireless charger 534
Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®* 519
Internet-connected vehicle* 538
Android Auto* 520

11
 WHEELS AND TIRES LOADING, STORAGE AND
Tires 558 Tire sealing system 579 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Tire direction of rotation 560 Using the tire sealing system 580 Passenger compartment interior 588
Tread wear indicator 561 Inflate tires with the compressor 584 Tunnel console 589
included in the tire sealing system Electrical outlets 590
Tire terminology 561
Determining the vehicle's permit- 585 Using the electrical outlets 591
Tire sidewall designations 562 ted weight
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 564 Using the glove compartment 592
Checking tire pressure 565 Sun visors 593
Adjusting tire pressure 566 Cargo compartment 593
Recommended tire pressure 567 Loading recommendations 594
Tire pressure monitoring system* 567 Roof loads and load carriers 595
Saving new reference values for 569 Grocery bag holders 596
tire inflation pressure monitoring* Load anchoring eyelets 596
Viewing tire pressure status in the 570 Rear seat ski hatch 597
center display*
Installing and removing the cargo 597
Action when warned of low tire 571 compartment cover*
pressure
Operating the cargo compartment 599
Tire inflation pressure monitoring 572 cover*
system* messages
Installing and removing the steel 600
Changing a wheel 572 cargo grid*
Tool kit 574 Installing and removing the cargo net* 602
Jack* 575
Wheel bolts 575
Spare wheel 576
Handling the spare wheel 577
Snow tires 578
Snow chains 578

12
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo's service program 606 Fuses in the engine compartment 630 Paintwork 661
Data transfer between vehicle and 609 Fuses under the glove compartment 637 Touching up minor paint damage 662
workshop over Wi-Fi
Fuses in the cargo compartment 643 Color codes 663
Download Center 609
Replacing bulbs 648 Changing rear window wipers 663
Handling system updates via 610
Download Center Cleaning the interior 648 Replacing windshield wiper blades 664
Vehicle status 611 Cleaning the center display 649 Putting the wiper blades in service 665
position
Scheduling service and repairs 611 Cleaning the head-up display* and 650
instrument panel Filling washer fluid 666
Sending vehicle information to the 612
workshop Cleaning fabric upholstery and 650
ceiling liner
Hoisting the vehicle 614
Cleaning the seat belt 651
Climate control system service 617
Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats 652
Replacing a windshield with head- 617
up display* Cleaning leather upholstery* 652
Opening and closing the hood 617 Cleaning the leather steering wheel 653
Engine compartment overview 619 Cleaning interior plastic, metal and 654
wood surfaces
Engine oil 620
Cleaning the exterior 654
Checking and filling engine oil 621
Polishing and waxing 655
Coolant 623
Hand washing 656
Refilling coolant 623
Automatic car washes 657
Starter battery 625
High-pressure washing 658
Hybrid battery 627
Cleaning the wiper blades 659
Battery symbols 627
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber 659
Battery recycling 628 and trim components
Fuses and fuseboxes 628 Cleaning rims 660
Replacing fuses 629 Corrosion protection 661

13
 SPECIFICATIONS INDEX
Type designations 670 Index 683
Dimensions 673
Weights 675
Towing capacity and tongue weight 676
Engine specifications 677
Engine oil specifications 678
Transmission fluid specifications 678
Brake fluid specifications 679
Fuel tank volume 679
Air conditioning specifications 679
Approved tire pressure 681

14
OWNER'S INFORMATION
 OWNER'S INFORMATION

Owner's information Vehicle's center display1 Volvo Cars support site

Owner's information is available in several In the center display, pull Go to volvocars.com/support
different formats, both digital and printed. down Top view and tap and select your country.
The Owner's Manual is available on the vehi- Owner's manual. This gives Owner's Manuals are availa-
cle's center display, as a mobile app and on you access to visual naviga- ble here for viewing online
Volvo Cars' support website. There is also a tion with exterior and interior and in PDF format. The sup-
Quick Guide in the glove compartment, as images of the vehicle. The port site also contains
well as a supplement to the Owner's Manual information is searchable and instructive videos and addi-
containing information about e.g. fuses, spec- is divided into categories. tional information and assistance concerning
ifications, etc. A printed Owner's Manual can your vehicle and owning a Volvo. The website
be ordered. Mobile app is available on most markets.
In App Store or Google Play,
search for "Volvo Manual". Printed information
Download the app to your The glove compartment con-
smartphone or tablet and tains a printed supplement to
select your vehicle model. the Owner's Manual1, which
The app contains instructive contains information on fuses
videos and offers visual navi- and specifications as well as
gation, including exterior and interior images a summary of important and
of the vehicle. The contents are searchable practical information.
and the sections are designed to be easy to There is also a printed Quick Guide with useful
navigate. information about the most commonly used
features and functions in your vehicle.
Other printed information may also be provi-
ded in the vehicle, depending on equipment
level, market, etc.
A printed Owner's Manual and accompanying
supplement can also be ordered. Contact a
Volvo retailer to order.

1 For markets without Owner's Manuals in the center display, a complete printed manual is provided along with the vehicle.

16
 OWNER'S INFORMATION

CAUTION Owner's Manual in the center To open the Owner's Manual, pull down Top
display view in the center display and tap Owner's
The driver is always responsible for operat- manual.
A digital version of the Owner's Manual is
ing the vehicle in a safe manner and adher-
ing to all applicable laws and regulations. It available in the vehicle's center display2. The information in the Owner's Manual can be
is also important that the vehicle is oper- The digital Owner's Manual can be accessed accessed directly via the Owner's Manual
ated, maintained and serviced according to from Top view and in certain cases, the con- start page or via its Top menu.
Volvo's recommendations provided in the textual Owner's Manual can also be accessed
owner's information. from Top view.

If the information in the center display dif-

NOTE
fers from the printed information, the prin-
ted information always takes precedence. The digital Owner's Manual is not available
during driving.

NOTE
OWNER'S MANUAL
Changing languages in the center display
could mean that certain owner's informa-
tion will not comply with national or local
laws and regulations. Do not change to a
language you do not speak well, as it can
be difficult to find your way back through
the menu.

Related information
• Owner's Manual in the center display
(p. 17)
• Owner's manual in mobile devices
Top view with button for Owner's Manual.
(p. 20)
• Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)
• Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21)

2 Available in most markets. }}

17
 OWNER'S INFORMATION

|| Contextual Owner's Manual Related information Navigate in the Owner's Manual in

• Navigate in the Owner's Manual in the the center display
center display (p. 18) The digital Owner's Manual can be accessed
• Navigating in the center display's views from the center display's Top view. The con-
(p. 119) tents are searchable and the sections are
designed to be easy to navigate.
• Download apps (p. 489)

Top view with button for contextual Owner's Manual.

The contextual Owner's Manual is a shortcut
to an article in the Owner's Manual describing
the active function displayed on the screen.
When a contextual Owner's Manual is availa-
ble, it will be shown to the right of Owner's The Owner's Manual is accessed from Top view.
manual in Top view. – To open the Owner's Manual, pull down
Tap the contextual Owner's Manual to open Top view in the center display and tap
an article in the Owner's Manual related to the Owner's manual.
information displayed on the screen. There are a number of ways to find informa-
For example, tap Navigation Manual to open tion in the Owner's Manual. The options can
an article related to navigation. be accessed from the Owner's Manual start
Certain apps in the vehicle only. For downloa- page and from the Top menu.
ded third-party apps, it is e.g. not possible to
access app-specific articles.

18
 OWNER'S INFORMATION

Opening the menu in the Top menu Featured articles 2. Tap a hotspot.
– Tap in the upper list in the Owner's Tap the symbol to go to a > The title of a relevant article will be dis-
Manual. page with links to a selection played.
of useful articles about the
> A menu will open, displaying different 3. Tap the title to open the article.
vehicle's more commonly
options for finding information:
used features and functions. To go back, tap the left arrow.
Start page The articles can also be Favorites
Tap the symbol to return to accessed via categories, but Tap the symbol to go to arti-
the Owner's Manual start have been collected here for quicker access. cles saved as favorites. Tap
page. Tap an article to read it in its entirety. an article to read it in its
Exterior and interior hotspots entirety.
Exterior and interior over-
views of the vehicle. Hot-
Categories spots are provided for certain
Saving or deleting favorite articles
The articles in the Owner's functions, components, etc.
Manual are structured into Tap a hotspot to come to a Save an article as a favorite by tapping the
main and sub-categories. The relevant article. at the upper right when the article is open.
same article may appear in When an article has been saved as a favorite,
several relevant categories in the star symbol will be filled in: .
order to help make them eas- To remove an article from the list of favorites,
ier to find. tap its star again.
1. Tap Categories. Video
> The main categories are listed. Tap the symbol to go to brief
1. Press Exterior or Interior. instructive videos for various
2. Tap a main category ( ). functions in the vehicle.
> Exterior or interior images of the vehicle
> A list of sub-categories ( ) and articles are shown with hotspots. The hotspots
( ) will appear. lead to articles about the corresponding
function, component, etc. Swipe the
3. Tap an article to open it.
screen horizontally to scroll between
To go back, tap the left arrow. the images.

}}

19
 OWNER'S INFORMATION

|| Information Owner's manual in mobile devices The contents are searchable and the sections
Tap the symbol for informa- The Owner's Manual is available as a mobile are designed to be easy to navigate.
tion about the current version app3 and can be downloaded from the App
of the Owner's Manual in Store and Google Play. The app is adapted for
your vehicle and other useful both smartphones and tablets.
information.

Using the search function in the Top

menu
1. Tap in the Owner's Manual upper
menu. A keyboard will appear at the bot-
tom of the screen.
2. Enter a search word, e.g. "seat belt".
> Suggested articles and categories will
be displayed as characters are entered.
3. Tap the article or category to read it.
The Owner's Manual can be
Related information downloaded as a mobile app
• Owner's Manual in the center display from the App Store or Google
(p. 17) Play. This QR code will take The mobile app is available on both App Store and
you directly to the app. You Google Play.
• Using the center display keyboard
can also search for "Volvo
(p. 130) Related information
manual" in the App Store or
• Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21) Google Play. • Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21)
The app contains videos and exterior/interior
images of the vehicle. These images contain
hotspots for various functions, components,
etc., which lead directly to related information.

3 Certain mobile devices.

20
 OWNER'S INFORMATION

Volvo Cars support site Contact Using the Owner's Manual

Volvo Cars' website and support site contain Contact information for customer support and To get to know your new vehicle, read the
additional information about your vehicle. your nearest Volvo retailer are available on the Owner's Manual before driving it for the first
support site. time.
Online support Reading your Owner's Manual is a way to
Go to volvocars.com/support to visit the site. Related information familiarize yourself with new features and
The support site is available in most markets. • Contacting Volvo (p. 26) functions, get advice on how to handle your
The site contains support for e.g. Internet- • Volvo ID (p. 26) vehicle in different situations, and to learn how
based services and functions, Volvo On Call, to take advantage of everything your Volvo has
the navigation system* and apps. Videos and to offer. Pay particular attention to the safety
step-by-step instructions explain various pro- warnings provided in the Owner's Manual.
cedures, such as how to connect the vehicle The intention of this owner's information is to
to the Internet via a cellular phone. explain all of the possible features, functions,
options and accessories included in a Volvo
Downloadable information vehicle. It is not intended as an indication or
Maps guarantee that all of these features, functions
For vehicles equipped with Sensus Navigation and options are included in every vehicle.
maps can be downloaded from the support Some terminology used may not exactly
site. match terminology used in sales, marketing
Mobile apps and advertising materials.
Beginning with model year 2014, the Owner's Volvo continuously works to develop and
Manual is available as an app for certain Volvo improve our products. Modifications can mean
models. The Volvo On Call app can also be that information, descriptions and illustrations
downloaded from the support site. in the Owner's Manual differ from the equip-
Owner's manuals in PDF format ment in the vehicle. We reserve the right to
Owner's Manuals are available for download- make changes without prior notice.
ing in PDF format. Select the vehicle model Do not remove this manual from the vehicle. If
and year to download the desired manual. a problem should occur, you will not have the
necessary information on where and how to
get professional assistance.
© Volvo Car Corporation
}}

* Option/accessory. 21
 OWNER'S INFORMATION

|| Option/accessory Risk of injury White ISO symbols and white text/image on a

In addition to standard equipment, the black or blue warning field and message field.
Owner's Manual also describes options (fac- Used to indicate potential danger. Ignoring a
tory-installed equipment) and certain accesso- warning of this type could result in damage.
ries (extra retrofitted equipment). Information
All, at the time of publication known, options
and accessories are marked with an asterisk:
*.
The equipment described in the Owner's Man-
ual is not available in all vehicles. Vehicles may
be equipped differently depending on market
requirements and national or local laws and
regulations.
Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning field,
For more information on which equipment is white text/image on a black message field.
standard and which is an option or accessory, Used to indicate potential danger. Ignoring a
please contact your Volvo retailer. warning of this type could result in serious
Decals injury or death. White ISO symbols and white text/image on a
There are various types of decals affixed in the Risk of damage black message field.
vehicle to communicate important information
in a clear manner. The importance of these NOTE
decals is explained as follows, in descending The decals shown in the Owner's Manual
order of importance. do not claim to be exact reproductions of
those found in the vehicle. The purpose is
to show approximately how they look and
about where they are located. The informa-
tion that applies for your vehicle in particu-
lar is found on the decal on the vehicle.

22 * Option/accessory.
 OWNER'S INFORMATION

Illustrations, images and video clips The Owner's Manual and the
Illustrations, images and video clips used in environment
the Owner's Manual are sometimes generic The Owner's Manual is printed on paper from
and are intended to provide an overview or an responsibly managed forests.
example of a certain function or feature. They The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)® sym-
may vary depending on equipment level and bol certifies that the paper pulp in the printed
market and may differ from the appearance of Owner's Manual comes from FSC®-certified
your vehicle. forests or other responsibly managed sources.
Related information
• Owner's Manual in the center display
(p. 17)
• Owner's manual in mobile devices (p. 20)
• Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)

Related information
• Drive-E ‒ purer driving pleasure (p. 28)

23
YOUR VOLVO
 YOUR VOLVO

Contacting Volvo Volvo ID When a Volvo ID is registered in the vehicle,

Use the following contact information if you Volvo ID is a personal ID that gives you additional services are available. Multiple
would like to get in touch with Volvo in the access to a range of services using a single Volvo IDs can be used for the same vehicle,
United States or Canada. username and password. and multiple vehicles can be linked to the
In the USA: same Volvo ID.
NOTE
Volvo Car USA, LLC The available services can vary over time Related information
Customer Care Center and depend on equipment level and mar- • Creating and registering a Volvo ID
ket. (p. 27)
1 Volvo Drive,
• Scheduling service and repairs (p. 611)
P.O. Box 914 Examples of services:
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 Volvo On Call-app - check your vehicle
•
1-800-458-1552 using your phone. You can check fuel
level, find the nearest gas station and lock
volvocars.com/us
the vehicle remotely.
In Canada: • Send to Car – send addresses from online
map services directly to the vehicle.
Volvo Car Canada Ltd.
• Send a request for service and repairs
Customer Care Centre directly from the vehicle. The booking will
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 then be completed via email.
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
NOTE
1-800-663-8255
If the username/password for a service
volvocars.com/ca (e.g. Volvo On Call) is changed, the change
will also automatically be applied to other
services.

The creation of a Volvo ID is initiated through

the Volvo On Call app or from the vehicle and
then completed by email.

26
 YOUR VOLVO

Creating and registering a Volvo ID 5. Press the button to create your Volvo ID. Related information
A Volvo ID can be created in two ways. If your 6. An email will be sent to the address you • Volvo ID (p. 26)
Volvo ID was created with the Volvo On Call have provided. Click on the link in the • Download apps (p. 489)
app, the Volvo IDmust also be registered to email to activate your Volvo ID. • Handling system updates via Download
the vehicle to enable access to the Volvo ID > Your Volvo ID is now ready to be used. Center (p. 610)
services.
Registering your Volvo ID to the • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538)
Creating a Volvo ID with the Volvo ID app
vehicle
1. Download the Volvo ID app from
If your Volvo ID was created using the Volvo
Download Center in the center display's
On Call app, follow these steps to register the
App view.
ID to the vehicle:
2. Start the app and register a personal email
1. If you have not already done so, download
address.
the Volvo ID app from Download Center
3. Follow the instructions that will be sent in the center display's App view.
automatically to this email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created and is NOTE
automatically registered to the vehicle.
To download apps the vehicle must be
The Volvo ID services can now be used.
connected to the internet.
Creating a Volvo ID using the Volvo On Call
app1 2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/
1. Download the latest version of the Volvo email address.
On Call app to your phone2.
3. Follow the instructions that will be auto-
2. Choose to create a Volvo ID. matically sent to the email address con-
3. The website for creating a Volvo ID will nected to your Volvo ID.
open. Fill in the requested information. > Your Volvo ID has now been registered
to the vehicle. The Volvo ID services
4. Check the box to accept the terms and
can now be used.
conditions.

1 Vehicles with Volvo On Call.

2 Can be downloaded from e.g. the Apple App Store or Google Play.

* Option/accessory. 27
 YOUR VOLVO

Drive-E ‒ purer driving pleasure continuous environmental refinement of con- Recharge vehicles
Volvo is committed to the well-being of its ventional gasoline-powered internal combus- • If possible, precondition the vehicle with
customers. As a natural part of this commit- tion engines, Volvo is actively looking at the charging cable before driving.
ment, we care about the environment in advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles. If preconditioning is not possible in cold
•
which we all live. Concern for the environ- When you drive a Volvo, you become our part- weather, use the seat and steering wheel
ment means an everyday involvement in ner in the work to lessen the vehicle's impact heating primarily. Avoid heating the entire
reducing our environmental impact. on the environment. To reduce your vehicle's passenger compartment, which reduces
Volvo's environmental activities are based on a environmental impact, you can: the hybrid battery's charge level.
holistic view, which means we consider the
• Maintain proper air pressure in your tires. • Choose the Pure drive mode to help mini-
overall environmental impact of a product
Tests have shown decreased fuel econ- mize electric power consumption.
throughout its complete life cycle. In this con-
text, design, production, product use, and omy with improperly inflated tires. • In hilly terrain, put the gear selector in
recycling are all important considerations. In • Follow the recommended maintenance mode B to utilize the electric motor's
production, Volvo has partly or completely schedule in your Warranty and Service braking function when the accelerator
phased out several chemicals including CFCs, Records Information booklet. pedal is released. This helps charge the
lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and hybrid battery.
• Drive at a constant speed whenever possi-
reduced the number of chemicals used in our ble. Related information
plants 50% since 1991.
• See a trained and qualified Volvo service • Economical driving (p. 453)
Volvo was the first in the world to introduce technician as soon as possible for inspec- Range (p. 454)
•
into production a three-way catalytic converter tion if the check engine (malfunction indi-
with a Lambda sond, now called the heated cator) light illuminates, or stays on after • Starting and stopping preconditioning
oxygen sensor, in 1976. The current version of the vehicle has started. (p. 228)
this highly efficient system reduces emissions Properly dispose of any vehicle-related • The Owner's Manual and the environment
•
of harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the waste such as used motor oil, used batter- (p. 23)
exhaust pipe by approximately 95 - 99% and ies, brake pads, etc. • Air quality (p. 207)
the search to eliminate the remaining emis-
sions continues. Volvo is the only automobile • When cleaning your vehicle, please use
manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo
the air conditioning system of all models as far car care products are formulated to be
back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced elec- environmentally friendly.
tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are
bringing us closer to our goal. In addition to

28
 YOUR VOLVO

IntelliSafe – driver support and • Park Assist Camera* NOTE

safety • Road Sign Information*
Read the individual parts about each sys-
IntelliSafe is Volvo Cars' philosophy regarding • Electronic Stability Control tem to fully understand the functions and
vehicle safety. IntelliSafe consists of a num-
• Roll Stability Control be notified of important warnings.
ber of systems3 that are designed to help
make driving safer, prevent accidents and • Cruise control
protect passengers and other road users. • Adaptive Cruise Control* Related information
• Active high beam (p. 161)
WARNING • Rear Collision Warning
• Safety (p. 44)
The functions are supplementary aids – • Driver Alert Control
they cannot manage all situations in all • Driver support systems (p. 274)
conditions. • All-Wheel Drive (AWD)4
The driver is always responsible for ensur- Prevention
ing that the vehicle is driven in a safe man- IntelliSafe has the following functions
ner and in accordance with applicable traf- designed to help the driver prevent accidents.
fic rules and regulations.
• City Safety
Support • Distance Alert*
IntelliSafe has the following functions • Lane Keeping Aid
designed to help the driver operate the vehicle
more safely. • Collision Avoidance
• Active high beam Protection
IntelliSafe has the following interacting func-
• Tunnel detection
tions to help protect the driver and passengers
• Pilot Assist in certain situations in the event of an acci-
• Cross Traffic Alert* dent.
• Blind Spot Information* • Whiplash Protection System
• Park Assist* • Seat belt with seat belt tensioner
• Park Assist Pilot* • Airbags

3 Some of these systems are standard, while others are options. This may vary depending on market, vehicle model and model year.
4 All Wheel Drive

* Option/accessory. 29
 YOUR VOLVO

Sensus - connection and Sensus provides an intelligent interface and Information when it's needed, where
entertainment Internet connection to the digital world. An it's needed
Sensus makes it possible to use apps and intuitive navigation structure offers access to The vehicle's displays present the right infor-
turn your vehicle into a Wi-Fi hotspot. relevant assistance, information and entertain- mation at the right time. Information is pre-
ment when it is needed, without distracting sented in different displays depending on how
This is Sensus the driver. it should be prioritized by the driver.
Sensus includes all of the solutions in the vehi-
cle related to entertainment, Internet connec-
tion and navigation*, and serves as the user
interface between the driver and the vehicle.
Sensus is what makes communication
between you, the vehicle and the world
around you possible.

30 * Option/accessory.
 YOUR VOLVO

Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritized.
Head-up display* tion and navigation messages*. Road sign Instrument panel
information and incoming phone calls are also
shown in the head-up display. These can be
handled using the right-side steering wheel
keypad or the center display.

The head-up display presents information that The instrument panel displays information
the driver should react to immediately. such as speed, incoming phone calls or the

}}
For example, traffic warnings, speed informa-

* Option/accessory. 31
 YOUR VOLVO

|| track currently playing. It is controlled using Voice control system

the steering wheel keypads. The voice control system ena-
Center display bles the driver to control cer-
tain vehicle functions without
taking their hands off the
wheel. The system can
understand natural speech.
Use voice commands to e.g.
play a song, make a phone call, increase the
temperature in the passenger compartment or
have a text message read aloud.

Related information
• Head-up display* (p. 146)
• Instrument panel (p. 88)
• Center display overview (p. 114)
Many of the vehicle's main functions are con-
trolled from the center display, a touchscreen • Voice Control (p. 149)
that reacts to taps and other gestures. This • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538)
minimizes the number of physical buttons and • Sharing Internet from the vehicle via Wi-Fi
controls needed in the vehicle. The screen can hotspot (tethering) (p. 542)
also be operated while wearing gloves.
The center display is used to control e.g. the
climate and entertainment systems and to
adjust the power seats*. The information pre-
sented in the center display can be handled by
the driver or by someone else in the vehicle.

32 * Option/accessory.
 YOUR VOLVO

Software Updates Data recording trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
So that you as a Volvo customer shall have As part of Volvo's commitment to safety and recorded by the EDR under normal driving
the best possible experience from your car, quality, certain information is recorded regar- conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
Volvo is continuously developing the systems ding vehicle operation, functionality and inci- gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
in the cars and the services that you are dents. However, other parties, such as law
offered. US market only: enforcement, could combine the EDR data
The software in your Volvo will be updated to with the type of personally identifying data
EDR routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
the latest version when the vehicle is serviced
This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data
at an authorized Volvo retailer. With the latest To read data recorded by an EDR, special
Recorder" (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
software update, you can take advantage of equipment is required, and access to the
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
available improvements, including those that vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
came with previous software updates. the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
For more information on available updates and understanding how a vehicle's systems as law enforcement, that have the special
answers to frequently asked questions, visit performed. The EDR is designed to record equipment, can read the information if they
volvocars.com/support. data related to vehicle dynamics and safety have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
systems for a short period of time, typically 30 ASDR
NOTE seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is This vehicle is equipped with an Active Safety
designed to record such data as: Data Recorder (ASDR). This data recorder can
Functionality after updating may vary
How various systems in your vehicle were record information related to the usage of the
depending on market, model, model year •
operating; car, functional errors and active safety
and options.
actuations (e.g. auto brake). The information
• Whether or not the driver and passenger saved is used by technicians for service and
Related information safety belts were buckled/fastened; maintenance to diagnose and repair possible
• Sensus - connection and entertainment • How far (if at all) the driver was faults that has occurred in the vehicle and to
(p. 30) depressing the accelerator and/or brake fulfil certain legal requirements. The registered
• Handling system updates via Download pedal; and, data can also, in congregated form, be used
Center (p. 610) • How fast the vehicle was traveling. for research- and product development –
purposes to continuously improve the safety
These data can help provide a better and quality of Volvo Cars. For more
understanding of the circumstances in which information contact your local Volvo retailer.
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
}}

33
 YOUR VOLVO

|| Canadian market only: dent or near-accident. However, other parties, Volvo will not provide this information to any
such as law enforcement, could combine the third parties without the vehicle owner's con-
This vehicle is equipped with an “Event Data
EDR data with the type of personally identifia- sent. However, national legislation and regula-
Recorder” (EDR). The main purpose of the
ble information that is routinely acquired dur- tions may require Volvo to disclose this type of
EDR is to register and record data in traffic
ing an accident investigation. Special equip- information to law enforcement or other
accidents or accident-like situations, e.g. if an
ment and access to either the vehicle or the authorities that can claim a legal right to the
airbag deploys or if the vehicle hits an obstacle
EDR is required to read this recorded data. information. Special technical equipment,
in the road. This data is recorded in order to
which Volvo and workshops that have entered
help understand how the vehicle's systems In addition to the EDR, the vehicle is equipped
agreements with Volvo have access to, is
perform in these types of situations. The EDR with a number of computers that continuously
required to read and interpret the recorded
is designed to record data related to vehicle control and monitor the vehicle's performance.
data. Volvo is responsible for ensuring that
dynamics and safety systems for a short These computers may record data during nor-
information provided to Volvo in conjunction
period of time, usually 30 seconds or less. mal driving conditions, particularly if they
with service and maintenance is stored and
detect a fault relating to the vehicle's opera-
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record handled securely and in compliance with
tion and functionality or upon activation of the
data in traffic accidents or accident-like situa- applicable legal requirements. For more infor-
vehicle's active driver support functions (e.g.
tions such as: mation, please contact a Volvo retailer.
City Safety or the auto-brake function).
• How the various systems in the vehicle
Some of this recorded data is required by Vehicle Connectivity Module (VCM
performed;
technicians performing service and mainte- High)
• Whether the driver and passenger seat nance in order to diagnose and rectify any Vehicles equipped with VCM High can collect
belts were tightened/buckled; faults that may have occurred in the vehicle. data on the vehicle's safety functions as well
• The driver's use of the accelerator/brake The recorded information is also needed to as other functions in the vehicle. This data is
pedal; enable Volvo to fulfill legal and other regula- collected for product development, quality fol-
How fast the vehicle was moving. tory requirements. Information registered in low-up, safety work and to improve and moni-
•
the vehicle is stored in its computers until the tor the vehicle's quality and its safety func-
This data can help provide a better under- vehicle is serviced or repaired. tions. Data is also collected in order to man-
standing of the circumstances in which traffic age Volvo Cars' warranty commitments and to
accidents and injuries occur. The EDR records In addition to the above, the recorded informa-
comply with legal requirements related to
data only if a non-trivial accident situation tion may be used in aggregated form for
engine emission data.
occurs. EDR does not record any data during research and product development purposes
normal driving conditions. The system also in order to continuously improve the safety
never registers data on who is driving the vehi- and quality of Volvo vehicles.
cle or the geographical location of the acci-

34
 YOUR VOLVO

NOTE Terms and Conditions for Services Customer Privacy Policy

Volvo offers services that help enhance the Volvo respects and safeguards the personal
When collecting data, Volvo may use a
vehicle's safety and comfort. privacy of everyone who visits our websites.
small portion of the vehicle's data plan, up
These services comprise everything from This policy refers to the handling of customer
to 10 MB a month.
assistance in emergencies to navigation and data and personal information. The purpose is
various maintenance services. to give current, past and potential customers a
Related information general understanding of:
Before using the services, it is important to
• Contacting Volvo (p. 26)
read support information about terms and • The circumstances in which we collect
• Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 39) conditions for the services at volvocars.com. and process your personal data.
• The types of personal data we collect.
Related information
• Customer Privacy Policy (p. 35) • Why we collect your personal data.
• How we process your personal data.
For more information on the policy, search for
support information on volvocars.com.

Related information
• Terms of use and data sharing (p. 544)
• Terms and Conditions for Services (p. 35)
• Data recording (p. 33)

35
 YOUR VOLVO

Important information on NOTE WARNING

accessories and extra equipment
Do not export your Volvo to another coun- Certain components of this vehicle such as
Incorrectly connected or installed accessories air bag modules, seat belt tensioners,
try before investigating that country's
or extra equipment may have an adverse adaptive steering columns, and button cell
applicable safety and exhaust emission
effect on the vehicle's electronics. batteries may contain Perchlorate material.
requirements. In some cases it may be dif-
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners Special handling may apply for service or
ficult or impossible to comply with these vehicle end of life disposal.
use only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories,
requirements. Modifications to the emis-
and that accessory installations be performed See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
sion control system(s) may render your
only by a trained and qualified Volvo service perchlorate.
Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in
technician. Certain accessories only work
the U.S., Canada and other countries.
when the associated software is installed in
the vehicle's computer system. WARNING
WARNING The driver is always responsible for operat-
The equipment described in the Owner's Man- ing the vehicle in a safe manner and for
ual is not available in all vehicles. Vehicles may CALIFORNIA proposition 65 complying with current statutes and regu-
be equipped differently depending on market Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, lations.
requirements and national or local laws and and certain vehicle components contain or It is also essential to maintain and service
regulations. emit chemicals known to the state of Cali- the vehicle according to Volvo's recom-
fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or mendations as stated in the owner's infor-
Optional or accessory equipment may not be other reproductive harm. In addition, cer- mation and the service and warranty book-
available in all countries or markets. Please tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain let.
note that some vehicles may be equipped dif- products of component wear contain or
ferently, depending on special legal require- emit chemicals known to the State of Cali- If the on-board information differs from the
ments. For more information on which equip- fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or printed owner's manual, the printed infor-
other reproductive harm. mation always takes precedence.
ment is standard and which is an option or
accessory, please contact your Volvo retailer.
Related information
• Accessory installation (p. 37)
• Connecting equipment to the vehicle's
data link connector (p. 37)
• Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21)

36
 YOUR VOLVO

Accessory installation information. Volvo assumes no responsi- Connecting equipment to the

We strongly recommend that Volvo owners bility for death, injury, or expenses that vehicle's data link connector
install only genuine, Volvo-approved accesso- may result from the installation of non- Incorrectly connected or installed software or
ries, and that accessory installations be per- genuine accessories. diagnostic tools may have an adverse effect
formed only by a trained and qualified Volvo on the vehicle's electronics.
Related information
service technician. Certain functions only We strongly recommend that Volvo owners
• Important information on accessories and
work when the associated software is instal- use only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories,
extra equipment (p. 36)
led in the vehicle's computer system. and that accessory installations be performed
• Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to only by a trained and qualified Volvo service
ensure compatibility with the perform- technician. Certain accessories only work
ance, safety, and emission systems in your when the associated software is installed in
vehicle. Additionally, a trained and quali- the vehicle's computer system.
fied Volvo service technician knows where
accessories may and may not be safely
installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please
consult a trained and qualified Volvo serv-
ice technician before installing any acces-
sory in or on your vehicle.
• Accessories that have not been approved
by Volvo may or may not be specifically
tested for compatibility with your vehicle.
• Any of your vehicle's performance and
safety systems could be adversely affec-
ted if you install accessories that Volvo
has not tested, or if you allow accessories On-board Diagnostic (OBDII) socket under the dash-
to be installed by someone unfamiliar with board on the driver's side.
your vehicle.
• Damage caused by unapproved or
improperly installed accessories may not
be covered by your new vehicle warranty.
See your Warranty and Service Records

}}
Information booklet for more warranty

37
 YOUR VOLVO

|| NOTE This device complies with Industry Canada Technician certification

license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo
Volvo Cars takes no responsibility for the subject to the following two conditions: supports certification by the National Insti-
consequences of connecting non-author-
(1) This device may not cause interference, and tute for Automotive Service Excellence
ized equipment to the On-board
(A.S.E.).
Diagnostic (OBDII) socket. This socket (2) this device must accept any interference Certified technicians have demonstrated a
should only be used by a trained and quali- received, including interference that may high degree of competence in specific areas.
fied Volvo service technician. cause undesired operation. Besides passing exams, each technician must
Related information also have worked in the field for two or more
Type approval Important information on accessories and years before a certificate is issued. These pro-
USA
•
extra equipment (p. 36) fessional technicians are best able to analyze
FCC ID: 2AGKKACUII-06 vehicle problems and perform the necessary
maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC peak operating condition.
rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: Recharge vehicles
Technicians performing work on a vehicle with
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- electrification should also have the necessary
ence, and training and specialized certification required
(2) this device must accept any interference for performing repairs and/or maintenance on
received, including interference that may a vehicle with electrification.
cause undesired operation.
WARNING
WARNING A number of electrical components in
Changes or modifications not expressly Recharge vehicles use high-voltage current
approved by the party responsible for com- and can be extremely dangerous if handled
pliance could void the user's authority to incorrectly. These components and any
operate the equipment. orange wiring in the vehicle may only be
handled by trained and qualified Volvo
service technicians.
Canada
IC: 20839-ACUII06

38
 YOUR VOLVO

Viewing the Vehicle Identification Volvo Structural Parts Statement

Number (VIN) Volvo is one of the leading companies for car
When contacting a Volvo retailer, about e.g. safety.
your Volvo On Call subscription, your Vehicle Volvo engineers and manufactures vehicles
Identification Number (VIN5) may be needed. designed to help protect vehicle occupants in
1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top the event of a collision.
view. Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of a
2. Proceed to System System collision. This energy absorption system
including, but not limited to, structural compo-
Information Vehicle Identification
nents such as bumper reinforcement bars,
Number.
bumper energy absorbers, frames, rails, fender
> The vehicle identification number will aprons, A-pillars, B-pillars and body panels
be displayed. The VIN has a similar location on all models.
must work together to maintain cabin integrity
and protect the vehicle occupants.
The VIN can also be found:
The supplemental restraint system including
• on the first page of the Warranty and
but not limited to air bags, side curtain air
Service Records Information booklet
bags, and deployment sensors work together
• on the vehicle's registration card with the above components to provide proper
• by looking at the dashboard through the timing for air bag deployment.
vehicle's windshield. Due to the above, Volvo Car USA does not
support the use of aftermarket, alternative or
anything other than original Volvo parts for
collision repair.
Volvo Car USA also recommends using Volvo-
approved replacement glass. The use of after-
market glass, particularly a windshield, can
have an adverse effect on collision avoidance
and advanced lighting systems.

5 Vehicle Identification Number }}

39
 YOUR VOLVO

|| In addition Volvo does not support the use or Change of market when importing NOTE
re-use of structural components from an exist- or relocating
ing vehicle that has been previously damaged. Visit an authorized Volvo retailer if you
If you import a vehicle or move to another
Although these parts may appear equivalent, it have imported or relocated with your vehi-
country, it is important that you register the
is difficult to tell if the parts have been previ- cle to a new country.
vehicle in the new market to help ensure that
ously replaced with non-OE parts or if the part online services work correctly, that the vehi- Available services may vary depending on
has been damaged as a result of a prior colli- cle meets local laws and regulations, etc. market and vehicle model.
sion. The quality of these used parts may also
have been affected due to environmental Visit an authorized Volvo retailer
exposure. Visit an authorized Volvo retailer for assistance NOTE
registering the vehicle in the new market. If the vehicle is exported to another market,
Related information
If you do not do this then you may experience Volvo is not responsible for any adapta-
• Data recording (p. 33)
that apps, Volvo On Call6, software downloads tions to the vehicle in order to meet appli-
and other online services are affected and do cable requirements or laws in the country
not work correctly. of import. For more information, see the
Warranty and Service Records Information
Creating a new Volvo ID in your new home booklet or contact your Volvo workshop.
market
When you relocate to another country you
should create a Volvo ID in the new country.
Related information
• Scheduling service and repairs (p. 611)
If you have already created a Volvo ID in
another country and want to use the same
email address, you must first delete your Volvo
ID in the region you originally created it. You
can also create a new Volvo ID with another
email address.
For vehicles with Volvo On Call6
Download the Volvo On Call app from the
country the vehicle will be used in and link the
app to your vehicle.

6 Applicable only to markets that have access to Volvo On Call.

40
 YOUR VOLVO

Driver distraction WARNING

A driver has a responsibility to do everything
• Never use a hand-held cellular tele-
possible to ensure his or her own safety and
phone while driving. Some jurisdictions
the safety of passengers in the vehicle and
prohibit cellular telephone use by a
others sharing the roadway. Part of this
driver while the vehicle is moving.
responsibility is avoiding distractions, includ-
ing performing activities that are not directly • If your vehicle is equipped with a navi-
related to controlling the vehicle in the driving gation system, set and make changes
environment. to your travel itinerary only with the
Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with vehicle parked.
feature-rich entertainment and communica- • Never program your audio system
tion systems. These include hands-free cellular while the vehicle is moving. Program
telephones, navigation systems, and multipur- radio presets with the vehicle parked,
pose audio systems. You may also own other and use your programmed presets to
portable electronic devices for your own con- make radio use quicker and simpler.
venience. When used properly and safely, they
• Never use portable computers or per-
enrich the driving experience. Improperly used,
sonal digital assistants while the vehi-
any of these could cause a distraction.
cle is moving.
For all of these systems, we want to provide
the following warning that reflects the strong Related information
Volvo concern for your safety. Never use these
• Audio, media and Internet (p. 486)
devices or any feature of your vehicle in a way
that distracts you from the task of driving
safely. Distraction can lead to a serious acci-
dent. In addition to this general warning, we
offer the following guidance regarding specific
new features that may be found in your vehi-
cle:

41
SAFETY
 SAFETY

Safety WARNING • Airbags (p. 55)

The vehicle is equipped with a number of • Whiplash Protection System (p. 48)
If the warning symbol remains illuminated
safety systems that work together to help or switches on while driving and the mes- Safety mode (p. 64)
•
protect the vehicle's driver and passengers in sage SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to
the event of an accident. • Child safety (p. 66)
workshop is displayed in the instrument
The vehicle is equipped with a number of sen- panel, this indicates that something in the
sors that may react in the event of an accident safety system is not functioning properly.
and activate different safety systems, such as Volvo recommends contacting an author-
the airbag system and seat belt tensioners. ized Volvo workshop for repairs as soon as
Depending on the specific conditions of the possible.
accident, e.g. collisions at certain angles, over-
turning or swerving, the systems react differ- WARNING
ently to help provide good protection.
Never attempt to alter or repair any of the
There are also mechanical safety systems vehicle's safety systems yourself. Incor-
such as the Whiplash Protection System. The rectly performed repairs to any system
vehicle is also built so that a large part of the could impair function and lead to serious
force of a collision is distributed to the vehi- injury. Volvo recommends contacting an
authorized Volvo workshop.
cle's members, pillars, floor, roof and other
parts of the body.
If this dedicated warning symbol is
After an accident, the vehicle's safety mode not functioning, the general warning
may be activated if any important function in symbol will illuminate instead and
the vehicle has been damaged. the same message will be displayed
Warning symbol in the instrument in the instrument panel.
panel Related information
The warning symbol in the instru- • Safety during pregnancy (p. 45)
ment panel illuminates when the
vehicle's electrical system is in igni- • Occupant safety (p. 45)
tion mode II. The symbol will go out • Reporting safety defects (p. 46)
after approx. 6 seconds if no faults are • Recall information (p. 47)
detected in the vehicle's safety systems.
• Seat belts (p. 49)

44
 SAFETY

Safety during pregnancy position that allows them to retain full control Occupant safety
It is important that seat belts are worn cor- of the vehicle (which means they should be Safety is Volvo's cornerstone.
rectly during pregnancy and that pregnant able to easily reach the steering wheel and
drivers adjust their seating position accord- foot pedals). Try to maintain as much distance Volvo's concern for safety
ingly. as possible between the stomach and the Our concern for safety dates back to 1927
steering wheel. when the first Volvo rolled off the production
Seat belt line. Three-point seat belts (a Volvo invention),
Related information safety cages, and energy-absorbing impact
• Safety (p. 44) zones were designed into Volvo vehicles long
• Seat belts (p. 49) before it was fashionable or required by gov-
Manual front seats (p. 188) ernment regulation.
•
• Power* front seats (p. 189) We will not compromise our commitment to
safety. We continue to seek out new safety
features and to refine those already in our
vehicles. You can help. We would appreciate
hearing your suggestions about improving
automobile safety. We also want to know if
you ever have a safety concern with your vehi-
cle. Call us in the U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or
The seat belt should fit closely against the in Canada at: 1-800-663-8255.
shoulder, with the diagonal section between
the breasts and to the side of the stomach.
The lap section of the seat belt should lie flat
over the thighs and as far as possible under
the stomach. Never let it ride upward. Remove
unnecessary slack and make sure the seat belt
fits as close as possible to the body. Make
sure there are no twists in the seat belt.

Seating position
As pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust the seat and steering wheel to a
}}

* Option/accessory. 45
 SAFETY

|| Occupant safety reminders Related information Reporting safety defects

How safely you drive doesn't depend on how • Safety (p. 44) The following information will help you report
old you are but rather on: • Reporting safety defects (p. 46) any perceived safety-related defects in your
• How well you see. vehicle.
• Recall information (p. 47)
• Your ability to concentrate. Reporting safety defects in the U.S.
• How quickly you make decisions under If you believe that your vehicle has a
stress to avoid an accident. defect which could cause a crash or
The following suggestions are intended to could cause injury or death, you
help you cope with the ever changing traffic should immediately inform the
environment.
National Highway Traffic Safety
• Never drink and drive. Administration (NHTSA) in addition
• If you are taking any medication, consult to notifying Volvo Car USA, LLC. If
your physician about its potential effects
NHTSA receives similar complaints,
on your driving abilities.
it may open an investigation, and if it
• Take a driver-retraining course.
finds that a safety defect exists in a
• Have your eyes checked regularly.
group of vehicles, it may order a
• Keep your windshield and headlights recall and remedy campaign. How-
clean.
ever, NHTSA cannot become
• Replace wiper blades when they start to
involved in individual problems
leave streaks.
between you, your retailer, or Volvo
• Take into account the traffic, road, and
weather conditions, particularly with
Car USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA,
regard to stopping distance. you may either call the Auto Safety
• Never text while driving. Hotline tollfree at
• Refrain from using or minimize the use of 1-888-327-4236
a cell phone while driving.

46
 SAFETY

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to: Reporting safety defects in Canada Recall information
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans- If you believe your vehicle has a defect that On our website, click the "Owner" tab in the
could cause a crash or could cause injury or upper left-hand side of the screen and then
portation, Washington D.C. 20590. death, you should immediately inform Trans- click on the heading "Recall Information".
You can also obtain other informa- port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Car Enter the vehicle identification number (VIN),
tion about motor vehicle safety from Canada Ltd. which can be found at the bottom of the wind-
http://www.safercar.gov, where you Transport Canada can be contacted at: shield. If your vehicle has any open Recalls,
1-800-333-0510 they will be displayed on this page.
can also enter your vehicle's VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number) to Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500 You can also enter the Vehicle Identification
Number in the search field on the National
see if it has any open recalls. Fax: 1-819-994-3372 Highway Traffic Safety Administration's
Volvo strongly recommends that if Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road (NHTSA) website at: www.nhtsa.gov.
your vehicle is covered under a serv- Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z Volvo customers in Canada
ice campaign, safety or emission 0A1 For any questions regarding open recalls for
recall or similar action, it should be your vehicle, please contact your authorized
Related information
Volvo retailer. If your retailer is unable to
completed as soon as possible. • Safety (p. 44)
answer your questions, please contact Volvo
Please check with your local retailer • Occupant safety (p. 45) Customer Relations at 800-663-8255, Mon-
or Volvo Car USA, LLC if your vehicle • Recall information (p. 47) day through Friday, 8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M.
is covered under these conditions. • Viewing the Vehicle Identification Number
EST or volvocars.com/ca. You may also write
us at:
NHTSA can be reached at: (VIN) (p. 39)
Volvo Car Canada Ltd.
Internet: Customer Care Centre
http://www.nhtsa.gov 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Telephone: Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
1-888-DASH-2-DOT www.tc.gc.ca
(1-888-327-4236).

}}

47
 SAFETY

|| Related information Whiplash Protection System WARNING

• Safety (p. 44) The Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) is
Do not attempt to alter or repair the seat or
• Reporting safety defects (p. 46) designed to help reduce the risk of whiplash- WHIPS on your own. Volvo recommends
type injuries. The system consists of energy contacting an authorized Volvo workshop.
• Occupant safety (p. 45)
absorbing backrests and seat cushions as
If the front seats have been subjected to
well as specially designed head restraints in
severe stress, e.g. in a collision, the seats
the front seats. must be replaced. Even if the seats appear
WHIPS is activated in the event of a rear-end undamaged, some of their protective prop-
collision and adapted to the angle and speed erties may have been lost.
of the collision and to the characteristics of
the colliding vehicle.
When WHIPS is activated, the front seat
backrests move rearward and the seat cush-
ions move downward to change the seating
positions of the driver and front seat passen-
ger. This movement helps absorb some of the
forces that could result in whiplash.

WARNING
WHIPS is a supplement to the seat belt.
Always wear your seat belt.
Do not place any objects on the floor behind or under
the front seats or on the rear seat that could prevent
WHIPS from functioning correctly.

48
 SAFETY

WARNING • Power* front seats (p. 189) Seat belts

• Rear Collision Warning* (p. 347) Seat belts should always be worn by all occu-
Do not squeeze box-like cargo between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat back- pants in your vehicle. Children should be
rest. properly restrained using an infant seat,
adjustable child seat or booster cushion as
If the rear seat backrests are folded down,
determined by age, weight and height.
cargo must be secured to prevent it from
sliding forward against the front seat back- Most states and provinces make it mandatory
rests in the event of a collision. for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.

Seat belt maintenance

WARNING Check periodically that the seat belts are in
good condition. Use water and a mild deter-
If a rear seat backrest is folded down or if a
rear-facing child restraint is being used in gent for cleaning. Check the seat belt mecha-
the rear seat, the seat in front must be nism's function as follows: attach the seat belt
moved forward so that it does not come and pull rapidly on the strap.
into contact with the backrest or child
restraint.

Seating position
For WHIPS to provide good protection, the
driver and passenger must be seated correctly
and the system's function must not be impe-
ded in any way.
Set the front seat to the correct seating posi-
tion before starting to drive.
The driver and the front seat passenger should
sit in the center of the seat with their heads as
close as possible to the head restraints.

Related information
• Safety (p. 44)

}}
• Manual front seats (p. 188)

* Option/accessory. 49
 SAFETY

|| WARNING Buckling and unbuckling seat belts Buckling seat belts

Make sure that all passengers have buckled 1. Pull out the belt slowly and make sure it is
• Never repair the belt yourself. Repairs not twisted or damaged.
their seat belts before starting to drive.
should only be performed by a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
NOTE
• Any device used to induce slack into
the shoulder belt portion of the three- The seat belt is equipped with a seat belt
point belt system will have a detrimen- retractor that will lock up in the following
tal effect on the amount of protection situations:
available in the event of a collision. • if the belt is pulled out too quickly.
• The seat back should not be tilted too • during braking and acceleration.
far back. The shoulder belt must be
• if the vehicle is leaning excessively.
taut in order to function properly.
• when driving in turns.
• Do not use any type of child restraint in
the front passenger seat. We recom- • if the automatic locking retractor/emer-
mend that children who have outgrown gency locking retractor (ALR/ELR) is
these devices sit in the rear seat with activated. Each seat belt (except for the
the seat belt properly fastened. driver's) is equipped with an ALR func-
tion, which is designed to keep the seat
belt taut when installing a child
Related information restraint. ALR is activated when the seat
• Safety (p. 44) belt is pulled out as far as possible. If
• Seat belt tensioners (p. 52) this is done, a sound from the seat belt
• Buckling and unbuckling seat belts retractor will be audible, which is nor-
(p. 50) mal. The seat belt can now only be fed
into the retractor, not pulled out. This
• Door and seat belt reminders (p. 54) function is automatically disabled when
the seat belt is unbuckled and fully
retracted.

50
 SAFETY

2. Buckle the seat belt by pushing the latch 3. The height of the seat belts in the front
plate into the receptacle. seats can be adjusted.
> A distinct "click" indicates that the belt
is locked into place.

WARNING
Always insert the seat belt latch plate into
the belt buckle on the correct side. Failure
to do so could cause the seat belts and belt
buckles to malfunction in a collision. There
is a risk of serious injury.

The belt should be positioned closely over the shoul-

der (against the collarbone, not down over the arm).
4. Tighten the lap section of the seat belt
Press the button on the seat belt holder over the hips by pulling the diagonal sec-
and move the belt up or down. tion upward toward the shoulder.
Position the belt as high as possible with-
out it chafing against the neck.

The lap section of the seat belt should be positioned

low on the hips (not against the abdomen).

}}

51
 SAFETY

|| WARNING Related information Seat belt tensioners

• Seat belts (p. 49) The vehicle is equipped with standard and
Never use a seat belt for more than one
occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion • Seat belt tensioners (p. 52) electric* seat belt tensioners that can help
of the belt under the arm, behind the back tension the seat belt in a critical situation or
• Door and seat belt reminders (p. 54)
or otherwise out of position. Such use collision.
could cause injury in the event of an acci-
dent. As seat belts lose much of their Standard seat belt tensioners
strength when exposed to violent stretch- All seat belts are equipped with a standard
ing, they should be replaced after any colli- seat belt tensioner.
sion, even if they appear to be undamaged.
In a collision of sufficiently violent force, the
seat belt tensioners will tension the seat belts
WARNING in order to more effectively restrain the occu-
Do not use clips or fasten the belts around pants.
hooks or other parts of the interior. This will
prevent the seat belt from fitting properly. Electric seat belt tensioners*
The driver's and front passenger's seat belts
are equipped with electric seat belt tensioners.
WARNING
The seat belt tensioners interact and can be
Never damage the seat belts and never activated in conjunction with the City Safety
insert any foreign objects into the belt and Rear Collision Warning driver support sys-
buckle. This may cause the seat belts and tems. In critical situations, such as if the vehi-
belt buckles to malfunction in a collision.
There is a risk of serious injury. cle brakes suddenly, begins to skid or runs off
the road (e.g if the vehicle rolls into a ditch,
lifts off the ground or hits an obstacle in the
Unbuckling seat belts road), or if there is a risk of collision, the seat
1. Press the red button on the seat belt belts can be pulled taut by the seat belt ten-
receptacle and make sure the seat belt sioner's electric motor.
retracts fully into the retractor slot.
The electric seat belt tensioner helps to posi-
2. If it does not fully retract, guide the belt tion the occupant more effectively in the seat,
manually into the slot and make sure it which reduces the risk of the occupant strik-
does not hang loose. ing the interior of the passenger compartment

52 * Option/accessory.
 SAFETY

and improves the effect of other safety sys- • Resetting the electric seat belt tensioners* Resetting the electric seat belt
tems such as the airbags. (p. 53) tensioners*
When a critical situation has passed, the seat • City Safety™ (p. 327) The electric seat belt tensioners are designed
belt and the electric seat belt tensioner are • Rear Collision Warning* (p. 347) to be reset automatically, but if the seat belt
reset automatically. However, they can also be remains taut it can be reset manually.
reset manually. 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
2. Unbuckle the seat belt and then rebuckle
CAUTION it.
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the > The seat belt and the electric seat belt
passenger-side electric seat belt tensioner tensioner will be reset.
may also be deactivated.
WARNING
WARNING Never attempt to alter or repair the seat
belt on your own. Volvo recommends con-
Never attempt to alter or repair the seat tacting an authorized Volvo workshop.
belt on your own. Volvo recommends con-
tacting an authorized Volvo workshop. If the seat belt has been exposed to
extreme forces, e.g. in conjunction with a
If the seat belt has been exposed to collision, the entire seat belt must be
extreme forces, e.g. in conjunction with a replaced. Even if the seat belt appears
collision, the entire seat belt must be undamaged, some of its protective proper-
replaced. Even if the seat belt appears ties may have been lost. Also replace the
undamaged, some of its protective proper- seat belt if it is worn or damaged. The new
ties may have been lost. Also replace the seat belt must be type approved and
seat belt if it is worn or damaged. The new intended for the same seating position as
seat belt must be type approved and the replaced seat belt.
intended for the same seating position as
the replaced seat belt.
Related information
• Seat belt tensioners (p. 52)
Related information
• Seat belts (p. 49) • Seat belts (p. 49)

• Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 50)

* Option/accessory. 53
 SAFETY

Door and seat belt reminders Seat belt reminder Rear seat
This system is intended to remind occupants The rear seat belt reminder has two functions:
to buckle their seat belts and to alert the • To indicate which seat belts are buckled in
driver if a door, hood or other opening (trunk, the rear seats. This will also be displayed
sunroof, etc.) is open. in an instrument panel graphic.
Graphics in the instrument panel • To provide audio and visual reminders if
any seat belt in the rear seat is removed
while the vehicle is in motion. The
reminder will stop when the seat belt has
been rebuckled.

Door/hood/tailgate and fuel filler door

reminder
Reminder light in ceiling console.
If the hood, tailgate, fuel filler door or any door
A seat belt reminder light illuminates in the is not properly closed, this will be indicated by
ceiling console and a warning symbol is dis- a graphic in the instrument panel. Stop the
played in the instrument panel. vehicle safely and close the open door, hood,
The audible reminder varies depending on the etc.
Graphics in the instrument panel with various types vehicle's speed, driving time and distance If the vehicle is moving at a speed
of warnings. The warning colors for the doors/tail- driven. under approx. 10 km/h (6 mph), the
gate vary depending on the vehicle's speed. information symbol will illuminate in
A seat belt status graphic in the instrument
The instrument panel graphic shows the seats panel indicates when the driver's or a pas- the instrument panel.
where seat belts are buckled and not buckled. senger's seat belt is buckled or unbuckled. If the vehicle is moving at a speed
The same graphic also indicates if the hood, Child seats are not included in the seat belt above approx. 10 km/h (6 mph), the
tailgate, fuel filler door or any door is open. reminder system. warning symbol will illuminate in the
instrument panel.
Confirm the graphic by briefly pressing the O Front seats
button on the right-side steering wheel key- An audible signal and an indicator light remind Related information
pad. unbuckled occupants to fasten their seat • Seat belts (p. 49)
belts. • Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 50)

54
 SAFETY

Airbags WARNING • Inflatable curtain (p. 63)

The vehicle is equipped with airbags and
If your vehicle has become water-damaged
inflatable curtains for the driver and passen- in any way (e.g., soaked floor mats/stand-
gers. ing water on the floor of the vehicle), do
WARNING not attempt to start the engine. This may
cause airbag deployment, which could
• If the airbag warning light stays on result in serious injury. Volvo recommends
after the engine has started or if it illu- towing the vehicle directly to an authorized
minates while you are driving, have the Volvo workshop.
vehicle inspected by a trained and Before attempting to tow the vehicle:
qualified Volvo service technician as
soon as possible. 1. Switch off the ignition for at least 10
minutes and disconnect the battery.
• Never attempt to alter or repair any of
the vehicle's safety systems yourself. 2. Follow the instructions for manually
Incorrectly performed repairs to any overriding the shiftlock system.
system could impair function and lead
to serious injury. All work on these sys- Deployed airbags
tems should be performed by a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician. WARNING
If any of the airbags have deployed:
• Do not attempt to drive the vehicle.
Have it towed to an authorized work-
shop.
• If necessary, seek medical attention.

Related information
• Safety (p. 44)
• Driver/passenger side front airbags
(p. 56)
• Side airbags (p. 62)

55
 SAFETY

Driver/passenger side front NOTE The front airbag system

airbags The front airbag system includes gas genera-
The sensors react differently depending on tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera-
As a supplement to the seat belts, the vehicle
the circumstances of the accident and tion sensors that activate the gas generators,
is equipped with driver and passenger side
whether or not the seat belt is used. This causing the airbags to be inflated with nitro-
front airbags.
applies to all belt positions. gen gas.
There may therefore be accident situations As the movement of the seats' occupants
in which only one (or none) of the airbags compresses the airbags, some of the gas is
are deployed. The sensors monitor the expelled at a controlled rate to provide better
impact of the collision and react accord- cushioning. The belt tensioners minimize slack
ingly to deploy one, several or no airbags. in the seat belts and are activated for occu-
pants wearing their seat belts. The entire proc-
ess, from inflation to deflation of the airbag,
WARNING
occurs within tenths of a second.
The seat belt and the airbag work together.
If the seat belt is not used or is used incor- The location of the front airbags is indicated
rectly, the airbag may not provide the by SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering
intended protection in a collision. wheel pad and above the glove compartment,
Driver/passenger side front airbags.
To help prevent injury in the event the air- and by decals on both sun visors and on the
In a frontal collision, the airbags help protect bag is deployed, passengers should sit as front and far right side of the dash.
the driver's and passenger's head, neck, face upright as possible, with their feet on the
and chest and the driver's knees and legs. The driver's side front airbag is folded and
floor and their backs against the seat back-
rest. located in the steering wheel hub.
A collision of a sufficiently violent force will
trigger the sensors and one or more airbags The knee airbag is folded on the underside of
will inflate. The airbag helps cushion the initial the dashboard on the driver's side. The text
WARNING AIRBAG is embossed on the panel.
impact of the collision for the passenger. The
Volvo recommends contacting an author-
airbag deflates when compressed by the colli- ized Volvo workshop for repairs. Incorrectly The passenger's side front airbag is folded
sion. A small amount of powder will also be performed repairs to the airbag system behind a panel located above the glove com-
released from the airbag. This may appear to could impair function and lead to serious partment.
be smoke and is normal. The entire process, injury.
from inflation to deflation of the airbag, occurs
within tenths of a second.

56
 SAFETY

WARNING deploy in certain non-frontal collisions NOTE

where rapid deceleration occurs.
• The airbags in the vehicle are designed • Deployment of front airbags occurs
• The airbag system's sensors, which trigger
to be a SUPPLEMENT to-not a only one time during an accident. In a
the front airbags, are designed to deter-
replacement for-the three-point seat collision where deployment occurs, the
mine if the collision is powerful enough to
belts. For maximum protection, wear airbags and seat belt tensioners acti-
activate the belt tensioners and/or the air-
seat belts at all times. Be aware that no vate. Some noise occurs and a small
bags.
system can prevent all possible injuries amount of powder is released. The
that may occur in an accident. However, not all frontal collisions activate the release of the powder may appear as
front airbags. smoke-like matter. This is a normal
• Never drive with your hands on the
steering wheel pad/airbag housing. • If the collision involves a nonrigid object characteristic and does not indicate
(e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed fire.
• The front airbags are designed to help
prevent serious injury. Deployment object at a low speed, the front airbags • Volvo's front airbags use special sen-
occurs very quickly and with considera- will not necessarily deploy. sors that are integrated with the front
ble force. During normal deployment • Front airbags do not normally deploy in a seat buckles. The point at which the
and depending on variables such as side impact collision, in a collision from airbag deploys is determined by
seating position, one may experience the rear or in a rollover situation. whether or not the seat belt is being
abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other used, as well as the severity of the col-
• The amount of damage to the bodywork lision.
injuries as a result of deployment of does not reliably indicate if the airbags
one or both of the airbags. should have deployed or not. • Collisions can occur where only one of
• When installing any accessory equip- the airbags deploys. If the impact is
ment, make sure that the front airbag less severe, but severe enough to pres-
system is not damaged. Any interfer- ent a clear injury risk, the airbags are
ence in the system could cause mal- triggered at partial capacity. If the
function. impact is more severe, the airbags are
triggered at full capacity.

Front airbag deployment

• The front airbags are designed to deploy
during certain frontal or front-angular colli-
sions, impacts, or decelerations, depend-
ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and
object impacted. The airbags may also
}}

57
 SAFETY

|| WARNING 1-800-458-1552

• Do not use child safety seats or child www.volvocars.com/us

booster cushions/backrests in the front In Canada
passenger's seat. We also recommend
Volvo Car Canada Ltd.
that occupants under 140 cm (4 feet
7 inches) in height who have outgrown Customer Care Centre
these devices sit in the rear seat with
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
the seat belt fastened. See also the
Occupant Weight Sensor information. Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
• Never drive with the airbags deployed. 1-800-663-8255
The fact that they hang out can impair
www.volvocars.com/ca
the steering of your vehicle. Other Passenger's side airbag decal.
safety systems can also be damaged. Airbag decals
• The smoke and dust formed when the WARNING
airbags are deployed can cause skin Children must never be allowed in the
•
and eye irritation in the event of pro- front passenger's seat.
longed exposure.
• Occupants in the front passenger's
seat must never sit on the edge of the
Should you have questions about any compo- seat, sit leaning toward the instrument
nent in the SRS system, please contact a panel or otherwise sit out of position.
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
or Volvo customer support: • The occupant's back must be as
upright as comfort allows and be
In the United States against the seat back with the seat belt
Volvo Car USA, LLC properly fastened.
Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors. • Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on
Customer Care Center
the dash, seat or out of the window.
1 Volvo Drive
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

58
 SAFETY

WARNING Occupant weight sensor of a properly seated occupant and determine if

The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is the passenger's side front airbag should be
• No objects or accessory equipment, enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not
designed to meet the regulatory require-
e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed inflate).
ments of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
on, attached to, or installed near the air
Standard (FMVSS) 208 and is designed to The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas-
bag cover (the area above the glove
disable (will not inflate) the passenger's side senger's side front airbag when:
compartment) or the area affected by
front airbag under certain conditions.
airbag deployment. • the front passenger's seat is unoccupied,
• There should be no loose articles, such or has small/medium objects in the front
as coffee cups on the floor, seat, or seat,
dashboard area. • the system determines that an infant is
• Never try to open the airbag cover on present in a rear-facing infant seat that is
the steering wheel or the passenger's installed according to the manufacturer's
side dashboard. This should only be instructions,
done by a trained and qualified Volvo • the system determines that a small child is
service technician. present in a forward-facing child restraint
• Failure to follow these instructions can that is installed according to the manufac-
result in injury to the vehicle's occu- turer's instructions,
pants. • the system determines that a small child is
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light
present in a booster seat,
Related information Disabling the passenger's side front • a child or a small person occupies the
• Airbags (p. 55) airbag front passenger's seat.
• Occupant weight sensor (p. 59) Volvo recommends that ALL occupants The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
(adults and children) shorter than 140 cm indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay
(4 feet 7 inches) be seated in the back seat of on to remind you that the passenger's side
any vehicle with a front passenger side airbag front airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER
and be properly restrained for their size and AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is located in the
weight. overhead console, near the base of the rear-
The OWS works with sensors that are part of view mirror.
the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence
}}

59
 SAFETY

|| NOTE WARNING Passeng- OWS indi- Passenger's

When the ignition is switched on, the Never try to open, remove or repair any er's seat cator light side front
•
OWS indicator light will illuminate for sev- components in the OWS system. This occupancy status airbag sta-
eral seconds while the system performs a could cause the system to malfunction. status tus
self-diagnostic test. Maintenance or repairs should only be Seat unoccu- OWS indi- Passenger's
carried out by an a trained and qualified pied cator light side front air-
However, if a fault is detected in the system: Volvo service technician. lights up bag disabled
• The front passenger's seat should not
• The OWS indicator light will stay on Seat occu- OWS indi- Passenger's
be modified in any way. This could
• The SRS warning light will come on and reduce pressure on the seat cushion, pied by low cator light side front air-
stay on and a text message will be dis- which might interfere with the OWS weight occu- lights up bag disabled
played. system's function. pant/objectA
Seat occu- OWS indi- Passenger's
WARNING pied by cator light side front air-
If a fault in the system is detected and indi- heavy occu- is not lit bag enabled
cated as described, be aware that the pas- pant/object
senger's side front airbag will not deploy in
the event of a collision. In this case, the A Volvo recommends that children always be properly
restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats.
SRS system and Occupant Weight Sensor Do not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is dis-
should be inspected by a trained and quali- abled unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If
fied Volvo service technician as soon as there is any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side
possible. front airbag, move the child restraint to the rear seat.

The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate)

the passenger's side front airbag in the event
of a collision anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the
front passenger's seat. The PASSENGER AIR-
BAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and
remain off.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIR-

60
 SAFETY

BAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible 1 Volvo Drive WARNING

that the person isn't sitting properly in the
P.O. Box 914 • No objects that add to the total weight
seat. If this happens:
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 on the seat should be placed on the
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to front passenger's seat. If a child is
place the backrest in an upright position. 1-800-458-1552
seated in the front passenger's seat
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, In Canada with any additional weight, this extra
centered on the seat cushion, with the weight could cause the OWS system
Volvo Car Canada Ltd.
person's legs comfortably extended. to enable the airbag, which might
Restart the vehicle and have the person Customer Care Centre cause it to deploy in the event of a col-
•
remain in this position for about two 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 lision, thereby injuring the child.
minutes. This will allow the system to • The seat belt should never be wrapped
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
detect that person and enable the pas- around an object on the front passeng-
senger's frontal airbag. 1-800-663-8255 er's seat. This could interfere with the
• If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- OWS system's function.
tor lamp remains on even after this, the • The front passenger's seat belt should
person should be advised to ride in the never be used in a way that exerts
rear seat. more pressure on the passenger than
This indicates limitations in OWS classifica- normal. This could increase the pres-
tion capability. It does not indicate OWS mal- sure exerted on the weight sensor by a
function. child, and could result in the airbag
being enabled, which might cause it to
Modifications deploy in the event of a collision,
If you are considering modifying your vehicle thereby injuring the child.
in any way to accommodate a disability, for
example by altering or adapting the driver's or
front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag sys-
tems, please contact Volvo at:
In the United States
Volvo Car USA, LLC
Customer Care Center
}}

61
 SAFETY

|| WARNING WARNING Side airbags

The side airbags, on the driver's and passen-
• Keep the following points in mind with • Do not place any type of object on the
ger sides, protect the chest and hip in a colli-
respect to the OWS system. Failure to front passenger's seat in such a way
sion.
follow these instructions could that jamming, pressing, or squeezing
adversely affect the system's function occurs between the object and the
and result in serious injury to the occu- front seat, other than as a direct result
pant of the front passenger's seat. of the correct use of the Automatic
• The full weight of the front seat pas- Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
senger should always be on the seat Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat belt.
cushion. The passenger should never • No objects should be placed under the
lift him/herself off the seat cushion front passenger's seat. This could inter-
using the armrest in the door or the fere with the OWS system's function.
center console, by pressing the feet on
the floor, by sitting on the edge of the Related information
seat cushion, or by pressing against
• Driver/passenger side front airbags (p. 56)
the backrest in a way that reduces
pressure on the seat cushion. This The side airbags are located in the front seats'
could cause OWS to disable the front, outer backrest frames and help protect the
passenger's side airbag. driver and front seat passenger.
A collision of a sufficiently violent force will
trigger the sensors and one or more side air-
bags will inflate. The side airbags inflate
between the seat occupant and the door panel
to help cushion the initial impact of the colli-
sion. The airbag deflates when compressed by
the collision. The side airbags are normally
only deployed on the side of the vehicle
impacted by the collision.

62
 SAFETY

WARNING Inflatable curtain WARNING

The inflatable curtain, Inflatable Curtain (IC),
Volvo recommends contacting an author- Volvo recommends contacting an author-
ized Volvo workshop for repairs. Incorrectly helps to prevent the driver and passengers ized Volvo workshop for repair. Incorrectly
performed repairs to the side airbag sys- from striking their heads on the inside of the performed repairs to the inflatable curtain
tem could impair function and lead to seri- vehicle during a collision. system could impair function and lead to
ous injury. serious injury.

WARNING WARNING
Do not place any objects in the area Never hang or attach heavy objects in the
between the outer edges of the seats and handle in the ceiling. The hooks are only
the door panels, as this could impair the intended for lightweight garments (not for
function of the side airbags. hard objects such as umbrellas).
Volvo recommends only using seat covers Never screw or mount anything to the vehi-
approved by Volvo. Other seat covers could cle's headlining, door pillars or side panels.
prevent the side airbags from functioning This could impair the intended protective
properly. properties. Volvo recommends only using
Volvo original parts that are approved for
The inflatable curtains are installed along both placement in these areas.
WARNING sides of the inside of the roof and help protect
The side airbag is a supplement to the seat occupants in the vehicle's outer seats. IC
belt. Always wear your seat belt.
WARNING
AIRBAG is embossed on the panels.
If objects are loaded higher than the upper
A collision of a sufficiently violent force will edge of the side windows, leave a 10 cm
Related information trigger the sensors and the inflatable curtain (4 in.) space between the objects and the
• Airbags (p. 55) will inflate. window. Objects placed closer to this
could impede the function of the inflatable
curtain concealed inside the headlining.

WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to
the seat belt. Always wear your seat belt.

}}

63
 SAFETY

|| Related information Safety mode WARNING

• Airbags (p. 55) Safety mode is a feature that is triggered
Never attempt to perform repairs or reset
after a collision if there is potential damage to electrical components on your own after
an important function in the vehicle, such as the vehicle has been in safety mode. This
the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety could result in injury or prevent the vehicle
systems, the brake system, etc. from functioning properly. Volvo recom-
If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, mends having the vehicle inspected and
the text Safety mode See Owner's manual reset to normal operating status by an
may appear in the instrument panel along with authorized Volvo workshop after Safety
mode See Owner's manual has been dis-
the warning symbol if the panel is undamaged
played.
and the vehicle's electrical system is intact.
The message indicates that one or more of the
vehicle's functions may be reduced. WARNING
When the vehicle is in safety mode, it
WARNING should not be towed behind another vehi-
Never attempt to restart the vehicle if you cle. It should be towed from the site on a
smell fuel fumes when the message Safety tow truck. Volvo recommends towing the
vehicle directly to an authorized Volvo
mode See Owner's manual is displayed
workshop.
in the instrument panel. Leave the vehicle
immediately.
Related information
If safety mode has been set, it may be possi- • Safety (p. 44)
ble to reset the system in order to start and • Starting and moving the vehicle when it is
move the vehicle a short distance, for exam- in safety mode (p. 65)
ple, if it is blocking traffic. Recovery (p. 477)
•

64
 SAFETY

Starting and moving the vehicle 3. Then try to start the vehicle. Moving the vehicle when it is in safety
when it is in safety mode > The vehicle's electrical system will per- mode
If safety mode has been set, it may be possi- form a system check and then attempt 1. If the message Normal mode The car is
ble to reset the system in order to start and to reset to normal operating mode. The now in normal mode is displayed after
move the vehicle a short distance, for exam- message Vehicle start System check, attempting to start the engine, the vehicle
ple, if it is blocking traffic. wait will be displayed on the instru- may be moved carefully from its present
ment panel during the check. This may position if, for example, it is blocking traf-
Starting the vehicle when it is in safety take up to a minute. fic.
mode
4. When Vehicle start System check, wait 2. Do not move the vehicle farther than abso-
1. Check the vehicle for damage, particularly
is no longer displayed in the instrument lutely necessary.
for fuel leakage. Make sure you do not
panel, try again to start the vehicle.
detect any gasoline fumes.
WARNING
If the damage to the vehicle is minor and CAUTION
there is no fuel leakage/fumes, you may When the vehicle is in safety mode, it
If the message Safety mode See should not be towed behind another vehi-
attempt to start the engine.
Owner's manual is still displayed, the cle. It should be towed from the site on a
tow truck. Volvo recommends towing the
vehicle should not be driven or towed
WARNING vehicle directly to an authorized Volvo
behind another vehicle. If the vehicle needs workshop.
Never attempt to restart the vehicle if you to be moved, it must be towed on a tow
smell fuel fumes when the message Safety truck. Even if no damage is apparent, there
mode See Owner's manual is displayed may be hidden damage that could make Related information
in the instrument panel. Leave the vehicle • Safety mode (p. 64)
immediately. the vehicle impossible to control.
• Starting the vehicle (p. 416)

2. Switch off the ignition. • Recovery (p. 477)

65
 SAFETY

Child safety ejected from the vehicle during a sudden ries for both the infant or child and other occu-
Children should always be seated safely maneuver or impact. The same can also hap- pants in the vehicle.
when traveling in the vehicle. pen if the infant or child rides unrestrained on
When a child has outgrown the child safety
the seat. Other occupants should also be
seat, you should use the rear seat with the
General information properly restrained to help reduce the chance
standard seat belt fastened. The best way to
Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint of injuring or increasing the injury of a child.
help protect the child here is to place the child
systems for all occupants including children.
All states and provinces have legislation gov- on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly
Remember that, regardless of age and size, a
erning how and where children should be car- located on the hips. Legislation in your state or
child should always be properly restrained in a
ried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations exist- province may mandate the use of a child seat
vehicle.
ing in your state or province. Recent accident or cushion in combination with the seat belt,
Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/ statistics have shown that children are safer in depending on the child's age and/or size.
LATCH attachments, which make it more con- rear seating positions than front seating posi- Please check local regulations.
venient to install child seats. tions when properly restrained. A child
A specially designed and tested booster cush-
restraint system can help protect a child in a
Some restraint systems for children are ion and backrest can be obtained from your
vehicle. Here's what to look for when selecting
designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap Volvo retailer. See also the article "Integrated
a child restraint system:
belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. booster cushion."
Such child restraint systems can help protect It should have a label certifying that it meets
children in vehicles in the event of an accident applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
only if they are used properly. However, chil- Standards (FMVSS 213) - or in Canada,
dren could be endangered in a crash if the CMVSS 213.
child restraints are not properly secured in the
Make sure the child restraint system is
vehicle. Failure to follow the installation
approved for the child's height, weight and
instructions for your child restraint can result
development - the label required by the stand-
in your child striking the vehicle's interior in a
ard or regulation, or instructions for infant
sudden stop.
restraints, typically provide this information.
Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable
In using any child restraint system, we urge
substitute for a child restraint system. In an
you to carefully look over the instructions that
accident, a child held in a person's arms can
are provided with the restraint. Be sure you
be crushed between the vehicle's interior and
understand them and can use the device prop-
an unrestrained person. The child could also
erly and safely in this vehicle. A misused child
be injured by striking the interior, or by being
restraint system can result in increased inju-

66
 SAFETY

WARNING tion of resting on our laurels. But we need Related information

your help. Please remember to put your chil- • Safety (p. 44)
• Do not use child safety seats or child dren in the back seat, and buckle them up.
booster cushions/backrests in the front • Child restraints (p. 68)
passenger's seat. We also recommend • Activating and deactivating child locks
WARNING (p. 263)
that children under 140 cm (4 feet
7 inches) in height who have outgrown A child restraint should never be reused if:
these devices sit in the rear seat with • The vehicle has been involved in a colli-
the seat belt fastened. sion, no matter how minor
• On hot days, the temperature in the • Its history is unknown
vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
• It is older than the manufacturer's expi-
Exposure to these high temperatures
ration date
for even a short period of time can
cause heat-related injury or death.
Small children are particularly at risk. Volvo has some very specific
Never leave children unattended in a recommendations
vehicle. • Always wear your seat belt.
• Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety
Child seats should always be registered. device which, when used with a three-
point seat belt can help reduce serious
Volvo's recommendations injuries during certain types of accidents.
Why does Volvo believe that no child should Volvo recommends that you do not dis-
sit in the front seat of a vehicle? It's quite sim- connect the airbag system in your vehicle.
ple really. A front airbag is a very powerful
• Volvo strongly recommends that everyone
device designed, by law, to help protect an
in the vehicle be properly restrained.
adult.
• Volvo recommends that ALL occupants
Because of the size of the airbag and its speed
(adults and children) shorter than 140 cm
of inflation, a child should never be placed in
(4 feet 7 inches) be seated in the rear seat
the front seat, even if he or she is properly bel-
of any vehicle with a front passenger side
ted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo
airbag.
has been an innovator in the field of safety
since it was founded. And we have no inten- • Drive safely!

67
 SAFETY

Child restraints
Suitable child restraints should always be
used when children travel in the vehicle.

Child restraint systems

Convertible seat Booster cushion

WARNING WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the Always refer to the child restraint manufac-
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a turer's instructions for detailed information
Infant seat front passenger airbag - not even if the on securing the restraint.
There are three main types of child restraint "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
systems: infant seats, convertible seats and rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the
severity of an accident were to cause the
booster cushions. They are classified accord-
airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious
ing to the child's age and size. injury or death to a child seated in this
The child restraint should be secured using a position.
three-point seat belt, ISOFIX/LATCH anchors
or top tether anchors.

68
 SAFETY

WARNING When attaching the seat belt to a child out and return the registration card that
seat: comes with new child restraints.
• When not in use, keep the child 1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat
restraint system secured or remove it Child restraint recall information is readily
according to the child seat manufacturer's available in both the U.S. and Canada. For
from the passenger compartment to instructions.
help prevent it from injuring passen- recall information in the U.S., call the U.S.
gers in the event of a sudden stop or 2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible. Government's Auto Safety Hotline at
collision. 1-800-424-9393 or go to http://www-
3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the odi.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/recalls/
• A small child's head represents a con- buckle (lock) in the usual way. register/childseat/index.cfm. In Canada, visit
siderable part of its total weight and its Transport Canada's Child Safety website at
4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut
neck is still very weak. Volvo recom- http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/
around the child seat.
mends that children up to age 4 travel, menu.htm.
properly restrained, facing rearward. In A sound from the seat belt retractor will be
addition, Volvo recommends that chil- audible at this time and is normal. The belt will Related information
dren should ride rearward facing, prop- now be locked in place. This function is auto- • Child safety (p. 66)
erly restrained, as long as possible. matically disabled when the seat belt is
• Infant seats (p. 70)
unlocked and the belt is fully retracted.
• Convertible seats (p. 72)
NOTE WARNING • Booster cushions (p. 74)
Prolonged installation and use of the child Do not use child safety seats or child • Integrated booster cushion* (p. 79)
restraint may damage the vehicle's interior. booster cushions/backrests in the front
Volvo recommends using the kick guard • Top tether anchors (p. 75)
passenger's seat. We also recommend that
accessory to help protect the vehicle's children who have outgrown these devices • Lower child seat attachment points
interior. sit in the rear seat with the seat belt prop- (p. 77)
erly fastened. ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 77)
•
Automatic Locking Retractor/
Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ Child restraint registration and recalls
Child restraints could be recalled for safety
ELR)
reasons. You must register your child restraint
To make child seat installation easier, each
to be reached in a recall. To stay informed
seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip-
about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill
ped with a locking mechanism to help keep
the seat belt taut.

* Option/accessory. 69
 SAFETY

Infant seats WARNING

Suitable child restraints should always be
A child seat should never be used in the
used when children (depending on their age/ front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
size) are seated in the vehicle. front passenger airbag - not even if the
"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
Securing an infant seat with a seat rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the
belt severity of an accident were to cause the
airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious
injury or death to a child seated in this
position.

3.
Route the seat belt through the infant seat.

WARNING
• An infant seat must be in the rear-facing
position only.
• The infant seat should not be positioned
Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's behind the driver's seat unless there is
seat adequate space for safe installation.
1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the
vehicle.
2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat Fasten the seat belt.
according to the child restraint manufac-
turer's instructions. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.

70
 SAFETY

NOTE WARNING
The locking retractor will automatically It should not be possible to move the child
release when the seat belt is unbuckled restraint more than 2.5 cm (1 in.) in any
and allowed to retract fully. direction along the seat belt path.

5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the

seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound
from the seat belt retractor's automatic
locking function will be audible at this time
and is normal. The seat belt should now be
locked in place.
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt.
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt
out as far as possible to activate the belt's
automatic locking function.

When installing infant seats in the rear seat, Volvo

recommends maintaining a distance of at least
50 mm (2 inches) from the front-most part of the
infant seat to the rearmost part of the seat in front.
The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling
the seat belt and letting it retract completely.

Check that the infant seat is properly secured. Related information

• Child restraints (p. 68)
6. Press and pull the infant seat along the
direction of the seat belt to check that it is • Convertible seats (p. 72)
properly held in place by the seat belt. • Booster cushions (p. 74)
• Top tether anchors (p. 75)

}}

71
 SAFETY

• Lower child seat attachment points Convertible seats

(p. 77) Suitable child restraints should always be
• ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 77) used when children (depending on their age/
size) are seated in the vehicle.

Securing a convertible seat with a seat

belt

Route the seat belt through the convertible seat.

WARNING
Always use a convertible seat that is suita-
ble for the child's age and size. See the
convertible seat manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
Do not place the convertible seat in the front pas-
senger's seat.
1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat
Convertible seats can be used in either a for- of the vehicle.
ward or rearward-facing position, depending
on the age and size of the child.

72
 SAFETY

WARNING NOTE
• A small child's head represents a con- The locking retractor will automatically
siderable part of its total weight and its release when the seat belt is unbuckled
neck is still very weak. Volvo recom- and allowed to retract fully.
mends that children up to age 4 travel,
properly restrained, facing rearward. In 5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place,
addition, Volvo recommends that chil- let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A
dren should ride rearward facing, prop- sound from the seat belt retractor's auto-
erly restrained, as long as possible. matic locking function will be audible at
• Convertible child seats should be instal- this time and is normal. The seat belt
led in the rear seat only. should now be locked in place.
• A rear-facing convertible seat should not Fasten the seat belt.
be positioned behind the driver's seat 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
unless there is adequate space for safe plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
installation. click is audible.
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt
2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat out as far as possible to activate the belt's
according to the child restraint manufac- automatic locking function.
turer's instructions.

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt.

6. Push and pull the convertible seat along
the seat belt path to ensure that it is held
securely in place by the seat belt.

}}

73
 SAFETY

|| WARNING Related information Booster cushions

• Child restraints (p. 68) Suitable child restraints should always be
It should not be possible to move the child
restraint more than 2.5 cm (1 in.) in any • Infant seats (p. 70) used when children (depending on their age/
direction along the seat belt path. size) are seated in the vehicle.
• Booster cushions (p. 74)
• Top tether anchors (p. 75) Securing a booster cushion
The convertible seat can be removed by
• Lower child seat attachment points
unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract
(p. 77)
completely.
• ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 77)

Position the child correctly on the booster cushion.

Booster cushions are recommended for chil-
dren who have outgrown convertible seats.
Ensure that the convertible seat is securely in place.
1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat
of the vehicle.
WARNING
2. With the child properly seated on the
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or
front passenger airbag - not even if the around the cushion according to the man-
"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the ufacturer's instructions.
rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the
severity of an accident were to cause the
airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious
injury or death to a child seated in this
position.

74
 SAFETY

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch Related information Top tether anchors
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct • Child restraints (p. 68) Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint
click is audible. Convertible seats (p. 72) top tether anchorages for all three seating
•
positions in the rear seat. They are located on
• Infant seats (p. 70)
the rear side of the backrests.
• Top tether anchors (p. 75)
• Lower child seat attachment points Child restraint anchorages
(p. 77)
• ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 77)

Positioning the seat belt.

4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and
fits snugly around the child.
Top tether anchors and symbols on the rear side of
WARNING the rear seat backrests. There is no symbol for the
center anchor position.
• The hip section of the three-point seat
belt must fit snugly across the child's
hips, not across the stomach.
• The shoulder section of the three-point
seat belt should be positioned across
the chest and shoulder.
• The shoulder belt must never be placed
behind the child's back or under the
arm.

}}

75
 SAFETY

|| Securing a child seat WARNING Related information

1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat. • Child restraints (p. 68)
• Always refer to the recommendations
2. Route the top tether strap under the head made by the child restraint manufac- • Lower child seat attachment points
restraint and attach it to the anchor. turer. (p. 77)
3. Attach the strap for the lower tether Volvo recommends that the top tether • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 77)
•
anchors in the lower ISOFIX/LATCH anchors be used when installing a for-
attachment points. If the child restraint is ward-facing child restraint.
not equipped with straps for the lower Never route a top tether strap over the
•
tether anchors, or if the child restraint is top of the head restraint. The strap
used on the center seating position, follow should be routed beneath the head
the instructions for attaching a child restraint.
restraint using the automatic locking seat
belt. • Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those loads
4. Firmly tension all straps. imposed by correctly fitted child
Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's restraints. Under no circumstances are
instructions for information on securing the they to be used for adult seat belts or
child seat. harnesses. The anchorages are not able
to withstand excessive forces on them
in the event of collision if full harness
NOTE
seat belts or adult seat belts are instal-
If the vehicle is equipped with a cargo led to them. An adult who uses a belt
compartment cover, this must be removed anchored in a child restraint anchorage
before a child seat can be attached in the runs a great risk of suffering severe
tether anchors. injuries should a collision occur.
• Do not install rear speakers that require
the removal of the top tether anchors
or interfere with the proper use of the
top tether strap.

76
 SAFETY

Lower child seat attachment points Related information ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors
The rear seats are equipped with lower child • Child restraints (p. 68) Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped
seat attachment points. • Top tether anchors (p. 75) child seats are located in the rear, outboard
The lower child seat attachment points are seats, hidden below the backrest cushions.
• ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 77)
intended for use with certain rear-facing child
restraints. Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child
seat anchors
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when attaching a child seat to the
lower child seat attachment points.

Location of child seat attachment

points

Location of the ISOFIX/LATCH anchors

Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the
ISOFIX/LATCH anchor positions as shown. To
access the anchors, kneel on the seat cushion
and locate the anchors by feel. Always follow
Location of child seat attachment points in the rear your child seat manufacturer's installation
seat. instructions, and use both ISOFIX/LATCH
The child seat attachment points in the rear lower anchors and top tethers whenever pos-
seat are located on the rear section of the sible.
front seat floor rails.

}}

77
 SAFETY

|| To access the anchors NOTE WARNING

1. Put the child restraint in position.
• The rear center seat is not equipped • Be sure to fasten the attachment cor-
2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down with ISOFIX/LATCH lower tether rectly to the anchor (see the illustra-
the seat cushion and locate the anchors anchors. If a child restraint is used in tion). If the attachment is not correctly
by feel. this seat, attach the restraint's upper fastened, the child restraint may not be
3. Fasten the attachment on the child anchor strap (if equipped with these) properly secured in the event of a colli-
restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/ to the top tether anchor point for this sion.
LATCH lower anchors. strap and secure the child restraint • The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child
with the vehicle's center seat belt. restraint anchors are only intended for
4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps
according to the manufacturer's instruc- • Always follow your child seat manufac- use with child seats positioned in the
tions. turer's installation instructions, and use outboard seating positions. These
both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors anchors are not certified for use with
and top tethers whenever possible. any child restraint that is positioned in
WARNING the center seating position. When
Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to securing a child restraint in the center
FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer seating position, use only the vehicle's
to the child restraint system's manual for center seat belt.
weight and size ratings.
Related information
• Child restraints (p. 68)
• Top tether anchors (p. 75)
• ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 77)

Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/

LATCH lower anchors

78
 SAFETY

Integrated booster cushion*1 Before driving, make sure that: Canadian models
The integrated booster cushions in the rear • the booster cushion is raised to the cor- Stage 1 Stage 2
seat's outboard seating positions help ensure rect position for the child's weight
that children can sit comfortably and safely. Weight 22 - 36 kg 18 - 25 kg
• the booster cushion is locked into position
The integrated booster cushion has been spe- 50 - 80 lbs 40 - 55 lbs
cially designed to help safeguard children in • the seat belt is taut, in contact with the
the rear seat when used with the vehicle's child's body and not twisted Length 115 - 140 cm 102 - 120 cm
seat belts. The integrated booster cushion in • the seat belt is not positioned across the 45 - 55 in. 40 - 47 in.
the rear seat can be folded up to two posi- child's throat or below the shoulder
tions, depending on the child's height. • the lap section of the seat belt is placed 18 kg (40 lbs) is the minimum weight require-
If using a booster cushion does not result in low over the child's hips to provide the ment for a child using booster seats according
proper positioning of the shoulder strap, then best protection. to the Canadian regulation CMVSS 213.4.
the child should be placed in a properly US models
secured child restraint. The shoulder belt must
never be placed behind the child's back or Stage 1 Stage 2
under the arm. Weight 50 - 80 lbs 33 - 55 lbs
22 - 36 kg 15 - 25 kg
Length 45 - 55 in. 37 - 47 in.
115 - 140 cm 95 - 120 cm

Correct seating position: the seat belt is positioned

across the collarbone.

1 Canada only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion. }}

* Option/accessory. 79
 SAFETY

|| WARNING Related information Folding up the integrated booster

• Child restraints (p. 68) cushion*
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can When the integrated booster cushion is used,
• Folding up the integrated booster cush-
occur ion* (p. 80) it must be folded up.
• Follow all instructions on this Lower position:
• Folding down the integrated booster
child restraint and in the vehi- cushion* (p. 82)
cle's owner's manual.
• Make sure the booster cushion
is securely locked before the
child is seated.
• Use this booster cushion only with chil-
dren whose height and weight are
within the permitted limits shown in
the table.
• Use only the vehicle's lap and shoulder
belt system when restraining the child
in this booster cushion. Pull the handle forward and upward to
release the booster cushion.
• In the event of a collision while the
integrated booster cushion was occu-
pied, the entire booster cushion and
seat belt must be replaced. The
booster cushion should also be
replaced if it is badly worn or damaged
in any way. This work should be per-
formed by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician only.

80 * Option/accessory.
 SAFETY

WARNING
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can
occur
• Follow all instructions on this
child restraint and in the vehi-
cle's owner's manual.
• Make sure the booster cushion
is securely locked before the
child is seated.
Press the booster cushion rearward to Lift the front edge of the booster cushion • Use this booster cushion only with chil-
dren whose height and weight are
lock it into position. and press it rearward toward the backrest
within the permitted limits shown in
to lock it into position.
Upper position (from the lower position): the table.
• Use only the vehicle's lap and shoulder
belt system when restraining the child
in this booster cushion.
• In the event of a collision while the
integrated booster cushion was occu-
pied, the entire booster cushion and
seat belt must be replaced. The
booster cushion should also be
replaced if it is badly worn or damaged
in any way. This work should be per-
formed by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician only.
Press the button to release the booster
cushion.

}}

81
 SAFETY

|| NOTE Folding down the integrated

booster cushion*
The integrated booster cushion cannot be
When the integrated booster cushion in the
moved directly from the upper position to
rear seat is not in use, it should be stowed
the lower position. From the upper posi-
(folded down).
tion, the booster cushion must first be
folded down completely into the rear seat NOTE
and then raised to the lower position. The integrated booster cushion cannot be
moved directly from the upper position to
Related information the lower position. From the upper posi-
• Integrated booster cushion* (p. 79) tion, the booster cushion must first be
folded down completely into the rear seat
• Folding down the integrated booster
and then raised to the lower position.
cushion* (p. 82) Press down on the center of the booster
cushion to lock it into position.

CAUTION
Make sure that there are no objects (e.g.
toys) on the seat under the integrated
booster cushion before folding it down.

NOTE
The integrated booster cushion must be
stowed (folded down) before folding down
the seat backrest.
Pull the handle forward to release the
booster cushion.

82 * Option/accessory.
 SAFETY

WARNING Related information

• Integrated booster cushion* (p. 79)
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can
• Folding up the integrated booster cush-
occur ion* (p. 80)
• Follow all instructions on this
child restraint and in the vehi-
cle's owner's manual.
• Make sure the booster cushion
is securely locked before the
child is seated.
• Use this booster cushion only with chil-
dren whose height and weight are
within the permitted limits shown in
the table.
• Use only the vehicle's lap and shoulder
belt system when restraining the child
in this booster cushion.
• In the event of a collision while the
integrated booster cushion was occu-
pied, the entire booster cushion and
seat belt must be replaced. The
booster cushion should also be
replaced if it is badly worn or damaged
in any way. This work should be per-
formed by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician only.

* Option/accessory. 83
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Displays and controls by the driver Horn Center and tunnel console
in a left-hand drive vehicle
Left-side steering wheel keypad
The overviews show the location of the vehi-
cle's displays and controls. Hood open
Steering wheel and dashboard Display lighting, tailgate unlock/open*/
close*, halogen headlight height adjust-
ment

Ceiling console

Center display

Hazard warning flashers, defrosting,

media
Gear selector
Parking lights, daytime running lights, low
beams, high beams, turn signals, rear fog Start knob
light, trip computer reset
Drive modes
Steering wheel paddles for manual shift-
Front reading lights and courtesy lighting Parking brake
ing*
Head-up display* Panoramic roof* Auto-hold brakes
Instrument panel Ceiling console display ON CALL button

Wipers and washers, rain sensor* HomeLink®*

Right-side steering wheel keypad

Steering wheel adjustment

86 * Option/accessory.
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Driver's door

Memory for power front seat settings*,

door mirrors and head-up display*
Central locking

Power windows, door mirrors, electric

child locks*
Controls for front seat

Related information
• Manual front seats (p. 188)
• Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
• Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 202)
• Lighting control and panel (p. 156)
• Starting the vehicle (p. 416)
• Instrument panel (p. 88)
• Center display overview (p. 114)
• Transmission (p. 431)

* Option/accessory. 87
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Instrument panel • Open one of the doors.

The instrument panel displays information
related to the vehicle and driving. WARNING
The instrument panel contains gauges, indica- If the instrument panel turns off, does not
tors and monitoring and warning symbols. activate when the ignition is switched on,
What is shown in the instrument panel varies or part/all of the panel cannot be read, do
depending on the equipment, settings and not drive the vehicle. Consult a workshop
functions currently active. immediately. Volvo recommends an
authorized Volvo workshop.
The instrument panel is activated as soon as a
door is opened, i.e. in ignition mode 0. The
panel will power down after a short period of
WARNING
time if it is not used. To reactivate it, do one of If the instrument panel is not functioning
the following: properly, information about brakes, airbags The illustration is generic - details may vary accord-
or other safety-related systems may not be ing to vehicle model.
• Depress the brake pedal. displayed. The driver will then not be able
• Activate ignition mode I. to check the status of the vehicle systems
or receive relevant warnings and informa-
tion.

Location in the instrument panel:

Left side In the center Right side
Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols Tachometer/Hybrid gaugeA
Trip odometer Ambient temperature sensor Gear indicator

OdometerB Clock Drive Mode

Cruise control/speed limiter information Message (also graphics in some cases) Fuel gauge
Road sign information* Door and seat belt status Hybrid battery gauge
– Hybrid battery's charge level Distance to empty tank

88 * Option/accessory.
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Left side In the center Right side

– Media player Distance to discharged battery
– Navigation system map* Current fuel consumption
– Phone App menu (activated using steering wheel keypad)
– Voice Control –
– CompassA –
A Depends on selected drive mode.
B Total distance.

Dynamic symbol Related information

Dynamic symbol in basic • Instrument panel settings (p. 90)
mode. • Indicator and warning symbols (p. 99)
• Trip computer (p. 93)
• Messages in the instrument panel
(p. 110)

In the center of the instrument panel is a • Handling the App menu in the instrument
dynamic symbol that changes appearance panel (p. 109)
according to the type of message displayed. • Drive modes (p. 438)
The severity of the control or warning symbol
is indicated by a red or amber-colored marking Example with indicator symbol.
around the symbol.
An animation may be used to change the sym-
bol into a graphic image to depict the location
of a problem or to clarify information.

* Option/accessory. 89
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Instrument panel settings Settings via center display 2. Tap System System Languages and
Display settings for the instrument panel can Selecting type of information Units System Language to select lan-
be set in the instrument panel's App menu 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top guage.
and in the center display's Settings menu. view. > A change made here will affect the lan-
Settings via instrument panel's app guage in all displays.
2. Tap My Car Displays Driver Display
menu Information. The settings are personal and saved automati-
cally in the active driver profile.
3. Select a background:
• Show no information in the Related information
background • Instrument panel (p. 88)
• Handling the App menu in the instrument
• Show information for current
panel (p. 109)
playing media
• Changing settings in the center display's
• Show navigation even if no route is Top view (p. 136)
set
Select theme
1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.
The illustration is generic - details may vary accord-
ing to vehicle model. 2. Tap My Car Displays Display
Themes
The app menu will open and can be controlled
using the right-side steering wheel keypad. 3. Select a theme (appearance) for the
instrument panel:
The app menu can be used to set what infor-
mation will be displayed in the instrument • Glass
panel • Minimalistic
• trip computer • Performance
• media player • Chrome Rings
• phone Select language
• navigation system*. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

90 * Option/accessory.
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Fuel gauge Hybrid gauge Indicates the power level when the
The fuel gauge in the instrument panel shows In Hybrid and Pure drive modes, the instru- internal combustion engine starts. A
the fuel level in the tank. ment panel will display a hybrid gauge, which solid symbol indicates that the inter-
can help the driver achieve optimal driving nal combustion engine is being used.
economy. Indicates the power level when the
internal combustion engine will start.
A hollow symbol indicates that the
internal combustion engine is not
being used.
Indicates that the hybrid battery is
being charged e.g. by lightly press-
ing the brake pedal.

Driver-requested power
The illustration is generic - details may vary accord- The hybrid gauge displays the amount of
ing to vehicle model. power requested (utilized) by the driver
through pressure on the accelerator pedal. The
The beige area in the fuel gauge indicates the The hybrid gauge shows the ratio between the higher the reading on the scale, the more
amount of fuel left in the tank. electric motor's current power consumption power utilized in the current gear. The mark
When the fuel level is low, the fuel pump sym- and the remaining available power. This infor- between the lightning symbol and the drop
bol will illuminate with an amber-colored light. mation is shown in various ways. symbol indicates the point at which the com-
The trip computer also indicates the approxi- bustion engine will start.
Symbols in the hybrid gauge
mate distance that can be driven on the fuel
Indicates the current available power
remaining in the tank.
from the electric motor. A solid sym-
Related information bol indicates that the electric motor
• Instrument panel (p. 88) is being used.

• Hybrid battery gauge (p. 92) A hollow symbol indicates that the
electric motor is not being used.
• Refueling (p. 459)
• Fuel tank volume (p. 679)

}}

91
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| For example: Hybrid battery gauge

The hybrid battery gauge shows how much
current is left in the hybrid battery.

The vehicle is generating current to recharge the bat-

The vehicle has been started, but is stationary and no tery, e.g. during light braking or engine braking on a
power is being requested. downslope.

Related information The current in the hybrid battery is used to

• Drive modes (p. 438)
power the electric motor, but can also be used
• Instrument panel (p. 88) to heat or cool the vehicle. The trip computer
• Brakes (p. 421) calculates an approximate driving distance
with the remaining current in the hybrid bat-
• Range (p. 454)
tery.
• Starting and stopping the combustion
engine (p. 437)

The electric motor cannot supply the requested

power and the internal combustion engine will start.

92
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Symbols in the hybrid battery gauge Trip computer • Tourist - alternative speedometer
The vehicle's trip computer registers data Unit standards for distance, speed, etc. can be
while driving such as mileage, fuel consump- changed via system settings in the center dis-
tion and average speed. play.
To help promote fuel-efficient driving, data is
recorded on both current and average fuel Trip odometer
consumption. Data from the trip computer can There are two trip odometers: TM and TA.
be displayed in the instrument panel. TM can be reset manually and TA is reset
automatically if the vehicle is not used for four
hours.
During a drive, the trip odometer registers
data on:
• Mileage
The symbol in the hybrid battery gauge
indicates that the Hold function is activated. • Driving time
The symbol indicates that the Charge • Average speed
function is activated. • Average fuel consumption
Related information The readings since the trip odometer's last
• Instrument panel (p. 88) reset are displayed.
Example of trip computer information in the instru-
• Charging the hybrid battery (p. 395) ment panel. The illustration is generic - details may Odometer
• Hold and Charge (p. 455) vary according to vehicle model. The odometer records the vehicle's total mile-
The trip computer includes the following age. This reading cannot be reset.
gauges:
Current fuel consumption
• Trip odometer This gauge shows the vehicle's fuel consump-
• Odometer tion at that moment. The reading is updated
about once a second.
• Current fuel consumption
• Distance to empty tank
• Distance to discharged battery
}}

93
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Distance to empty tank Pure mode has reduced climate control set- ing electricity. The more electricity consumers
The trip computer calculates the dis- tings (ECO Climate). (stereo, heated windows/mirrors/seats, very
tance that can be driven on the fuel cold air from climate control system, etc.) that
When the gauge displays "----", there is little
remaining in the tank. are active, the shorter the potential mileage.
charge remaining in the battery and electric
motor range cannot be reliably calculated.
This calculation is based on average fuel con- NOTE
sumption during the last 30 km (20 miles)
and the amount of fuel remaining in the tank. NOTE In addition to high electrical consumption
in the passenger compartment, rapid
When the gauge displays "----", there is not The information will change based on your
acceleration, sudden braking, high speeds,
enough fuel remaining to calculate the remain- driving style.
heavy loads, low ambient temperatures
ing mileage. Refuel as soon as possible. and driving up hills can reduce possible
An economical driving style will generally driving distance.
NOTE increase how far you can drive on a certain
amount of fuel.
The information will change based on your Tourist - alternative speedometer
driving style. Starting values for fully charged hybrid The alternative digital speedometer makes it
battery easier to drive in countries where speed limit
Because it is difficult to predict driving style signs are shown in a different measurement
An economical driving style will generally
and other factors that affect the range of elec- unit than the one shown in the vehicle's
increase how far you can drive on a certain
tric motors, Volvo uses a starting value when gauges.
amount of fuel.
the vehicle is fully charged. This starting value
When used, the digital speed is displayed in
Distance to discharged battery provides an "up to" amount instead of a pre-
the opposite unit to that shown in the analog
This gauge shows the approximate diction on the range of the electric current in
speedometer. If mph is used in the analog
distance that can be driven with the the motor. The difference in starting value
speedometer, the equivalent speed in km/h
remaining current in the hybrid bat- between Hybrid and Pure is because the
will be shown in the digital speedometer.
tery. vehicle is permitted to use more current from
the hybrid battery in Pure mode, and because Related information
This calculation is based on average consump- the vehicle switches to ECO Climate. • Displaying trip data in the instrument
tion with a normally loaded vehicle in normal
Mileage when using electric motor panel (p. 95)
driving conditions, and takes into account
whether the air conditioning is on or off. To achieve the longest possible mileage when • Resetting the trip odometer (p. 96)
Changing drive modes from Hybrid to Pure using the electric motor, the driver of an elec- Displaying trip statistics in the center dis-
•
may increase the calculated distance because tric vehicle also needs to think about conserv- play (p. 96)

94
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

• Instrument panel (p. 88) Displaying trip data in the 1. Open the app menu in the instrument
• Changing system units of measurement instrument panel panel by pressing (1).
(p. 136) Data recorded and calculated by the trip (The App menu cannot be opened while
computer can be displayed on the instrument there is an unacknowledged message in
panel. the instrument panel. The message must
This data is stored in a trip computer app. You be acknowledged by pressing the O but-
can choose which information the instrument ton (4) before the App menu can be
panel will display in the app menu. opened).
2. Navigate to the trip computer app by mov-
ing left or right using (2).
> The top four menu rows show meas-
ured values for trip odometer TM. The
next four menu rows show measured
values for trip odometer TA. Scroll up or
down in the list using (3).

Open and navigate in the app menu1 using the right-

hand steering wheel keypad.
App menu

Left/right

Up/down

Confirm

1 The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model. }}

95
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| 3. Scroll down to the option buttons to Resetting the trip odometer Displaying trip statistics in the
choose which information to show in the Resetting the trip odometer using the left- center display
instrument panel: side steering wheel lever. Trip computer statistics can be displayed
• Odometer graphically in the center display, providing an
overview that facilitates more fuel-efficient
• Distance to empty tank
driving.
• Distance to discharged battery Open the Driver
• Tourist (alternative speedometer) performance app in the App
• Mileage for trip odometer TM, TA or no view to display trip statistics.
display of mileage Each bar in the graph repre-
• Current fuel consumption, average fuel sents a driving distance of 1
consumption for TM or TA, or no dis- kilometers, 10 kilometers or
play of fuel consumption 100 kilometers (or miles). The bars are added
from the right as you drive. The bar at the far
Select or clear a selection using the O but-
right shows the data for the current trip.
ton (4). The change will apply immedi-
ately. – Reset all information in trip odometer TM Average fuel consumption and total driving
(i.e. mileage, average fuel consumption, time are calculated from the most recent reset
Related information average speed and driving time) by press- of the trip statistics.
• Trip computer (p. 93) ing and holding the RESET button on the
left-hand steering wheel lever. Fuel and electricity consumption are shown in
• Resetting the trip odometer (p. 96) separate graphs. The electricity consumption
Pressing the RESET button only resets shows "net" consumption, i.e. consumed cur-
the distance driven. rent minus regenerated current generated by
The TA trip odometer can not be manually braking.
reset. It resets automatically if the vehicle is
not used for four hours or more.

Related information
• Trip computer (p. 93)

96
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Trip statistics settings Related information

Trip statistics settings can be reset or • Displaying trip statistics in the center dis-
adjusted. play (p. 96)
1. Open the Driver performance app in the • Trip computer (p. 93)
App view to display trip statistics.
• Resetting the trip odometer (p. 96)

Trip computer statistics2. 2. Tap Preferences to

Related information • change the graph scale. Select 1, 10 or

• Trip statistics settings (p. 97) 100 km/miles for the bar.
• Trip computer (p. 93) • reset data after each trip. Performed
when the vehicle remains stationary for
more than 4 hours.
• reset data for current trip.
Trip statistics, calculated average con-
sumption, and total driving time are
always reset simultaneously.
Unit standards for distance, speed, etc. can be
changed via system settings in the center dis-
play.

2 The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.

97
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Date and time time zone will then be automatically set to the Ambient temperature sensor
The clock is displayed in both the instrument vehicle's location. In some navigation systems, The ambient temperature is shown in the
panel and the center display. the current location must also be set to deter- instrument panel.
mine the correct time zone. If Auto Time is The sensor detects the temperature outside
Location of clock not selected, the time and date can be the vehicle.
adjusted using the up and down arrows on the
touchscreen.
Daylight savings time
In some countries, the Auto Daylight Saving
Time setting can be selected to automatically
change to daylight savings time. For other
countries, the Daylight Saving Time setting
can be selected manually.

Related information
• Instrument panel (p. 88)
• Changing settings in the center display's
Certain messages and other information may Top view (p. 136)
obscure the clock in the instrument panel. If the vehicle has been stationary, the sensor
reading may be higher than the actual tem-
In the center display, the clock is located on perature.
the upper right-hand side in the status bar.
When the ambient temperature is
Settings for date and time between –5 °C and +2 °C (23 °F
– Select Settings System Date and and 36 °F), a snowflake symbol will
Time in the center display's Top view to illuminate to alert the driver of the
change settings for time and date format. risk of slippery conditions.

Adjust the date and time by tapping the The symbol is also temporarily lit in the head-
up or down arrows on the touchscreen. up display* if the vehicle is equipped with one.

Automatic time for vehicles with GPS Change the measurement standard for the
When the vehicle is equipped with a naviga- temperature sensor etc. via system settings in
tion system, Auto Time is also available. The the center display's Top view.

98 * Option/accessory.
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Related information Indicator and warning symbols Airbags

• Instrument panel (p. 88) Indicator and warning symbols alert the
A fault has been detected in one
• Changing system units of measurement driver that a function is active, that a symbol
of the vehicle's safety systems.
(p. 136) is working, or that an error or serious fault
has occurred. Read the message in the instru-
ment panel and contact a work-
Red symbols shop. Volvo recommends con-
WARNING tacting an authorized Volvo
workshop.
The red warning symbol illumi-
nates to indicate that a fault has Fault in brake system
been detected that could affect
A fault has occurred in the brake
safety or driveability. An explana-
system.
tory message will be simultane-
A Read the message in the instru-
ously displayed in the instrument
panel. ment panel and contact a work-
shop. Volvo recommends con-
The warning symbol may also
tacting an authorized Volvo
illuminate in combination with
workshop.
other symbols.
B
Seat belt reminder
Parking brake
Lights up or flashes when a
someone in the vehicle has not Steady glow: the parking brake is
fastened their seat belt. activated.
A Flashing: a fault has occurred in
the parking brake. Read the mes-
sage in the instrument panel.

}}

99
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Fault in electrical system Collision risk Amber symbols

A fault has occurred in the elec- City Safety warns the driver if Information
trical system. there is a risk of a collision with A problem has occurred in one of
another vehicle, pedestrian, the vehicle's systems. Read the
Read the message in the instru-
cyclist or large animal. message in the instrument panel.
ment panel and contact a work-
shop. Volvo recommends con- Low oil pressure The information symbol may also
tacting an authorized Volvo illuminate in combination with
workshop. The engine's oil pressure is too
other symbols.
low. Stop the engine immedi-
High engine temperature ately and check the engine oil Fault in brake system
level. Add oil if necessary.
The engine's temperature is too A fault has occurred in the brake
high. Read the message in the If this symbol lights up and the system. Read the message in the
instrument panel. oil level is normal, read the mes- A instrument panel.
sage in the instrument panel and
contact a workshop. Volvo rec-
ommends contacting an author-
ized Volvo workshop.

A Canadian models. B
B US models.
Fault in ABS system
The system is not functioning
properly. The vehicle's regular
A brakes will still work, but without
the ABS function.

100
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Emission control system Reduced performance Green symbols

Fault in emission control system. Temporary fault in driveline. Read Auto-hold brake
Have the vehicle checked by a the message in the instrument The function is activated and the
workshop. Volvo recommends panel. brakes or the parking brake are
contacting an authorized Volvo A being used.
workshop. Stability system
Steady glow: a fault has occurred Front fog light
Rear fog light
in the system.
Rear fog light on. Front fog light on.
Flashing: the system is working.
Stability system, Sport mode Parking lights
Tire pressure system
Sport mode is activated. Parking lights on.
Tire pressure low.
If there is a fault in the tire pres-
sure system, the symbol will first Blue symbols Left/right turn signals
flash for approximately 1 minute Active high beam Turn signal in use.
and then glow steadily. This may
occur if the system cannot detect Active high beam is activated
or alert the driver of low tire pres- and on.
sure as intended.
High beams
Fault in headlight system High beams on.
A fault has occurred in the head- White/gray symbols
light system. Read the message Active high beam
in the instrument panel.
Active high beam is activated but
Lane Keeping Aid not on.
Lane Keeping Aid is alerting/ Preconditioning
intervening.
Engine and passenger compart-
ment heater/air conditioning is
preconditioning the vehicle.
}}

101
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Lane Keeping Aid Instrument panel licenses PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-
A license is an agreement on the right to con- INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
White symbol: Lane Keeping Aid COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE
duct a certain activity or the right to use
is on and lane marker lines are DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE
someone else's right according to terms and
detected. FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
conditions specified in the agreement. The
Gray symbol: Lane Keeping Aid following text is Volvo's agreement with the WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR
is on but no lane marker lines are manufacturer or developer. OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
detected. Boost Software License 1.0 IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
Rain sensor SOFTWARE.
to any person or organization obtaining a copy
The rain sensor is activated. of the software and accompanying
documentation covered by this license (the
"Software") to use, reproduce, display,
Related information distribute, execute, and transmit the Software,
• Instrument panel (p. 88) and to prepare derivative works of the
Software, and to permit third-parties to whom
the Software is furnished to do so, all subject
to the following: The copyright notices in the
Software and this entire statement, including
the above license grant, this restriction and
the following disclaimer, must be included in
all copies of the Software, in whole or in part,
and all derivative works of the Software,
unless such copies or derivative works are
solely in the form of machine-executable
object code generated by a source language
processor.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

102
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old" License WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT disclaimer in the documentation and/or
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993 LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES other materials provided with the
The Regents of the University of California. All OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR distribution.
rights reserved. A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE 3. Neither the name of the organisation nor
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE the names of its contributors may be used
Redistribution and use in source and binary
REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE to endorse or promote products derive
forms, with or without modification, are
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, from this software without specific prior
permitted provided that the following
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR written permission.
conditions are met:
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
1. Redistributions of source code must retain BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
the above copyright notice, this list of SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
conditions and the following disclaimer. OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
2. Redistributions in binary form must INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
reproduce the above copyright notice, this ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
list of conditions and the following MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
disclaimer in the documentation and/or (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
other materials provided with the IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
distribution. OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
3. All advertising materials mentioning DAMAGE. FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
features or use of this software must SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
display the following acknowledgement: BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised" License CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
This product includes software developed Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet. BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
by the University of California, Berkeley Redistribution and use in source and binary SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
and its contributors. forms, with or without modification, are OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
4. Neither the name of the University nor the permitted provided that the following INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
names of its contributors may be used to conditions are met: ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
endorse or promote products derived from IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
1. Redistributions of source code must retain (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
this software without specific prior written the above copyright notice, this list of
permission. OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
conditions and the following disclaimer. OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE 2. Redistributions in binary form must ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' reproduce the above copyright notice, this DAMAGE.
}}
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED list of conditions and the following

103
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| BSD 2-clause “Simplified” license OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS free software in commercial and freeware
Copyright (c) <YEAR>, <OWNER> All rights INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND products alike. As a consequence, its main
reserved. ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER points are that: o We don't promise that
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT this software works. However, we are be
Redistribution and use in source and binary
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as
forms, with or without modification, are
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT is' distribution) o You can use this
permitted provided that the following
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF software for whatever you want, in parts
conditions are met:
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH or full form, without having to pay us.
1. Redistributions of source code must retain DAMAGE. (`royalty-free' usage) o You may not
the above copyright notice, this list of pretend that you wrote this software. If
The views and conclusions contained in the
conditions and the following disclaimer. you use it, or only parts of it, in a program,
software and documentation are those of the
2. Redistributions in binary form must you must acknowledge somewhere in
authors and should not be interpreted as
reproduce the above copyright notice, this your documentation that you've used the
representing official policies, either expressed
list of conditions and the following FreeType code. (`credits') We specifically
or implied, of the FreeBSD Project.
disclaimer in the documentation and/or permit and encourage the inclusion of this
FreeType Project License software, with or without modifications, in
other materials provided with the
1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner, commercial products, provided that all
distribution.
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg warranty or liability claims are assumed by
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE Introduction The FreeType Project is the product vendor. Legal Terms 0.
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND distributed in several archive packages; Definitions Throughout this license, the
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY some of them may contain, in addition to terms `package', `FreeType Project', and
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, the FreeType font engine, various tools `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE and contributions which rely on, or relate originally distributed by the authors (David
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF to, the FreeType Project. This license Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A applies to all files found in such packages, Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. and which do not fall under their own they named as alpha, beta or final release.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT explicit license. The license affects thus `You' refers to the licensee, or person
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE the FreeType font engine, the test using the project, where `using' is a
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, programs, documentation and makefiles, generic term including compiling the
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR at the very least. This license was inspired project's source code as well as linking it
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG to form a `program' or `executable'. This
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, program is referred to as `a program using
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS which all encourage inclusion and use of the FreeType engine'. This license applies

104
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

to all files distributed in the original understand and accept all the terms of the following phrases to refer to this
FreeType archive, including all source this license. software in your documentation or
code, binaries and documentation, unless 2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in advertising materials: `FreeType Project',
otherwise stated in the file in its original, source and binary forms, with or without `FreeType Engine', `FreeType library', or
unmodified form as distributed in the modification, are permitted provided that `FreeType Distribution'.
original archive. If you are unsure whether the following conditions are met: o 4. Contacts There are two mailing lists
or not a particular file is covered by this Redistribution of source code must retain related to FreeType: o
license, you must contact us to verify this. this license file (`licence.txt') unaltered; [email protected] Discusses general
The FreeType project is copyright (C) any additions, deletions or changes to the use and applications of FreeType, as well
1996-1999 by David Turner, Robert original files must be clearly indicated in as future and wanted additions to the
Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights accompanying documentation. The library and distribution. If you are looking
reserved except as specified below. 1. No copyright notices of the unaltered, original for support, start in this list if you haven't
Warranty THE FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS files must be preserved in all copies of found anything to help you in the
PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT source files. o Redistribution in binary documentation. o [email protected]
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER form must provide a disclaimer that states Discusses bugs, as well as engine
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, that the software is based in part of the internals, design issues, specific licenses,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF work of the FreeType Team, in the porting, etc. o http://www.freetype.org
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR distribution documentation. We also Holds the current FreeType web page,
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT encourage you to put an URL to the which will allow you to download our
WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR FreeType web page in your latest development version and read
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR documentation, though this isn't online documentation. You can also
ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE mandatory. These conditions apply to any contact us individually at: David Turner
OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE software derived from or based on the <[email protected]> Robert
FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not FreeType code, not just the unmodified Wilhelm <[email protected]>
signed this license, you are not required to files. If you use our work, you must Werner Lemberg
accept it. However, as the FreeType acknowledge us. However, no fee need be <[email protected]>
project is copyrighted material, only this paid to us.
license, or another one contracted with
the authors, grants you the right to use, 3. Advertising The names of FreeType's
distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by authors and contributors may not be used
using, distributing, or modifying the to endorse or promote products derived
FreeType project, you indicate that you from this software without specific prior
written permission. We suggest, but do
not require, that you use one or more of }}

105
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Libpng License satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, For the purposes of this copyright and license,
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for and effort is with the user. "Contributing Authors" is defined as the
your convenience. In case of any discrepancy following set of individuals:
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through
between this copy and the notices in the file 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) Andreas Dilger
png.h that is included in the libpng 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are
distribution, the latter shall prevail. Dave Martindale
distributed according to the same disclaimer
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and and license as libpng-0.96, with the following Guy Eric Schalnat
LICENSE: individuals added to the list of Contributing Paul Schmidt
Authors:
If you modify libpng you may insert additional Tim Wegner
notices immediately following this sentence. Tom Lane
The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through Glenn Randers-Pehrson IS". The Contributing Authors and Group 42,
1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c) Willem van Schaik Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or
2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are implied, including, without limitation, the
distributed according to the same disclaimer libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through
warranties of merchantability and of fitness for
and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997
any purpose. The Contributing Authors and
individuals added to the list of Contributing Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the
Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct,
Authors same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88,
indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or
with the following individuals added to the list
Simon-Pierre Cadieux consequential damages, which may result
of Contributing Authors:
from the use of the PNG Reference Library,
Eric S. Raymond John Bowler even if advised of the possibility of such
Gilles Vollant damage.
Kevin Bracey
and with the following additions to the Permission is hereby granted to use, copy,
Sam Bushell
disclaimer: modify, and distribute this source code, or
Magnus Holmgren portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee,
There is no warranty against interference with
Greg Roelofs subject to the following restrictions:
your enjoyment of the library or against
infringement. There is no warranty that our Tom Tanner
efforts or the library will fulfill any of your
particular purposes or needs. This library is libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88,
provided with all faults, and the entire risk of January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996
Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.

106
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

1. The origin of this source code must not be MIT License zlib License
misrepresented. Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders> The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c) <year>
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked <copyright holders>
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
as such and must not be misrepresented to any person obtaining a copy of this This software is provided 'as-is', without any
as being the original source. software and associated documentation files express or implied warranty. In no event will
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed (the "Software"), to deal in the Software the authors be held liable for any damages
or altered from any source or altered without restriction, including without arising from the use of this software.
source distribution. limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
software for any purpose, including
specifically permit, without fee, and encourage sell copies of the Software, and to permit
commercial applications, and to alter it and
the use of this source code as a component to persons to whom the Software is furnished to
redistribute it freely, subject to the following
supporting the PNG file format in commercial do so, subject to the following conditions:
restrictions:
products. If you use this source code in a The above copyright notice and this
1. The origin of this software must not be
product, acknowledgment is not required but permission notice shall be included in all
misrepresented; you must not claim that
would be appreciated. copies or substantial portions of the Software.
you wrote the original software. If you use
A "png_get_copyright" function is available, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", this software in a product, an
for convenient use in "about" boxes and the WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, acknowledgment in the product
like: EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT documentation would be appreciated but
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL)); NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF is not required.
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A 2. Altered source versions must be plainly
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND marked as such, and must not be
is supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL misrepresented as being the original
"pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS software.
(98x31). BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION 3. This notice may not be removed or altered
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source from any source distribution.
Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
certification mark of the Open Source ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
Initiative. CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
Glenn Randers-Pehrson [email protected] SOFTWARE.
April 15, 2002

}}

107
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| SGI Free Software B License Version 2.0. CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR App menu in instrument panel
SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE The App menu in the instrument panel pro-
2.0, Sept. 18, 2008) SOFTWARE. vides quick access to commonly used func-
Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Except as contained in this notice, the name of tions for certain apps.
Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, advertising or otherwise to promote the sale,
to any person obtaining a copy of this use or other dealings in this Software without
software and associated documentation files prior written authorization from Silicon
(the "Software"), to deal in the Software Graphics, Inc.
without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, Related information
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or • Instrument panel (p. 88)
sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software is furnished to
do so, subject to the following conditions: The
above copyright notice including the dates of
first publication and either this permission The illustration is generic.
notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/ The App menu in the instrument panel can be
projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies used instead of the center display and is then
or substantial portions of the Software. controlled using the right-side steering wheel
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", keypad. The app menu makes it easier to
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, switch between different apps or functions
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT within the apps without having to let go of the
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF steering wheel.
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
App menu functions
Different apps provide access to different
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
types of functions. The following apps and
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR
their functions can be controlled from the App
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
menu:
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN

108
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

App Functions Handling the App menu in the Opening and closing the app menu
instrument panel – Tap open/close (1).
Trip com- Select a trip odometer, The App menu in the instrument panel is con- > The App men opens/closes.
puter change instrument panel dis- trolled using the right-side steering wheel
play settings, etc. keypad. NOTE
Media Select active source for The App menu cannot be opened while
player media player. there is an unacknowledged message in
Phone Call a contact from the call the instrument panel. The message must
list. be acknowledged before the App menu
can be opened.
Navigation Guide to destination, etc.

Related information The App menu turns off automatically after a

• Instrument panel (p. 88) period of inactivity or after certain selections
are made.
• Center display overview (p. 114)
• Handling the App menu in the instrument Navigating and making selections in
panel (p. 109) App menu and right-side steering wheel keypad. The the App menu
illustration is generic. 1. Navigate between apps by tapping left or
Open/close right (2).
Left/right > Functions for the previous/next app will
be shown in the App menu.
Up/down 2. Scroll through the functions for the
Confirm selected app using the up or down arrows
(3).
3. Confirm or make a selection for the func-
tion by pressing confirm (4).
> The function will be activated and, for
some selections, the App menu will
then close.

}}

109
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| The next time the App menu is opened, the Messages in the instrument panel The message may be shown along with
functions for the most recently selected app The instrument panel shows messages in graphics, symbols or buttons to e.g. acknowl-
will be displayed automatically. certain circumstances to inform or assist the edge the message or accept a request.
driver.
Related information
• App menu in instrument panel (p. 108)
• Messages in the instrument panel
(p. 110)

Example of message in the instrument panel. The

illustration is generic - details may vary according to
vehicle model.
High-priority messages for the driver are dis-
played in the instrument panel.
The messages may appear in different parts of
the instrument panel depending on what other
information is currently being displayed. The
message will disappear from the instrument
panel after a short period of time or after it has
been acknowledged or any required action has
been taken. Messages that need to be saved
are stored in the Car Status app, which can
be opened from the App view in the center
display.

110
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Service messages Message Meaning Handling messages in the

The following table lists a selection of impor- instrument panel
tant service messages and what they mean. Regular main- Time for service - contact Messages in the instrument panel are con-
tenance a workshopB. Shown trolled using the right-side steering wheel
Message Meaning when the date for service keypad.
Maintenance
has passed.
overdue
Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of Temporarily A function has been tem-
damage - contact a offA porarily deactivated and
workshopB. will be reactivated auto-
matically while driving or
Turn off Stop and switch off the
after the engine is restar-
engineA engine. Serious risk of
ted.
damage - contact a
workshopB. A Part of message, shown along with information on the loca-
tion of the problem.
B An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Service urgent Contact a workshopB to
Drive to work- have the vehicle inspec- Related information
shopA ted immediately. • Handling messages in the instrument Examples of messages in the instrument panel and
panel (p. 111) the right-side steering wheel keypad. The illustration
Service Contact a workshopB to is generic - details may vary according to vehicle
requiredA have the vehicle inspec- • Handling messages saved from the instru- model.
ted as soon as possible. ment panel (p. 112) Left/right
• Messages in the center display (p. 144)
Regular main- Time for service - contact Confirm
tenance a workshopB. Shown
before the next service Some messages in the instrument panel con-
Book time for tain one or more buttons for e.g. confirming
date.
maintenance the message or accepting a request.
Regular main- Time for service - contact
tenance a workshopB. Shown on
the next service date.
Time for main-
tenance
}}

111
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Handling new messages Handling messages saved from the Reading saved messages
For messages with buttons: instrument panel To read a saved message immediately:
1. Navigate between the buttons by tapping Messages saved from the instrument panel – Tap the button to the right of the message
left or right (1). and center displays are handled in the center Vehicle message stored in Car Status
display. app in the center display.
2. Confirm your selection by pressing con-
firm (2). > The saved message will be displayed in
> The message will disappear from the the Car Status app.
instrument panel. To read saved messages at a later time:
For messages without buttons: 1. Open the Car Status app from App view
– Close the message by pressing confirm in the center display.
(2) or let the message automatically time- > The app will open in the bottom tile of
out after a short period. Home view.
> The message will disappear from the 2. Select the Messages tab in the app.
instrument panel. > A list of saved messages will be dis-
Messages that need to be saved are stored in played.
the Car Status app, which can be opened Saved messages can be viewed in the Car Status 3. Tap a message to expand/minimize it.
from the App view in the center display. The app.
> More information about the message
message Vehicle message stored in Car The messages displayed in will appear in the list and the image to
Status app will simultaneously appear in the the instrument panel that the left of the app will display informa-
center display. need to be saved are stored tion about the message in graphic form.
in the Car Status app in the
Related information
center display. The message
• Messages in the instrument panel (p. 110)
Vehicle message stored in
• Handling messages saved from the instru- Car Status app will simulta-
ment panel (p. 112) neously appear in the center display.
• Messages in the center display (p. 144)

112
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Handling saved messages Related information

In expanded form, some messages have two • Messages in the instrument panel (p. 110)
buttons available for booking service or read- • Handling messages in the instrument
ing the Owner's Manual. panel (p. 111)
Booking service for saved messages: • Messages in the center display (p. 144)
– With the message in expanded form, tap
Request appoint./Call to make
Appointment3 for assistance booking
service.
> With Request appoint.: The
Appointments tab will open in the app
and create a request for a service/repair
appointment.
With Call to make Appointment: The
phone app will open and call a service
center to make an appointment for
service or repairs.
Reading the Owner's Manual for saved mes-
sages:
– With the message in expanded form, tap
Owner's manual to read relevant infor-
mation about the message in the Owner's
Manual.
> The Owner's Manual will open in the
center display and provide information
related to the message.
Saved messages in the app are automatically
deleted each time the engine is started.

3 Market dependent. Volvo ID and selected workshop also need to be registered.

113
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Center display overview display and its possibilities are presented

Many of the vehicle's functions can be con- below.
trolled from the center display. The center

Three of the center display's basic views. Swipe to the right/left to access Function or App view4.

114
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Function view ‒ vehicle functions that can Navigation ‒ takes you to map navigation • Function view in the center display
be activated or deactivated with one tap. with e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap the tile (p. 126)
Certain functions, called "trigger func- to expand it. • Apps (p. 488)
tions", open windows with settings Media ‒ most recently used media-related
options. One example is the Camera. Set- • Symbols in the center display status bar
apps. Tap the tile to expand it. (p. 128)
tings for the head-up display* are also
started from Function view, but adjusted Phone ‒ used to access phone-related • Changing settings in the center display's
using the right-side steering wheel key- functions. Tap the tile to expand it. Top view (p. 136)
pad. Fourth tile ‒ most recently used apps or • Opening contextual setting in the center
Home view ‒ the initial view displayed vehicle functions not associated with the display (p. 137)
when the screen is turned on. other tiles. Tap the tile to expand it.
• Owner's Manual in the center display
App view – shows downloaded apps Climate row - information and direct inter- (p. 17)
(third-party apps) as well as apps for inte- action to set temperature and seat heating
• Media player (p. 507)
grated functions, such as FM radio. Tap for example*. Tap the symbol in the center
of the climate bar to open Climate view • Phone (p. 523)
an app icon to open that app.
and additional setting options. • Climate system controls (p. 216)
Status bar ‒ current vehicle activities are
shown at the top of the screen. Network • Turning off and adjusting the volume of
NOTE the center display system sounds (p. 135)
and connection information is shown to
the left of the status bar. Media-related The climate system can be used to cool • Changing the appearance of the center
information, the clock and information down the media system in the center dis- display (p. 135)
about background activities are shown to play if needed. In these cases, the message
Climate system Cooling the • Changing system language (p. 136)
the right.
infotainment system will be shown in the • Changing system units of measurement
Top view ‒ pull the tab down to open Top
instrument panel. (p. 136)
view. From here, you can access Settings,
Owner's manual, Profile and messages • Cleaning the center display (p. 649)
stored in the vehicle. In certain cases, con- Related information • Messages in the center display (p. 144)
textual setting (e.g. Navigation Settings) • Handling the center display (p. 116)
and the contextual Owner's Manual (e.g. • Navigating in the center display's views
Navigation Manual) can also be accessed (p. 119)
in Top view.

4 In right-hand drive vehicles, these views are mirror images of the ones shown here.

* Option/accessory. 115
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Handling the center display tapping. It is possible to e.g. move between CAUTION
Many of the vehicle's functions and features different views, mark objects and scroll in a
list by touching the screen in various ways. Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
can be controlled and adjusted from the cen-
this could cause scratches.
ter display. The center display is a An infrared light curtain just above the surface
touchscreen that reacts to taps and other of the screen enables the screen to detect
gestures. when a finger is directly in front of the screen.
The following table presents the various pro-
This technology makes it possible to use the
Using the center display's screen even while wearing gloves.
cedures for using the screen:
touchscreen
The screen reacts differently depending on Two people can interact with the screen at the
whether it is touched by dragging, swiping or same time, e.g. to adjust climate system set-
tings for both the driver and passenger sides.

Procedure Gesture Result

Tap once. Marks an object, confirms a selection or activates a function.
Double-tap. Zooms in on a digital object, such as a map.
Press and hold. Grabs hold of an object so it can be moved. Can be used to move apps or points on a map. Press and hold
your finger on the screen and drag the object to the desired position.

Tap once with two Zooms out from a digital object, such as a map.
fingers.

116
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Procedure Gesture Result

Drag Moves between screen views or scrolls in a list, text or a view. Press and hold to drag apps or points on a
map. Drag horizontally or vertically over the screen.

Swipe Moves between screen views or scrolls in a list, text or a view. Drag horizontally or vertically over the
screen.
Note that touching the upper part of the screen could cause Top view to open.

Stretch Zooms in.

Pinch Zooms out.

}}

117
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Returning to Home view from another • drag the control to the desired tempera-
view ture,
1. Briefly press the home button below the • tap + or − to raise or lower the tempera-
center display. ture by degrees, or
> The most recent Home view mode will • tap the desired temperature on the con-
be displayed. trol.
2. Press briefly again.
Related information
> All of the Home view's tiles will return • Activating and deactivating the center dis-
to standard mode. play (p. 119)
• Moving apps and buttons in the center
NOTE display (p. 128)
The scroll indicator will be shown in the center dis-
In Home view's standard mode – short play when it is possible to scroll in the view. • Using the center display keyboard
press on the Home button. An animation (p. 130)
describing access to the various views is Using the center display controls
shown on the screen.

Scrolling in lists, articles or views

A scroll indicator is displayed on the screen
when it is possible to scroll up or down in the
view. Swipe down/up anywhere in the view.

Temperature control.
Digital controls are available for many of the
vehicle's functions. For example, to set the
temperature:

118
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Activating and deactivating the 1. Press and hold the button beneath the Navigating in the center display's
center display screen. views
The center display can be temporarily > The screen will go dark (the climate bar There are five different basic views in the cen-
switched off and reactivated using the home will remain visible). All functions con- ter display: Home view, Top view, Climate
button under the screen. nected to the screen continue to oper- view, App view and Function view. The
ate. screen is automatically activated when the
2. To reactivate the screen, briefly press the driver's door is opened.
Home button. Home view
> The view that was displayed before the Home view is the view displayed when the
screen was turned off will be displayed screen is activated. It consists of four tiles:
again. Navigation, Media, Phone and a fourth tile.
An app or vehicle function selected from the
NOTE App or Function views will start in the respec-
The screen cannot be turned off when a tive tile in Home view. FM radio, for example,
prompt to perform an action is being dis- will start in the Media tile.
played on the screen.
The extra tile displays the most recently used
Center display's home button.
app or vehicle function that is not related to
When the home button is used, the screen will the other three tiles.
NOTE
go dark and the touchscreen no longer reacts
to touch. The climate bar will remain visible. The center display is turned off automati- The tiles display brief information about the
All functions connected to the screen continue cally when the engine is off and the driver's respective apps.
to operate, such as climate, audio, guiding* door is opened.
and apps. The center display screen can be NOTE
cleaned when the display is dimmed. The dim- Related information When the vehicle is started, information on
ming function can also be used to darken the • Cleaning the center display (p. 649) the current status of apps will be displayed
screen so it is not a distraction while driving. in the respective tile in Home view.
• Changing the appearance of the center
display (p. 135)
• Center display overview (p. 114)

}}

* Option/accessory. 119
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| NOTE Top view the digital Owner's Manual related to the

content shown on the screen, directly in
In Home view's standard mode – short Top view.
press on the Home button. An animation
describing access to the various views is To exit Top view, tap the screen outside Top
shown on the screen. view, press the Home button or tap the screen
at the bottom of Top view and swipe upward.
The views behind will become visible again
NOTE and can be used.
When the vehicle is moving:
Certain functions (e.g. using the center
NOTE
•
display's keyboard) may be deacti- The top view is not available at start-up/
vated. shutdown or when a message is being
Certain texts (e.g. those generated by Top view when expanded. shown on the screen. Similarly, it is not
•
apps) will be shortened to three rows. There is a tab in the center of the status bar at available when the climate view is shown.
Tap the Read out button to have the the top of the screen. Open Top view by tap-
entire message read aloud. ping the tab or by dragging/swiping from the Climate view
• Text messages will be shortened to top of the screen downward. The climate bar is always visible at the bottom
one row. Tap the Read out button to Top view always provides access to: of the screen. The most common climate set-
have the entire message read aloud. tings can be made directly there, such as set-
• Settings ting temperature and seat heating*.

Status bar
• Owner's manual Tap the symbol in the center of the
Current vehicle activities are shown at the top • Profile climate bar to open Climate view
of the screen in the status bar. Network and • The vehicle's stored messages. and access additional climate sys-
connection information is shown to the left of tem settings.
In certain cases, Top view provides access to:
the status bar. Media-related information, the Tap the symbol to close Climate
clock and information about background activ- • Contextual setting (e.g. Navigation view and return to a previous view.
ities are shown to the right. Settings). Change settings directly in Top
view when an app (e.g. navigation) is
being used.
• Contextual Owner's Manual (e.g.
Navigation Manual). Access articles in

120 * Option/accessory.
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

App view Tap an app to open it. It will then be opened in Function view
its associated tile, e.g. Media.
Depending on the number of apps, it is possi-
ble to scroll down in App view. This is done by
sweeping/dragging from the bottom upwards.
To return to Home view, swipe the screen
from left to right5 or press the Home button.

App view showing the vehicle's apps. Function view with buttons for various vehicle func-
tions.
Swipe the screen from right to left5
to access
the App view from the Home view. This view Swipe the screen from left to right5 to access
displays downloaded apps (third-party apps) Function view from Home view. From Func-
as well as apps for integrated functions, such tion view, you can activate or deactivate vari-
as FM radio. Brief information will be dis- ous vehicle functions such as BLIS*, Lane
played directly in App view for certain apps, Keeping Aid* and Park Assist*.
such as unread text messages for Messages.

5 Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction. }}

* Option/accessory. 121
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| If there are many functions, you can also scroll

downward through the view. This is done by
sweeping/dragging from the bottom upwards.
Unlike in App view, where you tap an app to
open it, in Function view, tapping a function
activates or deactivates it. Certain functions
(trigger functions) open in their own window
when tapped.
To return to Home view, swipe the screen
from right to left5 or press the Home button.

Related information
• Handling tiles in the center display
(p. 123)
• Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 128)
• Changing settings in the center display's
Top view (p. 136)
• Opening contextual setting in the center
display (p. 137)
• Owner's Manual in the center display
(p. 17)
• Driver profiles (p. 140)
• Climate system controls (p. 216)
• Apps (p. 488)
• Function view in the center display
(p. 126)
• Center display overview (p. 114)

5 Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction.

122
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Handling tiles in the center display

Home view consists of four tiles: Navigation,
Media, Phone and a fourth tile. These views
can be expanded.

}}

123
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Expanding a tile from standard mode

Standard mode and expanded mode of a tile in the center display.

124
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Expanding a tile: In expanded mode, open the Related information

app in full-screen mode. Tap • Handling the center display (p. 116)
– For tiles Navigation, Media and Phone:
the symbol. Activating and deactivating the center dis-
Tap the screen anywhere in the tile. When •
a tile is expanded, the extra tile in Home play (p. 119)
view will be temporarily hidden. The other • Navigating in the center display's views
two tiles will be minimized and only show (p. 119)
certain information. When the extra tile is To return to expanded mode,
tapped, the other three tiles are minimized tap the symbol or press the
and only certain information is displayed. Home button under the
Expanded view provides access to the screen.
basic functions of the respective apps.
Closing an expanded tile:
– The tile can be closed in three different
ways:
• Tap the top section of the expanded
tile.
• Tap another tile (it will then be opened
in expanded mode instead).
• Press briefly on the Home button under
the center display.

Opening or closing a tile in full-screen

mode
The fourth tile6 and tile for Navigation can be Center display's home button.
opened in full-screen mode to show additional You can always press the Home button to
information and possible settings. return to Home view. To return to Home
When a tile is opened in full-screen mode, no view's standard view from full-screen mode,
information from the other tiles is displayed. press the Home button twice.

6 Does not apply to all apps or vehicle functions opened via the fourth tile.

125
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Function view in the center display navigate to Function view by swiping from Different types of buttons
Function view, which is one of the center dis- left to right over the screen7. There are three different types of buttons for
play's basic views, contains all of the vehi- vehicle functions; see below:
cle's function buttons. From the Home view,

Type of button Functions Vehicle function affected

Function buttons Have On/Off modes. Most buttons in Function view are
function buttons.
When a function is active, an LED indicator light will illuminate to the left of the but-
ton's icon. Press the button to turn the function on or off.
Trigger buttons Do not have On/Off modes. • Camera
Pressing a trigger button opens a window for the function. This can be, for example, a • Headrest Fold
window to change seat position. • Head-up Display Adjustments
Parking buttons Have On/Off and scanning modes. • Park In
Similar to function buttons, but have an extra mode for parking scanning. • Park Out

7 Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction.

126
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Button modes

The function is deactivated when the LED

When a function or parking button's LED indi- indicator light is switched off.
cator is green, the function is activated (on).
For some functions, an additional text explain-
ing the function will be shown when the func-
tion is initially activated. The text will be dis-
played for a few seconds and then the button
will be displayed with the LED indicator illumi-
nated.
For Lane Keeping Aid, for example, the text
Works only at certain speeds will be dis-
played when the button is pressed. A warning triangle in the right-hand section of
Press the button once briefly to activate or the button indicates that something is not
deactivate the function. working correctly.

Related information
• Handling the center display (p. 116)
• Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 119)

127
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Moving apps and buttons in the NOTE Symbols in the center display
center display status bar
Hide the apps that are rarely or never used
The apps and buttons for vehicle functions Overview of symbols displayed in the center
by moving them far down, outside of the
can be moved and organized in the App and display status bar.
visible view. This makes it easier to find the
Function views. The status bar shows current vehicle activities
apps used more frequently.
1. Swipe from right to left8 to access App and in certain cases, also their status. Due to
view or swipe from left to right8 to access the limited space in the status bar, not all sym-
Function view. NOTE bols will be displayed at all times.
2. Press and hold an app or button. Apps and vehicle function buttons cannot
be situated at spots already in use. Symbol Meaning
> The app or button will change size and
become slightly transparent. It can then Connected to the Internet.
be moved. Related information
3. Drag the app or button to an available • Function view in the center display Roaming activated.
position in the view. (p. 126)
• Apps (p. 488) Cell phone network signal
A maximum of 48 rows can be used to posi- strength.
tion apps or buttons. To move an app or but- • Handling the center display (p. 116)
ton outside the visible view, drag it to the bot- Bluetooth device connected.
tom of the view. New rows will be added and
the app or button can be placed in one of Bluetooth activated but no
these. device connected.
Apps or buttons placed below the view's nor- Information sent to and from
mal display will not be visible on the screen. GPS.
Swipe the screen to scroll up or down in the Connected to Wi-Fi network.
view to display information outside the view.

8 Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction.

128
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning

Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hot- Traffic information being
spot). This means that the vehi- received.B
cle shares an available Internet
connection. Clock.

Vehicle modem activated. A Only hybrid models.

B Not available in all markets.

USB sharing active.

Related information
• Navigating in the center display's views
Phone is wirelessly charging. (p. 119)
• Messages in the center display (p. 144)
Action in progress.
• Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538)
Timer for preconditioning active.A • Connecting a device via the USB port
(p. 514)
Audio source being played. • Wireless phone charger* (p. 532)
• Phone (p. 523)
Audio source paused.
• Date and time (p. 98)
Phone call in progress.

Audio source muted.

News broadcasts from current

radio station.B

* Option/accessory. 129
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Using the center display keyboard

You can use the keyboard in the center dis-
play to enter characters or to switch to hand-
writing mode to "write" letters and charac-
ters on the screen.
The keyboard can be used to enter characters
(letters, numbers, symbols, etc.) to e.g. send
text messages from the vehicle, enter pass-
words or search for information in the digital
Owner's Manual.
The keyboard will only appear when it is possi-
ble to enter text on the screen.

NOTE
The keyboard cannot be used while the
vehicle is moving.

130
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

The illustration shows an overview of some of the buttons that may be shown on the keyboard. The appearance may vary depending on language settings and the context
in which the keyboard is used.

}}

131
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Row showing suggestions for words or The first letter entered in text fields will that has been entered. The button's appear-
characters9. The suggested words change also be uppercase. In text fields intended ance differs depending on the context.
as new letters are entered. Scroll through for names or addresses, each word will be
the list of suggested words by tapping the automatically started with an uppercase Variants of letters or characters
right or left arrows. Tap a suggestion to letter. In text fields intended for pass-
select it. Please note that this function is words, website addresses or email
not available in all languages. When addresses, all letters will automatically be
unavailable, this row will not be shown on lowercase unless uppercase is selected.
the keyboard. Used to enter numbers. The number key-
Available characters are adapted to the board (2) will then be displayed. Tap
language selected for the keyboard (see , which is shown instead of in
number 7 below). Tap a character to enter number mode, to return to the keyboard
it. with letters, or to display the key-
Different buttons are displayed here board with special characters.
depending on the context in which the Used to change the keyboard language,
keyboard is used, e.g. @ to enter an email e.g. EN. The available characters and word
address or the return key to start a new Variants of a letter or character, e.g. é or è, can
suggestions (1) vary depending on the
line. be entered by pressing and holding the letter
selected language. In order to toggle
or character. A box containing possible vari-
This button hides the keyboard. In cases between keyboard languages, the lan-
ants of the letter or character will appear. Tap
where this is not possible, the button will guages must first be added under Set-
the desired variant. If no variant is selected,
not be displayed. tings.
the original letter/character will be used.
Used to enter uppercase letters. Tap once Space bar.
to enter one uppercase letter and then Related information
continue with lowercase letters. Tap twice Delete. Tap to delete characters one at a • Changing keyboard language in the center
for caps lock (all text will be entered in time. Press and hold to delete multiple display (p. 133)
uppercase letters). Tap again to return the characters quickly.
• Entering characters, letters and words by
keyboard to lowercase letters. In this Used to change to handwriting mode. hand in the center display (p. 133)
mode, the first letter after a period, excla-
Tap the confirm button over the keyboard (not • Handling the center display (p. 116)
mation point or question mark will be
automatically entered in uppercase form. shown in illustration) once to confirm the text • Handling text messages (p. 528)

9 For Asian languages.

132
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Changing keyboard language in Toggling between keyboard languages Entering characters, letters and
the center display If more than one language words by hand in the center
In order to toggle between keyboard lan- has been selected in display
guages, the languages must first be added Settings, the button in the Characters, letters and words can be entered
under Settings. keyboard can be used to in the center display by handwriting them on
switch between the different the touchscreen.
Adding or deleting languages in languages. Tap the button on the center
Settings display's keyboard to switch
To toggle between keyboard languages from
The keyboard is automatically set to the same from the keyboard to hand-
the list:
language as the system language. The key- writing mode.
board language can be manually changed 1. Press and hold the button.
without affecting the system language. > A list will appear.
1. Tap Settings in Top view. 2. Select the desired language. If more than
2. Tap System System Languages and four languages have been selected under
Settings, you can scroll through the list
Units Keyboard Layouts.
shown on the keyboard.
3. Select one or more languages in the list. > The keyboard and word suggestions
> It is now possible to toggle between will be adapted to the selected lan-
the selected languages using the key- guage.
board. To change keyboard language without display-
If no language has been selected under ing the list:
Settings, the keyboard will remain in the – Tap the button.
same language as the vehicle's system lan-
guage. > The keyboard layout will change to the
next language in the list without dis- Space for entering characters/letters/
playing the list. words/parts of words.
Related information Text field displaying suggested characters
• Changing system language (p. 136) or words10 as they are written on the
screen (1).
• Using the center display keyboard (p. 130)

10 Certain system languages only. }}

133
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Suggestions for characters/letters/words/ Handwriting characters/letters/words Erasing/changing handwritten characters/

parts of words. You can scroll through the 1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts letters
list. of a word in the field for handwritten let-
Space bar. Blank spaces can be created ters (1). Write the word or part of the word
by writing a dash (‒) in the field for hand- vertically or horizontally.
written letters (1). See "Writing blank > A number of suggestions for charac-
spaces in free-text fields" below. ters, letters or words will be displayed
Delete. Tap once to erase one character/ (3). The most likely will be shown at the
letter at a time. Wait a moment before top of the list.
tapping again to erase the next character,
letter etc. CAUTION
Erase text in the text field (2) by swiping over the
Return to the standard keyboard layout. Do not use sharp objects on the screen as handwriting field (1).
this could cause scratches.
Switch off/on screen tap sounds. – Characters/letters can be erased or
changed in several ways:
Hide the keyboard. In cases where this is 2. The character/letter/word will be entered
not possible, the button will not be dis- automatically after a short pause if no • Tap the desired letter or word in the list
played. other action is taken. (3).
Change language for text input. > The character/letter/word at the top of • Tap the delete button (5) to erase the
the list will be used. Tap one of the letter and start again.
other characters/letters/words in the • Swipe horizontally from right to left11
list to use it instead. over the handwriting field (1). Erase
several letters at once by swiping over
the area several times.
• Tap the X box in the text field (2) to
erase all written text.

11 For Arabic keyboards, swipe in the other direction. Swiping from right to left will create a blank space.

134
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

New lines in free-text fields in handwriting Changing the appearance of the Turning off and adjusting the
mode center display volume of the center display
The appearance of the center display can be system sounds
changed by selecting a different theme. The volume of the center display system
1. Tap Settings in the Top view. sounds can be adjusted or turned off com-
pletely.
2. Tap My Car Displays Display 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center
Themes. display.
3. Select a theme, e.g. Minimalistic or
2. Tap Sound System Volumes.
Chrome Rings.
3. Pull the control under Touch Sounds to
In addition to these themes, you can also
Create a new line by drawing above the characters in adjust the volume or turn off screen tap
the handwriting field as shown in the illustration12.
choose between Normal and Bright. In
sounds. Pull the control to the desired
Normal, the background of the screen is dark
Writing blank spaces in free-text fields sound level.
and the text is light. This option is the default
setting for all themes. If the bright version is Related information
selected, the background will be light and the • Center display overview (p. 114)
text will be dark. This option can, for example,
make the screen easier to see in bright day- • Changing settings in the center display's
light conditions. Top view (p. 136)
• Sound settings (p. 486)
These alternatives are always available for
selection and are not affected by the ambient
lighting.
Make a blank space by drawing a line from left to Related information
right13.
• Changing settings in the center display's
Related information Top view (p. 136)
• Using the center display keyboard (p. 130) • Activating and deactivating the center dis-
play (p. 119)
• Cleaning the center display (p. 649)

12 For Arabic keyboards, draw the same character, but in mirror image.
13 For Arabic keyboards, draw the line from right to left.

135
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Changing system units of Changing system language Changing settings in the center
measurement Language settings are adjusted in the display's Top view
Unit settings are adjusted in the Settings Settings menu in the center display. You can change settings and information for
menu in the center display. NOTE many of the vehicle's functions via the center
1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center display.
display. Changing languages in the center display
could mean that certain owner's informa- 1. Open Top view by tapping the tab at the
2. Proceed to System System tion will not comply with national or local top of the screen or by dragging/swiping
laws and regulations. Do not change to a from the top of the screen downward.
Languages and Units Units of
Measurement. language you do not speak well, as it can 2. Tap Settings to open the Settings menu.
be difficult to find your way back through
3. Choose a measurement standard:
the menu.
• Metric - kilometers, liters and degrees
Celsius. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center
• Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees display.
Celsius.
2. Proceed to System System
• US - miles, gallons and degrees Fah- Languages and Units.
renheit.
3. Select System Language.
> The units in the instrument panel, cen-
ter display and head-up display are A voice control symbol indicates that the
changed. language can be used for voice com-
mands.
Related information > Languages in the instrument panel, Top view with Settings button.
• Center display overview (p. 114)
center display and head-up display are 3. Tap one of the categories and sub-catego-
• Changing settings in the center display's changed. ries to navigate to the desired setting.
Top view (p. 136)
Related information 4. Change the setting(s). Different types of
• Changing system language (p. 136) settings are changed in different ways.
• Center display overview (p. 114)
> Changes are saved immediately.
• Changing settings in the center display's
Top view (p. 136)
• Changing system units of measurement
(p. 136)

136
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Opening contextual setting in the 2. Tap Navigation Settings.

center display > The navigation settings page will open.
Most of the settings for the vehicle's basic 3. Change the desired settings and confirm.
apps can be changed directly in Top view in
the center display via contextual settings. Tap Close or press the Home button under
the center display to close Settings view.
Most of the vehicle's basic apps have this con-
textual setting option, but not all.

Third-party apps
Third-party apps are apps that are not factory-
installed in the vehicle's system, but can be
A sub-category in the Settings menu with various downloaded, e.g. Volvo ID. Settings for these
possible settings; has a multi-selection button and
apps are changed in the apps themselves, not
radio buttons.
in Top view.
Related information
• Center display overview (p. 114) Related information
Top view with button for contextual settings. • Changing settings in the center display's
• Resetting center display settings (p. 138) Top view (p. 136)
• Table of settings in the center display Contextual setting is a shortcut for accessing
specific settings related to the active function • Center display overview (p. 114)
(p. 139)
displayed on the screen. Apps that are factory- • Resetting center display settings (p. 138)
installed in your vehicle, e.g. FM radio and • Download apps (p. 489)
USB, are part of Sensus and are used to con-
trol the vehicle's integrated functions. The set-
tings for these apps can be changed directly
via contextual setting in Top view.
When contextual setting is available:
1. Pull down Top view when an app is in
expanded form, e.g. Navigation.

137
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Resetting user data when the Resetting center display settings 4. Tap OK to confirm the reset.
vehicle changes owners All settings made in the center display's Set- For Reset Personal Settings, confirm
If the vehicle changes owners, all user data tings menu can be reset to default values. the reset by tapping Reset for the active
and system settings should be reset to fac- profile or Reset for all profiles.
tory defaults. Two types of reset
There are two types of reset in the Settings > The selected settings will be reset.
Vehicle settings can be reset at different lev-
els. Reset all user data and system settings to menu:
Related information
their original factory defaults when the vehicle • Factory Reset- erases all data and files • Center display overview (p. 114)
changes owner. It is also important to change and resets all settings to factory default. • Changing settings in the center display's
the owner of the Volvo On Call service.
• Reset Personal Settings- erases per- Top view (p. 136)
Related information sonal data and resets personalized set- • Table of settings in the center display
• Resetting center display settings (p. 138) tings to factory default. (p. 139)
• Resetting driver profile settings (p. 144) Resetting settings
Follow these instructions to reset the settings.

NOTE
Factory Reset is only possible when the
vehicle is stationary.

1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top

view.
2. Proceed to System Factory Reset.
3. Select the type of reset you would like to
do.
> A pop-up window will appear.

138
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Table of settings in the center Sub-categories Sub-categories

display
The center display's Settings menu has a Locking Gracenote®
number of main categories and sub-catego- Parking Brake and Suspension Video
ries that contain settings and information for
many of the vehicle's features and functions. Wipers
Communication
There are seven main categories: My Car,
Sound, Navigation, Media, Sound Sub-categories
Communication, Climate and System. Sub-categories Phone
Each category, in turn, contains a number of
Tone Text Messages
sub-categories and possible settings. The
table below shows the first level of sub-cate- Balance Android Auto*
gories. The possible settings for a function or
an area are described in more detail in their System Volumes Apple CarPlay*
respective sections of the Owner's Manual.
Navigation Bluetooth Devices
Some settings are personal, which means that
they can be saved to a Driver Profiles. Others Sub-categories Wi-Fi
are global, which means that they are not Map Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
linked to a driver profile.
Route and Guidance Vehicle Modem Internet
My Car
Traffic Volvo On Call
Sub-categories
Volvo Service Networks
Displays Media
IntelliSafe Sub-categories Climate
The Climate main category does not have any
Drive Preferences/Individual Drive AM/FM Radio
sub-categories.
Mode* SiriusXM
Lights and Lighting SiriusXM Travel Link
Mirrors and Convenience
}}

* Option/accessory. 139
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| System Driver profiles Keyboard layout is an example of a global set-

Many of the vehicle's settings can be cus- ting. If driver profile X is used to add additional
Sub-categories
tomized to the driver's personal preferences keyboard languages, these languages will also
Driver Profile and saved in one or more driver profiles. be available for driver profile Y. The settings
These personal settings are automatically for keyboard layout are not saved to a specific
Date and Time driver profile - the settings are global.
saved in the active driver profile. Each key can
System Languages and Units be linked to one driver profile. When the linked Personal settings
key is used, the vehicle is customized to the If driver profile X has been used to e.g., set the
Privacy and Data specific settings of that driver profile. brightness for the center display, driver profile
Keyboard Layouts Y will not be affected by this setting. It will
Which settings are saved in driver only be saved to driver profile X because
Voice Control* profiles? brightness setting is a personal setting.
Many of the settings made in the vehicle will
Factory Reset be automatically stored in the active driver Related information
profile if the profile is not protected. The vehi- • Selecting a driver profile (p. 141)
System Information
cle has settings that can be made either per- Changing a driver profile's name (p. 141)
•
sonal or global. The personal settings are
Related information • Linking a remote key to a driver profile
saved in driver profiles.
• Center display overview (p. 114) (p. 142)
Changing settings in the center display's Settings that can be saved in a driver profile
• • Protecting a driver profile (p. 142)
Top view (p. 136) include, among other things, screens, mirrors,
front seats, navigation*, audio and media sys- • Resetting driver profile settings (p. 144)
• Resetting center display settings (p. 138) tem, language and voice control. • Table of settings in the center display
Some settings are global settings. These set- (p. 139)
tings can be changed but are not saved to a
specific driver profile. Changes to global set-
tings affect all profiles.
Global settings
Global settings do not change when driver
profiles are changed. They remain the same
regardless of which driver profile is currently
active.

140 * Option/accessory.
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Selecting a driver profile 3. Select desired driver profile. Changing a driver profile's name
When the center display starts up, the 4. Tap Confirm. It is possible to change the names of the dif-
selected driver profile will be shown at the ferent driver profiles used in the vehicle.
> The driver profile has now been
top of the screen. The most recently used 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center
selected and the system will load the
driver profile will be active the next time the display.
settings stored in that profile.
vehicle is unlocked. A different driver profile
can be selected once the vehicle has been Option 3: 2. Tap System Driver Profiles.
unlocked. However, if the remote key has 1. Pull down Top view in the center display. 3. Select Edit Profile.
been linked to a driver profile, this profile will > A menu will open in which the driver
be used instead. 2. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center
profile can be changed.
There are three options for switching between display.
driver profiles. 4. Tap the Profile Name box.
3. Tap System Driver Profiles.
Option 1: > A keyboard will be displayed and can
> A list will appear, showing driver pro-
be used to change the name. Tap
1. Tap the name of the driver profile shown files that can be selected.
to close the keyboard.
at the top of the center display when the 4. Select desired driver profile.
display starts up. 5. Save the name change by pressing Back
> The driver profile has now been or Close.
> A list will appear, showing driver pro- selected and the system will load the
files that can be selected. settings stored in that profile. > The name has now been changed.
2. Select desired driver profile.
Related information NOTE
3. Tap Confirm. • Driver profiles (p. 140)
Profile names may not begin with a space.
> The driver profile has now been • Navigating in the center display's views If a space is entered first, the profile name
selected and the system will load the (p. 119) will not be saved.
settings stored in that profile.
• Changing a driver profile's name (p. 141)
Option 2: • Linking a remote key to a driver profile Related information
1. Pull down Top view in the center display. (p. 142) • Selecting a driver profile (p. 141)
2. Tap Profile. • Using the center display keyboard (p. 130)
> The same list as in option 1 will be dis-
played.

141
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Protecting a driver profile 5. Confirm your selection to protect the pro- Linking a remote key to a driver
It may not always be desirable to store set- file by tapping Back/Close. profile
tings made in the vehicle to the active driver > When the profile is protected, settings A remote key can be linked to a driver profile.
profile. In these instances, the driver profile made in the vehicle will not be auto- This driver profile and all of its settings will
can be protected. matically stored to the profile. The then automatically be selected every time the
NOTE changes must instead be saved man- vehicle is used with that particular remote
ually under Settings System key.
Protecting a driver profile is only possible The first time the remote key is used, it is not
when the vehicle is stationary. Driver Profiles Edit Profile by tap-
ping Save current settings to the linked to any specific driver profile. The Guest
profile. If the profile is not protected, profile is automatically activated when the
To protect a driver profile: the settings will be automatically stored ignition is switched on.
1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center to the profile. A driver profile can also be selected manually
display. without linking it to any key. When the vehicle
Related information is unlocked, the last active driver profile will be
2. Tap System Driver Profiles. • Driver profiles (p. 140) activated. If the key has ever been linked to a
3. Select Edit Profile. driver profile, it is not necessary to manually
> A menu will open in which the driver select a driver profile when using that particu-
profile can be changed. lar key.

4. Tap Protect Profile to protect the profile. Linking a remote key to a specific
driver profile

NOTE
A remote key can only be connected to a
driver profile when the vehicle is stationary.

First select the profile you would like to link to

the key (if that profile is not already active).

142
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

The active profile can then be linked to the 5. Select Connect key to link the profile with • Remote key (p. 242)
key. the key. A driver profile can only be linked
to the key currently being used in the vehi-
1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center
cle. If there are any other keys in the vehi-
display.
cle, More than one key is found, put the
2. Tap System Driver Profiles. key you want to connect on backup
reader will be displayed.
3. Mark the desired profile. The display will
return to Home view. The Guest profile
cannot be linked to a remote key.
4. Pull down Top view again and tap
Settings System Driver Profiles
Edit Profile.

Location of the backup reader in the tunnel console.

> When Profile connected to key is dis-
played, the key and driver profile have
been linked.
6. Tap OK.
> The key used is now linked to the driver
profile and will remain so as long as the
Connect key box is not deselected.

Related information
• Driver profiles (p. 140)
• Changing a driver profile's name (p. 141)

143
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Resetting driver profile settings Messages in the center display ority than messages shown in the status bar
Settings that have been saved for one or The center display shows messages in certain and require acknowledgment/action before
more driver profiles can be reset when the circumstances to inform or assist the driver. they disappear.
vehicle is stationary.
Related information
NOTE • Handling messages in the center display
Factory Reset is only possible when the (p. 145)
vehicle is stationary. • Handling messages saved from the center
display (p. 145)
1. Tap Settings in the Top view. • Messages in the instrument panel (p. 110)
2. Tap System Factory Reset Reset
Personal Settings.
3. Select option Reset for the active
profile, Reset for all profiles or Cancel.
Example of message in the center display's Top view.
Related information
Messages with lower priority for the driver are
• Driver profiles (p. 140)
shown in the center display.
• Resetting center display settings (p. 138)
Most of the messages are shown in the center
display's status bar. The message will disap-
pear from the status bar after a short period of
time or after the required action has been
taken. Messages that need to be saved are
stored in Top view in the center display.
The message may be shown along with
graphics, symbols or a button to e.g. activate/
deactivate a function connected to the mes-
sage.
Pop-up messages
Messages are sometimes shown as pop-up
windows. Pop-up messages have a higher pri-

144
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Handling messages in the center For messages without buttons: Handling messages saved from the
display – Close the message by tapping it or let the center display
Messages in the center display are handled in message automatically time-out after a Messages saved from the instrument panel
the center display's views. short period. and center displays are handled in the center
> The message will disappear from the display.
status bar.
Messages that need to be saved are stored in
Top view in the center display.

Related information
• Messages in the center display (p. 144)
• Handling messages saved from the center
display (p. 145)
• Messages in the instrument panel (p. 110)

Example of message in the center display's Top view.

Examples of saved messages and possible selections
Some messages in the center display have a
in Top view.
button (or several buttons in a pop-up mes-
sage) to e.g. activate/deactivate a function Messages that have been shown in the center
related to the message. display and that need to be saved are stored in
the center display's Top view.
Handling new messages
For messages with buttons:
– Tap the button to perform the action or let
the message automatically time-out after
a short period.
> The message will disappear from the
status bar.

}}

145
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Reading saved messages Head-up display* NOTE

1. Open Top view in the center display. The head-up display is a complement to the
The driver's ability to see information in the
> A list of saved messages will be dis- instrument panel and projects information
head-up display may be impeded by
played. Messages with an arrow to the from the instrument panel onto the wind-
right can be expanded. shield. The projected images can only be • the use of polarizing sunglasses
seen from the driver's seat. • a driving posture in which the driver is
2. Tap a message to expand/minimize it.
not centered in the seat
> More information about the message
will appear in the list and the image to • objects on the display unit's glass
the left of the app will display informa- cover
tion about the message in graphic form. • unfavorable lighting conditions.
Handling saved messages
Some messages have a button to e.g. acti-
CAUTION
vate/deactivate a function related to the mes-
sage. The information is projected from a display
unit located in the dashboard. To help pre-
– Tap the button to perform the action.
vent damage to the display unit's glass
Saved messages in Top view are automatically cover, do not place any objects on the
deleted when the ignition is switched off. glass and prevent objects from falling onto
The head-up display projects warnings and it.
Related information information related to speed, cruise control
• Messages in the center display (p. 144) functions, navigation, etc. onto the windshield
Handling messages in the center display in the driver's field of vision. Traffic information
•
(p. 145) and incoming phone calls can also be shown
on the head-up display.
• Messages in the instrument panel (p. 110)

146 * Option/accessory.
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

The snowflake symbol will illuminate Related information

if there is a risk of slippery condi- • Activating and deactivating the head-up
tions. display* (p. 148)
• Cleaning the head-up display* and instru-
NOTE ment panel (p. 650)
• Replacing a windshield with head-up dis-
People with certain types of vision prob-
play* (p. 617)
lems may experience headaches or eye
strain when using the head-up display.

City Safety in head-up-display

If a collision warning is given, the information
Examples of what might be shown on the display.
in the head-up display will be replaced by a
Speed City Safety warning signal. This graphic will
illuminate even if the head-up display is turned
Cruise control
off.
Navigation

Road signs
A number of symbols may be projected tem-
porarily onto the head-up display including:
If the warning symbol appears, read
the warning message in the instru-
ment panel.

If the information symbol appears,

read the warning message in the
instrument panel.
The warning symbol for City Safety will flash to get
the driver's attention if there is a risk of collision.

* Option/accessory. 147
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Activating and deactivating the Head-up display settings* Adjusting brightness and height
head-up display* Adjusting settings for the head-up display. position
The head-up display can be activated and Settings can be adjusted when the vehicle is
deactivated when the vehicle has been started and a projected image is displayed on
started. the windshield.
Press the Head-up Display
button in the center display's Selecting display options
Function view. An indicator Select the functions to be shown in the head-
light in the button will illumi- up display.
1. Press the Head-up Display Adjustments
nate when the function is 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top button in the center display's Function
activated. view. view.
Related information 2. Tap My Car Displays Head-Up 2. Adjust the brightness of the projected
• Head-up display settings* (p. 148) Display Options. image and the height position in the driv-
3. Select one or more functions: er's field of vision using the right-side
• Head-up display* (p. 146)
steering wheel lever.
• Show Navigation
• Show Road Sign Information
• Show Driver Support
• Show Phone
This setting is stored as a personal setting in
the driver profile.

Decreasing brightness

Increasing brightness

148 * Option/accessory.
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Raising position Voice Control

Lowering position Voice control14 allows you to control func-
tions in the vehicle, e.g. the climate control
Confirm system, radio or a Bluetooth-connected
phone, using spoken commands. In vehicles
The brightness of the graphic is automatically equipped with Sensus Navigation*, the navi-
adapted to the light conditions in its back- gation system can also be controlled using
ground. Brightness is also affected by adjust- voice commands.
ments to the brightness of the other displays
in the vehicle. What is voice control?
The height position can be stored in the front Voice control is a driver support function that
power seat's* memory function using the key- can simplify the use of various commands in
pad in the driver's door. Rotate counterclockwise your vehicle. It works in general like a regular
application in which you input information in a
Calibrating the horizontal position Rotate clockwise set order in order to perform a task, but
If the windshield or display unit has been instead of typing on a keypad, you use voice
replaced, the head-up display's horizontal Confirm commands. It can therefore be a good idea to
position may need to be calibrated. Calibration familiarize yourself with how, and in what
means that the projected image is rotated Related information order, a voice command should be spoken to
clockwise or counterclockwise. • Head-up display* (p. 146) get the desired result.
1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top • Activating and deactivating the head-up You can control certain infotainment and cli-
view. display* (p. 148) mate control functions through the voice con-
• Driver profiles (p. 140) trol system by using voice commands. The
2. Select My Car Displays Head-Up system can respond verbally and by displaying
• Storing positions for seats, mirrors and
Display Options Head-Up Display information in the instrument panel.
head-up display* (p. 190)
Calibration.
3. Calibrate the horizontal position of the
image using the right-side steering wheel
keypad.

14 Certain markets only. }}

* Option/accessory. 149
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| WARNING NOTE Use voice recognition

The driver is always responsible for ensur- Not all system languages support voice Starting voice control15
ing that the vehicle is operated in a safe control. If a language supports voice con-
manner and that all applicable traffic regu- Voice commands are given
trol, it is marked with a symbol in the through a "dialog" with the
lations are followed.
list of available system languages. Read voice control system. Press
more about where the information is found the button for voice control
in the section on voice control settings. on the right-side steering
wheel keypad to activate the
Related information system and initiate a voice
• Use voice recognition (p. 150) command dialog. When you press the button,
Voice control for cellular phones (p. 152) a beep will sound and the voice control sym-
• bol will appear in the instrument panel.
• Voice control for radio and media (p. 153)
This shows that the system has begun listen-
• Climate control system voice commands ing and you can now begin speaking com-
(p. 206) mands. As soon as you start speaking, the
• Voice control settings (p. 154) system will be trained to recognize and under-
stand your voice. This takes several seconds
Voice control microphone and is done automatically, which means that
you don't need to manually initiate any voice
System updates training.
The voice control system is continuously
improved. It is recommended to always have
the latest version installed.
Download updates at volvocars.com/support.

15 Certain markets only.

150
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

These may include: any functions connected to audio using the 2. Say "Call [First name] [Last name]
buttons. [number category]", e.g. "Call Robyn
• Wait until after the tone, and then speak in
your normal voice at a normal speed. Smith cellular".
Canceling voice control
> The system will call the selected con-
• Do not speak while the system is respond- To cancel voice control, do one of the follow-
tact from the phone book. If the contact
ing (the system is unable to process com- ing:
has several phone numbers (e.g. home,
mands during this time).
• Briefly press and say "Cancel". cell, work), the right category must also
• Avoid background noises in the passenger be given.
compartment by keeping doors, windows • Press and hold the steering wheel key-
and the panoramic roof* closed. pad's voice command button until Commands/phrases
two audible signals are given. This cancels The following commands can usually be used
NOTE voice control even when the system is in any situation:
speaking.
Not all system languages support voice • "Repeat" - repeats the most recent voice
Voice control will also be canceled if you do command in the current dialog.
control. If a language supports voice con-
not respond during a dialog. The system will
trol, it is marked with a symbol in the first ask three times for a response and if the • "Cancel" - cancels the dialog.16
list of available system languages. Read response is still not given, voice control will be • "Help" - initiates a help dialog. The sys-
more about where the information is found automatically canceled. tem responds with commands that can be
in the section on voice control settings. used in the current situation, an instruc-
To speed up communication and skip prompts
tion or an example.
from the system, press the voice control but-
Generally, the system will listen for a basic Commands for specific functions, such as
ton on the steering wheel keypad. This
command that is then followed by more phone and audio, are described in the sections
detailed commands specifying what you want will interrupt the system's response and you
can say the next command. related to that function.
the system to do.
To change the audio volume of the system, Voice command examples
turn the volume knob while the voice is speak- 1. Tap .
ing. It is possible to use other buttons while
voice commands are being given. However,
because other audio is silenced during dialog
with the system, it is not possible to perform

}}
16
Note that this only cancels the dialog when the system is not speaking. To do this, press and hold until you hear two beeps.

* Option/accessory. 151
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Numbers 2. Tap System Voice Control and select Voice control for cellular phones17
Number commands can be given in different settings. Call a contact in the phone book, have a text
ways depending on the function to be con- message read aloud or dictate short mes-
trolled: • Repeat Voice Command
sages using voice commands to a Bluetooth-
Phone numbers and zip codes should be
• Speech Rate connected phone.
•
given by stating each number individually, Related information To access a contact in the phone book, the
e.g. "zero, three, one, two, two, four, four, Voice Control (p. 149) voice command must contain the contact
• information entered in the phone book. If a
three" (03122443).
• Voice control for cellular phones (p. 152) contact, e.g. Robyn Smith, has several phone
• Addresses can be given by stating each
• Voice control for radio and media (p. 153) numbers listed in the phone book, a number
number individually or in a group, e.g.
• Climate control system voice commands category such as home or cellular can also be
"two, two" or "twenty-two" (22). For Eng-
(p. 206) specified, i.e. "Call Robyn Smith cellular".
lish and Dutch language settings, groups
of numbers can also be said in sequence, • Voice control settings (p. 154) Tap and say one of the following com-
e.g. "twenty-two, twenty-two" (22 22). mands:
For English, double or triple digits can also
be used, e.g. "double zero" (00). Numbers • "Call [contact]" - call the selected con-
in the range 0-2300 can be used. tact from the phone book.

• Frequencies can be given as "ninety-eight • "Call [phone number]" - call a phone

point eight" (98.8), "one hundred four number.
point two" or "hundred and four point • "Recent calls" - display the list of recent
two" (104.2). calls.
Speech rate and repeat mode • "Read message" - read a text message
The speed at which the system speaks can be aloud. If there are several messages,
adjusted. select the message to read aloud.
With repeat mode on, the system will repeat • "Message to [contact]" – the user is
what you have said. prompted to dictate a short message. The
message will then be read aloud and the
To change the speech rate or activate/deacti- user can choose to send or re-dictate the
vate repeat mode: message. The vehicle must be connected
1. Tap Settings in the Top view. to the Internet to access this function.

152
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

NOTE Voice control for radio and media18 • "SiriusXM" - starts SiriusXM radio*
Voice commands for the radio and media • "USB" - starts playback from USB.
Not all system languages support voice
players are shown below. • "iPod" - starts playback from iPod.
control. If a language supports voice con-
Tap and say one of the following com-
trol, it is marked with a symbol in the • "Bluetooth" - starts playback from a
mands:
list of available system languages. Read Bluetooth-connected media source.
more about where the information is found • "Media" - initiates a dialog for media and • "Similar music" - plays music from a
in the section on voice control settings. radio and displays examples of com- USB-connected device with music similar
mands. to that currently playing.
Related information • "Play [artist]" - plays music by the
• Voice Control (p. 149) selected artist. NOTE
• Use voice recognition (p. 150) • "Play [song title]" - plays the selected Not all system languages support voice
Voice control for radio and media (p. 153) song. control. If a language supports voice con-
•
• Climate control system voice commands • "Play [song title] from [album]" - plays trol, it is marked with a symbol in the
(p. 206) the selected song from the selected list of available system languages. Read
album. more about where the information is found
• Voice control settings (p. 154)
• "Play [radio station]" - starts the in the section on voice control settings.
• Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538) selected radio station.
• "Tune to [frequency]" - tunes to the Related information
selected radio frequency in the currently • Voice Control (p. 149)
active waveband. If no radio source is • Use voice recognition (p. 150)
active, the FM band will be started as
default. • Voice control for cellular phones (p. 152)

"Tune to [frequency] [waveband]" - • Climate control system voice commands

•
(p. 206)
tunes to the selected radio frequency on
the selected waveband. • Voice control settings (p. 154)
• "Radio" - starts FM radio.
• "Radio FM" - starts FM radio.

17 Certain markets only.

18 Certain markets only.

* Option/accessory. 153
 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Voice control settings19 Related information

Settings for the voice control system are • Voice Control (p. 149)
made here. • Use voice recognition (p. 150)
Settings System Voice Control • Voice control for cellular phones (p. 152)
• Climate control system voice commands
Settings can be personalized in the following (p. 206)
areas:
• Voice control for radio and media (p. 153)
• Repeat Voice Command • Sound settings (p. 486)
• Gender • Changing system language (p. 136)
• Speech Rate
Sound settings
Select sound settings under:

Settings Sound System Volumes

Voice Control

Language settings
The voice control system is not available for all
languages. The languages available for voice
commands are indicated by the icon in
the list of languages.
Changing the language here will also change
the language in the menus, messages and
help texts.

Settings System System Languages

and Units System Language

19 Certain markets only.

154
LIGHTING
 LIGHTING

Lighting control and panel Position Meaning Position Meaning

The lighting panel and controls can be used
to adjust both exterior and interior lighting. US: Daytime running lights and Daytime running lights and
The lighting ring on the left-side steering parking lights are off. parking lights in daylight condi-
wheel lever can be used to activate and Canada: Daytime running lights tions.A
adjust the exterior lighting. The brightness of and parking lights are on. Low beams and parking lights in
the interior lighting can be adjusted using the weak daylight or dark conditions
thumb wheel on the dashboard. High beam flash can be used.
or when the front fog lights*
Parking lights when the vehicle and/or rear fog light are acti-
Exterior lighting is parked. vated.
US: Daytime running lights are Active high beam can be acti-
off. vated.
Canada: Daytime running lights High beams can be activated
are on. when low beams are on.
High beam flash can be used. High beam flash can be used.
Low beams and parking lights. Active high beams on/off.
High beams can be activated.
A US models only: Daytime running lights and parking lights
High beam flash can be used. can be deactivated in the center display.

Lighting ring position. NOTE

When the vehicle's ignition is in mode II, the Volvo recommends use of Daytime
lighting ring positions have the following func- Running Lights in the US. Its use is man-
tions: datory in Canada.

Volvo recommends using position when

the vehicle is in motion.

156 * Option/accessory.
 LIGHTING

WARNING • Using turn signals (p. 162) Adjusting light functions via the
• Using high beam (p. 160) center display
The vehicle lighting system cannot in all sit-
uations determine when the daylight is too • Low beams (p. 159) A number of light functions can be adjusted
weak or not strong enough, e.g. when and activated via the center display. These
• Rear fog light (p. 163) include active high beams, home safe lighting
there is fog or rain.
• Active Bending Lights* (p. 162) and approach lighting.
The driver is always responsible for driving
the vehicle with lighting that is safe for the • Brake lights (p. 164) 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top
traffic conditions and as specified by appli- view.
• Emergency brake lights (p. 164)
cable traffic regulations.
• Hazard warning flashers (p. 164) 2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting.

Thumbwheel in instrument panel 3. Select Exterior Lights or Interior

Lighting and then select the function that
you would like to adjust.

Related information
• Lighting control and panel (p. 156)
• Active high beam (p. 161)
• Using home safe lighting (p. 165)
• Welcome Light (p. 165)
• Using turn signals (p. 162)
• Changing settings in the center display's
Top view (p. 136)
Thumb wheel (to the left) for adjusting interior bright- • Function view in the center display
ness.
(p. 126)
Related information
• Adjusting light functions via the center
display (p. 157)
• Interior Lighting (p. 165)
• Parking lights (p. 158)

* Option/accessory. 157
 LIGHTING

Parking lights conditions, the parking lights and low beams Daytime running lights
The parking lights can be used to help other will be illuminated. The vehicle has sensors that detect ambient
road users see the vehicle if it is stopped or In dark conditions, the rear parking lights also lighting conditions. With the lighting ring in
parked. Use the lighting ring on the steering illuminate when the tailgate is opened to alert the position, the daytime running lights
wheel lever to turn on the parking lights. following traffic. This happens regardless of will always be activated when the ignition is
what position the lighting ring or ignition is in. in mode II. In weak daylight or dark condi-
tions, the headlights automatically switch to
Related information low beams.
• Lighting control and panel (p. 156)
• Ignition modes (p. 419)

Lighting ring in the parking light position.

Turn the lighting ring to the position to

turn on the parking lights (the license plate
Lighting ring in AUTO position.
lighting will also illuminate).
With the steering wheel lever's lighting ring in
Canadian models: If the ignition is in the II
position, the daytime running lights will illumi- the position, the daytime running lights
nate instead of the front parking lights. With (DRL1) will illuminate when the vehicle is
the lighting ring in this position, the parking driven in daylight conditions. The headlights
lights will remain on regardless of what posi- will switch automatically from daytime run-
tion the ignition is in. ning lights to low beams in weak daylight or
dark conditions. The headlights will also
US models: When mode is selected, switch to low beams if the front fog lights*
the daytime running lights can be deactivated and/or rear fog light are activated.
in the center display. The parking lights will
also be deactivated. In weak daylight or dark

158 * Option/accessory.
 LIGHTING

US models: When mode is selected, Related information Low beams

the daytime running lights can be deactivated • Lighting control and panel (p. 156) When driving with the lighting ring in the
in the center display. The parking lights will • Ignition modes (p. 419) position, low beam will be automati-
also be deactivated. In weak daylight or dark cally activated in weak daylight or dark condi-
• Low beams (p. 159)
conditions, the parking lights and low beams tions, when the ignition is in the II position.
will be illuminated.
US models: With the lighting ring in the
or position, the daytime running lights
will be off.
Canadian models: With the lighting ring in
the or position, the daytime run-
ning lights will be on.

NOTE
Volvo recommends use of Daytime
Running Lights in the US. Its use is man- Lighting ring in AUTO position.
datory in Canada.
With the lighting ring in the position, the
low beams will also be automatically activated
WARNING if the rear fog light is activated.
The system is an energy saving aid – it With the lighting ring in the position,
cannot in all situations determine when the
daylight is too weak or not strong enough, low beams will always be on when the ignition
e.g. when there is fog or rain. is in the II position.
The driver is always responsible for driving
the vehicle with lighting that is safe for the
traffic conditions and as specified by appli-
cable traffic regulations.

1 Daytime Running Lights }}

159
 LIGHTING

|| Tunnel detection Using high beam . Activate high beams by moving the
The vehicle will detect if it enters a tunnel and High beam is operated via the left-hand steering wheel lever forward.
shift from daytime running lights to low steering wheel lever. High beam is the vehi- Deactivate by moving the steering wheel
beams. cle's strongest lighting and should be used lever backward.
Note that the left-hand steering wheel lever when driving in dark conditions, provided it
does not blind other road users, to improve When the high beams are activated, the
must be in position for tunnel detection
visibility. symbol will be illuminated in the instrument
to work.
panel.
Related information
• Lighting control and panel (p. 156) Related information
• Lighting control and panel (p. 156)
• Ignition modes (p. 419)
• Active high beam (p. 161)
• Daytime running lights (p. 158)

Steering wheel lever with lighting ring.

High beam flash

Move the steering wheel lever slightly
backward to the high beam flash mode.
The high beams will illuminate until the
lever is released.

High beams
The high beams can be activated when
the lighting ring is in mode 2 or

2 When the low beams are on.

160
 LIGHTING

Active high beam Activating active high beams rain. When active high beams become availa-
Active high beams is a function that uses Active high beams can be activated and deac- ble again, or the windshield sensors are no
camera sensors in the upper edge of the tivated by turning the lighting ring on the left- longer blocked, the message will disappear
windshield to detect the headlights of side steering wheel lever to position . and the symbol will be displayed.
approaching vehicles or the taillights of the The lighting ring will then return to .
vehicle directly ahead. When either of these When active high beams are activated, a white WARNING
is detected, the vehicle's headlights will auto-
symbol will be displayed in the instru- Automatic high beam is an aid in using the
matically switch from high beams to low
ment panel. When high beams are on, the best possible light based on prevailing con-
beams. ditions.
symbol will be blue.
If active high beams are deactivated when the The driver is always responsible for man-
high beams are on, the headlights will auto- ually switching between high and low
beam when traffic situations or weather
matically switch to low beams.
conditions require this.
Limitations for active high beams
The camera sensor on which the function is Related information
based has limitations. • Lighting control and panel (p. 156)
If this symbol and the message • Using high beam (p. 160)
Active High Beam Temporarily • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386)
unavailable is displayed in the
instrument panel, switching
Active high beams is indicated by the symbol. between high and low beams must be done
manually. The symbol will go out when
This function can be used in dark conditions
the message is displayed.
when the vehicle's speed is approx. 20 km/h
(approx. 12 mph) or higher. The function can The same applies if this symbol
also detect street lighting. When the camera along with the message
sensor no longer detects an approaching vehi- Windscreen sensor Sensor
cle or a vehicle ahead, the headlights will blocked, see Owner's manual is
return to high beams after a second or two. displayed.
Active high beams may be temporarily unavail-
able in certain situations, e.g. heavy fog or

161
 LIGHTING

Using turn signals NOTE Active Bending Lights*

The vehicle's turn signals are controlled using Active Bending Lights (ABL) are designed to
• This automatic flashing sequence can
the left-side steering wheel lever. The turn help provide extra illumination in curves and
be interrupted by immediately moving
signals flash three times or continuously, intersections. Depending on equipment level,
the lever in the opposite direction.
depending on how far up or down the lever is vehicles with LED3 headlights* may be equip-
moved. • If the turn signal indicator flashes more ped with Active Bending Lights.
quickly than normal, refer to the mes-
sage in the instrument panel.

Continuous flashing sequence

Move the lever up or down as far as possi-
ble.
The lever will stop in its end position and can
be moved back manually or automatically by
moving the steering wheel.

Related information
• Hazard warning flashers (p. 164)
Turn signals. Headlight pattern with function deactivated (left) and
• Adjusting light functions via the center activated (right).
Triple flash indicator display (p. 157)
Move the steering wheel lever up or down Active Bending Lights follow the movement of
to the first position and release. The turn the steering wheel to help provide extra illumi-
signals will flash three times. If the func- nation in curves and intersections, helping to
tion is deactivated via the center display, improve visibility for the driver.
the signals will flash once. The function is automatically activated when
the engine is started. If a fault is detected in
the system, the symbol will illuminate in
the instrument panel and a message will be
displayed.

3 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

162 * Option/accessory.
 LIGHTING

The function is only active in weak daylight or Rear fog light ing wheel lever lighting ring is in position
dark conditions and only when the vehicle is The rear fog light is considerably brighter or .
moving and the low beams are on. than ordinary taillights and should only be
used to help other road users see the vehicle NOTE
Deactivating/activating the function
when visibility is reduced by conditions such
The function is activated as the default factory Regulations concerning rear fog light use
as fog, snow, smoke or dust.
setting and can be activated and deactivated vary from country to country.
in the center display's Function view:
Tap the Active Bending Related information
Lights button. • Lighting control and panel (p. 156)
• Ignition modes (p. 419)

Related information
• Adjusting light functions via the center
display (p. 157)
Rear fog light button.
The fog lights are located on the right and left
sides of the rear of the vehicle.
The rear fog light can only be switched on
when the ignition is in II mode and the lighting
ring is in position or .
Press the button to switch on/off. The
symbol in the instrument panel illuminates
when the rear fog light is on.
The rear fog light turns off automatically when
the ignition is switched off or when the steer-

163
 LIGHTING

Brake lights Emergency brake lights Hazard warning flashers

The brake lights are automatically illuminated The emergency brake lights are activated to Hazard warning flashers warn other road
when braking. warn following vehicles of hard braking. users by all of the vehicle's turn signals being
The brake lights are illuminated when the activated at the same time. The function can
This function causes an additional taillight on
brake pedal is depressed and when the brakes be used to warn about a traffic hazard.
each side of the vehicle to illuminate.
are automatically applied by a driver support
The emergency brake lights are activated in
system.
the event of hard braking or if the ABS system
Related information is activated and the vehicle is traveling at a
• Emergency brake lights (p. 164) high speed.

• Brake functions (p. 421) After the driver decelerates to a low speed and
then releases the brake, the brake lights
• Driver support systems (p. 274)
resume their normal brightness.

Related information
• Brake lights (p. 164)
• Brakes (p. 421)
• Hazard warning flashers (p. 164) Hazard warning flashers button.
Press the button to activate the hazard warn-
ing flashers.

NOTE
Regulations concerning the use of hazard
warning flashers may vary from country to
country.

Related information
• Emergency brake lights (p. 164)
• Using turn signals (p. 162)

164
 LIGHTING

Using home safe lighting Welcome Light Interior Lighting

Some of the exterior lights remain on to illu- Approach lighting is activated when the vehi- The passenger compartment is equipped
minate the area around the vehicle. This is cle is unlocked and can be used to provide with several different types of lighting, e.g.
called home safe lighting. light as you walk toward the vehicle. general lighting, adjustable ambient lighting
To activate home safe lighting: The function is activated when the remote key and reading lights.
is used for unlocking. The parking lights, ceil-
1. Switch off the ignition. All lighting in the passenger compartment can
ing lights, footwell lights and trunk/cargo
be turned on and off manually within
2. Push the left-side steering wheel lever compartment lights are activated in daylight
5 minutes after:
toward the dashboard and release. conditions. In weak daylight or dark condi-
tions, the license plate lighting and outer door • the engine has been switched off and the
3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.
handle lighting* will also be activated, with the ignition is in mode 0.
> A symbol in the instrument panel illumi-
light directed toward the ground. • the vehicle is unlocked but has not been
nates to indicate that the function is
activated and exterior lighting switches If no door is opened, the lights will remain illu- started.
on: Parking lights, headlights, license minated for approx. 2 minutes. If a door is
Front ceiling lighting
plate lighting and outer door handle opened while the function is activated, the
lighting*. interior lighting and outer door handle lighting*
will remain on for a longer period of time.
The length of time home safe lighting remains
illuminated can be set in the center display. This function can be activated and deactivated
in the center display.
Related information
• Adjusting light functions via the center Related information
display (p. 157) • Adjusting light functions via the center
Welcome Light (p. 165) display (p. 157)
•
• Using home safe lighting (p. 165)
• Remote key (p. 242)

The controls in the ceiling console for the front read-

ing lights and courtesy lighting.
Reading light left side

Passenger compartment lighting

}}

* Option/accessory. 165
 LIGHTING

|| Courtesy lighting auto switch Rear roof lighting* Briefly press the button on the light to turn on
Reading lights are located in the rear section or off the reading lights. To adjust the bright-
Reading light right side of the vehicle and can also be used as passen- ness, press and hold the button.
Reading lights ger compartment lighting.
Glove compartment lighting
The reading lights on the right and left sides The glove compartment lighting comes on or
are switched on and off by briefly pressing the goes off when the glove compartment is
buttons in the ceiling console. To adjust the opened or closed.
brightness, press and hold the button.
Passenger compartment lighting Vanity mirror lighting*
Briefly press the button in the ceiling console The vanity mirror lighting comes on or goes off
to switch on or off the footwell lighting and when the cover over the mirror is opened or
ceiling lighting. closed.
Courtesy lighting auto switch Ground lighting*
Activate the auto switch by briefly pressing The ground lighting comes on or goes off
the AUTO button in the ceiling console. With when a door is opened or closed.
Auto activated, the indicator light in the button
Reading lights over the rear seat.
and the courtesy lighting come on and are Cargo compartment lighting
turned off as follows. The cargo compartment lighting comes on or
goes off when the cargo compartment is
Courtesy lighting is switched on when: opened or closed.
• The vehicle is unlocked
Ambient Lighting
• The vehicle is switched off
The ambient lighting comes on when the
• A side door is opened. doors are opened and goes out when the vehi-
Courtesy lighting is switched off when: cle is locked. Ambient lighting brightness can
be adjusted in the center display and also fine-
• The vehicle is locked tuned using the thumb wheel in the dash-
• The engine is started board.
• A side door is closed
Mood lighting*
• A side door has been open for approx. In vehicles with panoramic roofs*, there are two lamp
The vehicle is equipped with LEDs that pro-
2 minutes. units, one on each side of the ceiling.
vide faint lighting in various colors. This light-
ing is on when the engine is running. Mood

166 * Option/accessory.
 LIGHTING

lighting can be adjusted in the center display Adjusting interior lighting Changing the brightness
and also fine-tuned using the thumb wheel in Illumination in the vehicle varies depending 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center
the dashboard. on ignition mode. The interior lighting can be display.
adjusted with a thumb wheel in the dash-
Lighting in the door storage 2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting
board and certain light functions can also be
compartments adjusted via the center display. Interior Lighting Interior Mood
Lighting in the door storage compartments The thumb wheel on the Lighting.
comes on when the doors are opened and dashboard to the left of the 3. Under Interior Mood Light Intensity,
goes out when the vehicle is locked. The steering wheel can be used select Off, Low or High.
brightness can be adjusted using the thumb to adjust the brightness of
wheel in the dashboard. Changing the color of the light
the display lighting, instru-
1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center
Lighting in the tunnel console's front ment lighting, ambient light-
ing and mood lighting*. display.
cup holder
The lighting in front console cup holders 2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting
Adjust ambient decor lighting
switches on when the vehicle is unlocked and 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center Interior Lighting Interior Mood
off when the vehicle is locked. The brightness display. Lighting.
can be adjusted using the thumb wheel in the 3. Choose By Temperature or By Color to
dashboard. 2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting
change the color of the light.
Interior Lighting.
Related information If By Temperature is selected, the light
Adjusting interior lighting (p. 167) 3. Choose from among the following set-
• will change according to the temperature
tings:
• Lighting control and panel (p. 156) set for the passenger compartment.
• Under Ambient Light Intensity, select
• Ignition modes (p. 419) If By Color is selected, the subcategory
Off, Low or High.
• Passenger compartment interior (p. 588) Theme Colors can be used to make fur-
• Under Ambient Light Level, select ther adjustments.
Reduced or Full.

Adjusting mood lighting* Related information

• Interior Lighting (p. 165)
The vehicle is equipped with several LEDs that
provide faint lighting in various colors. This • Adjusting light functions via the center
lighting is on when the engine is running. display (p. 157)
• Ignition modes (p. 419)

* Option/accessory. 167
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

Windows, glass and mirrors • Activating and deactivating the heated Pinch protection for windows and
The vehicle is equipped with several different rear window and door mirrors (p. 223) sun curtains
types of windows, glass and mirrors. Some of All power windows and sun curtains* have a
the windows in the car are laminated. pinch protection function that is triggered if
The windshield has laminated glass. Lamina- anything blocks them while they are opening
ted glass is also available as on option for or closing.
some other glass surfaces. Laminated glass is If pinch protection is activated, movement will
reinforced, which provides better protection stop and then retract automatically to approx.
against break-ins and improved soundproofing 50 mm (2 inches) from the point at which it
in the passenger compartment. was blocked (or to full ventilation position).
The panoramic roof* also has laminated glass. It is still possible to override pinch protection
when closing is interrupted (e.g. due to ice) by
pressing and holding down the control in the
same direction.

The symbol shows the windows containing lamina- If there is any problem with the pinch protec-
ted glass.1 tion, a rest procedure can be tested.

Related information WARNING

• Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 170) If the starter battery is disconnected, the
function for automatic opening and closing
• Panoramic roof* (p. 176) must be reset to function correctly. A reset
• Power windows (p. 171) is required in order for the pinch protection
to work.
• Rearview/door mirrors (p. 173)
• Head-up display* (p. 146) Related information
• Using the windshield wipers (p. 180) • Reset procedure for pinch protection
• Using the windshield and headlight wash- (p. 171)
ers (p. 183) • Operating the power windows (p. 172)
• Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 177)

1 Does not apply to windshield and panoramic roof*, which are always laminated and therefore do not have this symbol.

170 * Option/accessory.
 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

Reset procedure for pinch Power windows WARNING

protection Every door has a control panel for the power
Children, other passengers or objects can
If you experience any problems with the elec- windows. The driver's door has controls for be trapped by the moving parts.
trical functions for the power windows, you operating all windows and for activating the
can try to perform a reset. child safety locks. • Always operate the windows with cau-
tion.
WARNING
• Do not allow children to play with the
If the starter battery is disconnected, the operating controls.
function for automatic opening and closing
must be reset to function correctly. A reset • Never leave a child alone in the vehicle.
is required in order for the pinch protection • Remember to always cut the current to
to work. the power windows by setting the
vehicle's electrical system to ignition
Consult a workshop if you experience any mode 0 and then taking the key with
problems with the panoramic roof.2 you when leaving the vehicle.

Resetting a power window • Never stick objects or body parts out

through the windows, even if the vehi-
1. Start with the window in the closed posi-
Driver's door control panel. cle electrical system is completely
tion.
turned off.
Electric child safety locks* that deactivate
2. Then move the control in manual mode
the controls in the rear doors to prevent
three times upward toward the closed
the doors or windows from being opened Related information
position.
from the inside. • Operating the power windows (p. 172)
> The system will be automatically acti-
vated. Rear window controls. • Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 170)
If the problem persists, contact a workshop. Front window controls.
• Reset procedure for pinch protection
Related information (p. 171)
• Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 170)
• Operating the power windows (p. 172)

2 An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

* Option/accessory. 171
 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

Operating the power windows WARNING

All power windows can be operated using the
Make sure that no child or other passenger
control panel in the driver's door. The control comes into contact with the windows as
panels in the other doors can be used to they are closing with keyless closing*.
operate that particular door.
The power windows have pinch protection. If
there is any problem with the pinch protection, NOTE
a rest procedure can be tested. One way to reduce the pulsating wind
noise heard when the rear windows are
WARNING open is to also open the front windows
Children, other passengers or objects can slightly.
be trapped by the moving parts.
Operating the power windows.
• Always operate the windows with cau- Operating manually. Move one of the con- NOTE
tion. trols slightly up or down. The power win- The windows cannot be opened at speeds
• Do not allow children to play with the dows go up or down while the control is over approx. 180 km/h (ca 112 mph), but
operating controls. held in position. they can be closed.
• Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. Operating with automatic controls. Move The driver is always responsible for follow-
• Remember to always cut the current to one of the controls up or down to its end ing applicable traffic regulations.
the power windows by setting the position and release it. The window moves
vehicle's electrical system to ignition automatically to its fully closed/open posi-
mode 0 and then taking the key with tion. NOTE
you when leaving the vehicle. To use the power windows, the ignition must It may not be possible to operate the win-
be in at least mode I or II. After the ignition dows in low temperatures.
• Never stick objects or body parts out
has been switched off, the power windows
through the windows, even if the vehi-
can be operated for several minutes or until a
cle electrical system is completely Related information
door is opened. Only one control can be oper-
turned off. • Power windows (p. 171)
ated at a time.
It can also be operated using keyless opening* • Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
with the door handle. tains (p. 170)
• Reset procedure for pinch protection
(p. 171)

172 * Option/accessory.
 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

• Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 259) Rearview/door mirrors • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and
• Locking and unlocking using the remote The rearview mirror and door mirrors can be head-up display* (p. 190)
key (p. 245) used to improve the driver's visibility behind • Activating and deactivating the heated
the vehicle. rear window and door mirrors (p. 223)

Rearview mirror
The rearview mirror is equipped with Home-
Link*, auto-dim* and compass*.
The rearview mirror can be adjusted manually.

Door mirrors

WARNING
The door mirror on the passenger side is
curved to improve visibility. Objects in the
mirror may appear farther away than they
actually are.

The joystick in the drivers' door control panel

is used to adjust the position of the door mir-
rors.
There are also several automatic settings that
can also be connected to the memory function
buttons for the power seat*.

Related information
• HomeLink®* (p. 478)
• Compass* (p. 482)
• Adjusting the rearview mirror dimming
function (p. 174)
• Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 174)

* Option/accessory. 173
 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

Adjusting the rearview mirror The rearview mirror has two sensors - one Adjusting the door mirrors
dimming function pointing forward and one pointing rearward - To improve visibility to the rear, the door mir-
Bright light entering the vehicle from behind, which work together to identify and eliminate rors need to be adjusted to the driver's height
e.g. from the headlights of following vehicles, glare. The forward-pointing sensor monitors and seating position.
could reflect in the rearview mirror and door ambient light, while the rearward-pointing
sensor monitors light from the headlights of There are several automatic settings that can
mirrors and cause a glare. Use the dimming also be connected to the memory function
function when light from behind is distract- following vehicles.
buttons for the power seat*.
ing. For the door mirrors to be equipped with auto-
dim, the rearview mirror must also be equip- Controls used for door mirrors
Auto-dim ped with auto-dim.
If bright light enters the vehicle from behind,
the door mirrors will automatically dim when it
is dark outside or when lighting conditions are NOTE
low, for example when driving in tunnels. If the sensors are obstructed by e.g. a
Auto-dim is always active when the engine is parking permit, transponder, sunshade or
running, except when reverse gear is engaged. objects on the seats or in the cargo com-
partment in a way that prevents light from
NOTE reaching the sensors, the auto-dim func-
tion in the door and rearview mirrors will
Adjustments to the sensitivity level will not be reduced.
be noticeable immediately but will instead
take effect after a short period of time.
Related information Door mirror controls.
• Rearview/door mirrors (p. 173)
The sensitivity level for dimming will affect The joystick in the drivers' door control panel
both the rearview mirror and door mirrors. • Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 174) is used to adjust the position of the door mir-
rors. The ignition must be in at least mode I.
To change the dimming sensitivity level:
1. Press the L button for the left door mirror
1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center
or R for the right door mirror. The button
display.
will light up.
2. Tap My Car Mirrors and Convenience. 2. Adjust the position using the joystick
3. Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming, located between the buttons.
select Normal, Dark or Light.

174 * Option/accessory.
 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

3. Press the L or R button again. The light in Tilting when parking3 Automatic folding when the vehicle is
the button will go out. The door mirrors can be tilted down to help locked*
give the driver a better view along the sides of In the center display, you can set the door mir-
Automatically folding door mirrors* the vehicle, e.g. of the curb when parking. rors to retract/extend automatically when the
The door mirrors can be automatically folded vehicle is locked/unlocked with the key.
when driving or parking in tight spaces. – Select reverse gear and press the L or R
mirror button. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top
1. Press the L and R buttons at the same
Please note that the button may need to be view.
time.
pressed twice depending on settings. When 2. Tap My Car Mirrors and Convenience.
2. Release the buttons after about 1 second. the door mirror is tilted down, the light in the
The mirrors will automatically stop when button will flash. When reverse gear is 3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to acti-
they are completely folded in. engaged, the door mirrors will automatically vate/deactivate.
Open the mirrors by pressing L and R at the start to move after 3 seconds and will reach
same time. The mirrors will automatically stop their original position after about 8 seconds. NOTE
when they reach the last-used setting. If the door mirrors are folded in manually
Automatically tilting when parking3
using the L and R buttons and then the
Resetting the mirrors' position With this setting, the door mirrors will auto-
vehicle is locked, the mirrors will not auto-
A mirror that has been moved out of position matically tilt down when reverse gear is
matically fold out when the vehicle is
manually (e.g. hit or bumped into) must be engaged. The folded position is preset and
unlocked, even if this preference has been
electrically returned to its original position for cannot be adjusted.
set. In this case, the mirrors must be folded
automatic folding* to function properly.
1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top out manually.
1. Fold in the mirrors by pressing the L and R view.
buttons at the same time.
2. Tap My Car Mirrors and Convenience. Related information
2. Open them again by pressing the L and R • Rearview/door mirrors (p. 173)
buttons at the same time. 3. Under Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse,
select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to • Adjusting the rearview mirror dimming
3. Repeat the above procedure as needed. activate/deactivate and to select which function (p. 174)
The mirrors return to their original positions. mirror to tilt. • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 190)
To immediately return the door mirrors to their
original position, press the L or R button • Activating and deactivating the heated
twice. rear window and door mirrors (p. 223)

3 Only on models equipped with a power driver's seat with memory buttons*.

* Option/accessory. 175
 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

Panoramic roof* WARNING CAUTION

The panoramic roof is divided into two glass
Children, other passengers or objects can • Remove ice and snow before opening
sections. The front section can be opened be trapped by the moving parts. the panoramic roof. Be careful not to
vertically at the rear edge (ventilation posi-
• Always operate the windows with cau- scratch any surfaces or damage the
tion) or horizontally (open position). The rear
tion. trim.
section cannot be moved.
• Do not allow children to play with the • Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
The panoramic roof has a wind deflector and is frozen in place.
sun curtain made of perforated fabric (located operating controls.
beneath the glass sections) for extra protec- • Never leave a child alone in the vehicle.
tion in e.g. bright sunlight. • Remember to always cut the current to Wind blocker
the power windows by setting the
vehicle's electrical system to ignition
mode 0 and then taking the key with
you when leaving the vehicle.
• Never stick objects or body parts out
through the windows, even if the vehi-
cle electrical system is completely
turned off.

CAUTION
• Do not open the panoramic roof when
The panoramic roof and sun curtain are oper- load carriers are installed. The panoramic roof is equipped with a wind
ated using the controls in the ceiling. Never place heavy objects on the pan- blocker that folds up when the roof is open.
•
To operate the panoramic roof and sun cur- oramic roof. Related information
tain, the ignition must be in mode I or II. • Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 177)
• Auto closing the panoramic roof* sun cur-
tain (p. 179)
• Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 170)

176 * Option/accessory.
 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

• Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 259) Operating the panoramic roof* CAUTION
• Locking and unlocking using the remote The panoramic roof and sun curtain are oper-
• Do not open the panoramic roof when
key (p. 245) ated using a control in the ceiling panel, and
load carriers are installed.
both are equipped with pinch protection.
• Never place heavy objects on the pan-
WARNING oramic roof.
Children, other passengers or objects can
be trapped by the moving parts.
Always operate the windows with cau- CAUTION
•
tion. • Remove ice and snow before opening
• Do not allow children to play with the the panoramic roof. Be careful not to
operating controls. scratch any surfaces or damage the
trim.
• Never leave a child alone in the vehicle.
• Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
• Remember to always cut the current to is frozen in place.
the power windows by setting the
vehicle's electrical system to ignition
mode 0 and then taking the key with To operate the panoramic roof and sun cur-
you when leaving the vehicle. tain, the ignition must be in mode I or II.

• Never stick objects or body parts out It can also be operated using keyless opening*
through the windows, even if the vehi- with the door handle.
cle electrical system is completely
turned off. WARNING
Make sure that no child or other passenger
comes into contact with the windows as
they are closing with keyless closing*.

}}

* Option/accessory. 177
 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

|| CAUTION Opening and closing ventilation Fully opening and closing the
position panoramic roof with the control in the
Check that the panoramic roof is properly
ceiling
closed when closing.

The movement of the roof will stop if the con-

trol is released during manual operation or
when the glass has reached the comfort4 or
fully open/closed position. The movement of
both the panoramic roof and the sun curtain is
also stopped if the control in the ceiling is
operated again in the direction opposite that
of the current direction of movement.
The panoramic roof and sun curtain are also
equipped with pinch protection. If there is any Ventilation position, rear edge raised.
problem with the pinch protection, a rest pro- Open by pushing the control upward Operation, manual mode
cedure can be tested. once.
Operation, automatic mode
Close by pushing the control downward
NOTE once.
For manual opening, the sun curtain must When ventilation mode is selected, the rear
be completely open before the panoramic edge of the front section of the roof is raised.
roof can be opened. For the reverse proce- If the sun curtain is fully closed when ventila-
dure, the panoramic roof must be com- tion position is selected, it will automatically
pletely closed before the sun curtain can open approx. 50 mm (approx. 2 inches).
be completely closed. If the panoramic roof is closed from the venti-
lation position, the sun curtain will also auto-
matically close.
NOTE
It may not be possible to operate the win-
dows in low temperatures.

4 The comfort position is a position which helps keep wind and resonance sounds to a comfortably low level.

178
 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

Manual operation Automatic operation - rapid opening or Auto closing the panoramic roof*
1. To open the sun curtain, pull the control closing sun curtain
backward to the manual open mode. The panoramic roof and sun curtain can be With this function, the sun curtain closes
2. To open the panoramic roof to the comfort opened or closed simultaneously: automatically 15 minutes after the vehicle has
position, pull the control backward a sec- – Open - press the control backward twice been locked if it is parked in hot weather. This
ond time to the manual opening position. to the automatic operation position and is done to lower the passenger compartment
release. temperature and protect the upholstery
3. To open the panoramic roof fully, pull the against being bleached by the sun.
control backward a third time to the man- – Close - press the control forward/down The function is deactivated as the default fac-
ual opening position. twice to the automatic operation position tory setting and can be activated or deacti-
Close by repeating the above procedure in and release. vated using the center display.
reverse - push the control forward/down to Related information 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center
the manual closing position. display.
• Panoramic roof* (p. 176)
Auto operation Auto closing the panoramic roof* sun cur-
• 2. Tap My Car Locking.
1. To open the sun curtain to the fully open tain (p. 179)
position, pull the control backward to the Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to
auto open mode and release. • Pinch protection for windows and sun cur- activate/deactivate.
tains (p. 170)
2. To open the panoramic roof to the comfort
• Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 259) NOTE
position, pull the control backward a sec-
ond time to the automatic opening posi- • Locking and unlocking using the remote
The sun curtain also closes when all win-
tion and release. key (p. 245)
dows are closed with keyless closing*.
3. To open the panoramic roof fully, pull the
control backward a third time to the auto-
matic opening position and release. Related information
• Panoramic roof* (p. 176)
Close by repeating the above procedure in
reverse - push the control forward/down to • Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 177)
the auto close position. • Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 170)

}}

* Option/accessory. 179
 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

• Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 259) Wiper blades and washer fluid Using the windshield wipers
• Locking and unlocking using the remote The wipers and the washer fluid are designed The windshield wipers are designed to clean
key (p. 245) to improve visibility and the headlight pat- the windshield. The right-side steering wheel
tern. lever is used to adjust windshield wiper set-
Washer fluid direct from the wiper blades and tings.
heating* of the wiper blades gives improved
vision.
When there is approximately 1 liter (1 qt) of
washer fluid remaining, a message to refill will
appear in the instrument panel.

Related information
• Using the rain sensor (p. 181)
• Using the windshield and headlight wash-
ers (p. 183)
• Using automatic rear window wiping
when backing up (p. 185) Right-hand steering wheel lever.
• Activating and deactivating the rain sen- The thumb wheel is used to set rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 182) sor sensitivity and interval wiper speed.
• Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 184) Single sweep
Move the lever down and release for a
• Filling washer fluid (p. 666) single sweep.
• Putting the wiper blades in service posi-
tion (p. 665) Wipers off
Move the lever to position 0 to turn off
• Replacing windshield wiper blades
the windshield wipers.
(p. 664)
• Changing rear window wipers (p. 663)
• Using the windshield wipers (p. 180)

180 * Option/accessory.
 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

Interval wipers • Using automatic rear window wiping Using the rain sensor
Move the lever upward to put the wip- when backing up (p. 185) The rain sensor monitors the amount of water
ers in interval wiping mode. Set the • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 180) on the windshield and automatically starts
number of sweeps per time unit with the the windshield wipers. Rain sensor sensitivity
• Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
thumb wheel when interval wipers are can be adjusted using the thumb wheel on
sor's memory function (p. 182)
selected. the right-hand steering wheel lever.
• Using the rear window wiper/washer
Continuous wipers (p. 184)
Move the lever upward for the wipers Filling washer fluid (p. 666)
•
to operate at normal speed.
• Putting the wiper blades in service posi-
Move the lever upward again for the tion (p. 665)
wipers to operate at high speed.
• Replacing windshield wiper blades
(p. 664)
CAUTION
• Changing rear window wipers (p. 663)
Before activating the wipers, make sure
that the wiper blades are not frozen in
place and that any snow or ice on the
windshield and rear window has been
Right-hand steering wheel lever.
scraped away.
Rain sensor button

CAUTION Thumb wheel, sensitivity/interval wiper

speed
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
clean the windshield. The windshield must When the rain sensor is activated, the
be wet when the windshield wipers are rain sensor symbol will be displayed in the
working. instrument panel.

Activating the rain sensor

Related information When the rain sensor is activated, the engine
• Using the rain sensor (p. 181) must be running or the ignition in mode I or II
• Using the windshield and headlight wash- while the windshield wiper lever is in position
ers (p. 183) 0 or in the single sweep position.
}}

181
 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

|| Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain Related information Activating and deactivating the
sensor button . • Using the windshield and headlight wash- rain sensor's memory function
ers (p. 183) The rain sensor monitors the amount of water
Move the lever downward for an extra wiper
sweep. • Using automatic rear window wiping on the windshield and automatically starts
when backing up (p. 185) the windshield wipers.
Turn the thumb wheel upward for increased When the memory function is activated, the
sensitivity and downward for decreased sensi- • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 180)
rain sensor button does not need to be
tivity. The wipers will make one extra sweep • Activating and deactivating the rain sen- pressed every time the vehicle is started:
when the thumb wheel is turned upward. sor's memory function (p. 182)
1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top
• Using the rear window wiper/washer
Deactivate the rain sensor view.
(p. 184)
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the
• Filling washer fluid (p. 666) 2. Tap My Car Wipers.
rain sensor button or moving the lever
upward to another wiper mode. • Putting the wiper blades in service posi- 3. Select Rain Sensor Memory to activate/
tion (p. 665) deactivate the memory function.
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated in
ignition mode 0 or when the engine is • Replacing windshield wiper blades Related information
switched off. (p. 664) Using the rain sensor (p. 181)
•
The rain sensor is also automatically deacti- • Changing rear window wipers (p. 663) Using the windshield and headlight wash-
•
vated when the wiper blades are put in the • Using the windshield wipers (p. 180) ers (p. 183)
service position. The rain sensor will reactivate • Using automatic rear window wiping
when service mode is switched off. when backing up (p. 185)
• Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 180)
CAUTION
• Using the rear window wiper/washer
The windshield wipers may start inadver- (p. 184)
tently and be damaged in automatic car
• Filling washer fluid (p. 666)
washes. Deactivate the rain sensor when
the engine is running or when the ignition • Putting the wiper blades in service posi-
is in mode I or II. The symbol in the instru- tion (p. 665)
ment panel will go out. • Replacing windshield wiper blades
(p. 664)

182
 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

• Changing rear window wipers (p. 663) Using the windshield and CAUTION
• Using the windshield wipers (p. 180) headlight washers
Avoid activating the washer system when
The windshield and headlight washers are
it is frozen or the fluid reservoir is empty.
designed to clean the windshield and head-
Otherwise, there is a risk of damaging the
lights. Use the right-side steering wheel lever
pump.
to start the windshield and headlight wash-
ers.
Headlight washer*
Starting the windshield and headlight To save washer fluid, the headlights are
washers washed automatically according to a defined
interval when the headlights are on.

Reduced washing
When there is about 1 liter (1 qt) of washer
fluid left in the reservoir and the Washer fluid
Level low, refill message is displayed in the
instrument panel together with the sym-
bol, the washer fluid supply to the headlights
is cut off. This is to prioritize windshield clean-
ing and visibility through it. The headlights are
only washed if high or low beam is on.

Washing function, right-hand steering wheel lever. Related information

• Using the rain sensor (p. 181)
– Move the right-hand steering wheel lever
toward the steering wheel to start the • Using automatic rear window wiping
windshield and headlight washers. when backing up (p. 185)
> After the lever is released, the wipers • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 180)
make several extra sweeps. • Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 182)
• Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 184)

}}

* Option/accessory. 183
 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

• Filling washer fluid (p. 666) Using the rear window wiper/
• Putting the wiper blades in service posi- washer
tion (p. 665) The rear window washer/wiper is designed to
• Replacing windshield wiper blades clean the rear window. Use the right-side
(p. 664) steering wheel lever to start and control the
wiper/washer.
• Changing rear window wipers (p. 663)
• Using the windshield wipers (p. 180) Activating the rear window wiper/
washer

NOTE
The rear window wiper motor is equipped
with overheating protection that switches Select for interval rear window
off the motor if it becomes overheated. The wiper.
rear window wiper can be operated again Select for continuous rear window
after a cooling-down period. wiper.
– Move the right-side steering wheel lever
forward to wash/wipe the rear window.

Related information
• Using the rain sensor (p. 181)
• Using the windshield and headlight wash-
ers (p. 183)
• Using automatic rear window wiping
when backing up (p. 185)
• Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 182)
• Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 180)
• Filling washer fluid (p. 666)

184
 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

• Putting the wiper blades in service posi- Using automatic rear window • Replacing windshield wiper blades
tion (p. 665) wiping when backing up (p. 664)
• Replacing windshield wiper blades If reverse gear is engaged while the wind- • Changing rear window wipers (p. 663)
(p. 664) shield wipers are on, the rear window wipers • Using the windshield wipers (p. 180)
• Changing rear window wipers (p. 663) will start. This function is deactivated when a
different gear is selected.
• Using the windshield wipers (p. 180) 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Tap My Car Wipers.
3. Select Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deac-
tivate automatic rear window wiping
when backing up.
If the rear window wipers are already in con-
tinuous wiper mode, no change will be made
when reverse gear is engaged.

Related information
• Using the rain sensor (p. 181)
• Using the windshield and headlight wash-
ers (p. 183)
• Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 180)
• Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 182)
• Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 184)
• Filling washer fluid (p. 666)
• Putting the wiper blades in service posi-
tion (p. 665)

185
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Manual front seats Raise/lower the seat by moving the con- • Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
The front seats can be adjusted in a number trol up/down. (p. 195)
of different ways to help enhance your seat- Change the backrest tilt by turning the • Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
ing comfort. knob on the backrest. (p. 195)
• Adjusting the passenger seat from the
WARNING driver's seat* (p. 197)
• Do not adjust the seat while driving.
The seat should be adjusted so that the
brake pedal can be depressed fully. In
addition, position the seat as far rear-
ward as comfort and control allow.
• Check that the seat is securely locked
into position after adjusting.

Related information
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat • Power* front seats (p. 189)
cushion* by moving the control up/down.1 • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
Change the length of the seat cushion* by • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and
pulling up the lever and moving the cush- head-up display* (p. 190)
ion forward/backward.
• Using stored positions for seats, mirrors
Move the seat forward/backing by lifting and head-up display* (p. 191)
the handle and moving the seat to a suita-
• Adjusting front seat massage settings*
ble distance from the steering wheel and
(p. 193)
pedals. Check to make sure the seat is
securely locked into place after its setting • Adjusting* front seat cushion length
has been changed. (p. 194)
Adjust lumbar support* by pressing the • Front seat massage* settings (p. 192)
button up/down/forward/rearward.2

1 Only applies to the driver's seat.

2 Applies for four-way lumbar support*. Two-way lumbar support* is adjusted forward/rearward.

188 * Option/accessory.
 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Power* front seats • Adjusting front seat massage settings* Adjusting the power* front seats
The front seats can be adjusted in a number (p. 193) Set the desired seating position using the
of different ways to help enhance your seat- • Adjusting* front seat cushion length controls on the front seat cushion. To set the
ing comfort. The power seat can be moved (p. 194) convenience functions, turn the multifunction
forward/backward and up/down. The height Front seat massage* settings (p. 192) control4 upward/downward.
•
and length* of the seat cushion and the tilt of
the backrest can be adjusted. Lumbar sup- • Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
port* can be adjusted up, down, forward and (p. 195)
backward.3 • Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
The seats can be adjusted when the engine is (p. 195)
running and for a certain period of time after • Adjusting the passenger seat from the
the door has been unlocked without the driver's seat* (p. 197)
engine running. They can also be adjusted for
a short period after the engine is turned off.

CAUTION
The power seats have an overload protec-
The illustration shows the controls in a vehicle with
tor that is triggered if a seat is blocked by four-way lumbar support*. Vehicles with two-way
any object. If this occurs, remove the lumbar support* do not have the rotary multifunction
object and attempt to adjust the seat control.
again. In vehicles with four-way lumbar support*,
turn the multifunction control4 up/down to
Related information set the convenience functions. In vehicles
• Manual front seats (p. 188) with two-way lumbar support*, use the
round button to adjust the lumbar support
• Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
forward/rearward.
• Storing positions for seats, mirrors and
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat
head-up display* (p. 190)
cushion by moving the control up/down.
• Using stored positions for seats, mirrors
and head-up display* (p. 191)

3 Applies for four-way lumbar support*. Two-way lumbar support* is adjusted forward/rearward. }}

* Option/accessory. 189
 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

|| Raise/lower the seat by moving the con- • Adjusting the passenger seat from the Storing positions for seats, mirrors
trol up/down. driver's seat* (p. 197) and head-up display*
Move the seat forward/rearward by mov- Adjustment settings for the power* seat, door
ing the control forward/rearward. mirrors and head-up display* can be stored in
Change the backrest tilt by moving the the memory buttons.
control forward/backward. Two different positions for the power* seat,
door mirrors and head-up display* can be
Only one movement (forward/rearward/up/
stored using the memory buttons. The buttons
down) can be performed at a time.
are located on the inside of either one or both*
The front seat backrests cannot be folded front doors.
down completely.

Related information
• Manual front seats (p. 188)
• Power* front seats (p. 189)
• Storing positions for seats, mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 190)
• Using stored positions for seats, mirrors
and head-up display* (p. 191)
• Adjusting front seat massage settings*
(p. 193)
• Adjusting* front seat cushion length
(p. 194) Button M for storing a setting.

• Front seat massage* settings (p. 192) Memory button.

• Adjusting front seat side bolster settings* Memory button.
(p. 195)
• Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
(p. 195)

4 Not available in vehicles with two-way lumbar support*.

190 * Option/accessory.
 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Storing positions • Adjusting front seat massage settings* Using stored positions for seats,
1. Adjust the seat, door mirrors and head-up (p. 193) mirrors and head-up display*
display to the desired position. • Adjusting* front seat cushion length If the positions for the power* seat, door mir-
2. Press and hold the M button. The indica- (p. 194) rors and head-up display* have been stored,
tor light in the button will illuminate. • Front seat massage* settings (p. 192) they can be activated using the memory but-
tons.
3. Within three seconds, press and hold the 1 • Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
or 2 button. (p. 195) Using a stored position
> When the position has been stored in • Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
the memory button, an audio signal will (p. 195)
sound and the indicator light in the M Adjusting the passenger seat from the
•
button will go out. driver's seat* (p. 197)
If none of the memory buttons are pressed • Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 174)
within three seconds, the M button will go out
• Head-up display settings* (p. 148)
and no position will be stored.
• Protecting a driver profile (p. 142)
The seats, door mirrors or head-up display
must be readjusted before a new memory
position can be set.

NOTE A stored position can be used with the front

For the stored positions to work, all driver door open or closed:
profiles need to be in Protect Profile
Front door open
mode.
– Briefly press one of the memory buttons 1
( ) or 2 ( ). The power seats, door mir-
Related information rors and head-up display will move and
• Manual front seats (p. 188) stop at the positions stored in that button.
• Power* front seats (p. 189)
• Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
• Using stored positions for seats, mirrors

}}
and head-up display* (p. 191)

* Option/accessory. 191
 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

|| Front door closed NOTE Front seat massage* settings

– Press and hold one of the memory buttons The settings for the multifunctional seats can
For the stored positions to work, all driver
1 ( ) or 2 ( ) until the seat, door mirrors be adjusted using either the mutifunction
profiles need to be in Protect Profile
and head-up display stop in the positions control on the side of the seat or the center
mode.
stored in that memory button. display. The adjustment settings are shown in
the center display.
If the memory button is released, the seat,
Related information
door mirrors and head-up display will stop
• Manual front seats (p. 188)
moving.
• Power* front seats (p. 189)
WARNING • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
• This list point needs to be translated • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and
exactly to: "Because the driver's seat head-up display* (p. 190)
can be adjusted with the ignition off, • Adjusting front seat massage settings*
children should never be left unatten- (p. 193)
ded in the vehicle.
• Adjusting* front seat cushion length
• Movement of the seat can be STOP- (p. 194)
PED at any time by pressing any but-
• Front seat massage* settings (p. 192) Multifunction control, located on the side of the seat
ton on the power seat control panel.
• Adjusting front seat side bolster settings* cushion.
• Do not adjust the seat while driving.
(p. 195)
• The seat should be adjusted so that the Massage settings
• Adjusting front seat lumbar support* The following massage settings are available:
brake pedal can be depressed fully. In
(p. 195)
addition, position the seat as far rear- • On/Off: Select On/Off to turn on/off the
ward as comfort and control allow. • Adjusting the passenger seat from the massage function.
driver's seat* (p. 197)
• The seat rails on the floor must not be • Programs 1-5: There are 5 preset mas-
obstructed in any way when the seat is • Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 174) sage programs. Select Swell, Tread,
in motion. • Head-up display settings* (p. 148) Advanced, Lumbar or Shoulder.
• Intensity: Select Low, Normal or High.
• Speed: Select Slow, Normal or Fast.

192 * Option/accessory.
 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Restarting the massage function Adjusting front seat massage 2. Select Massage in the seat settings view.
The massage function turns off automatically settings* 3. Select massage settings by tapping the
after 20 minutes. The function is reactivated The settings for the multifunctional seats can center display or by moving the cursor up/
manually. be adjusted using either the mutifunction down using the multifunction control's
– Tap Restart, which is displayed in the control on the seat or the center display. The upper /lower buttons. Change a set-
center display, to restart the selected mas- adjustment settings are shown in the center ting in the selected function by tapping
sage program. display. the arrows on the center display or by
> The massage program will restart. If no Adjusting front seat massage settings using the multifunction control's front /
selection is made, the message will be The front seat backrests have a massage func- rear buttons.
stored in Top view. tion. Air-filled cushions provide the massaging
action and a number of settings are available. Related information
Related information • Manual front seats (p. 188)
• Manual front seats (p. 188) The massage function can only be activated
when the engine is running. • Power* front seats (p. 189)
• Power* front seats (p. 189)
• Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
• Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
• Storing positions for seats, mirrors and
• Storing positions for seats, mirrors and head-up display* (p. 190)
head-up display* (p. 190)
• Using stored positions for seats, mirrors
• Using stored positions for seats, mirrors and head-up display* (p. 191)
and head-up display* (p. 191)
• Adjusting* front seat cushion length
• Adjusting front seat massage settings* (p. 194)
(p. 193)
• Front seat massage* settings (p. 192)
• Adjusting* front seat cushion length
(p. 194) • Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
(p. 195)
• Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
(p. 195) • Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
1. Activate the multifunction control by turn- (p. 195)
• Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
(p. 195) ing the control upward/downward. The • Adjusting the passenger seat from the
seat settings view will appear in the center driver's seat* (p. 197)
• Adjusting the passenger seat from the
display.
driver's seat* (p. 197)

* Option/accessory. 193
 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Adjusting* front seat cushion 2. Select Cushion extension in the seat set- Related information
length tings view. • Manual front seats (p. 188)
Depending on the selected equipment level, • Push in the front part of the four-way • Power* front seats (p. 189)
the length of the seat cushion can either be button to extend the seat cushion. • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
adjusted using the multifunction control* on
the side of the seat cushion, or manually • Press the rear part of the four-way but- • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and
adjusted using the control on the front of the ton to shorten the seat cushion. head-up display* (p. 190)
seat cushion. • Using stored positions for seats, mirrors
Manually adjusting seat cushion and head-up display* (p. 191)
Adjusting seat cushion length using length
• Adjusting front seat massage settings*
the multifunction control
(p. 193)
• Front seat massage* settings (p. 192)
• Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
(p. 195)
• Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
(p. 195)
• Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat* (p. 197)

Control for adjusting seat cushion.

The multifunction control, located on the side of the
seat cushion. 1. Grasp the handle on the front of the
1. Activate the multifunction control by turn- seat and pull upward.
ing the control upward/downward. The 2. Adjust the length of the seat cushion.
seat settings view will appear in the center 3. Release the handle and make sure the
display. seat cushion locks into position.

194 * Option/accessory.
 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Adjusting front seat side bolster 2. Select Side bolsters in the seat settings Adjusting front seat lumbar
settings* view. support*
Enhance comfort in the front seat by adjust- • Press the front part of the four-way but- Use the control on the side of the seat cush-
ing the sides of the backrest. ton to increase side bolster support . ion to adjust the lumbar support.

• Press the rear part of the four-way but-

ton to decrease side bolster support .

Related information
• Manual front seats (p. 188)
• Power* front seats (p. 189)
• Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
• Storing positions for seats, mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 190)
• Using stored positions for seats, mirrors
The multifunction control is located on the side of the and head-up display* (p. 191) Multifunction control, in vehicles with four-way lum-
seat cushion. • Adjusting front seat massage settings* bar support*.
The side bolsters in the front seat backrests (p. 193)
can be inflated/deflated to adjust the amount • Adjusting* front seat cushion length
of support provided. The settings for the multi- (p. 194)
functional seats can be adjusted using either
• Front seat massage* settings (p. 192)
the mutifunction control on the seat or the
center display. The adjustment settings are • Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
shown in the center display. (p. 195)
To adjust the side bolsters: • Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat* (p. 197)
1. Activate the multifunction control by turn-
ing it upward/downward . The seat set-
tings view will appear in the center dis-
play. Control in vehicles with two-way lumbar support*.

}}

* Option/accessory. 195
 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

|| Lumbar support is adjusted using the multi- 2. Select Lumbar in the seat settings view. Related information
function control in vehicles with four-way lum- • Manual front seats (p. 188)
bar support*, or the round button in vehicles • Press the round button up /down
to move the lumbar support upward/ • Power* front seats (p. 189)
with two-way lumbar support*. The control is
located on the side of the seat cushion. downward. • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
Depending on the selected equipment level, • Press the front part of the button to • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and
the lumbar support can be adjusted forward/ increase lumbar support. head-up display* (p. 190)
rearward and up/down (four-way lumbar sup- • Using stored positions for seats, mirrors
port) or forward/backward (two-way lumbar • Press the rear part of the button to
decrease lumbar support. and head-up display* (p. 191)
support).
• Adjusting front seat massage settings*
Adjusting lumbar support in vehicles Adjusting lumbar support in vehicles (p. 193)
with four-way lumbar support with two-way lumbar support Adjusting* front seat cushion length
•
(p. 194)
• Front seat massage* settings (p. 192)
• Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
(p. 195)
• Adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat* (p. 197)

1. Activate the multifunction control by turn- 1. Press the front part of the round button
ing the control upward/downward. The to increase lumbar support.
seat settings view will appear in the center
2. Press the rear part of the round button
display. to decrease lumbar support.

196 * Option/accessory.
 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Adjusting the passenger seat from • Adjusting* front seat cushion length
the driver's seat* (p. 194)
The front passenger seat can be adjusted • Front seat massage* settings (p. 192)
from the driver's seat. • Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
Activating the function (p. 195)
The function is activated via the function view • Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
in the center display: (p. 195)
Tap the Adjust Passenger
Seat button to activate.

Move the passenger seat forward/rear-

ward by moving the control forward/rear-
ward.
Adjust passenger seat Change the backrest tilt of the passenger
The driver must adjust the passenger seat seat by moving the control forward/back-
within 10 seconds of activating the function. If ward.
no adjustment is made within this time, the
function will be deactivated. Related information
The driver adjusts the passenger seat using • Manual front seats (p. 188)
the controls on the driver's seat: • Power* front seats (p. 189)
• Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
• Storing positions for seats, mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 190)
• Using stored positions for seats, mirrors
and head-up display* (p. 191)
• Adjusting front seat massage settings*
(p. 193)

* Option/accessory. 197
 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Folding down the rear seat CAUTION

backrests
The seat cushion of the integrated child
The rear seat backrest is split into two sec-
restraint* must be in the stowed position
tions. The two sections can be folded forward
before the rear seat backrest can be folded
individually.
down.
WARNING
The armrest* in the center seat must be
• Adjust the seat and ensure it locks into raised before the seat backrest is folded
position before driving. Use caution down.
when adjusting the seat. Uncontrolled
or careless adjustments could lead to The ski hatch must be closed before the
injury. seat backrest is folded down.

• Long objects must always be securely

tied down to help prevent injury or NOTE
damage in the event of sudden brak-
The front seats may need to be pushed for-
ing.
ward and/or the backrest adjusted so that
• Always turn off the engine and apply the rear seat backrests can be fully low-
the parking brake when loading or ered.
unloading the vehicle.
• Put the gear selector in P to help pre- Folding down the backrests
vent the gear selector from being inad- The vehicle must be stationary and at least
vertently moved. one of the rear doors must be open before a
backrest can be folded down.
CAUTION
Make sure that the rear seat is unoccupied
When the backrest is folded down, make and that there are no objects on the seat.
sure there are no objects in the rear seat,
and the seat belts are not buckled. Other- Push down the center seat's head
wise there is a risk of damage to the restraint manually.
upholstery.

198 * Option/accessory.
 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Pull up the handle on the backrest 4. Adjust the center head restraint if neces- Adjusting the rear seat head
while folding down the backrest. The han- sary. restraints
dle for the head restraint will be automati- Adjust the center head restraint in the rear
cally pulled up when the backrest is low- WARNING seat to the seat occupant's height. Fold down
ered. A red indicator light near the back- When the backrest is restored to an the outboard head restraints* to improve rear
rest lock indicates that the backrest is upright position, the red indicator should visibility.
no longer locked. no longer be visible. If it is still visible, the
backrest is not locked in place. Adjusting the center seat head
restraint
NOTE
When the backrest is folded down, the WARNING
head restraint may come in contact with Make sure that the rear seat backrest and
the seat cushion of the seat being folded head restraint are locked securely in place
down. Adjust the head restraints on the after the seat is folded up.
folded seat to help prevent damage to the The head restraints at the outer seats must
fabric. always be raised when there is a passenger
in one of these spots of the rear seat.
3. The backrest lock will release and the
backrest will automatically fold down to
the horizontal position. Related information
• Adjusting the rear seat head restraints
Folding up the backrest (p. 199)
To fold up the backrest to the upright position The center head restraint should be adjusted
• Private Locking (p. 269) to suit the passenger's height. The entire back
manually:
• Activating and deactivating private locking of the head should be covered if possible.
1. Move the backrest upward/rearward. (p. 269) Manually move the restraint up or down as
2. Press the backrest until it locks into posi- needed.
tion.
3. Fold up the head restraints manually.

}}

* Option/accessory. 199
 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

|| Folding the rear seat outboard head

restraints using the handle

To lower the restraint, push and hold the but- Tap the Headrest Fold but-
ton (see illustration) while carefully lowering ton to activate/deactivate
the head restraint. folding. For vehicles with electrically folding* head
restraints, the outboard head restraints can be
WARNING folded using the handle on the top of the seat
The center seat head restraint must be in (see illustration .) Note that this method
its lowest position when the seat is not also folds down the backrests. To fold down
occupied. When the center seat is occu- Manually push the head restraint until it clicks
into position. only the head restraints, e.g. to improve visibil-
pied, the head restraint must be correctly
adjusted to the passenger's height, cover- ity, use the center display* instead.
ing the entire back of the head if possible. WARNING
Do not lower the head restraint if there are
Folding the rear seat outboard head passengers in any of the rear seats.
restraints using the center display*
The outer head restraints can be folded via the
center display's function view. The head WARNING
restraint can be folded down when the vehicle The head restraint must be locked in the
is in ignition mode 0. upright position after it has been folded up.

200 * Option/accessory.
 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Steering wheel controls and horn Horn

The steering wheel has a horn and controls
for e.g. driver support systems and voice con-
trol.

For vehicles without electrically folding back-

The horn is located in the center of the steering
rests, fold the outboard head restraints man- wheel.
ually using the inner control on the top of the
seat (see illustration ). Related information
Steering wheel keypads and paddles*.
• Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 202)
Related information Driver support system controls.5
• Folding down the rear seat backrests
(p. 198) Paddle* for manually shifting gears (auto-
matic transmission).
Controls for voice commands, accessing
menus and messages, and handling
phone calls.

5 Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Alert* and Pilot Assist.

* Option/accessory. 201
 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Adjusting the steering wheel

The steering wheel can be adjusted to various
positions.

Steering wheel adjuster lever.

1. Move the lever forward to release the
steering wheel.
The steering wheel's reach and height can be
adjusted. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
WARNING 3. Pull the lever back to lock the steering
Adjust the steering wheel and ensure it wheel into place. If the lever is difficult to
locks into position before driving. Never move, press or lift the steering wheel
adjust the steering wheel while driving. lightly while pulling the lever.

Related information
• Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 201)
• Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
• Speed-dependent steering wheel resis-
tance (p. 274)

202 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Climate • Air distribution (p. 210) Climate zones

The vehicle is equipped with electronic cli- • Climate system controls (p. 216) The vehicle is divided into climate zones to
mate control. The climate system cools, heats make it possible to set different temperatures
and dehumidifies the air in the passenger for different parts of the passenger compart-
compartment. ment.
All of the climate system functions are con-
trolled from the center display and the buttons 2-zone climate system
on the center console.
Certain rear seat functions can also be con-
trolled from the climate controls* on the rear
of the tunnel console.

NOTE
The climate system can be used to cool
down the media system in the center dis-
play if needed. In these cases, the message
Climate system Cooling the
infotainment system will be shown in the
instrument panel. Climate zones with 2-zone climate system.
In 2-zone climate systems, the passenger
Related information compartment temperature can be set sepa-
• Climate zones (p. 204) rately for the left and right sides of the vehicle.
• Climate control sensors (p. 205) Related information
• Perceived temperature (p. 205) • Climate (p. 204)
• Climate control system voice commands
(p. 206)
• Parking climate (p. 227)
• Heater (p. 236)
• Air quality (p. 207)

204 * Option/accessory.
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Climate control sensors On vehicles equipped with the Interior Air Perceived temperature
The climate system has a number of sensors Quality System*, there is also an air quality The climate control system regulates the cli-
to help regulate the climate settings in the sensor in the climate system's air intake. mate in the passenger compartment based
vehicle. Do not cover or block the sensors on perceived temperature, not actual tem-
Related information
with clothing or other objects. perature.
• Climate (p. 204)
The selected passenger compartment tem-
Location of the sensors • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 208) perature is based on the physical perception of
the current ambient temperature, airflow
speed, humidity, sunlight in the passenger
compartment, etc.
The system has a sunlight sensor that detects
which side of the vehicle the sunlight is shin-
ing on and adjusts the temperature accord-
ingly. This means that the temperature of the
air coming out of the vents may be different
for the left and right sides, even if the tem-
perature setting is the same for both sides.

Related information
Sunlight sensors - on the upper side of the • Climate (p. 204)
dashboard.
Humidity sensor - in the rearview mirror
console.
Passenger compartment temperature sen-
sor - near the buttons in the center con-
sole.
Airborne particulate matter sensor* – on
the underside of the glove compartment.
Ambient temperature sensor - in the right-
side door mirror.

* Option/accessory. 205
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Climate control system voice • "Turn on auto" - activates automatic cli- • "Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat
commands1 mate control. ventilation" - raises/lowers the level of
Voice commands can be used for the climate • "Air condition on"/"Air condition off" - seat ventilation*.
control system to e.g. change temperature, activates/deactivates air conditioning.
activate seat heating* or change blower • "Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" - NOTE
speed. activates/deactivates air recirculation. Not all system languages support voice
Tap and say one of the following com- control. If a language supports voice con-
• "Turn on defroster "/"Turn off
mands: trol, it is marked with a symbol in the
defroster" - activates/deactivates win-
• "Climate" - starts a command dialog for dow and door mirror defrosting. list of available system languages. Read
climate controls and provides examples of more about where the information is found
• "Turn on max defroster"/"Turn off max
commands that can be used. in the section on voice control settings.
defroster" - activates/deactivates max
• "Set temperature to X degrees" - sets defroster.
desired temperature. • "Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear Related information
• "Raise temperature"/"Lower defroster" - Activates/deactivates heated • Climate (p. 204)
temperature" - raises/lowers the set tem- rear window and door mirrors. • Voice Control (p. 149)
perature. • "Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn • Use voice recognition (p. 150)
• "Sync temperature" - synchronizes the steering wheel heat off" - activates/ • Voice control settings (p. 154)
temperature for all climate zones in the deactivates heated steering wheel*.
vehicle with the temperature set for the • "Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower
driver's side. steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the
• "Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the level of steering wheel heating*.
desired air vent. "Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat"
•
• "Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" - - activates/deactivates seat heating*.
closes the desired air vent. "Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" -
•
• "Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" - raises/lowers the level of seat heating*.
changes blower speed to Max/Off. • "Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off
• "Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" - seat ventilation" - activates/deactivates
raises/lowers the set blower speed. seat ventilation*.

1 Certain markets only.

206 * Option/accessory.
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Air quality • Advanced Air Cleaner* (p. 210) CleanZone*

The materials used in the passenger compart- • Passenger compartment air filter (p. 209) The CleanZone function monitors the condi-
ment and air filtering system have been tions affecting good air quality in the passen-
selected to ensure a high level of air quality in ger compartment and indicates whether they
the passenger compartment. are fulfilled or not.

Materials used in the passenger

compartment
The materials in the passenger compartment
are designed to be pleasant and comfortable,
even for people with asthma or allergies.
The materials have been developed and tested
to reduce dust in the passenger compartment
and make it easier to keep clean.
The mats in both the passenger compartment
and cargo compartment can be easily
removed for cleaning.
The indicator is shown in the center dis-
Use Volvo-recommended cleaning agents and play's Climate view.
car care products to clean the interior.
The indicator is shown in the climate bar
Air filtering systems when Climate view is not open.
In addition to the passenger compartment air If the conditions are not met, the text Clean
filter, the vehicle is also equipped with other Zone will be shown in white. When all the
air cleaning systems that help you maintain conditions are met, the text will change to
high air quality in the passenger compartment. blue.

Related information The following conditions must be met:

• Climate (p. 204) • All doors and tailgate are closed.
• CleanZone* (p. 207) • All side windows and panoramic roof* are
• Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 208) closed.
• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 208)
}}

* Option/accessory. 207
 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| • The Interior Air Quality System* is acti- Clean Zone Interior Package* Interior Air Quality System*
vated. Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) is a series Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully
• The blower is activated. of modifications that filters even more allergy automatic air quality system that removes
Air recirculation is deactivated. and asthma-inducing substances and other gases and particles to reduce odors and con-
•
pollutants from the passenger compartment. taminants in the passenger compartment.
CZIP includes the following: IAQS is part of the Clean Zone Interior
NOTE Package (CZIP) and removes air contaminants
• An enhanced function that starts the
CleanZone does not indicate that the air such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitric oxides
blower when the vehicle is unlocked using
quality is good, but only that the conditions and ground-level ozone.
the remote key. The blower will then fill
for good air quality have been met. the passenger compartment with fresh air. If the system's air quality sensors detect con-
The function starts when required and taminants in the outside air, the air intake
Related information switches off automatically after a period of closes and air recirculation is activated.
• Air quality (p. 207) time or when one of the passenger com-
• Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 208) partment doors is opened. The amount of NOTE
time the blower runs gradually decreases
• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 208) due to reduced need up until the vehicle is To ensure optimal air quality in the passen-
• Passenger compartment air filter (p. 209) 4 years old. ger compartment, the air quality sensor
should always be engaged.
• The fully automatic Interior Air Quality
System (IAQS). Recirculation is limited in cold weather to
prevent fogging.
Related information
In the event of fogging, use the defroster
• Air quality (p. 207)
functions for the windshield, side windows
• CleanZone* (p. 207) and rear window.
• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 208)
• Passenger compartment air filter (p. 209) Related information
• Activating and deactivating the air quality
sensor* (p. 209)
• Air quality (p. 207)
• CleanZone* (p. 207)

208 * Option/accessory.
 CLIMATE CONTROL

• Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 208) Activating and deactivating the air Passenger compartment air filter
• Passenger compartment air filter (p. 209) quality sensor* All air entering the passenger compartment
The air quality sensor is part of the fully auto- through the climate control system intake is
mated Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). filtered.
The air quality sensor can be switched on or
off. Replacing the passenger
compartment filter
1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center To maintain the high performance of the cli-
display. mate control system, the filter must be
2. Tap Climate. replaced regularly. Follow Volvo's service
schedule for recommended replacement inter-
3. Select Air Quality Sensor to activate/
vals. When driving in areas with a lot of smog,
deactivate the air quality sensor.
dust, etc., the filter may need to be changed
Related information more frequently.
• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 208)
NOTE
There are two types of passenger compart-
ment filters. Make sure that the correct fil-
ter is installed.

Related information
• Air quality (p. 207)
• CleanZone* (p. 207)
• Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 208)
• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 208)

* Option/accessory. 209
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Advanced Air Cleaner* Air distribution Related information

Advanced Air Cleaner is a fully automatic air The climate system distributes incoming air • Climate (p. 204)
cleaner that traps airborne particulate matter, through a number of vents in the passenger • Adjusting air distribution (p. 211)
exhaust and other pollutants in the passenger compartment.
• Opening, closing and directing air vents
compartment air filter, which improves the
Automatic and manual air distribution (p. 211)
climate in the passenger compartment.
When the auto-climate feature is on, air distri- • Air distribution options (p. 213)
The function starts automatically when the bution is regulated automatically. Air distribu-
blower starts. tion can also be controlled manually.
Airborne particulate matter are also known as
PM2.5 (particles smaller than 2.5 µm), and the Adjustable air vents
Certain air vents in the vehicle are adjustable,
concentrations of these particles in the vehicle
which means they can be opened/closed and
are measured by one of the vehicle's climate
the direction of the air flow from the vent can
control sensors. The concentration in the vehi-
be adjusted.
cle is presented in the downloadable app Air
Quality.

Related information
• Air quality (p. 207)
• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 208)
• CleanZone* (p. 207)
• Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 208)
• Passenger compartment air filter (p. 209)
• Climate control sensors (p. 205)

Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger

compartment.
Four vents on the dashboard and one on
each of the pillars between the front and
rear doors.

210 * Option/accessory.
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Adjusting air distribution Opening, closing and directing air

Air distribution can be adjusted manually if vents
needed. Some of the air vents in the passenger com-
partment can be individually opened, closed
and directed.
Misting can be eliminated by directing the
outer air vents towards the door windows.
1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate
bar to open Climate view in the center dis- Direct the outer air vents into the passenger
play. compartment to maintain a comfortable tem-
perature in warm weather.

Opening and closing the air vents

Air distribution buttons in Climate view. Air vents on the dashboard:
Air distribution - windshield defrost vents
– Turn the knob in the center of the air vent
Air distribution - dashboard and center to open/close airflow from the vent.
console air vents When the mark on the knob is vertical, the
Air distribution - floor air vents airflow is strongest.

2. Tap one or more air distribution buttons to Air vents on the door pillars:
open/close the airflow for that vent. – Turn the thumb wheel under the air vent
> The air distribution changes and the to open/close the airflow from the vent.
buttons will light up or go out.
The more white lines that are visible, the
Related information stronger the airflow.
• Air distribution (p. 210)
Directing air flow
• Opening, closing and directing air vents – Move the lever in the center of the air vent
(p. 211) horizontally or vertically to direct the air-
• Air distribution options (p. 213) flow from the vent.

}}

211
 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| Related information
• Air distribution (p. 210)
• Adjusting air distribution (p. 211)
• Air distribution options (p. 213)

212
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Air distribution options

Air distribution can be adjusted manually if
needed. The following options are available.
Air distribution Purpose
If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system will revert to automatic mode.

Main airflow from defroster vents. Some airflow from other Helps remove ice and condensation in cold and humid weather
vents. (blower speed should not be set too low).

Main airflow from dashboard vents. Some airflow from other Provides effective cooling in warm weather.
vents.

Main airflow from floor vents. Some airflow from other vents. Provides heating or cooling in footwell areas.

}}

213
 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| Air distribution Purpose

Main airflow from defroster and dashboard vents. Some air- Provides a comfortable climate in warm and dry weather.
flow from other vents.

Main airflow from defroster and floor vents. Some airflow from Provides a comfortable climate and effective defogging in cold
other vents. and humid weather.

Main airflow from dashboard and floor vents. Some airflow Provides a comfortable climate in sunny, cool weather.
from other vents.

Main airflow from defroster, dashboard and floor vents. Provides balanced comfort in the passenger compartment.

214
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Related information
• Air distribution (p. 210)
• Opening, closing and directing air vents
(p. 211)
• Adjusting air distribution (p. 211)

215
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Climate system controls Main climate

The climate system functions are controlled In addition to the functions in the climate bar,
from physical buttons on the center console, other main climate system functions can be
the center display, and the climate panel on controlled from the Main climate tab.
the rear side of the tunnel console*.

Physical buttons in the center console

Temperature controls for driver and pas-

senger side.
Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver
and front passenger seat, as well as
heated steering wheel*.
Button for opening Climate view. The
Button for max defroster. graphic in the button shows activated cli-
mate system settings.
Button for heated rear window and door
mirrors. Climate view in the center display
Tap the symbol in the center of the
Climate bar in the center display climate bar to open Climate view.
The most common climate system functions Depending on equipment level, Cli-
can be controlled from the climate bar. mate view may be divided into sev- Max, Rear – Controls for defrosting win-
eral tabs. Toggle between the tabs by swiping dows and door mirrors.
the screen to the left/right or by tapping the AC - Air conditioning controls.
desired heading.
Recirc - Air recirculation controls.
Air distribution controls.

216 * Option/accessory.
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Blower control. • Activating and deactivating the heated Activating and deactivating power
rear window and door mirrors (p. 223) front seats*
AUTO - Automatic climate control.
• Setting the blower speed for the front The seats can be heated for added comfort
Parking climate seats (p. 224) for the driver and passengers in cold weather.
Parking climate functions can be controlled • Synchronize temperature (p. 226)
from the Parking climate tab.
• Activating and deactivating air condition-
Climate controls on the rear side of ing (p. 227)
the tunnel console* 1. Tap the left- or right-side steering wheel
If the vehicle is equipped with heated rear and seat button in the center display's cli-
seats*, there are physical buttons on the rear mate bar to open the controls for steering
side of the tunnel console to control this func- wheel and seat heating.
tion. If the vehicle is not equipped with ventila-
ted seats or heated steering wheel (for the
Related information driver's side), the button for seat heating is
• Climate (p. 204)
directly accessible in the climate bar.
• Activating and deactivating power front
seats* (p. 217)
• Activating and deactivating the heated
rear seats* (p. 218)
• Activating and deactivating front seat ven- 2. Tap the seat heating button repeatedly to
tilation* (p. 219) select one of the four levels: Off, High,
Medium or Low.
• Activating and deactivating the heated
steering wheel* (p. 220) > The level is changed and the set level is
displayed in the button.
• Activating auto climate control (p. 220)
• Activating and deactivating recirculation
(p. 221)
• Activating and deactivating max defroster
(p. 222)

}}

* Option/accessory. 217
 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| WARNING Activating and deactivating the Activating and deactivating the

heated front seat* heated rear seats*
Heated seats should not be used by people
who have difficulty detecting temperature The seats can be heated for added comfort The seats can be heated for added comfort
increases due to nerve damage or numb- for the driver and passengers in cold weather. for the driver and passengers in cold weather.
ness or who for another reason may have Seat heating can be set to automatically acti-
difficulty operating the controls for seat vate when the engine is started. When set to Activating and deactivating the heated
heating. automatically activate, heating will be turned rear seats from the rear seat
on at low ambient temperatures.
Related information 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center
• Climate system controls (p. 216) display.
• Activating and deactivating the heated 2. Tap Climate.
front seat* (p. 218)
3. Select Auto Driver Seat Heating Level
and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level
to activate/deactivate automatic start of
heated driver's and passenger seat.
> An "A" will be displayed next to the rel-
evant seat heating button in the climate
bar when auto start has been activated. Buttons for seat heating on the rear side of the tun-
4. Select Low, Medium or High to select nel console.
level after the function has been activated. – Press repeatedly on the left or right seat
heating buttons on the rear side of the
Related information tunnel console to select one of four levels:
• Climate system controls (p. 216) Off, High, Medium or Low.
• Activating and deactivating power front > The level is changed and the indicator
seats* (p. 217) lights in the button display the level.

218 * Option/accessory.
 CLIMATE CONTROL

WARNING Activating and deactivating front

seat ventilation*
Heated seats should not be used by people
who have difficulty detecting temperature The seats can be ventilated to provide
increases due to nerve damage or numb- increased comfort in warm weather.
2. Tap the seat ventilation button repeatedly
ness or who for another reason may have The ventilation system consists of fans in the
difficulty operating the controls for seat to select one of the four levels: Off, High,
seats and backrest that draw air through the
heating. seat upholstery. The cooler the passenger Medium or Low.
compartment is, the greater the cooling effect > The level is changed and the set level is
Related information of the ventilation. The system can be activated displayed in the button.
• Climate system controls (p. 216) when the engine is running.
Related information
• Climate system controls (p. 216)

1. Tap the left- or right-side steering wheel

and seat button in the center display's cli-
mate bar to open the controls for steering
wheel and seat heating.
If the vehicle is not equipped with heated
seats or heated steering wheel (for the
driver's side), the button for seat ventila-
tion is directly accessible in the climate
bar.

* Option/accessory. 219
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating and deactivating the Activating and deactivating Activating auto climate control
heated steering wheel* automatic steering wheel heating* If auto climate control is activated, several cli-
The steering wheel can be heated for added The steering wheel can be heated for added mate system functions are controlled auto-
comfort in cold weather. comfort in cold weather. matically.
Steering wheel heating can be set to automat-
ically activate when the engine is started.
When set to automatically activate, heating
will be turned on at low ambient tempera-
1. Tap the driver's side steering wheel and tures. 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate
seat button in the climate bar in the center bar to open Climate view in the center dis-
display to open the controls for steering 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center play.
wheel and seat heating. display.
2. Tap or press and hold AUTO Climate/>
If the vehicle is not equipped with heated 2. Tap Climate.
• Tap - air recirculation, air conditioning
or ventilated seats, the button for steering 3. Select Auto Steering Wheel Heating and air distribution are controlled auto-
wheel heating is directly accessible in the Level to activate/deactivate automatic matically.
climate bar. start of heated steering wheel.
• Press and hold - air recirculation, air
> An "A" will be displayed next to the conditioning and air distribution are
heated steering wheel button in the cli- controlled automatically. Temperature
mate bar when auto start has been and blower speed are changed to
activated. standard settings: 22 °C (72 °F) and
2. Tap the steering wheel heating button
4. Select Low, Medium or High to select speed 3.
repeatedly to select one of the four levels:
level after the function has been activated. > Auto climate mode is activated and the
Off, High, Medium or Low.
button lights up.
> The level is changed and the set level is Related information
displayed in the button. • Activating and deactivating the heated
steering wheel* (p. 220)
Related information
• Climate system controls (p. 216)
• Activating and deactivating automatic
steering wheel heating* (p. 220)

220 * Option/accessory.
 CLIMATE CONTROL

NOTE Activating and deactivating Related information

recirculation • Climate system controls (p. 216)
It is possible to change the temperature
The climate system's recirculation function • Activating and deactivating the recircula-
and blower speed without deactivating
helps shut out smog, smoke, exhaust fumes, tion timer setting (p. 222)
automatic climate control. Automatic cli-
etc. by reusing the air in the passenger com-
mate control is deactivated when the air
partment.
distribution is changed manually or when
the max defroster is activated.

Related information
• Climate system controls (p. 216) 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate
bar to open Climate view in the center dis-
play.

2. Tap Recirc.
> Air recirculation is activated/deacti-
vated and the button lights up/goes
out.

CAUTION
If the air in the vehicle is recirculated too
long, there is a risk of fogging on the inside
of the windows.

NOTE
Recirculation cannot be activated when the
max defroster is on.

221
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating and deactivating the Activating and deactivating max

recirculation timer setting defroster
The climate system's recirculation function Max defroster is used to quickly remove con-
helps shut out smog, smoke, exhaust fumes, densation and ice from windows.
etc. by reusing the air in the passenger com- Max defroster deactivates automatic climate
partment. control and air recirculation, activates the air
When the recirculation timer is activated, air conditioning, and changes blower speed to 5
recirculation will switch off automatically after and temperature to HI.
20 minutes.
1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center NOTE
display. The volume increases when the blower
2. Tap Climate. speed is changed to 5. Button in center console.

3. Tap Recirculation Timer to activate/ – Tap the button.

deactivate the recirculation timer. When max defroster is deactivated, the cli- > Max defroster is activated/deactivated
mate system reverts to the previous settings. and the button lights up/goes out.
Related information
• Activating and deactivating recirculation Activating and deactivating max Activating and deactivating max
(p. 221) defroster from the center console defroster from the center display
A button in the center console offers quick
access to the max defroster.

1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate

bar to open Climate view in the center dis-
play.

222
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating and deactivating the Activating and deactivating the heated

heated rear window and door rear window and door mirrors from
mirrors the center display
The heated rear window and door mirrors are
2. Tap Max.
used to quickly remove condensation and ice
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated from the glass.
and the button lights up/goes out.
Activating and deactivating the heated 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate
Related information rear window and door mirrors from bar to open Climate view in the center dis-
• Climate system controls (p. 216) the center console play.
A button in the center console offers quick
access to the heated rear window and door
mirrors functions.

2. Tap Rear.
> Heated windows and door mirrors are
activated and the button lights up/goes
out.

Related information
• Climate system controls (p. 216)
• Automatically activating and deactivating
the heated rear window and door mirrors
(p. 224)

Button in center console.

– Tap the button.
> Heated windows and door mirrors are
activated and the button lights up/goes
out.

223
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Automatically activating and Setting the blower speed for the

deactivating the heated rear front seats2
window and door mirrors The blower can be set to several different
The heated rear window and door mirrors are automatically controlled speeds for the front
used to quickly remove condensation and ice seat.
from the glass.
It is possible to select whether rear window
and door mirror heating should be automati-
cally activated or deactivated when the engine
is started. With automatic start activated, 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate
heating will be activated when there is a risk bar to open Climate view in the center dis-
of ice or condensation on the windows or mir- play.
rors. Heating is automatically switched off Blower control buttons in Climate view.
when the window or door mirror is sufficiently 2. Tap the desired blower speed: Off, 1-5 or
warm and the condensation or ice is gone. Max.
1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center > The blower speed will be changed and
display. the buttons for the set speed will light
up.
2. Tap Climate.
3. Select Auto Rear Defroster to activate/ CAUTION
deactivate automatic rear window and
door heating. The air conditioning will not engage if the
blower is turned off completely, which may
Related information cause fogging on the inside of the win-
• Activating and deactivating the heated dows.
rear window and door mirrors (p. 223)

2 The same setting applies to the rear seats with the 2-zone climate system.

224
 CLIMATE CONTROL

NOTE Setting the temperature for the

front seats3
The climate system automatically adapts
airflow as needed within the set blower The temperature can be set to the desired
speed, which means that airflow speed number of degrees for the front seat climate
may vary slightly within the same blower zones.
speed.

Related information
• Climate system controls (p. 216)

Temperature control.
2. Set the temperature by doing one of the
following:
• dragging the control to the desired
temperature, or
Temperature buttons in the climate bar.
• tapping +− to raise/lower the tempera-
1. Tap the left- or right-side temperature but- ture.
tons in the center display's climate bar to
open the control. > The temperature will be set and the
button will display the new tempera-
ture.

NOTE
Heating/cooling cannot be accelerated by
choosing a higher/lower temperature than
the desired temperature.

3 The same setting applies to the rear seats with the 2-zone climate system. }}

225
 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| Related information Synchronize temperature Related information

• Climate system controls (p. 216) The temperature in the different climate • Climate system controls (p. 216)
zones of the vehicle can be synchronized
with the temperature set for the driver's side.

Synchronization button on the driver's side tempera-

ture control.
1. Tap the driver's side temperature button in
the center display's climate bar to open
the control.
2. Tap Synchronize temperature.
> The temperature for all of the vehicle's
climate zones will be synchronized with
the one set for the driver's side and the
synchronization symbol will be dis-
played next to the temperature button.
Synchronization is stopped with another press
on Synchronize temperature or by changing
the temperature setting for a climate zone
other than the driver's.

226
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating and deactivating air NOTE Parking climate

conditioning Parking climate is an umbrella term for vari-
The air conditioning cannot be activated
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies ous functions that improve the passenger
when the fan speed is set to Off.
incoming air as needed. compartment climate when the vehicle is
When the air conditioning is activated, it will parked, e.g. preconditioning.
be switched on and off automatically by the Related information Parking climate functions are con-
climate system as needed. • Climate system controls (p. 216) trolled from the Parking climate tab
in the center display's Climate view.
Tap the symbol in the center of the
climate bar to open Climate view.

Related information
1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate
• Climate (p. 204)
bar to open Climate view in the center dis-
play. • Preconditioning (p. 228)
• Pre-cleaning* (p. 232)
• Climate comfort retaining function
(p. 233)
• Parking climate symbols and messages
2. Tap AC. (p. 235)
> Air conditioning is activated/deacti-
vated and the button lights up/goes
out.

NOTE
For optimal air conditioning function, close
all the side windows and the panoramic
roof*.

* Option/accessory. 227
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Preconditioning NOTE Starting and stopping

Preconditioning is a climate function that, if preconditioning
Preconditioning is only available when the
possible, attempts to achieve a comfortable
vehicle is plugged into an electrical outlet. Preconditioning heats or cools the passenger
temperature in the passenger compartment
A charging post that is not always active, compartment, if possible, before driving. The
before driving.
e.g. due to a timer, can prevent precondi- function can be started in the center display
Preconditioning can be started immediately or tioning from functioning. or from a cellular phone.
started at a preset time using a timer.
If the vehicle is not connected to an electri-
The function utilizes several of the vehicle's cal socket it is still possible in a warm cli- Starting and stopping from the vehicle
systems: mate to achieve brief cooling of the pas-
In cold weather, the parking heater heats senger compartment by direct starting pre-
•
the passenger compartment to a comfort- conditioning.
able temperature. 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate
• In warm weather, air conditioning cools NOTE bar to open Climate view in the center dis-
the passenger compartment to a comfort- play.
During preconditioning of the passenger
able temperature. 2. Select the Parking climate tab.
compartment, the vehicle works to reach a
• The electrically heated steering wheel* comfortable temperature and not the tem- 3. Tap the boxes to select if seat/steering
and seats* can be activated. perature set in the climate system. wheel heating should be activated along
• Heating for the rear window and door mir- with preconditioning for each function.
rors is automatically activated as needed.
NOTE 4. Tap Start Pre-con. & Cleaning.
During preconditioning in a hot climate, con-
Pre-cleaning* starts automatically when > Preconditioning starts/stops and the
densation from the air conditions may drip
preconditioning is complete. button lights up/goes out.
under the vehicle. This is normal.

Related information
• Parking climate (p. 227)
• Starting and stopping preconditioning
(p. 228)
• Preconditioning timer (p. 229)
• Pre-cleaning* (p. 232)

228 * Option/accessory.
 CLIMATE CONTROL

NOTE The passenger compartment can also be pre- Preconditioning timer

conditioned using the Engine Remote Start The timer can be set to finish preconditioning
Preconditioning is only available when the (ERS)4 function using the Volvo On Call* app. at a predetermined time.
vehicle is plugged into an electrical outlet.
A charging post that is not always active, Related information The timer can store up to 8 preset times for
e.g. due to a timer, can prevent precondi- • Parking climate (p. 227) a time on a particular date
•
tioning from functioning. Preconditioning (p. 228)
• • a time on one or more days of the week,
If the vehicle is not connected to an electri- • Preconditioning timer (p. 229) with or without the repeat function.
cal socket it is still possible in a warm cli-
• Pre-cleaning* (p. 232)
mate to achieve brief cooling of the pas-
NOTE
senger compartment by direct starting pre-
conditioning. Preconditioning is only available when the
vehicle is plugged into an electrical outlet.
A charging post that is not always active,
NOTE e.g. due to a timer, can prevent precondi-
The vehicle doors and windows should be tioning from functioning.
closed during preconditioning of the pas- If the vehicle is not connected to an electri-
senger compartment. cal socket it is still possible in a warm cli-
mate to achieve brief cooling of the pas-
senger compartment by direct starting pre-
NOTE conditioning.
Pre-cleaning* starts automatically when
preconditioning is complete.
Related information
• Preconditioning (p. 228)
Starting from app • Adding and editing timer settings for pre-
A device with the Volvo On Call* app can be conditioning (p. 230)
used to start preconditioning or check set-
tings. Preconditioning heats or cools the pas- • Activating and deactivating precondition-
senger compartment (using the vehicle's air ing timer (p. 231)
conditioning) to a comfortable temperature. • Deleting preconditioning timer settings
(p. 231)
4 Certain markets only.

* Option/accessory. 229
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Adding and editing timer settings 3. Tap Add timer. Editing the timer setting
for preconditioning > A pop-up window will appear. 1. Open Climate view in the center display.
The preconditioning timer can store up to 8 2. Select the Parking climate tab.
preset timer settings. NOTE
3. Tap the timer setting you would like to
It is not possible to add a time setting if change.
Adding a timer setting there are already 8 settings for the timer. > A pop-up window will appear.
Delete a time setting to be able to add a
new one. 4. To edit a timer setting, follow the proce-
dures described under the heading "Add-
ing a timer setting" above.
4. Tap Date to set a time for a specific date.
Tap Days to set a time for one or more Related information
days of the week. • Preconditioning (p. 228)
• Preconditioning timer (p. 229)
With Days: Activate/deactivate the repeat
function by selecting/deselecting the • Activating and deactivating precondition-
Repeat weekly checkbox. ing timer (p. 231)
5. With Date: Select a date for precondition- • Deleting preconditioning timer settings
Button for adding a timer setting in the Parking ing by scrolling in the date list using the (p. 231)
climate tab in Climate view. arrows.
1. Open Climate view in the center display. With Days: Select days of the week for
2. Select the Parking climate tab. preconditioning by tapping the buttons for
the days.
6. Set the time at which preconditioning
should be completed by scrolling using
the arrows in the clock.
7. Tap Confirm to add a timer setting.
> The timer setting will be added to the
list and activated.

230
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating and deactivating • Adding and editing timer settings for pre- Deleting preconditioning timer
preconditioning timer conditioning (p. 230) settings
Timer settings in the preconditioning timer • Deleting preconditioning timer settings A preconditioning timer setting that is no
can be activated or deactivated as needed. (p. 231) longer needed can be deleted.

Timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in Climate The button for editing a list/deleting a timer setting in
view. the Parking climate tab in Climate view.
1. Open Climate view in the center display. 1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2. Select the Parking climate tab. 2. Select the Parking climate tab.
3. Activate/deactivate a timer setting by tap- 3. Tap Edit list.
ping the timer button to the right of the
4. Tap the editing icon to the right in the list.
setting.
> The icon will change to the text Delete.
> The timer is activated/deactivated and
the button lights up/goes out. 5. Tap Delete to confirm.
> The timer setting will be deleted from
Related information the list.
• Preconditioning (p. 228)
• Preconditioning timer (p. 229)

}}

231
 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| Related information Pre-cleaning* Starting and stopping pre-

• Preconditioning (p. 228) Pre-cleaning of the vehicle before driving is cleaning*
• Preconditioning timer (p. 229) used to improve the air quality in the passen- Pre-cleaning improves the air quality in the
ger compartment. passenger compartment before driving. The
• Adding and editing timer settings for pre-
It is only possible to activate pre-cleaning function can be started in the center display
conditioning (p. 230)
manually from the center display, but the func- or from a cellular phone.
• Activating and deactivating precondition- tion is also started automatically when pre-
ing timer (p. 231) conditioning has finished. Starting and stopping from the vehicle
The function uses the ventilation system to
blow fresh air into the passenger compart-
ment and then circulates the air through the
climate system's passenger compartment air 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate
filter. bar to open Climate view in the center dis-
play.
Related information
• Parking climate (p. 227) 2. Select the Parking climate tab.
• Starting and stopping pre-cleaning* 3. Tap Start Pre-cleaning.
(p. 232) > Pre-cleaning starts/stops and the but-
• Preconditioning (p. 228) ton lights up/goes out.

Starting from app*

A device with the Volvo On Call* app can be
used to start pre-cleaning or check settings.

NOTE
Precleaning always starts automatically
when preconditioning is complete.

232 * Option/accessory.
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Related information Climate comfort retaining function Related information

• Parking climate (p. 227) The climate in the passenger compartment • Parking climate (p. 227)
• Pre-cleaning* (p. 232) can be maintained when the vehicle is • Starting and switching off the climate
parked, e.g. if the engine is turned off but the retaining function when parking (p. 234)
• Preconditioning (p. 228)
driver or passengers remain in the vehicle.
This function can only be direct-started from
the center display.
The function utilizes several of the vehicle's
systems:
• Residual heat from the engine is used to
help heat the passenger compartment to a
comfortable temperature.
• In warm weather, the ventilation system
cools the passenger compartment by
blowing air in from outside.

NOTE
Climate comfort maintenance will be deac-
tivated if the vehicle is locked from the out-
side in order to avoid using residual engine
heat unnecessarily. This function is
intended to be used to maintain climate
comfort when the driver or a passenger
remains in the vehicle after the engine is
turned off.
The climate comfort retaining function is
limited in duration in cold weather depend-
ing on the amount of residual warmth
available.

* Option/accessory. 233
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Starting and switching off the NOTE

climate retaining function when
parking Climate comfort maintenance will be deac-
tivated if the vehicle is locked from the out-
The climate retaining function maintains the
side in order to avoid using residual engine
climate settings in the vehicle after the
heat unnecessarily. This function is
engine has been switched off. The function
intended to be used to maintain climate
can be activated in the center display.
comfort when the driver or a passenger
remains in the vehicle after the engine is
turned off.
The climate comfort retaining function is
1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate limited in duration in cold weather depend-
bar to open Climate view in the center dis- ing on the amount of residual warmth
play. available.

2. Select the Parking climate tab.

Related information
3. Tap Keep climate comfort. • Climate comfort retaining function
> The climate comfort retaining function (p. 233)
will be activated/deactivated and the
button light will go on/off.

NOTE
Maintained climate comfort is not possible
when there is not sufficient residual engine
heat to maintain the climate settings in the
passenger compartment, or if the outside
temperature is above approximately 20 °C
(68 °F).

234
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Parking climate symbols and Messages related to parking climate can also
messages be displayed in a device that has the Volvo On
A number of symbols and messages related Call* app.
to parking climate may be displayed in the
instrument panel.

Symbol Message Meaning

Parking climate Parking climate is not functioning properly. Contact a workshopA to have the system
Service required checked as soon as possible.

Parking climate Parking climate is temporarily not functioning properly. If the problem persists, contact a
Temporarily unavailable workshopA to have the system checked.

Parking climate The parking climate cannot be activated because the hybrid battery's charge level is too low
to start the parking heater. Start the vehicle.
Unavailable Charge level too low

Parking climate The parking climate cannot be activated if the charging cable is not connected. Connect the
charging cable.
Unavailable, not connected to power
supply
Parking climate Parking climate will only run for a limited time when the hybrid battery's charge level is too
low. Start the vehicle.
Limited Charge level too low

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information
• Parking climate (p. 227)

* Option/accessory. 235
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Heater Related information Parking heater

The heater has two sub-functions that help • Climate (p. 204) The parking heater heats the passenger com-
warm the passenger compartment or engine • Parking heater (p. 236) partment as needed before driving if precon-
in various situations. ditioning is activated.
• Additional heater (p. 237)
The parking heater is one of two sub-functions
The heater has two sub-functions:
of the vehicle's heater. The heater is mounted
• Parking heater - heats the passenger com- in the front right-side wheel housing.
partment as needed when the parking cli-
The parking heater starts automatically if the
mate's preconditioning is activated.
parking climate's preconditioning is activated
• Auxiliary heater - heats the passenger and the passenger compartment needs to be
compartment and engine while driving. heated.
The heater is a high-voltage coolant heater Heater running time varies depending on fac-
and is mounted in the front right-side wheel tors such as battery charge level, passenger
housing. compartment temperature and ambient tem-
Battery and charging perature, but it will never run for longer than
The heater is powered by the vehicle's hybrid 30 minutes.
battery. If the charge level in the hybrid battery
is too low, the heater will switch off automati- NOTE
cally and a message will be displayed in the Make sure that the hybrid battery has suffi-
instrument panel. cient charge if the parking heater must be
used. For the heater to be used for precon-
NOTE ditioning, the vehicle must be plugged into
Make sure that the battery has sufficient an electrical outlet.
charge if the heater must be used. For the
heater to be used for preconditioning, the Related information
vehicle must be plugged into an electrical • Heater (p. 236)
outlet. Additional heater (p. 237)
•

236
 CLIMATE CONTROL

Additional heater Activating and deactivating the

The auxiliary heater helps heat the passenger auxiliary heater
compartment and engine while driving. The auxiliary heater helps heat the passenger
The auxiliary heater is one of two sub-func- compartment and engine while driving.
tions of the vehicle's heater. The heater is
It is possible to set whether automatic start
mounted in the front right-side wheel housing.
for the auxiliary heater should be activated or
The auxiliary heater is started and controlled deactivated.
automatically when extra heat is required
1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center
while the vehicle is being driven.
display.
It switches off automatically when the ignition
2. Tap Climate.
is switched off.
3. Select Additional Heater to activate/
Related information deactivate automatic start for the auxiliary
• Heater (p. 236) heater.
• Parking heater (p. 236)
• Activating and deactivating the auxiliary NOTE
heater (p. 237) If automatic start of the auxiliary heater is
deactivated, this may impair comfort in the
passenger compartment since the climate
system then does not have a heat source
during electrical operation.

Related information
• Additional heater (p. 237)

237
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Locking and unlocking • Alarm (p. 271) Lock indication

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked in The turn signals will flash when the vehicle is
several different ways. locked or unlocked.
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked
Exterior confirmation
• using the buttons on the remote key Locking
• with the detachable key blade (if the bat-
• The turn signals will flash once and the
tery in the remote key is discharged)
door mirrors will fold in1 to confirm the
• keyless* (Passive Entry), the remote key vehicle is locked.
must be within range
Unlocking
• from inside the vehicle using the lock con-
trols in the doors • The turn signals will flash twice and the
door mirrors will fold out1 to confirm the
• remote door unlocking with Volvo On Call.
vehicle is unlocked.
There are also several types of remote keys The tailgate, hood and all doors must be
that can be used. closed for confirmation to be given. If only the
For vehicles equipped with keyless locking driver's door is closed when the vehicle is
and unlocking*, a smaller, lighter and button- locked2, the vehicle will be locked but the turn
less key is provided (Key Tag). signals will only flash to indicate locking when
all doors and the tailgate and hood have been
A Care Key* (restricted key) makes it possible closed.
to set restrictions for some of the vehicle's
functions e.g. maximum speed and maximum
audio system volume.

Related information
• Locking and unlocking using the remote
key (p. 245)
• Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 259)
• Locking and unlocking from inside the
vehicle (p. 262)
• Private Locking (p. 269)

240 * Option/accessory.
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Lock and alarm indicators on the Lock button indicators Rear door*
dashboard Front door

Lock button with indicator light in rear door.

The locks and alarm indicator will display the Lock buttons with indicator lights in front door. Illuminated indicator lights in each door indi-
status of the locking system: Illuminated indicator lights in both front door cate that that particular door is locked. If any
lock buttons indicate that all doors are locked. door is unlocked and opened, the indicator
• One long flash indicates locking. light in that door will go out. The lights in the
If any door is opened, the lights in both doors
• When the vehicle is locked, this will be will go out. other doors will remain illuminated.
indicated by short, pulsating flashes.
Other indicators
• Rapid flashing after disabling the alarm
The approach lighting and home safe lighting
indicates that the alarm has been trig-
functions may be activated when locking and
gered.
unlocking.

Related information
• Lock confirmation settings (p. 242)
• Locking and unlocking (p. 240)
• Welcome Light (p. 165)
• Using home safe lighting (p. 165)

1 Only vehicles with power folding mirrors.

2 Does not apply to vehicles equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*.

* Option/accessory. 241
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Lock confirmation settings Related information Remote key

Settings for how the vehicle confirms locking • Lock indication (p. 240) The remote key is used to lock and unlock
and unlocking can be adjusted in the center doors and the tailgate. The remote key must
display's Settings menu. be in the vehicle in order to start the engine.
To change the locking response settings:
1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Tap My Car Locking.
3. Tap Visible Locking Feedback to select
when the vehicle should provide a visible
response:
• Lock
• Unlock
• Both Remote key3, Care Key and button-less key (Key
Or turn off the function by marking Off . Tag)*.
4. Select to receive an audible response The remote key is not physically used to start
when locking the vehicle by marking the ignition because the vehicle is standard-
Audible Locking Feedback. equipped with keyless start (Passive Start).
The key only needs to be in the front section of
To change the settings for folding door mir- the passenger compartment.
rors* when locking:
For vehicles equipped with keyless locking
1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top and unlocking (Passive Entry)*, the engine can
view. be started with the key anywhere in the vehi-
2. Tap My Car Mirrors and Convenience. cle. A smaller, lighter and button-less key (Key
Tag) is also provided.
3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to acti-
vate or deactivate the function.

3 The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.

242 * Option/accessory.
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

The remote keys can be linked to different Remote key buttons an open tailgate (an audible warning sig-
driver profiles to store personal settings in the nal will be given).
vehicle. Panic alarm - Used to attract attention in
emergency situations. Press and hold the
WARNING button for at least 3 seconds or press
The remote key contains a button cell bat- twice within 3 seconds to activate the
tery. Keep new and used batteries out of turn signals and horn. To deactivate, wait
the reach of children. If batteries are swal- at least 5 seconds and press the button
lowed, they can cause serious injury. again. If no action is taken, the panic alarm
If any damage is detected, e.g. if the bat- will deactivate automatically after 3
tery cover cannot be closed properly, do minutes.
not use the product. Keep defective prod-
ucts out of the reach of children. WARNING
The remote key has four buttons, one on the left side
and three on the right. If anyone is left in the vehicle, make sure
that power to the power windows and pan-
Locking - Press once to lock the doors, oramic roof* is cut off by always taking the
tailgate and fuel filler door and arm the remote key with you when you leave the
alarm. vehicle.
Press and hold to close all windows.
Unlocking - Press once to unlock the
doors and tailgate and disarm the alarm.
Press and hold to open all windows at the
same time. This total airing function can
be used to e.g. quickly air out the vehicle
in hot weather.
Tailgate - Unlock and disarm the tailgate
only. On vehicles equipped with the power
tailgate*, press and hold to automatically
open the tailgate. Press and hold to close

}}

* Option/accessory. 243
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| NOTE is intended to promote safe use of the vehicle, NOTE

e.g. when it is loaned out.
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote When the remote control key is placed in
key in the vehicle. Interference the cup holder, make sure that no other
Electromagnetic fields or obstructing objects vehicle keys, metal objects or electronic
• If the remote key or key tag is left in
may interfere with the remote key's functions devices (e.g. cell phones, tablets, laptops
the vehicle, it will be deactivated when
for keyless start and keyless locking and or chargers) are found in the cup holder.
the vehicle is locked and the alarm set
unlocking*. Multiple vehicle keys close to each other in
using another valid key. The key will be
the cup holder can disrupt their functional-
reactivated when the vehicle is
NOTE ity.
unlocked.
• If the remote key or Care Key is left in Avoid storing the remote key near metal
the vehicle, it will be deactivated even objects or electronic devices, e.g. cell WARNING
if the vehicle is locked using Volvo On phones, tablets, laptops or chargers – pref- California Proposition 65
Call, and will be reactivated when the erably no closer than 10-15 cm (4-6 in.).
vehicle is unlocked using Volvo On Call Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-
senger vehicle can expose you to chemi-
or another valid key. If you experience interference, use the remote cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon-
key's detachable blade to unlock the vehicle oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are
Button-less key (Key Tag)* and then place the remote key in the backup known to the State of California to cause
reader in the tunnel console cup holder to dis- cancer and birth defects or other reproduc-
The button-less key4 provided with the keyless
arm the alarm and start the vehicle. tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
locking and unlocking function works in the breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine
same way as the regular remote key for key- except as necessary, service your vehicle in
less start, locking and unlocking. The key is a well ventilated area and wear gloves or
waterproof up to a depth of approx. 10 meters wash your hands frequently when servicing
(30 feet) for up to 60 minutes. It does not your vehicle. For more information go to
have a detachable key blade and its battery www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
cannot be replaced. vehicle.

Care Key - restricted remote key

A Care Key enables the vehicle owner to set a
maximum speed limit for the vehicle. This limit

4 Also called sport key.

244 * Option/accessory.
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Related information Locking and unlocking using the NOTE

• Starting the vehicle (p. 416) remote key
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
• Locking and unlocking using the remote All doors and tailgate can be locked and
key in the vehicle.
key (p. 245) unlocked simultaneously using the buttons
on the remote key. • If the remote key or key tag is left in
• Remote key range (p. 247)
the vehicle, it will be deactivated when
• Replacing the remote key's battery the vehicle is locked and the alarm set
Locking with remote key
(p. 248) using another valid key. The key will be
• Detachable key blade (p. 253) reactivated when the vehicle is
unlocked.
• Care Key – restricted remote key (p. 252)
• If the remote key or Care Key is left in
• Electronic immobilizer (p. 256)
the vehicle, it will be deactivated even
• Linking a remote key to a driver profile if the vehicle is locked using Volvo On
(p. 142) Call, and will be reactivated when the
vehicle is unlocked using Volvo On Call
or another valid key.

Locking when the tailgate is open

The illustration is generic - details may vary accord-

ing to vehicle model. NOTE
If the vehicle is locked and the tailgate is
– Press the button on the remote key to
still open, make sure that the remote key is
lock the vehicle.
not left in the cargo compartment when
To activate the locking sequence, the driver's the tailgate is closed and the entire vehicle
door must be closed5. If any of the other doors is locked6.
or the tailgate are open, they will be locked
and the alarm will be armed once they are
closed.

5 If the vehicle is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*, all side doors must be closed.
6 If the vehicle is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking and the key is detected inside the vehicle, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.* }}

* Option/accessory. 245
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Unlocking with remote key • Locking and unlocking with detachable Settings for remote and inside
– Press the button on the remote key to key blade (p. 254) door unlock
unlock the vehicle. Several different sequences are available for
remote unlocking.
Automatic relocking To change this setting:
If none of the doors or tailgate are opened
within two minutes after being unlocked, they 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top
will automatically relock. This function reduces view.
the risk of inadvertently leaving the vehicle 2. Tap My Car Locking Remote and
unlocked. Interior Unlock.
Remote key not working 3. Select alternative:
• All Doors – unlocks all doors at the
NOTE same time.
Move closer to the vehicle and try to • Single Door – unlocks the driver's
unlock it again. door. Press the remote key unlock but-
ton twice to unlock all doors.
If the remote key is not working to lock or The settings made here also affect central
unlock the vehicle, its battery may be dis- locking using the inside door handle.
charged. Use the detachable key blade to
lock/unlock the driver's door instead. Related information
• Locking and unlocking using the remote
Related information key (p. 245)
• Settings for remote and inside door unlock
• Locking and unlocking from inside the
(p. 246)
vehicle (p. 262)
• Unlocking the tailgate using the remote
key (p. 247)
• Remote key (p. 242)
• Replacing the remote key's battery
(p. 248)

246
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Unlocking the tailgate using the 2. With the optional power tailgate* - Remote key range
remote key Hold and press (about 1.5 seconds) the In order to function correctly, the remote key
The remote key can be used to unlock the button on the remote key must be within a certain distance from the
tailgate while keeping the rest of the vehicle vehicle.
> The tailgate will unlock and open. How-
locked.
ever, the side doors will remain locked Manual use
and armed. The remote key's functions for e.g. locking and
unlocking, which are activated by pressing
Related information
• Locking and unlocking using the remote or , have a range of approx. 20 meters
key (p. 245) (65 feet) from the vehicle.
If the vehicle's locks do not react, move closer
and try again.

Keyless* use

1. Press the button on the remote key.

> The tailgate will be unlocked but remain
closed.
The side doors remain locked and
armed. The lock and alarm indicator on
the dashboard will go out to indicate
that the vehicle is no longer fully
locked.
The shaded areas around the vehicle illustrate the
Press lightly on the rubberized pressure range of the system's antennas.
plate under the tailgate handle to open
the tailgate. If the tailgate is not opened For keyless use, a remote key or the Key Tag
within 2 minutes, it will be relocked and must be within the shaded areas shown in the
the alarm armed. illustration, i.e. a semicircle with a radius of

}}

* Option/accessory. 247
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| approx. 1.5 meter (5 feet) along the sides of Replacing the remote key's battery key can be ordered from an authorized Volvo
the vehicle or approx. 1 meter (3 feet) from the The battery in the remote key must be workshop.
tailgate. replaced when it is discharged.
NOTE CAUTION
NOTE An end-of-life Key Tag must be turned in to
All batteries have a limited service life and
The functions of the remote control key must eventually be replaced (does not an authorized Volvo workshop. The key
can be disrupted by ambient radio waves, apply for Key Tag). The battery's service life must be deleted from the vehicle because
buildings, topographical conditions, etc. varies depending on how often the it can still be used to start the vehicle via
The vehicle can always be locked/unlocked vehicle/key is used. backup start.
using the key blade.
Opening the key and replacing the
If the remote key is removed from the battery
vehicle
If the remote key is removed from
the vehicle while the engine is run- The remote key battery should be replaced if
ning, the warning message Vehicle
• the information symbol illuminates and the
key not found Removed from
message Vehicle key bat. low is dis-
vehicle will be displayed in the instrument
played in the instrument panel
panel and an audible signal will sound when
the last door is closed. • the locks do not react after several
attempts to lock or unlock the vehicle
The message will disappear when the key is using the remote key within approx.
returned to the vehicle and the O button on 20 meter (65 feet) from the vehicle. Hold the remote key with the front side
the right-side steering wheel keypad is
(with the Volvo logo) facing up and move
pressed or when the last door is closed again.
NOTE the button on the key ring section to the
Related information right. Slide the front cover slightly upward.
Move closer to the vehicle and try to
• Remote key (p. 242) unlock it again. The cover will loosen and can be
• Antenna locations for the start and lock removed from the key.
system (p. 261) The battery in the smaller key without but-
• Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* tons7 (the Key Tag) cannot be replaced. A new
(p. 258)

248 * Option/accessory.
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Turn the key over, move the button to Use a screwdriver or similar object to turn The battery's positive side (+) faces
the side and slide the rear cover slightly the battery cover counterclockwise so the upward. Carefully pry out the battery as
upward. markers point to OPEN. shown in the illustration.

The cover will loosen and can be Remove the cover carefully by pressing
e.g. a fingernail into the indentation. CAUTION
removed from the key.
Pry the cover up. Avoid touching new batteries and their
contact surfaces with your fingers as this
will impair their function.

7 Included in vehicles equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*. }}

249
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| NOTE
Volvo recommends that batteries used in
the remote control key satisfy UN Manual
of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-section
38.3. The factory installed batteries and
batteries replaced by an authorized Volvo
workshop satisfy the above criterion.

Insert a new battery with the positive side Put the rear cover back into position
(+) facing upward. Do not touch the con- and press it down until it clicks into place.
tact surfaces of the remote key battery.
Slide the cover back.
Place the edge of the battery down-
> A second click indicates that the cover
ward into the holder. Slide the battery for-
is correctly positioned and locked into
ward until it locks into place under the two
place.
plastic catches.
Press the battery downward until it
locks into place under the upper black Replace the battery cover and turn it
plastic catch. clockwise until it points to CLOSE.

NOTE
Use batteries with the designation
CR2032, 3 V.

250
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

WARNING WARNING
Make sure the battery is positioned cor- California Proposition 65
rectly with the right polarity. If the remote
Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-
key will not be used for a prolonged period
senger vehicle can expose you to chemi-
of time, remove the battery to avoid battery
cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon-
leakage and damage. Wear protective
oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are
gloves when handling damaged batteries,
known to the State of California to cause
as batteries that are damaged or leaking
cancer and birth defects or other reproduc-
can cause corrosive damage in contact
tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
with the skin.
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine
Turn the remote key over and press the • Keep batteries out of the reach of chil- except as necessary, service your vehicle in
front cover down until it clicks into place. dren. a well ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
Slide the cover back. • Do not leave batteries lying out where your vehicle. For more information go to
> An additional click indicates that the they could be swallowed by children or www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
cover is correctly in place. pets. vehicle.
• Never disassemble, short-circuit or
place a battery into open fire. Related information
• Do not charge non-rechargeable bat- • Locking and unlocking with detachable
teries, as this could cause an explosion. key blade (p. 254)
Check the remote key for damage before • Starting the vehicle (p. 416)
using it. If any damage is detected, e.g. if • Remote key (p. 242)
the battery cover cannot be closed prop-
erly, do not use the product. Keep defec-
tive products out of the reach of children.

CAUTION
Be sure to dispose of end-of-life batteries
in a way that protects the environment.

251
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Ordering additional remote keys NOTE Care Key – restricted remote key
Two remote keys are provided with the vehi- A Care Key enables the vehicle owner to set a
Volvo recommends that you order a new or
cle. One Key Tag is also included if the vehi- maximum speed limit for the vehicle. This
duplicate remote key from an authorized
cle is equipped with keyless locking/unlock- limit is intended to promote safe use of the
Volvo workshop.
ing*. Additional keys can be ordered. vehicle, e.g. when it is loaned out.
A total of 12 keys can be programmed and You can also obtain additional or duplicate
used for the same vehicle. An additional driver remote keys from certain independent
profile will be added for each new remote key. repair facilities and locksmiths that are
This also applies to the key tag. qualified to make remote keys. Each key
must be programmed to work with your
Loss of a remote key vehicle.
If you lose your remote key, you can order a
replacement from a workshop - an authorized A list of independent repair facilities and/or
Volvo workshop is recommended. Bring the locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut
other remaining remote keys to the workshop. and code replacement keys can be found:
As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost • at volvocars.com
remote key must be erased from the system. by calling Volvo Customer Care
•
The current number of keys registered for the 1-800-458-1552.
A maximum vehicle speed can be defined for a
vehicle can be checked via driver profiles in
Care Key. Otherwise, the Red Key functions in
the center display's Top view. Select Settings Related information the same way as a standard remote key.
System Driver Profiles. • Remote key (p. 242)
This restriction is intended to help reduce the
risk of accidents and help the driver feel more
secure when handing over the vehicle to e.g. a
young driver, parking attendant or workshop.

Ordering a Care Key

One or more Care Key can be ordered from a
Volvo retailer. A total of twelve keys can be
programmed and used for the same vehicle.
Up to ten may be restricted keys, but at least
two must be standard remote keys.

252 * Option/accessory.
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Care Key limitations Care Key settings Detachable key blade

The key is linked to a specific Care Key driver Change maximum speed for a Care Key via The remote key contains a detachable metal
profile, and when it is active the key's settings the center display. key blade that can be used to activate a num-
cannot be changed. It is also not possible to 1. Unlock the vehicle using a regular remote ber of functions and preform certain actions.
switch to another driver profile, as this key. A Volvo workshop can provide you with the
requires a regular remote key. key blade's unique code, which is recom-
2. Tap Settings in the center display's Top
The driver profile is activated when the vehicle mended in case you need to order a new key
view.
is unlocked using a Care Key without a regular blade.
remote key nearby. 3. Tap System Driver Profiles Care
Key. Using the detachable key blade
The detachable key blade can be used to
NOTE 4. Adjust desired settings.
• manually open the left-side front door if
If the vehicle changes owners, the vehicle Related information central locking cannot be activated with
must be locked and then unlocked for a Care Key – restricted remote key (p. 252) the remote key
•
new driver profile to be activated.
• emergency lock all doors
• activate/deactivate the rear door mechani-
Setting options
cal child locks.
The following limitations are available:
The button-less key8 does not have a detacha-
• speed range: 50-180 km/h (30-112 mph) ble key blade. If needed, use the standard
• Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph) remote key's detachable key blade.
Symbol Meaning
Speed limitation is active.

Related information
• Care Key settings (p. 253)
• Remote key (p. 242)

8 Included in vehicles equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*. }}

* Option/accessory. 253
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Detaching the key blade Locking and unlocking with

detachable key blade
The detachable key blade can be used to
unlock the vehicle from the outside, e.g. if the
battery in the remote key is discharged.

Unlocking

Put the key blade back into its designated

Hold the remote key with the front side spot in the remote key after use.
(with the Volvo logo) facing up and move Replace the cover by pressing it down
the button on the key ring section to the until it clicks into place.
right. Slide the front cover slightly upward.
Slide the cover back.
The cover will loosen and can be
> An additional click indicates that the
removed from the key. Pull the front left-hand door handle to its
cover is correctly in place.
end position to access the lock cylinder.
Related information Put the key in the lock cylinder.
• Locking and unlocking with detachable
key blade (p. 254) Turn the key clockwise 45 degrees so that
• Remote key (p. 242) the key blade is pointing straight rear-
ward.
Turn the key blade back 45 degrees to its
original position. Remove the key from the
lock cylinder and release the handle so
Remove the key blade by pulling it up. that it returns to its original position
against the vehicle.
5. Pull the door handle.
> The door will open.

254
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

NOTE 1. Remove the detachable key blade from • Replacing the remote key's battery
the remote key. (p. 248)
When the door is unlocked using the
2. Insert the key blade into the opening for • Remote key (p. 242)
detachable key blade and then opened, the
alarm will be triggered. The alarm must be the lock mechanism.
deactivated manually; see separate sec- 3. Push in the key until it stops, about 12 mm
tion. (0.5 inch).
The door can be opened from both the
Locking outside and the inside.
The left-hand front door can be locked by The door cannot be opened from the out-
inserting the detachable key into the door's side. To return to position A, open the door
lock cylinder. using the inside door handle.
The other doors have lock mechanisms in the
side of the door that must be pushed in using NOTE
the key blade. The door will then be locked
mechanically and cannot be opened from the • The door's lock controls only lock that
outside. specific door, not all doors simultane-
ously.
The doors can still be opened from inside.
• A manually locked rear door with acti-
vated child lock cannot be opened
from either the outside or the inside.
The door can only be unlocked using
the buttons on the key, the central
locking button, the keyless locking sys-
tem* or Volvo On Call.

Related information
• Detachable key blade (p. 253)
• Arming and disarming the alarm (p. 272)
• Starting the vehicle (p. 416)
Manual door lock. This is not the child lock.

* Option/accessory. 255
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Electronic immobilizer The following instrument panel error mes- Start and lock system type
The electronic immobilizer is a start inhibitor sages are related to the remote immobilizer designations
that helps prevent the vehicle from being with tracking system: The following information contains type des-
started by an unauthorized person. ignations for the start and lock system.
The vehicle can only be started with the right Symbol Message Meaning
remote key. Alarm system
Remotely The remote USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3)
The following instrument panel error mes- immobilised immobilizer with
sages are related to the electronic immobil- tracking system This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
izer: Vehicle not rules. Operation is subject to the following
is activated. The
possible to conditions: (1) This device may not cause
vehicle cannot
start harmful interference, and (2) this device must
Symbol Message Meaning be started. Con-
tact Volvo On accept any interference received, including
Vehicle key Remote key not Call Service interference that may cause undesired opera-
not found recognized dur- Center. tion.
ing start. Place Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3)
See
the remote key Related information
Owner's This device is subject to the following condi-
on the key sym- Remote key (p. 242)
manual • tions: (1) This device may not cause interfer-
bol in the cup
holder and try to • Ordering additional remote keys (p. 252) ence, and (2) this device must accept any
start the vehicle interference, including interference that may
again. cause undesired operation of the device.

Remote immobilizer with tracking Remote keys (Passive Entry*/Passive

Start)
system9
USA
The vehicle is equipped with a system that
makes it possible to track and locate the vehi- Volvo Standard Key FCC ID: YGO-
cle and to remotely activate the immobilizer to HUF8423MS
prevent the vehicle from being started. Con- Volvo Tag ID FCC ID: YGOHUF8432MS
tact your nearest Volvo retailer for more infor-
mation and assistance activating the system.

9 Only certain markets and in combination with Volvo On Call.

256 * Option/accessory.
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, Related information
Rules. Operation is subject to the following et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter • Remote key (p. 242)
two conditions: tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
(1) This device may not cause harmful
le fonctionnement.
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including Immobilizer and Passive Entry*/
interference that may cause undesired Passive Start systems
operation.
USA-FCC ID: LTQVO3134
CAUTION: Changes or modifications not
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
expressly approved by the party responsible
rules. Operation is subject to the following
for compliance could void the user’s authority
two conditions:
to operate the equipment.
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
Canada
ence, and
Volvo Standard Key IC: 4008C-HUF8423MS
(2) this device must accept any interference
Volvo Tag ID IC: 4008C-HUF8432MS received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt Any changes or modification not expressly
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the approved by the party responsible for compli-
following two conditions: ance could void the user's authority to operate
this equipment.
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept Canada-IC:3659A-VO3134
any interference received, including
This device complies with Industry Canada
interference that may cause undesired
license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is
operation.
subject to the following two conditions:
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
interference received, including interference
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes :
that may cause undesired operation.

* Option/accessory. 257
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Keyless and touch-sensitive NOTE Related information

surfaces* • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 259)
It is important that only one pressure-sen-
With the keyless locking and unlocking func- • Keyless tailgate unlock* (p. 260)
sitive surface is activated at a time. If the
tion, the remote key only needs to be within
handle is grasped at the same time as the
range, e.g. in a pocket or bag. The vehicle can
lock area is pressed, there is a risk that
then be locked or unlocked by touching the
double commands may be sent. This may
pressure-sensitive surface on the door han-
cause the requested action (locking/
dle.
unlocking) to be delayed or not performed
Pressure-sensitive surfaces at all.
Door handle
There are indentations on the outside of the Tailgate handle
outer door handles for locking, and pressure- The tailgate handle has a rubberized pressure
sensitive surfaces on the inside of the handles plate that can only be used for unlocking.
for unlocking.

NOTE
Pressure-sensitive indentation for locking
Please be aware that the system could be
Pressure-sensitive surface for unlocking activated in a car wash if the remote key is
within range.

258 * Option/accessory.
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Keyless locking and unlocking* Keyless locking Keyless unlocking

With keyless locking and unlocking, touching All of the doors have to be closed before the – To unlock, grasp a door handle or lightly
the pressure-sensitive indentation on the vehicle can be locked. However, the tailgate press the rubberized button on the under-
door handle will lock or unlock the vehicle. can be open when a door handle is used for side of the tailgate handle.
locking. > The lock indicator light on the dash-
NOTE
– Touch the marked area on the outside of board will stop flashing to confirm that
One of the vehicle's remote keys must be the vehicle is unlocked.
one of the door handles after the door is
within range for locking and unlocking to
be possible. closed. Or press the button on the
lower edge of the tailgate before it is
closed.
> The lock indicator light on the dash-
board will flash to confirm that the vehi-
cle is locked.
To close all door windows at the same time -
place your finger on the pressure-sensitive
indentation on the outside of the door handle
and hold it there until the side windows have
closed.
Locking when the tailgate is open The rubberized button on the tailgate can only be
If the vehicle is locked and the tailgate is still used for unlocking.
open, make sure that the remote key is not left
Pressure-sensitive indentation for locking in the cargo compartment when the tailgate is Automatic relocking
closed. If none of the doors or tailgate are opened
Pressure-sensitive surface for unlocking within two minutes after being unlocked, they
will automatically relock. This function reduces
NOTE
NOTE the risk of inadvertently leaving the vehicle
If the key is detected in the vehicle, the tail- unlocked.
Please be aware that the system could be gate will not lock when it is closed.
activated in a car wash if the remote key is
within range.

}}

* Option/accessory. 259
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Related information Keyless unlock settings* Keyless tailgate unlock*

• Keyless unlock settings* (p. 260) Several different sequences are available for With keyless locking and unlocking, the tail-
• Keyless tailgate unlock* (p. 260) keyless unlocking. gate can be unlocked by lightly touching the
To change this setting: rubberized button on the tailgate handle.
• Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 258) 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top NOTE
view. One of the vehicle's remote keys must be
2. Tap My Car Locking Keyless within range behind the vehicle for unlock-
Unlock. ing to be possible.

3. Select alternative:
• All Doors – unlocks all doors at the
same time.
• Single Door – unlocks the selected
door.

Related information
• Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 259)
• Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 258)

The tailgate is held closed by an electronic

locking mechanism.
To open:
1. Lightly press the rubberized pressure plate
on the underside of the tailgate handle.
> The lock will disengage.

260 * Option/accessory.
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

2. Lift the outer handle to open the tailgate. Antenna locations for the start and WARNING
lock system
Individuals with an implanted pacemaker
CAUTION The antennas for the keyless start system and should not allow the pacemaker to come
Only light pressure on the rubberized keyless locking system* are integrated in the closer than 22 cm (9 in.) to the Keyless
•
pressure plate is necessary to release vehicle. system antennas. The aim of this is to pre-
the tailgate's locking mechanism. vent disturbances between the pacemaker
and the Keyless system.
• Use the handle to lift the tailgate and do
not apply force to the rubberized pres-
Related information
sure plate. Too much force can damage
• Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
the pressure plate's electrical connec-
(p. 258)
tions.
• Remote key range (p. 247)

Hands-free unlocking of the tailgate is also

possible using a foot movement under the rear
bumper; see the separate section.

WARNING Location of the antennas:

Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic Under the cup holder in the front section
exhaust fumes can be sucked into the vehi- of the tunnel console
cle through the cargo compartment.
In the upper front section of the left-side
rear door10
Related information
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 259) In the upper front section of the right-side
•
rear door10
• Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 258) In the cargo compartment10
• Remote key range (p. 247)
• Operating the tailgate with a foot move-
ment* (p. 267)

10 Only in vehicles equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*.

* Option/accessory. 261
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Locking and unlocking from inside Alternative unlocking method Locking using the front door buttons
the vehicle – Press the button (both front doors
The doors and tailgate can be locked and must be closed).
unlocked from inside the vehicle using the > All doors and the tailgate will lock.
central lock buttons in the front doors.
Locking using the rear door button*
Central locking

Alternative unlocking method using side door open-

ing handle11.
– Pull either of the side door inside opening
handles and release.
> Depending on the remote key settings,
either all doors will be unlocked or just Button with indicator light for locking/unlocking in
Button with indicator light for locking and unlocking rear door.
in front door. the selected door will be unlocked and
opened. The lock buttons in the rear doors lock/unlock
Unlocking using the front door buttons that particular door.
To change this setting, tap Settings
– Press the button to unlock all side
My Car Locking Remote and Unlocking the rear door
doors and the tailgate.
Interior Unlock in the Top view of the 1. Pull the opening handle to unlock the rear
center display. door.
2. Pull the opening handle again to open the
rear door12.

11 The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.

12 If the child lock is not activated.

262 * Option/accessory.
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Related information Unlocking the tailgate from inside Activating and deactivating child
• Settings for remote and inside door unlock the vehicle locks
(p. 246) The tailgate can be unlocked from the inside The child locks help prevent the rear doors
• Unlocking the tailgate from inside the using the button on the dashboard. from being able to be opened from the inside.
vehicle (p. 263) The child lock can be either manual or elec-
tric*.
• Activating and deactivating child locks
(p. 263) Manual child lock

– Press the button on the dashboard.

> The tailgate will unlock and can be
opened from the outside by pressing
the rubberized button on the handle. Manual child lock. This is not the manual door lock.

With the optional power tailgate*: – Use the detachable key blade in the
remote key to turn the control.
– Press and hold the button on the
The door cannot be opened from the
dashboard.
inside.
> The tailgate will open.
The door can be opened from both the
Related information outside and the inside.
• Locking and unlocking from inside the
vehicle (p. 262)

}}

* Option/accessory. 263
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| NOTE • windows can only be opened using the Automatic locking when driving
buttons in the driver's door. The doors and tailgate will automatically lock
• The door's knob control only locks that
• the rear doors cannot be opened from the when the vehicle begins to move.
specific door, not both rear doors
inside.
simultaneously. Related information
If the child lock is activated when the vehicle Locking and unlocking from inside the
• There are no manual child locks on •
is switched off, it will remain activated the vehicle (p. 262)
models equipped with electronic child
next time the vehicle is started.
locks.
Symbols and messages
Electric child lock* Symbol Message Meaning
The electric child lock can be activated and
deactivated in any ignition mode higher than Rear child The child lock is
0. The lock can be activated and deactivated lock Acti- activated.
up to 2 minutes after the ignition is turned off vated
if no door has been opened.
Rear child The child lock is
lock Deacti- deactivated.
vated

Related information
• Locking and unlocking from inside the
vehicle (p. 262)
• Detachable key blade (p. 253)

Button for activation and deactivation.

• Light on – lock is activated.
• Light off – lock is deactivated.
When the child lock is activated, the rear:

264 * Option/accessory.
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Closing and locking the tailgate Closing13 Closing and locking16

using the buttons* – Press the button on the underside of – Press the button on the underside of
The buttons on the underside of the tailgate the tailgate. the tailgate.
can be used to close and lock the vehicle > The tailgate will close automatically and > The tailgate closes automatically and
automatically. remain unlocked. the vehicle locks15.

NOTE NOTE
• The button remains active 24 hours • One of the vehicle's remote keys must
after the tailgate was opened. After this be within range for locking and unlock-
time, the tailgate must be closed man- ing to be possible.
ually. When the keyless locking or closing*
•
• If the tailgate has been open for more functions are used, three audible signals
than 30 minutes, it will automatically will sound if the key is not detected
close slowly. close enough to the tailgate.

Location of button(s) on underside of tailgate.

Locking14

CAUTION 1. Press the button on the underside of

the tailgate.
When operating the tailgate manually,
open and close it slowly. If you encounter 2. Close the trunk lid manually.
resistance, do not use force. This could > The tailgate and doors will lock15.
lead to damage and loss of function.

13 Vehicles with power-operated trunk lid.

14 Vehicles equipped with keyless locking/unlocking.
All doors must be closed for the vehicle to lock.
}}
15
16 Vehicles with keyless locking/unlocking and power-operated tailgate.

* Option/accessory. 265
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Interrupting closing WARNING Related information

• Press the button on the dashboard. • Setting maximum opening height for the
Be aware of the risk of injury when opening power tailgate* (p. 267)
• Press the button on the remote key. and closing.
• Press the close button on the underside of • Operating the tailgate with a foot move-
Before opening or closing, make sure that
the tailgate13. no one is near the tailgate's range of ment* (p. 267)

Press the rubberized pressure plate on the motion. Serious injury could occur. • Remote key range (p. 247)
•
underside of the tailgate's outer handle. Always operate the tailgate with caution.
• Using a foot movement*.
Tailgate movement is interrupted and stops. Preloaded springs
The tailgate can then be opened or closed
manually.
If the tailgate stops near the closed position, it
will open the next time it is activated.

Pinch protection
If anything obstructs the tailgate with enough
force to prevent it from opening or closing,
pinch protection will be activated.
• When opening - the tailgate will stop
moving and an audible signal will sound.
• When closing - the tailgate will stop, a Preloaded springs for the power tailgate.
long audible signal will sound and the tail-
gate will return to the programmed maxi- WARNING
mum opening position. Do not attempt to open or access the pre-
loaded springs in the power tailgate struts.
They are preloaded with high pressure and
can cause injury if opened.

13 Vehicles with power-operated trunk lid.

266 * Option/accessory.
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Setting maximum opening height NOTE Operating the tailgate with a foot
for the power tailgate* movement*
• If the system has been working contin-
The tailgate can be set to stop opening at a To make it easier to operate the tailgate when
uously for a prolonged period of time, it
certain height, for example if the tailgate your hands are full, it can be opened and
will be switched off to avoid overload.
needs to be opened in a garage with a low closed by moving your foot in a forward kick-
It can be used again after approxi-
ceiling. ing motion under the rear bumper.
mately 2 minutes.
Setting maximum opening height
1. Open the tailgate manually to the desired
opening height.

2. Press the button on the lower edge of

the tailgate and hold it for about
3 seconds.
> Two audio signals will sound to indicate
that the position has been stored.

NOTE
It is not possible to program an opening The sensor is located to the left of center under the
position lower than half-open tailgate. rear bumper17.
One of the vehicle's remote keys must be
Resetting maximum opening position within range behind the vehicle, approx.
1. Open the tailgate manually to the fully 1 meter (3 feet), for opening and closing to be
open position. possible. This applies even if the vehicle is
unlocked in order to prevent the trunk lid from
2. Press the button on the lower edge of inadvertently opening e.g. at a car wash.
the tailgate and hold it for about
3 seconds.
> Two audio signals will sound to indicate
that the stored position has been
erased.

}}

* Option/accessory. 267
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Foot movement operation Interrupting opening or closing with a foot

movement
– Make one forward kicking motion while
the tailgate is opening or closing to stop
its movement.
The remote key does not need to be within
range of the vehicle to interrupt opening or
closing of the tailgate.
If the tailgate stops near the closed position, it
will open the next time it is activated.

NOTE
To activate opening and closing using a foot
Kicking motion within the sensor's activation area. There is a risk of reduced or lost function if movement on a vehicle with skid plate, make a
– Make one forward kicking motion with there are large amounts of snow, ice, dirt, kicking motion from the side of the vehicle.
your foot under the left section of the rear etc. on the rear bumper. Make sure to keep One of the vehicle's remote keys must be
bumper. Take a step back. Do not touch the bumper clean. within range (approx. 1 meter (3 feet)) for
the bumper. opening and closing to be possible.
> A brief audible signal will be heard NOTE
when opening or closing is activated -
the tailgate will open/close. Please note that the system could be inad-
vertently activated in a car wash or similar
If several opening attempts have been made if the remote key is within range.
without the remote key in range behind the
vehicle, foot movement operation will not be
available for a short period of time. Vehicle with skid plate accessory*
If the vehicle is equipped with skid plate, the
Do not keep your foot under the vehicle in a sensor is located towards the left corner of the
kicking motion. This may prevent activation. bumper.

17 If the vehicle is equipped with skid plate*, the sensor is located towards the left corner of the bumper.

268 * Option/accessory.
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Private Locking Activating and deactivating private

The tailgate can be locked using the private locking
locking function to prevent it from being Private locking is activated using the function
opened, e.g. when the vehicle is left at a button in the center display and a PIN code.
workshop or with a valet.
NOTE
The function button for pri-
vate locking is located in the For the valet lock function to be activated
center display's Function the car must be in at least ignition mode I.
view. Depending on the cur-
rent status of the lock, Two codes are used for private locking:
Private Locking Unlocked
• A security code, which is created the first
or Private Locking Locked
Kicking motion within the sensor's activation area. time the function is used.
will be displayed.
• A PIN code, which is changed each time
Related information Related information the function is activated.
• Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* • Activating and deactivating private locking
(p. 258) (p. 269) Entering security code before initial
• Remote key range (p. 247) use
The first time the function is used, a security
code must be selected. This code can then be
used to deactivate private locking if the
selected PIN code has been forgotten or lost.
The security code functions as a PUK (secur-
ity) code for all PIN codes used for private
locking.
Save the security code in a safe place.

}}

* Option/accessory. 269
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| To create a security code: Deactivating private locking Related information

1. Tap the button for private locking in Func- 1. Tap the button for private locking in Func- • Private Locking (p. 269)
tion view. tion view.

> A pop-up window will appear. > A pop-up window will appear.

2. Enter the desired security code and press 2. Enter the code used for locking and tap
Confirm. Confirm.
> The security code is saved. The private > The tailgate will unlock. The green indi-
locking function is now ready for activa- cator light next to the button in Func-
tion. tion view will go out to confirm
unlocked status.
Activating private locking
1. Tap the button for private locking in Func- Forgotten PIN code
tion view. If you have forgotten your PIN code or entered
it incorrectly more than three times, the secur-
ity code can be used to deactivate private
locking.
If the vehicle is unlocked using Volvo On Call
or the Volvo On Call app, private locking will
be automatically deactivated.
> A pop-up window will appear.
Forgotten security code
2. Enter the code you would like to use to If you have forgotten your security code, con-
unlock the tailgate and tap Confirm. tact an authorized Volvo retailer for assistance
> The tailgate will lock. A green indicator deactivating private locking.
light will illuminate next to the button in
Function view to confirm locked status.

270
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Alarm When armed, the alarm will be triggered if: NOTE

The alarm emits sound and light signals if • the hood, tailgate or any door is opened. Do not attempt to repair or alter any of the
anyone without a valid remote key attempts
• a battery cable is disconnected. components in the alarm system yourself.
to break into the vehicle or interferes with the
• the alarm siren is disconnected. Any such attempt could affect the terms
start battery or alarm siren.
and conditions of your insurance policy.
Alarm indicator Alarm signals
The following occurs if the alarm is triggered: Related information
• A siren will sound for 30 seconds or until • Arming and disarming the alarm (p. 272)
the alarm is turned off.
• The hazard warning flashers will flash for
5 minutes or until the alarm is turned off.
If the reason the alarm was triggered is not
rectified, the alarm cycle will repeat up to 10
times18.

Symbols and messages

Symbol Message Meaning
A red indicator light on the dashboard shows Alarm sys- Contact a work-
the status of the alarm: tem failure shop ‒ an
Service authorized Volvo
• Indicator off - the alarm is disarmed.
required workshop is rec-
• Indicator flashes once every two seconds - ommended.
the alarm is armed.
• The indicator flashes quickly after the
alarm has been disabled for up to
30 seconds or until the ignition is put in I
mode – the alarm has been triggered.

18 Certain markets only.

271
 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Arming and disarming the alarm 3. Turn the start knob clockwise and release.
The alarm is armed when the vehicle is > The alarm will be disarmed.
locked and disarmed when the vehicle is Turning off a triggered alarm
unlocked. The alarm can also be disarmed – Press the unlock button on the remote key
without a functioning key. or put the ignition into mode I by turning
Arming and disarming the alarm the start knob clockwise and then releas-
The alarm is armed when the vehicle is locked ing it.
and disarmed when the vehicle is unlocked. Related information
Disarming the alarm without a functioning • Alarm (p. 271)
remote key
The vehicle can be unlocked and disarmed
even if the remote key is not functioning e.g. if
the battery is discharged.
1. Open the driver's door using the detacha-
ble key blade.
> This will trigger the alarm.

Location of the backup key reader in the cup holder.

2. Place the remote key on the key symbol in
the backup reader in the tunnel console's
cup holder.

272
DRIVER SUPPORT
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Driver support systems • Curve Speed Assist (CSA)* (p. 312) Speed-dependent steering wheel
The vehicle is equipped with a number of • Passing assistance* (p. 314) resistance
driver support systems that can provide the Lane Keeping Aid (p. 320) Speed-dependent power steering increases
•
driver with active or passive assistance in var- the steering wheel resistance in pace with
ious situations. • Steering assistance at risk of collision the vehicle's speed, which can help give the
The systems can, for example, help the driver: (p. 341) driver an enhanced feeling of control and sta-
• Rear Collision Warning* (p. 347) bility. Steering is stiffer on highways. When
• maintain a set speed
• BLIS* (p. 348) parking and at low speeds, it will be easier to
• maintain a set time interval to the vehicle move the steering wheel.
ahead • Driver Alert Control (p. 352)
• help prevent a collision by warning the • Distance Alert* (p. 354) Reduced power
driver and applying the brakes In rare situations, the power steering may
• Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 356)
need to work at reduced power and the steer-
• park the vehicle. • Park Assist* (p. 360) ing wheel may then feel more difficult to
Some of the systems are standard and others • Park Assist Camera* (p. 365) move. This may happen when the power
are options. This also varies from market to steering becomes too hot and needs to be
• Radar sensor (p. 383)
market. temporarily cooled. It can also happen if there
• Camera (p. 386) is a disturbance in power supply.
Related information
• IntelliSafe – driver support and safety If there is reduced power, the
(p. 29) message Power steering
Assistance temporarily
• Speed-dependent steering wheel resis-
reduced and this symbol are
tance (p. 274)
shown in the instrument
• Electronic Stability Control (p. 275) panel.
• Connected Safety (p. 280)
While the power steering is working at
• City Safety™ (p. 327) reduced power, the driver support functions
• Road Sign Information* (p. 282) and systems with steering assistance are not
Cruise control (p. 287) available.
•
• Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)
• Pilot Assist* (p. 300)

274 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING Electronic Stability Control WARNING

If the temperature rises too high, the power The Electronic Stability Control (ESC1) func-
• The function is supplementary driver
steering may be forced to switch off com- tion helps the driver avoid skidding and
support intended to facilitate driving
pletely. In such a situation, the driver dis- improves the vehicle's directional stability.
and help make it safer – it cannot han-
play shows the message Power steering This symbol will be displayed
dle all situations in all traffic, weather
failure Stop safely along with a symbol. in the instrument panel when
and road conditions.
the system is intervening.
• The driver is advised to read all sec-
Changing the level of steering wheel When the system has inter- tions in the Owner's Manual about this
resistance* vened to apply the brakes, a function to learn of its limitations,
In INDIVIDUAL drive mode, the level of steer- pulsing sound may be heard which the driver must be aware of
ing wheel resistance can be adjusted. and the vehicle may accelerate more slowly before using the function.
than expected when the accelerator pedal is
1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top • Driver support functions are not a sub-
depressed.
view. stitute for the driver's attention and
The system consists of the following sub-func- judgment. The driver is always respon-
2. Select My Car Drive Modes tions: sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
Steering Force.
Stability control2 in a safe manner, at the appropriate
Steering wheel resistance settings can only be • speed, with an appropriate distance to
accessed if the vehicle is stationary or is mov- • Spin control and active yaw control other vehicles, and in accordance with
ing straight ahead at a low speed. • Engine drag control current traffic rules and regulations.

Related information • Trailer Stability Assist

• Driver support systems (p. 274) • Roll Stability Control Stability control2
This function helps control the driving and
• Drive modes (p. 438)
braking force of each individual wheel in an
attempt to stabilize the vehicle.

Spin control and active yaw control

This function is active at low speeds and
brakes the wheels that are spinning to transfer

1 Electronic Stability Control

2 Also called traction control.
}}

* Option/accessory. 275
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| additional power to wheels that are not spin- is leaning and registers any changes. Using Electronic Stability Control in sport
ning. this information, the system calculates the mode
likelihood of a rollover. If there is an imminent The stability system (ESC6) is always acti-
This function can also help prevent the wheels
risk of a rollover, Electronic Stability Control is vated and cannot be switched off. However,
from spinning while the vehicle is accelerating.
activated, engine torque is reduced and brakes the driver can select ESC Sport Mode,
Engine drag control are applied to one or more of the wheels until which offers more active driving characteris-
Engine drag control (EDC3) can help prevent the vehicle has regained stability. tics.
inadvertent wheel lock, e.g. after downshifting With the ESC Sport Mode sub-function
or using engine braking when driving at low WARNING selected, intervention from the system is
speeds on a slippery surface. The vehicle’s stability systems help reduced and more lateral movement is permit-
Inadvertent wheel lock while driving could improve vehicle safety but do not replace ted, giving the driver more control of the vehi-
impair the driver's ability to steer the vehicle. the driver’s responsibility for operating the cle than usual.
vehicle in a safe manner. Speed and driving
style should always be adapted to the cur- When ESC Sport Mode is selected, the func-
Trailer Stability Assist*4 rent road, traffic and weather conditions. tion may seem to be disabled even though it
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA5) is designed to Posted speed limits should always be continues to assist the driver.
help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer if respected.
the vehicle and trailer have begun to sway.
NOTE
Related information When ESC Sport Mode is selected, the
NOTE • Driver support systems (p. 274)
trailer stabilizer (TSA7) is switched off.
Trailer Stability Assist is deactivated if ESC • Activating or deactivating Sport mode for
Sport Mode is activated. Electronic Stability Control (p. 277)
ESC Sport Mode also helps provide more
• Electronic Stability Control symbols and traction, even if the vehicle gets stuck or is
Roll Stability Control messages (p. 278) driving on a loose surface such as deep snow
This function helps reduce the risk of a rollover • Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 474) or loose sand.
in the event of e.g. a sudden evasive maneuver
or if the vehicle begins to skid. The system
monitors the lateral angle at which the vehicle

3 Engine Drag Control

4 Trailer Stability Assist is included if the vehicle is equipped with a Volvo original towbar.
5 Trailer Stability Assist
6 Electronic Stability Control

276 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information Activating or deactivating Sport The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be
• Electronic Stability Control (p. 275) mode for Electronic Stability selected when any of the following functions
• Activating or deactivating Sport mode for Control are activated:
Electronic Stability Control (p. 277) The stability system (ESC8) is always acti- • Cruise control
• Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 474) vated and cannot be switched off. However, Adaptive Cruise Control*
•
the driver can select Sport mode, which
offers more active driving characteristics. • Pilot Assist*
Activate or deactivate the
Related information
function using this button in
• Electronic Stability Control in sport mode
the center display's Function
(p. 276)
view.
• Electronic Stability Control (p. 275)

• Illuminated button indicator light – the

function is activated.
• Extinguished button indicator light – the
function is deactivated.

When ESC Sport Mode is

activated, this symbol will
illuminate with a steady glow
in the instrument panel. It will
remain on until the driver
deactivates the function or
until the engine is turned off.
The system will return to normal mode the
next time the engine is started.

7 Trailer Stability Assist

8 Electronic Stability Control

* Option/accessory. 277
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Electronic Stability Control displayed in the instrument panel. Several

symbols and messages examples are provided below.
A number of symbols and messages related
to Electronic Stability Control (ESC9) may be
Symbol Message Meaning
Steady glow for approx. 2 seconds System check when the engine is started.

Flashing light The system is actively operating.

Steady glow Sport mode is activated. NOTE! The system is not deactivated in this mode, but has parti-
ally reduced functionality.

9 Electronic Stability Control

278
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Symbol Message Meaning

ESC The system's functionality has been temporarily reduced due to high brake system tempera-
tures. The function will be automatically reactivated when the brakes have cooled.
Temporarily off

ESC The system is not functioning properly. Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine
and then restart it.
Service required

A text message can be erased by briefly press-

ing the button in the center of the right-
side steering wheel keypad.
If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒
an authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.

Related information
• Electronic Stability Control (p. 275)

279
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Connected Safety10 When your vehicle WARNING

Connected Safety communicates information approaches a vehicle with its
hazard warning flashers on, • The function is supplementary driver
between your vehicle and other vehicles via
this symbol will appear in the support intended to facilitate driving
the Internet11. The function is designed to and help make it safer – it cannot han-
instrument panel.
notify the driver of any hazardous road condi- dle all situations in all traffic, weather
tions ahead. and road conditions.
The function can notify the driver if another In vehicles equipped with a head-up display,
vehicle further down the road has activated its • The driver is advised to read all sec-
the warning symbols for Connected Safety
hazard warning flashers or detected slippery tions in the Owner's Manual about this
will also be displayed there.
road conditions. You will also be notified if function to learn of its limitations,
your own vehicle detects slippery road condi- Slippery road alerts which the driver must be aware of
tions. If your own car detects reduced friction before using the function.
between your tires and the road, information • Driver support functions are not a sub-
Connected Safety can assist the driver with
on this can be sent to vehicles approaching stitute for the driver's attention and
the following:
your own car's position. judgment. The driver is always respon-
• Hazard warning flashers alert sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
As the vehicle approaches
• Slippery road alerts in a safe manner, at the appropriate
the area affected, this symbol
speed, with an appropriate distance to
Connected Safety communication between will be displayed in the instru-
other vehicles, and in accordance with
vehicles only works for vehicles that are equip- ment panel to alert the driver
current traffic rules and regulations.
ped with the function and have it activated. of slippery road conditions.
Drivers of other vehicles
Hazard warning flashers alert receiving information via Related information
If your vehicle's hazard warning flashers are Connected Safety will receive similar notifica- • Driver support systems (p. 274)
activated, information on this can be sent to tions as they approach the area. Activating or deactivating Connected
•
other vehicles approaching your location. Safety (p. 281)
In vehicles equipped with a head-up display,
the warning symbols for Connected Safety • Connected Safety limitations (p. 281)
will also be displayed there.
• Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538)

10 Not available in all markets.

11 There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan.

280 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Activating or deactivating Related information Connected Safety limitations

Connected Safety • Connected Safety (p. 280) Information on vehicles with activated hazard
For Connected Safety to be able to share • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538) warning flashers or which have detected slip-
information about road conditions with other pery road conditions is not always communi-
• Terms of use and data sharing (p. 544)
drivers, the function must be activated. If you cated between all vehicles in the affected
do not wish to share information, the function • Connected Safety limitations (p. 281) area.
can be deactivated. This may be the case if:
Activate or deactivate the No or insufficient Internet connection.
•
function using this button in
the center display's Function • The maneuvers (steering wheel move-
view. ments, acceleration or braking) made by
the vehicles on slippery surfaces are too
weak for friction between the tires and
road to be detected.
• Illuminated button indicator light – the Vehicles that have detected slippery road
•
function is activated. conditions or activated hazard warning
• Extinguished button indicator light – the flashers have not activated the function.
function is deactivated. Vehicles that have detected slippery road
•
At activation, the driver must accept the spe- conditions or activated hazard warning
cial terms and conditions shown in the display flashers are not equipped with the func-
before an Internet connection12 can be estab- tion.
lished. The driver must, for example, accept • Insufficient GPS/satellite navigation may
that data is sent from the vehicle using the prevent warnings.
driver's cellular phone.
• Slippery road conditions were detected or
Even when your vehicle is not connected to hazard warning flashers were activated on
the Internet, you will still be notified if the sys- a road that is not registered in the Volvo
tem in your own vehicle detects slippery road Cars database.
conditions. For Connected Safety to function
• Connected Safety is not developed on all
at full capacity, your vehicle needs to be con-
markets and does not cover all areas. Con-
nected to the Internet.

12 There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan. }}

* Option/accessory. 281
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| sult a Volvo retailer for more information Road Sign Information* NOTE
on covered areas. The Road Sign Information (RSI13) function
In certain markets, the Road Sign Informa-
can help the driver observe speed-related
tion* function is only available in combina-
WARNING road signs.
tion with Sensus Navigation*.
• In certain situations, the function may
give false warnings of slippery road
conditions. WARNING
• The function cannot always detect • The function is supplementary driver
other vehicles with activated hazard support intended to facilitate driving
warning factors or detect all stretches and help make it safer – it cannot han-
of road with slippery conditions. dle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
Related information • The driver is advised to read all sec-
• Connected Safety (p. 280) tions in the Owner's Manual about this
function to learn of its limitations,
• Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538)
Examples of signs that can be detected14. which the driver must be aware of
before using the function.
If the vehicle passes a speed limit sign, it will
• Driver support functions are not a sub-
be displayed in the instrument panel and the
stitute for the driver's attention and
head-up display*.
judgment. The driver is always respon-
There are also subfunctions for Road Sign sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
Information (RSI15) that can alert the driver if in a safe manner, at the appropriate
the speed limit has been exceeded or if there speed, with an appropriate distance to
are speed cameras nearby. other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.

13 Road Sign Information

14 Road signs differ according to market ‒ the illustrations shown here are just some examples.
15 Road Sign Information

282 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information Activating or deactivating Road Road Sign Information* display

• Driver support systems (p. 274) Sign Information* Road Sign Information (RSI17) displays road
• Activating or deactivating Road Sign Infor- The Road Sign Information (RSI16) function is signs in different ways depending on the sign
mation* (p. 283) optional – the driver can choose to have the and situation.
• Road Sign Information* display (p. 283) function activated or deactivated.
Activate or deactivate the
• Road Sign Information and Sensus function using this button in
Navigation* (p. 284) the center display's Function
• Speed limit and speed camera warnings view.
from Road Sign Information* (p. 284)
• Road Sign Information* limitations
(p. 286) Illuminated button indicator light – the
•
function is activated.
• Extinguished button indicator light – the
function is deactivated.
Example18 of registered speed information.
Related information
• Road Sign Information* (p. 282) When the function has registered a speed
limit sign, the sign will be displayed as a sym-
• Road Sign Information* limitations
bol in the instrument panel and a colored
(p. 286)
marking will be shown in the speedometer's
speed scale.
If the vehicle is equipped with Sensus
Navigation*, speed-related information will
also be retrieved from map data, which means
that the instrument panel can display or
change information about speed limits even if
the vehicle has not passed a speed-related
sign.

16 Road Sign Information

Road Sign Information
}}
17
18 Road signs differ according to market ‒ the illustrations shown here are just examples.

* Option/accessory. 283
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Signs for "School" and "Children Road Sign Information and Sensus Speed limit and speed camera
playing" Navigation* warnings from Road Sign
If the warning sign "School" If the vehicle is equipped with Sensus Information*
or "Children playing" is Navigation*, speed-related information will be There are subfunctions for Road Sign Infor-
included in the satellite navi- provided in the following situations: mation (RSI20) that can alert the driver if the
gator's map data19, a symbol speed limit has been exceeded or if there are
• In cases where the speed limit is given
of this type will be displayed speed cameras nearby.
indirectly, e.g. signs for highways or other
in the instrument panel.
major roads.
Related information • If a previously detected speed sign is
• Road Sign Information* (p. 282) deemed to be no longer valid and no new
sign has been passed.
• Road Sign Information* limitations
(p. 286)
NOTE
In certain markets, the Road Sign Informa-
tion* function is only available in combina-
tion with Sensus Navigation*.

NOTE Example of speed camera and speed limit informa-

tion in the instrument panel
If a downloaded third-party app is used for
navigation, there is no support for speed- Speed limit warning
related information. When Speed Warning is acti-
vated, the symbol for the cur-
Related information rent speed limit in the instru-
• Road Sign Information* (p. 282) ment panel21 will flash tem-
porarily if that speed is excee-
ded.

19 Only vehicles with Sensus Navigation*.

20 Road Sign Information
21 Road signs differ by market – the illustration shown here is just an example.

284 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

The driver can be alerted if the vehicle is Speed camera warning Activating or deactivating
exceeding a detected speed limit and is Vehicles equipped with Road warnings from Road Sign
approaching a speed camera. Sign Information and Sensus Information*
Speed Limit Warning warns the driver if the Navigation can provide infor- The Road Sign Information (RSI23) subfunc-
vehicle's speed has exceeded the applicable mation on upcoming speed tion Speed Limit Warning is optional – the
speed limit or the stored maximum speed. The cameras in the instrument driver can choose to have the subfunction
warning will be repeated once after panel22. activated or deactivated.
about 1 minute in that speed limit area if the If the vehicle exceeds a detected speed limit
driver does not slow down. Activating Speed Warning
with the Speed Limit Warning function acti-
vated, the driver is given a speed warning 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
A new warning and message indicating that
the speed limit has been exceeded will be pro- when the vehicle is approaching a speed cam- Road Sign Information in the center
vided only when the vehicle has entered a era if the navigation map for the vehicle's cur- display's Top view.
new/different speed limit area. rent location contains information on speed 2. Select Speed Limit Warning.
cameras.
NOTE > The function is activated and a speed
limit selector is displayed.
For an audible alert to be provided if the NOTE
speed is exceeded, the Speed Limit
It is possible to receive an audible alert for Adjusting the Speed Warning limit
Warning function must be activated and speed cameras regardless of the vehicle's The driver can adjust the settings to be alerted
the Road Sign Audio Warning sub-func- speed and whether or not the speed limit is at a higher speed than the posted speed limit.
tion must be On. Audible alerts are provi- exceeded, even if the Road Sign Audio
ded if the vehicle's speed exceeds the 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Warning function is deactivated. Road Sign Information in the center
speed displayed by Road Sign Information
in the instrument panel. display's Top view.
Related information 2. Select Speed Limit Warning.
• Road Sign Information* (p. 282)
> The function is activated and a speed
• Activating or deactivating warnings from limit selector is displayed.
Road Sign Information* (p. 285)
• Road Sign Information* limitations
(p. 286)

Information on speed cameras on the navigation map is not available for all markets/areas.
}}
22
23 Road Sign Information

* Option/accessory. 285
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| 3. Tap the up/down arrows on the screen to 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign Information* limitations
adjust the speed at which the Speed Road Sign Information in the center Road Sign Information (RSI24) functionality
Warning will be given. display's Top view. may be reduced in certain situations.
Please note that the set The function could have reduced functionality
2. Select/deselect Speed Camera Audio
warning limit will not be used due to e.g.:
Warning to activate/deactivate the speed
when a speed camera symbol • faded road signs
camera audible alert.
is displayed in the instrument
panel. • signs located in a curve in the road
Related information
• Road Sign Information* (p. 282) • twisted or damaged signs
• Speed limit and speed camera warnings • signs positioned high above the road
Activating audible alert for Speed
from Road Sign Information* (p. 284) • fully/partially obstructed or poorly posi-
Warning
• Road Sign Information* limitations tioned signs
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe (p. 286) • signs partially or fully covered by frost,
Road Sign Information in the center snow and/or dirt
display's Top view. digital road maps25 that are outdated,
•
2. Select/deselect Road Sign Audio incorrect or do not contain speed informa-
Warning to activate/deactivate the audi- tion26
ble alert.
When Road Sign Audio Warning is acti- NOTE
vated, the driver will also be alerted if the vehi- In certain markets, the Road Sign Informa-
cle is approaching a one-way/"no-entry" road tion* function is only available in combina-
or entrance. tion with Sensus Navigation*.
Activating speed camera alerts
If the vehicle is equipped with Sensus
Navigation* and map data contains informa-
tion on speed cameras, the driver can choose
to receive an audible alert if the vehicle is
approaching a speed camera.

24 Road Sign Information

286 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

NOTE Cruise control Marker for set speed

Cruise Control (CC27) can help the driver The vehicle's current speed
Certain types of bike carriers that are con-
maintain an even speed to provide a more
nected to the trailer socket may be inter-
relaxing driving experience on highways and Set speed
preted as a connected trailer by the RSI
long, straight roads with even traffic flows.
function. In such cases, the instrument
panel may indicate incorrect speed infor- NOTE
mation.
In vehicles equipped with Adaptive Cruise
Control*(ACC28), it is possible to switch
NOTE between Cruise Control and Adaptive
The function uses the vehicle's camera and Cruise Control.
radar sensor, which has certain general
limitations.

Related information
• Road Sign Information* (p. 282)
• Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386) Function buttons and symbols

: Activates Cruise Control from

standby mode and resumes the set speed
: Increases the set speed

: From standby mode – activates

Cruise Control and sets the current speed
: From active mode – deactivates/
puts Cruise Control in standby mode
: Reduces the set speed

25 Vehicles equipped with Sensus Navigation*.

26 Map data and speed information is not available for all areas.
Cruise Control
}}
27
28 Adaptive Cruise Control

* Option/accessory. 287
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| WARNING To disengage CC: Selecting and activating cruise

– Press the accelerator pedal about halfway control
• The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving down and then release it. The Cruise Control (CC29) function must be
and help make it safer – it cannot han- > Cruise Control will automatically disen- selected and activated in order to regulate
dle all situations in all traffic, weather gage the automatic brake function and speed.
and road conditions. speed will only be reduced using the
engine braking function.
• The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual about this Related information
function to learn of its limitations, Driver support systems (p. 274)
•
which the driver must be aware of
before using the function. • Selecting and activating cruise control
(p. 288)
• Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and • Deactivating cruise control (p. 289)
judgment. The driver is always respon- • Cruise control standby mode (p. 290)
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven • Adjusting set speed for driver support
in a safe manner, at the appropriate (p. 317)
speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with • Switching between cruise control and In order to start Cruise Control from standby
current traffic rules and regulations. Adaptive Cruise Control* in the center dis- mode, the vehicle's current speed must be
play (p. 297) 30 km/h (20 mph) or higher.
Using engine braking instead of 1. Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) button on the
applying the brakes steering wheel keypad and scroll to the
Cruise Control regulates speed by lightly
cruise control symbol (4).
applying the brakes. On downgrades, it can
sometimes be desirable to roll a bit faster and > Gray symbol – cruise control is in
let speed be reduced instead by engine brak- standby mode.
ing alone. The driver can temporarily disen-
gage the Cruise Control braking function.

29 Cruise Control

288 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

2. When cruise control is selected, press Deactivating cruise control Related information
(2) on the steering wheel keypad to acti- Cruise control (CC30) can be deactivated and • Cruise control (p. 287)
vate. switched off. • Switching between cruise control and
> White symbol – cruise control starts Adaptive Cruise Control* in the center dis-
and the current speed is stored as the play (p. 297)
maximum speed. The lowest speed • Selecting and activating cruise control
that can be set is 30 km/h (20 mph). (p. 288)
Reactivating cruise control to the last • Cruise control standby mode (p. 290)
stored speed
– When cruise control is selected, press
on the steering wheel keypad to activate.
> The Cruise Control marking in the
instrument panel will change from
GRAY to WHITE and the vehicle will
then return to the most recently set
speed. 1. Press the button on the steering
wheel (2).
WARNING > The symbol and markings turn gray –
A noticeable increase in speed may follow cruise control goes into standby mode.
when the speed is resumed with the 2. Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) buttons on the
steering wheel button. steering wheel to select another function.
> The cruise control symbol and marking
Related information (4) in the instrument panel will go out
• Cruise control (p. 287) and the stored maximum speed will be
Deactivating cruise control (p. 289) erased.
•
• Cruise control standby mode (p. 290)

30 Cruise Control

* Option/accessory. 289
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Cruise control standby mode Automatic standby mode Adaptive Cruise Control*32
Cruise control (CC31)
can be deactivated and The function may automatically go into Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC33) can help the
put in standby mode. This may happen auto- standby mode if one of the following occurs: driver to maintain a constant speed, com-
matically or be due to driver intervention. • The wheels lose traction. bined with a preset time interval to the vehi-
Standby mode means that the function is cle in front.
• The engine speed (rpm) is too low/high.
selected in the instrument panel but not acti-
vated. In standby mode, cruise control will not • The temperature in the brake system
regulate speed. becomes too high.
• The vehicle's speed goes below 30 km/h
Standby mode due to action by the (20 mph).
driver
The driver must then control the vehicle's
Cruise control will be deactivated and put in
speed.
standby mode if any of the following occurs:
• The brakes are applied. Related information
The gear selector is moved to N. • Cruise control (p. 287)
•
The vehicle is driven faster than the set • Selecting and activating cruise control
•
speed for more than 1 minute. (p. 288)
The camera/radar sensor measures the distance to
The driver must then control the vehicle's • Deactivating cruise control (p. 289) the vehicle ahead.
speed. Adaptive Cruise Control can help provide a
Temporarily increasing speed using the accel- more relaxed driving experience on long trips
erator pedal, e.g. when passing another vehi- on highways or long, straight roads with even
cle, will not affect the setting. The vehicle will traffic flows.
return to the set speed when the accelerator The driver sets a speed and a time interval to
pedal is released. the vehicle ahead. If the camera/radar sensor
detects a slower-moving vehicle ahead, your
vehicle's speed will be automatically adapted
according to the set time interval to that vehi-

31 Cruise Control
32 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.
33 Adaptive Cruise Control

290 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

cle. When there are no longer slower-moving WARNING • Adaptive Cruise Control* displays (p. 292)
vehicles ahead, the vehicle will return to the • Selecting and activating Adaptive Cruise
set speed. • The function is supplementary driver
Control* (p. 293)
support intended to facilitate driving
If the Curve Speed Assist (CSA)* function is and help make it safer – it cannot han- • Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations
activated, it may also affect the vehicle's dle all situations in all traffic, weather (p. 296)
speed. and road conditions. • Symbols and messages for Adaptive
Adaptive Cruise Control is designed to: • The driver is advised to read all sec- Cruise Control* (p. 298)
• smoothly regulate speed. The driver must tions in the Owner's Manual about this • Collision risk warning from driver support
apply the brakes in situations requiring function to learn of its limitations, (p. 315)
immediate braking. For example, when which the driver must be aware of
• Setting time interval to the vehicle ahead
there are great differences in speed before using the function.
(p. 318)
between vehicles or if the vehicle ahead • Driver support functions are not a sub-
• Adjusting set speed for driver support
brakes suddenly. Due to limitations in the stitute for the driver's attention and
(p. 317)
radar sensor, braking may occur unexpect- judgment. The driver is always respon-
edly or not at all. sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven • Auto-hold braking with driver support
in a safe manner, at the appropriate (p. 319)
• follow a vehicle ahead in the same lane
and maintain a time interval to that vehicle speed, with an appropriate distance to • Switching target vehicles with driver sup-
set by the driver. If the radar sensor does other vehicles, and in accordance with port (p. 316)
not detect a vehicle ahead, it will instead current traffic rules and regulations.
• Passing assistance* (p. 314)
maintain the speed set by the driver. This
• Contacting Volvo (p. 26)
will also happen if the speed of the vehicle
CAUTION
ahead exceeds the set speed for your vehi-
cle. Only a workshop may perform mainte-
nance on driver support components – an
authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.

Related information
• Driver support systems (p. 274)
• Adaptive Cruise Control* controls (p. 292)

* Option/accessory. 291
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Adaptive Cruise Control*34 Increases the time interval to the vehicle Adaptive Cruise Control*36
controls ahead displays
A summary of how Adaptive Cruise Control Reduces the time interval to the vehicle The following illustrations show how Adap-
(ACC35) is controlled using the left-side steer- ahead tive Cruise Control (ACC37) can appear in the
ing wheel keypad and how the function is Target vehicle indicator: the function has various displays in different situations.
shown in the display. detected and is following a target vehicle
using the set time interval Speed
Symbol for time interval to the vehicle
ahead

Related information
• Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)
• Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations
(p. 296)

: From standby mode - activates and Speed indicators

sets the current speed Set speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
Speed of the vehicle ahead
puts in standby mode
: Activates the function from standby The current speed of your vehicle
mode and resumes the set speed
: Increases the set speed

: Reduces the set speed

34 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

35 Adaptive Cruise Control
36 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

292 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Time interval Selecting and activating Adaptive

Adaptive Cruise Control will Cruise Control*39
only regulate the time interval Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC40) must first be
to the vehicle ahead when selected and then activated before it can reg-
the distance symbol shows ulate speed and distance.
two vehicles. A speed interval
will be marked at the same
time.

When driving
In the following illustration, Road Sign Infor-
mation* (RSI38) indicates that the maximum
permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).
The previous illustration shows that Adaptive
Cruise Control is set to maintain a speed of
110 km/h (68 mph) and is following a target
vehicle ahead, which is traveling at the same
speed.

Related information To start the function:

• Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290) • The driver's seat belt must be buckled and
• Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations the driver's door must be closed.
(p. 296) • There must be a vehicle ahead (target
vehicle) within a reasonable distance or

The previous illustration shows that Adaptive

Cruise Control is set to maintain a speed of
110 km/h (68 mph) and that there is no target
vehicle ahead to follow.

37 Adaptive Cruise Control

Road Sign Information
}}
38
39 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

* Option/accessory. 293
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| your vehicle's current speed must be at WARNING Deactivating Adaptive Cruise

least 15 km/h (9 mph).
A noticeable increase in speed may follow
Control*41
1. Press the ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) button on the when the speed is resumed with the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC42) can be deac-
steering wheel keypad and scroll to the steering wheel button. tivated and switched off.
Adaptive Cruise Control symbol (4).
> Gray symbol – Adaptive Cruise Control Related information
is in standby mode. • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)
2. When Speed Limiter is selected, press • Deactivating Adaptive Cruise Control*
(1) on the steering wheel keypad to (p. 294)
activate. • Switching between cruise control and
> White symbol – Speed Limiter starts Adaptive Cruise Control* in the center dis-
and the current speed is stored as the play (p. 297)
maximum speed. • Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations
(p. 296)
Reactivating Adaptive Cruise Control
to the last stored speed
– When Adaptive Cruise Control is selected, 1. Press the button on the steering
press on the steering wheel keypad to wheel (1).
activate. > The symbol and markings turn gray –
Adaptive Cruise Control goes into
> The Cruise Control marking in the
standby mode. The time interval indica-
instrument panel will change from
tor light and any symbols for the target
GRAY to WHITE and the vehicle will
vehicle will go out.
then return to the most recently set
speed.

40 Adaptive Cruise Control

41 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.
42 Adaptive Cruise Control

294 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

2. Press the ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) buttons on the Adaptive Cruise Control*43 standby WARNING
steering wheel to select another function. mode
• If Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby
> The Adaptive Cruise Control symbol Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC44) can be deac- mode, the driver must intervene and
and marking (4) in the instrument panel tivated and put in standby mode. This may regulate both speed and distance to
will go out and the stored maximum happen automatically or be due to driver the vehicle ahead.
speed will be erased. intervention.
Standby mode means that the function is • If the vehicle comes too close to a vehi-
cle ahead when Adaptive Cruise Con-
WARNING selected in the instrument panel but not acti-
vated. In standby mode, Adaptive Cruise Con- trol is in standby mode, the driver can
• If Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby be warned of the short distance by the
trol will not regulate speed or distance to the
mode, the driver must intervene and Distance Alert* function.
vehicle ahead.
regulate both speed and distance to
the vehicle ahead. Standby mode due to action by the
• If the vehicle comes too close to a vehi- driver Automatic standby mode
cle ahead when Adaptive Cruise Con- Adaptive Cruise Control will be deactivated
trol is in standby mode, the driver can and put in standby mode if any of the follow- WARNING
be warned of the short distance by the ing occurs:
With automatic standby mode, the driver is
Distance Alert* function.
• The brakes are applied. warned by an acoustic signal and a mes-
sage on the instrument panel.
• The gear selector is moved to N.
Related information • The driver must then regulate vehicle
• Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290) • The vehicle is driven faster than the set
speed, apply the brakes if necessary,
speed for more than 1 minute.
• Selecting and activating Adaptive Cruise and maintain a safe distance to other
Control* (p. 293) Temporarily increasing speed using the accel- vehicles.
erator pedal, e.g. when passing another vehi-
• Switching between cruise control and
cle, will not affect the setting. The vehicle will
Adaptive Cruise Control* in the center dis- The function may automatically go into
return to the set speed when the accelerator
play (p. 297) standby mode if one of the following occurs:
pedal is released.
• Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations • One of the systems that Adaptive Cruise
(p. 296) Control is dependent on stops working,

Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

}}
43
44 Adaptive Cruise Control

* Option/accessory. 295
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| such as Electronic Stability Control Adaptive Cruise Control*46 WARNING

(ESC45). limitations
• This is not a collision avoidance sys-
• The driver opens the door. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC47) may have tem. The driver is always responsible
• The driver unbuckles the seat belt. limited functionality in certain situations. and must intervene if the system fails
• The engine speed (rpm) is too low/high. to detect a vehicle ahead.
Steep roads and/or heavy loads
• One or more of the wheels lose traction. Adaptive Cruise Control is primarily intended • The function does not brake for people
to be driven on flat roads. The function may or animals and does not brake for small
• The brake temperature is high.
not be able to maintain the correct time inter- vehicles, such as bikes and motorcy-
• The parking brake is applied. val to the vehicle ahead when driving down cles. Similarly, it does not brake for low
• The camera and radar unit is covered by steep hills. The driver should be extra attentive trailers, oncoming, slow-moving or sta-
snow or heavy rain (the camera lens/radar and prepared to apply the brakes. tionary vehicles and objects.
waves are blocked). • Do not use the function in demanding
Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control if the vehi-
• Your vehicle's speed goes below 5 km/h cle is carrying a heavy load or towing a trailer. situations, such as in city traffic, at
(3 mph) and ACC cannot determine if the intersections, on slippery surfaces,
vehicle ahead is stationary or if it is Drive mode unavailable with a lot of water or slush on the road,
another object, e.g. a speed bump. The Off Road drive mode cannot be selected in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on
if Adaptive Cruise Control is activated. winding roads, or on on/off ramps.
• Your vehicle's speed goes below 5 km/h
(3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns so
that ACC no longer has a vehicle to follow. NOTE
Related information The function uses the vehicle's camera and
• Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290) radar sensor, which has certain general
limitations.
• Selecting and activating Adaptive Cruise
Control* (p. 293)
• Deactivating Adaptive Cruise Control* Related information
(p. 294) • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)

• Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386)

(p. 296)

45 Electronic Stability Control

46 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

296 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Switching between cruise control A symbol in the instrument panel indicates

and Adaptive Cruise Control*48 in which cruise control system is active
the center display Cruise control Adaptive Cruise
When the regular cruise control (CC49) is (CC) Control (ACC)
selected in the instrument panel, you can
switch to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC50) in A A
the center display's Function view.
Activate or deactivate the A WHITE symbol: The function is active. GRAY symbol:
Standby mode
function using this button in
the center display's Function Related information
view. • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)
• Cruise control (p. 287)

• GREEN button indicator light – Adaptive

Cruise Control is deactivated and the reg-
ular cruise control is in standby mode.
• GRAY button indicator light – regular
cruise control is deactivated and the
Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby
mode.

47 Adaptive Cruise Control

48 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.
49 Cruise Control
50 Adaptive Cruise Control

* Option/accessory. 297
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Symbols and messages for displayed in the instrument panel and/or the
Adaptive Cruise Control*51 head-up display*.
A number of symbols and messages relating
to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC52) may be

51 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

52 Adaptive Cruise Control

298 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Symbol Message Meaning

The symbol is WHITE The vehicle is maintaining the stored speed.

Adaptive Cruise Contr. Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby mode.

Unavailable
The symbol is GRAY

Adaptive Cruise Contr. The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshop ‒ an authorized Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Service required
The symbol is GRAY

Windscreen sensor Clean the windshield in front of the camera and radar sensors.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

A text message can be erased by briefly press- If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒ Related information
ing the button in the center of the right- an authorized Volvo workshop is recom- • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)
side steering wheel keypad. mended. Contacting Volvo (p. 26)
•

* Option/accessory. 299
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Pilot Assist*53 of the function's applications and limitations in camera and radar sensor, braking may
Pilot Assist can help the driver keep the vehi- order to take advantage of all it has to offer. occur unexpectedly or not at all.
cle in the current traffic lane and maintain an The Pilot Assist function is primarily intended • follow a vehicle ahead in the same lane
even speed and a set time interval to the for use on highways and other major roads and maintain a time interval to that vehicle
vehicle ahead. where it can help provide a more comfortable set by the driver. If the radar sensor does
and relaxing driving experience. not detect a vehicle ahead, it will instead
Get to know Pilot Assist maintain the speed set by the driver. This
The driver sets the desired speed and distance
will also happen if the speed of the vehicle
to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist monitors the
ahead exceeds the set speed for your vehi-
distance to the vehicle ahead and the traffic
cle.
lane's side markers using the camera. The sys-
tem maintains the set time interval to the vehi- The vehicle's position in the traffic
cle ahead by automatically adjusting your vehi- lane
cle's speed and keeps your vehicle in its lane When Pilot Assist helps to steer, it attempts to
by providing steering assistance. position the vehicle halfway between the visi-
If the Curve Speed Assist (CSA)* function is ble lane marking lines. For a smoother drive, it
activated, it may also affect the vehicle's is a good idea to allow the vehicle to find a
speed. good position. The driver can always adjust
the position him/herself by increasing steering
Pilot Assist regulates speed by accelerating input. It is important for the driver to make
The camera/radar sensor monitors the distance to
the vehicle ahead and detects lane markings. and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit sure the vehicle is positioned safely in the lane.
a slight sound when they are being used to
Camera and radar sensor adjust speed. If Pilot Assist does not position the vehicle
appropriately in the lane, the driver should turn
Distance monitor Pilot Assist is designed to: off Pilot Assist or switch to Adaptive Cruise
Lane marker line monitors • smoothly regulate speed. The driver must Control*.
apply the brakes in situations requiring
Pilot Assist helps to steer the vehicle, and you immediate braking. For example, when
may need to drive a few miles with Pilot Assist there are great differences in speed
before you feel completely at home with the between vehicles or if the vehicle ahead
function. It is important to be familiar with all brakes suddenly. Due to limitations in the

53 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

300 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Steering assistance In curves and forks in the road If Pilot Assist still does not detect the driver's
The color of the steering Pilot Assist is designed to interact with the hands on the steering wheel after a few more
wheel symbol indicates the driver. The driver should never wait for steer- seconds have passed, the audible signal will
current status of steering ing assistance from Pilot Assist, but instead become intense and the steering function will
assistance: should always be ready to increase his or her switch off. Pilot Assist must then be reactiva-
own steering efforts, particularly in curves. ted by pressing the button on the steering
• GREEN indicates that
steering assistance is active When the vehicle is approaching an off-ramp wheel.
or a fork in the road, the driver should steer
• GRAY (as shown in illustration) indicates that WARNING
toward the desired lane so that Pilot Assist
steering assistance is deactivated.
can detect the desired direction of travel. • The function is supplementary driver
Pilot Assist's steering assistance is based on support intended to facilitate driving
monitoring the direction of the vehicle ahead Hands on the steering wheel and help make it safer – it cannot han-
and the traffic lane's side marker lines. The Pilot Assist only functions if the driver's hands dle all situations in all traffic, weather
driver can override Pilot Assist's steering rec- are on the steering wheel. It is also important and road conditions.
ommendations at any time and steer in for the driver to always continue to be active
and alert when driving since Pilot Assist is • The driver is advised to read all sec-
another direction, e.g. to change lanes or avoid
unable to read all situations and may toggle tions in the Owner's Manual about this
obstacles on the road.
between off and on without prior warning. function to learn of its limitations,
If the camera/radar sensor cannot detect the which the driver must be aware of
lane's side marker lines or if Pilot Assist is If Pilot Assist detects that the before using the function.
unable for some other reason to clearly inter- driver's hands are not on the
• Driver support functions are not a sub-
pret the lane, Pilot Assist will temporarily steering wheel, the system
stitute for the driver's attention and
deactivate steering assistance until it can once will provide a symbol and a
judgment. The driver is always respon-
again interpret the lane markings. However, text message in the instru-
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
the speed and distance warnings will remain ment panel to instruct the
in a safe manner, at the appropriate
active. The driver will be alerted by slight driver to actively steer the
speed, with an appropriate distance to
vibrations in the steering wheel that the func- vehicle.
other vehicles, and in accordance with
tion has been temporarily deactivated. If the driver's hands are still detected on the current traffic rules and regulations.
steering wheel after a few seconds have
WARNING passed, the instructions to actively steer the
Pilot Assist is deactivated automatically vehicle will be repeated, accompanied by an
and resumes working without prior notice. audible signal.

}}

301
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| CAUTION Pilot Assist*54 controls : Reduces the set speed

A summary of how Pilot Assist is controlled Increases the time interval to the vehicle
Only a workshop may perform mainte-
using the right-side steering wheel keypad ahead
nance on driver support components – an
and how the function is shown in the display.
authorized Volvo workshop is recom- Reduces the time interval to the vehicle
mended. ahead
◀: Switches from Pilot Assist to Adaptive
Related information Cruise Control
• Driver support systems (p. 274) Function symbol
• Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
(p. 304) Symbols for target vehicle
• Pilot Assist* displays (p. 303) Symbol for time interval to the vehicle
• Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 308) ahead
• Pilot Assist* symbols and messages Symbol for activated/deactivated steering
(p. 310) assistance
• Pilot Assist* controls (p. 302) Function buttons and symbols.
Related information
• Collision risk warning from driver support ▶: Switches from Adaptive Cruise Control* • Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
(p. 315) to Pilot Assist
• Switching target vehicles with driver sup- : From standby mode - activates Pilot
port (p. 316) Assist and sets the current speed
• Setting time interval to the vehicle ahead : From active mode - deactivates/
(p. 318) puts Pilot Assist in standby mode
• Adjusting set speed for driver support : Activates Pilot Assist from standby
(p. 317) mode and resumes the set speed and time
• Auto-hold braking with driver support interval
(p. 319)
: Increases the set speed
• Passing assistance* (p. 314)
• Contacting Volvo (p. 26)
54 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

302 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Pilot Assist*55 displays Time interval (68 mph) and that there is no target vehicle
The following illustrations show how Pilot Pilot Assist will only regulate ahead to follow.
Assist can appear in the various displays in the time interval to the vehi- Pilot Assist will not provide any steering assis-
different situations. cle ahead when the distance tance because it cannot detect the lane's side
symbol shows a vehicle (1) marking lines.
Speed over the steering wheel sym-
bol.
Pilot Assist's steering assistance is only active
when the steering wheel symbol (2) changes
from GRAY to GREEN.

When driving
In the following illustration, Road Sign Infor-
mation (RSI56) indicates that the maximum
permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).

Speed indicators. The previous illustration shows that Pilot

Set speed Assist is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h
(68 mph) and is following a target vehicle
Speed of the vehicle ahead ahead that is traveling at the same speed.
The current speed of your vehicle Pilot Assist will not provide any steering assis-
tance because it cannot detect the lane's side
marking lines.

The previous illustration shows that Pilot

Assist is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h

Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

}}
55
56 Road Sign Information

* Option/accessory. 303
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| The previous illustration shows that Pilot Selecting and activating Pilot
Assist is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h Assist*57
(68 mph) and that there is no target vehicle Pilot Assist must first be selected and then
ahead to follow. activated before it can regulate speed and
Pilot Assist will provide steering assistance distance and provide steering assistance.
because it can detect the lane's side marking
lines.

Related information
• Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
• Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 308)

The previous illustration shows that Pilot

Assist is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h
(68 mph) and is following a target vehicle
ahead that is traveling at the same speed.
In this example, Pilot Assist will also provide A green steering wheel indicates that Pilot Assist is
steering assistance because it can detect the providing steering assistance.
lane's side marking lines.
To start Pilot Assist.
• The driver's seat belt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
• The side markings of the lane must be
clearly visible and detected by the vehicle.
• There must be a vehicle ahead (target
vehicle) within a reasonable distance or
your vehicle's current speed must be at
least 15 km/h (9 mph).
• The speed must not exceed 140 km/h (87
mph).

304 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

• The driver must keep their hands on the WARNING Deactivating Pilot Assist*58
steering wheel. Pilot Assist can be deactivated and switched
A noticeable increase in speed may follow
• There must be a vehicle ahead (target off.
when the speed is resumed with the
vehicle) within a reasonable distance or steering wheel button.
your vehicle's current speed must be at
least 15 km/h (9 mph).
Related information
1. Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) button on the • Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
steering wheel keypad and scroll to the
• Deactivating Pilot Assist* (p. 305)
Pilot Assist symbol (4).
• Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 308)
> Gray symbol – Pilot Assist is in standby
mode.

2. When Pilot Assist is selected, press

(2) on the steering wheel keypad to acti-
vate.
A green steering wheel indicates that Pilot Assist is
> White symbol – Pilot Assist starts and providing steering assistance.
the current speed is stored as the maxi-
mum speed. 1. Press the button on the steering
wheel (2).
Reactivating Pilot Assist to the last > The symbol and markings turn gray –
stored speed Pilot Assist goes into standby mode.
– When Pilot Assist is selected, press The time interval indicator light and any
on the steering wheel keypad to activate. symbols for the target vehicle will go
> The Cruise Control marking in the out.
instrument panel will change from
GRAY to WHITE and the vehicle will
then return to the most recently set
speed.

Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

}}
57
58 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

* Option/accessory. 305
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| 2. Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) buttons on the Pilot Assist*59 standby mode Automatic standby mode
steering wheel to select another function. Pilot Assist can be deactivated and put in
> The Pilot Assist symbol and marking (4) standby mode. This may happen automati- WARNING
in the instrument panel will go out and cally or be due to driver intervention. With automatic standby mode, the driver is
the stored maximum speed will be Standby mode means that the function is warned by an acoustic signal and a mes-
erased. selected in the instrument panel but not acti- sage on the instrument panel.
vated. In standby mode, Pilot Assist will not
• The driver must then regulate vehicle
WARNING regulate the speed or distance to the vehicle
speed, apply the brakes if necessary,
ahead or provide steering assistance.
• With Pilot Assist in standby mode, the and maintain a safe distance to other
driver must intervene and steer and Standby mode due to action by the vehicles.
regulate both speed and distance to driver
the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist will be deactivated and put in The function may automatically go into
• If the vehicle comes too close to a vehi- standby mode if any of the following occurs: standby mode if one of the following occurs.
cle ahead when Pilot Assist is in One of the systems that Pilot Assist is
• The brakes are applied. •
standby mode, the driver is instead dependent on stops working, such as
warned of the short distance by the • The gear selector is moved to N.
Electronic Stability Control 60.
Distance Alert* function. • A turn signal is used for more than
1 minute. • The driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel.
Related information • The vehicle is driven faster than the set
• Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290) speed for more than 1 minute. • The driver opens the door.

• Selecting and activating Adaptive Cruise • The driver unbuckles the seat belt.
Control* (p. 293) • The engine speed (rpm) is too low/high.
• Switching between cruise control and • One or more of the wheels lose traction.
Adaptive Cruise Control* in the center dis- • The brake temperature is high.
play (p. 297)
• The parking brake is applied.
• Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations
(p. 296) • The camera and radar unit is covered by
snow or heavy rain (the camera lens/radar
• Temporarily deactivating steering assis- waves are blocked).
tance with Pilot Assist* (p. 307)

59 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

306 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

• Your vehicle's speed goes below 5 km/h Temporarily deactivating steering • Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 308)
(3 mph) and Pilot Assist cannot determine assistance with Pilot Assist*61
if the vehicle ahead is stationary or if it is Pilot Assist steering assistance can be tem-
another object, e.g. a speed bump. porarily deactivated and reactivated without
• Your vehicle's speed goes below 5 km/h prior warning.
(3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns so When the turn signals are used, Pilot Assist's
that Pilot Assist no longer has a vehicle to steering assistance will be temporarily deacti-
follow. vated. When the direction indicator is turned
off, steering assistance is reactivated automat-
Related information ically if the lane's edge markings can still be
• Pilot Assist* (p. 300) detected.
• Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
If Pilot Assist cannot clearly interpret the
(p. 304)
lane's side marker lines or if the camera/radar
• Deactivating Pilot Assist* (p. 305) sensor is unable for some other reason to
• Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 308) clearly interpret the lane, Pilot Assist will tem-
porarily deactivate steering assistance. How-
ever, the speed and distance warnings will
remain active. Steering assistance will resume
when the side marker lines can once again be
interpreted. In these situations, the driver may
be alerted through slight vibrations in the
steering wheel that steering assistance is tem-
porarily deactivated.

Related information
• Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
• Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
(p. 304)
• Deactivating Pilot Assist* (p. 305)

60 Electronic Stability Control

61 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

* Option/accessory. 307
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Pilot Assist*62 limitations WARNING ity with poor light conditions, back-
Pilot Assist functionality may be reduced in lighting, wet road surface, etc.
In some situations, Pilot Assist may have
certain situations. trouble helping the driver properly or may The driver should also note that Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist is a driver support function be deactivated automatically – we advise has the following limitations:
designed to simplify driving and assist the against using Pilot Assist in such cases. • High curbs, roadside barriers, tempo-
driver in many situations. However, the driver Examples of such situations include: rary obstacles (traffic cones, safety bar-
is always responsible for maintaining a suita- • the lane markings are unclear, worn, riers, etc.) are not detected. Alterna-
ble distance to vehicles or objects around it missing, cross each other, or there are tively, they may be detected incorrectly
and ensuring that the vehicle is correctly posi- multiple sets of road markings. as lane markings, with a subsequent
tioned in the traffic lane. risk of contact between the vehicle and
• the lane division changes, e.g. when
such obstacles. The driver is responsi-
lanes split or merge, and at off-ramps.
ble for ensuring that the vehicle main-
• when there is road construction and tains a suitable distance from such
sudden changes to the road surface, obstacles.
e.g. when the lines may no longer mark
• The camera and radar sensors do not
the correct route.
have the capacity to detect all oncom-
• edges or other lines than lane markings ing objects and obstacles in traffic
are present on or near the road, e.g. environments, e.g. potholes, stationary
curbs, joints or repairs to the road sur- obstacles or objects that completely or
face, edges of barriers, roadside edges partially block the route.
or strong shadows.
• Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians,
• the lane is narrow or winding. animals, etc.
• the lane contains ridges or holes. • The steering assistance is limited in
• weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain, force, which means that Pilot Assist
snow or fog or slush or reduced visibil- cannot always help the driver to steer
and keep the vehicle within the lane.
• In vehicles equipped with Sensus
Navigation*, the function is able to use

62 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

308 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

information from map data, which WARNING Do not use Pilot Assist if the vehicle is carrying
could cause variations in performance. a heavy load or towing a trailer.
• This is not a collision avoidance sys-
• Pilot Assist will be switched off if the
tem. The driver is always responsible
speed-dependent power steering NOTE
and must intervene if the system fails
wheel resistance is working at reduced Pilot Assist cannot be activated if a trailer,
to detect a vehicle ahead.
power, e.g. during cooling due to over- bike carrier or similar is connected to the
heating. • The function does not brake for people
vehicle electrical system.
or animals and does not brake for small
vehicles, such as bikes and motorcy-
WARNING cles. Similarly, it does not brake for low Drive mode unavailable
Pilot Assist should only be used if there are trailers, oncoming, slow-moving or sta- The Off Road drive mode cannot be selected
clear lane lines painted on each side of the tionary vehicles and objects. when Pilot Assist is activated.
lane. All other use will increase the risk of • Do not use the function in demanding
contact with nearby obstacles that cannot situations, such as in city traffic, at NOTE
be detected by the functions.
intersections, on slippery surfaces, The function uses the vehicle's camera and
with a lot of water or slush on the road, radar sensor, which has certain general
in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on limitations.
winding roads, or on on/off ramps.

Related information
The driver can always correct or adjust steer-
• Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
ing assistance provided by Pilot Assist by turn-
ing the steering wheel to the desired position. • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386)
• Speed-dependent steering wheel resis-
Steep roads and/or heavy loads tance (p. 274)
Pilot Assist is primarily intended to be driven
on flat roads. The function may not be able to • Drive modes (p. 438)
maintain the correct time interval to the vehi-
cle ahead when driving down steep hills. The
driver should be extra attentive and prepared
to apply the brakes.

* Option/accessory. 309
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Pilot Assist*63 symbols and

messages
A number of symbols and messages relating
to Pilot Assist may be displayed in the instru-
ment panel and/or the head-up display*.
Symbol Message Meaning
Gray steering wheel symbol Indicates that steering assistance is deactivated. When Pilot Assist is providing steer-
ing assistance, the steering wheel is green.

Symbol for hands on the steering wheel The system cannot detect the driver's hands on the steering wheel. Place your hands
on the steering wheel and actively steer the vehicle.

Windscreen sensor Clean the windshield in front of the camera and radar sensors.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's man-
ual

A text message can be erased by briefly press- If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒
ing the button in the center of the right- an authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
side steering wheel keypad. mended.

63 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

310 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information
• Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
• Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 308)
• Contacting Volvo (p. 26)

* Option/accessory. 311
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Curve Speed Assist (CSA)*64 WARNING Related information

Curve Speed Assist can help the driver • Activating or deactivating Curve Speed
• The function is supplementary driver Assist (CSA)* (p. 313)
reduce speed before sharp turns if the preset support intended to facilitate driving
speed for the driver support function Adap- and help make it safer – it cannot han- • Curve Speed Assist (CSA)* limitations
tive Cruise Control* or Pilot Assist* is deter- dle all situations in all traffic, weather (p. 313)
mined to be too high. and road conditions. • Driver support systems (p. 274)
As the function reduces the
vehicle's speed, this symbol • The driver is advised to read all sec- • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)
will be displayed in the instru- tions in the Owner's Manual about this • Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
ment panel. function to learn of its limitations,
• Drive modes (p. 438)
which the driver must be aware of
before using the function.
• Driver support functions are not a sub-
This assessment is performed using informa- stitute for the driver's attention and
tion from map data in the vehicle's navigation judgment. The driver is always respon-
system, Sensus Navigation*. After the turn, sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
the vehicle will resume the previously set in a safe manner, at the appropriate
speed. speed, with an appropriate distance to
The driver can cancel the function at any time other vehicles, and in accordance with
by braking or using the accelerator pedal. current traffic rules and regulations.

Drive modes
Cornering assistance varies depending on the
selected drive mode. If drive mode cannot be
selected, the function will use the Comfort
option. In Dynamic mode, cornering will be
sporty, with slightly more powerful accelera-
tion coming out of curves.

64 This function is only available on some markets.

312 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Activating or deactivating Curve Curve Speed Assist (CSA)*66 NOTE

Speed Assist (CSA)* limitations
The function uses the vehicle's camera and
The Curve Speed Assist (CSA) function can Curve Speed Assist (CSA) functionality may radar sensor, which has certain general
be activated as a supplement to Adaptive be reduced in certain situations. The driver limitations.
Cruise Control* or Pilot Assist*. The driver can should be aware of the following limitations:
also deactivate the function. • Curve Speed Assist (CSA) may have lim-
Activate or deactivate the ited performance on small roads and in Related information
function using this button in densely populated areas. • Curve Speed Assist (CSA)* (p. 312)
the center display's Function At off-ramps or intersections, Curve • Activating or deactivating Curve Speed
•
view. Speed Assist (CSA) may temporarily Assist (CSA)* (p. 313)
switch off. • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386)
• If the satellite navigator's67 map data is
• GREEN button indicator light – the func- not updated, Curve Speed Assist (CSA)
tion is activated. may have limited functionality.
• GRAY button indicator light – the function • Curve Speed Assist (CSA) functionality
is deactivated. may be limited if the satellite navigator67
The next time the engine is started, the last has lost contact with the satellite system.
used setting is reactivated or the key's driver • On new or rebuilt roads, map data may be
profile settings are followed65. incorrect.
Related information • The risk of reduced grip due to adverse
• Curve Speed Assist (CSA)* (p. 312) weather or road conditions is not taken
into account when calculating suitable
• Curve Speed Assist (CSA)* limitations cornering speed.
(p. 313)

65 These alternatives are market dependent.

66 This function is only available on some markets.
67 Only with Volvo Sensus Navigation* installed.

* Option/accessory. 313
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Passing assistance* WARNING Using passing assistance

Passing assistance can assist the driver when Passing assistance can be used with Adap-
• The function is supplementary driver
passing other vehicles. The function can be tive Cruise Control* or Pilot Assist*. Several
support intended to facilitate driving
used with Adaptive Cruise Control* or Pilot conditions must be met for passing assis-
and help make it safer – it cannot han-
Assist*. tance to be possible.
dle all situations in all traffic, weather
When Adaptive Cruise Control or Pilot Assist In order to activate passing assistance:
and road conditions.
is following another vehicle and you indicate
The driver is advised to read all sec- • your vehicle must be following a vehicle
that you intend to pass that vehicle by using •
tions in the Owner's Manual about this ahead (target vehicle)
the turn signal68, the system will begin accel-
erating toward the vehicle ahead before your function to learn of its limitations, • your vehicle's current speed must be
vehicle has moved into the passing lane. which the driver must be aware of at least 70 km/h (43 mph)
before using the function. • the set speed must be high enough to
The function will then delay a speed reduction
• Driver support functions are not a sub- safely pass another vehicle.
to avoid early braking as your vehicle
approaches a slower-moving vehicle. stitute for the driver's attention and To start passing assistance:
judgment. The driver is always respon-
The function remains active until your vehicle sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven – Turn on the left turn signal.
has passed the other vehicle. in a safe manner, at the appropriate > Passing assistance will start.
speed, with an appropriate distance to
WARNING other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Please note that this function can be acti-
vated in more situations than just passing
another vehicle, such as when a direction Related information
indicator is used to indicate a lane change • Driver support systems (p. 274)
or before exiting to another road – the vehi-
cle will then briefly accelerate. • Using passing assistance (p. 314)
• Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)
• Pilot Assist* (p. 300)

68 Only the left-hand turn signal for left-hand drive vehicles, or right-hand turn signal for right-hand drive vehicles.

314 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING Collision risk warning from driver WARNING

support
The driver should be aware that if condi- The driver support system only issues a
tions suddenly change when using Passing The driver support systems Adaptive Cruise warning for vehicles detected by its radar
Assistance, the function may implement an Control* and Pilot Assist* can help alert the unit – thus, a warning may come after a
undesired acceleration in certain condi- driver if the distance to the vehicle ahead delay or not at all. Never wait for a warning.
tions. suddenly decreases to an unsafe distance. Apply the brakes when necessary.
Some situations should be avoided, e.g. if:
• the vehicle is approaching an exit in the
same direction as passing would nor-
mally occur
• the vehicle ahead slows before your
vehicle has had time to switch to the
passing lane
• traffic in the passing lane slows down
Situations of this type can be avoided by
temporarily putting Adaptive Cruise Control
or Pilot Assist in standby mode.
Collision warning audible signal and symbol

Related information Audible signal at risk of collision Collision warning symbol on the windshield
• Passing assistance* (p. 314) Collision warning symbol In vehicles equipped with a head-up display*,
• Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290) a flashing warning symbol will be displayed on
Camera/radar sensor distance monitoring the windshield.
• Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
• Adaptive Cruise Control* standby mode Adaptive Cruise Control and Pilot Assist use
approx. 40% of the braking capacity. If a sit- NOTE
(p. 295)
uation requires more braking force than driver Visual warnings on the windshield may be
• Pilot Assist* standby mode (p. 306)
support can provide, and if the driver does not difficult to notice in cases of strong sun-
apply the brakes, a warning light and audible light, reflections, extreme light contrasts,
warning signal will be activated to alert the or if the driver is wearing sunglasses or is
driver that immediate action is required. not looking straight ahead.

}}

* Option/accessory. 315
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Related information Switching target vehicles with WARNING

• Driver support systems (p. 274) driver support
When driver support follows another vehi-
• Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290) At certain speeds, vehicles with automatic cle at speeds over approx. 30 km/h
transmissions and the driver support func- (20 mph) and changes target vehicle –
• Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
tions Adaptive Cruise Control* and Pilot from a moving vehicle to a stationary one –
• Distance Alert* (p. 354) Assist* can switch target vehicles. driver support will ignore the stationary
• Head-up display* (p. 146) vehicle and instead accelerate to the stored
Switching target vehicles speed.
• The driver must then intervene and
apply the brakes.

Automatic standby mode when switching

targets
Driver support disengages and goes into
standby mode if:
• your vehicle's speed goes under 5 km/h
If the target vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may (3 mph) and driver support cannot deter-
be stationary traffic ahead. mine if the target vehicle is stationary or if
When driver support is actively following it is another object, e.g. a speed bump.
another vehicle at speeds under 30 km/h • your vehicle's speed goes under 5 km/h
(20 mph) and switches targets from a moving (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns so
vehicle to a stationary vehicle, driver support that driver support no longer has a vehicle
will brake for the stationary vehicle. to follow.

Related information
• Driver support systems (p. 274)
• Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)
• Pilot Assist* (p. 300)

316 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Adjusting set speed for driver – Change a set speed by pressing the Possible speed
support (1) or (2) buttons briefly or by pressing Automatic transmission
It is possible to adjust set speeds for the and holding them: The driver support functions can follow
cruise control, Adaptive Cruise Control* and another vehicle at speeds from a standstill up
• Brief press: Each press changes the
Pilot Assist* functions. to 200 km/h (125 mph).
speed in +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph) incre-
ments. Pilot Assist can provide steering assistance
• Press and hold: Release the button from near-stationary speeds up to 140 km/h
when the set speed indicator (3) has (87 mph).
moved to the desired speed. The lowest speed that can be set is 30 km/h
> The most recently set speed will be (20 mph). When following another vehicle,
stored. ACC can monitor that vehicle's speed and
slow your own vehicle down to a standstill,
NOTE but it is not possible to set speeds lower than
30 km/h (20 mph).
For vehicles without Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol*, speed instead increases by +/- 1km/h Related information
(+/- 1 mph) each time the button is • Driver support systems (p. 274)
: Increases the set speed pressed. Cruise control (p. 287)
•
: Reduces the set speed • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)
Pressing the accelerator pedal
Set speed If speed is increased by depressing the accel- • Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
erator pedal while pressing the (1) button
on the steering wheel, the vehicle's speed
when the button is pressed will be stored as
the set speed.
Temporarily increasing speed using the accel-
erator pedal, e.g. when passing another vehi-
cle, will not affect the setting. The vehicle will
return to the set speed when the accelerator
pedal is released.

* Option/accessory. 317
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Setting time interval to the vehicle NOTE In order to help your vehicle follow the vehicle
ahead ahead as smoothly and comfortably as possi-
When the symbol in the instrument panel ble, Adaptive Cruise Control allows the time
The time interval to the vehicle ahead can be
shows two vehicles, Adaptive Cruise Con- interval to vary noticeably in certain situations.
set for the functions Adaptive Cruise Control*,
trol is following the vehicle ahead at a pre- At low speeds, when the distance to the vehi-
Pilot Assist* and Distance Alert*.
set time interval. cle ahead is short, Adaptive Cruise Control
Different time intervals to the
vehicle ahead can be selected When only one vehicle is shown, there is increases the time interval slightly.
and are shown in the instru- no vehicle ahead within a reasonable dis-
ment panel as 1–5 horizontal tance. NOTE
bars. The more bars, the The greater the vehicles' speed, the
•
longer the time interval. One greater the distance between them for
bar represents an interval of a set time interval.
approx. 1 second to the vehicle ahead. 5 bars
represents approx. 3 seconds. • Only use the time intervals permitted
by local traffic regulations.
NOTE • If driver support does not seem to
respond with a speed increase when
When the symbol in the instrument panel activated, it may be because the time
shows a vehicle and a steering wheel, Pilot interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter
Assist follows a vehicle ahead at a preset than the set time interval.
time interval.
When only a steering wheel is shown,
there is no vehicle ahead within a reasona- WARNING
Controls for setting a time interval.
ble distance. • Only use a time interval suitable for the
Reduce the time interval
current traffic conditions.
Increase the time interval • The driver should be aware that short
time intervals give them limited time to
Distance indicator react and act to any unforeseen traffic
– Press the (1) or (2) button to decrease or situation.
increase the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the
current time interval.

318 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information Drive modes when using time Auto-hold braking with driver
• Drive modes when using time interval to interval to vehicle support
vehicle (p. 319) The driver can choose different drive modes The driver support functions Adaptive Cruise
• Driver support systems (p. 274) to determine how driver support should Control* and Pilot Assist* have a special brake
maintain a time interval to the vehicle ahead. function in slow traffic and while stationary.
• Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)
Settings are made using the DRIVE MODE In certain situations, the parking brake will be
• Pilot Assist* (p. 300) controls. applied to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
• Distance Alert* (p. 354) Select one of the following: Braking function in slow traffic and at
• Head-up display* (p. 146)
• Pure - Driver support will focus on provid- a standstill
ing good fuel economy, which will In slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic or when
increase the time interval to the vehicle stopped at a traffic light, driving will resume
ahead. automatically if the vehicle is stopped for less
• Hybrid - Driver support will focus on fol- than approx. 3 seconds. If it takes more than 3
lowing the set time interval to the vehicle seconds for the vehicle ahead to begin moving
ahead as smoothly as possible. again, the driver support function will go into
standby mode and the auto-hold brake func-
• Power - Driver support will focus on fol- tion will activate.
lowing the set time interval to the vehicle
ahead more exactly, which could mean – The function can be reactivated by:
faster acceleration and heavier braking. Pressing the button on the steer-
•
Related information ing wheel keypad.
• Setting time interval to the vehicle ahead • Pressing the accelerator pedal.
(p. 318) > The function will resume following the
• Driver support systems (p. 274) vehicle ahead if it begins to move
within approx. 6 seconds.
• Drive modes (p. 438)

WARNING
A noticeable increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
}}

* Option/accessory. 319
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| WARNING • The gear selector is moved to the P, N or Lane Keeping Aid

R position. Lane Keeping Aid (LKA69) is designed to
The driver support system only issues a
warning for obstacles detected by its radar • The driver puts Adaptive Cruise Control or actively steer the vehicle on freeways, high-
sensor – thus, a warning may come after a Pilot Assist in standby mode. ways and other major roads to help the driver
delay or not at all. reduce the risk of the vehicle unintentionally
Auto Activate Parking Brake veering out of the lane.
• Never wait for a warning or assistance. The parking brake will be applied if the func- Lake Keeping Aid steers the vehicle back into
Apply the brakes when necessary. tion is keeping the vehicle stationary using the the lane and/or alerts the driver using vibra-
brakes and: tions in the steering wheel.
NOTE • The driver opens the door or unbuckles Lane Keeping Aid is active at speeds between
Driver support can keep the vehicle sta- his/her seat belt. 65–200 km/h (40–125 mph) on roads with
tionary for no more than 5 minutes – after • The function has kept the vehicle at a clearly visible traffic lane marker lines.
that time the parking brake is applied and standstill for more than approx. 5 minutes. On narrow roads, the function may be unavail-
the function is deactivated. • The brakes overheat. able and go into standby mode. The function
The parking brake must be released before • The driver switches off the engine. will become available again when the road
driver support can be reactivated. becomes sufficiently wide.
Related information
• Driver support systems (p. 274)
Deactivation of the Auto-hold brake
function • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)
In certain situations, auto-hold will be deacti- • Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
vated when the vehicle is at a standstill and • Brake functions (p. 421)
the function will go into standby mode. This
means that the brakes will be released and the
vehicle could begin to roll. The driver must
actively apply the brakes to keep the vehicle
stationary.
This can occur if:
• The driver depresses the brake pedal. A camera monitors the road/traffic lane's marker
lines.
• The parking brake is applied.

320 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Depending on the settings used, Lane Keep- WARNING

ing Aid functions in different ways:
• The function is supplementary driver
• Assist enabled: When the vehicle support intended to facilitate driving
approaches a lane marker line, the func- and help make it safer – it cannot han-
tion will actively steer the vehicle back into dle all situations in all traffic, weather
the lane using light pressure on the steer- and road conditions.
ing wheel.
• The driver is advised to read all sec-
• Warning enabled: If the vehicle is about tions in the Owner's Manual about this
to move over a lane marker line, the driver function to learn of its limitations,
will be alerted by vibrations in the steering which the driver must be aware of
wheel. before using the function.
Lane Keeping Aid steers the vehicle back into its There is also an option for activating steering • Driver support functions are not a sub-
lane. assistance and alerts at the same time. stitute for the driver's attention and
judgment. The driver is always respon-
NOTE sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
When the direction indicators/turn signals in a safe manner, at the appropriate
are activated, the Lane Keeping Aid does speed, with an appropriate distance to
not provide any warning or intervene with other vehicles, and in accordance with
steering. current traffic rules and regulations.

Lane Keeping Aid alerts the driver using vibrations in

the steering wheel.

69 Lane Keeping Aid }}

321
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Lane Keeping Aid does not intervene If the driver does not begin to steer the vehi- Activating or deactivating Lane
cle, the function will go into standby mode Keeping Aid
and this message will be displayed: The Lane Keeping Aid (LKA70) function is
• Lane Keeping Aid – Standby until optional – the driver can choose to have the
steering applied function activated or deactivated.
Activate or deactivate the
The function will then be unavailable until the
function using this button in
driver begins actively steering the vehicle
the center display's Function
again.
view.
Related information
• Driver support systems (p. 274)
• Activating or deactivating Lane Keeping • GREEN button indicator light – the func-
Lane Keeping Aid does not intervene in sharp inside
Aid (p. 322) tion is activated.
curves. • Lane Keeping Aid limitations (p. 323) • GRAY button indicator light – the function
In certain cases, such as when a turn signal is • Lane Keeping Aid symbols and messages is deactivated.
used or when "straightening out" an inside (p. 324)
curve, Lane Keeping Aid will not provide steer- Related information
ing assistance or alerts. • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 320)
• Selecting type of assistance for Lane
Hands on the steering wheel Keeping Aid (p. 323)
Steering assistance with Lane Keeping Aid
• Lane Keeping Aid limitations (p. 323)
only functions if the driver's hands are on the
steering wheel, which the system continu-
ously monitors.
If the driver's hands are not
on the steering wheel, an
audible signal will be given
and a message will instruct
the driver to actively steer the
vehicle:

• Lane Keeping Aid – Apply steering

322
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Selecting type of assistance for Lane Keeping Aid limitations Related information
Lane Keeping Aid In certain demanding driving conditions, Lane • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 320)
The driver can determine what types of assis- Keeping Aid (LKA72) may not be able to prop- • Speed-dependent steering wheel resis-
tance Lane Keeping Aid (LKA71) should pro- erly assist the driver. In these situations, it is tance (p. 274)
vide if the vehicle veers from its lane. recommended that the function be deacti- Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386)
•
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe vated.
in the center display's Top view. Examples of such situations include:

2. Under Lane Keeping Aid Mode, select • road work

what assistance the function should pro- • winter driving conditions
vide: poor road surfaces
•
• Assist the driver will receive steering • a very sporty driving style
assistance but no warning.
• bad weather with reduced visibility
• Warning – the driver is only warned • roads with indistinct or no lane markings
through vibrations in the steering
wheel. • sharp edges or lines other than the lane's
side markings
• Both – the driver receives steering
assistance and a warning through • when speed-dependent power steering
vibrations in the steering wheel. wheel resistance is working at reduced
power – e.g. during cooling due to over-
Related information heating.
• Lane Keeping Aid (p. 320) The function cannot detect barriers, railings or
similar obstacles at the side of the lane.

NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's camera and
radar sensor, which has certain general
limitations.

70 Lane Keeping Aid

71 Lane Keeping Aid
72 Lane Keeping Aid

323
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Lane Keeping Aid symbols and played in the instrument panel. Several exam-
messages ples are provided below.
A number of symbols and messages related
to Lane Keeping Aid (LKA73) may be dis-
Symbol Message Meaning
Driver support system The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA.
Reduced functionality Service required

Windscreen sensor The camera's ability to detect the lane in front of the vehicle is reduced.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

73 Lane Keeping Aid

324
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Symbol Message Meaning

Lane Keeping Aid LKA's steering assistance is disabled when the driver's hands are not on the wheel.
Follow the instructions and steer the vehicle.
Apply steering

Lane Keeping Aid LKA will go into standby mode until the driver begins steering the vehicle again.
Standby until steering applied

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

A text message can be erased by briefly press-

ing the button in the center of the right-
side steering wheel keypad.
If a message cannot be erased, contact a
workshopA.

Related information
• Lane Keeping Aid (p. 320)
• Lane Keeping Aid display (p. 326)
• Lane Keeping Aid limitations (p. 323)

325
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Lane Keeping Aid display Unavailable Related information

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA74)
uses symbols in • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 320)
the instrument panel for various situations. • Lane Keeping Aid limitations (p. 323)
Some examples of symbols
and descriptions of the situa-
tions in which they might
appear are provided below.

Available Unavailable ‒ the marker lines in the symbol are

GRAY.
Lane Keeping Aid is unable to detect the lane
marker lines, the vehicle's speed is too low or
the road is too narrow.
Steering/warning indicator

Available ‒ the marker lines in the symbol are

WHITE.
Lane Keeping Aid is able to detect one or both
of the traffic lane's side marker lines.

Steering/warning ‒ the marker lines in the symbol

are COLORED.
Indicates that the Lane Keeping Aid system is
alerting the driver and/or attempting to steer
the vehicle back into the lane.

74 Lane Keeping Aid

326
 DRIVER SUPPORT

City Safety™ The function assists the driver by automati- WARNING

City Safety75
can alert the driver with light, cally applying the brakes if there is an immi-
nent risk of a collision and the driver does not • The function is supplementary driver
sound and pulsations in the brake pedal to
react in time by braking and/or steering away. support intended to facilitate driving
help the driver detect pedestrians, cyclists,
and help make it safer – it cannot han-
large animals and vehicles. City Safety is activated in situations in which dle all situations in all traffic, weather
the driver should have applied the brakes and road conditions.
much earlier, which means that the system
will not be able to assist the driver in all situa- • The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions. The function is designed to be activated tions in the Owner's Manual about this
as late as possible to help avoid unnecessary function to learn of its limitations,
intervention. Automatic braking will only be which the driver must be aware of
applied after or during a collision warning. before using the function.
• Driver support functions are not a sub-
Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will not
stitute for the driver's attention and
be aware of City Safety except when the sys-
judgment. The driver is always respon-
tem intervenes when a collision is imminent.
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
in a safe manner, at the appropriate
Function overview speed, with an appropriate distance to
Audible signal at risk of collision other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Collision warning symbol

Camera/radar sensor distance monitoring Related information

• Driver support systems (p. 274)
The function can help the driver avoid a colli- City Safety sub-functions (p. 328)
•
sion in e.g. stop-and-go traffic, when changes
in the traffic ahead and driver distraction could • Setting a warning distance for City Safety
lead to an incident. City Safety activates a (p. 330)
brief, forceful braking in an attempt to stop • Detecting obstacles with City Safety
your vehicle immediately behind the vehicle or (p. 331)
object ahead.

75 This function is not available on all markets. }}

327
 DRIVER SUPPORT

• City Safety braking for oncoming vehicles City Safety sub-functions The braking function for large animals is pri-
(p. 336) CitySafety76 can help prevent a collision or marily intended to mitigate the force of a colli-
• Automatic braking during delayed evasive lower the vehicle's speed at the point of sion at higher speeds. Braking is most effec-
maneuvers with City Safety (p. 335) impact. The function consists of several sub- tive at speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph) and
functions. less effective at lower speeds.
• City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 333)
• City Safety steering assistance for evasive Ability to reduce speed City Safety steps
maneuver (p. 334) If the difference in speed between your vehicle City Safety carries out three steps in the fol-
and the obstacle is greater than the speeds lowing order:
• City Safety limitations (p. 337)
specified below, the City Safety auto-brake 1. Collision warning
• City Safety messages (p. 340)
function cannot prevent a collision, but it can
2. Brake assistance
help mitigate its effects.
3. Auto-brake
Vehicles
City Safety can help prevent a collision with a
vehicle ahead by reducing your vehicle's speed
by up to 60 km/h (37 mph).
Cyclists
City Safety can help prevent a collision with a
cyclist ahead by reducing your vehicle's speed
by up to 50 km/h (30 mph).
Pedestrians
City Safety can help prevent a collision with a
pedestrian ahead by reducing your vehicle's
speed by up to 45 km/h (28 mph).
Large animals
If there is a risk of colliding with a large ani-
mal, City Safety can help reduce your vehicle's
speed by up to 15 km/h (9 mph).

76 This function is not available on all markets.

328
 DRIVER SUPPORT

1 - Collision warning pedestrians, cyclists or large animals that are The seat belt tensioner may be activated when
The driver is first alerted to the risk of an immi- crossing the road in front of your vehicle. the automatic braking function is triggered.
nent collision. If there is a risk of a collision with a pedestrian, In certain situations, auto-braking may begin
In vehicles equipped with a head-up display*, large animal, cyclist or another vehicle, the with a limited braking force before applying
a flashing warning symbol will be displayed on driver will be alerted with light, sound and pul- full braking force.
the windshield. sations in the brake pedal. At lower speeds,
If City Safety has prevented a collision, the
during hard braking or if the accelerator pedal
vehicle will be kept at a standstill until the
is pressed, the brake pedal pulsation warning
driver takes action. If the vehicle has slowed to
will not be given. The intensity of the brake
avoid colliding with a slower-moving vehicle
pedal pulsations varies according to the vehi-
ahead, your speed will be reduced to that vehi-
cle's speed.
cle's speed.
2 - Brake assistance
Auto-braking can always be cancelled if the
If the risk of a collision increases after the colli-
driver presses hard on the accelerator pedal.
sion warning, brake support will be activated.
If the system determines that the pressure the NOTE
driver is exerting on the brake pedal is insuffi-
cient to prevent the collision, brake support When City Safety activates the brakes, the
will increase pressure. brake lights come on.
Collision warning symbol on the windshield
3 - Auto-brake
The automatic braking function is activated at When City Safety applies the brakes, a text
NOTE the last moment. message will appear in the instrument panel
Visual warnings on the windshield may be to notify the driver that the function is/was
If the driver has not taken evasive action by activated.
difficult to notice in cases of strong sun- this stage and a collision is imminent, the
light, reflections, extreme light contrasts, automatic braking function will be triggered.
or if the driver is wearing sunglasses or is WARNING
This occurs whether or not the driver is press-
not looking straight ahead. ing the brake pedal. Full braking force will be City Safety may not be used to change
applied to reduce the speed at impact or how the driver operates the vehicle. The
City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or reduced braking effect will be applied if this is driver must not only rely on City Safety to
brake the vehicle.
vehicles that are stationary, are moving in the sufficient to avoid the collision.
same direction as your vehicle and are ahead
of your vehicle. City Safety can also detect
}}

* Option/accessory. 329
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Related information Setting a warning distance for City number of warnings, but it will also result in
• City Safety™ (p. 327) Safety City Safety providing warnings at a later stage.
• City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 333) City Safety77 is always active, but the func- The Late warning distance setting should
• City Safety braking for oncoming vehicles tion's warning distance can be adjusted. therefore only be used in exceptional cases,
(p. 336) NOTE such as when a more dynamic driving style is
preferred.
• City Safety limitations (p. 337) The City Safety function cannot be deacti-
• Head-up display* (p. 146) vated. It is activated automatically each
time the engine/electric motor is started.
• Seat belt tensioners (p. 52)

The alert distance determines the sensitivity of

the system and regulates the distance at
which the light, sound and brake pulsations
will be activated.
To select warning distance:
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
in the center display's Top view.
2. Under City Safety Warning, tap Late,
Normal or Early to set the desired warn-
ing distance.
If the driver feels that the Early setting is giv-
ing too many warnings or finds them irritating,
the Normal or Late warning distance settings
can be selected instead.
If the driver feels that the warnings are too fre-
quent and distracting, the warning distance
can be reduced. This will reduce the total

77 This function is not available on all markets.

330 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING Detecting obstacles with City For good performance, the system's function
Safety for cyclist detection needs the clearest possi-
• No automatic system can guarantee ble information about the contours of the bicy-
100% correct function in all situations. City Safety78 can help the driver detect other
vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedes- cle and of the cyclist's head, arm, shoulders,
You should therefore never test use of legs, torso and lower body in combination
City Safety in the direction of people, trians.
with normal human movements.
animals or vehicles – this could lead to Vehicles
severe damage, serious personal injury If large portions of the cyclist's body or the
City Safety can detect most vehicles that are bicycle itself are not visible to the function's
or even death. stationary or are moving in the same direction camera, it will not be able to detect a cyclist.
• City Safety warns the driver if there is a as your vehicle. In some cases, it can also
risk of collision, but the function cannot detect oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic. The system can only detect adult cyclists rid-
reduce the driver's reaction time. ing on bicycles intended for adults.
For City Safety to be able to detect a vehicle in
• Even if the warning distance has been the dark, its headlights and taillights must be
set to Early, warnings may be per- on and clearly visible.
WARNING
ceived as late in certain situations – City Safety is supplementary driver sup-
e.g. when there are large speed differ- Cyclists port, but it cannot detect all cyclists in all
ences or if the vehicle ahead suddenly situations and, for example, cannot see:
brakes heavily. • partially obscured cyclists.
• With the warning distance set to Early, • cyclists if the contrast to the cyclist's
warnings come further in advance. This background is poor.
may cause the warnings to come more
• cyclists in clothing that hides their
frequently than with warning distance
body contour.
Normal, but is recommended since it
can make City Safety more effective. • bikes loaded with large objects.
Warnings and brake interventions may
occur late or not at all. The driver is always
Related information responsible for ensuring that the vehicle is
• City Safety™ (p. 327) driven correctly and with a safety distance
• City Safety limitations (p. 337) Examples of what City Safety would interpret to be a suitable for the speed.
cyclist: clear body and bicycle shapes.
• Rear Collision Warning* (p. 347)

78 This function is not available on all markets. }}

* Option/accessory. 331
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Pedestrians WARNING Large animals

City Safety is supplementary driver sup-
port, but it cannot detect all pedestrians in
all situations and, for example, cannot see:
• partially obscured pedestrians, people
in clothing that hides their body con-
tour or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm
(32 in.).
• pedestrians if the contrast to the
pedestrian's background is poor.
• pedestrians who are carrying large
objects.
Examples of what the system considers to be a Examples of what City Safety would interpret as a
pedestrian: clear body contours. Warnings and brake interventions may large animal: stationary or moving slowly and with
occur late or not at all. The driver is always clear body contours.
For good performance, the system's function responsible for ensuring that the vehicle is
for pedestrian detection needs the clearest driven correctly and with a safety distance For good performance, the system's function
possible information about the contours of the suitable for the speed. for detecting large animals (e.g. moose,
pedestrian's head, arm, shoulders, legs, torso horses, etc.) needs the clearest possible infor-
and lower body in combination with normal mation about body contours. This entails
human movements. being able to detect the animal straight from
the side in combination with normal move-
In order to detect a pedestrian, there must be ments for that animal.
a contrast to the background, which could
depend on clothing, weather conditions, etc. If If parts of the animal's body are not visible to
there is little contrast, the person may be the function's camera, the system will not be
detected late or not at all, which may result in able to detect the animal.
a delayed reaction from the system or no reac- City Safety can detect large animals even in
tion at all. dark conditions if they are illuminated by the
City Safety can detect pedestrians even in vehicle's headlights.
dark conditions if they are illuminated by the
vehicle's headlights.

332
 DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING City Safety in crossing traffic Related information

CitySafety79 can assist the driver when turn- • City Safety™ (p. 327)
City Safety is supplementary driver sup-
port, but it cannot detect all large animals ing into the path of an oncoming vehicle in an • City Safety limitations (p. 337)
in all situations and, for example, cannot intersection.
see:
• partially obscured larger animals.
• larger animals seen from the front or
from behind.
• running or fast moving larger animals.
• larger animals if the contrast to the ani-
mal's background is poor.
• smaller animals such as cats and dogs.
Warnings and brake interventions may
occur late or not at all. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring that the vehicle is
driven correctly and with a safety distance Sector in which City Safety can detect an
suitable for the speed. oncoming vehicle in crossing traffic.
In order for City Safety to detect an oncoming
Related information vehicle in situations where there is a risk of a
• City Safety™ (p. 327) collision, that vehicle must be within the sec-
tor in which City Safety can analyze the situa-
• City Safety limitations (p. 337)
tion.
The following criteria must also be met:
• your vehicle's speed must be at least
4 km/h (3 mph)
• your vehicle must be making a left turn
• the oncoming vehicle's headlights must
be on

79 This function is not available on all markets.

333
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Limitations of City Safety in NOTE City Safety steering assistance for

crossing traffic evasive maneuver
The function uses the vehicle's camera and
In certain situations, it may be difficult for City Safety steering assistance can help the
radar sensor, which has certain general
City Safety to help the driver avoid a collision driver steer away from a vehicle/obstacle
limitations.
with crossing traffic. when it is not possible to avoid a collision by
braking alone. City Safety steering assistance
Related information is always activated and cannot be switched
• City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 333) off.
• City Safety limitations (p. 337)
• Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386)

For example:
• On slippery roads when Electronic Stabil-
ity Control (ESC) is actively operating. Your vehicle swerves away
• If an approaching vehicle is detected at a
late stage. Slow-moving/stationary vehicle or obsta-
cle.
• If the oncoming vehicle is partially
obstructed by another vehicle or object. City Safety helps provide assistance by
strengthening the driver's steering move-
• If the oncoming vehicle's headlights are ments, but only if the driver has begun evasive
off. action and the system detects that the driver's
• If the oncoming vehicle is moving errati- steering movements are not sufficient to avoid
cally and e.g. suddenly changes lanes at a a collision.
late stage.
The brake system is used simultaneously to
further strengthen steering movements. The

334
 DRIVER SUPPORT

function also helps stabilize the vehicle after it City Safety steering assistance Automatic braking during delayed
has passed the obstacle. limitations during evasive evasive maneuvers with City
City Safety steering assistance can detect: maneuvers Safety
City Safety steering assistance may have lim- City Safety80 can assist the driver by auto-
• vehicles
ited functionality in certain situations and not matically braking the vehicle when it is not
• cyclists intervene, e.g.: possible to avoid a collision by steering alone.
• pedestrians at speeds outside the range of City Safety assists the driver by periodically
•
large animals 50-100 km/h (30-62 mph) attempting to predict possible "escape
•
routes" to the sides of the vehicle in the event
• if the driver does not take evasive action a slow-moving or stationary vehicle were to be
Related information
• City Safety™ (p. 327) • if speed-dependent power steering wheel detected at a late stage.
resistance is working at reduced power –
• City Safety steering assistance limitations
e.g. during cooling due to overheating.
during evasive maneuvers (p. 335)
• City Safety limitations (p. 337)
NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's camera and
radar sensor, which has certain general
limitations.

Related information
• City Safety steering assistance for evasive
maneuver (p. 334)
• City Safety limitations (p. 337) Your vehicle (1) cannot detect any potential escape
• Speed-dependent steering wheel resis- routes for veering away from the vehicle ahead (2)
and may therefore apply the brakes at an earlier
tance (p. 274) stage.
• Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386)
Own vehicle

Slow-moving/stationary vehicles

80 This function is not available on all markets. }}

335
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| City Safety will not intervene to automatically City Safety braking for oncoming • your lane must have clear side lane mark-
apply the brakes if it is possible for the driver vehicles ings
to avoid a collision by steering the vehicle. City Safety can help you apply the brakes for • your vehicle must be positioned straight in
However, if City Safety determines that an an oncoming vehicle in your lane. your lane
evasive maneuver would not be possible due If an oncoming vehicle veers into your lane • the oncoming vehicle must be positioned
to traffic in the adjacent lane(s), the function and a collision is unavoidable, City Safety can within your vehicle's lane markings
can assist the driver by automatically starting help reduce your vehicle's speed to attempt to
mitigate the force of the collision. • the oncoming vehicle's headlights must
to apply the brakes at an earlier stage.
be on
Related information • the function can only handle “front-to-
• City Safety™ (p. 327) front” collisions
• City Safety limitations (p. 337) • the function can only detect vehicles with
four wheels.

WARNING
Warnings and brake interventions due to
an imminent collision with an oncoming
vehicle always come very late.

Related information
Own vehicle • City Safety™ (p. 327)
• City Safety limitations (p. 337)
Oncoming vehicles

The following criteria must be met for the

function to work:
• your vehicle's speed must be above
4 km/h (3 mph)
• the road must be straight

336
 DRIVER SUPPORT

City Safety limitations Camera and radar sensor's field of vision Driver intervention
City Safety81
functionality may be reduced in The camera's field of vision is limited and in Backing up
certain situations. certain situations, it may be unable to detect City Safety is temporarily deactivated when
pedestrians, large animals, cyclists or vehicles, the vehicle is backing up.
Surroundings or it may detect them later than expected.
Low speed
Low objects Vehicles that are dirty may be detected later City Safety is not activated at very low speeds
Hanging objects, such as flags for overhang- than clean vehicles, and in dark conditions, under 4 km/h (3 mph). The system will there-
ing loads or accessories such as auxiliary motorcycles may be detected late or not at all. fore not intervene in situations in which your
lights or front protective grids that extend vehicle is approaching another vehicle very
If a text message displayed in the instrument
beyond the height of the hood, may limit City slowly, such as when parking.
panel indicates that the camera or radar sen-
Safety functionality.
sor is obstructed, it may be difficult for City Active driver
Slippery road conditions Safety to detect pedestrians, large animals, Action by the driver always has priority. City
The extended braking distance on slippery cyclists, vehicles or lane markings in front of Safety will therefore not react or will react at a
roads may reduce City Safety's capacity to the vehicle. City Safety functionality may later stage with a warning or intervention in
help avoid a collision. In these types of situa- therefore be reduced. situations in which the driver is clearly steering
tions, the Anti-lock Braking System and Elec- and operating the accelerator pedal, even if a
Text messages may not be displayed for all sit-
tronic Stability Control (ESC82) are designed collision is unavoidable.
uations in which the windshield sensors are
for optimal braking power with maintained
blocked. The driver must therefore always An active and aware driving style may there-
stability.
keep the windshield in front of the camera/ fore delay collision warnings and intervention
Backlighting radar sensor clean. in order to minimize unnecessary warnings.
The visual warning signal in the windshield
may be difficult to detect in bright sunlight, if CAUTION
there are reflections, or if the driver is wearing
sunglasses or not looking straight ahead. Only a workshop may perform mainte-
nance on driver support components – an
Heat authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
If the temperature in the passenger compart- mended.
ment is high due to e.g. bright sunlight, the
visual warning signal in the windshield may be
temporarily disabled.

This function is not available on all markets.

}}
81
82 Electronic Stability Control

337
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Important warnings WARNING • Warnings and brake interventions for

pedestrians and cyclists are disen-
• Warnings and brake interventions can gaged at vehicle speeds over 80 km/h
WARNING be triggered late or not at all if the traf- (50 mph).
The driver support system only issues a fic situation or external influences pre-
warning for obstacles detected by its radar • Do not place, affix or mount anything
vent the camera and radar unit from
sensor – thus, a warning may come after a on the inside or outside of the wind-
properly detecting pedestrians,
delay or not at all. shield, or in front of or around the cam-
cyclists, large animals or vehicles
era and radar unit – this could disrupt
• Never wait for a warning or assistance. ahead of the vehicle.
camera-based functions.
Apply the brakes when necessary. • To be able to detect vehicles at night,
• Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of
its front and rear lights must work and
the camera sensor can reduce the
illuminate clearly.
function, disengage it completely or
• The camera and radar unit have a lim- give an improper function response.
ited range for pedestrians and cyclists
– the system can provide effective
warnings and brake interventions if the
relative speed is lower than 50 km/h
(30 mph). For stationary or slow-mov-
ing vehicles, warnings and brake inter-
ventions are effective at vehicle speeds
of up to 70 km/h (43 mph). Speed
reduction for large animals is less than
15 km/h (9 mph) and can be achieved
at vehicle speeds over 70 km/h
(43 mph). At lower speeds, the warn-
ing and brake intervention for large ani-
mals is less effective.
• Warnings for stationary or slow-mov-
ing vehicles and large animals can be
disengaged due to darkness or poor
visibility.

338
 DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING Settings menu, your vehicle is not equipped

with this function.
• The City Safety auto-brake function
can prevent a collision or reduce colli- In the center display's Top view, tap:
sion speed, but to ensure full brake • Settings My Car IntelliSafe
performance the driver should always
depress the brake pedal – even when Related information
the car auto-brakes. • City Safety™ (p. 327)
• The warning and steering assistance • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386)
are only activated if there is a high risk
of collision – you must therefore never
wait for the collision warning or City
Safety to intervene.
• Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are disen-
gaged at vehicle speeds over 80 km/h
(50 mph).
• City Safety does not activate auto-
braking intervention during heavy
acceleration.

NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's camera and
radar sensor, which has certain general
limitations.

Market limitations
City Safety is not available in all countries. If
City Safety is not shown in the center display's

339
 DRIVER SUPPORT

City Safety messages

A number of messages related to City Safety
may be displayed in the instrument panel.
Several examples are provided below.
Message Meaning
City Safety When City Safety is braking or has activated the automatic braking function, one or more symbols may
illuminate in the instrument panel and a text message may be displayed.
Automatic intervention
City Safety The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA.
Reduced functionality Service
required
A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

A text message can be erased by briefly press-

ing the button in the center of the right-
side steering wheel keypad.
If a message cannot be erased, contact a
workshopA.

Related information
• City Safety™ (p. 327)

340
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Steering assistance at risk of WARNING • Run-Off Mitigation with steering assis-

collision tance (p. 342)
• The function is supplementary driver
The Collision avoidance function can help • Steering assistance during collision risks
support intended to facilitate driving
the driver reduce the risk of the vehicle leav- from oncoming traffic (p. 343)
and help make it safer – it cannot han-
ing its lane unintentionally and/or colliding • Steering assistance during collision risks
dle all situations in all traffic, weather
with another vehicle or obstacle by actively from behind* (p. 344)
and road conditions.
steering the vehicle back into its lane and/or
swerving. • The driver is advised to read all sec- • Steering assistance during collision risks
The function consists of these subfunctions: tions in the Owner's Manual about this limitations (p. 345)
function to learn of its limitations, • Symbols and messages for steering assis-
• Run-Off Mitigation with steering assis- which the driver must be aware of tance during collision risks (p. 346)
tance before using the function.
• Steering assistance during collision risks • Driver support functions are not a sub-
from oncoming traffic stitute for the driver's attention and
• Steering assistance during collision risks judgment. The driver is always respon-
from behind* sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
After the system has automatically intervened, in a safe manner, at the appropriate
this text message will appear in the instru- speed, with an appropriate distance to
ment panel: other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Collision avoidance – Automatic
intervention
NOTE
It is always the driver who must decide
how much the vehicle should be in control
– the vehicle can never take command.

Related information
• Driver support systems (p. 274)
• Activating or deactivating steering assis-
tance during collision risks (p. 342)

* Option/accessory. 341
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Activating or deactivating steering NOTE Run-Off Mitigation with steering

assistance during collision risks assistance
When the Collision avoidance function is
The steering assistance function is optional – Steering assistance has several sub-func-
deactivated, all subfunctions of the follow-
the driver can choose to have it activated or tions. Run-Off Mitigation with steering assis-
ing are deactivated:
deactivated. tance can help the driver and reduce the risk
Activate or deactivate the • Steering assistance at risk of run-off of the vehicle inadvertently running off the
function using this button in • Steering assistance at risk of head-on road by actively steering the vehicle back
the center display's Function collision onto the road.
view. This function has two activation levels for
• Steering assistance during collision
intervention:
risks from behind*
• Steering assistance only
Although it is possible to deactivate the
• GREEN button indicator light – the func- function, the driver is advised to keep it • Steering assistance with braking
tion is activated. activated since it can help improve driving Steering assistance only
• GRAY button indicator light – the function safety in most cases.
is deactivated.
The function is automatically activated each Related information
time the engine is started83. • Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 341)
• Steering assistance during collision risks
limitations (p. 345)

Intervention with steering assistance

83 On some markets, the setting that was active when the engine was switched off is reactivated.

342 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Steering assistance with braking is used. The function will also not be activated Steering assistance during
if it detects that the driver is actively operating collision risks from oncoming
the vehicle. traffic
Steering assistance has several sub-func-
Related information
tions. Steering assistance during collision
• Steering assistance at risk of collision
risks from oncoming traffic can help a dis-
(p. 341)
tracted driver who has not noticed that the
• Steering assistance during collision risks vehicle is veering out of the lane.
limitations (p. 345)

Intervention with steering assistance and braking

Braking intervention assists in situations
where steering assistance alone is not suffi-
cient. Braking force is automatically adapted
according to the situation at the moment the
vehicle begins to run off the road.

The function is active at speeds between The function provides assistance by swerving your
65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with vehicle back into your own lane.
clearly visible traffic lane markings/lines. Oncoming vehicles
The system uses a camera to monitor the
Own vehicle
edges of the road and the painted side marker
lines. If the vehicle is about to cross the edge When steering assistance is activated, colli-
of the road, the function will attempt to steer sion warning for driver support will also be
the vehicle back onto the road. If this is not activated. However, the brake pedal pulsa-
sufficient to keep the vehicle on the road, the tions that are part of collision warning will not
brakes will also be applied. be activated.
However, the function will not provide either

}}
steering assistance or braking if the turn signal

343
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| The function is active at speeds between Steering assistance during next lane, this function can help the driver
60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with collision risks from behind* steer the vehicle back into its own lane.
clearly visible traffic lane markings/lines. Steering assistance has several sub-func- Even if the driver intentionally changes lanes
If your vehicle is starting to veer from your tions. If you become distracted and do not using a turn signal without noticing another
own lane and a vehicle is approaching from notice your vehicle starting to veer out of the vehicle approaching, the function can provide
the opposite direction, this function can help lane while another vehicle is approaching assistance.
the driver steer the vehicle back into its own from behind or is in your vehicle's blind spot,
Steering assistance during collision risks The function is active at speeds between
lane.
from behind can help provide assistance. 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with
However, the function will not provide steer- clearly visible traffic lane markings/lines.
ing assistance if the turn signal is used. The
The lights in the door mirrors will flash while
function will also not be activated if it detects
steering assistance is being provided, whether
that the driver is actively operating the vehicle.
or not the BLIS84 function is activated. An
Related information audible signal will also sound.
• Steering assistance at risk of collision
Related information
(p. 341)
• Steering assistance at risk of collision
• Collision risk warning from driver support (p. 341)
(p. 315)
• BLIS* (p. 348)
• Steering assistance during collision risks
• Steering assistance during collision risks
limitations (p. 345)
limitations (p. 345)
The function provides assistance by steering your
vehicle back into your own lane.
Another vehicle in blind spot zone

Own vehicle
If your vehicle is beginning to veer out of your
lane while another vehicle is in your blind spot
or another vehicle is rapidly approaching in the

84 Blind Spot Information

344 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Steering assistance during NOTE

collision risks limitations
The function uses the vehicle's camera and
The function may have limited functionality in
radar sensor, which has certain general
certain situations and not intervene, e.g.:
limitations.
• for smaller vehicles such as motorcycles
• if more than half of your vehicle has
moved into the adjacent lane Related information
• Steering assistance at risk of collision
• on roads/lanes with indistinct or no side (p. 341)
lane markings
• Run-Off Mitigation with steering assis-
• outside the speed range 60-140 km/h tance (p. 342)
(37-87 mph)
• Steering assistance during collision risks
• when speed-dependent power steering from oncoming traffic (p. 343)
wheel resistance is working at reduced
power – e.g. during cooling due to over- • Steering assistance during collision risks
heating. from behind* (p. 344)

Functionality may also be reduced in other sit-

uations, such as:
• road work
• winter driving conditions
• narrow roads
• poor road surfaces
• a very sporty driving style
• bad weather with reduced visibility.
In these demanding driving conditions, the
function may not be able to properly assist the
driver. In these situations, it is recommended
that it is turned off.

* Option/accessory. 345
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Symbols and messages for the instrument panel. Several examples are
steering assistance during collision provided below.
risks
A number of symbols and messages related
to steering assistance may be displayed in
Symbol Message Meaning
Collision avoidance When the function is activated, a message will appear to alert the driver.
Automatic intervention

Windscreen sensor The camera's ability to detect the lane in front of the vehicle is reduced.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

A text message can be erased by briefly press- Related information

ing the button in the center of the right- • Steering assistance at risk of collision
side steering wheel keypad. (p. 341)
If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒ • Steering assistance during collision risks
an authorized Volvo workshop is recom- limitations (p. 345)
mended.

346
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Rear Collision Warning*85 WARNING Rear Collision Warning*87

The Rear Collision Warning86
(RCW) function limitations
• The function is supplementary driver
can help the driver avoid rear-end collisions support intended to facilitate driving In some situations, it may be difficult for Rear
from vehicles approaching from behind. and help make it safer – it cannot han- Collision Warning (RCW) to warn the driver
The function can alert drivers of following vehi- dle all situations in all traffic, weather of a collision risk.
cles of the risk of a collision by rapidly flashing and road conditions. This may be the case if:
the turn signals. the vehicle approaching from the rear is
• The driver is advised to read all sec- •
If, at a speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), the tions in the Owner's Manual about this detected at a late stage
function detects that the vehicle is in danger function to learn of its limitations, • the vehicle approaching from the rear
of being hit from behind, the seat belt tension- which the driver must be aware of changes lanes at a late stage
ers may tension the front seat belts. The before using the function.
• a trailer, bicycle holder or similar is con-
Whiplash Protection System will also be acti-
• Driver support functions are not a sub- nected to the vehicle's electrical system -
vated in a collision.
stitute for the driver's attention and the function will then be automatically
Immediately before a collision from behind, judgment. The driver is always respon- deactivated.
the function may also activate the brakes in sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
order to reduce the forward acceleration of the in a safe manner, at the appropriate NOTE
vehicle during the collision. However, the speed, with an appropriate distance to
brakes will only be applied if your vehicle is other vehicles, and in accordance with In certain markets RCW does not warn
stationary. The brakes will be immediately current traffic rules and regulations. with the direction indicators due to local
released if the accelerator pedal is depressed. traffic regulations – in such cases, that part
of the function is deactivated.
The function is automatically activated each Related information
time the engine is started. • Driver support systems (p. 274)
• Rear Collision Warning* limitations NOTE
(p. 347) The function uses the vehicle's camera and
• Whiplash Protection System (p. 48) radar sensor, which has certain general
limitations.

85 Warning of collision from the rear.

This function is not available on all markets.
}}
86
87 Warning of collision from the rear.

* Option/accessory. 347
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Related information BLIS*

• Rear Collision Warning* (p. 347) The BLIS88 function is designed to help pro-
• Setting a warning distance for City Safety vide assistance in heavy traffic with several
(p. 330) lanes moving in the same direction by helping
Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386) the driver to detect the presence of vehicles
•
in the "blind spot" area behind and to the side
of the vehicle.

BLIS overview
Blind spot zone

Rapidly approaching vehicle zone

The system is designed to react to:
• vehicles passing your vehicle
Location of BLIS indicator light • vehicles that are rapidly approaching your
vehicle from behind.
BLIS is a driver support system designed to
alert the driver of: When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a
rapidly approaching vehicle in zone 2, an indi-
• vehicles in your "blind spot"
cator light will illuminate in the relevant rear-
• vehicles approaching rapidly in adjacent view mirror and glow steadily. If the driver
lanes. then uses the turn signal on the side in which
the warning has been given, the indicator light
will become brighter and begin flashing.
BLIS is active when your vehicle is traveling at
a speed over 10 km/h (6 mph).

88 Blind Spot Information

348 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

If a passing vehicle's speed is more than Related information Activating or deactivating BLIS
15 km/h (9 mph) faster than your vehicle, BLIS • Driver support systems (p. 274) The BLIS89 function can be activated or deac-
will not react. Activating or deactivating BLIS (p. 349) tivated.
•
BLIS limitations (p. 350) Activate or deactivate the
NOTE
•
function using this button in
• BLIS messages (p. 351) the center display's Function
The light illuminates on the side of the
vehicle where the system has detected the view.
vehicle. If the vehicle is passed on both
sides simultaneously, both lights come on.
• GREEN button indicator light – the func-
WARNING tion is activated.
• GRAY button indicator light – the function
• The function is supplementary driver
is deactivated.
support intended to facilitate driving
and help make it safer – it cannot han- If BLIS is activated when the engine is started,
dle all situations in all traffic, weather the indicator lights in the rearview mirrors will
and road conditions. flash once.
• The driver is advised to read all sec- If BLIS is deactivated when the engine is
tions in the Owner's Manual about this turned off, it will remain off the next time the
function to learn of its limitations, engine is started and the indicator lights will
which the driver must be aware of not illuminate.
before using the function.
Related information
• Driver support functions are not a sub-
• BLIS* (p. 348)
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgment. The driver is always respon- • BLIS limitations (p. 350)
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
in a safe manner, at the appropriate
speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.

89 Blind Spot Information

* Option/accessory. 349
 DRIVER SUPPORT

BLIS limitations WARNING

BLIS90 functionality may be reduced in cer-
• BLIS does not work in sharp curves.
tain situations.
• BLIS does not work when the vehicle
is being reversed.

NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's radar sen-
sors, which have certain general limita-
tions.

Related information
• BLIS* (p. 348)
• Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386)
Keep the marked area clean (on both the left and
right sides of the vehicle)91.
Examples of limitations:
• Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
may reduce functionality and prevent the
system from providing warnings.
• The BLIS function is automatically deacti-
vated if a trailer, bicycle holder or similar is
connected to the vehicle's electrical sys-
tem.
• For BLIS to function effectively, bicycle
holders, luggage racks or similar should
not be mounted on the vehicle's towbar.

90 Blind Spot Information

91 Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.

350 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

BLIS messages
A number of messages related to BLIS92 may
be displayed in the instrument panel. Several
examples are provided below.
Message Meaning
Blind spot sensor The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA.
Service required
Blind spot system off BLIS and CTA B have been deactivated because a trailer has been connected to the vehicle's electrical system.
Trailer attached
A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
B Cross Traffic Alert*

A text message can be erased by briefly press-

ing the button in the center of the right-
side steering wheel keypad.
If a message cannot be erased, contact a
workshopA.

Related information
• BLIS* (p. 348)
• Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 356)

92 Blind Spot Information

* Option/accessory. 351
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Driver Alert Control with the driver's movements of the steering WARNING
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function is wheel.
Driver Alert Control must not be used to
designed to help alert the driver to erratic extend a period of driving. The driver
behavior, e.g. if the driver is distracted or should plan in breaks at regular intervals
showing signs of fatigue. and make sure they are well rested.
The objective of the function is to detect
slowly deteriorating driving behavior and is
primarily intended to be used on major roads. WARNING
The function is not intended for use in city traf- An alarm from Driver Alert Control should
fic. be taken very seriously since a sleepy driver
is often not aware of their own condition.
DAC is activated when the vehicle's speed
exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph) and remains If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued:
active as long as speeds are above 60 km/h • Stop the vehicle safely as soon as pos-
(37 mph). sible and rest.
The vehicle is moving erratically in the lane.
Studies have shown that it is just as dan-
gerous to drive while tired as it is to drive
If driving behavior becomes
under the influence of alcohol or other
considerably erratic, the stimulants.
driver will be alerted by this
symbol in the instrument
panel, an audible signal and
the message Time for a
break.
If the vehicle is equipped with Sensus
Navigation* and the Rest Stop Guidance
function is activated, suggestions will also be
Driver Alert Control detects the vehicle's position in provided for suitable places to take a break.
the traffic lane. The warning will be repeated after a short time
A camera monitors the traffic lane's marker if driving behavior does not improve.
lines and compares the direction of the road

352 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING Activating or deactivating Driver Selecting guidance to a rest area if

Alert Control the Driver Alert Control warning
• The function is supplementary driver has been given
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can
support intended to facilitate driving
be activated or deactivated. In vehicles equipped with Sensus
and help make it safer – it cannot han-
1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top Navigation*, the driver can activate a guide
dle all situations in all traffic, weather
view. that can automatically suggest a suitable rest
and road conditions.
stop if the Driver Alert Control (DAC) warning
• The driver is advised to read all sec- 2. Select My Car IntelliSafe Driver is given.
tions in the Owner's Manual about this Alert. The Rest Stop Guidance function can be
function to learn of its limitations, 3. Select/deselect Alertness Warning to switched on or off.
which the driver must be aware of activate/deactivate the function.
before using the function. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top
Related information view.
• Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and • Driver Alert Control (p. 352) 2. Select My Car IntelliSafe Driver
judgment. The driver is always respon- • Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 354) Alert.
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
3. Select/deselect Rest Stop Guidance to
in a safe manner, at the appropriate
activate/deactivate the function.
speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with Related information
current traffic rules and regulations. • Driver Alert Control (p. 352)
• Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 354)
Related information
• Driver support systems (p. 274)
• Activating or deactivating Driver Alert
Control (p. 353)
• Selecting guidance to a rest area if the
Driver Alert Control warning has been
given (p. 353)
• Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 354)

* Option/accessory. 353
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Driver Alert Control limitations Distance Alert*93 vehicles ahead moving in the same direction
Driver Alert Control (DAC) functionality may The Distance Alert function can help the as your vehicle. No distance information is
be reduced in certain situations. driver become aware if the time interval to provided for oncoming, slow-moving or sta-
In certain situations, the system may provide a the vehicle in front is too short. The vehicle tionary vehicles.
warning even if it has not detected a change in must be equipped with a head-up display* in
driving behavior, e.g.: order to display Distance Alert. NOTE
• in strong crosswinds Visual warnings on the windshield may be
• on grooved road surfaces. difficult to notice in cases of strong sun-
light, reflections, extreme light contrasts,
or if the driver is wearing sunglasses or is
WARNING not looking straight ahead.
In certain cases, driving behavior might not
be affected despite the driver's fatigue –
when using the Pilot Assist* function – NOTE
resulting in the driver not getting a warning
from DAC. Distance Alert is deactivated while Adap-
tive Cruise Control* or Pilot Assist* is
It is therefore very important to always active.
stop and take a break at the slightest sign
of fatigue, regardless of whether the func- Symbol for Distance Alert on the windshield with
tion has issued a warning or not. head-up display WARNING
In vehicles equipped with a head-up display, a Distance Alert only reacts of the time inter-
NOTE symbol will be displayed on the windshield as val to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the
long as the time interval to the vehicle ahead preset value – vehicle speed is not affec-
The function uses the vehicle's camera and ted.
is shorter than the set time interval. However,
radar sensor, which has certain general
the Show Driver Support function must be
limitations.
activated under Settings in the vehicle's menu
system.
Related information
Distance Alert is active at speeds
• Driver Alert Control (p. 352)
above 30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts for
• Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386)

93 Distance Alert

354 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING Activating or deactivating Distance Distance Alert limitations95

Alert94 Distance Alert functionality may be reduced
• The function is supplementary driver
Distance Alert can be turned off. The function in certain situations. The function is only
support intended to facilitate driving
is only available in vehicles that can display available in vehicles that can display informa-
and help make it safer – it cannot han-
information on the windshield with a head-up tion on the windshield with a head-up dis-
dle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions. display*. play*.
Activate or deactivate the WARNING
• The driver is advised to read all sec- function using this button in
tions in the Owner's Manual about this the center display's Function • Detection ability may be affected by
function to learn of its limitations, view. vehicle size, e.g. motorcycles, which
which the driver must be aware of can cause the warning light to come on
before using the function. at a shorter time interval than that set
• Driver support functions are not a sub- or cause the warning to be temporarily
stitute for the driver's attention and • GREEN button indicator light – the func- absent.
judgment. The driver is always respon- tion is activated. Very high speeds can cause the light to
•
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven • GRAY button indicator light – the function come on at a shorter time interval than
in a safe manner, at the appropriate is deactivated. that set due to limitations in the range
speed, with an appropriate distance to Distance Alert is automatically activated each of the radar unit.
other vehicles, and in accordance with time the engine is started.
current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information NOTE
Related information • Distance Alert* (p. 354) The function uses the vehicle's camera and
• Activating or deactivating Distance Alert • Distance Alert limitations (p. 355) radar sensor, which has certain general
(p. 355) limitations.
• Distance Alert limitations (p. 355)
Setting time interval to the vehicle ahead
Related information
• Distance Alert* (p. 354)
(p. 318) •
• Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386)
• Collision risk warning from driver support
(p. 315) • Head-up display* (p. 146)
• Head-up display* (p. 146)

* Option/accessory. 355
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Cross Traffic Alert*96 The function is only active when the vehicle is If the driver does not pay attention to the
Cross Traffic Alert(CTA) is a supplementary moving backward or reverse gear is engaged. warning from the function and a collision is
unavoidable, the auto brake function will
driver support system to BLIS97 that is If the function detects that something is
intervene to stop the vehicle and a text will be
intended to help the driver detect vehicles approaching your vehicle from the side:
shown on the instrument panel to explain why
crossing behind the vehicle while backing up.
• an audible signal will sound from either the vehicle was braked.
The auto-brake subfunction can help the the left or right speaker, depending on
driver stop the car if there is a risk of collision which side of your vehicle the object is WARNING
with an unobserved vehicle. approaching from.
• The function is supplementary driver
• an icon will illuminate in the Park Assist
support intended to facilitate driving
System graphic on the screen. and help make it safer – it cannot han-
• an icon will appear in the Park Assist Cam- dle all situations in all traffic, weather
era's Top view. and road conditions.
• The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual about this
function to learn of its limitations,
which the driver must be aware of
before using the function.
• Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
Examples of areas in which Cross Traffic Alert can judgment. The driver is always respon-
help the driver detect obstacles while backing up.
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
The function is primarily designed to detect in a safe manner, at the appropriate
vehicles, but in certain cases can also detect speed, with an appropriate distance to
pedestrians or smaller objects such as bicy- other vehicles, and in accordance with
cles. Illuminated Cross Traffic Alert icon in the Park current traffic rules and regulations.
Assist System graphic on the screen.

94 Distance Alert
95 Distance Alert
96 Warning for crossing traffic when the vehicle is backing up.
97 Blind Spot Information

356 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information Activating or deactivating Cross Cross Traffic Alert*99 limitations

• Driver support systems (p. 274) Traffic Alert*98 The Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) function with
• Activating or deactivating Cross Traffic The driver can choose to deactivate the Cross auto brake may have limited functionality in
Alert* (p. 357) Traffic Alert (CTA) function. certain situations. Auto-brake is active at
Cross Traffic Alert* limitations (p. 357) Activate or deactivate the speeds under 15 km/h (9.3 mph).
•
function using this button in WARNING
• Cross Traffic Alert* messages (p. 359) the center display's Function
• BLIS* (p. 348) view. The auto-brake sub-function can only
detect and apply the brakes for other mov-
• Park Assist* (p. 360) ing vehicles – not for e.g. stationary obsta-
cles, cyclists or pedestrians.
• GREEN button indicator light – the func-
tion is activated. The function has certain limitations – the sen-
GRAY button indicator light – the function sors, for example, cannot "see" through other
•
is deactivated. parked vehicles or objects blocking the vehi-
cle.
The function is automatically activated each
time the engine is started. Below are a few examples of situations in
which the function's field of vision may be ini-
Related information tially limited and approaching vehicles may
• Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 356) therefore not be detected until they are very
• Cross Traffic Alert* limitations (p. 357) close to your vehicle:

• Cross Traffic Alert* messages (p. 359)

Warning for crossing traffic when the vehicle is backing up.

}}
98
99 Warning for crossing traffic when the vehicle is backing up.

* Option/accessory. 357
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| changes in relation to the obstructing vehicle/

object and its blind zone is reduced.
Examples of further limitations
• The auto brake subfunction only detects
vehicles in motion and may therefore not
"see" and brake for e.g. stationary obsta-
cles, a cyclists or a pedestrian.
• Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
may reduce functionality and prevent the
system from providing warnings.
• CTA is automatically deactivated if a
The vehicle is parked very far into a parking space. trailer, bicycle holder or similar is con-
nected to the vehicle's electrical system.
• For CTA to function effectively, bicycle
holders, luggage racks or similar should
not be mounted on the vehicle's towbar.

NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's radar sen-
sors, which have certain general limita-
tions.

Related information
In a diagonal parking space, Cross Traffic Alert may • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 356)
be completely "blind" on one side of your vehicle. Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386)
•
Blind zone.

The function's field of vision.

However, as you back your vehicle slowly out
of a parking space, CTA's field of vision

358 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Cross Traffic Alert*100 messages instrument panel. Several examples are provi-
A number of messages related to Cross ded below.
Traffic Alert (CTA) may be displayed in the
Message Meaning
Blind spot sensor The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA.
Service required
Blind spot system off BLISB and CTA have been deactivated because a trailer has been connected to the vehicle's electrical system.
Trailer attached
A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
B Blind Spot Information System

A text message can be erased by briefly press-

ing the button in the center of the right-
side steering wheel keypad.
If a message cannot be erased, contact a
workshopA.

Related information
• Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 356)
• BLIS* (p. 348)
• Cross Traffic Alert* limitations (p. 357)

100Warning for crossing traffic when the vehicle is backing up.

* Option/accessory. 359
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist* The audible signals will also speed up the NOTE
The Park Assist function (PAS101)
uses sen- closer the obstacle is to the vehicle. The vol-
ume of the audio system will be automatically Besides in the sector closest to the vehicle
sors to help the driver when maneuvering in
lowered. symbol, audible warnings are only provided
tight spaces by indicating distances to obsta-
for objects located directly in the vehicle's
cles using audible signals and graphics in the Audible signals for obstacles in front and to path.
center display. the sides of the vehicle are active when the
vehicle is moving but will cease after the vehi-
cle has been stationary for approx. 2 seconds. WARNING
Audible signals for obstacles behind the vehi-
• The function is supplementary driver
cle will remain active even when the vehicle is
support intended to facilitate driving
stationary.
and help make it safer – it cannot han-
If a detected obstacle is within approx. 30 cm dle all situations in all traffic, weather
(1 ft) from the front or rear of the vehicle, the and road conditions.
tone will become constant and the active sen- • The driver is advised to read all sec-
sor field closest to the vehicle symbol will be tions in the Owner's Manual about this
filled in. function to learn of its limitations,
At distances within approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) which the driver must be aware of
Display view showing obstacle zones and sensor from an obstacle to the sides of the vehicle, an before using the function.
sectors. rapid pulsing signal will be given and the • Driver support functions are not a sub-
The center display shows an overview of the active sector fields will change color from stitute for the driver's attention and
vehicle in relation to objects that have been ORANGE to RED. judgment. The driver is always respon-
detected. The volume of the Park Assist audible signals sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
can be adjusted while the signal is being given in a safe manner, at the appropriate
The marked sector indicates where the obsta- speed, with an appropriate distance to
cle is located. The closer the vehicle symbol is using the >II knob or in the center display's
Top view under Settings. other vehicles, and in accordance with
to a marked sector forward/rearward, the current traffic rules and regulations.
closer the detected obstacle is to your vehicle.
The side sectors change color as the distance
between the vehicle and an object decreases.

101 Park Assist System

360 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information Park Assist front, rear and sides* NOTE

• Driver support systems (p. 274) Park Assist (PAS102) behaves differently
The Park Assist system is deactivated
• Park Assist front, rear and sides* (p. 361) depending on which part of the vehicle is
when the parking brake is used or when P
Activating or deactivating Park Assist* approaching an obstacle.
• is selected on vehicles with automatic
(p. 362) Front camera transmission.
• Park Assist symbols and messages
(p. 364)
CAUTION
• Park Assist limitations (p. 363)
When installing auxiliary lights: Make sure
these do not obscure the sensors – the
auxiliary lights could be perceived as an
obstacle.

Back

The warning signal has a continuous tone when the

obstacle is less than approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from the
vehicle.
The Park Assist system's front sensors are
automatically activated when the engine is
started. They are active at speeds
below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The distance monitored extends
approx. 80 cm (2.5 ft) in front of the vehicle.
The warning signal has a continuous tone when the
obstacle is less than approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from the
vehicle.

102 Park Assist System }}

* Option/accessory. 361
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| The rear sensors will be activated if the vehicle Side sensors Activating or deactivating Park
begins rolling backward or if reverse gear is Assist*
engaged. The Park Assist function (PAS103) can be acti-
The distance monitored extends vated or deactivated.
approx. 1.5 meters (5 ft) behind the vehicle. Park Assist's front and side sensors are auto-
matically activated when the engine is started.
The Park Assist system's rear sensors will be
The rear sensors are activated if the vehicle is
automatically deactivated if the vehicle is
moving backward or reverse gear is engaged.
backing up with a trailer connected to the
vehicle's electrical system. Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
NOTE the center display's Function
view.
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike
carrier on the trailer hitch – without Volvo The warning signal will begin pulsating rapidly when
the obstacle is less than approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) from
original trailer cables – the Parking Assist the vehicle.
system may have to be turned off manually • GREEN button indicator light – the func-
to prevent the sensors from reacting to Park Assist's side sensors are automatically tion is activated.
these. activated when the engine is started. They are
• GRAY button indicator light – the function
active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph).
is deactivated.
The distance monitored is approx. 25 cm In vehicles equipped with Park Assist Cam-
(0.8 ft) out from the sides. era*, Park Assist can also be activated or deac-
The detection area of the side sensors increa- tivated from the relevant camera view.
ses significantly, however, when the steering
angle of the front wheel increases and Related information
depending on the position of the steering • Park Assist* (p. 360)
wheel, obstacles up to approx. 90 cm (3 ft) • Park Assist limitations (p. 363)
diagonally behind or in front of the vehicle can
be detected.

Related information
• Park Assist* (p. 360)
• Park Assist sensor field (p. 370)

362 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist limitations WARNING CAUTION

Park Assist (PAS104) may not be able to Be extra cautious when In some circumstances, the Park Assist
detect all conditions in all situations and func- reversing if this symbol is System may produce false warnings due to
tionality may therefore be limited in certain shown when a trailer, bike external sound sources with the same
cases. carrier or similar is ultrasonic frequencies as those the system
The driver should be aware of the following attached and electrically
connected to the vehicle. works with.
limitations for Park Assist:
The symbol indicates that Examples of such sources are horns, wet
WARNING the rear parking assist sensors are deacti- tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, exhaust
vated and will not warn of any obstacles. noise from motorcycles, etc.
• The parking sensors have dead/blind
spots where objects cannot be
detected. CAUTION NOTE
• Pay particular attention to people and Objects such as chains, thin and glossy When a trailer hitch is configured with the
animals near the vehicle. poles or low obstacles may end up in the vehicle electrical system, the trailer hitch
• Bear in mind that the front end of the "signal shadow" and then go temporarily protrusion is included when the function
vehicle may swing out towards oncom- undetected by the sensors – the pulsating measures the distance to objects behind
ing traffic during the parking maneuver. tone may then unexpectedly stop instead the vehicle.
of becoming a constant tone as expected.
The sensors cannot detect high objects, Related information
such as protruding ramps. • Park Assist* (p. 360)
• In such situations, pay extra attention
and maneuver/drive the vehicle very
slowly or stop the current parking
maneuver – there may be a high risk of
damage to the vehicle or other objects
since information from the sensors is
not always reliable in such situations.

103Park Assist System

104 Park Assist System

* Option/accessory. 363
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist symbols and messages instrument panel and/or the center display.
Symbols and messages for the Park Assist Several examples are provided below.
system (PAS105) may be displayed in the
Symbol Message Meaning
The rear Park Assist sensors are turned off and no acoustic warnings for obstacles/
objects will be provided.

Park Assist System One or more of the sensors are blocked. Check and clean/remove the obstacle as soon as
possible.
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
Park Assist System The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA.
Unavailable Service required
A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

A text message can be erased by briefly press-

ing the button in the center of the right-
side steering wheel keypad.
If a message cannot be erased, contact a
workshopA.

Related information
• Park Assist* (p. 360)
• Park Assist limitations (p. 363)

105 Park Assist System

364 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist Camera* Lines - activate/deactivate trajectory lines

The Park Assist Camera (PAC106)
can assist Towbar* - activate/deactivate trajectory
the driver when maneuvering in tight spaces
lines for towbar*109
by indicating obstacles using the camera
screen and graphics in the center display. CTA* - activate/deactivate Cross Traffic
The Park Assist Camera is a support function Alert
that is automatically activated when reverse Objects/obstacles may be closer to the vehicle
gear is engaged. It can also be started man- than they appear on the display.
ually from the center display.
WARNING
• The parking sensors have dead/blind
spots where objects cannot be
detected.
• Pay particular attention to people and
animals near the vehicle.
• Bear in mind that the front end of the
vehicle may swing out towards oncom-
ing traffic during the parking maneuver.

Example camera view.

Zoom107 - zoom in/out
360° view* - activate/deactivate all cam-
eras
PAS108 – activates/deactivates Park
Assist system sensors

106Park Assist Camera

107 The trajectory lines will not be displayed when zooming in.
108Park Assist System
109Not available for all models and markets.
}}

* Option/accessory. 365
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| WARNING • Park Assist Camera symbols and mes- Location and field of vision of Park
sages (p. 373) Assist Cameras*
• The function is supplementary driver
• Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386) The Park Assist Cameras (PAC110) can display
support intended to facilitate driving
and help make it safer – it cannot han- • Park Assist* (p. 360) a 360° panoramic view as well as separate
dle all situations in all traffic, weather views for each of the four cameras: rear,
• Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 356)
and road conditions. front, left and right.

• The driver is advised to read all sec-

tions in the Owner's Manual about this
function to learn of its limitations,
which the driver must be aware of
before using the function.
• Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgment. The driver is always respon-
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
in a safe manner, at the appropriate
speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.

Related information
• Driver support systems (p. 274)
• Location and field of vision of Park Assist
Cameras* (p. 366)
• Park Assist Camera trajectory lines*
(p. 368)
• Park Assist sensor field (p. 370)
• Activating Park Assist Camera (p. 371)

110 Park Assist Camera

366 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

360° view* If the vehicle is equipped with Park Assist Front camera
System*, the distance to detected obstacles
will be illustrated by fields in different colors.
The cameras can be activated automatically or
manually.
Back

The location of the cameras and their approximate The front Park Assist Camera is located in the grille.
fields of vision.
The front camera can be useful when pulling
The 360° view function activates all Park out from areas with limited visibility, such as
Assist Cameras and all four sides of the vehi- when pulling out of a garage. The front camera
cle are shown in the center display at once to is active at speeds up to 25 km/h (16 mph)
help the driver see what is around the vehicle and is automatically turned off when the vehi-
The rear camera is located above the license plate.
while maneuvering at low speeds. cle exceeds this speed.
The rear camera shows a wide area behind the
From the 360° view, each camera view can If the vehicle does not reach a speed of
vehicle. On certain models, part of the bumper
be activated separately: 50 km/h (30 mph) and speed falls below
and the towbar (if installed) may be visible.
• Tap the screen to select the camera's field 22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute after the
Objects on the center display may appear to front camera turns off, the camera will be
of vision, e.g. in the area in front/above the
be leaning slightly. This is normal. reactivated.
front camera.
The active cameras will be
indicated by a camera symbol
on the vehicle symbol in the
center display.

}}

* Option/accessory. 367
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Side cameras Park Assist Camera trajectory based on the current position of the steering
lines* wheel and can help simplify parallel parking,
The Park Assist Cameras (PAC111) use trajec- backing into tight spaces or attaching a trailer.
tory lines and fields on the screen to indicate The lines on the screen are projected as if they
the vehicle's position in relation to its imme- were painted lines on the ground behind the
diate surroundings. vehicle and are directly affected by the way in
which the steering wheel is turned. This
makes it possible for the driver to see path the
vehicle will take, even if he/she turns the
steering wheel.
These lines also indicate the outermost limits
that any object (towbar, rearview mirrors, cor-
The side cameras are located in the rearview mirrors. ners of the body, etc.) extends out from the
vehicle.
The side cameras can show views along each
side of the vehicle.
NOTE
Related information • When reversing with a trailer that is
• Park Assist Camera* (p. 365) not electrically connected to the vehi-
• Activating Park Assist Camera (p. 371) cle, the screen guide lines show the
path the vehicle will take – not the
• Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386)
trailer.
• The screen does not show guide lines
when a trailer is electrically connected
to the vehicle's electrical system.
• Guide lines are not shown when zoom-
Example of trajectory lines ing in.
The trajectory lines show the anticipated tra-
jectory for the vehicle's outermost dimensions

111 Park Assist Camera

368 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

CAUTION Trajectory lines in 360° view* Trajectory lines for a towbar*

• Bear in mind that when the rearward

camera view is selected, the screen
only shows the area behind the vehicle
– pay attention to the sides and front
of the vehicle when steering while
reversing.
• The same applies to the reverse – pay
attention to what is happening with
the rear parts of the vehicle when the
front camera view is selected.
• Note that the guide lines show the
shortest path – pay extra attention to 360° view with trajectory lines
ensure that the vehicle sides do not In the 360° view, trajectory lines are shown
come in contact with/travel over any- behind, in front of, or to the sides of the vehi-
thing when steering while driving for- cle, depending on the direction of travel.
ward or that the vehicle front moves
toward/over anything when steering • When driving forward: Front lines
while reversing. • When backing up: Side lines and rear lines
When the front or rear camera is selected, the
trajectory lines will be shown regardless of the Towbar with trajectory line
vehicle's direction of travel.
Towbar - activate trajectory lines for tow-
With a side camera selected, the trajectory bar.
lines will only be shown if the vehicle is back-
Zoom - zoom in/out.
ing up.
To use the camera when hitching a trailer:

}}

* Option/accessory. 369
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| 1. Tap Towbar (1). Park Assist sensor field The front and rear fields change colors (from
> The trajectory line for the towbar's If the vehicle is equipped with Park Assist YELLOW to ORANGE to RED) as the vehicle
anticipated path toward the vehicle will (PAS112), distances will be shown in the Park moves closer to an obstacle.
appear and the vehicle's trajectory lines Assist Camera's (PAC113) 360° view with col- Field color Distance in meters
will disappear. ored fields for each sensor that has detected rearward (feet)
Trajectory lines cannot be displayed for an obstacle.
Front and rear sensors Yellow 0.6-1.5 (2.0-4.9)
both the vehicle and the towbar at the
same time. Orange 0.3–0.6 (1.0–2.0)
2. Tap Zoom (2) for a close-up view for more Red 0-0.3 (0-1.0)
precise maneuvering.
> The camera will zoom in.
Field color for- Distance in meters
Related information ward (feet)
• Park Assist Camera* (p. 365)
Yellow 0.6–0.8 (2.0–2.6)
• Location and field of vision of Park Assist
Cameras* (p. 366) Orange 0.3–0.6 (1.0–2.0)
• Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386) Red 0-0.3 (0-1.0)

When the sensor field color is red, the audible

pulsing sounds will change to a continuous
tone.

The screen can display colored sensor fields on the

vehicle symbol.

112 Park Assist System

113 Park Assist Camera

370 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Side sensor fields Right-side rear sensor field Activating Park Assist Camera
Warning signals vary depending on the vehi- The Park Assist Camera (PAC114) is automati-
cle's intended direction of travel. Depending Obstacle sector in the vehicle's intended
direction of travel rearward – varies cally activated when reverse gear is engaged
on the steering wheel position, warnings may or can be started manually using one of the
be given for obstacles diagonally in front of or according to steering wheel position.
center display's function buttons.
behind the vehicle, not only directly behind the
The color of the side field changes as the vehi-
vehicle. Camera view when backing up
cle moves closer to the object – from YEL-
When reverse gear is engaged, the screen
LOW to RED.
shows the rear view115.
Side field Distance in meters
color (feet) Camera view when manually
activating the camera
Yellow 0.25–0.9 (0.8–3.0) Activate the Park Assist Cam-
Red 0–0.25 (0–0.8) era using this button in the
center display's Function
view.
When the sensor field is RED, the audible
pulsing signal will become more rapid. The screen will first show the
most recently used camera
Related information view. However, each time the engine is
Parking sensor sectors where obstacles can be • Park Assist* (p. 360) started, the previous side view will be replaced
detected. • Park Assist Camera* (p. 365) by the 360° view and a previously displayed
Left-side front sensor field zoomed-in rear view will be replaced by the
• Location and field of vision of Park Assist
regular rear view.
Cameras* (p. 366)
Obstacle sector in the vehicle's intended
Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386) • GREEN button indicator light – the func-
direction of travel forward – varies accord- •
tion is activated.
ing to steering wheel position
• GRAY button indicator light – the function
Sector with RED field color and rapidly
is deactivated.
pulsing tone

114 Park Assist Camera

115 In Canada, it is also possible to choose the 360° view. For the US, rear view is standard and cannot be changed. }}

* Option/accessory. 371
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Automatically deactivating the camera

Front view switches off when the vehicle's
speed reaches 25 km/h (16 mph) to help avoid
distracting the driver. It will be automatically
reactivated if the vehicle's speed falls below
22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute as long as
the vehicle's speed has not exceeded 50 km/h
(31 mph).
Other camera views switch off at 15 km/h
(9 mph) and are not reactivated.

Related information
• Park Assist Camera* (p. 365)
• Park Assist limitations (p. 363)
• Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386)

372 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist Camera symbols and instrument panel and/or the center display.
messages Several examples are provided below.
Symbols and messages for the Park Assist
Camera (PAC116) may be displayed in the
Symbol Message Meaning
The rear Park Assist sensors are turned off and no acoustic warnings or field markings for
obstacles/objects will be provided.

The camera is not functioning properly.

Park Assist System One or more of the sensors are blocked. Check and clean/remove the obstacle as soon as
possible.
Sensors blocked, cleaning nee-
ded
Park Assist System The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA.
Unavailable Service required
A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

116 Park Assist Camera }}

373
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| A text message can be erased by briefly press-

ing the button in the center of the right-
side steering wheel keypad.
If a message cannot be erased, contact a
workshopA.

Related information
• Park Assist Camera* (p. 365)
• Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386)

374 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist Pilot* WARNING • Park Assist Pilot* messages (p. 382)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP117)
can help the driver
• The function is supplementary driver
maneuver the vehicle when parking. The
support intended to facilitate driving
function can also assist with steering when
and help make it safer – it cannot han-
pulling out from a parallel parking space.
dle all situations in all traffic, weather
The function first checks whether there is suf-
and road conditions.
ficient space and then helps the driver steer
the vehicle into the space. • The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual about this
The center display uses symbols, graphics and function to learn of its limitations,
messages to inform the driver of what steps which the driver must be aware of
need to be taken and when. before using the function.
• Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgment. The driver is always respon-
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
in a safe manner, at the appropriate
speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.

Related information
• Driver support systems (p. 274)
• Types of parking with Park Assist Pilot*
(p. 376)
• Using Park Assist Pilot* (p. 377)
• Leaving a parallel parking space with Park
Assist Pilot* (p. 379)
• Park Assist Pilot* limitations (p. 380)

117 Park Assist Pilot

* Option/accessory. 375
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Types of parking with Park Assist Perpendicular parking Related information

Pilot* • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 375)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP118) can be used for • Leaving a parallel parking space with Park
both parallel and perpendicular parking. Assist Pilot* (p. 379)
Parallel parking

Perpendicular parking overview.

The function helps park the vehicle using the
following steps:
1. The system searches for and measures
Overview of parallel parking.
potential parking spaces.
The function helps park the vehicle using the 2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing
following steps: into the space and its position is adjusted
1. The system searches for and measures by driving forward/backward.
potential parking spaces.
2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing NOTE
into the parking space. Leaving a parking space with the Park Out
3. The vehicle's position in the space is function should only be used in connection
adjusted by driving forward/backward. with parallel parking – it does not work for
The Park Out function can also help the driver perpendicular parking.
pull out of parking spaces.

118 Park Assist Pilot

376 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Using Park Assist Pilot* NOTE

Park Assist Pilot (PAP119) helps the driver
The distance between the vehicle and
park using three different steps. The function
parking spots should be 0.5–1.5 meters
can also help the driver pull out of a parking
(1.6–5.0 ft) when the function is looking
space.
for parking.
The function measures the space and steers
the vehicle. The driver's role is to:
Parking with Park Assist Pilot
• keep close watch of the area around the
The function helps park the vehicle using the
vehicle
following steps:
• follow the instructions on the center dis-
1. The system searches for and measures
play
potential parking spaces.
• change gears (reverse/forward) – an audi- Parallel parking search overview.
2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing
ble signal indicates when the driver needs
into the parking space.
to change gears
3. The vehicle is positioned in the parking
• regulating and maintaining a safe speed
space (the driver may be prompted to shift
• applying the brakes and stopping the vehi- gears and apply the brakes).
cle.
Searching and measuring potential parking
Information about the actions required by the spots
driver are provided in the center display using
The function can be activated
symbols, graphics and/or text.
in the center display's Func-
The function can be activated if the following tion view.
criteria have been met after the engine is
It can also be accessed from
started:
the camera views.
Perpendicular parking search overview.
• No trailer is hitched to the vehicle
• GREEN button indicator light – the func- The vehicle's speed may not exceed 30 km/h
• Your vehicle's speed is lower than
tion is activated. (20 mph) when parallel parking or 20 km/h
30 km/h (20 mph).
(12 mph) when perpendicular parking.
• GRAY button indicator light – the function
is deactivated.

119 Park Assist Pilot }}

* Option/accessory. 377
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| 1. Tap Park In in Function view or in Camera Backing into a parking space 2. Back up slowly and carefully without
view. touching the steering wheel and do not
> The function will search for a potential exceed a speed of 7 km/h (4 mph).
parking space and measure it to deter- 3. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when
mine if it is big enough. instructed to do so by a graphic and mes-
2. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when a sage in the center display.
graphic and message in the center display
indicate that a suitable parking space has NOTE
been found. Keep your hands away from the steer-
•
> A pop-up window will appear. ing wheel when the function is acti-
3. Select Parallel parking or Perpendicular vated.
parking and engage reverse gear. • Make sure that the steering wheel is
Backing into a parallel parking spot overview. not hindered in any way and can rotate
NOTE freely.
The function searches for space for park- • To achieve the best results – wait until
ing, shows instructions and guides the the steering wheel is finished turning
vehicle on its passenger side. But, if so before beginning to drive forward/in
desired the vehicle can be parked on the reverse.
driver's side of the street:
• Activate the turn signals on the driver's
side – the system will then search for
space to park on that side of the vehi-
cle instead.

Backing into a perpendicular parking spot overview.

1. Make sure the path behind your vehicle is
clear and engage reverse gear.

378
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Positioning the vehicle in the parking space 1. Move the gear selector to the gear instruc- Leaving a parallel parking space
ted by the system. Wait until the steering with Park Assist Pilot*
wheel turns and then drive slowly forward. The Park Out function can help the driver to
2. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when pull out of a parking space when the vehicle
instructed to do so by a graphic and mes- is parallel-parked.
sage in the center display. NOTE
3. Engage reverse gear and back up slowly. Leaving a parking space with the Park Out
4. Be prepared to apply the brakes when function should only be used in connection
instructed to do so by a graphic and mes- with parallel parking – it does not work for
sage in the center display. perpendicular parking.
The function will switch off automatically and
a graphic and message will appear to indicate The Park Out function is acti-
Parallel parking positioning overview. vated in the center display's
that parking has been completed. Adjust-
ments can always be made be the driver after- Function view or in Camera
ward. Only the driver can determine when the view.
vehicle is correctly parked.

CAUTION • GREEN button indicator light – the func-

The warning distance is shorter when the tion is activated.
sensors are used by Park Assist Pilot • GRAY button indicator light – the function
(PAP120) compared to when they are used is deactivated.
by the Parking Assist system. 1. Tap Park Out in Function view or in Cam-
era view.
Related information 2. Move the gear selector to the suitable
Perpendicular parking positioning overview. • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 375) position (e.g. D or R) for the direction in
• Park Assist Pilot* limitations (p. 380) which you will be pulling out of the park-
ing space.

120 Park Assist Pilot }}

* Option/accessory. 379
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| 3. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when Park Assist Pilot* limitations The parking sequence is cancelled
instructed to do so by a graphic and mes- Park Assist Pilot (PAP121) may not be able to A parking sequence will be cancelled if:
sage in the center display. Follow the detect all conditions in all situations and func- • the driver moves the steering wheel
instructions in the same way as for the tionality may therefore be limited.
parking procedure. • the vehicle's speed exceeds 7 km/h
The driver should be aware of the following
(4 mph)
Note that the steering wheel can "spring" limitations for Park Assist Pilot.
back when the procedure is completed and • the driver taps Cancel in the center dis-
the driver may need to turn the steering wheel play
WARNING
back to the maximum position in order to pull • when the anti-lock brakes or the Elec-
• The parking sensors have dead/blind
out of the parking space. tronic stability control are engaged - e.g.
spots where objects cannot be
If the function determines that the driver can when a wheel loses grip on a slippery road
detected.
pull out of the parking space without any extra • when speed-dependent power steering
• Pay particular attention to people and
maneuvers, the function will be deactivated, wheel resistance is working at reduced
animals near the vehicle.
even if it seems as though the vehicle is not power – e.g. during cooling due to over-
completely out of the parking space. • Bear in mind that the front end of the heating
vehicle may swing out towards oncom-
A message in the center display will explain
Related information ing traffic during the parking maneuver.
why the parking sequence was cancelled.
• Park Assist Pilot* (p. 375)
• Park Assist Pilot* limitations (p. 380) CAUTION CAUTION
Objects situated higher than the detection Under certain circumstances, the function
area of the sensors are not included when may not be able to find parking spaces –
the parking maneuver is calculated, which one reason may be that the sensors are
could cause the function to swing into the disrupted by external sound sources that
parking space too early. Such parking emit the same ultrasonic frequencies that
spaces should be avoided for this reason. the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,
exhaust noise from motorcycles, etc.

121 Park Assist Pilot

380 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

NOTE • PAP may not suggest parking spaces on

narrow streets if it does not detect suffi-
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors cient space for maneuvering the vehicle.
reduce their function and can make meas-
urement impossible. • Use approved tires122 inflated to the cor-
rect tire pressure because this affects the
function's ability to provide parking assis-
Driver responsibility tance.
The driver should keep in mind that the func-
• The function is based on the way the vehi-
tion is a parking aid ‒ not an infallible fully
cles are parked behind and in front of your
automatic system. The driver must always be
parking space. If they are, for example,
prepared to take control and cancel a parking
parked too close to the curb, there is a risk
sequence if necessary.
that your vehicle's tires or wheel rims
There are a number of things to keep in mind could be damaged by the curb during the
when parking, including: parking procedure.
• The driver is always responsible for deter- • Perpendicular parking spaces may not be
mining if the space suggested by the func- detected or may be suggested unneces-
tion is suitable for parking. sarily if a parked vehicle is sticking out
more than other parked vehicles.
• Do not use the function when using snow
chains or a temporary spare tire. • The function is intended to provide park-
ing assistance on straight streets, not sec-
• Do not use the function if there are any
tions of street with sharp curves or bends.
objects protruding from the vehicle.
Always make sure that your vehicle is par-
• Heavy rain or snowfall may inhibit PAP's allel to relevant parking spaces when the
ability to accurately measure a parking function is measuring the parking space.
space.
• While searching and measuring the park- Related information
ing space, the function may be unable to • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 375)
detect objects located far into the space. • Speed-dependent steering wheel resis-
tance (p. 274)
• Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386)

122 "Approved tires" refers to tires of the same type and make as the vehicle's original, factory-installed tires.

* Option/accessory. 381
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist Pilot* messages the center display. Several examples are pro-
Messages for Park Assist Pilot (PAP123)
may vided below.
be displayed in the instrument panel and/or
Message Meaning
Park Assist System One or more of the sensors are blocked. Check and clean/remove the obstacle as soon as possible.
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
Park Assist System The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA.
Unavailable Service required
A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

A text message can be erased by briefly press-

ing the button in the center of the right-
side steering wheel keypad.
If a message cannot be erased, contact a
workshopA.

Related information
• Park Assist Pilot* (p. 375)
• Park Assist Pilot* limitations (p. 380)

123 Park Assist Pilot

382 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Radar sensor • Recommended camera and radar sensor

The radar sensor is used by several driver maintenance (p. 389)
support systems to detect other vehicles. • Radar sensor type approval (p. 384)

Location of radar sensor

The radar sensor is used by the following func-
tions:
• Distance Alert*
• Adaptive Cruise Control*
• Pilot Assist*
• Lane Keeping Aid
• City Safety
• Steering assistance at risk of collision
Any modifications to the radar sensor may
make its use illegal.

Related information
• Driver support systems (p. 274)
• Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386)

* Option/accessory. 383
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Radar sensor type approval

The type approval for the vehicle's radar units
for adaptive cruise control* (ACC124), Pilot
Assist* and BLIS*125 are found here.
Market ACC & PA BLIS Type approval
Canada ✓ FCC ID: L2C0054TR IC: 3432A-0054TR
FCC ID: L2C0055TR IC: 3432A-0055TR
✓ Canada Standard RSS-310
USA ✓ FCC ID: L2C0054TR IC: 3432A-0054TR
FCC ID: L2C0055TR IC: 3432A-0055TR
✓ FCC ID: NBG01RS4

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC applicables aux appareils radio exempts de produise pas de brouillage préjudiciable et
Rules and with Industry Canada license- licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux qu'il accepte tout brouillage, même celui
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject conditions suivantes: susceptible d'en compromettre le
to the following two conditions: fonctionnement.
(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
(1) This device may not cause harmful et CAUTION TO USERS: Changes or
interference, and modifications not expressively approved by
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
the party responsible for compliance could
(2) This device must accept any interference brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
void the user's authority to operate the
received, including interference that may brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
equipment. The term “IC:” before the radio
cause undesired operation. le fonctionnement.
certification number only signifies that
Ce dispositif de radiocommunication de Cet appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Industry Canada technical specifications were
catégorie II respecte la norme CNR-310 Canada a applicables aux appareils radio met.
d’Industrie Canada. Le présent appareil est exempts de licence. L’exploitation est
Note: This equipment complies with radiation
conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada autorisée à condition que l'appareil ne
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
124 Adaptive Cruise Control
125 Blind Spot Information

384 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

environment. This equipment should be

installed and operated with minimum distance
of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.

For detailed information about type approval,

go to volvocars.com/support.

Related information
• Radar sensor (p. 383)
• Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)
• Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
• BLIS* (p. 348)

* Option/accessory. 385
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Camera Related information Camera/radar sensor limitations

The camera is used by several driver support • Driver support systems (p. 274) The camera and radar sensor used by several
systems to e.g. detect lane marker lines or • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386) of the driver support functions has certain
road signs. limitations, which also affect the functions
• Recommended camera and radar sensor
using the camera and radar sensor. The driver
maintenance (p. 389)
should be aware of the following limitations:

Location of the camera

The camera is used by the following functions:
• Adaptive Cruise Control*
• Pilot Assist*
• Lane Keeping Aid*
• Steering assistance at risk of collision
• City Safety
• Driver Alert Control*
• Road Sign Information*
• Active high beams*
• Park Assist*

386 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Common camera and radar limitations will switch off temporarily for entire windshield should instead be
approx. 15 minutes after the engine is started replaced.
Obstructed camera
to protect its electronic components. When • Before replacing the windshield, contact a
the temperature has cooled sufficiently, the workshop126 to verify that the right wind-
camera/radar sensor will automatically restart. shield has been ordered and installed.
Damaged windshield The same type of windshield wipers or
•
wipers approved by Volvo should be used
NOTE for replacement.
Failure to take action could result in • If the windshield is replaced, the camera
reduced performance for the driver support and radar sensor must be recalibrated by a
systems that use the camera and radar workshop126 to help ensure proper func-
unit. It could cause functions to be tioning of all of the vehicle's camera and
reduced, deactivated completely or to pro- radar-based systems.
duce an incorrect function response.
The area marked in the illustration must be cleaned Additional radar limitations
regularly and kept free of decals, objects, solar film,
etc. To avoid the risk of malfunction of the driver Vehicle speed
support systems that use the radar sensor, the The radar sensor's ability to detect a vehicle
The camera is located on the upper interior
following also apply: ahead is significantly reduced if the speed of
section of the windshield along with the radar
the vehicle ahead differs greatly from your
sensor. • If there are cracks, scratches or stone vehicle's speed.
Do not place, affix or mount anything on the chips on the windshield in front of any of
inside or outside of the windshield, or in front the camera and radar sensor "windows"
of or around the camera and radar sensor – and this covers an area of
this could disrupt camera and radar-based about 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or
functions. It could cause functions to be more, contact a workshop to have the
reduced, deactivated completely or to produce windshield replaced126.
an incorrect function response. • Volvo advises against repairing cracks,
High temperatures scratches or stone chips in the area in
If the temperature in the passenger compart- front of the camera and radar sensor – the
ment is very high, the camera/radar sensor

126 An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. }}

387
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Limited field of vision in between your vehicle and the vehicle dust/snow, etc. These conditions may reduce
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In directly ahead. the function of systems that depend on the
some situations, it may detect a vehicle later Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or camera or cause these systems to temporarily
than expected or not at all. vehicles that are not driving in the center stop functioning.
of the lane may remain undetected. Strong sunlight, reflections from the road sur-
In curves, the radar may detect the a dif- face, ice or snow covering the road, a dirty
ferent vehicle than intended or lose sight road surface, or unclear lane marker lines may
of a target vehicle. drastically reduce the camera’s ability to
detect the side of a lane, a pedestrian, a
Low trailers
cyclist, a large animal or another vehicle.

Low trailer in the radar shadow

Low trailers may also be difficult or even
impossible for the radar to detect. The driver
should be extra alert when driving behind vehi-
cles towing low trailers when Adaptive Cruise
Control* or Pilot Assist* is activated.
The radar sensor's field of vision
The radar sensor's detection of vehicles
Additional camera limitations
very close to your vehicle may be delayed Reduced visibility
in certain situations, e.g. if a vehicle pulls Cameras have the same limitations as the
human eye. In other words, their “vision" is
impaired by adverse weather conditions such
as heavy snowfall/rain, dense fog, swirling

388 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Additional Park Assist Camera* Lighting conditions Recommended camera and radar
limitations The camera image is automatically adjusted sensor maintenance
according to the current lighting conditions. In order for the camera and radar units to
Blind sectors
This means that the brightness and quality of function properly, they must be kept free of
the image may vary slightly. Poor lighting con- dirt, ice, snow, etc. and should be washed
ditions may result in reduced image quality. regularly with water and car washing deter-
gent.
NOTE
NOTE
A bike carrier and other accessories moun-
ted on the rear of the vehicle can obscure Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
the camera's view. could cause false warnings, reduced func-
tion, or no function.
Related information
• Camera (p. 386)
• Radar sensor (p. 383)
There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields
of vision. • Recommended camera and radar sensor
maintenance (p. 389)
With the Park Assist Camera's 360° view*
• Park Assist Camera* (p. 365)
selected, objects/obstacles may not be
detected if they are located in the "joints" • Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)
where the edges of the individual camera
views meet.

WARNING
Even if it seems as though only a fairly Location of the Park Assist sensors
small section of the screen image is
obstructed, this may mean that a relatively
large sector is hidden and obstacles there
may not be detected until they are very
near the vehicle.

}}

* Option/accessory. 389
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Related information
• Camera (p. 386)
• Radar sensor (p. 383)
• Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386)
• Park Assist Camera* (p. 365)

Location of rear radar sensors. Keep the marked area

clean (on both the left and right sides of the vehicle).
• For best possible performance, it is impor-
tant to keep the areas in front of the sen-
sors clean.
• Do not attach any objects, tape or decals
to the surface of the sensors.
• Clean the camera lenses regularly using
lukewarm water and car washing deter-
gent. Wash gently to avoid scratching the
lens.

CAUTION
Only a workshop may perform mainte-
nance on driver support components – an
authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.

390 * Option/accessory.
 DRIVER SUPPORT

Camera and radar unit symbols Sensor blocked The following table shows some of the situa-
and messages If this symbol and the message tions that can cause the message to be dis-
Here are examples of some of the messages Windscreen sensor Sensor played, and suggested actions:
and symbols related to the camera and radar blocked, see Owner's manual is
units that may be displayed in the instrument displayed in the instrument panel, it
panel. means that the camera and radar unit are
unable to detect other vehicles, cyclists,
pedestrians and large animals in front of the
vehicle and that the vehicle's camera and
radar-based functions may be obstructed.

Cause Action
The area of the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor is Clean the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor and remove dirt, ice
dirty or covered by ice or snow. and snow.
Thick fog, heavy rain or snow is blocking the radar signals or the No action. Heavy precipitation may sometimes prevent the camera/radar sensor
camera's range of visibility. from functioning.
Water or snow is spraying/swirling up and blocking the radar No action. Very wet or snow-covered roads may sometimes prevent the cam-
signals or the camera's range of visibility. era/radar sensor from functioning.
There is dirt between the inside of the windshield and the cam- Consult a workshop to have the area of the windshield on the inside of the cam-
era/radar sensor. era's casing cleaned. An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Bright sunlight. No action. The camera/radar sensor will reset automatically when lighting con-
ditions improve.

}}

391
 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Defective camera Rear Park Assist Camera

If a camera sector is dark and
contains this symbol, this WARNING
indicates that the camera is
not functioning properly. Be extra cautious when
reversing if this symbol is
shown when a trailer, bike
carrier or similar is
attached and electrically
connected to the vehicle.
The symbol indicates that
the rear parking assist sensors are deacti-
vated and will not warn of any obstacles.

Related information
• Camera (p. 386)
• Radar sensor (p. 383)
• Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 386)
• Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)
The vehicle's left-side camera is malfunctioning.
A dark camera sector may also be displayed in
the following situations, but without the
defective camera symbol:
• a door is open
• the tailgate is open
• a rearview mirror is folded in

392
ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING
 ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING

General information about electric The hybrid battery which powers the electric High-voltage electrical current
vehicles motor is recharged using the charging cable. It
Recharge vehicles are driven just like any can also be recharged during light braking and
other vehicle, but certain functions differ from through engine braking in gear position B. The
a vehicle powered exclusively by gasoline. combustion engine can also help recharge the
The electric motor powers the vehicle primar- hybrid battery.
ily at low speeds; the gasoline engine is used
Important
at higher speeds or during more active driv-
ing. No electrical current
WARNING
The instrument panel displays Recharge-spe- Keep in mind that if there is no electrical cur-
cific information - charging information, rent to the vehicle, i.e. the ignition is switched A number of electrical components in the
off or the start battery is discharged, certain vehicle use high-voltage current and can be
selected drive mode, distance to discharged extremely dangerous if handled incorrectly.
battery and hybrid battery charge level. functions such as power brakes, power steer- These components and any orange wiring
ing, etc. will be limited. in the vehicle may only be handled by
Different drive modes can be selected while
driving, e.g. electric power only or, if more trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
WARNING cians.
power is needed, a combination of electric and
gasoline power. The vehicle calculates a com- The power brakes only work when the
bination of driveability, driving experience, electric motor or combustion engine is run- Do not touch anything that is not clearly
environmental impact and fuel economy for ning. described in this Owner's Manual.
the selected drive mode.
Related information
In order to function optimally, the hybrid bat- Towing not permitted Charging the hybrid battery (p. 395)
•
tery (and its electrical drive systems) and the Never tow the vehicle behind another vehicle,
as this could damage the electric motor. • Hybrid gauge (p. 91)
gasoline engine (and its drive systems) must
be at the correct operating temperature. Bat- Exterior engine noise • Drive modes (p. 438)
tery capacity can be considerably reduced if Because there is no sound from the engine • Starting and stopping preconditioning
the battery is too cold or too hot. Precondi- when only the electric motor is running, the (p. 228)
tioning prepares the vehicle's drive systems vehicle is equipped with artificial exterior • Hybrid battery (p. 627)
and passenger compartment before driving to background noise. This sound is intended to
help reduce both wear and energy consump- • Automatic transmission (p. 431)
help warn children, pedestrians, cyclists, ani-
tion. It also helps increase the hybrid battery's mals, etc. outside the vehicle of the vehicle's • Towing using a towline (p. 476)
range. approach.

394
 ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING

Charging the hybrid battery WARNING Charging cable handle and charging
In addition to the conventional fuel tank, your socket
The hybrid electrical system in your vehicle
vehicle is also equipped with a rechargeable uses high voltage electrical current. Any
lithium-ion hybrid battery. damage to this system or to the hybrid bat-
WARNING tery may result in the danger of overheat-
ing, fire, or serious injury. If the vehicle is
California Proposition 65 involved in a collision or subjected to flood-
Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas- ing, fire, etc., have it inspected by a trained
senger vehicle can expose you to chemi- and qualified Volvo service technician. Prior
cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon- to this inspection, the vehicle should be
oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are parked outdoors at a safe distance from
known to the State of California to cause any building or potentially flammable mate-
cancer and birth defects or other reproduc- rials.
tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine The hybrid battery's charging time depends on
except as necessary, service your vehicle in the charging current used. Charging cable handle and charging socket.
a well ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing Charging status is indicated in three ways:
your vehicle. For more information go to NOTE • Indicator on the charging cable's control
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- module.
The capacity of the hybrid battery dimin-
vehicle.
ishes somewhat with age and use, which • Indicator light in the vehicle's charging
could result in increased use of the gaso- socket.
The hybrid battery can be recharged using the line engine and consequently, slightly
charging cable stored in a storage space in the • Images and text in the instrument panel.
higher fuel consumption.
cargo compartment. The start battery is charged while the hybrid
battery is charging and stops charging when
WARNING the hybrid battery is fully charged.
If the hybrid battery needs to be replaced, If the hybrid battery's temperature is below
this may only be done by a Volvo retailer or -10 ºC (14 ºF) or above 40 ºC (104 ºF), some
authorized Volvo workshop. of the vehicle's functions may be reduced or
not available at all.

}}

395
 ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING

|| The electric motor cannot be used if the bat- Energy is regenerated to the battery when the Charging current
tery's temperature is too low or too high. If the brake pedal is depressed lightly or during Charging current is used to charge the hybrid
PURE drive mode is selected, the gasoline engine braking. battery and precondition the vehicle. Charg-
engine will start. ing is performed by connecting a charging
The function is available in all drive modes
together with gear selector position D or B. cable between the vehicle's charging socket
Charging with fixed control module in and a 120/240 V electrical socket (alternat-
accordance with mode 31 Related information ing current).
In certain markets, the control module is • Charge cable (p. 398) When the charging cable is activated, a mes-
installed within a charging station connected • Charging current (p. 396) sage will be displayed in the instrument panel
to an electrical outlet. In this case, the charg- and an indicator light in the vehicle's charging
• Opening and closing the charging socket socket will illuminate. Charging current is pri-
ing cable does not have its own control mod-
cover (p. 401) marily used for battery charging, but is also
ule. You must therefore use the charging sta-
tion's charging cable and follow the instruc- • Initiating hybrid battery charging (p. 401) used for preconditioning. The vehicle's start
tions on the charging station. • Stopping hybrid battery charging (p. 410) battery is charged along with the hybrid bat-
tery.
Energy recovery during braking • Charging status in the charging cable's
control module (p. 405)
CAUTION
• Charging status in the vehicle's charging
socket (p. 403) Never detach the charging cable from the
120/240 V outlet (AC, alternating current)
• Charging status in the instrument panel
while charging is in progress – the
(p. 408)
120/240 V outlet could be damaged in
• Hybrid symbols and messages in the such circumstances. Always interrupt
instrument panel (p. 411) charging first and then disconnect the
• Automatic transmission (p. 431) charging cable – first from the vehicle's
Changing drive mode (p. 443) charging socket and then from the
•
120/240 V outlet.
• Long-term storage of vehicles with hybrid
batteries (p. 413)
Indicator in the instrument panel during energy
recovery. • Regenerative braking* (p. 430)

1 European standard - EN 61851-1.

396 * Option/accessory.
 ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING

CAUTION Charging times for charging with 200-240 V • Charging status in the instrument panel
(p. 408)
Make sure that the fuse to the wall outlet Amperage (A)A Charging time (hours)
• Charging status in the vehicle's charging
can handle the current specified for the
6 8 socket (p. 403)
charging cable.
10 4 • Starting and stopping preconditioning
(p. 228)
NOTE 16 3
Stopping hybrid battery charging (p. 410)
•
• In extremely cold or hot weather, part A Maximum charging current may vary from market to mar-
of the charging current is used to heat/ ket.

cool the hybrid battery and the passen-

Charging times for charging with 100-120 V
ger compartment, resulting in a longer
charging time. Amperage (A)A Charging time (hours)
• The charging time is longer if precondi-
6 17
tioning has been selected. The time
required depends primarily on the 10 9
ambient temperature.
16 6

Charging time A Maximum charging current may vary from market to mar-
ket.
Charging time may vary. The following charg-
ing times apply when charging is not affected Fuse
by current being drawn from the climate sys- There are normally several 120/240 V power
tem or any other function. If charging seems consumers in one fuse circuit, which means
to be taking more time than shown in the that more than one power consumer (e.g.
table, this should be investigated. lighting, vacuum cleaner, electric drill, etc.)
may use the same fuse.

Related information
• Charge cable (p. 398)
• Charging status in the charging cable's
control module (p. 405)

397
 ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING

Charge cable WARNING • Never connect the charging cable to an

The charging cable and its control module are extension cord or a multiple plug
• The charging cable must be grounded socket.
used to charge the vehicle's hybrid battery.
when in use. It is equipped with a cord
• Do not use one or more adapters
with a grounding conductor and a
between the charging cable and the
grounding plug. The plug must be
electric outlet.
inserted into an appropriate outlet that
is properly installed and grounded in • Do not use an external timer between
accordance with all local codes and the charging cable and the electrical
ordinances and is not damaged in any outlet.
way. Also, refer to the manufacturer's instruc-
• Children should be supervised when in tions for using the charging cable and its
components.
the vicinity of the charging cable when
it is plugged in.
• High voltage is present in your electric CAUTION
The charging cable is stored in a storage compart- meter housing and power distribution Power strips, external timers, adapters,
ment under the cargo compartment floor. service panel. Contact with high volt- extension cords, surge protectors or similar
age can cause death or serious per- devices must not be used together with
WARNING sonal injury. the charging cable since this may involve a
Only use the charging cable provided with • Do not use the charging cable if it is risk of fire, electric shocks, etc.
your vehicle or a replacement cable pur- damaged in any way. A damaged or
Do not use an external timer or adapter
chased from a Volvo retailer. malfunctioning charging cable may
between the 120/240 V outlet (AC, alter-
only be repaired by a workshop – an
nating current) and the charging cable.
authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
Specifications, charging cable
mended.
Enclosure class IP67 • Always position the charging cable so
Compliance SAE J1772 that it will not be driven over, stepped
on, tripped over or otherwise damaged,
Ambient tempera- -32 ºC to 50 ºC or cause personal injury.
ture (-25 ºF till 122 ºF)
• Disconnect the charger from the wall
outlet before cleaning it.

398
 ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING

CAUTION WARNING Charging cable residual current

device
Never detach the charging cable from the The charging cable and its components
must not be rinsed or immersed in water. The charging cable has a circuit breaker that
120/240 V outlet (AC, alternating current)
helps protect against current overloads and
while charging is in progress – the
thermal overheating.
120/240 V outlet could be damaged in
CAUTION WARNING
such circumstances. Always interrupt
charging first and then disconnect the Avoid exposing the charging module and Charging the hybrid battery may only be
charging cable – first from the vehicle's its plug to direct sunlight. In such cases, done from approved, grounded 120/240 V
charging socket and then from the the overheating protection in the plug outlets (AC, alternating current). If the elec-
120/240 V outlet. could reduce or cut off charging of the trical circuit or electrical socket's capacity
hybrid battery. is not known, let a licensed electrician
inspect the electrical circuit's capacity.
CAUTION Using a charge level that exceeds the elec-
Related information trical circuit's or electrical outlet's capacity
Wipe the charging cable with a clean cloth • Charging status in the charging cable's may start a fire or damage the electrical cir-
lightly moistened with water or a mild control module (p. 405) cuit.
detergent. Do not use chemicals or sol-
• Charging cable residual current device
vents.
(p. 399)
• Charging cable temperature monitoring
(p. 401)
• Charging the hybrid battery (p. 395)

}}

399
 ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING

|| WARNING
• The charging cable's residual current
breaker helps protect the vehicle's
charging system but cannot ensure
that an current overload will never
occur.
• Never use visibly worn or damaged
electrical outlets. Doing so could lead
to fires or serious injury.
• Never connect the charging cable to an
extension cord.
Control module's LED2 indicator.
• Maintenance or replacement of the
hybrid battery may only be performed LED indicator CAUTION
by a trained and qualified Volvo service • Check the capacity of the socket.
technician. If the charging cable's residual current device
is triggered, the LED indicator will light up red. • Other electronic equipment connected
• Do not use any charging cable other Have the outlet checked by a licensed electri- on the same fuse circuit must be dis-
than the recommended one. cian or try using another wall outlet. connected if the total load is exceeded.
• Do not use an external timer between • Do not connect the charging cable if
the charging cable and the electrical the socket is damaged.
outlet.
• Do not use any adapters between the Related information
charging cable and the electrical outlet. Charge cable (p. 398)
•
• Charging status in the charging cable's
control module (p. 405)

2 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

400
 ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING

Charging cable temperature Opening and closing the charging Initiating hybrid battery charging
monitoring socket cover The hybrid battery is charged by connecting a
To help ensure the vehicle's hybrid battery is The cover for the hybrid battery's charging charging cable between the vehicle and a
reliably charged each time it is connected, socket opens manually. 120/240 V outlet (alternating current).
charging is stopped if the temperature in the Only use the charging cable supplied with the
charging cable becomes too high and rea- car or a replacement cable recommended by
ches a critical limit. Volvo.
CAUTION CAUTION
If charging is often inadvertently interrup- Never connect the charging cable if there
ted, have the charging cable and the vehi- is a risk of a thunderstorm or there is light-
cle's charging system inspected by a ning.
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian.

Related information
• Charge cable (p. 398)
Press in the rear edge of the charger door
• Charging status in the charging cable's and release.
control module (p. 405)
Open the door.

Perform the following steps in reverse to close

the charger door.

Related information
• Initiating hybrid battery charging (p. 401)
• Stopping hybrid battery charging (p. 410)
• Charging the hybrid battery (p. 395)

}}

401
 ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING

|| WARNING • Never connect the charging cable to an Take out the charging cable from the storage
extension cord or a multiple plug compartment under the cargo area.
• The charging cable must be grounded socket.
when in use. It is equipped with a cord
• Do not use one or more adapters
with a grounding conductor and a
between the charging cable and the
grounding plug. The plug must be
electric outlet.
inserted into an appropriate outlet that
is properly installed and grounded in • Do not use an external timer between
accordance with all local codes and the charging cable and the electrical
ordinances and is not damaged in any outlet.
way. Also, refer to the manufacturer's instruc-
• Children should be supervised when in tions for using the charging cable and its
components.
the vicinity of the charging cable when Plug the charging cable into a 120/240 V
it is plugged in. outlet. Never use an extension cord.
• High voltage is present in your electric CAUTION
meter housing and power distribution Make sure that the 120/240 V outlet (AC,
service panel. Contact with high volt- alternating current) has a power capacity
age can cause death or serious per- sufficient for charging electric vehicles. If
sonal injury. you are uncertain of the capacity, have the
• Do not use the charging cable if it is outlet checked by a licensed electrician.
damaged in any way. A damaged or
Note that the engine must be turned off
malfunctioning charging cable may
before beginning charging.
only be repaired by a workshop – an
authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
mended. Open the charger door. Push the charging
handle all the way into the vehicle's
• Always position the charging cable so socket.
that it will not be driven over, stepped
on, tripped over or otherwise damaged,
or cause personal injury.
• Disconnect the charger from the wall
outlet before cleaning it.

402
 ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING

2. The charging cable handle will lock into Related information Charging status in the vehicle's
place and charging will begin within • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 395) charging socket
5 seconds. When charging starts, the Opening and closing the charging socket The charging status is indicated by an LED
•
green LED light in the charging socket will cover (p. 401) light in the charging socket.
begin to flash. The approximate remaining
charging time or the charging status will • Charging status in the vehicle's charging
be displayed in the instrument panel. socket (p. 403)
• Charging status in the instrument panel
Charging may be temporarily interrupted if
(p. 408)
the vehicle is unlocked. If the charging
cable remains plugged into the charging • Charging status in the charging cable's
socket, charging will resume after a control module (p. 405)
moment. • Stopping hybrid battery charging (p. 410)

CAUTION
Never detach the charging cable from the
120/240 V outlet (AC, alternating current) Location of the LED indicator light in the vehicle's
while charging is in progress – the charging socket.
120/240 V outlet could be damaged in
such circumstances. Always interrupt
charging first and then disconnect the
charging cable – first from the vehicle's
charging socket and then from the
120/240 V outlet.

During charging, condensation from the air

conditioning may form under the vehicle. This
is normal and is caused by the hybrid battery
cooling.

Location of the LED indicator light in the vehicle's

charging socket.
}}

403
 ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING

|| The LED indicator light shows the current • Charging status in the charging cable's
charge status during charging. If the LED indi- control module (p. 405)
cator light is not illuminated, check to make • Stopping hybrid battery charging (p. 410)
sure the cable is securely connected in the
wall outlet and in the outlet in the vehicle. A
white, red or yellow light illuminates when the
passenger compartment lighting is activated
and will remain illuminated for a short time
after the passenger compartment lighting has
gone out.

LED indicator Meaning

light's color
White Courtesy light
Yellow Wait modeA – waiting for
charging to start.
Flashing green Charging is in progressB.
Green Charging completedC
Red Malfunction.
A E.g. after a door has been opened or if the charging cable
handle is not locked in place.
B The more slowly the light flashes, the closer the battery is to
being fully charged.
C The light will go out after a short time.

Related information
• Charging the hybrid battery (p. 395)
• Charging status in the instrument panel
(p. 408)

404
 ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING

Charging status in the charging LED indicator

cable's control module
The indicator on the charging cable's control
module shows the status of charging in pro-
gress and completed charging.

Control module's LED3 indicator.

3 LED (Light Emitting Diode) }}

405
 ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING

|| LED Status Meaning Recommended action

Off Charging is not No power supply to the 1. Unplug the charging cable from the outlet.
possible. charging cable. 2. Plug the charging cable back into the outlet or use another outlet.
3. If the problem persists, contact Volvo Support.
White light Charging possi- The charging cable is If the LED indicator is white but charging is not possible:
ble. ready to be plugged
1. Unplug the charging cable from the charging socket.
into the vehicle.
2. Plug the charging cable back into the charging socket.
3. If the indicator does not begin flashing white within about 10 seconds, first unplug
the charging cable from the charging socket and then unplug it from the wall out-
let. Plug the charging cable back into the charging socket and the outlet.
4. If the problem persists, contact Volvo Support.
Flashing Charging is in The vehicle's electronic Wait until the batteries are fully charged.
white progress. system has initiated
charging
Charging is in progress.
Steady red Charging is not Temporary error. 1. Unplug the charging cable from the charging socket.
light possible. 2. Wait a few seconds.
3. Plug the charging cable back into the charging socket.
4. If the problem persists, contact Volvo Support.
Flashing Charging is not Serious error. First unplug the charging cable from the charging socket and then from the electrical
red light possible. outlet. If the problem persists, contact Volvo Support.

406
 ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING

Related information
• Charging the hybrid battery (p. 395)
• Charging status in the vehicle's charging
socket (p. 403)
• Charging status in the instrument panel
(p. 408)
• Stopping hybrid battery charging (p. 410)

407
 ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING

Charging status in the instrument This information is displayed as long as the

panel instrument panel is active.
Charging status is indicated in the instrument
panel using both graphics and messages.
Graphic Message Meaning
Fully charged at: [Time] displayed along with an animated blue Charging is in progress and the approximate time at which
pulsing light through the charging cable. the battery will be fully charged is displayed.

Charging complete is displayed. An image will be superimposed The battery is fully charged.
over the graphic of the vehicle with a green LED indicator light in
the socket.

Charging error will be displayed. The LED indicator light in the Malfunction. Make sure the charging cable is correctly con-
charging socket will be red. nected to the vehicle's charging socket and to the
120/240 V outlet (alternating current).

408
 ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING

NOTE
If the instrument panel is not used, it will
go dark after a period of time. To reactivate
the display:
• depress the brake pedal,
• open one of the doors, or
• put the ignition in mode I by turning
the START knob clockwise and then
releasing.

Related information
• Charging the hybrid battery (p. 395)
• Hybrid symbols and messages in the
instrument panel (p. 411)
• Charging status in the vehicle's charging
socket (p. 403)
• Charging status in the charging cable's
control module (p. 405)
• Stopping hybrid battery charging (p. 410)

409
 ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING

Stopping hybrid battery charging

To stop charging of the hybrid battery, unlock
the vehicle, unplug the charging cable from
the vehicle's charging socket and then
unplug the cable from the 120/240 V outlet
(alternating current).
CAUTION
Before the charging cable is removed from
the vehicle's charging socket, the vehicle
must be unlocked using the unlock button Unlock the vehicle with the remote key. Unplug the cable from the 120/240 V out-
on the remote key. This must be done even Charging will stop. let.
if the vehicle's doors are already unlocked. Stow the charging cable in the storage
If the vehicle is not unlocked using the compartment under the cargo area floor.
unlock button, the charging cable or sys-
tem may be damaged. Charging cable automatically locks
If the charging cable cannot be removed from
the charging socket, it will automatically lock
NOTE into place again after unlocking to maximize
Always unlock the vehicle so that charging charging and range and to enable precondi-
is cut off before the connection to the tioning before driving. The charging cable can
120/240 V outlet (AC, alternating current) be removed again if the vehicle is unlocked
is disconnected. Note that the charging Press the lock button on the charging using the remote key. For vehicles with
cable must be disconnected from the vehi- cable's handle. The handle will be Passive Entry*, the handle can be used to lock
cle's charging socket before it is discon- released/unlocked. Unplug the cable from and unlock.
nected from the 120/240 V outlet, partly the vehicle's charging socket and close
to prevent damage to the system and party the charger door. Related information
to prevent unintentional interruption of • Opening and closing the charging socket
charging. cover (p. 401)
• Charge cable (p. 398)
• Charging the hybrid battery (p. 395)
• Initiating hybrid battery charging (p. 401)

410 * Option/accessory.
 ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING

Hybrid symbols and messages in instrument panel. They may also appear in
the instrument panel combination with general indicator and warn-
A number of symbols and messages relating ing symbols and disappear when the neces-
to the Recharge may be displayed in the sary action has been taken.
Symbol Message Meaning
12 V Battery Battery fault. Contact a workshopA to have the battery checked as soon as possible.
Charging fault, service urgent. Drive
to workshop
12 V Battery Battery fault. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and contact a workshopA to have the bat-
Charging fault Stop safely tery checked.

12 V Battery Battery fault. Contact a workshopA to have the system checked as soon as possible.
Fuse failure Service required

HV battery The hybrid battery's temperature seems to be rising at an abnormal rate. Stop the vehicle and
Overheated, stop safely turn off the engine. Wait at least 5 minutes before driving. Call a workshopA or inspect the
vehicle to make sure everything seems normal before continuing to drive.

Reduced performance The hybrid battery's charge level is too low for driving at high speeds. Charge the battery as
soon as possible.
Max vehicle speed limited

Propulsion system The hybrid system is not functioning properly. Contact a workshopA to have the system
Harsh behavior at low speed, vehicle checked as soon as possible.
ok to use

}}

411
 ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING

|| Symbol Message Meaning

Hybrid system failure The hybrid system is not functioning. Contact a workshopA to have the system checked as
Service required soon as possible.

Charge cable Displayed when the driver attempts to start the vehicle with the charging cable still con-
nected. Remove the charging cable and close the charger cover.
Remove before start

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information
• Initiating hybrid battery charging (p. 401)
• Stopping hybrid battery charging (p. 410)
• Charging the hybrid battery (p. 395)
• Indicator and warning symbols (p. 99)
• Hybrid gauge (p. 91)
• Hybrid battery gauge (p. 92)

412
 ELECTRIC MOTOR AND CHARGING

Long-term storage of vehicles with 2. If the vehicle is not driven for more than 6
hybrid batteries months or the hybrid battery's charge
To help minimize degradation of the hybrid level is noticeably below the 25% mark,
battery if the vehicle is not driven for a pro- charge the battery to about 25% to help
longed period (longer than 1 month) the compensate for the natural battery dis-
hybrid battery charge level should be kept at charge that occurs in long-term storage.
approx. 25% according to the gauge in the Regularly check the charge level using the
instrument panel. gauge in the instrument display.
Do as follows:
NOTE
Store the vehicle in as cool a location as
possible to minimize battery aging during
long-term storage. In the summer, park the
vehicle indoors or in a shady location,
whichever is cooler.

Related information
• Initiating hybrid battery charging (p. 401)
• Hybrid battery gauge (p. 92)
• Charging the hybrid battery (p. 395)

1. If the hybrid battery charge level is high,

drive the vehicle until the charge level is
approximately 25%. If the charge level is
low, charge the battery until the level rea-
ches approximately 25%.

413
STARTING AND DRIVING
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Starting the vehicle To start the vehicle: WARNING

The vehicle can be started using the start
• Never use more than one inlay mat at a
knob in the tunnel console when the remote CAUTION
time on the driver's floor. If any other
key is in the passenger compartment. The vehicle cannot be started if the charg- type of floor mat is used, remove the
ing cable is still plugged in. Make sure to original mat from the driver's seat floor
pull out the charging cable from the charg- before driving. All types of mats must
ing socket before starting the vehicle. be securely anchored in the attach-
ment points in the floor. Make sure the
1. The remote key must be inside the vehicle. floor mat does not impede the move-
For vehicles with Passive Start, the key ment of the brake pedal or accelerator
must be in the front section of the passen- pedal in any way, as this could be a
ger compartment. With the optional key- serious safety hazard.
less locking/unlocking function*, the key • Volvo's floor mats are specially manu-
can be anywhere in the vehicle. factured for your vehicle. They must be
properly secured in the attachment
2. Press and hold down the brake pedal1 as
Start knob in the tunnel console. points in the floor to help ensure they
far as possible.
cannot slide and become trapped
3. Turn the start knob clockwise and release. under the pedals.
WARNING The control will automatically return to the
Before starting: original position.
The starter motor will crank until the engine
• Buckle your seat belt. starts or until overheating protection is trig-
• Adjust the seat, steering wheel and gered.
mirrors. During normal start conditions, the vehicle's
• Make sure you can fully depress the electric motor will be prioritized and the gaso-
brake pedal. line engine will remain off. This means that
once the start knob is turned clockwise, the
electric motor has been "started" and the vehi-
The remote key is not physically used to start
cle is ready to be driven. The warning and
the ignition because the vehicle is equipped
information symbols in the instrument panel
with the keyless Passive Start system.

1 If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to turn the start knob clockwise to start the engine.

416 * Option/accessory.
 STARTING AND DRIVING

will go out and the selected theme will be dis- NOTE WARNING
played to indicate that the electric motor is
activated. When the remote key is placed in the Never remove the remote control key from
backup reader, make sure that no other the vehicle while driving.
In some situations such as in cold weather or vehicle keys, metal objects or electronic
if the hybrid battery's charge level is too low devices (e.g. cellular phones, tablets, lap-
the gasoline engine will start instead. WARNING
tops or chargers) are in the backup reader.
Multiple vehicle keys close to each other in • Always remove the remote key from
Error messages the passenger compartment when you
the backup reader can disrupt their func-
If the Vehicle key not found message is leave the vehicle and make sure the
tionality.
shown in the instrument panel at start, place ignition is in mode 0.
the remote key at the backup reader and then
make a new start attempt. If Vehicle start System check, wait is dis- • Always put the gear selector in P and
played in the instrument panel while attempt- apply the parking brake before leaving
ing to start the vehicle, wait until the message the vehicle. Never leave the vehicle
disappears and try again to start the vehicle. unsupervised while the engine is run-
ning.
CAUTION • Always open the garage door fully and
make sure that ventilation is very good
If the engine has not responded after 3
before starting the engine in a garage.
attempts – wait for 3 minutes before star-
The exhaust fumes produced by the
ting a new attempt. Starting capability
vehicle contain carbon monoxide,
increases if the starter battery is given time
which is invisible and odorless but very
Location of the backup reader in the tunnel console. to recover.
toxic.

NOTE
The vehicle cannot be started if the hybrid
battery is discharged.

}}

417
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| CAUTION NOTE Switching off the vehicle

The vehicle can be switched off using the
• When starting in cold weather, the With a cold start, idling speed may be con-
start knob in the tunnel console.
automatic transmission may shift up at siderably higher than normal for certain
slightly higher engine speeds than nor- engine types. This is done to get the emis-
mal until the automatic transmission sions system up to normal operating tem-
fluid reaches normal operating tem- perature as quickly as possible, which min-
perature. imizes exhaust emissions and protects the
• Do not race a cold engine immediately environment.
after starting. This could prevent fluids
from properly lubricating vital compo- Related information
nents in the engine before it has • Switching off the vehicle (p. 418)
reached the proper operating tempera- • Ignition modes (p. 419)
ture.
• Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 202)
• The engine should be idling when the
• Jump starting using another battery
gear selector is moved. Never acceler- Start knob in the tunnel console.
(p. 465)
ate until the gear is fully engaged. To switch off the vehicle:
Accelerating rapidly before a gear is • Selecting ignition mode (p. 420)
properly engaged could lead to harder – Turn the start knob clockwise and release
wear of components. to switch off the vehicle. The control will
automatically return to the original posi-
• To help prevent the transmission oil
tion.
from overheating, select P or N when
idling at a standstill for prolonged peri- If the vehicle rolls:
ods of time.
– Turn clockwise and hold the knob until the
vehicle switches off.

Related information
• Starting the vehicle (p. 416)
• Ignition modes (p. 419)
• Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 202)

418
 STARTING AND DRIVING

• Jump starting using another battery Ignition modes Mode Functions

(p. 465) The vehicle's ignition can be put in various
• Selecting ignition mode (p. 420) modes (levels) to make different functions 0 • The odometer, clock and tem-
available. perature gauge are illumi-
To enable the use of a limited number of func- natedA.
tions when the engine is not running, the igni- • The power* seats can be
tion can be put in one of three different levels: adjusted.
0, I and II. These levels are referred to as "igni-
• The power windows can be
tion modes" in the Owner's Manual.
used.
The following table shows which functions are • The center display is activated
available in each ignition mode: and can be usedA.
• The infotainment system can
be usedA.
In this mode, the functions are
available for a limited time and
then switch off automatically.

}}

* Option/accessory. 419
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Mode Functions Related information Selecting ignition mode

• Starting the vehicle (p. 416) The vehicle's ignition can be put in various
I • The panoramic roof, power modes (levels) to make different functions
• Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 202)
windows, 12-volt electrical available.
socket in the passenger com- • Jump starting using another battery
partment, Bluetooth, naviga- (p. 465) Selecting an ignition mode
tion, phone, blower and wind- • Selecting ignition mode (p. 420)
shield wipers can be used.
• The power seats can be
adjusted.
• The 12-volt electrical socket* in
the cargo compartment can be
used.
Electrical current will be taken
from the battery in this ignition
mode.
II • The headlights illuminate.
Start knob in the tunnel console.
• Warning/indicator lights illumi-
nate for 5 seconds. • Ignition mode 0 – Unlock the vehicle and
keep the remote key in the passenger
• A number of other systems are
compartment.
activated. However, seat and
rear window heating can only
be activated when the engine NOTE
is running. To set level I or II without engine start –
This ignition mode uses a lot of do not depress the brake pedal (or clutch
current from the battery and pedal for vehicles with manual transmis-
should be avoided whenever sion) when selecting this ignition mode.
possible!
A Also activated when the door is opened.
• Ignition mode I – Turn the start knob
clockwise and release it. The control will

420 * Option/accessory.
 STARTING AND DRIVING

automatically return to the original posi- Brake functions Brakes

tion. The vehicle's brakes are used to reduce The brake pedal is used to apply the vehicle's
• Ignition mode II – Turn the start knob speed or prevent the vehicle from rolling. regular brakes, which are part of the brake
clockwise and hold it there for In addition to the wheel brakes and parking system.
approx. 5 seconds. Release the knob, brakes, the vehicle is also equipped with a The vehicle is equipped with two brake cir-
which will automatically return to its origi- number of automatic brake assist functions. cuits. If one brake circuit is damaged, the
nal position. These systems provide assistance by e.g. the brake pedal may go down further when
Back to ignition mode 0 – To return to driver not needing to depress the brake pedal depressed. More pressure will then be
•
ignition mode 0 from modes I and II, turn at a traffic light, when starting up a hill or required from the driver for normal braking
the start knob clockwise and release it. when driving down a hill. effect.
The control will automatically return to the Depending on how the vehicle is equipped,
original position. the following brake assist functions may be WARNING
included: The power brakes only work when the
Related information electric motor or combustion engine is run-
• Starting the vehicle (p. 416) • Auto-hold brake function at a standstill ning.
(Auto Hold)
• Switching off the vehicle (p. 418)
• Hill Start Assist (Hill Start Assist) If the brake pedal is used when the vehicle is
• Ignition modes (p. 419)
• Braking assist after a collision switched off, the pedal must be depressed
• Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 202) with greater pressure, past the normal braking
• City Safety
• Jump starting using another battery position, in order to brake the vehicle.
(p. 465) • Hill Descent Control (Hill Descent Control)
In very hilly areas or when driving with a heavy
Related information load, gear position B can be used to augment
• Brakes (p. 421) the brakes with engine braking.
• Parking brake (p. 425) Use the Off Road drive mode to increase the
• Auto-hold brakes (p. 428) engine braking effect when driving on steep
downgrades at low speeds.
• Braking assist after a collision (p. 430)
• Hill Start Assist (p. 430) Anti-lock brakes
City Safety™ (p. 327) The vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock
•
Braking System (ABS2), which helps prevent
• Hill Descent Control (p. 451) the wheels from locking and helps maintain
}}

421
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| steering control when braking. Vibrations may Symbols in the instrument panel
be felt from the brake pedal when ABS is
Symbol Meaning
operating, which is normal.
After the vehicle is started, a brief test of the Check the brake fluid level. If the
ABS system is automatically performed when level is low, fill brake fluid and
the driver releases the brake pedal. An addi- check to determine the reason
tional automatic test of the system may be for the loss of brake fluid.
A
performed when the vehicle is traveling at a
low speed. During the test, the brake pedal
may feel as though it is pulsating.

Light braking charges the hybrid

battery When the battery is being charged with the electric B

When the brakes are applied lightly, the elec- motor braking function, this will be indicated in the
instrument panel. Fault in pedal sensor.
tric motor braking function is used. This con-
verts the vehicle's kinetic energy into electrical This function is active at speeds in the range
energy, which is used to charge the hybrid of 150-5 km/h (93-3 mph). When braking at
battery. When the battery is being charged speeds outside of this range, or during harder
A
with the electric motor braking function, this braking, the hydraulic braking system is used
will be indicated in the instrument panel. to augment braking. This is indicated in the
instrument panel with the pointer down in the
red area.

2 Anti-lock Braking System

422
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Symbol Meaning WARNING Brake Assist System

If the warning symbols for both brake fault The brake enhancing system, (BAS3), helps
Steady glow for 2 seconds after increase braking force and can thereby
the engine is started: Automatic and ABS fault are lit simultaneously, there
may be a fault in the brake system. reduce braking distance.
function check. The system monitors the driver's braking hab-
• If the brake fluid reservoir level is nor-
A Steady glow for more than 2 its and increases braking force when neces-
mal when this occurs, drive carefully to
seconds: Fault in the ABS sys- sary. Braking force can be increased up to the
the nearest workshop to have the
tem. The vehicle's regular brake point at which the ABS intervenes.
brake system checked - an authorized
system is still working, but with-
Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information
out the ABS function.
• If the brake fluid has fallen below the • Brakes (p. 421)
B MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir,
the vehicle should not be driven until
If the message Brake pedal the brake fluid has been filled. The rea-
Characteristics changed Serv- son for the brake fluid loss must be
ice required is displayed, the checked.
"Brake-by-wire" system is not
functioning properly. The brake
pedal must be depressed with Related information
greater pressure, past the normal • Brake Assist System (p. 423)
braking position, in order to • Auto-hold brakes (p. 428)
brake the vehicle. • Hill Start Assist (p. 430)
A In Canada. • Braking on wet roads (p. 424)
B In the US.
• Braking on salted roads (p. 424)
• Maintenance of the brake system (p. 424)
• Brake lights (p. 164)

3 Brake Assist System

423
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Braking on wet roads Braking on salted roads Maintenance of the brake system
Prolonged driving in heavy rain without brak- When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt Regularly check the brake system compo-
ing may cause braking effect to be slightly may form on the brake discs and brake pads. nents for wear.
delayed the first time the brakes are applied. This could increase stopping distance. Main- To keep the vehicle as safe and reliable as
This may also occur after washing the vehicle. tain an extra large safety distance to the vehi- possible, follow the Volvo service schedule
It will then be necessary to apply greater pres- cle ahead. Make sure to also: specified in the Warranty and Maintenance
sure to the brake pedal. You should therefore Records Information booklet. After replacing
• Apply the brakes from time to time to help
maintain a greater distance to the vehicle brake pads and brake discs, braking effect is
remove salt. Make sure braking does not
ahead. not adapted until they are "broken in" by driv-
pose a risk to any other road users.
ing a few hundred kilometers (miles). Com-
Firmly apply the brakes after washing the • Gently apply the brakes when you have pensate for the reduced braking effect by
vehicle or driving on wet roads. This helps finished driving and before driving again. applying greater pressure to the brake pedal.
warm up the brake discs, enabling them to dry
Volvo recommends only using brake pads
more quickly and protecting them against cor- Related information
approved for your Volvo.
rosion. Consider the current traffic situation • Brakes (p. 421)
when braking. Braking on wet roads (p. 424)
• CAUTION
Related information The brake system's components should be
• Brakes (p. 421)
regularly checked for wear.
• Braking on salted roads (p. 424)
Contact a workshop for advice on how to
do this or let a workshop perform the
inspection - an authorized Volvo workshop
is recommended.

Related information
• Brakes (p. 421)

424
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Parking brake Related information Activating and deactivating the

The parking brake helps keep the vehicle sta- • Activating and deactivating the parking parking brake
tionary by mechanically locking two wheels. brake (p. 425) Use the parking brake to help keep the vehi-
• Parking on a hill (p. 427) cle stationary when it is parked.
• Parking brake malfunction (p. 427) Activating the parking brake
• Auto-hold brakes (p. 428)

The parking brake controls are located in the tunnel

console between the seats.
When the electric parking brake is being
applied, a faint sound can be heard from the 1. Pull up the control.
brake's electric motor. This sound can also be > The symbol in the instrument panel will
heard during the automatic function check of illuminate when the parking brake is
the parking brake. activated.
If the vehicle is stationary when the parking 2. Make sure the vehicle is stationary.
brake is activated, it will only be applied to the
rear wheels. If it is activated while the vehicle
is moving, the normal brakes will be used on
all four wheels. Braking will be transferred to
only the rear wheels when the vehicle is
almost stopped.

}}

425
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Symbol in the instrument panel Emergency braking 2. Press the control.

Symbol Meaning In an emergency, the parking brake can be > The parking brake will release and the
activated when the vehicle is moving by pull- symbol in the instrument panel will go
The symbol will be illuminated ing and holding up the control. The braking out.
when the parking brake is acti- process is canceled when the control is
Deactivating automatically
vated. released or if the accelerator pedal is
1. Start the vehicle.
A flashing symbol indicates that depressed.
A
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly. Move the
a fault has been detected. Read
NOTE gear selector to D or R and press the
the message in the instrument
accelerator pedal.
panel. In case of emergency braking at high
> The parking brake will release and the
speeds, a signal sounds during the brake
symbol in the instrument panel will go
procedure.
B out.
A Canadian models. Deactivating the parking brake
B US models. NOTE
Automatic activation For automatic deactivation to be possible,
The parking brake is applied automatically the driver's seat belt must be buckled or
the driver's door closed.
• when the ignition is switched off and the
setting for automatically activating the
parking brake is activated in the center
display. Related information
• Settings for automatically activating the
• when the gear selector is moved to P on a parking brake (p. 427)
steep hill.
• Parking brake malfunction (p. 427)
• if the auto-hold brake (automatic brake at
standstill) function is activated and • Parking brake (p. 425)
• the vehicle has been stationary for a • Parking on a hill (p. 427)
prolonged period of time (5-10 Deactivating manually
minutes). The parking brake can only be deactivated if
• the vehicle is switched off. the engine is running.

• the driver has left the vehicle. 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.

426
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Settings for automatically Parking on a hill Parking brake malfunction

activating the parking brake Always use the parking brake when parking If you are unable to deactivate or activate the
Choose whether the parking brake should be on a hill. parking brake after several attempts, contact
activated automatically when the vehicle is WARNING an authorized Volvo workshop.
switched off. A audible warning signal will sound if the park-
To change this setting: Always apply the parking brake when park- ing brake is activated while the vehicle is
ing on an incline. Selecting a gear or put- being driven.
1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top ting the automatic transmission in P may
view. not be sufficient to keep the vehicle sta- If the vehicle must be parked before the prob-
tionary in all situations. lem is rectified, turn the wheels as when park-
2. Tap My Car Parking Brake and ing on an incline and put the gear selector in
Suspension and select or deselect the If the vehicle is pointing uphill: P.
Auto Activate Parking Brake function.
• Turn the front wheels so they are pointing Low battery charge level
Related information away from the curb. If the battery charge level is too low, it will not
• Activating and deactivating the parking If the vehicle is pointing downhill: be possible to activate or deactivate the park-
brake (p. 425) ing brake. Connect an auxiliary battery to the
• Turn the front wheels so they are pointing
• Parking brake (p. 425) vehicle if the battery is discharged.
toward the curb.
Heavy load uphill Replacing brake pads
Heavy loads, such as a trailer, could cause the Due to the design of the electric parking
vehicle to roll backward when the parking brake, the rear brake pads must be replaced
brake is released automatically on steep uphill by a workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop
gradients. To help avoid this, pull the control is recommended.
upward while you are driving away. Release
the control when the vehicle gains traction.

Related information
• Activating and deactivating the parking
brake (p. 425)

}}

427
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Symbols in the instrument panel Related information Auto-hold brakes

Symbol Meaning • Activating and deactivating the parking With the Auto-hold brake function, the driver
brake (p. 425) can release the brake pedal and the brakes
A flashing symbol indicates that • Parking on a hill (p. 427) will remain applied, for example, when the
a fault has been detected. See vehicle has stopped at a traffic light or inter-
the message in the instrument • Starter battery (p. 625)
section.
panel. • Volvo's service program (p. 606) When the vehicle stops, the brakes are acti-
A
vated automatically. The function can use
either the normal brakes or the parking brakes
to keep the vehicle stationary and works on
flat surfaces or hills. If the driver has their seat
belt fastened and/or if the driver's door is
B closed, the brakes will disengage automati-
cally when the vehicle starts driving.
Fault in the brake system. See
the message in the instrument
panel. NOTE
A When braking to a stop on an uphill or
downhill gradient, depress the brake pedal
with slightly more force than usual before
releasing to ensure that the vehicle cannot
move at all.

B
The parking brake is activated if
Information message in the • the vehicle is switched off.
instrument panel.
• the driver's door is opened
• the driver's seat belt is removed
A Canadian models. the vehicle has been stationary for a pro-
B US models.
•
longed period of time (5-10 minutes)

428
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Symbols in the instrument panel Activating and deactivating Auto- • The function will remain off until it is reac-
Symbol Meaning hold at a standstill tivated.
The Auto-hold brake function at a standstill is • When Auto-hold is switched off, Hill Start
This symbol illuminates when the activated with the button in the tunnel con- Assist (HSA) will remain active to help
function is using the normal sole. prevent the vehicle from rolling backward
brakes to keep the vehicle sta- when starting up a hill.
tionary.
Related information
This symbol illuminates when the Auto-hold brakes (p. 428)
•
function is using the parking
brake to keep the vehicle station-
ary.
A

– Press the button in the tunnel console to

A Canadian models.
B US models. activate or deactivate the function.
> The indicator light in the button will illu-
Related information minate when the function is activated.
• Activating and deactivating Auto-hold at a The function will remain active the next
standstill (p. 429) time the vehicle is started.
• Brakes (p. 421)
When shutting off
• Parking brake (p. 425) If the function is active and holding
• Hill Start Assist (p. 430) the vehicle stationary using the nor-
mal brakes (A symbol lit in the
instrument panel), the brake pedal
must be depressed while pressing the button
in order to deactivate Auto-hold.

429
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Hill Start Assist Braking assist after a collision Regenerative braking*

The function for assisting when starting the In a collision in which the activation level is The vehicle recovers kinetic energy during
vehicle on inclines (HSA4) helps prevent the reached for the pyrotechnic seat belt tension- braking in order to reduce fuel consumption
vehicle from rolling backward when starting ers or airbags, or if a collision with a large ani- and emissions.
on an uphill gradient. When backing up a hill, mal is detected, the vehicle's brakes will be The battery symbol is shown in the
HSA helps prevent the vehicle from rolling automatically activated. This function is driver display when the car is gener-
forward. intended to help prevent or reduce the effects ating power for the battery.
The function retains pressure from the brake of any subsequent collision.
pedal in the brake system for several seconds After a serious collision, it may no longer be The function is available in all drive modes
after the brake pedal has been released. possible to control and steer the vehicle. In together with gear selector position D or B.
order to avoid or mitigate a possible further
This temporary braking effect is released after Activating brake regeneration
collision with a vehicle or an object in the vehi-
a few seconds or when the driver begins driv- Brake regeneration is activated by gentle pres-
cle's path, the brake assist system is activated
ing. sure on the brake pedal or during engine brak-
automatically to help stop the vehicle safely.
ing.
Hill Start Assist is activated when the vehicle
If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a
is stopped on steep inclines. The function is Regeneration increases during engine braking
risk of being hit by passing traffic, the driver
available even when the Auto-hold brake func- if manual gear selector position B is selected.
can override the system by depressing the
tion is switched off.
accelerator pedal. Related information
Related information This function assumes that the brake system • Drive modes (p. 438)
• Auto-hold brakes (p. 428) is intact after a collision. • Shifting gears with automatic transmis-
• Brakes (p. 421) sion (p. 432)
Related information
• Rear Collision Warning* (p. 347)
• BLIS* (p. 348)
• Brake functions (p. 421)

4 Hill Start Assist

430 * Option/accessory.
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Transmission Automatic transmission • Automatic transmission symbols and mes-

The transmission is part of the vehicle's drive- Gear position is selected automatically to sages (p. 436)
line (power transmission) between the engine make driving as energy efficient as possible.
and the drive wheels. The function of the The transmission also has a manual mode.
transmission is to change gears depending
on speed and power needs.
The vehicle has an 8-speed automatic trans-
mission and an electric motor for rear-wheel
drive. The number of gears allows the engine's
torque and power band to be effectively uti-
lized.
Two of the gears are overdrive gears that save
fuel when driving at a constant engine speed.
Both the gear selector and the steering wheel
paddles can be used to shift up or down man-
ually. The selected gear selector position will
be displayed in the instrument panel. Overview of gear selector and gear shift pattern in
the instrument panel.
Related information The selected gear selector position is dis-
• Automatic transmission (p. 431) played in the instrument panel:
P, R, N, D or B.

Related information
• Shifting gears with automatic transmis-
sion (p. 432)
• Using the steering wheel paddles* to shift
(p. 433)
• Shiftlock (p. 435)
• The kickdown function (p. 435)
• The Launch function* (p. 435)

* Option/accessory. 431
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Shifting gears with automatic Gear selector positions WARNING

transmission Parking – P Always apply the parking brake when park-
Change gear position by pushing the spring- ing on an incline. Selecting a gear or put-
loaded gear selector forward or rearward, or ting the automatic transmission in P may
to the side for manual shifting. not be sufficient to keep the vehicle sta-
tionary in all situations.
Selecting gears
NOTE
The gear selector must be in position P in
order to lock the vehicle and set the alarm.

Help functions
The system will switch to the P position auto-
Gear selector and P position overview.
matically:
Parking is activated using the P button located
• if the ignition is switched off while D or R
next to the gear selector.
is selected.
In the P position, the transmission is mechani- if the driver unbuckles the seat belt and
Gear selector and gear selector positions overview. •
cally locked. opens the driver's door while the vehicle is
Select P position when the vehicle is parked. running with a gear other than P selected.
The vehicle can be started when it is in P posi- To park a vehicle with an unbuckled seat belt
tion. The vehicle must be stationary when P is and open door – end P mode by shifting to R
selected. or D again.
When parking – apply the parking brake If the vehicle is switched off in gear position
before shifting to position P. N, it will not automatically switch to the P
position. This makes it possible to wash the
vehicle in an automatic car wash.
Reverse – R
Select R when backing up. The vehicle must
be stationary when R is selected.

432
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Neutral – N With position B, it is possible to shift gears Using the steering wheel paddles*
In N position, the vehicle can roll freely. The manually. When the accelerator pedal is to shift
vehicle can be started when it is in N position. released, the electric motor brakes the vehicle The steering wheel paddles are a supplement
Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is sta- and the hybrid battery is recharged at the to the gear selector and make it possible to
tionary with the gear selector in the N posi- same time. shift manually without removing your hands
tion. B position is selected by moving the gear from the steering wheel.
To move to another gear position when N is selector rearward from D. The function is available in position D or B.
selected, the brake pedal must be depressed • Push the gear selector to the right toward
and the ignition in mode II. "+" (plus) and release to shift up one gear.
D drive mode • Push the gear selector to the left toward
D is the normal driving gear position. The "–" (minus) and release to shift down one
transmission shifts up or down automatically gear.
depending on acceleration and speed.
• Push the gear selector rearward to return
The vehicle must be stationary when the gear to D mode.
selector is moved from R to D.
For smooth shifting and engine performance,
Brake – B the transmission will shift down automatically
if the vehicle's speed becomes too low for the
selected gear.

Related information "-": Shift down one gear.

• Automatic transmission (p. 431) "+": Shift up one gear.
• Shiftlock (p. 435)
• Using the steering wheel paddles* to shift Change
(p. 433) To shift:
• The kickdown function (p. 435) – Pull one of the paddles toward the steer-
ing wheel and then release.
As long as the engine speed (rpm) is within
Brake position in instrument panel overview. the permissible range for the selected gear, a
gear shift will take place each time a paddle is

}}

* Option/accessory. 433
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| pulled. The current gear will be displayed in Related information

the instrument panel. • Automatic transmission (p. 431)
In the B position, the paddles are automati- • Shifting gears with automatic transmis-
cally activated. sion (p. 432)

Instrument panel when the paddles are activated for

shifting.

Turning off the steering wheel paddles

in the D position
Instrument panel when the paddles are activated for Manual deactivation
shifting in manual mode. – Pull the right paddle (+) toward the steer-
Activating the steering wheel paddles ing wheel and hold it there until the num-
ber in the instrument panel goes out.
in the D position
To be able to shift gears using the paddles, > The transmission will return to the D
they must be activated: position.

– Pull one of the paddles toward the steer- Automatic deactivation

ing wheel. The steering wheel paddles will switch off
after a short time if they are not being used.
> A number in the instrument panel indi-
The number of the current gear will no longer
cates the current gear being used.
be displayed in the instrument panel. If engine
braking is currently being used, the paddles
will remain active until engine braking stops.

434
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Shiftlock The kickdown function The Launch function*

The automatic transmission's shiftlock func- Kickdown can be used when maximum Launch can be used to provide maximum
tion helps prevent inadvertently moving the acceleration is needed e.g. when passing. acceleration from a standstill. The function is
gear selector between different positions. When the accelerator pedal is depressed all available for the drive modes: Hybrid,
the way to the floor (past the normal full accel- Constant AWD, Power and Individual.
Automatic shiftlock erator position), the transmission will auto-
The automatic shiftlock has a separate safety matically engage kickdown, i.e. immediately Activating Launch
system. shift down to a lower gear. Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
that the wheels are pointing straight ahead.
From Park – P or Neutral – N If the accelerator pedal is released from the
To move the gear selector from P or N to kickdown position, the transmission will auto- 1. Put the gear selector in D position.
another gear selector position, the brake pedal matically shift up again. 2. Depress the brake pedal fully.
must be depressed and the ignition in mode II.
For some transmission variants, the engine Safety function 3. Then fully depress the accelerator pedal.
must be running. The transmission control module is equipped
with a downshift protection feature to help 4. Release the brake pedal within 2 seconds.
If the gear selector is in N and the vehicle has prevent the engine from overheating.
been stationary for at least 3 seconds (with or NOTE
without the engine running), the gear selector In some conditions, the transmission will pre-
vent downshifting/kickdown if this would lead If the Launch function does not work, wait
will be locked in that position.
to such high engine speed (rpm) that the a few minutes to let the driveline reach
Messages in the instrument panel engine could be damaged. If the driver still working temperature before trying again.
If the gear selector is locked in position a mes- attempts downshifting or kickdown at a high
sage will appear in the instrument panel e.g. rpm, nothing will happen and the original gear
will remain selected.
CAUTION
Gear lever Press brake pedal to activate
gear lever. The driveline is exposed to wear when
With kickdown, the vehicle can downshift one
using Launch and the function is therefore
There is no mechanical shiftlock function. or more steps at a time depending on the
only available a limited number of times.
engine speed. The vehicle upshifts when the
Related information engine reaches its maximum rpm to prevent
• Automatic transmission (p. 431) engine damage. Related information
• Shifting gears with automatic transmis- • Automatic transmission (p. 431)
Related information
sion (p. 432)
• Automatic transmission (p. 431)

* Option/accessory. 435
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Automatic transmission symbols All Wheel Drive (AWD) Drive systems

and messages All-wheel drive (AWD5), also called four- The vehicle combines a combustion engine
If a problem occurs with the transmission, a wheel drive, means that power is distributed for the front wheels and an electric motor for
symbol and a message are displayed in the to all four wheels, which improves traction. the rear wheels.
instrument panel. The electric motor that powers the rear wheels
enables electronic all-wheel drive functionality. Two drive systems
CAUTION Depending on the selected drive mode and
All-wheel drive reacts differently depending on
Check the operating temperature of the which drive mode is selected. power available in the electric motor, the drive
transmission to help avoid damage to any systems can either be used separately or in
of the drive system components. If there is Related information tandem.
a risk of overheating, a warning symbol will • Drive modes (p. 438) The electric motor gets its energy from a
appear in the instrument panel and a text Low Speed Control (p. 450) hybrid battery located under the tunnel con-
•
message will be displayed. Follow the rec- sole. The hybrid can be charged from a wall
ommendations given. • Transmission (p. 431)
outlet or in a special charging station. The
combustion engine can also charge the hybrid
Symbol Meaning battery using a special high-voltage generator.
Both the combustion engine and the electric
A fault has occurred in the trans-
motor can generate power directly to the
mission.
wheels. An advanced control system coordi-
Read the message in the instru- nates both the drive systems to help optimize
ment panel. driving economy.
Hot or overheated transmission.
Read the message in the instru-
ment panel.
Temporary fault in driveline.
Read the message in the instru-
ment panel.

Related information
• Automatic transmission (p. 431)

436
 STARTING AND DRIVING

engine. Can provide the combustion Starting and stopping the

engine with extra electrical current. combustion engine
Electric motor - Powers the vehicle using An advanced control system determines the
electricity. Can provide extra torque and distance that the vehicle can be driven on the
power during acceleration. Provides elec- combustion engine, electric motor, or both at
trical all-wheel drive functionality. Regen- the same time. When driving on only the
erates braking energy into electrical cur- electric motor, the vehicle may automatically
rent. start the combustion engine due to outside
circumstances, e.g. low ambient tempera-
Related information tures. This is completely normal. The com-
• General information about electric vehi- bustion engine will also always start when
cles (p. 394) the hybrid battery is nearly fully discharged.
Hybrid battery - The hybrid battery's func- • Starting and stopping the combustion
tion is to store electrical current. This engine (p. 437) Climate settings at low temperatures
energy is provided by plugging the charg- At low ambient temperatures, the combustion
• Drive modes (p. 438) engine will sometimes start automatically to
ing cable into an electrical outlet, through
• Transmission (p. 431) help achieve the desired passenger compart-
regenerative braking or from the high-volt-
age generator. This provides current to ment temperature and air quality. The amount
power the electric motor and to temporar- of time the combustion engine is running can
ily power the electrical air conditioning to be affected by
precondition the passenger compartment. • lowering the temperature
Combustion engine - The combustion • reducing blower speed
engine starts when the charge level in the • activating Pure drive mode.
hybrid battery is too low to provide the
power output requested by the driver. Using the electric motor in hot or cold
High-voltage generator6 - Charges the weather
hybrid battery. Starter for the combustion At very low or high ambient temperatures, the
electric motor's driving range and power may
be reduced and affect how often the combus-
tion engine automatically starts.

5 All Wheel Drive

6 CISG (Crank Integrated Starter Generator) – combined high-voltage generator and starter. }}

437
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Emission control system Drive modes Available drive modes

To help ensure that the emission control sys- Drive modes affect the vehicle's driving cha-
tem is as energy-efficient as possible, the racteristics in different ways to enhance and WARNING
combustion engine will run for several minutes simplify the driving experience in certain
after it is started. The amount of time the com- Please be aware that there is no sound
types of situations. from the engine when the vehicle is being
bustion engine needs to be used varies Drive modes enable easy access to the vehi- powered by the electric motor and it may
depending on the temperature of the three- cle's many functions and settings in different be difficult to detect by children, pedes-
way catalytic converter. driving situations. Each drive mode is adapted trians, cyclists and animals. This is particu-
to help optimize driving characteristics. larly true at low speeds e.g. in parking lots.
WARNING
• Steering
California Proposition 65 WARNING
• Engine/transmission/all-wheel drive
Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas- Do not leave the vehicle in an unventilated
senger vehicle can expose you to chemi- • Brakes
area with a drive mode activated and the
cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon- • Pneumatic suspension* and shock absorb- combustion engine switched off. The
oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are ers engine will start automatically if the charge
known to the State of California to cause level in the hybrid battery is low and the
cancer and birth defects or other reproduc- • Instrument panel
resulting exhaust gases can be very harm-
tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid • Climate control settings ful to people and animals.
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine
except as necessary, service your vehicle in Select the drive mode that is adapted to the
a well ventilated area and wear gloves or current driving conditions. Keep in mind that
wash your hands frequently when servicing not all drive modes are available in all situa-
your vehicle. For more information go to tions.
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
vehicle.

Related information
• Drive systems (p. 436)
• Economical driving (p. 453)
• Range (p. 454)
• Drive modes (p. 438)

438 * Option/accessory.
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Hybrid This drive mode is designed for low energy

• This is the default mode in which the elec- consumption with a mix between the electric
tric motor and combustion engine work motor and gasoline engine, without compro-
together. mising on climate comfort or driving experi-
ence. When faster acceleration is requested
The vehicle starts in Hybrid mode. The control
by the driver, the electric driveline will be uti-
system uses both the electric motor and the
lized to help provide maximum additional
gasoline engine – separately or in tandem –
power.
and adapts utilization with regard to perform-
ance, fuel consumption and comfort. At high The vehicle also monitors the driving condi-
speeds, ground clearance is automatically tions and automatically engages all-wheel
lowered7 to reduce air resistance. Driving drive if necessary. All-wheel drive and extra
capacity on the electric motor alone is deter- electric power are always available regardless
mined by factors such as the hybrid battery's of the battery's charging status. The instrument panel gauge when both the electric
motor and the combustion engine are being used.
charge level, the need for heat or cooling in Information in the instrument panel
the passenger compartment, etc. The instrument panel also shows
When driving in Hybrid mode, a hybrid gauge
how much current is being restored
If there is sufficient charge in the battery, it is will be displayed in the instrument panel. The
to the battery (regenerated) during
possible to drive solely on electric power. gauge will indicate the amount of electrical
light braking.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed, only current required when the driver depresses
the electric motor will be activated until the the accelerator pedal. The marker between the
battery reaches a certain charge level. Above lightning and the drop shows how much cur-
this level, the current in the battery cannot rent is available.
supply the power requested by the accelerator
pedal and the combustion engine will start.
When the hybrid battery's charge level is low,
the combustion engine will start more fre-
quently to save the remaining current in the
battery. Charge the hybrid battery from a
120-240 volt outlet using a charging cable, or
activate Charge in Function view to reset the
option of only using the electric motor.

7 For vehicles with pneumatic suspension. }}

439
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Pure NOTE NOTE

• Uses the electric motor only, with the low-
est possible energy consumption and car- The combustion engine may start tempo- When the Pure drive mode is activated,
bon dioxide emissions. rarily in certain situations when Pure drive settings for certain climate system and
mode is used. This is to provide the wheels electricity consuming functions are
This drive mode prioritizes the use of the with the desired torque in driving situations reduced. Some of these settings can be
hybrid battery. Ground clearance is lowered7 that require higher loads, such as when reset manually, but full functionality will
to reduce air resistance and certain climate towing a trailer or driving up a hill. only be restored by leaving Pure mode or
system functions are reduced to provide the adapting the Individual drive mode to full
longest possible driving distance using only climate system functionality.
electricity. This drive mode is adapted for the longest
possible driving distance with electric propul-
Pure mode is available when the hybrid bat- sion and is primarily intended for use in city If condensation forms on the windows, tap the
tery is sufficiently charged. Even in Pure driving. Pure helps provide the lowest possi- max defroster button, which will function nor-
mode, the combustion engine will start if the ble consumption even when the hybrid battery mally.
charge level in the battery gets too low. The is fully discharged. ECO climate is activated to
combustion engine will also start control the climate in the passenger compart-
• if the vehicle's speed goes above ment, and in slippery road conditions slightly
125 km/h (78 mph) more wheel spin may be permitted before all-
wheel drive is automatically activated.
• if the driver requests more power than the
electric motor can provide ECO Climate
In Pure mode, ECO climate is automatically
• if factors such as cold weather affect the
activated in the passenger compartment to
system or components.
help reduce energy consumption.

7 For vehicles with pneumatic suspension.

440
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Off Road NOTE available regardless of the hybrid battery's

• Prioritizes the vehicle's ability to traverse charge status.
difficult terrain or poor roads. This drive mode is not designed to be used
for normal street driving. Both the combustion engine and the electric
In this mode, ground clearance7
is high, steer- motor are engaged to enable all-wheel drive,
ing is light, and all-wheel drive and Hill which results in higher fuel consumption.
Descent Control are activated. NOTE In the other drive modes, the vehicle automati-
This drive mode is only available at low Due to the increased ground clearance, if cally adapts the need for all-wheel drive
speeds, up to 40 km/h (25 mph). If this speed the Off Road mode was selected when according to the road surface, and can acti-
is exceeded, Off Road mode will be cancelled the engine was switched off, the suspen- vate the electric motor or start the combustion
and Constant AWD mode will be activated sion will lower when the engine is restar- engine as needed.
instead. ted. Power
All-wheel drive requires both the combustion • The vehicle gets sportier driving characte-
and electric motor to be in continuous opera- CAUTION ristics and a faster acceleration response.
tion, which results in higher fuel consumption. This drive mode adapts the combined power
Do not use the Off Road drive mode when
In Off Road mode, a compass will be dis- from the combustion engine and the electric
towing a trailer without an electrical con-
played between the speedometer and the motor by providing power to both the front
nection. This could result in damage to the
tachometer in the instrument panel. The per- and rear wheels. Gear shifting will be faster
pneumatic suspension system's bellows.
missible speed range will be shown in the and more distinct and the transmission will
speedometer. prioritize gears with a higher traction force.
Constant AWD Steering response is faster, suspension is
This drive mode is adapted for optimal control • Improves the vehicle's traction and han- stiffer and ground clearance is lower7 to help
when driving at low speeds on very poor roads dling by increasing all-wheel drive. reduce body roll when cornering.
or difficult terrain. It raises the chassis7,
This drive mode locks the vehicle in all-wheel Both the combustion engine and the electric
reduces driveline throttle response, and locks
drive. An adapted distribution between front motor are engaged to enable all-wheel drive,
the vehicle in all-wheel drive. The Hill Descent
and rear axle torque provides effective control, which results in higher fuel consumption.
Control function facilitates controlled driving
stability and traction, e.g. on slippery roads or
on steep downgrades.
when towing a heavy trailer or another vehicle.
The Constant AWD drive mode is always

7 For vehicles with pneumatic suspension. }}

441
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| This drive mode is adapted for optimal per- 3. Under Presets, select one of the following
formance and response during acceleration. It drive modes as a basis: Pure, Hybrid,
changes the throttle response, gear shifting Power or Polestar Engineered*.
program and turbo boost system. Chassis set-
The following settings can be modified:
tings and steering and brake response are also
optimized. The Power drive mode is always • Driver Display
available regardless of the hybrid battery's • Steering Force
charge status.
• Powertrain Characteristics
Power mode is also available in a Polestar
• Brake Characteristics
Engineered* version.
• Suspension Control
Individual
• Customizes drive mode to personal prefer- • ECO Climate
ences.
Using the electric or combustion
Select one of the drive modes as a basis and engine
adjust the settings to achieve your preferred An advanced control system determines the
driving characteristics. These settings will be distance that the vehicle can be driven on the
stored in your driver profile. combustion engine, electric motor, or both at
Individual drive mode is only available if it has the same time.
been activated in the center display. Its primary function is to use the motor/engine
Settings view8 for Individual drive mode. and the current available in the hybrid battery
as efficiently as possible based on the charac-
1. Tap Settings in the Top view.
teristics of the various drive modes and the
2. Tap My Car Individual Drive Mode power output requested by the driver by
and select Individual Drive Mode. pressing the accelerator pedal.
In certain cases, temporary limitations in the
system or mandatory functions to help main-
tain a low overall emissions level may result in
greater use of the combustion engine.

8 The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.

442 * Option/accessory.
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Related information Changing drive mode 3. Press the drive mode control or tap its
• Changing drive mode (p. 443) Select the drive mode that is adapted to the button in the center display to confirm the
Range (p. 454) current driving conditions. selection.
•
> The selected drive mode is shown in
• Energy distribution using map data* The drive mode is changed using the control
the instrument panel.
(p. 444) in the tunnel console.
• Hybrid gauge (p. 91) Keep in mind that not all drive modes are Related information
available in all situations. • Drive modes (p. 438)
• General information about electric vehi-
cles (p. 394) To change drive mode: • Activating and deactivating Low Speed
• Regenerative braking* (p. 430) Control using the function button (p. 451)
• Activating and deactivating Hill Descent
Control using the function button (p. 452)

1. Press the DRIVE MODE control.

> A pop-up menu will appear in the cen-
ter display.
2. Roll the wheel upward or downward to
the desired drive mode.

* Option/accessory. 443
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Energy distribution using map Usage tips

data* If you commute and it is not possible to
In Hybrid drive mode, the vehicle is powered charge the vehicle at work, enter your work-
by both the electric motor and the gasoline place as a waypoint and your home as the
engine. If a destination has been selected in destination. Discharging of the hybrid battery
the navigation system*, the Predictive Effi- will then be distributed over the entire com-
ciency9 function can use map data to distrib- mute to and from work.
ute electric power consumption throughout Add similar commutes, i.e. the route between
the trip. two charges, as Favorites in the navigation
In addition to map data, the function also system to facilitate access.
takes into account speed limits, traffic condi-
tions and differences in altitude. Related information
• Regenerative braking* (p. 430)
The electric motor is primarily used when driv-
ing at low speeds, for example during stop- • Drive modes (p. 438)
and-go city driving. The gasoline engine is pri- • Range (p. 454)
marily used when driving at high speeds and
can, under favorable conditions, generate elec-
tricity to the electric motor.

Requirements for the function

Certain conditions must be met for the func-
tion to be possible:
• A destination must be set in the navigation
system and the distance to the destination
must be longer than the possible range
using only the electric motor.
• Hybrid drive mode must be selected.
• The Hold and Charge functions must be
disabled.

9 Only certain markets.

444 * Option/accessory.
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Leveling control* and suspension pension reduces the vehicle's ground clear- is loaded, if loading mode is used, which drive
The vehicle's leveling control system adjusts ance at higher speeds to reduce air resistance mode is selected after the engine is started,
the suspension and shock absorbers auto- and increase stability. The shock absorbers are etc.
matically to help optimize comfort and con- normally set to help optimize comfort and are
The level may also be adjusted a period after
trol while driving. Leveling can also be con- adjusted continuously according to the road
the vehicle is parked. This is to compensate
trolled manually to facilitate loading or get- surface and the vehicle's acceleration, braking
for any height changes that may occur due to
ting in and out of the vehicle. and cornering.
temperature changes in the air springs when
The instrument panel indi- the vehicle cools.
Manually adjustable shock absorbers* cates when the suspension
The suspension on Polestar Engineered* vehi- level is being adjusted. Transporting
cles can be manually adjusted. There are three When transporting the vehicle on a ferry, train
recommended modes: Performance, or truck, only secure (lash) the vehicle around
engineered and Comfort. the tires, not using any other parts of the chas-
Performance mode sis. Changes in the pneumatic suspension
The following apply if a door or the tailgate is may occur during transport, which could
In Performance mode, the vehicle's suspen-
opened: adversely affect the lashing and result in dam-
sion feels stiffer.
• If a door is opened, the level can only be age.
Engineered, factory setting
adjusted upwards.
Engineered is designed for daily driving. Symbols and messages
• If the tailgate is open, the level can only be If a problem occurs with the leveling control, a
Comfort mode
adjusted downwards. message will be displayed in the instrument
In Comfort mode, the vehicle's suspension
feels softer. panel.
Parking
When parking, make sure that there is ade-
Pneumatic suspension and shock
quate space above and below the vehicle
absorbers since ground clearance may vary depending
The system is adapted to the selected drive on e.g. ambient temperature, how the vehicle
mode and vehicle speed. The pneumatic sus-

}}

* Option/accessory. 445
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Symbol Message Meaning

Suspension Active chassis has been switched off manually by the user.
Deactivated by user

Suspension Active chassis performance has been temporarily reduced due to extensive system use.
Temporarily reduced performance

Suspension A fault has occurred. Visit a workshopA as soon as possible.

Service required

Suspension failure A critical fault has occurred. Stop safely, and have the car transported (raised with all
Stop safely wheels on the flatbed) to a workshopA.

446
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Symbol Message Meaning

Suspension A fault has occurred. If the message appears while driving, contact a workshopA.
Slow down Vehicle too high

Suspension Level control to target height is in progress.

Auto adjusting vehicle level

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information
• Leveling control settings* (p. 448)
• Drive modes (p. 438)
• Adjusting suspension settings Polestar
Engineered* (p. 448)

* Option/accessory. 447
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Leveling control settings* 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. Adjusting suspension settings
Turn off leveling control before lifting the 2. Tap My Car Mirrors and Convenience.
Polestar Engineered*
vehicle with a jack to help avoid problems The shock absorber settings can be adjusted
with the pneumatic suspension. 3. Select Easy Entry and Exit Suspension for driving in other conditions or on particular
Control. road surfaces.
The vehicle can be lowered or raised to make
it easier to load or for passengers to get in > When the vehicle is parked and the
engine is turned off, the level is low- Location of adjustment knobs
and out. There are four adjustment knobs, two for the
ered. (Level adjustment will stop if a
Adjusting loading mode side door is opened and will resume front shock absorbers and two for the rear.
after a slight delay when the door has There are adjustment knobs above each
been closed.) When the engine is wheel. The adjustment knobs for the front
started and the vehicle begins to move, wheels are located under the engine compart-
the level will be raised to the height set ment hood. The adjustment knobs for the rear
by the selected drive mode. wheels are located above each wheel in the
wheel housing.
Disable Leveling Control
In certain situations this function must be
turned off e.g. before the vehicle is raised
using a jack*. The level difference caused by
raising the vehicle with a jack could cause
problems with the pneumatic suspension.
Turning off the function in the center display:
Use the buttons in the cargo compartment to
1. Tap Settings in the Top view.
raise or lower the rear section of the vehicle to
facilitate loading or unloading the vehicle or 2. Tap My Car Parking Brake and
connecting or disconnecting a trailer. Suspension.
Center display settings 3. Select Disable Leveling Control.
Location of adjustment knob, front wheel.
Easy Entry and Exit Suspension Control Related information
The vehicle can be lowered to make it easier • Leveling control* and suspension (p. 445)
to get in and out.
• Loading recommendations (p. 594)
Activating easy entry in the center display:

448 * Option/accessory.
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Turn the adjustment knob clockwise or counterclock- The rubber cap is located above the adjustment
wise to change the adjustment position. knob.
Turn the knob clockwise until it stops to
Location of adjustment knob, rear wheel. get to adjustment position 0.
Turn the knob counterclockwise to the
NOTE
desired adjustment position. You should
Each adjustment knob has 22 adjustment feel and hear a click each time the adjust-
positions. The closer to position 0 the knob ment position is changed.
is set, the stiffer the suspension. > Then follow the same procedure for the
second shock absorber.
Adjusting front suspension settings Turn the adjustment knob clockwise or counterclock-
Make sure the adjustment knob is set to 0 Adjusting rear suspension settings
wise to change the adjustment position.
before starting the adjustment. This makes it The rear adjustment knobs are located above
easier to determine what adjustment position the tire inside the wheel housing. To access Remove the protective rubber cap over
is set. the rear adjustment knobs, the vehicle must the adjustment knob.
be raised using a jack; see separate section.
Turn the knob clockwise until it stops to
get to adjustment position 0.

}}

449
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Turn the adjustment knob counterclock- Low Speed Control NOTE

wise to the desired adjustment position. The low-speed function (LSC10) facilitates
You should feel and hear a click each time When LSC with HDC is activated in the
and improves control and traction on rough
the adjustment position is changed. Off Road drive mode, the feel of the accel-
roads and slippery surfaces, e.g. when towing
erator pedal and engine response will
> When the desired position has been a trailer on grass or up boat ramps.
change.
reached, replace the protective rubber
The function is included in the Off Road drive
cap. Then follow the same procedure
mode.
for the second shock absorber. NOTE
Low Speed Control is designed for driving on
rough roads and when towing trailers at low This drive mode is not designed to be used
NOTE speeds, up to approximately 40 km/h (25 for normal street driving.
For optimal performance, Volvo recom- mph).
mends setting the adjustment knobs to the Low Speed Control prioritizes low gear posi-
same position for each axle. NOTE
tions and traction. If the vehicle is all-wheel
drive, power is automatically distributed The function is deactivated when driving at
Recommended positions evenly to provide as much traction as possible high speeds and must be reactivated at
on all wheels and reduce the risk of wheel lower speeds if so desired.
Position Front Rear
spin. The accelerator pedal will be less respon-
Performance adjustment adjustment sive to improve traction and speed control at Related information
mode position 4 position 4 low speeds. • Activating and deactivating Low Speed
Engineered, adjustment adjustment The function is activated together with Hill Control using the function button (p. 451)
factory setting position 10 position 10 Descent Control (HDC11), which makes it pos- • Changing drive mode (p. 443)
sible to control speed going down steep hills • Hill Descent Control (p. 451)
Comfort mode adjustment adjustment using the accelerator pedal and reduces the
position 15 position 15 need to use the brake pedal. The system • All Wheel Drive (AWD) (p. 436)
makes it possible to maintain a low and uni-
Related information form speed when driving down steep hills.
• Hoisting the vehicle (p. 614)
• Leveling control* and suspension (p. 445)

10 Low Speed Control

11 Hill Descent Control

450 * Option/accessory.
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Activating and deactivating Low Related information Hill Descent Control

Speed Control using the function • Low Speed Control (p. 450) The function for assisting when driving down-
button • Changing drive mode (p. 443) hill (HDC12) is a low-speed function with
increased engine braking. The function
There is a function button for driving at low
makes it possible to increase or decrease the
speeds with Hill Descent Control in the cen-
vehicle's speed on steep downhill gradients
ter display's Function view if the vehicle is
by only using the accelerator pedal, without
not equipped with a drive mode control in the
applying the brakes.
tunnel console.
The function is included in the Off Road drive
Selecting Low Speed Control in the mode.
center display's Function view HDC is designed for driving on rough roads at
– Tap the Hill Descent Control button to low speeds and downhill gradients with slip-
activate or deactivate the function. pery or otherwise difficult road surfaces. The
driver does not need to use the brake pedal
but can instead focus on steering.

WARNING
HDC is only intended to be a supplemen-
tary braking aid and it does not function in
> An indicator light in the button will illu- all situations.
minate when the function is activated. The driver is always ultimately responsible
When the engine is switched off, the function for operating the vehicle in a safe manner.
will be automatically deactivated.
Function
NOTE Hill Descent Control allows the vehicle to
move forward or backward at very low speeds
The function is deactivated when driving at
assisted by the brake system. The driver can
high speeds and must be reactivated at
increase the speed by pressing the accelerator
lower speeds if so desired.
pedal. When the accelerator pedal is released,

12 Hill Descent Control }}

451
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| the vehicle will return to very low speed NOTE Activating and deactivating Hill
regardless of how steep the hill is and without Descent Control using the function
the brakes needing to be applied. The brake This drive mode is not designed to be used button
lights will illuminate when the function is acti- for normal street driving.
There is a function button for assistance on
vated. steep gradients with Hill Descent Control in
The driver can brake to stop or slow the vehi- NOTE the center display's Function view if the vehi-
cle at any time by depressing the brake pedal. cle is not equipped with a drive mode control
The function is deactivated when driving at
in the tunnel console.
HDC is activated along with Low Speed Con- high speeds and must be reactivated at
trol (LSC13), which facilitates and improves lower speeds if so desired. Selecting Hill Descent Control in the
traction and control on rough and slippery sur- center display's Function view
faces. The system is intended to be used at Related information HDC only works at low speeds.
low speeds, up to approximately 40 km/h (25 Activating and deactivating Hill Descent
• – Tap the Hill Descent Control button to
mph). Control using the function button (p. 452) activate or deactivate the function.
To keep in mind when using HDC • Changing drive mode (p. 443)
• If the function is switched off while driving • Low Speed Control (p. 450)
on a steep downhill gradient, braking
• All Wheel Drive (AWD) (p. 436)
effect will be gradually reduced.
• HDC can be used in gear positions D and
R, and in manual gears 1 or 2.
• It is not possible to manually shift to third > An indicator light in the button will illu-
gear or higher when HDC is active. minate when the function is activated.
When the engine is switched off, the function
NOTE will be automatically deactivated.
When LSC with HDC is activated in the
Off Road drive mode, the feel of the accel- NOTE
erator pedal and engine response will
The function is deactivated when driving at
change.
high speeds and must be reactivated at
lower speeds if so desired.

13 Low Speed Control

452
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Related information Economical driving • Maintain a steady speed and a generous

• Hill Descent Control (p. 451) To achieve the longest possible driving range, following distance to traffic ahead to mini-
Changing drive mode (p. 443) the driver should plan the trip and adapt driv- mize braking.
•
ing style and speed to the current situation. • When braking, the hybrid battery is
charged by braking lightly using the brake
Before driving pedal.
• Whenever possible, precondition the vehi-
cle before driving by connecting the • Higher speeds increase energy consump-
charging cable to an electrical outlet. tion because air resistance increases with
speed.
• If preconditioning is not possible when it
is cold outside, use seat and steering • In a cold climate, reduce heating of the
wheel heating first. Avoid heating the windshield/rear window, mirrors, seats
entire passenger compartment to reduce and the steering wheel.
the amount of current being taken from • Avoid driving with the windows open.
the hybrid battery. • Do not use the accelerator pedal to keep
• The type of tires and inflation pressure the vehicle stationary on an uphill gradi-
used could affect energy consumption – ent. Instead, activate the auto-hold brake
consult an authorized Volvo retailer for function at a standstill.
advice on suitable tires. • If possible, turn off the climate system
• Remove unnecessary items from the vehi- when driving shorter distances after pre-
cle - the heavier the load, the higher the conditioning.
fuel consumption.
After driving
While driving • If possible, park in a climate-controlled
• Activate Pure drive mode. garage with vehicle charging outlets or
stations.
• Activate the Hold function at high speeds
when traveling farther than is possible Related information
using the hybrid battery's capacity. • Regenerative braking* (p. 430)
• Whenever possible, avoid using the • Range (p. 454)
Charge function to charge the hybrid bat-
tery. • Checking tire pressure (p. 565)

}}

* Option/accessory. 453
 STARTING AND DRIVING

• Displaying trip statistics in the center dis- Range charge level of the hybrid battery, the more
play (p. 96) A number of factors can affect vehicle range. quickly the range adapts to changed driving
• Auto-hold brakes (p. 428) The ability to achieve a long driving range var- patterns.
Hold and Charge (p. 455) ies according to the outside conditions and to Factors affecting driving range
•
how the vehicle is driven. There are a number of other factors in addition
The certified value for the vehicle's range to historical trip data that affect range. The
should not be considered an expected driving longest range is achieved under very favorable
range. The certified value is obtained during conditions when all factors positively influence
special test cycles and is primarily intended to range.
be used for comparisons between different
vehicles. Factors affecting range include:
• speed
Range in the instrument panel
• climate control settings
• topography
• preconditioning
• tires and tire pressure
• the current traffic situation
• temperature and weather
• road conditions.

When the vehicle leaves the factory, or after a

factory reset, range is based on the certified
value
Once the vehicle has been driven for a while,
range is instead based on historical driving
patterns. The amount of history used depends
on the battery's charge level. The lower the

454
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Range based on speed and ambient Higher ambient temperature and deactivated Hold and Charge
temperature climate system are also more favorable for In certain situations, it can be useful to con-
range. trol the hybrid battery's charge level while
driving. This is possible with the Hold and
Related information
Charge functions.
• Displaying trip statistics in the center dis-
Hold and Charge are available in all drive
play (p. 96)
modes. The functions will switch off if Pure
• Checking tire pressure (p. 565) drive mode is activated.

Activating Hold and Charge

The functions can be activated in the center
display's Function view.
Hold
Battery level sustained for
20 °C (68 °F) ambient temperature and later use.
passenger compartment climate control
This function retains the
off.
charge in the hybrid battery
20 °C (68 °F) ambient temperature and for the electric motor and
passenger compartment climate control saves available electrical cur-
on. rent for use at a later time, such as when driv-
35 °C (95 °F) ambient temperature and ing in an urban area.
passenger compartment climate control The vehicle will function as in normal hybrid
on. driving with a discharged battery - in addition
-10 °C (14 °F) ambient temperature and to reusing energy from e.g. regenerative brak-
passenger compartment climate control ing, the combustion engine will be used more
on. frequently to maintain the charge in the bat-
The graph shows the approximate relationship tery.
between constant speed and driving range.
Driving at a lower constant speed helps
increase the electric motor's driving range.

}}

455
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Charge Preparing for a long trip

Engine charges hybrid It is important to have the vehicle's systems
battery. and equipment checked carefully before driv-
This function charges the ing long distances.
hybrid battery with the help Check that
of the combustion engine for • the engine is running properly and that
increased use of the electric fuel consumption is normal
motor at a later time.
• there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid)
Symbols in the instrument panel • the brake pedal is functioning properly
• all lights work
• tire tread depth and air pressure are at
The symbol is displayed in the hybrid battery
gauge when Charge is activated. correct levels. Change to snow tires when
driving in areas where there is a risk of
Related information snowy or icy roads
• Range (p. 454) • the start battery is sufficiently charged
• Hybrid gauge (p. 91) • the wiper blades are in good condition

Related information
• Checking tire pressure (p. 565)
• Filling washer fluid (p. 666)
The symbol is displayed in the hybrid battery • Winter driving (p. 457)
gauge when Hold is activated.
• Economical driving (p. 453)
• Vehicle modem settings (p. 541)
• Loading recommendations (p. 594)
• Driving with a trailer (p. 472)
• Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
• Tire sealing system (p. 579)

456 * Option/accessory.
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Winter driving Slippery driving conditions Driving through standing water

It is important to check the vehicle before To help optimize traction and roadholding, It may be necessary to drive the vehicle
driving in cold/snowy conditions to make Volvo recommends using snow tires on all through standing water e.g. deep puddles or
sure it can be driven safely. wheels whenever there is a risk of snow or ice flooding on the road. This must be done with
Before the cold season arrives: on the road. great caution.
To help prevent damage to the vehicle when
• Make sure the engine coolant contains
NOTE driving through water:
50% antifreeze. This mixture helps pro-
tect the engine from frost erosion down to Certain countries require use of winter tires • Do not drive in water higher than the floor
approx. –35 °C (–31 °F). Do not mix dif- by law. Not all countries permit the use of of the vehicle. If possible, check the depth
ferent types of antifreeze as this could studded tires. of the water at its deepest point before
pose a health risk. driving through it. Be particularly careful
• Keep the fuel tank well filled to prevent Practice driving on slippery surfaces under when driving through flowing water.
condensation from forming. controlled conditions to learn how the vehicle • Always select the Off Road drive mode
• Check the viscosity of the engine oil. Oil reacts. before driving in water to ensure the gaso-
with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves line engine is running.
cold-weather starting and reduces fuel
Related information
• Do not drive faster than walking speed.
• Engine oil specifications (p. 678)
consumption when driving with a cold • Do not stop the vehicle in the water. Drive
engine. • Snow tires (p. 578)
carefully forward or back the vehicle out of
• Check the condition and charge level of • Snow chains (p. 578) the water.
the start battery. Cold weather places • Braking on salted roads (p. 424) • Remember that waves created by passing
greater demands on the start battery and vehicles could cause the water level to rise
• Braking on wet roads (p. 424)
reduces its capacity. above the vehicle's floor level.
• Filling washer fluid (p. 666)
• Use washer fluid containing antifreeze to • Avoid driving through salt water to help
help prevent ice from forming in the • Starter battery (p. 625)
avoid the risk of corrosion.
washer fluid reservoir. • Replacing windshield wiper blades
See separate section for engine oil recommen- (p. 664)
dations. • Changing rear window wipers (p. 663)
• Refilling coolant (p. 623)

}}

457
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| CAUTION Related information Opening/closing the fuel filler door

• Recovery (p. 477) A button on the instrument panel is used to
Parts of the vehicle (e.g. engine, transmis-
• Low Speed Control (p. 450) unlock the fuel filler door.
sion, driveline, electrical components, etc.)
An arrow next to the fuel
can be damaged if the vehicle is driven
pump symbol in the instru-
through water higher than its floor level.
ment panel indicates the side
Damage to any components caused by
of the vehicle on which the
flooding, vapor lock or insufficient oil is not
fuel filler door is located.
covered under warranty.
If the engine stalls while the vehicle is in
water, do not attempt to restart it. Have
the vehicle towed on the bed of a tow
truck to a workshop - an authorized Volvo
workshop is recommended.

CAUTION
Because it can be difficult to determine the
water depth, Volvo recommends not driv-
ing through standing or running water. The
driver is always responsible for operating
the vehicle in a safe manner and adhering
to all applicable laws and regulations.

When you have passed the water, press lightly

on the brake pedal and check that the brakes
are functioning properly. Water, mud, slush,
etc. can make the brake linings slippery,
resulting in delayed braking effect.
If the vehicle is equipped with a trailer cou-
pling contact, clean the contact after driving in
water or mud.

458
 STARTING AND DRIVING

NOTE Refueling
The fuel tank is equipped with a fuel filling
Refueling must be done within approxi-
system without a cover.
mately 15 minutes of opening the fuel filler
door. After this time, the valve opened by Refueling the vehicle at a service
pushing the button for opening the fuel station
filler door will close and it will no longer be
possible to refuel without the pump's noz-
zle switching off.
If the valve is closed before refueling is
complete - press the button again and wait
until the driver display shows the message
Fuel tank Ready for refueling.
1. Press the button on the dashboard.
> Pressure equalization in the fuel tank
causes a slight delay before the fuel 2. After refueling, press the fuel filler door
filler door opens. The message lightly to close it.
Preparing for refuel Fuel lid will be Related information
unlocked when ready will appear in Refueling (p. 459) It is important to insert the pump's nozzle past both
•
the instrument panel. When the system of the two flaps in the fuel filler pipe before beginning
is ready, the message Fuel tank Ready fueling.
for refueling will be shown. If the gas-
oline engine is activated when the but-
ton is pressed, it will usually be deacti-
vated and the vehicle will switch to
electric propulsion.

}}

459
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Instructions for fueling: 4. Avoid overfilling the tank. Do not press the WARNING
handle on the filler nozzle again after it has
1. Turn off the engine and open the fuel filler California Proposition 65
initially stopped pumping.
door.
> The fuel tank is now filled. Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-
senger vehicle can expose you to chemi-
NOTE cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon-
NOTE oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are
Refueling must be done within approxi-
An over-full tank may overflow in hot known to the State of California to cause
mately 15 minutes of opening the fuel filler cancer and birth defects or other reproduc-
door. After this time, the valve opened by weather.
tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
pushing the button for opening the fuel breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine
filler door will close and it will no longer be except as necessary, service your vehicle in
CAUTION a well ventilated area and wear gloves or
possible to refuel without the pump's noz-
zle switching off. Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. In wash your hands frequently when servicing
addition to causing damage to the environ- your vehicle. For more information go to
If the valve is closed before refueling is www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
ment, gasolines containing alcohol can
complete - press the button again and wait vehicle.
cause damage to painted surfaces, which
until the driver display shows the message
may not be covered under the New Vehicle
Fuel tank Ready for refueling. Related information
Limited Warranty.
• Opening/closing the fuel filler door
2. Select a fuel approved for use in the vehi- (p. 458)
cle. For more information on approved Refueling from a fuel container • Fuel (p. 461)
fuels, see the section on “Fuel”.
When filling from a fuel container, use the fun-
3. Insert the pump's nozzle into the fuel filler nel provided in a foam block under the floor
pipe's opening. There are two flaps just hatch in the cargo compartment.
inside the fuel filler pipe and the pump's
1. Open the fuel filler door.
nozzle must push both of these flaps open
before fuel can be added. 2. Insert the funnel into the fuel filler pipe's
opening. There are two flaps just inside
the fuel filler pipe and the tube section of
the funnel must push both of these flaps
open before fuel can be added.

460
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Fuel system. Repeated use of leaded gasoline will meet seasonal air quality standards, some
Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas- lessen the effectiveness of the emission con- areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel.
oline to control engine deposits. trol system and could result in loss of emission
Volvo permits the use of the following "oxy-
warranty coverage. State and local vehicle
genated" fuels. However, the specified octane
Deposit control gasoline (gasoline inspection programs will make detection of
ratings must still be met.
with detergent additives) misfueling easier, possibly resulting in emis-
Detergent gasoline is effective in keeping sion test failure for misfueled vehicles. Alcohol - Ethanol
injectors and intake valves clean. Consistent Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume
use of deposit control gasolines will help NOTE may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to
ensure good driveability and fuel economy. If as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".
Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain
you are not sure whether the gasoline contains Ethers - MTBE/ETBE: Fuels containing up to
an octane enhancing additive called
deposit control additives, check with the serv- 22% MTBE/ETBE by volume may be used.
methyl-cyclopentadienyl manganese tricar-
ice station operator.
bonyl (MMT). If such fuels are used, your
Methanol
Emission Control System performance
NOTE Do not use gasolines containing methanol
may be affected, and the Check Engine
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice
Volvo recommends not using external fuel Light (malfunction indicator light) located
can result in vehicle performance deterioration
injector cleaning systems, e.g. do not add on your instrument panel may light. If this
and can damage critical parts in the fuel sys-
detergent additives to gasoline before or occurs, please return your vehicle to a
tem. Such damage may not be covered under
after refueling. trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
cian for service.
Unleaded fuel Related information
All Volvo vehicles have a three-way catalytic Gasoline containing alcohol and • Octane rating (p. 462)
converter and must only use unleaded gaso- ethers, "Oxygenated fuels" • Opening/closing the fuel filler door
line. US and Canadian regulations require that Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing (p. 458)
pumps delivering unleaded gasoline are "oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or Refueling (p. 459)
•
labeled "UNLEADED". Only the nozzles of ethers. In some areas, state or local laws
these pumps will fit in your vehicle's fuel filler require that the service pump be marked indi- • Emission controls (p. 463)
inlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuel into cating use of alcohols or ethers. However,
a vehicle labeled "unleaded gasoline only". there are areas in which the pumps are
Leaded gasoline damages the three-way cata- unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is
lytic converter and the heated oxygen sensor alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy,
check with the service station operator. To

461
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Octane rating NOTE

Volvo requires premium fuel (91 octane14 or
When switching to higher octane fuel or
higher) for all T5, T6 and T8 engines, and rec-
changing gasoline brands, it may be neces-
ommends AKI 93 for optimal performance
sary to fill the tank more than once before a
and fuel economy. See decal examples in
difference in engine operation is noticea-
illustrations 1 and 2.
ble.
Minimum octane
Decals Fuel Formulations
Illustration 2: Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap Do not use gasoline that contains lead or man-
on vehicles that require premium fuel15. ganese as a knock inhibitor, and do not use
lead additives. Besides damaging the exhaust
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline emission control systems on your vehicle, lead
Volvo endorses the use of "TOP TIER Deter- has been strongly linked to certain forms of
gent Gasoline" where available to help main- cancer.
tain engine performance and reliability. TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new stand- Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.
ard jointly established by leading automotive Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to
manufactures to meet the needs of today's certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area
advanced engines. Qualifying gasoline retail- where you must fill your own gas tank, take
ers (stations) will, in most cases, identify their precautions. These may include:
gasoline as having met the "TOP TIER Deter- • standing upwind away from the filler noz-
Illustration 1: Sample fuel pump octane label14. gent Gasoline" standards. zle while refueling
• refueling only at gas stations with vapor
NOTE recovery systems that fully seal the mouth
Information about TOP TIER Detergent of the filler neck during refueling
Gasoline is available at toptiergas.com • wearing neoprene gloves while handling a
fuel filler nozzle.

14 AKI (Anti Knock Index) is an average value of RON (Research Octane Number) and MON (Motor Octane Number) - (RON)+(MON)/2
15 For supplementary information - see the car's Service and Warranty Booklet.

462
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Use of Additives may be a good idea to switch to a higher- Emission controls

With the exception of gas line antifreeze dur- octane fuel (AKI14 91 or higher) or to switch to
ing winter months, do not add solvents, thick- another brand of gasoline in order to fully uti- Three-way catalytic converter
eners, or other store-bought additives to your lize the vehicle's engine capacity and optimize • Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain
vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. traction. engine malfunctions, particularly involving
Overuse may damage your engine, and some the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition
of these additives contain organically volatile Related information systems, may cause unusually high three-
chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself • Fuel (p. 461) way catalytic converter temperatures. Do
to these chemicals. • Emission controls (p. 463) not continue to operate your vehicle if you
detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of
WARNING power or other unusual operating condi-
tions, such as engine overheating or back-
Never carry a cell phone that is switched firing. A properly tuned engine will help
on while refueling your vehicle. If the
avoid malfunctions that could damage the
phone rings, this may cause a spark that
could ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire three-way catalytic converter.
and injury. • Do not park your vehicle over combustible
materials, such as grass or leaves, which
can come into contact with the hot
WARNING exhaust system and cause such materials
Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless, to ignite under certain wind and weather
and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust conditions.
gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes
inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger • Excessive starter cranking (in excess of
compartment is ventilated, and immedi- one minute), or an intermittently firing or
ately return the vehicle to a trained and flooded engine can cause three-way cata-
qualified Volvo service technician for cor- lytic converter or exhaust system over-
rection. heating.
• Remember that tampering or unauthor-
Demanding driving ized modifications to the engine, the
In demanding driving conditions, such as Engine Control Module, or the vehicle may
when towing a trailer or driving in hot weather be illegal and can cause three-way cata-
or for prolonged periods at high altitudes, it lytic converter or exhaust system over-
14 AKI (Anti Knock Index) is an average value of RON (Research Octane Number) and MON (Motor Octane Number) - (RON)+(MON)/2 }}

463
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| heating. This includes: altering fuel injec- Overheating of engine and played in the instrument panel. Follow the
tion settings or components, altering transmission recommendations given by reducing
emission system components or location In certain driving conditions, such as driving speed or stopping the vehicle safely and
or removing components, and/or repeated in mountainous areas or hot weather, there is letting the engine idle for a few minutes to
use of leaded fuel. a risk of the engine or transmission overheat- let the transmission cool.
ing, especially when carrying heavy loads. • If the vehicle begins to overheat, the air
NOTE • Engine power may be temporarily limited. conditioning may be temporarily switched
Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with • Remove any auxiliary lights mounted in off.
three-way catalytic converters. front of the grille when driving in hot • After a prolonged period of driving in
weather. demanding conditions, do not turn off the
• If the temperature in the engine's cooling engine immediately after stopping.
Heated oxygen sensors
The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxy- system becomes too high, a warning sym-
gen content of the exhaust gases. Readings bol will appear in the instrument panel NOTE
are fed into a control module that continuously along with the message Engine It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
monitors engine functions and controls fuel temperature High temperature Stop operate for a short time after the engine is
injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the engine safely. Pull over to a safe location and let switched off.
is continuously adjusted for efficient combus- the engine idle for a few minutes to cool
tion to help reduce harmful emissions. down.
Symbols in the instrument panel
• If the message Engine temperature
Related information High temperature Turn off engine or Symbol Meaning
• Octane rating (p. 462)
Engine coolant Level low, turn off High engine temperature. Follow
• Fuel (p. 461) engine is displayed, stop the vehicle and the recommendations provided.
turn off the engine.
• If the transmission begins to overheat, an
alternative gear shifting program will be Low coolant level. Follow the
selected. An integrated protective function recommendations provided.
will also be activated, the warning symbol
will illuminate and the message
Transmission warm Reduce speed to Transmission hot/overheated/
lower temperature or Transmission hot cooling. Follow the recommen-
Stop safely, wait for cooling will be dis- dations provided.

464
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Related information Battery drain Jump starting using another

• Refilling coolant (p. 623) The electrical functions in the vehicle drain battery
• Driving with a trailer (p. 472) the battery to varying degrees. Avoid using If the start battery is discharged, current from
ignition mode II when the engine is switched another battery can be used to start the vehi-
• Preparing for a long trip (p. 456)
off. Use ignition mode I instead, as this uses cle.
less electrical current.
Note that certain accessories may also drain
power from the electrical system. Do not use
functions that use a lot of electrical current
when the engine is turned off. Examples of
such functions are:
• blower
• headlights
• windshield wipers
• audio system (especially at high volume).
If the starter battery voltage is low, a message
Jumper cable connecting points.
is shown in the driver display. The vehicle's
energy-saving function will then turn off or
reduce certain functions, such as the blower CAUTION
and/or the audio system. The charging point of the vehicle is only
– To charge the battery, start the engine and intended for jump starting the vehicle in
let it run for at least 15 minutes (driving question. The charging point is not
charges the battery faster than letting the intended for jump-starting another vehicle.
engine idle). Using the charging point to start another
vehicle could cause a fuse to blow, which
Related information would cause the charging point to stop
• Starter battery (p. 625) working.
• Ignition modes (p. 419)
If a fuse has blown, 12 V Battery Fuse failure
Service required will be displayed in the
}}

465
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| instrument panel. Volvo recommends contact- 8. Clamp the other end of the black jumper 11. Start your vehicle's engine. If the engine
ing an authorized Volvo workshop. cable to your vehicle's negative (-) ground does not start, allow an additional 10
point (4). minutes of charging time and then try to
To avoid short circuits or other damage, the
start the engine again.
following steps are recommended when jump 9. Make sure the jumper cables are securely
starting the battery: attached to help prevent sparks while
jump starting. NOTE
1. Put the ignition in mode 0.
10. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle When the engine is started under normal
2. Make sure the auxiliary battery (the bat- conditions, the vehicle's electrical drive
and let it run for a few minutes at a higher
tery used to jump start the discharged motor is prioritized – the gasoline engine
idling speed than normal, about
battery) has a voltage of 12 volts. remains off. This means that after the start
1500 rpm.
3. If the auxiliary battery is in another vehicle, knob has been turned clockwise, the elec-
turn off that vehicle's engine and make tric motor has "started" and the vehicle is
sure that the vehicles are not touching ready to be driven. Start of the electric
each other. motor is indicated by the indicator lights on
the instrument panel going out and its pre-
4. Clamp the red jumper cable onto the auxil-
selected theme illuminating.
iary battery's positive (+) terminal (1).

CAUTION CAUTION
Connect the jump cable carefully to pre- Do not touch the connections between the
vent short circuits with other components cable and the vehicle during the start
in the engine compartment. attempt. Risk of sparking.

5. Fold back the cover over your vehicle's 12. Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
positive (+) jump start terminal (2). order ‒ first the black cables and then the
red cables.
6. Clamp the other end of the red jumper
cable to your vehicle's positive (+) jump Make sure that none of the clamps of the
start terminal (2). black jumper cables come into contact
with either vehicle's positive (+) jump start
7. Clamp the black jumper cable onto the
terminals or either of the red jumper
auxiliary battery's negative (-) terminal (3).
cable's connected clamps.

466
 STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING NOTE Retractable hitch*

The retractable hitch is designed to be used
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery The vehicle cannot be started if the hybrid
posts, terminals, and related accessories to tow a trailer or mount a bicycle holder. The
battery is discharged.
contain lead and lead compounds, chemi- hitch can be easily retracted or extended as
cals known to the state of California to needed. When retracted, the hitch is com-
cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash Related information pletely concealed.
hands after handling. • Starting the vehicle (p. 416)
WARNING
• Ignition modes (p. 419)
Follow the instructions for folding in/out
• Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 202) the towbar carefully.
WARNING
• Selecting ignition mode (p. 420)
• Batteries generate hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. WARNING
• Do not connect the jumper cable to Do not press the operating button for the
any part of the fuel system or to any towbar if a trailer or accessory is attached
moving parts. Avoid touching hot to the towbar.
manifolds.
• Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do Folding out the hitch
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,
skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. WARNING
• If contact occurs, flush the affected Do not stand near the center of the bumper
area immediately with water. Obtain behind the vehicle when folding out the
medical help immediately if eyes are towbar.
affected.
• Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark. Do not smoke near
the battery. Failure to follow the
instructions for jump starting can lead
to injury.

}}

* Option/accessory. 467
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| 1. 2. Press the button and release – pressing CAUTION

too long on the button may prevent the
hitch from folding out. When the towbar is activated by pressing
the button and put in unlocked position:
Wait at least 2 seconds before moving the
towbar to locked position. If the towbar
does not remain in locked position, wait a
few more seconds and try again.
Do not kick the towbar.

Open the tailgate. There is a button for Retracting the hitch

operating the hitch on the right-hand side 1. Open the tailgate. Press the button on the
> The hitch will fold out and down to an rear, right-hand side of the cargo compart-
at the rear of the cargo compartment.
unlocked position – the indicator lamp ment and release. Pressing too long on
Steady orange illumination from the indi-
will flash orange. The hitch is ready to the button may prevent the hitch from
cator light in the button shows that the
be moved to the locked position. folding in.
folding function is active.
3. > The hitch will automatically fold down
to the unlocked position and the indica-
tor light in the button will flash orange.

Move the hitch to its end position, where it

will lock in place – the indicator lamp will
glow steadily orange.
> The hitch is now ready for use.

468
 STARTING AND DRIVING

2. CAUTION Hitch-mounted bicycle holder

When the towbar is activated by pressing
the button and put in unlocked position: NOTE
The weight limits for trailers and towbar-
Wait at least 2 seconds before moving the
mounted accessories differ. A separate
towbar to locked position. If the towbar
limit applies for each. This towbar is only
does not remain in locked position, wait a
designed for towbar-mounted bicycle hold-
few more seconds and try again.
ers. All other accessories are not suitable.
Do not kick the towbar.
Before mounting the bicycle on the bicycle
Secure the hitch into position by pushing it NOTE holder, keep in mind that:
back to its retracted position under the • The maximum weight for the bicycle
bumper, where it will lock into place. Power save mode will be activated after a
short time and the indicator light will go holder including bicycles is 130 lbs/60 kg.
> The indicator light in the button will out. The system can be reactivated by clos- For example: holder 40 lbs + bicycle 30
now glow steadily if the hitch is cor- ing and then reopening the tailgate. This lbs + bicycle 30 lbs = 100 lbs total > OK
rectly locked in the retracted position. applies to both folding in and folding out • Do not mount more than two bicycles
the towbar. The center of gravity should not exceed the
If the vehicle's electrical system has dimensions:
detected an attached trailer, the indicator 1. 613 mm (24 1/7 ")
light will no longer glow steadily.
2. 642 mm (25 2/7 ")

CAUTION
Make sure that there is no adapter in the
electrical socket or removable ball section
mounted when the towbar is folded in.
Remove the bicycle holder from the towbar
when it is not being used.

}}

469
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Loading the bicycle holder Detachable towbar*

The greater the distance between the load and Volvo recommends the use of Volvo towbars
the bicycle holder, the greater the load on the that are specially designed for the vehicle.
hitch and on the vehicle.
NOTE
Keep the following points in mind:
The optional detachable trailer hitch may
• Mount the heaviest bicycle closest to the not be available in all markets or on all
vehicle. models. Consult your Volvo retailer.
• If possible, mount the bicycles symmetri-
cally, as close as possible to the center of
the vehicle.
• Remove loose objects from the bicycle,
such as baskets, batteries or child seats.
NOTE This will help reduce the load on the hitch
Volvo recommends only using Volvo origi- and the bicycle holder.
nal accessories. Follow the instructions • Do not place a cover over the bicycle as
supplied with the product. this could lead to increased load on the
hitch.

CAUTION Related information

Never use towbar adapters or towbar • Detachable towbar* (p. 470)
•
extenders. • Driving with a trailer (p. 472) Ball holder
• Only use ball mount for towing. Do not Cotter pin
mount accessories directly on the ball
mount. Use accessories designed to Towbar assembly
be mounted in the towbar's square
Locking bolt
bracket. Do not use accessories
designed to be secured around the ball Safety wire attachment bracket
mount.

470 * Option/accessory.
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Installing the ball holder WARNING

1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from
the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt Damage may occur on the towbar if it is
not used correctly or if incorrect or faulty
out of the towbar assembly. accessories are used, such as:
2. Slide the ball holder into the towbar • Overloading of accessory.
assembly.
• Use of incorrect or faulty accessory.
3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the
• Accessory used for an incorrect pur-
one in the towbar assembly.
pose.
4. Slide the locking bolt through the towbar Use of weight-distributing towing sys-
•
assembly/ball holder. tem.
5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end • Incorrectly positioned ball mount; see
of the locking bolt. geometric limits for the towbar. The ball mount must fall within the geometric
limits for the towbar, for both distance and
WARNING Stowing the ball holder height . Geometric limits are described on a
Be sure the towbar is securely locked type plate located on the towbar.
•
in position before attaching anything to WARNING Related information
it. Retractable hitch* (p. 467)
When not in use, the detachable ball holder •
• Always attach the trailer's safety wire should always be properly stowed in the Driving with a trailer (p. 472)
•
securely to the towbar's safety wire designated location under the floor of the
attachment bracket. cargo compartment. • Towing capacity and tongue weight
(p. 676)

Removing the ball holder Driving with a trailer

1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking When towing a trailer, the original ball holder
bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the or equivalent should be used.
ball holder/towbar assembly.
2. Pull the ball holder out of the towbar
assembly.

* Option/accessory. 471
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Driving with a trailer • Follow applicable regulations regarding CAUTION

There are a number of things to consider permitted speed and weight.
• Bumper-attached trailer hitches must
when towing a trailer, such as the towbar, the • Drive slowly when towing a trailer up a
not be used on Volvos, nor should
trailer and how the load is distributed in the long and steep incline.
safety chains be attached to the
trailer. The maximum trailer weights given only
• bumper.
Load-carrying capacity is determined by the apply to altitudes up to 1000 meters
vehicle's curb weight. The total weight of all • Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle
(3280 feet) above sea level. At higher alti-
passengers and any installed accessories, e.g. rear axle must not be used.
tudes, engine power (and thus the vehi-
towbar, reduces the vehicle's load-carrying cle's climbing ability) is decreased due to • Never connect a trailer's hydraulic
capacity by the corresponding amount. the reduced air density, and the maximum brake system directly to the vehicle
• Towbars used on the vehicle must be trailer weight must therefore be reduced. brake system, nor a trailer's lighting
approved for the applicable use. The weight of the vehicle and trailer must system directly to the vehicle lighting
be decreased by 10% for each additional system. Consult your nearest author-
• Distribute the load on the trailer so that ized Volvo retailer for correct installa-
the weight on the towbar complies with 1000 m (3280 feet) or part thereof.
tion.
the specified maximum towball weight. • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
The tongue weight is calculated as part of more than 12%. • When towing a trailer, the trailer's
the vehicle's payload. safety chains or wire must be correctly
• Avoid overloading and other incorrect use.
fastened to the attachment points pro-
• Increase the tire pressure to the recom- • The trailer's brakes must be balanced with vided in the trailer hitch on the vehicle.
mended pressure for a full load. the vehicle's brakes to help ensure safe The safety chain or wire must never be
• The engine is subjected to more load than stops (follow applicable local regulations). fastened to or wound around the tow-
usual when towing a trailer. ing ball.
CAUTION
• Towing a trailer affects the vehicle's han-
dling, durability and driving economy. When towing a trailer using a vehicle with
pneumatic suspension*, use the NOTE
• Do not drive with a heavy trailer when the
Suspension Control Dynamic setting The optional detachable trailer hitch may
vehicle is very new. Wait until the mileage
has reached at least 1000 km (620 miles). in the Individual drive mode. not be available in all markets or on all
models. Consult your Volvo retailer.
• On long and steep downgrades, the vehi-
cle's brakes are subjected to much more
load than usual. When manually shifting,
downshift and adapt speed accordingly.

472 * Option/accessory.
 STARTING AND DRIVING

NOTE the vehicle will be slightly lowered, which is Related information

normal. • Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 474)
Extreme weather conditions, towing a
trailer, high altitude and lower fuel grade Driving in hilly terrain or hot weather • Checking trailer lights (p. 475)
than recommended are factors that can In certain conditions, there is a risk of over- • Towing capacity and tongue weight
significantly increase the vehicle's fuel con- heating when driving with a trailer. If overheat- (p. 676)
sumption. ing of the engine and drive system is detected, • Overheating of engine and transmission
a warning symbol will illuminate in the instru- (p. 464)
ment panel and a message will appear.
Trailer weights • Retractable hitch* (p. 467)
The automatic transmission adapts the gear
WARNING for the current load and engine speed.
Please adhere to the recommendations Steep inclines
provided for trailer weight. If the recom- Do not lock the automatic transmission into a
mendations are not followed, the vehicle higher gear than what the engine can handle ‒
and trailer may be difficult to control during it is not always preferable to drive in high
evasive maneuvers and braking. gears at low rpm.
Parking on a hill
NOTE 1. Depress the brake pedal.
The specified maximum trailer weights are 2. Apply the parking brake.
those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle
regulations may set additional restrictions 3. Put the gear selector in P.
on trailer weight and speed. The trailer 4. Release the brake pedal.
hitches may be certified for higher towing
Put chocks behind the wheels when the vehi-
weights than the vehicle is permitted to
cle is parked on a hill with a trailer attached.
tow.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal.
Self-leveling suspension*
The vehicle's self-leveling system attempts to 2. Put the gear selector in D.
keep the vehicle at a constant level, regardless 3. Release the parking brake.
of load (up to the maximum permitted weight).
When the vehicle is stationary, the rear end of 4. Release the brake pedal and start driving.

* Option/accessory. 473
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Trailer Stability Assist* Trailer Stability Assist function When Trailer Stability Assist
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA16)
is part of the Trailer Stability Assist continuously monitors is activated, the ESC symbol
ESC17 stability system and is a function the vehicle's movements, particularly lateral is displayed in the instrument
designed to help stabilize a vehicle that is movements. If swaying is detected, the brakes panel.
towing a trailer when the vehicle and trailer are applied individually on the front wheels,
have begun to sway. The function is added which has a stabilizing effect on the vehicle
when installing a towbar. Contact a Volvo and trailer. This is often enough to enable the
retailer for more information. driver to regain control of the vehicle. NOTE
If the Trailer Stability Assist function's first A vehicle software update is required when
Reasons for swaying attempt is not adequate to stop the swaying
A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway a towbar is retrofitted. Contact a Volvo
motion, the brakes are applied on all wheels retailer.
for various reasons. Normally this only occurs and engine power is temporarily reduced. As
at high speeds. However, if the trailer is over- the swaying motion begins to decrease and
loaded or unevenly distributed, e.g. too far the vehicle and trailer have once again Related information
back, there is a risk of swaying even at low become stable, TSA stops regulating the • Driving with a trailer (p. 472)
speeds. brakes/engine power and the driver regains • Electronic Stability Control (p. 275)
Swaying may be caused by factors such as: control of the vehicle.
• The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sudden,
NOTE
strong crosswind.
The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an Trailer Stability Assist is deactivated if the
•
uneven road or over a bump. driver activates ESC Sport Mode in the
center display's menu system.
• Sudden movements of the steering wheel.
Once swaying has begun, it can be difficult or Trailer Stability Assist may not intervene if the
impossible to stop it. This makes the vehicle driver tries to compensate for the swaying
and trailer difficult to control and there is a risk motion by moving the steering wheel rapidly,
of swerving into oncoming traffic or driving off because the system will then not be able to
the road. determine if it is the trailer or the driver caus-
ing the swaying.

16 Trailer Stability Assist

17 Electronic Stability Control

474 * Option/accessory.
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Checking trailer lights trailer. If this is the case, check to see if the 5. After a short time, all of the trailer's lights
When connecting a trailer, make sure that all trailer is equipped with a rear fog light before will start flashing again.
of the lights on the trailer are functioning activating the vehicle's fog lights when driving > The light check is completed.
before starting to drive. with a trailer to help ensure safe operation.
Disabling the automatic check
Trailer turn signals and brake lights Checking trailer lights* The automatic light check can be disabled in
If one or more of the turn signals or brake the center display.
Automatic check
lights on the trailer is not working, a symbol When the trailer has been connected to the 1. Tap Settings in the Top view.
and message will be displayed in the instru- vehicle's electrical system, its lights can be
ment panel. The other lights on the trailer 2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting.
checked by automatically activating them.
must be checked manually by the driver before This function helps the driver check that the 3. Deselect Automatic Trailer Lamp
the vehicle is driven. trailer's lights are functioning correctly before Check.
starting to drive. Manual check
Symbol Message In order to perform this check, the vehicle If the automatic check has been disabled, the
• Trailer turn indicator Right must be switched off. check can be started manually.
turn indicator malfunction 1. When a trailer is connected to the towbar, 1. Tap Settings in the Top view.
• Trailer turn indicator Left the message Automatic Trailer Lamp
2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting.
turn indicator malfunction Check will appear in the instrument panel.
2. Acknowledge the message by pressing 3. Select Manual Trailer Lamp Check.
• Trailer brake light Malfunc- > The light check will begin. Get out of
tion the O button on the right-side steering
wheel keypad. the vehicle to perform the check.
> The light check will begin. Related information
If any of the trailer's turn signal lights is not 3. Get out of the vehicle to perform the • Driving with a trailer (p. 472)
working, the turn signal symbol in the instru- check.
ment panel will also flash more quickly than > All of the lights on the trailer will begin
normal. flashing, and then illuminate separately
one at a time.
Trailer rear fog light
When a trailer is connected, the vehicle's rear 4. Visually check that all of the trailer's lights
fog light may not illuminate and rear fog light are functioning correctly.
functionality is instead transferred to the

* Option/accessory. 475
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Towing using a towline Related information Attaching and removing the

This section refers to one vehicle being towed • Attaching and removing the towing eyelet towing eyelet
behind another using a towline. (p. 476) Use the towing eyelet to tow another vehicle.
Never attempt to tow the vehicle behind • Hazard warning flashers (p. 164) Screw the towing eyelet securely into place
another vehicle as this could damage the elec- in the threaded outlet behind the cover on the
• Recovery (p. 477)
tric motor. The vehicle must instead be lifted right-hand side of the rear bumper.
onto a tow truck and transported with all four • Jump starting using another battery
(p. 465) NOTE
wheels on the bed or lifting platform of the
truck (no wheels may touch the road). • Selecting ignition mode (p. 420) If the vehicle is equipped with a towbar,
there is no rear attachment for the towing
Towing another vehicle • Transmission (p. 431)
eye.
Towing another vehicle requires a lot of power
- use the Constant AWD drive mode. This
Attaching the towing eyelet
helps charge the hybrid battery and improve
the vehicle's driving and roadholding characte-
ristics.
Before towing another vehicle, check applica-
ble speed limit regulations.

Jump starting
Never attempt to tow the vehicle to start the
engine, as this could damage the electric
motor. Use an auxiliary battery if the start bat-
tery's charge level is so low that the engine Take out the towing eyelet, which is
cannot be started. stored in a foam block under the floor in
the cargo compartment.
CAUTION
Attempts to tow-start the vehicle could
cause damage to the electrical drive motor
and three-way catalytic converter.

476
 STARTING AND DRIVING

3. Screw the towing eyelet in as far as possi- Recovery

ble. This section refers to transporting the vehicle
with a tow truck or similar vehicle.
Call a professional towing service for assis-
tance.
In certain conditions, the towing eyelet can be
used to pull the vehicle onto a flatbed tow
truck.

CAUTION
Note that the vehicle must always be
Remove the cover by pressing on the Fasten the eyelet securing by, for example, towed raised with all wheels on the tow
mark with a finger while folding out the inserting a lug wrench* through it and truck.
opposite side/corner. using this as a lever.
> The cover turns along its center line and For vehicles equipped with leveling con-
can then be removed. CAUTION trol*: If the vehicle is equipped with pneumatic
suspension, this feature must be turned off
It is important that the towing eye is before the vehicle is lifted onto a tow truck.
screwed in securely as far as possible. Turning off the function in the center display.
1. Tap Settings in the Top view.
Removing the towing eyelet 2. Tap My Car Parking Brake and
– Unscrew the towing eyelet after use and Suspension.
return it to the foam block.
3. Select Disable Leveling Control.
Replace the cover on the bumper.
The vehicle's location and ground clearance
Related information determine if it can be lifted onto a tow truck. If
• Towing using a towline (p. 476) the incline of the tow truck is too steep or if
the ground clearance under the vehicle is
• Recovery (p. 477)
insufficient, attempting to pull it up may result
• Tool kit (p. 574) in damage. In this case, the vehicle should
}}

* Option/accessory. 477
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| only be lifted with the tow truck's lifting equip- HomeLink®*18 HomeLink® is delivered integrated in the rear-
ment. view mirror. The HomeLink® panel consists of
HomeLink®19 is a programmable remote con-
trol, integrated in the vehicle electrical sys- three programmable buttons and an indicator
WARNING tem, that can control up to three different light in the mirror.
No person or object should be behind the devices (e.g. garage door opener, alarm sys- For more information about HomeLink®,
tow truck when the vehicle is lifted onto tem, outdoor and indoor lighting) and thereby please visit: homelink.com or call
the bed of the truck. replace the remote controls for these. 1–800–355–3515.
General Save the original remote controls for future
Related information programming (e.g. for use in another vehicle).
• Attaching and removing the towing eyelet
(p. 476)
CAUTION
The button programming should be cleared
if the vehicle is sold.

Related information
• Using HomeLink®* (p. 480)
• Programming HomeLink®* (p. 479)
• Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 481)
The illustration is generic – the design may vary.
Button 1

Button 2

Button 3

Indicator light

18 Certain markets only.

19 HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.

478 * Option/accessory.
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Programming HomeLink®*20 1. Point the remote control at the 3. Do not release the buttons until the indica-
Follow these instructions to program HomeLink® button to be programmed and tor light has stopped flashing slowly
hold it about 2-8 cm (1-3 inches) from the (about once a second) and either flashes
HomeLink®, reset all programming, or pro-
button. Do not obstruct the HomeLink® quickly (about 10 times a second) or
gram individual buttons.
indicator light. glows steadily.
NOTE > If the indicator light glows steadily:
Note: Some remote controls are more
In some vehicles, the ignition must be on Indication that programming is com-
effective at programming HomeLink® from
or in the "accessory position" before plete. Press the programmed button
a distance of about 15-20 cm (6-12
HomeLink® can be programmed or used. It inches). Keep this in mind if you experi-
twice to activate.
can be a good idea to put new batteries in ence any programming difficulties. If the indicator light flashes quickly:
the remote control being replaced by The device being programmed with
HomeLink® for faster programming and 2. Press and hold both the remote control
HomeLink® may have a security func-
better radio signal transmission. The button and the HomeLink® button to be
tion that requires an extra step. Try
HomeLink® buttons should be reset before programmed.
pressing the programmed button twice
programming. to see whether the programming
works. Otherwise, continue with the
WARNING following steps.

While HomeLink® is being programmed,

the garage door or gate being programmed
may be activated. Make sure that no one is
near the door or gate during programming.
When programming a garage door opener,
it is advised to park outside of the garage.

20 Certain markets only. }}

* Option/accessory. 479
 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Programming individual buttons Using HomeLink®*22

To program an individual HomeLink® button: Once HomeLink® is programmed, it can be
1. Press and hold the desired button for used instead of the separate remote controls.
about 20 seconds. Press and hold the programming button. The
garage door, gate, alarm system, etc. will be
2. When the indicator light on HomeLink® activated (this may take several seconds). If
starts flashing slowly, it is possible to pro- the button is held down for more than 20 sec-
gram as usual. onds, reprogramming will begin. The indicator
Note: If the button you are reprogram- light will glow steadily or flash when the but-
4. Locate the "training" button21 on the ming does not program with a new ton has been pressed. The original remote
receiver for the e.g. garage door opener. It device, it will return to the previously controls may be used concurrently with
is usually located near the antenna bracket saved programming. HomeLink® if desired.
on the receiver.
Resetting the HomeLink® buttons NOTE
5. Press and release the "training" button It is only possible to reset all HomeLink® but-
once. Programming must be completed tons at once. It is not possible to reset individ- When the ignition is switched off,
within 30 seconds after pressing the but- ual buttons. Individual buttons can only be HomeLink® will be active for at least
ton. reprogrammed. 7 minutes.
6. Press and release the HomeLink® button – Press and hold the outer buttons (1 and 3)
to be programmed. Repeat the press/ on HomeLink® for about 10 seconds. NOTE
hold/release sequence a second time. For
> When the indicator light goes from a HomeLink® cannot be used if the vehicle is
some receivers, the sequence may need to
steady glow to flashing, the buttons locked and the alarm is armed* from the
be repeated a third time.
have been reset and are ready for outside.
> Programming is now completed and reprogramming.
the garage door, gate, etc. should now
be activated when the programmed Related information
button is pressed. • Using HomeLink®* (p. 480)
If you experience any difficulties programming, • HomeLink®* (p. 478)
please contact HomeLink® at: homelink.com, • Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 481)
or call 1–800–355–3515.

21 The name and color of the button varies depending on the manufacturer.

480 * Option/accessory.
 STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING Type approval for HomeLink®*23 • 868.70MHz-868.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

• 869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.
• If you use HomeLink® to open a garage FCC (USA) and IC (Canada)
door or gate, be sure no one is near the • 869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.
This device complies with FCC rules part 15
gate or door while it is in motion. and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is Certificate holder address: Gentex Corpora-
• Do not use HomeLink® with any subject to the following two conditions: (1) tion, 600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI
garage door opener that lacks safety This device may not cause harmful interfer- 49464, USA
stop and reverse features as required ence, and (2) This device must accept any For further details, search for support informa-
by U.S. federal safety standards (this interference that may be received including tion on type approval at volvocars.com
includes any garage door opener model interference that may cause undesired opera-
manufactured before April 1, 1982). A tion. Related information
garage door that cannot detect an • HomeLink®* (p. 478)
object - signaling the door to stop and WARNING
reverse - does not meet current U.S.
The transmitter has been tested and com-
federal safety standards. For more plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or
information, contact HomeLink at: modifications not expressly approved by
homelink.com. the party responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the
Related information device.24
• HomeLink®* (p. 478)
Type approval for EU
• Programming HomeLink®* (p. 479)
Gentex Corporation hereby declares that
• Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 481) HomeLink® Model UAHL5 complies with the
Radio equipment directive 2014/53/EU.
Wavelengths within which the radio equip-
ment operates:
• 433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.
• 868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

22 Certain markets only.

23 Certain markets only.
24 The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

* Option/accessory. 481
 STARTING AND DRIVING

Compass* Activating and deactivating the Calibrating the compass*

An integrated compass25
in the upper right compass* The globe is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
corner of the rearview mirror shows the An integrated compass26 in the upper right The compass27 should be calibrated if the
direction the vehicle is traveling. corner of the rearview mirror shows the vehicle is driven from one zone to another.
direction the vehicle is traveling. 1. Stop the vehicle in a large, open area away
The compass is automatically activated when from steel constructions and high-voltage
the vehicle is started. power lines.
To deactivate/activate the compass manually: 2. Start the engine and switch off all electri-
cal equipment (climate system, wipers,
– Use a paper clip or similar object to press
etc.) and make sure all doors are closed.
the button on the bottom of the mirror.
> If the compass is deactivated when the
vehicle is switched off, it will not be
NOTE
activated the next time the vehicle is Calibration may fail or not even be initiated
started. The compass will then need to if electrical equipment is not turned off.
be activated manually.
Rearview mirror with compass. 3. Hold the button on the bottom of the rear-
Related information
Eight different compass directions are shown view mirror pressed for about 3 seconds
• Compass* (p. 482)
with the abbreviations: N (north), NE (north- (using e.g. a paper clip). The number of the
east), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south), SW • Calibrating the compass* (p. 482) current magnetic zone is shown.
(southwest), W (west) and NW (northwest).

Related information
• Activating and deactivating the compass*
(p. 482)
• Calibrating the compass* (p. 482)

25 Rearview mirror with compass is available as an option only on certain markets and models.
26 Rearview mirror with compass is available as an option only on certain markets and models.
27 Rearview mirror with compass is available as an option only on certain markets and models.

482 * Option/accessory.
 STARTING AND DRIVING

1 7. Vehicles with heated windshields*: If C

is shown in the display when the wind-
2 15 shield heating function is activated, per-
14 form step 6 above with the heating func-
3
tion on.

4
13 8. Repeat the above procedure as needed.
12 Related information
5 8
11 • Compass* (p. 482)
9
10
• Activating and deactivating the compass*
6 7 (p. 482)
Magnetic zones.
4. Press the button on the underside of the
mirror repeatedly until the desired mag-
netic zone (1–15) appears (see the map of
magnetic zones).
5. Wait until the display again shows C, or
press and hold the button on the under-
side of the rearview mirror for approx.
6 seconds until C is displayed.
6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
more than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a com-
pass direction is shown in the display. This
indicates that calibration is complete.
Drive in a circle two more times to fine-
tune the calibration.

* Option/accessory. 483
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Audio, media and Internet Related information Sound settings

The audio and media system consists of a • Media player (p. 507) Sound reproduction quality is preset but can
media player and a radio. A cellular phone can • Radio (p. 490) also be adjusted.
also be connected through Bluetooth to use The system's volume is normally adjusted
• Phone (p. 523)
hands-free functions or play music in the using the volume control below the center dis-
vehicle. When the vehicle is connected to the • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538) play or the right-side steering wheel keypad.
Internet, it is also possible to use apps to play • Apps (p. 488) This applies, for example, when playing music
media. Voice Control (p. 149) or the radio or during phone calls and active
•
traffic messages.
• Ignition modes (p. 419)
• Driver distraction (p. 41) Sound reproduction
The audio system is precalibrated using digital
• Handling system updates via Download
signal processing. This calibration takes into
Center (p. 610)
account speakers, amplifiers, passenger com-
• License agreement for audio and media partment acoustics, listener position, etc. for
(p. 547) each combination of vehicle model and audio
system. There is also a dynamic calibration
that takes into account the volume control set-
ting and the vehicle's speed.

Personal settings
Audio and media overview
Different settings are available in Top view
The functions can be controlled using voice under Settings Sound depending on the
commands, the steering wheel keypad or the vehicle's sound system.
center display. The number of speakers and
amplifiers varies depending on the audio sys- Premium Sound* (Bowers & Wilkins)
tem installed in the vehicle. • Tone - setting for e.g. bass, treble, equal-
izer, etc.
System updates
The audio and media system is continuously • Balance - balance between right/left and
improved. It is recommended to download front/rear speakers.
system updates as soon as they are available. • System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice

486 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Control, Park Assist and Phone Sound experience* High Performance Pro* (Harman
Ringtone. Sound experience is an app that provides Kardon)
access to additional sound settings. • Seat Optimization – sound settings can
High Performance Pro* (Harman Open Sound Experience from the center dis- be adjusted to be primarily adapted for
Kardon) play's App view. Depending on the sound sys- Driver, All and Rear.
• Equalizer - setting of equalizer. tem installed in the vehicle, the following set- • Surround - surround sound mode with
• Balance - balance between right/left and tings are possible: level settings.
front/rear speakers.
Premium Sound* (Bowers & Wilkins) • Tone - setting for e.g. bass, treble, equal-
• System Volumes – adjusts volume in the • Studio – sound settings can be adjusted izer, etc.
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
to be primarily adapted for Driver, All and
Control, Park Assist and Phone
Rear.
Related information
Ringtone. • Sound settings (p. 486)
• Individual stage - surround sound mode Navigating in the center display's views
High Performance with settings for intensity and enclosure. •
(p. 119)
• Tone - setting for e.g. bass, treble, equal- • Concert hall - reproduces the acoustics
izer, etc. of Gothenburg's Concert Hall.
• Balance - balance between right/left and • Jazz club – reproduces the acoustics of
front/rear speakers. the Nefertiti Jazz Club.
• System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
Control, Park Assist and Phone
Ringtone.

Related information
• Sound experience* (p. 487)
• Media player (p. 507)
• Voice control settings (p. 154)
• Phone settings (p. 530)
• Audio, media and Internet (p. 486)
• Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538) Reproduces the acoustics of the Nefertiti Jazz Club.

* Option/accessory. 487
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Apps Start an app by pressing the app in the center

The App view contains apps that provide display's app view.
access to certain vehicle services. All apps used should be updated to the latest
Swipe the center display screen from right to version.
left1 to access the App view from the Home
view. This view displays downloaded apps Related information
(third-party apps) as well as apps for inte- • Download apps (p. 489)
grated functions, such as FM radio. • Updating apps (p. 489)
• Deleting apps (p. 490)
• Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 516)
• Android Auto* (p. 520)
• Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538)
• Hard disk storage space (p. 546)
• Terms of use and data sharing (p. 544)

App view. (generic illustration; basic apps vary

depending on market and model)
Several basic apps are always available. More
apps such as web radio and music services
can be downloaded when the car is connected
to the Internet.
Some apps can only be used when the vehicle
is connected to the Internet.

1 Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction.

488 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Download apps 3. Tap on the row for an app in order to Updating apps
New apps can be downloaded when the vehi- expand in the list and get more informa- Apps can be updated when the vehicle is
cle is connected to the Internet. tion about the app. connected to the Internet.
NOTE 4. Select Install to start the download and NOTE
installation of the app.
Data downloading can affect other services Data downloading can affect other services
such as transfer data, e.g. web radio. If the > The current status of the download and such as transfer data, e.g. web radio. If the
affect on other services is experienced as installation will be shown. affect on other services is experienced as
problematic, the download can be interrup- If a download cannot be started imme- problematic, the download can be interrup-
ted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to diately, a message will be displayed. ted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to
switch off or cancel other services. The app will remain in the list and it will switch off or cancel other services.
be possible to reattempt downloading.
NOTE Canceling a download NOTE
– Tap Abort to cancel a download in pro-
When downloading using a phone, pay When downloading using a phone, pay
gress.
extra attention to the data traffic costs. extra attention to the data traffic costs.
Note that only a download can be cancelled.
An installation cannot be cancelled once it has If an app is being used while an update is in
1. Open the Download Center app in App begun. progress, it will be restarted to complete the
view.
Related information update.
• Apps (p. 488) Update all
• Updating apps (p. 489) 1. Open the Download Center app in App
view.
• Deleting apps (p. 490)
• Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538)
• Handling system updates via Download
2. Select New apps to open a list of apps Center (p. 610)
that are available but are not installed in
• Hard disk storage space (p. 546)
the vehicle.

2. Select Install all.

}}
> The update will begin.

* Option/accessory. 489
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Update certain apps Deleting apps Radio

1. Open the Download Center app in App When the vehicle is connected to the Inter- The radio can receive broadcasting from the
view. net, it is possible to uninstall apps. FM waveband with HD Radio™ Technology
2. Select Application updates to open a list If the app is being used, it must be closed and SiriusXM® Satellite radio *. When the
of all available updates. before it can be uninstalled. vehicle has an Internet connection, it is also
1. Open the Download Center app in App possible to listen to web radio.
3. Find the desired app and select Install.
view.
> The update will begin.

Related information
• Apps (p. 488)
• Download apps (p. 489)
• Deleting apps (p. 490)
• Handling system updates via Download
Center (p. 610) 2. Select Application updates to open a list
of all installed apps.
• Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538)
3. Find the desired app and select Uninstall
to begin uninstalling the app.
> When the app has been uninstalled, it The radio can be controlled
will be removed from the list. using voice commands, the
right-side steering wheel key-
Related information pad or the center display.
• Apps (p. 488)
• Download apps (p. 489)
• Updating apps (p. 489) Related information
• Handling system updates via Download • Starting the radio (p. 491)
Center (p. 610) • Changing waveband and radio station
• Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538) (p. 492)
• Storing radio channels in the Radio favor-
ites app (p. 493)

490 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

• Radio settings (p. 494) Starting the radio • Changing waveband and radio station
• RBDS (p. 494) The radio is started from the center display's (p. 492)
HD Radio™ (p. 495) App view. • Storing radio channels in the Radio favor-
•
1. Open the desired waveband (e.g. FM) ites app (p. 493)
• SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 498) from App view. • Radio settings (p. 494)
• Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538)
• Voice control for radio and media (p. 153)
• Voice control for radio and media (p. 153)
• Media player (p. 507)

2. Select a radio station.

Related information
• Radio (p. 490)
• Searching for a radio station (p. 492)

* Option/accessory. 491
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Changing waveband and radio Favorites – only plays selected favorite chan- Searching for a radio station
station nels. The radio automatically compiles a list of the
Instructions for changing wavebands, wave- Genres - only plays channels broadcasting the radio stations that are sending out the stron-
band lists and radio stations in the selected selected genre or program type, e.g. pop, clas- gest signals in the vehicle's current location.
list are provided here. sical, etc.
Changing wavebands Changing radio stations in a selected
Swipe from App view on the center display list
and select the desired waveband (e.g. FM) or – Press or under the center display
open the App menu in the instrument panel
or on the right-side steering wheel key-
with the right-side steering wheel keypad and
pad.
make your selection there.
> Move step-by-step through the
Changing a list in a waveband selected list.
It is also possible to change radio station in
the selected list via the center display.

Related information Searching is performed in different ways

• Radio (p. 490) depending on the waveband selected:
• Searching for a radio station (p. 492) • FM, stations, genres and frequency.
• Voice control for radio and media (p. 153) 1. Tap Library.
• Storing radio channels in the Radio favor-
2. Tap .
ites app (p. 493)
> Search view will displayed and the key-
• Radio settings (p. 494) board will open.
• App menu in instrument panel (p. 108)
3. Enter a search word/phrase.
1. Tap Library.
> The search will start and change as
2. Select playback from Stations, Favorites characters are entered. Search results
or Genres. will be displayed by category.
3. Tap the desired station in the list.

492
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Searching for a station manually Storing radio channels in the Radio Related information
favorites app • Radio (p. 490)
It is possible to add a radio station in the • Starting the radio (p. 491)
Radio favorites app and in the list of favor- Searching for a radio station (p. 492)
•
ites for the waveband (e.g. FM). Instructions
for adding and removing radio channels are • Changing waveband and radio station
provided below. (p. 492)
• Voice control for radio and media (p. 153)
Radio favorites
• Radio settings (p. 494)
The radio favorites app
shows stored radio channels • App menu in instrument panel (p. 108)
from all wavebands.

Searching manually makes it possible to find

and tune to stations that are not on the auto-
matically compiled list of the strongest sta- 1. Open the Radio favorites app from App
tions in the area. view.
– Tap Manual tuning, drag the control or 2. Tap the desired station in the list to listen.
tap or . Press and hold to skip to
Adding and deleting radio favorites
the next available station in the frequency
band. You can also use the right-side 1. Tap to add a radio channel to the
steering wheel keypad. waveband's list of favorites or the Radio
favorites app.
Related information
• Radio (p. 490) 2. Tap Library, select Edit and tap to
delete a radio channel from the list of
• Starting the radio (p. 491) favorites.
• Changing waveband and radio station When you delete a radio channel from the
(p. 492) Radio favorites app, the channel will also be
• Voice control for radio and media (p. 153) deleted from that waveband's list of favorites.
• Radio settings (p. 494)

493
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Radio settings Related information RBDS

There are a number of different radio func- • Radio (p. 490) RBDS radio
tions that can be activated and deactivated. • Settings for SiriusXM® Satellite radio* RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) ena-
(p. 501) bles certain functionality2, such as:
Canceling a traffic message
A current broadcast (e.g. a traffic message) • Symbols in the center display status bar • Searches for program types or new broad-
can be temporarily interrupted by pressing (p. 128) casts
in the right-side steering wheel keypad or • Text information about currently broadcast
tapping Cancel in the center display. programs

Activating and deactivating radio Related information

functions • Radio (p. 490)
Pull down Top view and select Settings • Radio settings (p. 494)
Media and the desired waveband to see avail-
able functions.
FM Radio
• HD Radio FM: HD Radio™ Technology:
makes it possible to achieve a sound qual-
ity comparable with a CD.
• Show Broadcast Information: shows
information on program content, artists,
etc.
• Freeze Program Name: select to stop
the program service name from scrolling
continuously. Instead it freezes after 20
seconds.
SiriusXM® Satellite radio*
Pull down Top view and select Settings
Media SiriusXM to show a list of available
options.

494 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

HD Radio™ The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid" screen. The radio can store 100 station logos
HD Radio is a brand name registered by the since it is both analog and digital. During so the next time the radio is tuned to the same
DTS, Inc.3. They are the developer of a broad- hybrid operation, receivers still continue to station, the logo will be displayed immedi-
casting technology called IBOC or In Band On receive the analog (non-digital) signal. HD ately. Album art is synched with the artist that
Channel, which refers to the method of trans- Radio receivers incorporate both modes of you are currently listening to.
mitting a digital radio broadcast signal cen- reception, where the receiver will automati-
cally switch to the analog signal if the digital Ball game mode
tered on the same frequency as the FM sta-
signal cannot be decoded or is lost by the This feature means that a main FM station
tion's present frequency.
receiver. (HD1) will broadcast live events, where the
Introduction content of the programming is more important
When you have tuned to an HD Radio station, than sound quality, in analog mode only to
the symbol will appear in the infotain- help prevent the delay between analog and
ment system display. The symbol will be dis- digital broadcasting. The HD Radio symbol
played in different colors: will be white during live broadcasts and "Live"
• Grayed-out symbol: no HD Radio broad- will be displayed next to the symbol.
cast reception
Benefits of digital broadcasting
• White symbol: the radio is actively receiv- • Better sound (FM sounds near CD qual-
ing an HD broadcast ity).
• Orange symbol: the radio is receiving an • Some FM frequencies offer a greater
HD broadcast with digital sound number of listening choices through multi-
More information about HD Radio and IBOC casting (consisting of a frequency's main
can be found on DTS, Inc.'s website, channel and any sub-channels that may
Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio
broadcast (generic illustration) www.dts.com. also be available on that particular fre-
quency.)
Artist Experience™ When receiving a digital signal there is no
NOTE •
A radio station's logo and album art can be multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/
HD Radio volume may fade in and out at displayed. If a station opts to provide this crackling due to outside influences.
times due to coverage limitations. information, it is broadcast once every 12
minutes, which means that there may be a
delay before the logo/album art appear on the

2 Certain stations only.

3 HD Radio™ technology is manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of DTS, Inc. }}

495
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| How HD Radio ™ Technology Activating and deactivating the HD • HD Radio™ limitations (p. 497)
broadcasting works Radio™ • Opening contextual setting in the center
HD Radio works similarly to conventional HD Radio is deactivated when the car leaves display (p. 137)
radio and broadcasts of this type are available the factory.
in many areas of the United States. However, When listening to an HD Radio station and
there are a few key differences: driving through areas with weak HD signals
• Instead of transmitting one analog signal, (fringe areas), you may experience that the
stations send out a bundled signal – both radio repeatedly switches between analog/
analog and digital. digital and digital/analog reception. If this hap-
pens, it may be desirable to switch HD off.
• An HD Radio receiver can receive both
digital and analog broadcasts. Depending Carry out the following to activate or deacti-
on the terrain and location of the vehicle vate HD Radio:
(which will influence the signal strength), 1. Drag down the top view and tap on
the receiver will determine which signal to Settings.
receive.
2. Press Media and FM Radio.
Related information 3. Press HD Radio FM to activate/deacti-
• Radio (p. 490) vate the function.
• Activating and deactivating the HD
If HD radio is deactivated, the radio will be
Radio™ (p. 496)
unable to receive digital broadcasts but it will
• HD Radio™ sub-channels (p. 497) continue to function as a conventional radio
• HD Radio™ limitations (p. 497) (analog FM receiver). Please note that when
HD is switched off, it will not be possible to
• Changing waveband and radio station
tune in to sub-channels.
(p. 492)
• Searching for a radio station (p. 492) Activating or deactivating HD Radio only
affects the currently selected waveband.

Related information
• HD Radio™ (p. 495)
• HD Radio™ sub-channels (p. 497)

496
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

HD Radio™ sub-channels If you tap a sub-channel favorite, it may take HD Radio™ limitations
In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM up to 6 seconds before the channel becomes
wavebands only) will also have sub-channels audible. If you tap a station while you are out Limitations
offering additional types of programming or of digital range of the transmitter, No • Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM
music. reception will be displayed. only): The main channel is the only chan-
nel that can receive in hybrid mode (both
Sub-channels Related information digital and analog). If a frequency has sub-
• HD Radio™ (p. 495) channels, they are broadcast in digital
• Activating and deactivating the HD mode only. The main FM channel will be
Radio™ (p. 496) displayed as, for example, "WRIF-FM
HD1". The sub-FM channels will be dis-
• Changing waveband and radio station
played as"WRIF-FM HD2", "WRIF-FM
(p. 492)
HD3", etc.
• Searching for a radio station (p. 492)
• Reception coverage area: Due to current
• HD Radio™ limitations (p. 497) IBOC transmitter power limitations, the
reception coverage area in digital mode is
somewhat more limited than the station's
analog coverage area. Be aware that, like
all radio transmission technology, terrain,
Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels time of day, vegetation and buildings can
If any sub-channels are available, they will lis- have a positive or negative effect on radio
ted below the main channel on the screen. In reception.
this example, WILD-FM HD2 is a sub-chan- • Analog to digital/digital to analog
nel. blending: Analog to digital blending will
Selecting sub-channels occur as the signal strength reaches a pre-
set threshold in the receiver. This will be
To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), tap the
noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak
station on the screen or press the forward/
reception) and is normal.
back arrow keys on the right-side steering
wheel keypad or below the screen.
Sub-channels can also be saved as radio
favorites.
}}

497
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| NOTE SiriusXM® Satellite radio*

There may be a noticeable difference in The SiriusXM® Satellite system broadcasts
sound quality when a change from ana- from of a number of high elevation satellites
logue to digital or digital to analogue in geosynchronous orbit.
occurs, such as: Listening to satellite radio
• Volume increase or decrease The digital signals from the satellites are line-
• Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Mid- of-sight, which means that physical obstruc-
range/Treble cut or boost tions such as bridges, tunnels, etc, may tem-
porarily interfere with signal reception.
• Time alignment (Digital program mate-
rial in extreme cases can be as much Avoid any obstructions, such as metallic
as 8 seconds behind the analogue). objects transported on roof racks or in a ski
This will noticeable as a "stuttering" box, or other antennas that may impede sig-
effect. nals from the SiriusXM® satellites.
The above items are dependant on the Selecting SiriusXM® Satellite radio
broadcaster's equipment settings and
mode
do not indicate a fault in the vehicle's
1. From the center display's Home view,
radio receiver or antenna systems.
swipe from right to left to come to App
view.
Related information
Home view with SiriusXM® Satellite radio activated
• HD Radio™ (p. 495)
If there is no subscription activated, tap chan-
• Activating and deactivating the HD
nel 1, where you will be prompted on the
Radio™ (p. 496)
screen to phone SiriusXM®.
• HD Radio™ sub-channels (p. 497)
If a cell phone is paired and connected to the
vehicle, you can also subscribe by:
2. Tap the SiriusXM® Satellite radio icon.
1. From Home view, pull down the Settings
menu.

498 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

2. Open the settings menu for SiriusXM® Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio* Search
Satellite radio. SiriusXM® Satellite radio offers several fea- Tap the magnifying glass to display a screen
tures for finding and listening to music, news, where you can enter text using the center dis-
3. Tap Unsubscribed Services.
sporting events, etc. being broadcast on sat- play's keyboard or by writing in the free-text
4. To call SiriusXM®, enter the phone num- field to search for e.g., a station number, an
ellite radio stations.
ber. They will activate the subscription of artist, song title, etc.
your choice. This may take several SiriusXM® Satellite radio functions Channels
minutes.
Tap to display a complete list of the channels
When the subscription has been activated, tap included in your subscription. Tap a channel
the SiriusXM® Satellite radio icon to start the name to listen. If a subscription to a channel
function and display the channel list included has expired, its name will be grayed-out on the
in your subscription. screen.

Related information For quick access to a channel that you often

Radio (p. 490) listen to, tap the star to the right of the chan-
•
nel's name. It will then be added to your list of
• Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 499) favorites.
• Settings for SiriusXM® Satellite radio* Favorites
(p. 501) Tap to display the channels that you have
• SiriusXM Travel Link®* (p. 502) added to this list. Tap a channel name to lis-
With SiriusXM® Satellite radio activated, tap ten.
Library to display a screen offering the follow-
ing functions:
• Search (the magnifying glass icon)
• Channels
• Favorites
• Categories
If you have used this view previously, you will
be returned to the most recently used one.

}}

* Option/accessory. 499
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Categories/Genres 3. A pop-up window will be displayed show- To buy a song in iTunes, begin by connecting
Tap to display the categories available. Tap a ing a list of alerts (nothing will be dis- an iPhone/iPod/iPad to the USB port in the
category or genre name to display the chan- played if the selected channel does not tunnel console. The iTunes tagging list will
nels that it contains and then tap a channel to support the alert function). automatically be transferred to the device and
listen. removed from the list in the vehicle. If the
4. Select one of the alternatives in list (only
device is connected when a song is tagged,
If you have activated alerts (see the “Alerts” one can be selected at a time).
the data will automatically be saved in the
section below) and an alert is activated for an 5. The song/artist/team will now be added to device. To purchase the song, consult the
artist, song or team, temporary virtual catego- the list of alerts. Favorite sports teams can iTunes support page.
ries will also be created and displayed. The also be added to the list using “Game
channels currently broadcasting the song, Alert” in the SiriusXM satellite radio set- Related information
artist or broadcasting a program with the tings. • SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 498)
selected team will be listed in a virtual cate-
> When your choice is being broadcast • Entering characters, letters and words by
gory.
on a channel, you will be informed by a hand in the center display (p. 133)
EPG (Electronic Program Guide) pop-up.
• Settings for SiriusXM® Satellite radio*
On the center display's Home view, tap EPG (p. 501)
for information about e.g., when a program is
iTunes tagging
being broadcast and its name, description,
From the center display's Top view, tap • Settings for SiriusXM® Satellite radio*
SiriusXM Settings. Tap the iTunes Tagging (p. 501)
artist, etc. If no information is currently availa-
menu. Tap the iTunes Tagging box to acti- • Connecting a device via the USB port
ble, No information will be displayed.
vate/deactivate this function and tap Close to (p. 514)
Alerts return to Home view. Tap Tags List to display
If this feature has been selected under a list of all tagged songs.
SiriusXM Settings, the Alerts button will be If the function is activated, the iTunes tag
displayed on the Home view. button will be displayed in Home view. If a
To add e.g. an artist's name, song title or a song is played that you would like to buy in
sports team to the list of alerts: the iTunes store, tap this button while the
song is playing to tag it. If a song with iTunes
1. Tune to a channel that is broadcasting a
Tagging information is available, the button
song, game, etc., of your choice.
will be selectable. Tap the button to tag the
2. Tap the Alerts button. song. If you would like to buy a tagged song
via iTunes, Tap the iTunes tag button.

500 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Settings for SiriusXM® Satellite From the Home screen, tap JUMP to activate team as a favorite. An alert will then be provi-
radio* the function. When traffic/weather information ded when information about the team is being
There are numerous settings that can be is available from the selected city, the radio broadcast.
will automatically tune to the channel provid-
made to enhance your SiriusXM® Satellite Tap Confirm below the list to return to the list
ing the information. When the information/
radio listening experience. of sports.
announcement is finished, the radio will auto-
Settings matically return to the channel that you were Tap Back to return to the list of settings or
Drag down the top view and tap on Settings previously listening to. Close to return to the main screen.
Media SiriusXM. The following alterna- During an announcement, tap JUMP to inter- Unsubscribed Services
tives will be displayed: rupt the message and return to the station If you have a SiriusXM® Satellite radio sub-
that you were currently listening to. scription, any channels not included in the
subscription will be listed here. Call
Alert Notifications
SiriusXM™ to subscribe. The phone number
Tap the box to activate/deactivate. When acti-
will be shown on the screen. If a cell phone is
vated, you will be notified if a song, artist, etc.
paired and connected to the vehicle, tap the
that you have selected is playing. You will be
phone number to make the call.
asked if you want to listen.
Skipped Stations
Alert Notifications Sound
Tap to display a list of channels that you would
Opt to receive an audible alert when one of
like to skip (hide). Hide channels from the
your selected choices is being played.
channel list by tapping the boxes to the right
Sort Channels of the screen. Skipped (hidden) channels will
Select how to sort your channels list. not be shown in the channel list. However, a
iTunes Tagging channel previously selected as a favorite will
Traffic Jump still be displayed in the list of favorites, even it
Tap to display a menu with the options:
Tap to display a list of cities from which you iTunes Tagging and Tags List. With this fea- has been added to the skip list.
can choose to get traffic/weather information ture activated, songs can be tagged for later Skipped Categories
(or Traffic jump off to deactivate the feature). purchase from the iTunes store. Tap to display a list of categories. Tap a cate-
Tap to select a city (JUMP will be displayed
Game Alerts gory to skip (hide) it. It will not be displayed in
on the Home screen next to Library). Tap
Tap to display a list of sports. the list of categories.
Back to return to the list of settings or Close
to return to the Home screen. Tap a sport to display a list of teams and tap a
box on the right side of the screen to select a
}}

* Option/accessory. 501
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Related information SiriusXM Travel Link®* 3. Tap Media.

• SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 498) SiriusXM Travel Link is a subscription fea- 4. Press SiriusXM Travel Link and
• Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 499) ture offered by SiriusXM® satellite radio* that Subscription Status.
can provide information about e.g., weather > To subscribe, call the phone number lis-
forecasts, weather alerts, service stations, ted on the screen.
sports, etc. in the vicinity of the vehicle.
Any services not subscribed will be grayed out
Starting SiriusXM Travel Link and contain the text Service not subscribed.
When the services have been activated (sub-
NOTE scribed), tap the one of your choice to start it.
SiriusXM Travel Link services are only
The following applies for all of the SiriusXM
available in vehicles equipped with the
Travel Link services:
Sensus Navigation system.
• Pressing the Back button will take you
back to the previous screen
From the center display's App view, tap Travel
Link to activate the feature. A disclaimer text • Pressing the Close button will take you to
will be displayed. Tap OK to display a list of the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen.
SiriusXM Travel Link services:
• Alerts
• Fuel
• Sports
• Weather
• Favorites
In order to use one or more of these services,
the user has to subscribe to the ones desired.
To subscribe to a SiriusXM Travel Link service:
1. Open the center display's Top view.
2. Tap Settings.

502 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

NOTE Related information SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Weather

• SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 498) This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides
If the Close button is used to return to the
• SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Fuel (p. 505) weather-related information near the vehicle,
SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, the
at a local ski resort, etc.
following applies (the Weather service is • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Sports (p. 507) From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen,
used here as an example):
• SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Weather to display weather-related information:
• If you have already used the Weather (p. 503)
– Tap the Weather button to display this
function, tapping Weather again in the • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Notifications screen.
SiriusXM Travel Link home screen (p. 505)
before using any other SiriusXM At the top of the screen, the following catego-
Travel Link service will return you to ries will be displayed:
the point where you left the Weather • Search (the magnifying glass icon)
service.
• Local
• If another SiriusXM Travel Link serv-
ice is used (e.g., Fuel, Sports, etc.) • Ski condition
before you return to the Weather serv- • Areas
ice, you will be returned to the default • Favorites
Weather view (in this case, Local).
Tap the category of your choice.
The same principle applies to all of the
SiriusXM Travel Link services. Search
Tap the magnifying glass icon. If the function
is supported in the current context, a keyboard
Favorites
will appear on the screen. Enter the text of
Many SiriusXM Travel Link selections can be
your choice and tap Search for detailed infor-
saved for easy access as favorites by tapping
mation from the SiriusXM Travel Link data-
the "star" icon next to the selection where
base.
applicable.
To display a list of your stored selections, tap
the Favorites application in the SiriusXM
Travel Link home screen.

}}

* Option/accessory. 503
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Local4 5 days Tap the relevant box to the right of the option
Information from the closest weather station Tap to see weather information for the coming to select/deselect it. Tap Done to confirm and
will be displayed and the following alternatives 5 days. return to the previous screen or Cancel.
are available: Tap Back to return to the Local screen or Areas
• Map view Close to return to the SiriusXM Travel Link Tap Areas to display a list of areas/locations in
home screen. states from the SiriusXM Travel Link database.
• Today
• 5 days Ski condition Scroll to a state and tap to display:
Map view Tap to display a list of ski areas in the vicinity
• Weather locations: tap arrow to the right
Tap the map to display it in full-screen mode. of the vehicle. Tap a name in the list for infor- to display a list of towns. Scroll to desired
Tap Back to return to the original map view. mation such as if the ski area is open/closed, town and tap for detailed weather infor-
temperature, wind conditions, snow condi- mation. You can choose Map view, today,
Tap Map options to display the following tions, the number of lifts that are in operation, 5 days or Favorites (star)
alternatives. etc.
• Ski locations: tap arrow at right to dis-
• Weather radar • Weather locations play local ski areas. Tap an area for
• Storm attributes • Ski location detailed info.
• Surface features Tap Map view to display a map and a weather For information about storing a location, state,
• Tropical storm tracks legend. town, etc. as a favorite, see the heading
"Favorites" in the article "SiriusXM Travel
• Winds Tap Map options to display the following
Link."
alternatives.
Tap the relevant box to the right of the option
to select/deselect it. Tap Done to confirm and • Weather radar Related information
return to the previous screen or Cancel. • SiriusXM Travel Link®* (p. 502)
• Storm attributes
Today Surface features • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Fuel (p. 505)
•
Tap to see the current temperature, or the • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Sports (p. 507)
temperature in 3/6 hours. • Tropical storm tracks
• Winds • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Notifications
Tap Back to return to the Local screen or (p. 505)
Close to return to the SiriusXM Travel Link
home screen.

4 This is the weather default unless another alternative has been selected.

504 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Information about a notification SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Fuel5
Notifications If any notifications have been displayed on the This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides
This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides screen, tap one for more detailed information information and guidance to service stations
notifications of potential weather problems or (i.e., the location of the weather problem on a near the vehicle providing the type of fuel that
other emergency situations in the vicinity of map and a description of the situation). you prefer/require for your vehicle.
the vehicle. If a phone number is available in a notification, From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen,
From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, a Call button will be displayed. Tap this button to show fuel information:
to show notifications: for additional information. – Tap the Fuel button to display the main
– Tap the Alerts button to display this fuel screen.
Related information
screen. The following categories are shown:
• SiriusXM Travel Link®* (p. 502)
• If any notifications are currently available,
• SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Fuel (p. 505) • Search (the magnifying glass icon)
a message will appear at the top of the
screen. They can also be listed from the • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Sports (p. 507) • Nearby
Settings menu in the center display's Top • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Weather (p. 503) • Recommended
view. Favorites
•
• If no notifications are available, No active Brands
•
alerts will be displayed.
Tap one of the alternatives to display its
Types of notifications screen.
To select the types of notifications to be dis-
played:
NOTE
1. From the Alerts screen, tap the Select
In each of the categories listed, tapping the
alerts button at the bottom of the screen.
Select fuel type button near the bottom
2. This displays the types of notifications that of the screen opens a sub-view where you
can be displayed. Tap the box to the right can specify the type of fuel preferred/
of each type of notification to select/dese- required (Regular, Midrange, Premium,
lect it. Diesel, Electric 120V, etc.) Tap Done to
3. Tap Done when you have made your return to the previous screen.
selections. You will return to the Alerts
screen.
}}

* Option/accessory. 505
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Search for additional information about using the nav- 2. Tap a brand to display a list of service sta-
Tap the magnifying glass icon. If the function igation system. tions affiliated with that brand (BP, Exxon,
is supported in the current context, a keyboard etc.).
will appear on the screen. Enter the text of Recommended
Tap for a list of service stations near the vehi- 3. Tap the name of a service station to dis-
your choice and tap Search for detailed infor- play more detailed information.
mation if available. cle, displayed according to the price of regular
gasoline (unless another grade/type of fuel has In addition to the Select fuel type button at
Nearby been selected in Select fuel type) or of sta- the bottom of the screen, tap the Sort button
Tap for a list of service stations in the vicinity tions offering the greatest number of available to arrange the list according to Nearest or
of the vehicle, with the nearest station at the charging ports for electric vehicles/hybrids. Cheapest/Recommended. Tap Done to
top of the list. The station offering the lowest price/most return to the previous screen.
available charging ports will be displayed at
The following information will be provided Related information
the top of the list. Tap the name of a service
where available:
station to display more detailed information. • SiriusXM Travel Link®* (p. 502)
• For vehicles using gasoline, the price
Favorites • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Notifications
information for regular gasoline (unless
Tap for a list of service stations that have been (p. 505)
another grade/type of fuel has been
selected in Select fuel type) stored as favorites. Tap the name of a service • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Sports (p. 507)
station to display more detailed information. • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Weather (p. 503)
• For electric vehicles/hybrids, information
about charging stations, showing the total In addition to the Select fuel type button at
number of charging ports and the number the bottom of the screen, tap the Edit button
of ports currently not in use to delete individual stations from the list or tap
• The distance to the station Delete to clear the list. Tap Done to return to
the previous screen.
• A star icon to set the service station as a
favorite Brands
Tap the name of a service station to display 1. Tap Brands to display a list of service sta-
more detailed information. tion brands in the area.
For guidance to the service station, tap the
Start navigation or Add as waypoint but-
tons. See the Sensus Navigation* supplement

5 This service is not available in Canada.

506 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Sports 4. Tap one of the divisions to display: Media player
This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides • In progress: play-by-play information The media player can play audio from external
information about sporting events, tourna- about a match/game/tournament cur- audio sources connected via USB port or
ments, teams, leagues, etc. rently in progress. Continue tapping to Bluetooth. It can also play video format via
From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, display. In the detailed view, you can the USB port.
to display sports information: also select a radio station that is cur- When the vehicle is connected to the Internet,
rently broadcasting an ongoing sport- it is also possible to listen to web radio, audio
– Tap the Sports button to display the main
ing event books and to access music services via apps.
sports screen.
A number of sports categories will be listed • Headlines for MLB: tap to display
brief headline information
(Football, Baseball, Basketball, etc.)
Tap a sport to select a league in that sport
• Scheduled: schedules for coming
matches, games, etc.
(NFL, MLB, etc.) or a sport organization (PGA,
LPGA, etc.). • Scores: match/game results
The following is an example of the result of The same principle applies to all sports.
tapping Baseball:
Related information
1. MLB (Major League Baseball) will be dis- • SiriusXM Travel Link®* (p. 502)
played.
• SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Notifications
2. Tap MLB to display the two leagues in (p. 505)
Major League Baseball (American League
• SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Fuel (p. 505) The media player is controlled
or National League). from the center display. Sev-
• SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Weather (p. 503)
3. Tap one of the league names to display eral functions can also be
the divisions in the league. controlled using voice com-
mands or the right-side steer-
ing wheel keypad.
The radio, which is also handled by the media
player, is described in a separate section.

}}

* Option/accessory. 507
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Related information Playing media USB flash drive

• Playing media (p. 508) The media player is controlled from the cen- 1. Inset a USB flash drive.
• Controlling and changing media (p. 509) ter display. Several other functions can also 2. Open the USB app from App view.
be controlled using the right-side steering
• Media searches (p. 510) 3. Select the track you would like to play.
wheel keypad or by using voice commands.
• Apps (p. 488) > Playback will begin.
The radio can also be controlled in the media
• Radio (p. 490) player. See the section describing the radio. MP3 player and iPod®
• Video (p. 512)
Starting a media source
• Streaming media via Bluetooth® NOTE
(p. 513) To start playback from an iPod, the iPod
• Playing media via the USB port (p. 514) app must be used (not USB).
• Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538) When an iPod is used as source, the car's
audio and media system has a menu struc-
ture similar to the iPod player's own menu
structure.

1. Connect a media source.

2. Start playback in the connected media
source.
3. Open the app (iPod, USB) from App view.
> Playback will begin.
Bluetooth-connected device
1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source.
2. Connect a media source.
3. Start playback in the connected media
source.
App view. (Generic illustration; basic apps vary
depending on market and model). 4. Open the Bluetooth app from App view.
> Playback will begin.

508 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Media with Internet connection • Download apps (p. 489) Controlling and changing media
Medial playback from apps with Internet con- • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538) Media playback can be controlled using voice
nection: commands, the steering wheel keypad or the
• Video (p. 512)
1. Connect the vehicle to the Internet. center display.
• Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 516) The media player can be con-
2. Open the app from the App view. • Android Auto* (p. 520) trolled using voice com-
> Playback will begin. mands, the right-side steer-
• Voice control for radio and media (p. 153)
Read the separate section on how to down- ing wheel keypad or the cen-
• Compatible file formats for media ter display.
load apps. (p. 515)
Video
1. Connect a media source.
2. Open the USB app from App view.
3. Tap the title you would like to play.
> Playback will begin.
Apple CarPlay
CarPlay is described in a separate section.
Android Auto
Android Auto is described in a separate sec-
tion.

Related information
• Handling the App menu in the instrument Volume - turn the knob under the center dis-
panel (p. 109) play or tap on the right-side steering
• Radio (p. 490) wheel keypad to raise or lower the volume.
• Controlling and changing media (p. 509) Play/pause - tap the image for the track you
Connecting a device via the USB port would like to play, or press the button below
•
(p. 514) the center display or on the right-side
steering wheel keypad.
• Connecting a device via Bluetooth®
(p. 513)
}}

* Option/accessory. 509
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Changing track/song - tap the desired track in Similar - tap the button to Media searches
the center display, or press or below use Gracenote to search for Searches can be performed to locate a spe-
the center display or on the right-side steering similar music on the USB cific artist, composer, song title, album,
wheel keypad. device and create a playlist video, audio book or playlist. If the vehicle is
from the music found. The connected to the Internet, it is also possible
Rewinding/fast-forwarding - tap the time axis playlist can contain up to 50
in the center display and drag it sideways, or to search for podcasts (online digital media).
tracks.
press and hold or below the center
display or on the right-side steering wheel Change device - tap the but-
keypad. ton to toggle between USB
devices when more than one
Changing media source - select from among is connected.
previous sources in the app, tap the desired
app in App view or use the right-side steering
wheel keypad to select the app in the app
menu . Related information
• Media player (p. 507)
Library - tap the button to
play from the library. • Media searches (p. 510)
• Sound settings (p. 486)
• Apps (p. 488) 1. Tap .
• Gracenote® (p. 511) > Search view will displayed and the key-
board will open.
• Voice control for radio and media (p. 153)
Shuffle - tap the button to 2. Enter a search word/phrase.
play tracks in a random order.
3. Tap Search.
> A search will be performed on con-
nected devices and the results will be
displayed by category.
Swipe the screen horizontally to display each
category separately.

510
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Related information Gracenote® Updating Gracenote

• Media player (p. 507) Gracenote identifies artists, albums, tracks The contents of the Gracenote database are
• Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538) and any associated images that can be dis- continuously updated. Download the latest
played during playback. update to take advantage of improvements.
• Playing media (p. 508)
Gracenote MusicID® is a standard for music For information and to download, see
• Entering characters, letters and words by recognition. It can identify and analyze the volvocars.com/support.
hand in the center display (p. 133) metadata of music files and present informa-
tion about the music. Metadata from different Related information
sources may sometimes be inconsistent or • Playing media (p. 508)
insufficient. • License agreement for audio and media
Because Gracenote supports phonetic pro- (p. 547)
cessing of artist name, album titles and gen- • Voice control for radio and media (p. 153)
res, voice commands can be used to control
music playback.

1. Tap Settings in the Top view.

2. Tap Media Gracenote®.
3. Choose settings for Gracenote data:
• Gracenote® Online Search - search
Gracenote's online database for currently
playing media.
• Gracenote® Multiple Results - select
how Gracenote data should be displayed if
there are multiple search results.
1 - the file's original data will be used.
2 - Gracenote data will be used.
3 - Gracenote or original data can be
selected.
• None - no result will be displayed.

* Option/accessory. 511
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Video Playing video Playing DivX®

The media player can play videos from USB- The USB app in App view is used to play vid- The DivX Certified® device must be registered
connected devices. eos. to play purchased DivX video-on-demand
Video is not available when the vehicle is mov- 1. Connecting media source (USB device). (VOD) movies.
ing; only audio will be played. Video will
2. Open the USB app from App view. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view.
resume when the vehicle is stationary.
3. Tap the title you would like to play. 2. Tap Video DivX® VOD to get a regis-
Information on compatible media formats is
provided in a separate section. > Playback will begin. tration code.
If the USB device also contains music and 3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information
Related information audio tracks, it may be difficult to locate the and to complete the registration process.
• Playing video (p. 512) video files. To find them, go to Library and
• Playing DivX® (p. 512) select the video tab. Related information
• Video (p. 512)
• Video settings (p. 513)
Related information Playing video (p. 512)
• Compatible file formats for media •
• Video (p. 512)
(p. 515) • Video settings (p. 513)
• Playing DivX® (p. 512)
• Compatible file formats for media
• Video settings (p. 513) (p. 515)
• Compatible file formats for media
(p. 515)

512
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Video settings Streaming media via Bluetooth® Connecting a device via Bluetooth®
You can change some language settings for The vehicle's media player is equipped with Connect a Bluetooth® device to the vehicle to
video playback. Bluetooth and can play audio files from wirelessly play media and give the vehicle an
Audio Language and Subtitle Language can Bluetooth-enabled external devices such as Internet connection if it is available.
be adjusted with the video player in full-screen cellular phones and tablets. Many cellular phones on the market currently
mode or by opening Top view and tapping In order for the media player to be able to offer wireless Bluetooth® technology, but not
Settings Media Video. wirelessly play audio files from an external all phones are fully compatible with the vehi-
device, the device must be connected to the cle.
Related information vehicle via Bluetooth.
• Video (p. 512) The procedure for connecting a media device
Related information is the same as for connecting a cellular phone
• Connecting a device via Bluetooth® to the vehicle via Bluetooth®.
(p. 513)
Related information
• Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- • Streaming media via Bluetooth® (p. 513)
tooth for the first time (p. 524)
• Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
• Playing media (p. 508) tooth for the first time (p. 524)
• Compatible file formats for media • Playing media (p. 508)
(p. 515)

513
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Playing media via the USB port Connecting a device via the USB
External audio sources, such as an iPod® or port
MP3 player, can be connected to the audio External audio sources, such as an iPod® or
system via the vehicle's USB port. MP3 player, can be connected to the audio
Devices with rechargeable batteries can be system via any of the vehicle's USB ports.
charged when they are connected via the USB If the vehicle has two USB ports, the phone
port and the ignition is in mode I, II or the must be connected to the port with the white
engine is running. frame to use Apple CarPlay* or Android Auto*.
The content on the external source can be
read faster if it only contains data of a compat-
ible format. Video files can also be played via
the USB port.
USB ports (type C) on rear of tunnel console for
Some MP3 players have their own file system charging phones, tablets, etc.6.
that the vehicle has support for.
Related information
Related information • Playing media (p. 508)
• Connecting a device via the USB port • Playing media via the USB port (p. 514)
(p. 514)
• Media player (p. 507)
• Playing media (p. 508)
• Technical specifications for USB devices
• Video (p. 512) USB ports (type A) in the tunnel console. Route the (p. 515)
• Ignition modes (p. 419) cable forward to help avoid pinching when the cover • Technical specifications for USB devices
is closed.
• Technical specifications for USB devices (p. 515)
(p. 515) • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 516)
• Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 516) • Android Auto* (p. 520)
• Android Auto* (p. 520)

6 It is not possible to playback media in the car's audio or media system via this input.

514 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Technical specifications for USB • Max. current 3.0 A Compatible file formats for media
devices In order to play media, the following file for-
Related information
For the contents of USB devices to be read, mats must be used.
• Playing media via the USB port (p. 514)
the following specifications must be met.
Any folder structures will not be shown in the Audio files
center display during playback. For- File extension Codec
mat
Max. number
MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III,
Files 15 000 MPEG2 Layer III,
MP3 Pro (mp3
Folders 1 000 compatible),
Folder levels 8 MP3 HD (mp3
compatible)
Playlists 100
AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC
Tracks in a playlist 1 000 (MPEG-4 part III
Audio), HE-AAC
Subfolders No limit
(aacPlus v1/v2)
Technical specifications for the USB-A WMA .wma WMA8/9,
connector WMA9/10 Pro
• Type A port
WAV .wav LPCM
• Version 2.0
FLAC .flac FLAC
• Voltage 5 V
• Max. current 2.1 A Video files
Technical specifications for the USB-C Format File extension
connector MP4 .mp4, .m4v
• Type C port
• Version 3.1 MPEG-PS .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v

• Voltage 5 V
}}

515
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Format File extension Audio codec MP3, AC3 Apple® CarPlay®*

With CarPlay7, you can listen to music, make
AVI .avi Subtitles XSUB
phone calls, get driving instructions, send/
AVI (DivX) .avi, .divx Special func- Multiple subtitles, multi- receive messages and use Siri, all while
tions ple audio, resume play remaining focused on driving.
ASF .asf, .wmv CarPlay works with select
Reference Meets all requirements of iOS devices. If the car does
Subtitles the DivX Home Theater not already support CarPlay,
profile. Visit divx.com for this can be retrofitted. Con-
Format File extension more information and tact a Volvo retailer to install
SubViewer .sub software tools to convert CarPlay.
your files into DivX Home
SubRip .srt Theater video. Information about supported apps and com-
patible iOS devices are available on the Apple
SSA .ssa website: www.apple.com/ios/carplay/. Using
Related information
DivX® • Media player (p. 507) apps that are not compatible with CarPlay
DivX-certified devices have been tested for may sometimes mean that the connection
• Video (p. 512)
high-quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. between the device and the vehicle is broken.
• Playing DivX® (p. 512) Please note that Volvo is not responsible for
When you see the DivX logo, you have the
freedom to play your favorite DivX videos. the content of CarPlay.
When using map navigation via CarPlay, guid-
Profile DivX Home Theater ance will only be shown on the center display
and not in the instrument panel or head-up
Video codec DivX, MPEG-4 display.
Resolution 720x576 When navigation is started through Apple
CarPlay, any current route guidance from the
Audio speed 4.8Mbps
vehicle's own systems will be discontinued.
(bit rate)
CarPlay apps can be controlled from the cen-
Frame rate 30 fps ter display, an iOS device or with the right-
File extension .divx, .avi side steering wheel keypad (for certain func-
tions). The apps can also be voice-controlled
Max. file size 4 GB

516 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

using Siri. Press and hold the button on Using Apple® CarPlay®* 2. Read the terms and conditions and then
the steering wheel to start voice control with To use CarPlay9,
the Siri voice control must tap Accept to connect.
Siri. Press briefly to activate the vehicle's own be activated in your iOS device. The device > The CarPlay tile will open and compati-
voice control system. If Siri cuts off too soon, must also have an Internet connection via Wi- ble apps will be displayed.
press and hold the 8 button on the steer-
Fi or a mobile network for all functions to 3. Tap the desired app.
ing wheel.. work.
> The app will start up.
By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge Connecting an iOS device and starting
the following: Apple CarPlay is a service CarPlay
provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and
conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not
responsible for Apple CarPlay or its NOTE
features/applications. When using Apple CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth is
CarPlay, certain information from your car disabled. A cell phone or media player con-
(including its position) is transferred to nected to the vehicle via Bluetooth will
your iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you therefore not be available when CarPlay is
are fully responsible for your and any active. An alternative source must be used
others person’s use of Apple CarPlay. to provide an Internet connection for the
vehicle's apps. Use Wi-Fi or the vehicle's
Related information integrated modem.
• Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 517)
• Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 519) To start CarPlay from an iOS device that has
• Voice Control (p. 149) not previously been connected:

• Resetting center display settings (p. 138) 1. Connect an iOS device that supports
CarPlay to the USB port. If there are two
USB ports, use the one with the white
frame.

7 Availability may vary depending on market.

8 Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
9 Availability may vary depending on market.
}}

* Option/accessory. 517
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Starting CarPlay Switching connection between • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
To start CarPlay from an iOS device that has CarPlay and iPod a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 539)
previously been connected: • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
CarPlay to iPod
1. Connect an iOS device to the USB port. If 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. vehicle modem (SIM card) (p. 540)
there are two USB ports, use the one with • Voice Control (p. 149)
the white frame. 2. Proceed to Communication Apple
CarPlay.
> If the auto start setting is selected –
the name of the device will be dis- 3. Uncheck the box for the iOS device that
played. The CarPlay tile will open auto- should no longer start CarPlay automati-
matically when Home view is displayed cally when the USB cable is connected.
when the iOS device is connected. 4. Remove and then reinsert the iOS device
2. If the CarPlay tile does not open automati- into the USB port.
cally, tap the name of the device. The 5. Open the iPod app from App view.
CarPlay tile will open and compatible apps
will be displayed. iPod to CarPlay
1. Tap Apple CarPlay in App view.
3. If any other app is active in the same tile,
tap Apple CarPlay in App view. 2. Read the information in the pop-up win-
dow and then tap OK.
> The CarPlay tile will open and compati-
ble apps will be displayed. 3. Remove and then reinsert the iOS device
into the USB port.
4. Tap the desired app.
> The Apple CarPlay tile will open and
> The app will start up.
compatible apps will be displayed10.
CarPlay will run in the background if another
app is started, or is already active when the Related information
device is connected, in the same view. To dis- • Connecting a device via the USB port
play CarPlay in the tile, tap the CarPlay icon in (p. 514)
App view. • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 516)
• Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 519)

10 Apple, CarPlay, iPhone and iPod are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

518 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* 2. Tap Sound System Volumes to Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®*
Settings for an iOS device connected through change the settings for the following: Here are some useful tips for when you use
CarPlay11,12. • Voice Control CarPlay®13.
• Update your iOS device with the latest
Automatic start • Navi Voice Guidance version of the iOS operating system and
1. Tap Settings in the Top view. • Phone Ringtone ensure that the apps have been updated.
2. Tap Communication Apple CarPlay Related information • In the event of a problem with CarPlay,
and select the desired setting: unplug the iOS device from the USB port
• Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 516)
and then plug it in again. Otherwise, try to
• Check the box - CarPlay will start auto- • Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 517) close the app on the device that is not
matically when the USB cable is con-
• Resetting center display settings (p. 138) working and then restart the app, or try
nected.
closing all apps and restart your device.
• Uncheck the box - CarPlay will not start
• If the apps do not appear when CarPlay
automatically when the USB cable is
starts (black screen), try minimizing and
connected.
expanding the tile for CarPlay.
A maximum of 20 iOS devices can be stored • Using apps that are not compatible with
in the list, which may be worth noting if many CarPlay may sometimes cause the con-
people share the vehicle, e.g. in a car pool. nection between the iOS device and the
When the list is full and a new device is con- vehicle to be broken. Information about
nected, the oldest one will be deleted. supported apps and compatible devices
To delete the list, the settings must be rest in can be found on Apple's website. You can
the center display (factory reset). also search for CarPlay in the App Store to
find information about apps that are com-
System Volumes patible with CarPlay in your market.
1. Tap Settings in the Top view. You can use Siri to write or dictate mes-
•
sages or have them read aloud. Messages
are read aloud and dictated in the lan-
guage selected in the Siri settings. When

11 Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

Availability may vary depending on market.
}}
12
13 Availability may vary depending on market.

* Option/accessory. 519
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| you write/dictate messages, no text will Related information Android Auto*

be shown in the vehicle's center display, • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 516) Android Auto15 lets you listen to music, make
but the text will be shown in your iOS calls, get driving directions and use apps cus-
• Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
device. When using Siri, note that it is the tomized for your vehicle from an Android
a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 539)
phone's microphones that are used and device. Android Auto can be used with
the quality therefore depends on the selected Android devices.
phone's location.
• If the device is connected to the vehicle
through Bluetooth, the connection will be
broken when CarPlay is used. Resume
Internet connection in the vehicle by teth-
ering using the device's Wi-Fi hotspot.
• Some of CarPlay's functions (such as
voice calls and messages) interrupt the
use of the vehicle's own functions and
CarPlay will instead be automatically dis-
played. If you do not wish this to happen,
deselect display of the corresponding
function in CarPlay under the phone's
For information on supported apps and com-
notification settings.
patible Android devices, please go to
• CarPlay only works with iPhone14. www.android.com/auto/. For third-party apps,
see Google Play. Please note that Volvo is not
NOTE responsible for the content of Android Auto.
Availability and functionality can vary Android Auto is started from App view. After
depending on market. Android Auto has been initially started, the app
will start automatically the next time the
device is connected. The automatic start set-
ting can be deactivated in Settings.

14 Apple, CarPlay and iPhone are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
15 Availability may vary depending on market.

520 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

NOTE Using Android Auto* From a previously connected Android

To use the Android Auto16 app, the app must device
When a device is connected to Android 1. Connect the device to the USB port with
be installed on the Android device and the
Auto, it is possible to stream to another the white frame.
device must be connected to the vehicle's
media player via Bluetooth. Bluetooth is
USB port. > If the auto start setting is selected -
active while Android Auto is in use.
NOTE the name of the device will be dis-
played.
When using navigation guidance provided by For installation of Android Auto to be pos-
Android Auto, navigation will only be shown sible, the vehicle must be equipped with 2. Tap the name of the device – the
on the center display and not in the instrument two USB ports (USB hub)*. If the car only Android Auto tile will open and compatible
panel or head-up display. has one USB port then it is not possible to apps will be displayed.
use Android Auto. 3. If the automatic start setting is not acti-
Android Auto can be controlled from the cen-
ter display, with the right-side steering wheel vated - open the Android Auto app from
keypad or by using voice commands. Press Connecting an Android device for the first App view.
and hold the steering wheel button to time > The Android Auto tile will open and
start the Google Assistant and press briefly to 1. Connect the Android device to the USB compatible apps will be displayed.
deactivate it. port with the white frame. 4. Tap the desired app.
By using Android Auto, you acknowledge 2. Read the information in the pop-up win- > The app will start up.
the following: Android Auto is a service dow and then tap OK.
Android Auto will run in the background if
provided by Google Inc. under its terms 3. Tap Android Auto in App view. another app is started in the same tile. To dis-
and conditions. Volvo Cars is not play Android Auto in the tile, tap the
responsible for Android Auto or its 4. Read the terms and conditions and then
tap Accept to connect. Android Auto icon in App view.
features or applications. When you use
Android Auto, your car transfers certain > The Android Auto tile will open and Related information
information (including its location) to your compatible apps will be displayed. • Android Auto* (p. 520)
connected Android phone. You are fully 5. Tap the desired app. • Settings for Android Auto* (p. 522)
responsible for your and any other
> The app will start up. • Connecting a device via the USB port
person’s use of Android Auto.
(p. 514)
Related information • Voice Control (p. 149)
• Using Android Auto* (p. 521)
• Settings for Android Auto* (p. 522)

* Option/accessory. 521
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Settings for Android Auto* 2. Tap Sound System Volumes to Tips for using Android Auto*
Settings for Android devices initially con- change the settings for the following: Here are some useful tips for when you use
nected with Android Auto17. • Voice Control Android Auto18.
• Ensure that your apps are updated.
Automatic start • Navi Voice Guidance
• When starting the vehicle, wait until the
1. Tap Settings in the Top view. • Phone Ringtone center display has started, connect the
2. Tap Communication Android Auto device and then open Android Auto from
Related information
and select setting: the app view.
• Android Auto* (p. 520)
• Check the box - Android Auto will start • In the event of problems with Android
• Using Android Auto* (p. 521)
automatically when the USB cable is Auto, unplug your Android device from the
• Resetting center display settings (p. 138) USB port and then plug it in again. Other-
connected.
wise, try closing the app on the device and
• Uncheck the box - Android Auto will not
then restarting the app.
start automatically when the USB cable
is connected. • When a device is connected to Android
Auto it is still possible to play media via
A maximum of 20 Android devices can be Bluetooth to another media player. The
stored in the list. When the list is full and a Bluetooth function is on when Android
new device is connected, the oldest one will Auto is used.
be deleted.
• If the Android Auto icon is grayed out, it
A factory reset must be performed to delete means that a device is no longer con-
the list. nected. When you connect your device,
the icon will light up. If there is no icon at
System Volumes all, the vehicle does not support connect-
1. Tap Settings in the Top view. ing a device for this purpose.
• If the device is connected to the vehicle
through Bluetooth, the connection will be
broken when Android Auto is used.
Resume Internet connection in the vehicle

16 Availability may vary depending on market.

17 Availability may vary depending on market.
18 Availability may vary depending on market.

522 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

by tethering using the device's Wi-Fi hot- Phone Overview

spot. A phone equipped with Bluetooth can be
wirelessly connected to the vehicle's inte-
Related information
grated hands-free system.
• Android Auto* (p. 520)
The audio and media system offers hands-free
• Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via functionality for remotely controlling a number
a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 539) of the phone's features. The phone's inte-
grated controls can also be used, even when it
is connected to the vehicle.
When the phone has been paired and con-
nected to the vehicle, it can be used as an
Internet connection or to make or receive
calls, send or receive text messages or wire-
lessly play music. Microphone.
The phone is controlled from the center dis- Phone.
play, and the App menu (accessed using the
right-side steering wheel keypad) and voice Phone handling in the center display.
commands can also be used to control certain
Keypad for controlling phone functions
functions.
shown in the center display and voice
commands.
Instrument panel.

Related information
• Handling phone calls (p. 527)
• Managing the phone book (p. 530)
• Handling text messages (p. 528)
• Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 524)

}}

* Option/accessory. 523
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

• Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- Connecting a phone to the car via Option 1 - searching for the phone
tooth automatically (p. 526) Bluetooth for the first time from the vehicle
• Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- Pair a Bluetooth-enabled phone to the vehicle 1. Make the phone discoverable/visible using
tooth manually (p. 526) to make calls, send/receive text messages its Bluetooth function.
• Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected and wirelessly play media from the vehicle, or 2. Open the phone tile in the center display.
phone (p. 526) connect the vehicle to the Internet.
Two Bluetooth devices can be connected at • If no phone has been paired to the vehi-
• Switch between phones connected via the same time, but in that case, only one will cle, tap Add phone.
Bluetooth (p. 527) be used for wireless playback. The most • If a phone has been paired to the vehi-
• Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi- recently paired phone will be automatically cle, tap Change . Tap Add phone in
ces (p. 527) connected to make calls, send/receive text the pop-up window.
• Wireless phone charger* (p. 532) messages, play media or use as an Internet
> A list of available Bluetooth devices will
connection. It is possible to change what the
• Phone settings (p. 530) be displayed. The list will be updated as
phone is used for under Bluetooth Devices
• Voice Control (p. 149) new devices are discovered.
via the settings menu in the center display's
• Handling the App menu in the instrument Top view. The cellular phone must be equip- 3. Tap the name of the phone you would like
panel (p. 109) ped with Bluetooth and support tethering. to connect.
• Sound settings (p. 486) After the device has been connected/regis- 4. Make sure that the code displayed in the
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via tered for the first time via Bluetooth, the vehicle matches the one in the phone. If it
•
a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 539) device no longer needs to be visible/searcha- does, confirm the code in both places.
ble. It just needs to have Bluetooth activated. 5. In the phone, accept or cancel the options
A maximum of 20 paired Bluetooth devices for selecting the phone's contacts and text
can be stored in the vehicle. messages.
There are two ways to pair a phone to the
vehicle. Searching for the phone from the vehi- NOTE
cle or searching for the vehicle from the
phone. • The message function must be acti-
vated in certain phones.
• Not all cell phones are fully compatible
and may not be able to display con-
tacts and messages in the vehicle.

524 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Option 2 - searching for the vehicle NOTE • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
from the phone a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 539)
1. Open the phone tile in the center display. • The message function must be acti-
vated in certain phones.
• If no phone has been paired to the vehi-
• Not all cell phones are fully compatible
cle, tap Add phone Make vehicle and may not be able to display con-
discoverable. tacts and messages in the vehicle.
• If a phone has been paired to the vehi-
cle, tap Change . Tap Add phone
NOTE
Make vehicle discoverable in the
pop-up window. If the phone's operating system is being
updated, it is possible that the connection
2. Activate Bluetooth in the phone. will be interrupted. Delete the phone from
3. Search in the phone for Bluetooth devices. the car and reconnect.
> A list of available Bluetooth devices will
be displayed. Related information
• Phone (p. 523)
4. Select the vehicle's name from the list of
devices in the phone. • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth automatically (p. 526)
5. A pop-up window for the connection is
shown in the car. Confirm the connection. • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth manually (p. 526)
6. Make sure that the code displayed in the
vehicle matches the one shown in the • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
external device. If it does, confirm the phone (p. 526)
code in both places. • Switch between phones connected via
Bluetooth (p. 527)
7. In the phone, accept or cancel the options
for selecting the phone's contacts and text • Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi-
messages. ces (p. 527)
• Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 531)
• Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538)

* Option/accessory. 525
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Connecting a phone to the car via Connecting a phone to the car via Disconnecting a Bluetooth-
Bluetooth automatically Bluetooth manually connected phone
A phone can be automatically connected to A phone can be manually connected to the A Bluetooth-connected phone can be discon-
the vehicle via Bluetooth. The phone must vehicle via Bluetooth. The phone must have nected from the vehicle.
have first been paired with the vehicle. first been paired with the vehicle. • When the phone is out of range of the
Only the two most recently connected phones 1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone. vehicle, it will be automatically discon-
can be connected automatically. nected. If a call is in progress when the
2. Open the phone tile.
phone is disconnected from the vehicle,
1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone before > A list of available phones will be dis- the call will be transferred from the vehi-
turning the vehicle's ignition to mode I. played. cle's speakers and microphone to the cel-
2. Turn the ignition to I or higher. 3. Tap the name of the phone you would like lular phone.
> The phone will be connected. to connect. • The phone can also be disconnected by
> The phone will be connected. manually deactivating Bluetooth.
Related information
• Phone (p. 523) Related information Related information
• Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- • Phone (p. 523) • Phone (p. 523)
tooth for the first time (p. 524) • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- • Phone settings (p. 530)
• Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- tooth for the first time (p. 524) • Switch between phones connected via
tooth manually (p. 526) • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- Bluetooth (p. 527)
• Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected tooth automatically (p. 526) • Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi-
phone (p. 526) • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected ces (p. 527)
• Switch between phones connected via phone (p. 526) • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 531)
Bluetooth (p. 527) • Switch between phones connected via
• Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi- Bluetooth (p. 527)
ces (p. 527) • Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi-
• Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 531) ces (p. 527)
• Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538) • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 531)
• Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538)
a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 539) • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
• Ignition modes (p. 419) a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 539)

526 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Switch between phones Disconnecting Bluetooth- Handling phone calls

connected via Bluetooth connected devices Handling phone calls in the vehicle for a
It is possible to switch between Bluetooth- Phones or other devices in the list of regis- Bluetooth-connected cellular phone.
connected phones. tered Bluetooth devices can be removed.
1. Open the phone tile. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view.

2. Tap Change or pull down Top view 2. Tap Communication Bluetooth

and tap Settings Communication Devices.
Bluetooth Devices Add device. > A list of registered Bluetooth devices is
> A list of available Bluetooth devices will displayed.
be displayed. 3. Tap the name of the device you would like
3. Tap the name of the phone you would like to remove.
to connect. 4. Tap Remove device and confirm.
> The device is no longer registered in the
Related information
vehicle. Generic illustration.
• Phone (p. 523)
• Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- Related information Making calls
tooth for the first time (p. 524) • Phone (p. 523) 1. Open the phone tile.
• Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 531) • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- 2. Initiate a call by selecting the phone num-
• Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected tooth for the first time (p. 524) ber from the recent calls list, entering the
phone (p. 526) • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected number on the keypad or selecting a num-
phone (p. 526) ber from the phone book (list of contacts).
• Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi-
You can search or scroll to find a contact
ces (p. 527) • Switch between phones connected via
Bluetooth (p. 527) in the phone book. Tap in the phone
book to add a contact to Favorites.
• Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 531)
3. Tap to make a call.

4. Tap to end the call.

Calls can also be made from the list of recent
calls using the app menu, which can be
}}

527
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| opened using the button on the right-side 2. Tap to end the call. Handling text messages19
steering wheel keypad. A Bluetooth-connected cellular phone's text
Privacy messages can be handled in the vehicle.
Making multiple calls – While a call is in progress, tap Privacy
While the call is in progress: Text message functionality needs to be acti-
and select setting: vated in certain phones. Not all phones are
1. Tap Add call. • Switch to mobile phone - the hands- fully compatible and therefore cannot display
2. Select from the list of recent calls, favor- free function will be disabled and the contacts and messages in the vehicle.
ites or contacts. call will proceed on the cellular phone.
Handling text messages in the center
3. Tap an item/row in the list of recent calls • Driver focused - the microphone in the display
ceiling liner on the passenger side will
or for the contact in the phone book. Text messages are only shown in the center
be muted and the call will proceed
display if the relevant setting is made.
4. Tap Swap call to switch between calls. using the vehicle's hands-free function.
Tap Messages in App view
5. Tap to end the current call. Related information to handle text messages in
Group (conference) calls • Phone (p. 523) the center display.
While multiple calls are in progress: • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
1. Tap Join calls to merge ongoing calls. tooth for the first time (p. 524)
• Voice control for cellular phones (p. 152)
2. Tap to end the call.
• Handling the App menu in the instrument
panel (p. 109) NOTE
Incoming calls
Incoming phone calls will be shown on the • Entering characters, letters and words by When the vehicle is moving:
instrument panel and in the center display. hand in the center display (p. 133) • Only one row of the message will be
Manage the calls using the right-side steering displayed. Tap Read out to have the
• Managing the phone book (p. 530)
wheel keypad or the center display. entire message read aloud.
• Handling text messages (p. 528)
1. Tap Answer/Reject. • The center display's keyboard cannot
• Sound settings (p. 486)
be used.
2. Tap to end the call.
Incoming calls while another call is in
progress
1. Tap Answer/Reject.

528
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Reading text messages in the center Dictating replies in the instrument panel Text message settings
display aloud After the text message has been read aloud, it Settings for handling text messages received
Tap the icon to have the message is possible to dictate a brief reply if the vehicle through a connected phone can be personal-
read aloud. has an Internet connection. ized.
– Tap Answer using the steering wheel key- 1. Tap Settings in the Top view.
pad. A dictation dialog will start. 2. Tap Communication Text Messages
Sending text messages in the center
display20 Message alert and select settings:
1. It is possible to reply to text messages or Alerts can be activated and deactivated in the • Notification in center display - dis-
create a new message. text message settings. play text message notifications in the
To reply to a text message - tap the center display's status bar.
• Related information
name of the contact who sent the mes-
• Phone (p. 523) • Notification in driver display - dis-
sage and then tap Answer. plays notifications in the driver's display
• Text message settings (p. 529) and incoming messages can be man-
• To create a new message - tap Create
new. Select a contact or enter a phone • Phone settings (p. 530) aged using the steering wheel's right-
number. • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538) hand keypad.

2. Write the message. • Voice control for cellular phones (p. 152) • Text message tone - select tone for
incoming text messages.
3. Tap Send. • Entering characters, letters and words by
hand in the center display (p. 133) Related information
Handling text messages in the • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- • Phone (p. 523)
instrument panel tooth for the first time (p. 524) • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
Text messages are only shown in the instru- Terms of use and data sharing (p. 544) tooth for the first time (p. 524)
•
ment panel if the relevant setting is made.
• Handling text messages (p. 528)
Reading new text messages in the Phone settings (p. 530)
•
instrument panel aloud
– To have the message read aloud, select
Read out using the steering wheel key-
pad.

19 Only applies to certain markets. Contact a Volvo retailer for more information.
20 Only certain phones can send text messages via the vehicle. The connected phone must support the Bluetooth profile Message Access Profile (MAP).

* Option/accessory. 529
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Managing the phone book first name or last name. This is adjusted in Phone settings
When a phone is connected with Bluetooth your cellular phone settings. When the phone is connected to the car, the
to the vehicle, contacts can be managed following settings can be made:
Related information
directly in the center display. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view.
• Phone (p. 523)
Up to 3,000 contacts can be displayed from
the phone selected in the center display. • Phone settings (p. 530) 2. Tap Communication Phone and select
settings:
• Voice control for cellular phones (p. 152)
• Entering characters, letters and words by • Ringtones - select a ring tone. Ring
hand in the center display (p. 133) tones from the cellular phone or the
vehicle can be used. Some phones are
• Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- not fully compatible and it may not be
tooth for the first time (p. 524) possible to use the phone's ring tones
in the vehicle.
• Sort Order - select sort order in the
contact list.

Call notifications in head up display*

1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.
Scroll by letter or to find contacts.
Only letters matching existing contacts in 2. Tap My Car Displays Head-Up
the phone book will be shown. Display Options.

Search contacts - tap to search by 3. Select Show Phone.

phone number or name in the phone book.
Related information
Favorites - tap to add/remove a con- • Phone (p. 523)
tact from the list of favorites. • Text message settings (p. 529)
Sorting • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 531)
The phone book is sorted in alphabetical order
• Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
and special characters and numbers are sor-
tooth for the first time (p. 524)
ted under . The list can be sorted by either

530 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

• Head-up display* (p. 146) Settings for Bluetooth devices This device complies with Industry Canada
• Sound settings (p. 486) Settings for Bluetooth-connected devices. license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
1. Tap Settings in the Top view. subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
2. Tap Communication Bluetooth
Devices and select settings: (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause unde-
• Add device - start the procedure for pair- sired operation of the device.
ing a new device.
• Previously paired devices - lists regis- Related information
tered/paired devices. • Phone (p. 523)
• Remove device - remove a connected • Phone settings (p. 530)
device. • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538)
• Allowed services for this device - select • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
what the device will be used for: making tooth for the first time (p. 524)
calls, sending/receiving messages,
streaming media, Internet connection.
• Internet connection connect the vehicle
to the Internet using the device's
Bluetooth connection.

Bluetooth® declaration of conformity

USA
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. This transmitter must not be
co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Canada

* Option/accessory. 531
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Wireless phone charger* Using the wireless phone charger* Tap the center display to confirm that the
A charging pad for wireless phone charging is The rubber pad in the tunnel console can be charging plate should be switched on.
located in the tunnel console. used to charge a phone without having to To use the wireless charging plate:
To be able to charge, the phone connect its cord.
must have wireless charging (Qi) 1. Make sure that the charging plate is
capability. Phones not equipped with switched on in the center display's Func-
a wireless charging receiver can tion view.
often be supplemented with a shell that ena- 2. Remove all objects from the charging pad
bles wireless charging. and place the phone in the center of the
pad.
WARNING > The phone will begin charging and the
symbol will appear at the top of
Wireless charging can affect the operation
the center display.
of an implanted pacemaker or other medi-
cal devices. If you have one, it is recom-
mended to consult with your doctor before CAUTION
using the wireless charging system.
Wireless phone charger in the tunnel console. Do not place cards with NFC (Near Field
Communication), e.g. debit cards for con-
Related information tactless payment, next to the phone. This
• Phone (p. 523) WARNING
type of card could be destroyed during
Using the wireless phone charger* Wireless charging can affect the operation
• of an implanted pacemaker or other medi-
charging.
(p. 532) cal devices. If you have one, it is recom-
• Certificate for wireless charger (p. 534) mended to consult with your doctor before
using the wireless charging system. NOTE
Some cellular phones may become warm
The charging plate can be switched on and off during wireless charging. This is normal.
via the center display's Function view. The
charging plate's default mode is activated.
When the charging plate is switched on, a
message will appear describing the risks for
users with pacemakers or other implanted
devices who could be affected by the plate.

532 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

If the phone is not charging:

• Make sure that the charging plate is
switched on in the center display's Func-
tion view.
• Make sure there are no other objects on
the charging pad.
• Make sure the phone supports wireless
charging (Qi).
• If the phone has a phone case, remove it.
• Lift up the phone and then put it back on
the center of the charging pad.
• Make sure the ignition is on.
If the phone is incorrectly positioned or an
object prevents charging on the charge pad, a
message is shown on the center display.

CAUTION
Keep cellular phones and charger stations
away from other objects while charging to
help avoid overheating.

Related information
• Phone (p. 523)
• Wireless phone charger* (p. 532)
• Certificate for wireless charger (p. 534)
• Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 128)

* Option/accessory. 533
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Certificate for wireless charger

Country/
Area
Mexico: RCPVAPVO 18-1919
Paraguay:

2018-11-1-000541
Taiwan: 根據 NCC 低 率電波輻射性電機管理辦法 規定:
第十二條 經型式認證合格之低 率射頻電機，非經許可，公司 商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率 大 率或變更原設計之特性及
能
第十四條
低 率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用
前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信
低 率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業 科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾

534
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Country/
Area
Ukraine:
: 107 - 115
М ь ь :5 ( ), 63 ( є ь )
К є :N/A
М :2
NFC
: 13,56 М , +/- 0,01%
М ь ь : 10
–
: - І .(LG Electronics Inc) 10, М ' 10- , - , , 07796, К
Frequency range 111 /М ь ь : 42 /
- І є, WC510MVV20 є
; ь - :https://www.lg.com/
global/support/cedoc/cedoc.
: І
. , 5- , .К ,К ь ь, 08112,
.: +38(044) 585 63 00
К : Alla Haidai ([email protected])

}}

535
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Country/
Area
US/ FCC ID : BEJWC510MVV20
Canada
IC : 2703H-WC510MVV20
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS-Gen,RSS-216 rules of Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Any changed or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with FCC RF Radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 15cm between the radiator and your body.
–
IDéclaration d'avertissement ISED
Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquerd'interferences nuisibles, et
(2) Cet appareil doit accepter toute interference recue, y compris les interferences pouvant entrainerun fonctionnement indesirable.
Les changements ou modifications non expressement approuves par LG Vehicle Components Company pourraient annuler l'autorite
de l'utilisateura utilizer l'equipement.
Déclaration d'exposition aux radiations RF de l'ISED: Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements RF de
l'ISED définies pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet appareil et son antenne ne doivent pas être situés ou fonctionner
conjointement avec une autre antenne ou un autre émetteur.

536
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Country/
Area
Cet équipement doit être installé pour fonctionner avec une distance minimale de 10cm entre le radiateuret le corps de l'utilisateur
final.

Related information
• Wireless phone charger* (p. 532)
• Using the wireless phone charger*
(p. 532)
• License agreement for audio and media
(p. 547)

* Option/accessory. 537
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Internet-connected vehicle* NOTE Related information

When the vehicle is connected to the Inter- • Symbols in the center display status bar
Data (data traffic) is transfered when using (p. 128)
net, it is possible to use web radio and music
the internet, which can incur additional
services via apps, download software and • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
costs.
contact retailers from the vehicle. a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 539)
The vehicle can be connected to the Internet Activating data roaming can cause addi-
• Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
using Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or the vehicle's inte- tional charges.
a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 539)
grated modem (SIM card). Contact your network operator about data
• Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
When the vehicle is connected to the Internet, traffic costs. vehicle modem (SIM card) (p. 540)
it is possible to share the vehicle's Internet
connection (Wi-Fi hotspot) so that other devi- • Apps (p. 488)
ces, e.g. tablets, can access the Internet21. NOTE • No or poor Internet connection (p. 543)
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possi- • Sharing Internet from the vehicle via Wi-Fi
The Internet status is shown by a symbol in
ble to connect the vehicle to the Internet hotspot (tethering) (p. 542)
the center display's status bar.
using Wi-Fi or the vehicle's modem.
• Deleting Wi-Fi networks (p. 543)
• Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 544)
NOTE • Volvo ID (p. 26)
When using Android Auto, it is possible to • Terms of use and data sharing (p. 544)
connect the vehicle to the Internet using
Wi-Fi, Bluetooth or the vehicle's modem.

Before the vehicle is connected to the Inter-

net, search for support information about
terms and conditions for services and the cus-
tomer privacy policy at volvocars.com.

21 This is not possible when the vehicle is connected to another Wi-Fi hotspot.

538 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Connecting the vehicle to the 6. If a different connection is being used, Connecting the vehicle to the
Internet via a Bluetooth-connected confirm the connection change. Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi)
phone > Your vehicle is now connected to the Establish an Internet connection using Wi-Fi
Establish an Internet connection using Internet via your Bluetooth-connected through Internet sharing (tethering) from a
Bluetooth and tethering from a phone and phone. phone and get access to the connected servi-
get access to multiple connected services in ces in your vehicle.
your vehicle. NOTE 1. Make sure that the phone supports Inter-
1. To connect the vehicle to the Internet via a net sharing (tethering) and that the func-
The cellular phone and network operator tion is activated. In an iPhone, the function
Bluetooth-connected phone, the phone
must support tethering (sharing of Internet is called "personal hotspot". In Android
must first be paired with the vehicle via
connection) and the subscription must phones, the function can have different
Bluetooth.
include data traffic. names, but is often called "hotspot". For
2. Make sure that the phone supports Inter-
iPhone phones, the "personal hotspot"
net sharing (tethering) and that the func-
NOTE menu page must also be open until the
tion is activated. In an iPhone, the function
Internet connection has been made.
is called "personal hotspot". In Android When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possi-
phones, the function can have different ble to connect the vehicle to the Internet 2. Tap Settings in the Top view.
names, but is often called "hotspot". For using Wi-Fi or the vehicle's modem.
iPhone phones, the "personal hotspot" 3. Proceed to Communication Wi-Fi.
menu page must also be open until the 4. Activate/deactivate by tapping to check/
Internet connection has been made. Related information uncheck the Wi-Fi box.
• Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538)
3. If the phone has been connected via Blue- 5. If a different connection is being used,
• Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
tooth previously, tap Settings in the cen- confirm the connection change.
vehicle modem (SIM card) (p. 540)
ter display's Top view.
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- 6. Tap the name of the network you would
•
4. Tap Communication Bluetooth tooth for the first time (p. 524) like to connect.
Devices. 7. Enter the network password.
• Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
5. Mark the window for Bluetooth Internet a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 539) > The vehicle will connect to the network.
connection under the heading Internet • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 516) Please note that certain cellular phones will
connection.
• No or poor Internet connection (p. 543) disable Internet sharing (tethering) when the
connection to the vehicle has been broken,
• Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 531)
e.g. when the phone has been removed from
}}

* Option/accessory. 539
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| the vehicle. The phone's tethering function will • Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 544) Connecting the vehicle to the
then need to be reactivated the next time the Internet via vehicle modem (SIM
phone's hotspot is used to connect to the card)
Internet. It is possible to establish an Internet connec-
When a phone is connected to the vehicle, it tion via the vehicle modem and a personal
will be saved for future use. To display a list of SIM card (P-SIM).
saved networks or to manually delete saved Vehicles equipped with Volvo On Call will use
networks, tap Settings Communication the vehicle modem Internet connection for the
services.
Wi-Fi Saved networks.
1.
NOTE
The cellular phone and network operator
must support tethering (sharing of Internet
connection) and the subscription must
include data traffic.

Technical and security requirements for Wi-Fi Insert a personal SIM card in the holder in
connection are described in a separate sec- the passenger-side footwell.
tion. Note that the vehicle's card reader
requires mini SIM cards.
Related information
• Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538) 2. Tap Settings in the Top view.
• Deleting Wi-Fi networks (p. 543)
• No or poor Internet connection (p. 543)

540 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

3. Tap Communication Vehicle Modem Vehicle modem settings Change PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can
Internet. Your vehicle is equipped with a modem that be entered.
4. Activate/deactivate by tapping to check/ can be used to connect the vehicle to the Disable PIN - select whether a PIN code
uncheck the Vehicle modem Internet Internet. It is also possible to share this Inter- will be required to access the SIM card.
net connection over Wi-Fi.
box. • Send request code - used to e.g. down-
1. Tap Settings in the Top view.
load or check the balance remaining on a
5. If a different connection is being used,
2. Tap Communication Vehicle Modem prepaid phone card. This function is spe-
confirm the connection change.
Internet and select settings: cific to your service provider.
6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code.
> The vehicle will connect to the network. • Vehicle modem Internet - select this to NOTE
use the vehicle's modem to connect to the
Internet. Please note that the SIM card used for
NOTE Internet connection via P-SIM cannot have
• Data usage. - tap Reset to reset the
Please note that the SIM card used for counter for the amount of data received the same telephone number as the SIM
Internet connection via P-SIM cannot have and sent. card used in the cellular phone. If the same
the same telephone number as the SIM card is used for both, phone calls will not
card used in the cellular phone. If the same • Network. be connected properly to the cellular
card is used for both, phone calls will not Select carrier - select a service provider phone. Use a SIM card with a separate
be connected properly to the cellular manually or automatically. phone number for the Internet connection
phone. Use a SIM card with a separate Data roaming - if the box is checked, the or a data card that does not handle phone
phone number for the Internet connection vehicle modem will attempt to connect to calls and can therefore not interfere with
or a data card that does not handle phone the Internet when the vehicle is outside its phone function.
calls and can therefore not interfere with home network (e.g. if you are in another
phone function. country). Please note that this could entail Related information
additional charges. Consult with your serv- • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
Related information ice provider for data roaming terms under vehicle modem (SIM card) (p. 540)
• Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538) your contract. No or poor Internet connection (p. 543)
•
• No or poor Internet connection (p. 543) • SIM card PIN.
• Vehicle modem settings (p. 541)

* Option/accessory. 541
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Sharing Internet from the vehicle 2. Tap Communication Vehicle Wi-Fi The connection status is shown by a symbol in
via Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering) Hotspot. the center display's status bar.
When the vehicle is connected to the Inter- 3. Tap Network name to assign a name to Tap Connected devices to see a list of cur-
net, other devices may share the vehicle's the hotspot. rently connected devices.
Internet connection22.
4. Tap Password and create a password. Related information
This password can then be used to con- • Symbols in the center display status bar
nect other devices to this hotspot. (p. 128)
5. Tap Frequency band and select a fre- • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538)
quency for the hotspot to use to transmit • No or poor Internet connection (p. 543)
data. Please note that selecting a fre-
quency is not possible on all markets.
6. Activate/deactivate by tapping to check/
uncheck the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot box.
7. If Wi-Fi is being used to connect to the
Internet, confirm the change of connec-
tions.
> It is now possible for external devices
to connect to the vehicle's Wi-Fi hot-
spot.

NOTE
Activation of Wi-Fi hotspot can cause addi-
tional charges from your network operator.
The network service provider (SIM card) must Contact your network operator about data
support Internet sharing (tethering). traffic costs.
1. Tap Settings in the Top view.

22 This does not apply when the vehicle is connected to the Internet via Wi-Fi.

542 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

No or poor Internet connection Restarting the phone Deleting Wi-Fi networks

Factors affecting the Internet connection. If you experience any Internet connection Networks that are not needed can be
The amount of data transmitted depends on problems, it may help to restart your phone. deleted.
the services or apps currently in use in the 1. Tap Settings in the Top view.
vehicle. Streaming music, for example, Related information
involves the transmission of a large amount of • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538) 2. Proceed to Communication Wi-Fi
data, and this requires a good connection and • Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 544) Saved networks.
a strong signal. 3. Tap Forget to delete the network.
Phone to vehicle 4. Confirm the selection.
Internet connection speed may vary depend- > The vehicle will no longer connect to
ing on the location of the cellular phone in the the deleted network.
vehicle. Move the phone closer to the center
display to increase signal strength. Make sure Deleting all networks
that nothing is between the phone and center All networks can be deleted at once by per-
display that could be blocking the signal. forming a factory reset. Please note that all
user data and system settings will be restored
Phone to network operator to original default factory settings.
The speed of the mobile network varies
depending on the coverage in the vehicle's Related information
current location. Coverage may be poorer in • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538)
e.g. tunnels, mountainous areas, deep valleys • No or poor Internet connection (p. 543)
or indoors. Connection speed is also depend-
• Resetting center display settings (p. 138)
ent on the subscription you have with your
service provider. • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 539)
NOTE
If you experience any problems with data
traffic, contact your network service pro-
vider.

* Option/accessory. 543
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Wi-Fi technology and security Terms of use and data sharing there. Note that services and apps cannot be
Networks must meet certain criteria in order The first time certain services and apps are used as intended if data sharing is disabled.
for the vehicle to connect. started, a pop-up window with the heading After a factory reset or e.g. a workshop visit or
It is possible to connect to the following types Terms and conditions and Data sharing a software update, your data sharing preferen-
of networks: may open. ces may be reset to default settings. You will
The aim is to inform the user about Volvo's then need to reactivate data sharing for con-
• Frequency - 2.4 or 5 GHz23.
terms of use and data sharing policy. By nected services and downloaded apps.
• Standards - 802.11 a/b/g/n. accepting data sharing, the user accepts that
• Security type - WPA2-AES-CCMP. certain information will be sent from the vehi-
NOTE
cle. This is required for certain services and
The vehicle's Wi-Fi system is designed to han- Settings for privacy and data sharing are
apps to work with full functionality.
dle Wi-Fi devices inside the vehicle. unique for each driver profile.
The data sharing function for connected servi-
Performance may be impaired if multiple devi-
ces are using a frequency at the same time. ces and apps is disabled by default24. For cer-
tain connected services and apps in the vehi- Related information
Related information cle to work, data sharing must be activated. • Activating and deactivating data sharing
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538) Data sharing can be set from the center dis- (p. 545)
•
play's settings menu or when the services or
apps are started in the center display.

Privacy and data sharing

The software update that became available in
November 2017 introduced privacy and data
sharing settings for connected services and
downloaded apps. These settings can be
found under Privacy and data in the settings
menu in the vehicle's center display.
There, you can choose which connected servi-
ces will be allowed to share data. Data sharing
for downloaded apps can also be disabled

23 Selecting a frequency is not possible on all markets.

24 Does not apply to Volvo On Call.

544 * Option/accessory.
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Activating and deactivating data Data sharing for services Enabling data sharing when starting a
sharing If you haven't activated data sharing for a service
Data sharing for relevant services and apps connected service or for downloaded apps, 1. Select the function or service you want to
can be set via the Settings menu in the center you can do this when you start them in your activate.
display. center display. The first time that you start a > If this is the first time you are using the
1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top service, or e.g. after a factory reset or certain service or after e.g. a factory reset or
view. software updates, you will also need to certain software updates, you will first
accept Volvo's terms and conditions for con- need to accept Volvo's terms and con-
2. Tap System Privacy and data. nected services. ditions for connected services in order
3. Select to activate or deactivate data shar- to continue.
ing for individual services and all apps.
If data sharing for a connected service or
downloaded apps is not activated, this can be
done when they are started in the center dis-
play. If this is the first time that a service is
started, or e.g. after a factory reset or certain
software updates, Volvo's terms and condi-
tions for connected services must be accep-
ted. Note that data sharing will then also be
activated for other services or apps that shar-
ing has already been accepted for.

NOTE
After visiting a Volvo workshop, you may
need to reactivate data sharing so that ser-
vices and apps will work again.

Related information
• Terms of use and data sharing (p. 544)

}}

545
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| 2. Accept data sharing for the service or can- Hard disk storage space
cel. It is possible to view how much space is
If you choose to accept, data sharing will be remaining on the vehicle's hard disk.
enabled and you can begin using the service. Storage information for the vehicle's hard disk
can be shown, including total capacity, availa-
Enabling data sharing when starting ble capacity and how much space is used for
an app installed apps. The information is found under
To accept data sharing for an app that needs Settings System System Information
the function, start the app and tap accept in Storage.
the pop-up window.
You can disable data sharing for services and Related information
• Apps (p. 488)
apps in the settings menu under System
Privacy and data Data Sharing.

546
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

License agreement for audio and Dirac Unison® DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos
media are trademarks of DivX, LLC and are used
A license is an agreement on the right to con- under license.
duct a certain activity or the right to use This DivX Certified® device can play DivX®
someone else's right according to terms and Home Theater video files up to 576p (includ-
conditions specified in the agreement. The ing .avi, .divx). Download free software at
following texts are Volvo's agreements with www.divx.com to create, play and stream digi-
manufacturers/developers. tal video.
Bowers & Wilkins ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified® device must be registered in order
Dirac Unison co-optimizes the loudspeakers in to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand
frequency, time and space for the best possi- (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration
ble bass integration and clarity. It enables a code, locate the DivX VOD section in your
faithful reproduction of the acoustic characte- device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for
ristics of specific performance venues. Using more information on completing the registra-
advanced algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all tion process.
loudspeakers digitally based on acoustic high-
precision measurements. Like a conductor of Patent number
an orchestra, it guarantees that the loudspeak- Covered by one or more of the following pat-
Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks ers perform in perfect unison. ents in the US: 7,295,673; 7,460,668;
of the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trade- 7,515,710; 8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052.
mark of B&W Group Ltd. Continuum is a DivX®
trademark of Bowers & Wilkins. Trademarks Gracenote®
of Bowers & Wilkins are applicable in selected
markets.

}}

547
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Portions of the content are copyright © of You agree that your non-exclusive license to is made that the Gracenote Software or
Gracenote or its providers. use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Soft- Gracenote Servers are error-free or that func-
ware, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if tioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype,
you violate these restrictions. If your license Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not
"Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote
terminates, you agree to cease any and all use obligated to provide you with new enhanced
MusicID are either registered trademarks or
of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Soft- or additional data types or categories that
trademarks of Gracenote, Inc. in the United
ware, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote Gracenote may provide in the future and is
States and/or other countries.
reserves all rights in all Gracenote Data, all free to discontinue its services at any time.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement Gracenote Software, and all Gracenote Serv-
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRAN-
This application or device contains software ers, including all ownership rights. Under no
TIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
from Gracenote, Inc. in Emeryville, California, circumstances will Gracenote become liable
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRAN-
United States (“Gracenote”). The software for any payment to you for any information
TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR
from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) that you provide. You agree that Gracenote,
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
enables this application to perform disc and/or Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agree-
NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES
file identification and obtain music-related ment against you directly in its own name.
NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL
information, including name, artist, track, and The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE
title information (“Gracenote Data”) from to track queries for statistical purposes. The GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACE-
online servers or embedded databases (collec- purpose of a randomly assigned numeric iden- NOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACE-
tively “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform tifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count NOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUEN-
other functions. You may use Gracenote Data queries without knowing anything about who TIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR
only by means of the intended End-User func- you are. For more information, see the web ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
tions of this application or device. page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the
© Gracenote, Inc. 2009
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, Gracenote service.
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Serv- The Gracenote Software and each item of Sensus software
ers for your own personal non-commercial use Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or This software uses parts of sources from clib2
Gracenote makes no representations or war- and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source
transmit the Gracenote Software or any ranties, express or implied, regarding the
Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994),
accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990,
AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACE- Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the
NOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, 1993), The Regents of the University of
right to delete data from the Gracenote Serv- California. All or some portions are derived
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS ers or to change data categories for any cause
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. from material licensed to the University of
that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty California by American Telephone and

548
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS first publication and either this permission
Inc. and are reproduced herein with the INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies
Redistribution and use in source and binary IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT or substantial portions of the Software. THE
forms, with or without modification, are (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
permitted provided that the following OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
conditions are met: Redistributions of source OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
code must retain the above copyright notice, ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
this list of conditions and the following DAMAGE. MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
This software is based in part on the work of
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
the Independent JPEG Group.
of conditions and the following disclaimer in SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR
the documentation and/or other materials This software uses parts of sources from ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
provided with the distribution. Neither the "libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
name of the <ORGANIZATION> nor the Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1, CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
names of its contributors may be used to released January 26, 2000, developed by ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
endorse or promote products derived from Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
this software without specific prior written Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics, THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this
BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000] not be used in advertising or otherwise to
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. promote the sale, use or other dealings in this
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, Software without prior written authorization
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF to any person obtaining a copy of this from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A software and associated documentation files
This software is based in parts on the work of
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. (the "Software"), to deal in the Software
the FreeType Team.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT without restriction, including without
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR sell copies of the Software, and to permit ([email protected]). All rights reserved
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, persons to whom the Software is furnished to
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF do so, subject to the following conditions: The Linux software
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS above copyright notice including the dates of
}}

549
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| This product contains software licensed under conditions and the following disclaimer as Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights
GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU the first lines of this file unmodified. reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use
Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc. 2. Redistributions in binary form must in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
You have the right of acquisition, modification, reproduce the above copyright notice, this Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
and distribution of the source code of the list of conditions and the following to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode
GPL/LGPL software. disclaimer in the documentation and/or data files and any associated documentation
other materials provided with the (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any
You may download Source Code from the
distribution. associated documentation (the "Software") to
following website at no charge: http://
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS deal in the Data Files or Software without
www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED restriction, including without limitation the
download/TVM_8351_013
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
The website provides the Source Code "As Is" LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files
and without warranty of any kind. OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR or Software, and to permit persons to whom
By downloading Source Code, you expressly A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE the Data Files or Software are furnished to do
assume all risk and liability associated with DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE so, provided that (a) the above copyright
downloading and using the Source Code and LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, notice(s) and this permission notice appear
complying with the user agreements that INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR with all copies of the Data Files or Software,
accompany each Source Code. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, (b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF permission notice appear in associated
Please note that we cannot respond to any SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in
inquiries regarding the source code. OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS each modified Data File or in the Software as
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND well as in the documentation associated with
camellia:1.2.0
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER the Data File(s) or Software that the data or
Copyright (c) 2006, 2007
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT software has been modified.
NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE
Corporation). All rights reserved. OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY
Redistribution and use in source and binary OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
forms, with or without modification, are ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
permitted provided that the following DAMAGE. WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
conditions are met: FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
Unicode: 5.1.0
AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
1. Redistributions of source code must retain COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
the above copyright notice, this list of

550
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS Declaration of Conformity USA

INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
FCC CAUTION
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY Changes or modifications not expressly
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING approved by the party responsible for compli-
FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, ance could void the user's authority to operate
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, the equipment. This transmitter must not be
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS co-located or operated in conjunction with any
ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN other antenna or transmitter.
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR Canada
PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR
SOFTWARE. This device complies with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is
Except as contained in this notice, the name of subject to the following two conditions: (1)
a copyright holder shall not be used in this device may not cause interference, and (2)
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, this device must accept any interference,
use or other dealings in these Data Files or including interference that may cause unde-
Software without prior written authorization of sired operation of the device.
the copyright holder.

}}

551
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Country/
Area
Brazil:

Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não
pode causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br
EU:

Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-city. Hyogo, 669-1513, Japan
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation hereby declares that this type of radio equipment [Audio Navigation Unit] conforms with directive
2014/53/EU.
For further details, search for support information on www.volvocars.com.
United
Arab Emi-
rates:

552
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Country/
Area
Kazakh-
stan:

Model name: NR-0V

Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Export country: Japan

}}

553
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Country/
Area
China: 1.
■ 使用频率 2.4 - 2.4835 GHz
■ 等效全向辐射 率(EIRP) 天线增益 10dBi 时 ≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ①
■ 最大 率谱密度 天线增益 10dBi 时 ≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ①
■ 载频容限 20 ppm
■ 帯外发射 率(在 2.4-2.4835GHz 頻段以外) ≤-80 dBm / Hz (EIRP)
■ 杂散发射(辐射) 率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外)
• ≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)
• ≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)
• ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)
• ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)
• ≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz)
2.不得擅自更改发射频率 大发射 率(包括额外 装射频 率放大器)，不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线
3.使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业 产生有害干扰 一旦发现有干扰现象时，应立即停止使用，并采 措施消除干扰后方可继续
使用
4.使用微 率无线电设备，必须忍 各种无线电业 的干扰或工业 科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰
5.不得在飞机和机场附近使用

554
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Country/
Area
Korea: B 급 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재)
이 기기는 가정용(B 급) 전자파적합기기로서 주로
가정에서 사용하는 것을 적으로 하며, 든
지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다.
해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 없습니다.
Malaysia:

This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998, Communications and Multimedia (Technical
Standards) Regulations 2000. To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (volvocars.com/support) and search for “SIRIM
Label Verification”.
Device category: Navigation equipment for vehicle (Bluetooth)
Model: NR-1V
Type Approval No.:
RDBV/28A/1118/S(18-4235), RDBV/27A/1118/S(18-4234)

}}

555
 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Country/
Area
Mexico:

Taiwan: 低 率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條
經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司 商號或使用者均不得擅自
變更頻率 加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能
第十四條
低 率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應
立停用，改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用 前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線
電通信 低 率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業 科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備
之干擾

Related information
• Audio, media and Internet (p. 486)
• Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538)
• Media player (p. 507)
• Gracenote® (p. 511)
• Sensus - connection and entertainment
(p. 30)
• Certificate for wireless charger (p. 534)

556 * Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TIRES
 WHEELS AND TIRES

Tires CAUTION When replacing tires, be sure that the new

The function of the tires is to carry loads, pro- tires are the same size designation, type
Some Volvo models are equipped with an (radial) and preferably from the same manu-
vide traction on road surfaces, reduce vibra-
Ultra High Performance tire and wheel facturer, on all four wheels. Otherwise there is
tions and protect the wheels from wear.
combination designed to provide maxi- a risk of altering the vehicle's roadholding and
The tires significantly influence the vehicle's
mum dry pavement performance with con- handling characteristics.
driving characteristics. The type, dimensions,
sideration for hydroplaning resistance.
tire pressure and speed rating have a consid-
They may be more susceptible to road haz- Recommended tires
erable impact on how the vehicle performs.
ard damage and, depending on driving On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo
Your vehicle is equipped with tires according conditions, may achieve a tread life of less original tires that have the VOL1 marking on
to the vehicle's tire information placard on the than 30,000 km (20,000 miles). Even if the side of the tires. These tires have been
B-pillar (the structural member at the side of this vehicle is equipped with Volvo's designed specifically for your vehicle. It is
the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door advanced AWD or stability system, these therefore important when replacing tires that
opening). tires are not designed for winter driving, the new tires have this same marking to help
and should be replaced with winter tires maintain the vehicle's driving characteristics,
WARNING when weather conditions dictate. comfort and fuel consumption.
A damaged tire could cause the driver to New tires
lose control of the vehicle. The tires have good road holding characteris-
tics and offer good handling on dry and wet
surfaces. It should be noted however that the
tires have been developed to give these fea-
tures on snow/ice-free surfaces.
Most models are equipped with "all-season"
tires, which provide a somewhat higher
degree of roadholding on slippery road surfa-
ces than tires without the "all-season" rating.
However, Volvo recommends using snow tires
on all four wheels for good roadholding on icy
or snow-covered roads.

1 This may vary for certain tire dimensions.

558
 WHEELS AND TIRES

Tires are perishable goods. After a few years, • Correct front wheel alignment is very authorized Volvo workshop. If significant dif-
they will begin to harden and their friction important. ferences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread
properties will gradually deteriorate. Always • Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy depth) between the tires have already occur-
replace tires with the freshest tires possible. and driving comfort. red, the least worn tires should always be
This is particularly important for snow tires. A mounted on the rear wheels. A front-wheel
series of numbers is imprinted on the sidewall • Tires must maintain the same direction of skid (understeer) is usually easier to control
of the tire. The last four digits in the series is rotation throughout their lifetime. than a rear-wheel skid (oversteer). If the front
the Department of Transportation (DOT) • When replacing tires, the tires with the wheels skid, the vehicle will continue in a
stamp and indicates the week and year the most tread should be mounted on the rear straight line instead of the rear wheels skid-
tire was manufactured. The tire in the illustra- wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer ding to the side, which could cause you to
tion has 0717 as the last four digits, which during hard braking. completely lose control of the vehicle. It is
means it was manufactured week 7 of 2017. • Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the therefore important that the rear wheels never
tires and/or wheels permanently. lose grip before the front wheels.
Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even when they are Tire rotation Storing wheels and tires
not being used. It is recommended that tires Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Driv- When storing complete wheels (tires mounted
generally be replaced after 6 years of normal ing style, tire pressure, climate and road con- on rims), they should be suspended off the
service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent ditions affect how quickly the tires age and floor or placed on their sides on the floor.
high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.) exhibit signs of wear. Maintaining the correct Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on
exposure can accelerate the aging process. tire pressure helps keep tread wear evenly dis- their sides or standing upright, but should not
The temporary spare 2 should also be replaced tributed. be suspended.
at 6-year intervals, even if it has never been
used. A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discol- To help prevent differences in tread depth and
oration should be replaced immediately. wear patterns forming on the tires, the front CAUTION
and rear wheels should be rotated, i.e. the
Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,
Tire economy front tires moved to the rear and the rear tires
dry, dark place, and should never be stored
• Maintain correct tire pressure. moved to the front. Ideally, tire rotation should
in close proximity to solvents, gasoline,
be done the first time after approximately
• Avoid fast starts, hard braking and tire oils, etc.
5000 km (ca 3100 miles) and thereafter at
screeching.
10,000 km (approx. 6200 miles) intervals.
• Tire wear increases with speed.
If you have any questions regarding tread
depth, Volvo recommends consulting an

2 Not available on all models. }}

559
 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| WARNING Tire direction of rotation NOTE

Tires with tread designed to roll in only one
• The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo Use tires of the same type, dimensions and
direction are marked with an arrow on the
are specified to meet stringent stability make (manufacturer) on each axle.
sidewall.
and handling requirements. Unap-
proved wheel/tire size combinations
Related information
can negatively affect your vehicle's sta-
• Tires (p. 558)
bility and handling.
• Any damage caused by installation of
unapproved wheel/tire size combina-
tions will not be covered by your new
vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no
responsibility for death, injury, or
expenses that may result from such
installations.

Related information The arrow shows the tire's direction of rotation.

• Checking tire pressure (p. 565) • The tire should maintain the same direc-
• Tire direction of rotation (p. 560) tion of rotation throughout its service life.
• Tread wear indicator (p. 561) • Tires should only be moved between the
• Tire pressure monitoring system* front and back, never from right to left or
(p. 567) vice versa.

• Tire sealing system (p. 579) • Incorrectly mounted tires impair the vehi-
cle's braking properties and ability to force
• Uniform Tire Quality Grading (p. 564) aside rain, snow and slush.
• Tire terminology (p. 561) • The tires with the most tread should
• Tire sidewall designations (p. 562) always be mounted on the rear wheels to
• Loading recommendations (p. 594) help reduce the risk of skidding.

560 * Option/accessory.
 WHEELS AND TIRES

Tread wear indicator Tire terminology • kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres-
The tread wear indicator shows the status of The following is a glossary of tire-related sure.
the tire's tread. terms. • PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard
The tire suppliers may have additional mark- unit of air pressure.
ings, notes or warnings such as standard load, B-pillar: The structural member at the
•
radial tubeless, etc. side of the vehicle behind the front door.
• Tire information placard: A placard • Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next
showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire to the rim.
sizes, recommended inflation pressure,
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
and the maximum weight the vehicle can
bead area and the tread.
carry.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perime-
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num-
ter of the tire that contacts the road when
ber on the sidewall of each tire providing
mounted on the vehicle.
information about the tire brand and man-
ufacturing plant, tire size and date of man- • Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire
The tread wear indicator is a narrow elevated ufacture. or a tire and tube assembly upon which
strip running across the tire's longitudinal the tire beads are seated.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the
tread grooves. The letters TWI (Tread Wear amount of air in a tire. • Maximum load rating: A figure indicating
Indicator) are visible on the side of the tire. the maximum load in pounds and kilo-
When approximately 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) is left • Standard load: A class of P-metric or
grams that can be carried by the tire. This
on the tread, the tread will be at the same Metric tires designed to carry a maximum
rating is established by the tire manufac-
height as the tread wear indicator. Replace the load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric
turer.
tire as soon as possible. Tires with low tread tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not increase the • Maximum permissible inflation
offer very poor traction in rain or snow.
tires load carrying capability. pressure: The greatest amount of air pres-
Related information sure that should ever be put in the tire.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
• Tires (p. 558) This limit is set by the tire manufacturer.
tires designed to carry a heavier maximum
load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric • Recommended tire inflation pressure:
tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure Inflation pressure, established by Volvo,
beyond this pressure will not increase the which is based on the type of tires that are
tire's load carrying capability. mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This
information can be found on the tire infla-
}}

561
 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| tion placard(s) located on the driver's side Tire sidewall designations NOTE
B-pillar and in the tire inflation table. The following information can be found on a
Please be aware that the following tire
• Cold tires: The tires are considered to be tire's sidewall.
designation is an example only and that
cold when they have the same tempera-
this particular tire may not be available on
ture as the surrounding (ambient) air. This
your vehicle.
temperature is normally reached after the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours. 1. 215: The width of the tire (in millimeters)
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The
Related information larger the number, the wider the tire.
• Tires (p. 558) 2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its
width in percent.
3. R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the
symbol indicate that the vehicle is
equipped with optional self-supporting run
Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers flat tires3.
place standardized information on the sidewall 4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in
of all tires (see the illustration). inches).
The vehicle has been certified with certain 5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a
combinations of wheels and tires. load index of 95 equals a maximum load
The following information is listed on the tire of 1521 lbs (690 kg).
sidewall: 6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum
The tire designation: speed at which the tire is designed to be
driven for extended periods of time, carry-
ing a permissible load for the vehicle, and
with correct inflation pressure. For exam-
ple, H indicates a speed rating of
210 km/h (130 mph).

3 Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models.

562
 WHEELS AND TIRES

NOTE carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's T 190 km/h (118 mph)
tire information placard located on the B-
The tire's load index and speed rating may Pillar for the correct tire pressure for your H 210 km/h (130 mph)
not appear on the sidewall because they vehicle.
are not required by law. V 240 km/h (149 mph)
11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature
grades. W 270 km/h (168 mph)
7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All
12. Maximum permissible inflation Y 300 km/h (186 mph)
Terrain, AS = All Season
pressure: The greatest amount of air
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number pressure that should ever be put in the
(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" tire. This limit is set by the tire manufac- WARNING
and indicates that the tire meets all federal turer. • The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo
standards. The next two numbers are the are specified to meet stringent stability
factory code where the tire was manufac- Speed Symbol and handling requirements. Unap-
tured, the next two are the tire size code A tire's Speed Symbol (SS) indicates the maxi- proved wheel/tire size combinations
and the last four numbers represent the mum speed for which the tire has been certi- can negatively affect your vehicle's sta-
week and year the tire was made. For fied and should be at least equivalent to the bility and handling.
example, 0717 means that the tire was vehicle's top speed.
manufactured during week 7 of 2017. The • Any damage caused by installation of
Winter tires, with or without studs, are excep- unapproved wheel/tire size combina-
numbers in between are marketing codes tions and may use a lower SS. When winter
used at the manufacturer's discretion. This tions will not be covered by your new
tires are installed, the vehicle may not be vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no
information helps a tire manufacturer driven faster than the tires' SS.
identify a tire for safety recall purposes. responsibility for death, injury, or
The vehicle's speed should always be deter- expenses that may result from such
9. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: installations.
mined by the posted speed limit and traffic
Indicates the number of plies indicates or
and road conditions, not the tire's SS.
the number of layers of rubber-coated fab-
ric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire man- The following table indicates the maximum Related information
ufacturers also must indicate the ply permissible speed for each SS. • Tires (p. 558)
materials in the tire and the sidewall,
which include steel, nylon, polyester, and M 130 km/h (81 mph)
others.
Q 160 km/h (100 mph)
10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum
load in pounds and kilograms that can be

563
 WHEELS AND TIRES

Uniform Tire Quality Grading WARNING Related information

ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST • Tires (p. 558)
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY based on braking (straight-ahead) traction • Tire sidewall designations (p. 562)
REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE tests and is not a measure of cornering
GRADES. (turning) traction.
Quality grades can be found, where applica-
ble, on the tire sidewall between the tread
TEMPERATURE
shoulder and maximum section width. For
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
example:
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
TREADWEAR on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Sustained high temperature can cause the
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
under controlled conditions on a specified tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
government test course. For example, a tire sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
graded 150 would wear one and one half (1 ½) to a minimum level of performance that all
times as well on the government course as a passenger vehicle tires must meet under the
tire graded 100. The relative performance of Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109.
tires depends upon the actual conditions of Grades B and A represent higher levels of per-
their use, however, and many depart signifi- formance on the laboratory test wheel than
cantly from the norm due to variation in driving the minimum required by law.
habits, maintenance practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
WARNING
TRACTION The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
are AA, A, B, and C, as measured under con- not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-
trolled conditions on specified government inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire rately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and tire failure.
marked C may have poor traction perform-
ance.

564
 WHEELS AND TIRES

Checking tire pressure WARNING found on the vehicle's tire information decal or
Correct inflation pressure helps improve driv- certification label.
• Under-inflation is the most common
ing stability, save fuel and increase the serv- If you check inflation pressure when the tires
cause of tire failure and may result in
ice life of the tires. are warm, you should never release air. The
severe tire cracking, tread separation,
Tire pressure decreases over time, which is tires become warm after driving and it is nor-
or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of
normal. Tire pressure also varies depending on mal for warm tires to have an inflation pres-
vehicle control and increased risk of
the ambient temperature. Driving on under- sure above the recommended pressure for
injury.
inflated tires could cause the vehicle to over- cold tires. A warm tire with an inflation pres-
heat and lead to damage. Tire pressure affects • Under-inflated tires reduce the load sure equal to or under the recommended pres-
traveling comfort, road noise and driving cha- carrying capacity of your vehicle. sure for cold tires could be significantly under-
racteristics. inflated.
Check the pressure in the tires every month. Cold tires
Inflation pressure should be checked when the Related information
Use the recommended inflation pressure for
tires are cold. The tires are considered to be • Adjusting tire pressure (p. 566)
cold tires to help maintain good tire perform-
ance. Under-inflated or over-inflated tires cold when they have the same temperature as • Recommended tire pressure (p. 567)
could cause uneven tread wear. the surrounding (ambient) air. This tempera- • Tire pressure monitoring system*
ture is normally reached after the vehicle has (p. 567)
Use an air pressure gauge and check the infla- been parked for at least 3 hours.
tion pressure on all the tires, including the • Tires (p. 558)
After driving for approximately 1.6 km (1 mile),
spare tire4, at least once a month and before
the tires are considered to be warm. If you
long trips. Volvo recommends buying a relia-
need to drive longer than that to inflate the
ble air pressure gauge, as the automatic
tires, check and record the inflation pressure
gauges provided at service stations may be
of the tires first and inflate accordingly when
inaccurate.
you arrive at the pump.
When the ambient temperature changes, so
does the inflation pressure. A 10-degree tem-
perature drop causes a corresponding drop in
inflation pressure of 1 psi (7 kPa). Check the
inflation pressure of the tires regularly and
adjust to the correct pressure, which can be

4 Not available in all models.

* Option/accessory. 565
 WHEELS AND TIRES

Adjusting tire pressure 3. Screw the valve cap back on. NOTE
Tire pressure decreases over time, which is
If you have overfilled the tire, release air by
normal. The tire pressure must therefore be NOTE
pushing on the metal stem in the center of
adjusted to maintain the recommended tire After inflating a tire, always replace the
• the valve. Then recheck the pressure with
pressure. valve cap to help prevent valve damage your tire gauge.
Use the recommended inflation pressure for caused by gravel, dirt, etc.
cold tires to help maintain good tire perform- Some spare tires require higher inflation
ance and even wear. • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps pressure than the other tires. Consult the
could corrode and become difficult to tire inflation pressure table or the inflation
remove. pressure decal.
NOTE
To help prevent incorrect inflation pressure, 4. Visually inspect the tire to make sure there
pressure should be checked when the tires Related information
are no nails or other embedded objects • Recommended tire pressure (p. 567)
are cold. The tires are considered to be that could puncture the tire and cause air
cold when they have reached the same leakage. • Checking tire pressure (p. 565)
temperature as the ambient temperature Inflate tires with the compressor included
5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there
•
(about 3 hours after the vehicle was last in the tire sealing system (p. 584)
driven). After driving for a few kilometers, are no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irreg-
the tires will warm up and the pressure will ularities. • Approved tire pressure (p. 681)
increase. 6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, includ-
ing the spare tire5.
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire and
press the air pressure gauge firmly onto
the valve.
2. Inflate the tire to the correct inflation pres-
sure; see the tire pressure placard on the
driver's side B pillar for recommended
pressures for factory-mounted tires.

5 Not available on all models.

566
 WHEELS AND TIRES

Recommended tire pressure Related information Tire pressure monitoring system*

The tire pressure placard on the driver's side • Checking tire pressure (p. 565) The tire inflation pressure monitoring system6
B pillar (between the front and the rear door) • Approved tire pressure (p. 681) provides an indicator symbol in the instru-
indicates tire pressure for different loads and ment panel if pressure is too low in one or
speed conditions. more tires.
This symbol illuminates to
indicate low inflation pres-
sure. Check the inflation
pressure in the Car Status
app in the center display.
If there is a system malfunc-
tion, the inflation pressure warning symbol will
flash for approximately one minute and then
glow steadily.

System description
The tire pressure monitoring system measures
Location of the tire pressure placard differences in rotational speed between the
The decal specifies the designation for the fac- wheels through the ABS system to determine
tory-mounted tires on the vehicle, as well as if the tires are properly inflated. If inflation
load limits and inflation pressures. pressure in a tire is too low, its diameter (and
consequently its rotational speed) changes. By
comparing the tires with each other, the sys-
NOTE
tem can determine if the pressure in one or
The decals shown in the Owner's Manual more tires is too low.
do not claim to be exact reproductions of
those found in the vehicle. The purpose is
to show approximately how they look and
about where they are located on the vehi-
cle. The information that applies for your
vehicle in particular is found on the decal
on the vehicle.
}}

* Option/accessory. 567
 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| General information about the tire pressure note that the TPMS is not a substitute for To keep in mind
monitoring system proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's • Always save the new inflation pressure in
In the following description, the tire monitor- responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, the system after changing a tire or adjust-
ing system is generally referred to as TPMS. even if under-inflation has not reached the ing the inflation pressure.
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low If you switch to a tire of another size than
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)7 •
tire pressure telltale. the factory-mounted tires, the system
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- Your vehicle has also been equipped with a must be reset by storing a new inflation
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when pressure for these tires to avoid false
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. the system is not operating properly. The warnings.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with If a spare wheel8 is used, it is possible that
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system
•
the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire the tire pressure monitoring system will
inflation pressure label, you should determine detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for not work correctly due to the differences
the proper tire inflation pressure for those approximately one minute and then remain between the wheels.
tires.) continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as • The system does not replace the need for
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has long as the malfunction exists. When the mal- regular tire inspection and maintenance.
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring function indicator is illuminated, the system • It is not possible to deactivate the tire
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure monitoring system.
pressure telltale when one or more of your pressure as intended.
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of WARNING
nates, you should stop and check your tires as reasons, including the installation of replace- • Incorrect inflation pressure could lead
soon as possible, and inflate them to the ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehi- to tire failure, which could cause the
proper pressure. cle that prevent the TPMS from functioning driver to lose control of the vehicle.
properly.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire • The system cannot predict sudden tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale damage.
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi- after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.

6 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

7 Not available on all models.
8 Not available on all models.

568
 WHEELS AND TIRES

Related information Saving new reference values for NOTE

• Recommended tire pressure (p. 567) tire inflation pressure monitoring*
The vehicle must be stationary for the
• Viewing tire pressure status in the center In order for the tire inflation pressure moni-
Store Pressure button to be selectable.
display* (p. 570) toring system9 to function correctly, inflation
• Action when warned of low tire pressure pressure reference values must be saved cor-
rectly. To help ensure that the system can 6. Tap Store Pressure.
(p. 571)
correctly alert the driver of low inflation pres- 7. Tap OK to confirm that the tire pressure in
• Saving new reference values for tire infla- sure, this must be done each time the tires
tion pressure monitoring* (p. 569) all four tires has been checked and
are changed or the inflation pressure is adjusted.
• Tire inflation pressure monitoring system* adjusted.
messages (p. 572) For example, when driving with a heavy load 8. Drive the vehicle until the new inflation
or at high speeds (over 160 km/h (100 mph)), pressure has been saved. The new infla-
tire pressure should be adjusted to the Volvo- tion pressure is stored when the vehicle is
recommended tire pressure values. The sys- driven at speeds over 35 km/h (22 mph).
tem should then be reset by saving the new > When enough data has been collected
inflation pressure. for the system to detect low inflation
pressure, the animation showing the
To store the new inflation pressure as a refer-
progress of the storing procedure will
ence value in the system:
disappear from the center display. The
1. Switch off the ignition. system will not provide any further con-
2. Inflate the tire to the correct inflation pres- firmation that the new inflation pres-
sure; see the tire pressure placard on the sure has been stored.
driver's side B pillar for recommended If storing cannot be performed, Storing
pressures for factory-mounted tires. pressure unsuccessful. Try again. will be
3. Start the vehicle. displayed.

4. Open the Car Status app in App view.

5. Tap TPMS.

9 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) }}

* Option/accessory. 569
 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| WARNING Viewing tire pressure status in the Related information

center display* • Saving new reference values for tire infla-
The exhaust gases contain carbon monox- tion pressure monitoring* (p. 569)
ide, which is invisible and odorless but very With the system for tire inflation pressure
poisonous. The procedure for saving a new monitoring10, inflation pressure status can be • Action when warned of low tire pressure
inflation pressure must therefore always be viewed in the center display. (p. 571)
performed outdoors or in a workshop with
Checking status • Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 567)
exhaust gas extraction.
The vehicle may need to be driven for a few • Vehicle status (p. 611)
Related information minutes at a speed above 35 km/h (22 mph) • Tire inflation pressure monitoring system*
Recommended tire pressure (p. 567) to activate the system. messages (p. 572)
•
• Adjusting tire pressure (p. 566) 1. Open the Car Status app in App view.
• Viewing tire pressure status in the center 2. Tap TPMS to display the status of the
display* (p. 570) tires.
• Action when warned of low tire pressure
(p. 571)
• Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 567)

The illustration is generic. Layout may vary depend-

ing on vehicle model or software version.

10 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

570 * Option/accessory.
 WHEELS AND TIRES

Action when warned of low tire NOTE Related information

pressure • Recommended tire pressure (p. 567)
To help prevent incorrect inflation pressure,
When the tire inflation pressure monitoring • Adjusting tire pressure (p. 566)
pressure should be checked when the tires
system11 detects low inflation pressure in a are cold. The tires are considered to be • Saving new reference values for tire infla-
tire, immediate action is required. cold when they have reached the same tion pressure monitoring* (p. 569)
If the system's indicator sym- temperature as the ambient temperature
bol illuminates and the mes- • Viewing tire pressure status in the center
(about 3 hours after the vehicle was last display* (p. 570)
sage Tire pressure low is driven). After driving for a few kilometers,
displayed, check the tire • Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 567)
the tires will warm up and the pressure will
pressure and inflate if neces- increase. • Inflate tires with the compressor included
sary. in the tire sealing system (p. 584)
1. Switch off the ignition.
NOTE
2. Check the inflation pressure on all four
• After inflating a tire, always replace the
tires using a tire pressure gauge.
valve cap to help prevent valve damage
3. Inflate the tire to the correct inflation pres- caused by gravel, dirt, etc.
sure; see the tire pressure placard on the • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
driver's side B pillar for recommended could corrode and become difficult to
pressures for factory-mounted tires. remove.
4. After the inflation pressure has been
adjusted, always save the new inflation
pressure in the system via the center dis- WARNING
play. • Incorrect inflation pressure could lead
to tire failure, which could cause the
Please be aware that the indicator symbol
driver to lose control of the vehicle.
will not go out until the low tire pressure
has been corrected and a storing proce- • The system cannot predict sudden tire
dure has been started for the new inflation damage.
pressure.

11 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

* Option/accessory. 571
 WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire inflation pressure monitoring Related information Changing a wheel

system* messages • Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 567) Wheel changes must always be carried out
A number of messages related to the tire • Saving new reference values for tire infla- correctly. The following instructions show
inflation pressure monitoring system12 may tion pressure monitoring* (p. 569) how to remove and install a wheel and what
be displayed. Several examples are provided is important to keep in mind. Make sure that
• Action when warned of low tire pressure
below. the tire dimension is approved for use on the
(p. 571)
vehicle.
Instrument The indicator symbol will • Vehicle status (p. 611)
panel: Tire illuminate to indicate that WARNING
pressure low inflation pressure is low • Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)
• If a tire must be changed near passing
Check Car in one or more tires. See traffic, make sure all passengers move
Status app in the Car Status app in to a safe location.
center display the center display for
more information. • Use a jack intended for the vehicle
when changing a tire. For any other
Instrument The indicator symbol will job, use stands to support the vehicle.
panel: Tire flash for about 1 minute • Never crawl under or allow any part of
pressure sys- and then glow steadily. your body to be extended under a vehi-
tem Tempo- The system is temporarily cle supported by a jack.
rarily unavaila- unavailable and will be
activated momentarily. • Never let anyone remain in the vehicle
ble
when it is raised on a jack.
Instrument The indicator symbol will
panel: Tire flash for about 1 minute
pressure sys- and then glow steadily. If
tem Service the system is not work-
required ing properly, contact a
workshopA.
A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

12 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

572 * Option/accessory.
 WHEELS AND TIRES

CAUTION 4. Using the lug wrench, screw the towing 2. Lift the wheel into place. Tighten the
eye into place as far as possible. wheel bolts securely.
• When not in use, the jack* should be
kept in its storage compartment under Do not grease the wheel bolt threads.
the cargo compartment floor. 3. Lower the vehicle so that the wheel can-
• The jack provided with your vehicle is not rotate.
intended to be used only in temporary 4. Tighten the wheel bolts in a crisscross pat-
situations such as changing wheels in tern (as shown in illustration). It is impor-
the event of a flat tire. Only the jack tant that the wheel bolts are securely
that came with your particular model tightened. Tighten to 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.).
should be used to lift the vehicle. If the Use a torque wrench to check torque.
vehicle needs to be lifted more fre-
quently or for a prolonged period, using 5. Remove the plastic covers from the wheel
a garage jack or hoist is recommended. bolts using the designated tool.
Always follow this device's instructions
6. With the vehicle still on the ground, use
for use.
the lug wrench/towing eye to loosen the
wheel bolts ½-1 turn by pressing down-
Removing a wheel ward (counterclockwise). Always start
Read through all instructions before starting. with the locking wheel bolts*.
Before raising the vehicle using a jack or lift,
7. Follow the instructions for safely lifting the
take out all the tools you will need.
vehicle using a jack.
1. Turn on the vehicle's hazard warning
8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be
flashers if a wheel change must be per-
changed can move freely. Unscrew the
formed in an area with traffic.
wheel bolts and lift off the wheel. 5. Press the plastic covers over the wheel
2. Make sure that the parking brake is bolts.
engaged and put the gear selector in P Installing a wheel
1. Clean the contact surfaces between the 6. Check the tire inflation pressure and store
position.
wheel and the wheel hub. the new inflation pressure in the tire pres-
3. Place chocks in front of and behind the sure monitoring system*.
wheels that are still on the ground. For
example, use heavy wooden blocks or
large stones.
}}

* Option/accessory. 573
 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| WARNING Tool kit • Tire sealing system (p. 579)

Tools for e.g. towing or changing wheels are • Attaching and removing the towing eyelet
The wheel bolts may need to be tightened
again several days after a wheel change. provided in the vehicle's cargo compartment. (p. 476)
Temperature fluctuations and vibrations
can cause them to loosen slightly.

NOTE
• After inflating a tire, always replace the
valve cap to help prevent valve damage
caused by gravel, dirt, etc.
• Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.

All the tools are located in a foam block under the

Related information cargo compartment floor.
• Leveling control settings* (p. 448) Jack*
• Hoisting the vehicle (p. 614)
Tool for removing the plastic wheel bolt
• Tool kit (p. 574) covers
• Saving new reference values for tire infla- Funnel for refilling fluids
tion pressure monitoring* (p. 569)
Wheel bolt key* and towing eyelet

If the vehicle is equipped with a spare tire*13, a

jack and lug wrench are provided.

Related information
• Changing a wheel (p. 572)
• Jack* (p. 575)

13 Not available on all models.

574 * Option/accessory.
 WHEELS AND TIRES

Jack* CAUTION Wheel bolts

The jack can be used to lift the vehicle to e.g. The wheel bolts hold the wheel in place on
• When not in use, the jack* should be
change a wheel. the wheel hub.
kept in its storage compartment under
Only use rims that have been tested and
the cargo compartment floor.
approved by Volvo and are included in Volvo's
• The jack provided with your vehicle is original product range.
intended to be used only in temporary
situations such as changing wheels in Use a torque wrench to check that the wheel
the event of a flat tire. Only the jack bolts are tightened correctly.
that came with your particular model Do not grease the wheel bolt threads.
should be used to lift the vehicle. If the
vehicle needs to be lifted more fre- WARNING
quently or for a prolonged period, using
a garage jack or hoist is recommended. The wheel bolts may need to be tightened
again several days after a wheel change.
Always follow this device's instructions
Temperature fluctuations and vibrations
for use. can cause them to loosen slightly.

The jack needs to be cranked together to the

correct position in order to fit. CAUTION
The wheel bolts should be tightened to
For vehicles with Leveling Control*: If the
140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). Over-tightening or
vehicle is equipped with the optional pneu-
under-tightening could damage the threa-
matic suspension, it must be turned off before
ded joints.
the vehicle is lifted on a jack.

Related information Locking wheel bolt kit*

• Tool kit (p. 574) To loosen or tighten the locking wheel bolts,
• Hoisting the vehicle (p. 614) turn the wrench in the locking bolt until it fully
engages in the code grooves. When removing
a wheel, always start with the locking wheel
bolts. When mounting a wheel, end with the
locking bolt.

}}

* Option/accessory. 575
 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| CAUTION Spare wheel14 WARNING

The spare wheel is a Temporary Spare and
Make sure you have a solid connection • Never drive faster than 80 km/h
can be used to temporarily replace a punc-
between bolt and wheel bolt key when (50 mph) with a spare tire mounted on
tured tire on one of the vehicle's regular
loosening/tightening the wheel bolts. the vehicle.
wheels.
Applying force at an angle could damage • The vehicle must never be driven with
The spare wheel is only intended for tempo-
the slots in the wheel bolts and the wheel more than one "Temporary Spare"
rary use. Replace it with a normal wheel as
bolt key and make it impossible to install or wheel mounted.
soon as possible.
remove the wheel.
The driving characteristics of the vehicle • Driving with a spare wheel may alter
change and ground clearance reduces when the driving characteristics of the vehi-
When the wheel bolt key is not being used, cle. Replace the spare wheel with a
stow it in its designated location in the foam the spare wheel is used. Do not wash the vehi-
cle in an automatic car wash while using the normal wheel as soon as possible.
block under the cargo compartment floor. This
Temporary Spare. • The spare wheel is smaller than the
is important to remember so that the tool is
normal wheel, which affects the vehi-
available if the vehicle is taken to a workshop. The recommended tire pressure must be
cle's ground clearance. Watch for high
If you lose the key, contact your Volvo retailer. maintained regardless of at which position the
curbs and do not wash the vehicle in
temporary spare wheel is used on the vehicle.
Related information an automatic car wash when a spare
• Changing a wheel (p. 572) If the spare wheel is damaged, a replacement wheel is mounted.
can be purchased from a Volvo retailer. • Follow the manufacturer's recom-
• Tool kit (p. 574)
mended tire inflation pressure for the
WARNING spare wheel.
Current legislation prohibits the use of the • On all-wheel drive vehicles, the drive
"Temporary Spare" wheel other than as a on the rear axle can be disconnected.
temporary replacement for a punctured
tire. It must be replaced as soon as possi- • If the spare wheel is mounted on the
ble by a standard tire. Roadholding and front axle, snow chains must not be
handling may be affected with the "Tempo- used.
rary Spare" wheel in use. • The spare wheel must not be repaired.

14 Not available on all models.

576
 WHEELS AND TIRES

CAUTION Handling the spare wheel15 Tires should only be moved between the front
Follow these instructions regarding handling and back, never from right to left or vice versa.
The vehicle must not be driven with tires of If one of the front tires needs to be replaced
the spare wheel.
different dimensions or with a spare wheel with a spare tire:
other than the one that came with the vehi-
cle. The use of different size wheels can 1. Use the spare tire to replace the rear tire
seriously damage your vehicle's transmis- on the same side of the vehicle as the flat
sion. tire.
2. Move the rear tire to the front to replace
the flat tire.
Related information
• Changing a wheel (p. 572) Related information
• Spare wheel (p. 576)
• Recommended tire pressure (p. 567)
• Tool kit (p. 574)
• Changing a wheel (p. 572)
This illustration is generic and appearance may vary.
The spare wheel is stored in a bag and should
be secured with two straps onto the floor of
the trunk/cargo compartment when the vehi-
cle is being driven. The straps should be strap-
ped down crosswise over the wheel, attached
to the load anchoring eyelets and pulled taut.
Wheel changing tools are located under the
cargo compartment floor.

Polestar Engineered
If your vehicle is Polestar Engineered,
Temporary Spare tires will not fit on the front
wheel axle due to the larger brakes.

15 Not available on all models.

577
 WHEELS AND TIRES

Snow tires on tires than summer conditions. Volvo there- Snow chains
Snow tires are designed for winter driving fore recommends not driving on snow tires Using snow chains and/or snow tires can
conditions. that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm help improve traction in winter driving condi-
Volvo recommends snow tires with specific (0.15 inch). tions.
dimensions. The tire dimensions vary depend- Volvo does not recommend use of snow
Related information
ing on engine type. When driving with snow chains on wheel dimensions larger than
• Changing a wheel (p. 572)
tires, the correct type of tires must be moun- 18 inches. For Polestar Engineered, Volvo
ted on all four wheels. • Winter driving (p. 457) does not recommend use of snow chains on
• Tread wear indicator (p. 561) wheel dimensions other than 8.5x21 ET 38.5
Tips for changing snow tires 255/40.
When switching between regular tires and • Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)
snow tires, mark the tires according to which
WARNING
side they were mounted on, e.g. L for left and
R for right. Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva-
lent snow chains that are suitable for the
Contact a Volvo retailer for assistance deter- vehicle model and the tire and wheel sizes.
mining the most suitable rims and tires. Only one-sided snow chains are permit-
ted.
Studded tires
If uncertain about snow chains, Volvo rec-
Studded tires should be broken in by driving ommends contacting an authorized Volvo
500–1000 km (300–600 miles) slowly and workshop. Use of the wrong snow chains
gently to help the studs settle properly in the could cause serious damage to the vehicle
tires. This gives the tire, and especially the and result in an accident.
studs, a longer service life.

NOTE
Legal requirements concerning the use of
studded tires may vary. Always follow local
laws and regulations.

Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-
peratures place considerably higher demands

578
 WHEELS AND TIRES

CAUTION • The handling of the vehicle can be Tire sealing system16

adversely affected when driving with The temporary tire sealing system can be
Snow chains can be used on the vehicle, chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as used to seal a puncture in a tire or to check
with the following restrictions: well as locked wheel braking. and adjust the pressure in the tire.
• Always follow the manufacturer's • Some types of strap-on chains affect
installation instructions carefully. Install Models equipped with a spare wheel17 do not
brake components and therefore must
chains as tightly as possible and have the tire sealing system.
NOT be used.
retighten periodically. WARNING
• Only put snow chains on the front Consult a Volvo retailer for more information California Proposition 65
wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive about snow chains. Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-
vehicles). senger vehicle can expose you to chemi-
If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" Related information cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon-
•
tires and wheels with different dimen- • Winter driving (p. 457) oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are
sions than the original tires and wheels known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproduc-
are used, snow chains in some cases tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
may NOT be used. Sufficient distance breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine
between the chains and brakes, sus- except as necessary, service your vehicle in
pension and body components must a well ventilated area and wear gloves or
be maintained. wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
• Check local regulations regarding the www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
use of snow chains before installing. vehicle.
• Never exceed the snow chain manu-
facturer's specified maximum speed The tire sealing system consists of a compres-
limit. Under no circumstances should sor and a bottle containing sealing compound.
you exceed 50 km/h (30 mph). The sealing functions as a temporary repair.
• Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns
when driving with snow chains.
• Avoid driving on surfaces without
snow as this wears out both the snow
chains and the tires.

}}

579
 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| NOTE Sealing compound expiration date Using the tire sealing system
The sealing compound bottle must be The temporary tire sealing system (TMK18)
The sealing compound effectively seals replaced if its expiration date has passed (see can be used to seal a puncture in a tire. Read
tires with punctures in the tread but may the decal on the bottle). Handle the old bottle through all instructions before use.
not be able to fully seal tires with punctu- as hazardous waste.
res in the sidewall. Do not use the tire seal- Overview
ing system on tires with large tears, cracks Related information
or similar damage. • Using the tire sealing system (p. 580)
• Inflate tires with the compressor included
NOTE in the tire sealing system (p. 584)

The compressor is intended for temporary • Tires (p. 558)

tire sealing and is approved by Volvo.

Location
The tire sealing system is located in a foam
block under the cargo compartment floor.

Electrical cable

Hose

Air release valve

Protective hose cover

Speed limit sticker

Bottle holder (orange cover)

Air pressure gauge

16 Certain models only.

17 Not available on all models.
18 Temporary Mobility Kit

580
 WHEELS AND TIRES

Sealing compound bottle WARNING • Inhalation: Move the exposed person

to fresh air. If irritation persists, get
Switch Please keep the following points in mind medical attention.
when using the tire sealing system:
• Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting
Connecting • The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in unless directed to do so by medical
the illustration) contains 1) rubber latex, personnel. Get medical attention.
natural and 2) ethanediol. These sub-
stances are harmful if swallowed. • Disposal: Dispose of this material and
its container at a hazardous or special
• The contents of this bottle may cause waste collection point.
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the respiratory
tract, the skin, the central nervous sys- WARNING
tem, and the eyes. Do not remove the bottle or the hose while
Precautions: the tire sealing system is being used.
• Keep out of reach of children.
1. Preparations
• Do not ingest the contents.
• Avoid prolonged or repeated contact Turn on the vehicle's hazard warning
NOTE with the skin. Remove any clothing flashers if the tire sealing system is to be
that has come into contact with seal- used in an area with traffic.
Do not break the seal of the bottle before
use. The seal is broken automatically when ant. If the puncture was caused by a nail or
the bottle is screwed into place. • Wash thoroughly after handling. similar object, do not remove it. It will help
First aid: seal the hole.

Skin: Wash affected areas of the skin 2. Peel off the speed limit sticker from the
•
with soap and water. Get medical side of the compressor. Affix the decal to a
attention if symptoms occur. clearly visible location on the windshield
to remind the driver not to exceed this
• Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for speed limit. Do not drive faster than
least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting 80 km/h (50 mph) while using a tire that
the upper and lower eyelids. Get medi- has been temporarily repaired with the tire
cal attention if symptoms occur. sealing system.

}}

581
 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| 3. Make sure the switch is in the 0 (Off) 7. Begin tire sealing procedure 8. Start the compressor by moving the
position and take out the electric cable switch to the I (On) position.
Connect the electrical cable to the nearest
and the hose.
12 V outlet and start the vehicle. When the compressor starts, the pressure
4. Unscrew the orange cover on the com- can increase up to 6 bar (88 psi), but the
pressor and unscrew the cap on the seal- NOTE pressure will decrease after
ing compound bottle. approx. 30 seconds.
Make sure that none of the vehicle's other
5. Screw the bottle onto the bottle holder as 12 V sockets are used while the compres-
far as possible. sor is running. WARNING
The bottle and the bottle holder are equip- Never stand next to a tire being inflated
ped with catches to help prevent the seal- with the compressor. If cracks, bulges, etc.
WARNING form on the tire, switch off the compressor
ing compound from leaking. Once the bot- immediately. The vehicle should not be
tle is screwed into place into the bottle Never leave children unattended in the driven. Call roadside assistance to have the
holder, it cannot be unscrewed. The bottle vehicle while the engine is running. vehicle towed to a workshop for inspec-
can only be removed by a workshop19. tion/replacement of the tire. Volvo recom-
mends an authorized workshop.
WARNING
WARNING Inhaling exhaust fumes could lead to seri-
ous injury. Never leave the engine running 9. Inflate the tire for 7 minutes.
Do not unscrew the bottle. It is equipped
with a catch to prevent leakage. in an enclosed space or a space without
sufficient ventilation. CAUTION
6. Unscrew the tire's valve cap and screw To help avoid overheating, the compressor
the hose's valve connector as far as possi- should never be used for more than
ble onto the valve. 10 minutes at a time.
Be sure the air release valve on the com-
pressor's hose is completely closed.

19 An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

582
 WHEELS AND TIRES

10. Switch off the compressor and check the 13. Put the protective hose cover onto the 16. Check the inflation pressure on the air
inflation pressure using the air pressure hose to help prevent leakage of any resid- pressure gauge.
gauge. The inflation pressure should be ual sealing compound. Return the equip-
• If the pressure is under 1.3 bar (19 psi),
between 1.8 bar (22 psi) and 3.5 bar ment to the cargo compartment.
the tire is not sufficiently sealed. The
(51 psi). If the inflation pressure is too
14. Immediately drive the vehicle at least vehicle should not be driven. Call road-
high, use the air release valve to release
3 km (2 miles) at a maximum speed of side assistance to have the vehicle
air.
80 km/h (50 mph) to allow the sealing towed.
compound to seal the tire, and then • If the inflation pressure is higher than
WARNING recheck the inflation pressure. 1.3 bar (19 psi), the tire must be inflated
If pressure falls below 1.8 bar (22 psi), the to the inflation pressure specified on
hole in the tire may be too large. The vehi- WARNING the tire pressure decal on the driver's
cle should not be driven. Call roadside side door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa =
assistance to have the vehicle towed to a During the tire's first revolution, some seal-
workshop for inspection/replacement of ing compound may spray out of the punc- 14.5 psi). If the inflation pressure is too
the tire. Volvo recommends an authorized ture hole. Before driving away, make sure high, use the air release valve to release
workshop. that no one is near the vehicle who could air.
be sprayed with sealing compound. Make
sure no one is within 2 meters (7 feet) of
11. Switch off the compressor and remove the vehicle. WARNING
the electrical cable. Check inflation pressure regularly.
12. Unscrew the hose from the tire's valve and 15. Rechecking the inflation pressure
screw the valve cap back on. Volvo recommends driving to the nearest
Connect the hose to the tire's valve and
authorized Volvo workshop to have the tire
screw the hose connector onto the valve
NOTE replaced/repaired. Inform the workshop that
as far as possible. The compressor must
the tire contains sealing compound.
• After inflating a tire, always replace the be switched off.
valve cap to help prevent valve damage The sealing compound bottle and the hose
caused by gravel, dirt, etc. must be replaced after use. Volvo recom-
mends contacting an authorized Volvo work-
• Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
shop for replacement.
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.

}}

583
 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| WARNING Inflate tires with the compressor 4. Start the compressor by moving the
included in the tire sealing system switch to the I (On) position.
After using the tire sealing system, the
vehicle should not be driven farther than The vehicle's original tires can be inflated
approximately 200 km (120 miles). using the compressor in the tire sealing sys- CAUTION
tem. Risk of overheating. The compressor
1. The compressor must be switched off. should not be running for longer than 10
NOTE Make sure that the switch is in the 0 (Off) minutes at a time.
The compressor is an electric device. Fol- position and take out the electrical cable
low local regulations for disposal. and the hose.
5. Inflate the tire to the pressure specified on
2. Unscrew the tire's valve cap and screw the tire pressure decal on the driver's side
Related information the hose's valve connector as far as possi- door pillar. If the inflation pressure is too
• Recommended tire pressure (p. 567) ble onto the valve. high, use the air release valve to release
• Tire sealing system (p. 579) Be sure the air release valve on the com- air.
pressor's hose is completely closed. 6. Switch off the compressor. Remove the
• Inflate tires with the compressor included
in the tire sealing system (p. 584) 3. Connect the electrical cable to the nearest hose and the electrical cable.
• Contacting Volvo (p. 26) 12 V outlet and start the vehicle. 7. Screw the valve cap back onto the tire.

WARNING NOTE
Inhaling exhaust fumes could lead to seri- • After inflating a tire, always replace the
ous injury. Never leave the engine running
valve cap to help prevent valve damage
in an enclosed space or a space without
sufficient ventilation. caused by gravel, dirt, etc.
• Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
WARNING remove.
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle while the engine is running.

NOTE
The compressor is an electric device. Fol-
low local regulations for disposal.

584
 WHEELS AND TIRES

Related information Determining the vehicle's Gross vehicle weight (GVW)

• Recommended tire pressure (p. 567) permitted weight The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen-
• Using the tire sealing system (p. 580) Properly loading your vehicle will provide gers.
maximum return of vehicle design perform-
• Tire sealing system (p. 579) Steps for Determining Correct Load
ance.
Limit
Weight designations 1. Locate the statement "the combined
Before loading your vehicle, familiarize your- weight of occupants and cargo should
self with the following terms for determining never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your
your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a vehicle's placard.
trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian 2. Determine the combined weight of the
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ driver and passengers that will be riding in
CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa- your vehicle.
tion placard:
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
Curb weight driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX
The weight of the vehicle including a full tank lbs.
of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or optional equip- 4. The resulting figure equals the available
ment. amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX"
Capacity weight amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
All weight added to the curb weight, including five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
cargo and optional equipment. When towing, amount of available cargo and luggage
towbar weight is also part of cargo weight. load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 ×
Permissible axle weight 150) = 650 lbs.)
The maximum allowable weight that can be 5. Determine the combined weight of lug-
carried by a single axle (front or rear). These gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-
numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ available cargo and luggage load capacity
CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle calculated in Step 4.
must never exceed its maximum permissible
weight.
}}

585
 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load

from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

WARNING
• Exceeding the permissible axle weight,
gross vehicle weight, or any other
weight rating limits can cause tire over-
heating resulting in permanent defor-
mation or catastrophic failure.
• Do not use replacement tires with
lower load carrying capacities than the
tires that were original equipment on
the vehicle because this will lower the
vehicle's GVW rating. Use only tires
with the correct load carrying capacity.
Consult your Volvo retailer for informa-
tion.

Related information
• Loading recommendations (p. 594)

586
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Passenger compartment interior WARNING

Overview of the passenger compartment
Store loose objects, such as cell phone,
interior and storage spaces. camera, remote control for extra equip-
ment, etc., in the glove compartment or
Front seats another compartment. Otherwise, these
could injure people in the vehicle in the
event of hard braking or a collision.

CAUTION
Keep in mind that glossy surfaces can be
easily scratched by e.g. metal objects. Do
Storage compartments with cup holders, wireless not place keys, phones or similar items on
phone charger*, electrical outlets and USB ports in sensitive surfaces.
the tunnel console.

Rear seat Related information

• Electrical outlets (p. 590)
Storage compartment in door panel, glove compart-
ment and sun visors. • Using the glove compartment (p. 592)
• Sun visors (p. 593)
• Tunnel console (p. 589)
• Wireless phone charger* (p. 532)
• Connecting a device via the USB port
(p. 514)

Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holders*

in the center seat's backrest, storage pocket* in the
front seat's backrest, USB port in the tunnel console
and storage compartment under the seat.

588 * Option/accessory.
 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Tunnel console WARNING Related information

The tunnel console is located between the • Passenger compartment interior (p. 588)
Store loose objects, such as cell phone,
front seats. camera, remote control for extra equip- • Electrical outlets (p. 590)
ment, etc., in the glove compartment or • Climate system controls (p. 216)
another compartment. Otherwise, these
could injure people in the vehicle in the
event of hard braking or a collision.

CAUTION
Keep in mind that glossy surfaces can be
easily scratched by e.g. metal objects. Do
not place keys, phones or similar items on
sensitive surfaces.

Storage compartment with cover* and 12 NOTE

V outlet1. Press the handle to open/close
One of the sensors for the alarm* is located
the cover.
under the cup holder in the center console.
Storage compartment with cup holder and Avoid placing coins, keys and other metal
wireless phone charger*. objects in the cup holder as this could trig-
Storage compartment and USB port ger the alarm.
under the armrest.
Climate control panel for the rear seats* or NOTE
storage compartment. There is also a USB
port underneath. The USB port can be used to e.g. charge a
cellular phone or tablet. Only the front USB
port can be used to play media through the
vehicle's speakers.

1 If the vehicle does not have a wireless phone charger, the 12 V outlet is located in the center storage compartment.

* Option/accessory. 589
 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Electrical outlets Related information

There is a 12 V electrical outlet in the tunnel • Passenger compartment interior (p. 588)
console and a 12 V electrical outlet* in the • Using the electrical outlets (p. 591)
trunk/cargo compartment.
If a problem occurs with an electrical socket,
contact a workshop - an authorized Volvo
workshop is recommended.

12 V outlets

Front electrical outlet in the tunnel console for vehi-

cles without wireless phone charger*.
The 12 V outlets can be used for devices
intended for this such as MP3 players, coolers
and cellular phones.

Front electrical outlet in the tunnel console for vehi-

cles with wireless phone charger*.

12 V outlet in the cargo compartment*.

590 * Option/accessory.
 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Using the electrical outlets WARNING Related information

The 12 V outlet can be used for devices • Electrical outlets (p. 590)
• Do not use accessories with large or
intended for this such as MP3 players, cool- • Passenger compartment interior (p. 588)
heavy plugs – they could damage the
ers and cellular phones.
outlet or come loose while you are driv-
The ignition must be in at least mode I for the
ing.
outlets to supply current. The outlets will then
be active as long as there is sufficient charge • Do not use accessories that could
in the start battery. cause disruptions to e.g. the vehicle's
radio receiver or electrical system.
If the engine is turned off and the vehicle is
locked, the outlets will be deactivated. If the • Position the accessory so that there is
engine is turned off and the vehicle remains no risk of it injuring the driver or pas-
unlocked, the sockets will remain active for up sengers in the event of heavy braking
to 7 minutes. or a collision.
• Pay attention to connected accessories
NOTE as they can generate heat that could
burn passengers or the interior.
Bear in mind that using the electrical out-
lets when the engine is off could cause the
starter battery to have too low of a charge Using 12 V outlets
level, which could limit other functionality. 1. Remove the stopper (tunnel console) or
fold down the cover (trunk/cargo com-
Accessories connected to the electrical partment) over the socket and plug in the
outlets can be activated even when the device.
vehicle electrical system is off or if precon-
ditioning is used. For this reason, discon- 2. Unplug the device and put the stopper
nect plugs when they are not in use to pre- back in (tunnel console) or fold up the
vent the starter battery from becoming dis- cover (trunk/cargo compartment) when
charged. the socket is not in use or left unattended.

CAUTION
The maximum power is 120 W (10 A) per
outlet.

591
 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Using the glove compartment

The glove compartment is located on the pas-
senger side. The glove compartment can be
used to store the Owner's Manual, maps, etc.
There is also room for a pen and a card
holder.

Storage compartment for the key. The illustration is The illustration is generic – the design may vary.
generic – the design may vary.
To lock the glove compartment:
Insert the key into the lock on the glove
compartment.
Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise.

Remove the key from the lock.

Locking and unlocking the glove box*
The glove compartment can be locked when – To unlock, perform the above steps in
the vehicle is left at a workshop, hotel, etc. reverse.
The glove compartment can then only be
locked/unlocked with the glove compartment Using the glove box as a cooled area*
key. The glove compartment can be used to cool
e.g. drinks or food. Cooling is possible when
the climate system is active (i.e. when the
ignition is in mode II or when the engine is
running).

592 * Option/accessory.
 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Sun visors Cargo compartment

In the ceiling in front of the driver's and front The vehicle has a flexible cargo compartment
passenger's seats, there are sun visors that that makes it possible to carry and secure
can be lowered and angled to the side as large objects.
necessary. The cargo capacity of the vehicle can be con-
siderably increased by folding down the rear
seat backrests. To make loading and unload-
ing easier, the rear section of the vehicle can
be raised and lowered using the level control
function*. Use the load anchoring eyelets or
grocery bag holders to help secure objects in
place, and the retractable cargo compartment
The illustration is generic – the design may vary. cover* to help conceal objects in the cargo
Activate cooling. compartment.

Deactivate cooling. If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary

spare tire, this is secured to the cargo com-
– Activate or deactivate cooling by moving partment floor under the cover. The towing
the control as far as possible toward the The illustration is generic – the design may vary. eyelet and tire sealing system are located
passenger compartment/glove compart- The mirror lighting* comes on automatically under the cargo compartment floor.
ment. when the visor is lifted up.
Related information
Related information The mirror frame has a holder for e.g. cards or • Loading recommendations (p. 594)
• Passenger compartment interior (p. 588) tickets.
• Grocery bag holders (p. 596)
• Private Locking (p. 269) Related information • Load anchoring eyelets (p. 596)
• Passenger compartment interior (p. 588) Installing and removing the cargo com-
•
partment cover* (p. 597)

* Option/accessory. 593
 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Loading recommendations WARNING ment/trunk and simplify loading. If the rear

There are a number of things that are impor- seat backrests are folded down, make sure
In a head-on collision at a speed of that no objects loaded into the vehicle prevent
tant to consider when carrying loads in or on 50 km/h (30 mph), an unsecured object
the vehicle. the WHIPS system for the front seats from
weighing 20 kg (44 pounds) can reach a
Load-carrying capacity is determined by the projectile weight equivalent to 1000 kg functioning correctly.
vehicle's curb weight. The total weight of all (2200 pounds). A ski hatch in the rear seat can be folded
passengers and any installed accessories down to carry skis or other long, thin objects.
reduces the vehicle's load-carrying capacity by
the corresponding amount. WARNING Raising/lowering the rear end of the
If objects are loaded higher than the upper vehicle*
WARNING edge of the side windows, leave a 10 cm The rear end of the vehicle can be lowered or
(4 in.) space between the objects and the raised for easier loading into the cargo com-
The vehicle's driving characteristics change window. Objects placed closer to this
partment/trunk or to facilitate attaching a
depending on the weight and position of could impede the function of the inflatable
the load. curtain concealed inside the headlining. trailer*.
The controls for raising/lowering are located at
Loading the cargo compartment/trunk the rear edge of the right side panel in the
WARNING cargo compartment/trunk.
Keep the following in mind when loading:
Always secure the load. Otherwise, it may
• Position objects so they are pressing shift during heavy braking and injure peo-
against the rear seat backrests. ple in the vehicle.
• Heavy objects should be positioned as low Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
as possible. Avoid placing heavy objects something soft.
on folded-down seat backrests. Turn off the engine and apply the parking
• Cover sharp corners with a soft cloth or brake when loading/unloading long
similar to help prevent damage to the objects. Otherwise, it is possible for the
load to reach the gear lever or gear selector
upholstery.
and move it to a drive position – which
• Use the load anchoring eyelets and ten- could cause the vehicle to begin rolling.
sioning straps or similar to secure all
objects. Extra cargo space
Controls for raising/lowering the rear end of the vehi-
The rear seat backrests can be folded down to
cle.
increase cargo space in the cargo compart-

594 * Option/accessory.
 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

The controls consist of two buttons ‒ one but- Roof loads and load carriers WARNING
ton for lowering and one button for raising the Volvo-developed load carriers are recom-
rear end. Press and hold the relevant button The vehicle's center of gravity and driving
mended for carrying loads on the roof of the characteristics are altered by roof loads.
until the desired height is reached. vehicle.
Volvo load carriers are specially designed to Follow the vehicle's specifications regar-
The rear end of the vehicle cannot be raised ding weights and maximum permitted
higher than its normal height. help prevent damage to your vehicle and help
load.
ensure maximum safety while driving. Volvo
The rear end will return to the normal height load carriers are available from authorized
when the vehicle begins driving. Volvo retailers. Related information
• Loading recommendations (p. 594)
Carefully follow the installation instructions
NOTE • Weights (p. 675)
provided with the load carriers.
It is not possible to adjust the height of the
• Distribute the load evenly throughout the
vehicle's rear when one or more of the
load carriers. Place heavier cargo at the
doors or the hood is open. This does not
bottom of the load.
apply to the tailgate.
• Check periodically to ensure that the load
carriers and load are properly secured.
WARNING Secure the load firmly using tie straps or
Make sure that no people, animals or similar.
objects are found under the vehicle when it • If the load is longer than the vehicle, such
is lowered. This could endanger life and as a canoe or kayak, attach the towing
cause damage to the vehicle or objects.
eyelet in its front outlet and secure the tie
straps in it.
Related information The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel
•
• Load anchoring eyelets (p. 596) consumption increase with the size of the
• Folding down the rear seat backrests load.
(p. 198) Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid acceleration,
•
• Rear seat ski hatch (p. 597) hard braking and fast cornering.
• Roof loads and load carriers (p. 595)
• Leveling control* and suspension (p. 445)
• Weights (p. 675)

* Option/accessory. 595
 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Grocery bag holders • Installing and removing the cargo net* Load anchoring eyelets
Grocery bag holders (hooks) help keep shop- (p. 602) The load anchoring eyelets in the cargo com-
ping bags in place and prevent them from • Installing and removing the cargo com- partment can be used to secure objects with
falling over and spilling their contents in the partment cover* (p. 597) straps, a net, etc.
cargo compartment. Installing and removing the steel cargo
•
On the sides of the cargo grid* (p. 600)
compartment

WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects in or pro-
truding from the vehicle can cause injury in
There is a grocery bag holder in the side panel the event of hard braking.
on each side of the cargo compartment. Always secure large and heavy objects
CAUTION with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps.

The grocery bag holders are only intended

to hold weights up to 5 kg (11 lbs).
Related information
• Loading recommendations (p. 594)
• Weights (p. 675)
Related information
• Loading recommendations (p. 594)
• Using the glove compartment (p. 592)

596 * Option/accessory.
 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Rear seat ski hatch Installing and removing the cargo Then put the other end piece in the recess
The hatch in the rear seat backrest can be compartment cover* in the side panel on the opposite side.
opened to transport long, narrow objects In the fully open position, the cover and the
such as skis. rear flap conceal objects in the cargo com-
partment.

Installing the cargo compartment

cover

Make sure the front flap is pointed down-

ward behind the backrest before the cas-
sette is put into place.

The illustration is generic - details may vary accord- Push the end piece down on both sides,
ing to vehicle model. one at a time.
1. In the cargo compartment, grasp the ski > When a click is heard and the red
hatch handle and pull it down. marks on each end piece are no longer
visible, the cover is in place. Check that
2. Fold down the armrest in the rear seat. Press the end piece on one side of the
it is secure.
cover into the retaining bracket in the side
If the private locking function is used, the ski panel of the cargo compartment.
hatch must be closed.

Related information
• Loading recommendations (p. 594)
• Private Locking (p. 269)
• Load anchoring eyelets (p. 596)

}}

* Option/accessory. 597
 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

|| Fitting the tailgate flap 2. Squeeze together the flap slightly to make 1.
it easier to guide the pin into place in the
bracket on the other side.
3.

Pull the upper clips of the cover straight

out of the tailgate.
A flap should be mounted on the tailgate 2.
when using the cargo compartment cover. Press the two upper clips in the respective
recess in the tailgate so it clicks into place.
1.
Removing the cargo compartment
cover
In retracted position:
1. Press the button on one of the cover's
ends and lift out that end.
2. Carefully lift the cover up and out.
> The other end will release automatically Carefully pull the flap out of the bracket on
and the cover can then be lifted out of one side of the tailgate and then the other.
the cargo compartment. If necessary, press the flap together
Turn the flap so that the screw side faces slightly to make it more flexible and facili-
down and guide the pin into the bracket Removing the tailgate flap
If the cargo compartment cover is not being tate removal.
on one side of the tailgate.
used, the rear flap should be removed.

598
 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Related information Operating the cargo compartment

• Operating the cargo compartment cover* cover*
(p. 599) The cover can be used in two positions: fully
• Loading recommendations (p. 594) open to completely cover the cargo compart-
ment or partially retracted to make it easier to
reach further into the cargo compartment.

Fully open

Cover in the fully open position.

Grasp the handle and pull the cover out as

far as possible.
Press the attachment pins in the recesses
in the rear pillars of the cargo compart-
ment.
> The cover will be secured in the fully
open position.
The rear flap mounted on the inside of the tailgate
supplements the cargo compartment cover.

CAUTION
Do not place objects on top of the cargo
compartment cover.

}}

* Option/accessory. 599
 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

|| Loading mode CAUTION Installing and removing the steel

From the fully opened position: cargo grid*
When in the loading position, the cargo
– The steel cargo grid prevents loads or pets in
compartment cover can obstruct visibility
the cargo compartment from being thrown
to the rear. Make sure that the cargo com-
forward into the passenger compartment
partment cover is fully extended or fully
during hard braking.
retracted during driving.

Retracting the cover

1. From the fully opened position:
Lift the cover's handle and pull it rearward
to release the cover's attaching pins from
the grooves. Let the cover retract.
Press the handle section of the cargo com- From the partially retracted position:
partment slightly upward.
> The cover will move up until it stops in Grasp the handle and pull the cover out of
the partially retracted position. the groves to the fully open position. Lift
the handle and pull it rearward to release
Returning to the fully open position from the the cover's attaching pins from the
partially retracted position: For safety reasons, the steel grid must always
grooves. Let the cover retract.
be installed and secured correctly.
1. Grasp the handle and pull the cover down 2. Let the cover retract with its attaching
as far as possible. Angle the handle pins above the side panels until it stops in WARNING
slightly upward so that the attaching pins the fully retracted position.
can more easily move past the first set of Under no circumstances may a person be
grooves. Related information in the cargo compartment when the vehi-
Installing and removing the cargo com- cle is moving. Heavy braking or a collision
2. Release the handle so that the attaching
• could lead to serious injury.
partment cover* (p. 597)
pins engage into the grooves.
> The cover will be secured in the fully
open position.

600 * Option/accessory.
 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Installation 3. 4.

CAUTION
The steel cargo grid may only be used in
the rear position (behind the rear seat)
described here.

Before installing the steel grid, the existing

plastic ceiling mounting consoles must be
replaced with steel consoles. Volvo recom-
mends that the ceiling consoles are only Position the grid's attachment points in Screw the provided screw into place using
replaced by an authorized Volvo workshop or the ceiling consoles. the provided 6 mm Allen wrench. Repeat
retailer. on the other side. Recommended torque:
The next step will be easier if two people
1. Fold down the rear seat backrests. 20 Nm (15 ft-lb).
hold the steel grid in the right position.
> Check to make sure the steel grid is
2. Make sure that the steel grid is facing the
securely in place.
right direction. Lift the grid into the vehicle
through one of the rear doors. 5. Return the backrest to the upright posi-
tion.
For more information on necessary tools and
procedures for installing/removing, see the
assembly instructions provided with the steel
grid.

CAUTION
The steel cargo grid cannot be folded up or
down when a cargo compartment cover is
mounted.

}}

601
 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

|| Related information Installing and removing the cargo WARNING

• Loading recommendations (p. 594) net*
Objects in the cargo compartment must
• Load anchoring eyelets (p. 596) The cargo net helps prevent objects in the always be securely anchored, even with a
cargo compartment from entering the pas- correctly installed cargo net.
senger compartment in the event of a sudden
stop or hard braking.
The cargo net is attached at four points.
Installing the cargo net

WARNING
All of the cargo net's upper consoles,
hooks and straps must be securely moun-
ted and attached before the net is used.
Never use the net if it is damaged.

NOTE
With front mounting, the cargo net is most
easily installed via a rear door.

1. Fold out the cargo net and make sure that

For safety reasons, the cargo net must always
the upper rod folds out and locks into
be mounted and secured according to the fol-
position.
lowing description.
2. Insert one of the net's hooks into the front
The net is made of strong nylon weave and
or rear ceiling mounting point with the
can be attached in two different locations in
strap lock facing you.
the vehicle:
• Rear mounting - behind the rear seats.
• Front mounting - behind the front seats.

602 * Option/accessory.
 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

3. Insert the net's other upper hook into the 4.

ceiling mounting point on the opposite
side.
The telescopic spring-loaded hooks make
mounting easier.
Make sure that the net's hooks are pushed
forward as far as possible into their
respective mounting points.

Front mounting.
Rear mounting.
For front mounting:
For rear mounting:
With the cargo net mounted in the front
With the cargo net hooked into the rear ceiling mounting points, hook the straps
ceiling mounting points, attach the net's into the outer eyelets on the front seat rails
straps into the front cargo anchoring eye- behind the seats. Attaching the net is eas-
lets in the cargo compartment. ier if the seat backrests are upright and the
seats are moved slightly forward.
Move the seat or backrest only until it
touches the net. Moving it with too much
force or applying too much pressure to the
net could lead to damage.

}}

603
 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

|| CAUTION
If a seat or backrest is pressed with too
much force back against the cargo net, the
net and its ceiling brackets could be dam-
aged.

5. Pull the straps until the cargo net is taut.

Removing the cargo net

The cargo net can be easily removed and
folded up.
1. Loosen the cargo net by pressing the but-
ton on the strap locks on each side and
pulling to allow some slack.
2. Press in the catches and release both of
the strap hooks.
3. Unhook the upper hooks and remove the
net from the ceiling mounting points.
4. Press the red button on the rod so that it
can be folded. Fold and roll up the net.
Store the net in its case.

Related information
• Loading recommendations (p. 594)
• Load anchoring eyelets (p. 596)

604
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Volvo's service program Service and repairs Maintenance

To keep the vehicle as safe and reliable as Service the vehicle regularly. Follow Volvo's Your Volvo passed several major inspections
possible, follow the Volvo service schedule recommended service intervals. before it was delivered to you, in accordance
specified in the Warranty and Maintenance with Volvo specifications. The maintenance
Detailed inspection and repairs may only be
Records Information booklet. procedures outlined in the Warranty and Serv-
performed by an authorized workshop.
ice Records Information booklet, many of
WARNING which will positively affect your vehicle's emis-
California Proposition 65 WARNING sions, should be performed as indicated. It is
Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas- Do not make any repairs on this vehicle recommended that receipts for vehicle emis-
senger vehicle can expose you to chemi- yourself. Electrical cables and/or compo- sion maintenance be retained in case ques-
cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon- nents that have come loose may only be tions arise concerning maintenance. Inspec-
oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are corrected by an authorized workshop – an tion and maintenance should also be per-
known to the State of California to cause authorized Volvo workshop is recom- formed anytime a malfunction is observed or
cancer and birth defects or other reproduc- mended.
suspected.
tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine
except as necessary, service your vehicle in
Introduction
a well ventilated area and wear gloves or The maintenance services contain several
wash your hands frequently when servicing checks that require special instruments and
your vehicle. For more information go to tools and therefore must be performed by a
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top
vehicle. condition, specify time-tested and proven
Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories.
Volvo recommends having an authorized The Federal Clean Air Act - U.S.
Volvo workshop perform service and mainte- The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle
nance. Volvo workshops have the staff, service manufacturers to furnish written instructions
literature and special tools that can provide to the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper
the highest quality of service. servicing and function of the components that
control emissions. These services, which are
CAUTION listed in the "Warranty and Service Records
To ensure the Volvo warranty is not invali- Information" booklet, are not covered by the
dated, check and follow the Warranty and warranty. You will be required to pay for labor
Service Records Information booklet. and material used.

606
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Applicable warranties - U.S./Canada Periodic maintenance helps minimize Emission inspection readiness
In accordance with applicable U.S. and Cana- emissions How do states use OBD II for emission
dian regulations, the following list of warran-
inspections?
ties is provided. NOTE Many states connect a computer directly to a
• New Vehicle Limited Warranty • Refer to your Service and Warranty vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can
• Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty Booklet for a comprehensive service then read "faults." In some states, this type of
and maintenance schedule up to inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission
• Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty
240,000 km (150,000 miles). This test.
• Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint program contains inspections and ser- How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission
Systems Limited Warranty vices necessary for the proper function inspection?
• Emission Design and Defect Warranty of your vehicle and includes compo- Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec-
• Emission Performance Warranty nents that affect vehicle emissions. tion for any of the following reasons:
These are federal warranties; other warranties • The Warranty and Service Records • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your
are provided as required by state/provincial Information booklet also contains vehicle may fail inspection.
law. Refer to your separate Warranty and detailed information concerning the
warranties that apply to your vehicle. • If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,
Service Records Information booklet for but went out without any action on your
detailed information concerning each of the part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault.
warranties. On-board Diagnostic System Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending
OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized on the inspection practices in your area.
engine management system. It stores diag-
• If you had recent service that required dis-
nostic information about your vehicle's emis-
connecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic
sion controls. It can light the Check Engine
information may be incomplete and "not
light (MIL) if it detects an emission control
ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not
"fault." A "fault" is a component or system
ready may fail inspection.
that is not performing within an expected
range. A fault may be permanent or temporary.
OBD II will store a message about any fault.

}}

607
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| How can I prepare for my next OBD II Monthly: Related information

emission inspection? • Check cold tire pressure in all tires. • Vehicle status (p. 611)
• If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit or Inspect the tires for wear. • Scheduling service and repairs (p. 611)
was lit but went out without service, have • Check that engine coolant and other fluid • Connecting equipment to the vehicle's
your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, levels are between the indicated "min" data link connector (p. 37)
serviced by a qualified Volvo technician. and "max" markings.
• Technician certification (p. 38)
• If you recently had service for a lit Check • Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass
Engine light, or if you had service that cleaner and soft paper towels. • Climate control system service (p. 617)
required disconnecting the battery, a • Maintenance of the brake system (p. 424)
• Wipe driver information displays with a
period of driving is necessary to bring the
soft cloth. • Engine compartment overview (p. 619)
OBD II system to "ready" for inspection.
Two half-hour trips of mixed stop-and-go/ • Visually inspect battery terminals for cor-
highway driving are typically needed to rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose ter-
allow OBD II to reach readiness. Your minal connector, or a battery near the end
Volvo retailer can provide you with more of its useful service life. Consult your Volvo
information on planning a trip. retailer for additional information.
• Maintain your vehicle in accordance with As needed:
your vehicle's maintenance schedule. Wash the vehicle, including the undercarriage,
to reduce wear that can be caused by a
Owner maintenance buildup of dirt, and corrosion that can be
Periodic maintenance requirements and inter- caused by salt residues.
vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty
and Service Records Information booklet. Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at
the base of the windshield, and from other pla-
The following points can be carried out ces where they may collect.
between the normally scheduled maintenance
services. NOTE
Each time the vehicle is refueled: Complete service information for qualified
• Check the engine oil level. technicians is available online for purchase
• Clean the windshield, windshield wipers, or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.
headlights, and taillights.

608
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Data transfer between vehicle and WARNING Download Center

workshop over Wi-Fi With the vehicle connected to the Internet1,
The vehicle may not be driven when it is
Volvo workshops have a designated Wi-Fi connected to the workshop's networks and updates for a number of the vehicle's sys-
network for data transfer between your vehi- systems. tems can be downloaded from the center dis-
cle and the workshop. Your visit to the work- play.
shop will be easier and more effective when The Download Center app is
diagnostics information and software can be
Related information
started from the center dis-
• Handling system updates via Download
transferred over the workshop's network. play and makes it possible to:
Center (p. 610)
At the workshop, your service technician can
connect your vehicle to the workshop's Wi-Fi • Scheduling service and repairs (p. 611)
network to perform troubleshooting and
download software. For this type of communi-
cation, the vehicle only connects to a work- • search for and update system software
shop's network. It is not possible to connect • update Sensus Navigation* map data
the vehicle to another Wi-Fi network (e.g. your • download, update and delete apps.
home network) in the same way as to a work-
shop's network. Related information
• Handling system updates via Download
Connecting with remote key Center (p. 610)
Connection is usually managed by the service
technician, who will use the remote key but- • Download apps (p. 489)
tons. It is therefore important to bring a key • Updating apps (p. 489)
with buttons with you when you visit the • Deleting apps (p. 490)
workshop. Pressing the lock button on the
• Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538)
remote key three times will connect the vehi-
cle to the workshop's Wi-Fi network. • Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 119)
When the car is connected to a Wi-Fi net-
work, the symbol appears in the center
display.

1 There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan.

* Option/accessory. 609
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Handling system updates via NOTE Canceling software download

Download Center – Tap the checkbox in the activity indicator
Data downloading can affect other services that replaced Install when the download
Functions for Internet-connected vehicles
such as transfer data, e.g. web radio. If the began.
and infotainment can be updated via Down-
affect on other services is experienced as
load Center. Updates can be done one at a Note that only a download can be cancelled.
problematic, the download can be interrup-
time or all at the same time. An installation cannot be cancelled once it has
ted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to
switch off or cancel other services. begun.
Searching for update
If an update is available, the Deactivating the background search
message New software for software update
NOTE
updates available See Automatic searching for software updates is
Download Center will be An update can be interrupted when the
activated as the default factory setting, but the
displayed in the center dis- ignition is switched off and the vehicle is
function can be deactivated.
play's status field. left.
1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top
In order for system updates to be possible, the However, the update does not have to be
view.
completed before the vehicle is left as the
vehicle must have an Internet connection2.
update is resumed the next time the vehi- 2. Tap System Download Center.
– Go to Download Center in the center dis- cle is used.
play's App view. 3. Tap to deselect Auto Software Update.
> If no search has been performed since Updating all system software Related information
the last time the infotainment system – Select Install all at the bottom of the list. • Download Center (p. 609)
was started, a search will be initiated.
No search will begin if a software To avoid displaying a list, select Install all via • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538)
download is in progress. System updates. • Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 119)
A number in System updates shows Updating individual system software
how many updates are available. Tap to – Select Install to choose the software you
display a list of updates that can be would like to download.
installed in the vehicle.

2 There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan.

610 * Option/accessory.
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Vehicle status Scheduling service and repairs5 3. Tap Request appointment.

The general status of the vehicle can be This service offers a way to send a booking 4. Check that your Volvo ID is correct.
viewed in the center display. request for service and workshop appoint-
The Car Status app is started 5. Make sure your preferred Workshop
ments directly from the vehicle.
from the center display's App When it is time for service, and in certain information is correct.
view and has four tabs: cases if the vehicle requires repairs, a mes- 6. In the Tap to write information to the
sage will be displayed in the instrument panel workshop field, you can provide details
and at the top of the center display. The time on what you would like performed during
for service is determined by how much time the visit or other important information to
has elapsed, the number of hours the engine your workshop.
• Messages - status messages has run, or the distance driven since the last
• Status – checking engine oil level and 7. Tap Send appointment request.
service.
AdBlue level3 > You will receive an appointment sug-
To use the service gestion by email within a couple of
• TPMS - tire inflation pressure check • Create a Volvo ID and register it to the days7.
• Appointments - appointment information vehicle.
and vehicle information4 On some markets, the message in the
• To send and receive appointment informa- instrument panel indicating that the
Related information tion, the vehicle must be connected to the vehicle requires service will go out once
• Handling messages saved from the instru- Internet6. the appointment request has been sent.
ment panel (p. 112) 8. Tap Cancel request if you would like to
Book service
• Checking and filling engine oil (p. 621) Book a service request when desired or when cancel your request.
• Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 567) a message is displayed indicating that service The appointment request contains information
or repairs are needed. about your vehicle that helps the workshop
• Scheduling service and repairs (p. 611)
1. Open the Car Status app from App view plan for your visit.
• Sending vehicle information to the work-
shop (p. 612) in the center display. The retailer will send you a digital appointment
Navigating in the center display's views 2. Tap Appointments. suggestion. You also have information about
•
(p. 119)

3 AdBlue Diesel models only.

4 Certain markets only.
5 Certain markets only.
6 There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan. }}

* Option/accessory. 611
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| your retailer available in the vehicle so that you • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538) Sending vehicle information to the
can contact your workshop. workshop9
Accepting an appointment suggestion Vehicle-related information can be sent at
When the vehicle has received an appoint- any time from the vehicle, e.g. if you schedule
ment suggestion, a message will be displayed a visit to a workshop and would like to assist
at the top of the center display. your workshop by providing additional basic
information. Sending vehicle information is
1. Tap the message. not the same as scheduling service.
2. To accept the suggested appointment, tap 1. Open the Car Status app from App view
Accept. Otherwise, tap Send new in the center display.
proposal or Decline. 2. Tap Appointments.
For some markets, the system reminds you 3. Tap Send vehicle data.
when an appointment time is approaching and
> A message confirming that vehicle-rela-
the navigation system8 can also guide you to ted information has been sent will
the workshop at the appointed time. appear at the top of the center display.
You can cancel data transmission by
NOTE tapping the checkbox in the activity
If you experience any problems with this indicator.
service, contact your Volvo retailer. Information is sent via the vehicle's
Internet connection10.
Related information Vehicle information can be accessed by any
• Vehicle status (p. 611) retailer if they are provided with your vehicle
• Sending vehicle information to the work- identification number (VIN11).
shop (p. 612)
Vehicle information contents
• Navigating in the center display's views
The most recently saved vehicle-related infor-
(p. 119)
mation will be sent (the last time the vehicle
• Volvo ID (p. 26)

7 Timespan may vary depending on market.

8 For vehicles with Sensus Navigation*.

612 * Option/accessory.
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

was turned on). This includes information

regarding:
• service requirements
• time since last service was performed
• function status
• fluid levels
• mileage (odometer reading)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN11)
• software version
• diagnostic information.

Related information
• Scheduling service and repairs (p. 611)
• Vehicle status (p. 611)
• Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 119)
• Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 538)

9 Certain markets only.

10 There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan.
11 Vehicle Identification Number.

* Option/accessory. 613
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Hoisting the vehicle

When hoisting the vehicle, it is important that
the jack is positioned on the designated
points under the vehicle.

The triangles in the plastic covering indicate where the jack attachment points/lifting points (red areas) are located.

NOTE NOTE The vehicle's ordinary jack is only intended

to be used in temporary situations for short
For vehicles with Leveling Control*: If the Volvo recommends only using the jack periods of time, such as when changing
vehicle is equipped with pneumatic sus- intended for your specific vehicle model. If wheels in the event of a flat tire. If the vehi-
pension, this feature must be turned off a jack other than that recommended by cle needs to be lifted more frequently, or
before the vehicle is lifted onto a tow truck. Volvo is used, follow the instructions for a longer period of time than for a wheel
included with the equipment. change, a garage jack or hoist is recom-
mended. Always follow the instructions for
use provided with the equipment.

614 * Option/accessory.
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

WARNING • Never crawl under or allow any part of 3. Place chocks in front of and behind the
your body to be extended under a vehi- wheels that are still on the ground. For
• Apply the parking brake and put the cle supported by a jack. example, use heavy wooden blocks or
gear selector in the Park (P) position. large stones.
• Block the wheels standing on the 4. Position the jack or garage lift arms at the
ground, use rigid wooden blocks or WARNING designated points under the vehicle. The
large stones. If the vehicle is lifted on a garage jack, the triangle markings on the plastic cover indi-
• Check that the jack is not damaged, jack must be placed under one of the four cate where the jack attachment points/lift-
the threads are properly lubricated and lifting points. Make sure that the vehicle is ing points are located. There are two jack
it is free from dirt. correctly positioned on the jack and that it
attachment points on each side of the
cannot slide off. Make sure the jack plate
• Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non- has a rubber pad to help keep the vehicle vehicle. There is a groove for the jack at
slippery surface and that it is upright stable and prevent damage. Always use each attachment point.
and not leaning. axle stands or similar.
• The jack must correctly engage in the
jack attachment. When not in use, the jack* should be kept in
its storage compartment under the cargo
• No objects should be placed between
compartment floor.
the base of the jack and the ground, or
between the jack and the attachment Read through all instructions before starting.
bar on the vehicle. Before raising the vehicle using a jack or lift,
Never let anyone remain in the vehicle take out all the tools you will need.
•
when it is raised on a jack. 1. Turn on the vehicle's hazard warning
• If a tire must be changed near passing flashers if e.g. a wheel change must be
traffic, make sure all passengers move performed in an area with traffic.
to a safe location. 2. Apply the parking brake and put the gear
5. Position the jack under the attachment
• Use a jack intended for the vehicle selector in P, or first gear if the vehicle has
point being used, ensuring that the sur-
when changing a tire. For any other a manual transmission.
face is firm, flat and not slippery.
job, use stands to support the vehicle. If the vehicle is equipped with Leveling
Control*, this feature must be turned off
before the vehicle is lifted onto a tow
truck.
}}

* Option/accessory. 615
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| 6. Crank it up until it is properly aligned and

it is in contact with the vehicle's jack
attachment point. Make sure the top of
the jack (or the garage lift arms) is cor-
rectly positioned in the attachment point,
with the bump on the top of the jack in the
recess in the attachment point and its
base positioned vertically under the
attachment point.
7. Turn the jack so that the crank is as far as
possible from the side of the vehicle,
which will position the jack's arms per-
pendicular to the vehicle's direction of
movement.
8. Raise the vehicle to a suitable height for
the operation to be performed.

Related information
• Jack* (p. 575)
• Wheel bolts (p. 575)
• Tool kit (p. 574)
• Leveling control settings* (p. 448)

616 * Option/accessory.
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Climate control system service Replacing a windshield with head- Opening and closing the hood
Service and repairs on the air conditioning up display* To open the hood, pull the lever in the pas-
system should only be done by an authorized Vehicles with a head-up display have a spe- senger compartment and then turn the han-
workshop. cial type of windshield that meets the dle under the hood.
requirements for displaying projected infor-
Troubleshooting and repairs mation. Opening the hood
The air conditioning system contains a fluores- Volvo recommends contacting an authorized
cent tracer substance. Ultraviolet light is used Volvo workshop for assistance replacing the
to search for leaks in the system. windshield. The correct type of replacement
Volvo recommends contacting an authorized windshield must be used in order for the head-
Volvo workshop. up display to function properly.
The climate system in the vehicle uses a freon- Related information
free R1234yf refrigerant. For information • Head-up display* (p. 146)
regarding the refrigerant, refer to the decal
• Cleaning the head-up display* and instru-
located on the inside of the hood.
ment panel (p. 650)

WARNING
The air conditioning system contains the Pull the handle to the left of the brake
refrigerant R1234yf under pressure. In pedal to release the hood from its fully
accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician
closed position.
Training for Safe Service and Containment
of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C Sys-
tem), service and repairs to the refrigerant
system may only be performed by trained
and certified technicians in order to ensure
the safety of the system.

Related information
• Volvo's service program (p. 606)

}}

* Option/accessory. 617
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Closing the hood

1. Press down the hood until it begins to
close under its own weight.
2. When the hood reaches the catch at the
handle in the front edge of the vehicle,
press down on the hood to close it com-
pletely.

WARNING
Risk of injury! When closing, make sure
that the hood is completely unobstructed
and that no one can be injured. Hood completely closed.
Swipe your hand from left to right under
the hood, grasp the handle and move it up
and to the side to release the catch and lift WARNING WARNING
the hood. Make sure the hood locks securely after Never drive with the hood
closing. It must audibly lock on both sides. open!
Warning - hood not closed If this symbol appears, or
When the hood is released, a warn- anything else indicates
ing symbol and graphic will be dis- that the hood is not com-
played in the instrument panel and pletely closed while driv-
an audible signal will sound. If the ing, stop immediately and
vehicle begins to roll, the audible signal will be close it properly.
repeated several times.
Related information
NOTE • Engine compartment overview (p. 619)
If the warning symbol is illuminated or an • Door and seat belt reminders (p. 54)
audible warning signal sounds even though
the hood is securely closed, consult a
workshop - an authorized Volvo workshop
is recommended. Hood not completely closed.

618
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Engine compartment overview

This overview shows some service-related
components.
Some of the components included in the vehi-
cle's electric drive system are located in the
engine compartment. Exercise caution when
accessing the engine compartment and only
touch what is required for normal mainte-
nance.

WARNING
Orange wiring may only be handled by The layout of the engine compartment may vary Location of warning decal for the engine compart-
qualified personnel. depending on model and engine variant. ment. The layout of the engine compartment may
vary depending on model and engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
WARNING
Brake fluid reservoir (located on the driv- NOTE
A number of electrical components in Twin er's side)
Engine Plug-in Hybrid vehicles use high- The decals shown in the Owner's Manual
voltage current and can be extremely dan- Washer fluid filler pipe do not claim to be exact reproductions of
gerous if handled incorrectly. those found in the vehicle. The purpose is
Fusebox
• Do not touch anything that is not to show approximately how they look and
clearly described in this Owner's Man- Air filter about where they are located on the vehi-
ual. cle. The information that applies for your
Engine oil filler pipe vehicle in particular is found on the decal
• Be careful when checking/filling fluids on the vehicle.
in the engine compartment.

}}

619
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| WARNING Engine oil If the engine oil is not checked regularly and
For the recommended service intervals and the level becomes low, this could cause seri-
Bear in mind that the cooling fan (located ous engine damage.
at the front of the engine compartment warranties to be applied, an approved engine
behind the radiator) may start or continue oil must be used.
running automatically up to about NOTE
6 minutes after the engine is turned off. The decals shown in the Owner's Manual
Always entrust engine washing to a work- do not claim to be exact reproductions of
shop – an authorized Volvo workshop is those found in the vehicle. The purpose is
recommended. If the engine is hot, there is to show approximately how they look and
a risk of fire.
about where they are located on the vehi-
cle. The information that applies for your
WARNING vehicle in particular is found on the decal
on the vehicle.
The ignition system works with extremely
high and dangerous voltages. The vehicle
electrical system should always be in igni-
tion mode 0 when work in being per-
Location of warning decal for the engine compart-
formed in the engine compartment.
ment. The layout of the engine compartment may
Do not touch any spark plugs or ignition vary depending on model and engine variant.
coils when the vehicle electrical system is
in ignition mode II or when the engine is Volvo recommends:
warm.

Related information
• Opening and closing the hood (p. 617)
• Filling washer fluid (p. 666)
• Refilling coolant (p. 623)
• Fuses in the engine compartment
(p. 630)
• Checking and filling engine oil (p. 621)
• Ignition modes (p. 419)

620
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

CAUTION and display messages are used to alert the Checking and filling engine oil
driver. Some engine variants have both sys- The engine oil level is monitored by an elec-
To satisfy the requirements for the engine's tems. Contact a Volvo retailer for more infor- tronic oil level sensor.
service intervals, all engines are factory- mation.
filled with a specially adapted synthetic Viewing oil level in the center display
engine oil. Great care has been put into the Change the engine oil and oil filter according
choice of oil, with consideration given to to the schedule specified in the Warranty and
service life, startability, fuel consumption Maintenance Records Information booklet.
and environmental impact. Oils of a higher grade than that specified may
be used. If the vehicle is driven in adverse con-
For the recommended service intervals to ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil with a
apply, an approved engine oil must be higher grade than that specified.
used. Only use the prescribed oil grade to
top off or change the oil. Otherwise, there Related information
is a risk of the vehicle's service life, starta- • Checking and filling engine oil (p. 621)
bility, fuel consumption and environmental • Engine oil specifications (p. 678)
impact being affected.
• Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)
Failure to use engine oil of the prescribed
Example of the oil level graphic in the center display
grade and viscosity could cause damage to
engine-related components. Volvo dis- The oil level can be viewed using the elec-
claims warranty liability for such type of tronic oil level gauge in the center display once
damage. the vehicle has been started. The oil level
should be checked regularly.
Volvo recommends entrusting oil changes
to an authorized Volvo workshop. 1. Open the Car Status app from App view
in the center display.
Symbols for low oil level 2. Tap Status to display the oil level.
Volvo uses different systems to warn if the oil
level is too low/high or the oil pressure is low.
For oil pressure sensors, a warning symbol is
displayed in the instrument panel when oil
pressure is low . For oil level sensors, the
warning symbol in the instrument panel
}}

621
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| NOTE Filling engine oil WARNING

The system cannot directly detect changes Do not spill oil on the hot exhaust pipes as
when the oil is filled or drained. The vehicle this could cause a fire.
must have been driven approximately
30 km (20 miles) and have been stationary
CAUTION
5 minutes on a level surface and with the
engine off before the correct oil level will If the messageEngine oil level low Refill
be displayed. 1 liter is displayed, fill only with the speci-
fied volume, e.g. 1 liter (1 quart).

NOTE
Related information
If the conditions for measuring oil level are • Engine oil (p. 620)
not properly fulfilled (time after engine
Filler pipe12,13 • Engine oil specifications (p. 678)
shutdown, vehicle inclination, ambient
temperature, etc.) the message No value It may be necessary to top up engine oil • Ignition modes (p. 419)
available will be shown in the center dis- between regularly scheduled services. No Vehicle status (p. 611)
•
play. This does not mean that anything is action is necessary with regard to engine oil
level until a message appears in the instru- • Contacting Volvo (p. 26)
wrong in the vehicle systems.
ment panel.

CAUTION WARNING
If this symbol is shown, the oil If the message Engine oil level Service
pressure may be too low. Stop required is displayed, drive to a workshop
the vehicle as soon as possible – an authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
and have it towed to a workshop mended. The oil level may be too high.
– an authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.

12 Engines with an electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.

13 The layout of the engine compartment may vary depending on model and engine variant.

622
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Coolant Refilling coolant

The coolant helps ensure that excess heat is When refilling coolant, follow the instructions
distributed in the circuit in order to, for exam- on the package. Never fill the cooling system
ple, warm up the start battery or provide with only water. The risk of freezing is
heating to the passenger compartment. increased with too low or too high amounts
To avoid deterioration of the cooling system, of coolant.
engine trouble, etc., only approved Volvo cool- If there is coolant under the vehicle, smoke
ant should be used. from the cooling system, or if more than
2 liters (about 2 quarts) of coolant has been
Recommended grade: Volvo-approved pre-
added to the system, there could be some-
mixed coolant. If concentrated coolant is used,
thing wrong with the cooling system and star-
mix with 50% water of acceptable quality (i.e.
ting the vehicle could damage the engine. Call
not salt water, etc.). Consult a Volvo retailer if
a tow truck and do not attempt to start the Coolant expansion tank, left-hand drive vehicle
you have any questions.
engine.
To avoid deterioration of the cooling system,
engine trouble, etc., only approved Volvo cool- WARNING
ant should be used.
The coolant may be very hot. Never
unscrew the cap when the coolant is hot. If
WARNING coolant must be filled, unscrew the expan-
Coolant is hazardous if ingested and could sion tank cap slowly to relieve overpres-
cause damage to organs (kidneys). The sure.
product contains ethylene glycol, inhibitor,
water, etc.

Related information
• Refilling coolant (p. 623)

}}

623
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Unscrew the cover in the plastic covering. Related information

• Engine compartment overview (p. 619)
Unscrew the expansion tank cap and fill
• Coolant (p. 623)
coolant as needed. The level should not
exceed the yellow MAX mark inside the
expansion tank.
Put the components back in place in the
reverse order.

CAUTION
• Do not ingest the contents. May cause
damage to organs (kidneys).
• Use premixed coolant according to
Volvo's recommendations. If concen-
trated coolant is used, make sure that
the coolant mixture is 50% coolant
and 50% water of acceptable quality.
• Do not mix different types of coolant.
• To help ensure sufficient corrosion pro-
tection in the system, only use new
coolant when replacing larger compo-
nents in the cooling system.
• Never run the engine unless the cool-
ing system is properly filled. An
improperly filled cooling system could
lead to high temperatures and cracks
in the cylinder heads.
• High levels of chlorine, chlorides and
other salts may cause corrosion in the
cooling system.

624
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Starter battery WARNING further limits starting capacity. If the starter

The starter battery is used to start the electri- battery becomes discharged too many times,
• Batteries generate hydrogen gas, its service life will be shortened.
cal system and power electrical equipment in
which is flammable and explosive.
the vehicle. The hybrid battery is used to start To help keep the starter battery in good condi-
the combustion engine. • Do not connect the jumper cable to tion, the vehicle should be driven at least
The vehicle has a single-pole electrical system any part of the fuel system or to any 15 minutes per week or the battery should be
that uses the chassis and engine mount as moving parts. Avoid touching hot connected to a battery charger with automatic
conductors. manifolds. trickle charging. A starter battery that is
The starter battery is a 12 V AGM (Absorbed • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do always kept fully charged has the maximum
Glass Mat) battery, dimensioned for regenera- not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, service life.
tive charging and to support the function of skin, fabrics or painted surfaces.
Location
the vehicle's various systems. • If contact occurs, flush the affected
area immediately with water. Obtain
The service life and performance of the starter
medical help immediately if eyes are
battery are affected by factors such as driving
affected.
style, driving conditions, climate, battery dis-
charges, number of starts, etc. • Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark. Do not smoke near
• Never disconnect the starter battery while
the battery. Failure to follow the
the engine is running.
instructions for jump starting can lead
• Make sure the cables to the starter battery to injury.
are correctly connected and the clamps
are securely tightened.
Starter battery service life and
capacity
The service life of the starter battery is affec- The starter battery is located in the cargo compart-
ted by several factors, such as number of ment.
starts, battery discharges, driving style, driving
conditions, climate, etc. The starting capacity
of the battery reduces gradually over time. The
battery must therefore be recharged if the
vehicle is not used for a long period of time or
if it is only driven short distances. Severe cold
}}

625
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| WARNING CAUTION
If the starter battery is disconnected, the On certain models, the battery is secured
function for automatic opening and closing with a tensioning strap. Make sure that the
must be reset to function correctly. A reset tensioning strap is always securely tight-
is required in order for the pinch protection ened.
to work.

Specifications for starter battery

Battery type H8 AGM
Voltage (V) 12

Cold start capacityA - CCAB (A) 850

Dimensions, L×W×H 353×175×190 mm (13.9×6.9×7.5 inches)

Capacity (Ah) 95
A According to EN standard.
B Cold Cranking Amperes.

Volvo recommends that batteries are replaced Related information

by an authorized Volvo workshop. • Battery symbols (p. 627)
• Hybrid battery (p. 627)
CAUTION Jump starting using another battery
•
If replacing the battery, make sure you (p. 465)
replace it with a battery of the same size, Reset procedure for pinch protection
•
cold start capacity and type as the original (p. 171)
battery (see the decal on the battery).
• Battery recycling (p. 628)

626
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Hybrid battery Battery symbols

The vehicle's electric motor is powered by a There are warning symbols and information
rechargeable, maintenance-free, lithium-ion on the batteries.
hybrid battery.
NOTE
The vehicle cannot be started if the hybrid Wear protective goggles.
battery is discharged.

If both the starter battery and the hybrid bat-

tery are discharged, both batteries must be
charged. In this situation, it is not possible to
See the Owner's Manual
first charge only the hybrid battery. The starter
for additional information.
battery must have a certain charge level in CAUTION
order for the hybrid battery to be charged.
Filling the hybrid battery coolant should
only be performed by a workshop – an
WARNING authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
Hybrid battery replacement may only be mended. Keep batteries away from
performed by a workshop – an authorized children.
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Specifications for hybrid battery
Type: Lithium-ion
Hybrid battery service life and
capacity Power reserve: 11.6 kWh.
The capacity of the hybrid battery decreases Related information Batteries contain corro-
with age and use, which could result in Battery symbols (p. 627)
• sive acid.
increased use of the combustion engine and
thereby higher fuel consumption and reduced • Starter battery (p. 625)
electric motor range. • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 395)
• Battery recycling (p. 628)
Coolant
The hybrid battery's cooling system has its
own expansion tank.
}}

627
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Battery recycling Fuses and fuseboxes

Start batteries must be recycled in an envi- All electrical functions and components are
Avoid smoking, open ronmentally sound manner at the end of their protected by a number of fuses in order to
flames, and/or sparks. service life. protect the vehicle's electrical system from
Consult a workshop if you are uncertain of damage by short circuiting or overloading.
how to dispose of this type of waste ‒ an WARNING
authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with a
Related information higher amperage than that specified to
Risk of explosion. • Starter battery (p. 625) replace a fuse. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system and possi-
• Hybrid battery (p. 627) bly lead to a fire.
• Battery symbols (p. 627)
WARNING
Orange wiring may only be handled by
Recycle properly. qualified personnel.

WARNING
A number of electrical components in Twin
Related information Engine Plug-in Hybrid vehicles use high-
• Starter battery (p. 625) voltage current and can be extremely dan-
• Hybrid battery (p. 627) gerous if handled incorrectly.
• Battery recycling (p. 628) Do not touch anything that is not clearly
described in the vehicle's Owner's Manual.

If any electrical component or function is not

responding, the component may have blown a
fuse due to temporary overload. If the same
fuse blows repeatedly, there may be a prob-
lem with the component. Volvo recommends
contacting an authorized Volvo workshop to
have the component checked.

628
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Location of fuseboxes Replacing fuses Related information

All electrical functions and components are • Fuses and fuseboxes (p. 628)
protected by a number of fuses in order to • Fuses in the cargo compartment (p. 643)
protect the vehicle's electrical system from
• Fuses in the engine compartment
damage by short circuiting or overloading.
(p. 630)
1. Refer to the fuse diagram to locate the • Fuses under the glove compartment
fuse. (p. 637)

2. Pull out the fuse and examine it from the

side to determine if the curved metal wire
in the fuse is intact.
3. If the wire is broken, replace the fuse with
The illustration is generic - appearance may vary a new fuse of the same color and amper-
according to vehicle model. age.

Engine compartment
WARNING
Under the glove compartment Never use a foreign object or a fuse with a
higher amperage than that specified to
Trunk/cargo compartment replace a fuse. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system and possi-
Related information bly lead to a fire.
• Replacing fuses (p. 629)
• Fuses in the cargo compartment (p. 643) WARNING
• Fuses in the engine compartment Contact an authorized Volvo workshop for
(p. 630) assistance replacing fuses not listed in the
Fuses under the glove compartment Owner's Manual. If fuse replacement is
• performed incorrectly, significant damage
(p. 637)
can be caused to the electrical system.

629
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Fuses in the engine compartment

The fuses in the engine compartment help
protect electrical components such as engine
and brake functions.

630
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Fuse pliers are provided on the inside of the There are also spaces for several extra fuses in Positions
fuse box cover to assist in removing and the fusebox. There is a decal with a diagram of the loca-
inserting fuses. tions of the fuses on the inside of the cover.

Function Ampere Type

– – Micro

– – Micro

– – Micro

Control module for actuator for engaging/changing gears, automatic transmission 5 Micro

High-voltage coolant heater control module 5 Micro

Control module for A/C; heat exchanger cut-off valve; cut-off valve for coolant through the climate system 5 Micro

Hybrid battery control module; high-voltage converter for combined high-voltage generator/starter motor with 500 V– 5 Micro
12 V voltage converter
– – Micro

Converter for controlling feed to rear axle electric motor 10 Micro

Hybrid battery control module; high-voltage converter for combined high-voltage generator/starter motor with 500 V– 10 Micro
12 V voltage converter
Charge module 5 Micro

Cut-off valve for hybrid battery coolant; coolant pump 1 for hybrid battery 15 Micro

Coolant pump for electric drive system 15 Micro

}}

631
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Function Ampere Type

Hybrid component cooling fan 25 MCaseA

– – MCaseA

– – MCaseA

– – MCaseA

Calculation module 5 Micro

– – Micro

– – Micro

– – Micro

– – Micro

Front USB port in tunnel console, front* 7.5 Micro

12 V outlet in tunnel console, front 15 Micro

– – Micro

12 V outlet in trunk/cargo compartment* 15 Micro

– – Micro

Driver-side headlight, LEDB 15 Micro

Passenger-side headlight, LEDB 15 Micro

– – Micro

632 * Option/accessory.
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Function Ampere Type

– – MCaseA

– – MCaseA

Headlight washers* 25 MCaseA

Windshield washer 25 MCaseA

– – Micro

Horn 20 Micro

Alarm siren* 5 Micro

Brake system control module (valves, parking brake) 30 MCaseA

Wipers 30 MCaseA

Rear window washer 25 MCaseA

– – MCaseA

Parking heater* 20 MCaseA

– – MCaseA

– – MCaseA

– – MCaseA

Fed when ignition is on: Engine control module; transmission components, electrical power steering, central electrical 5 Micro
module

}}

* Option/accessory. 633
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Function Ampere Type

Exterior vehicle sound (certain markets) 5 Micro

Passenger-side headlight, LEDB 15 Micro

– – Micro

– – Micro

– – Micro

Airbags; Passenger weight sensor 5 Micro

Driver-side headlight, LEDB 15 Micro

Accelerator pedal sensor 5 Micro

Transmission control module; gear selector control module 15 Micro

Engine control module 5 Micro

– – Micro

– – Micro

– – Micro

– – Micro

Engine control module; actuator; throttle unit; turbo-charger valve 20 Micro

Solenoids, Fuel leakage control valve; Overpressure coupling 10 Micro

Vacuum regulator; Electric bypass valve: Ventilation valve 7.5 Micro

634
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Function Ampere Type

Spoiler damper control module; Cooler damper control module 5 Micro
Fuel leakage control pump
– – Micro

Heated oxygen sensor front and rear 15 Micro

Oil pump solenoid; A/C magnetic coupling; Heated oxygen sensor front, center and rear 15 Micro

– – Micro

Engine control module 20 Micro

Ignition coils; spark plugs 15 Micro

– – MCaseA

– – MCaseA

Transmission oil pump control module 30 MCaseA

– – MCaseA

– – MCaseA

– – MCaseA

– – MCaseA

– – MCaseA
A This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
B LED (Light Emitting Diode)

}}

635
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Related information
• Fuses and fuseboxes (p. 628)
• Replacing fuses (p. 629)

636
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Fuses under the glove

compartment
Fuses under the glove compartment provide
protection for e.g. electrical outlets, displays
and door modules.

}}

637
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

||

Fuse pliers are provided on the inside of the There are also spaces for several extra fuses in Positions
fuse box cover to assist in removing and the distribution box in the engine compart- There is a decal with a diagram of the loca-
inserting fuses. ment. tions of the fuses on the inside of the cover.

638
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Function Ampere Type

Medium voltage moduleA 10 Micro

– – MCaseB

– – Micro

Movement sensor* 5 Micro

– – Micro

Instrument panel 5 Micro

Center console buttons 5 Micro

Sun sensor 5 Micro

– – Micro

– – Micro

Steering wheel module 5 Micro

Module for start knob and parking brake controls 5 Micro

Heated steering wheel* module 15 Micro

– – Micro

– – Micro

– – Micro

– – Micro

}}

* Option/accessory. 639
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Function Ampere Type

Climate system control module 10 Micro

– – Micro

Data link connector OBD-II 10 Micro

Center display 5 Micro

Climate system blower module (front) 40 MCaseB

USB HUB 5 Micro

Instrument lighting; Interior lighting; Rearview mirror auto-dim function*; Rain and light sensors*; Rear tunnel console 7.5 Micro
keypad, rear seat*; Power front seats*; Rear door control panels; Climate system blower module left/right
Control module for driver support functions 5 Micro

Panoramic roof with sun curtain* 20 Micro

Head-up display* 5 Micro

Passenger compartment lighting 5 Micro

Wireless charging pad 5 Micro

Ceiling console display (seat belt reminder/front passenger side airbag indicator) 5 Micro

– – Micro

– – Micro

– – Micro

640 * Option/accessory.
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Function Ampere Type

– – Micro

Control module for Internet-connected vehicle; Control module for Volvo On Call 5 Micro

– – Micro

Infotainment control module (amplifier) 40 MCaseB

– – MCaseB

Multi-band antenna module 5 Micro

Front seat massage function* 5 Micro

– – Micro

Rear window wiper 15 Micro

Fuel pump control module 15 Micro

Relay coil for transmission oil pump 5 Micro

Converter medium voltage; Integrated starter motor
Opening trunk/tailgate with foot movement* 5 Micro

Driver's seat heating 15 Micro

Front passenger's seat heating 15 Micro

Coolant pump 7.5 Micro

– – Micro

}}

* Option/accessory. 641
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Function Ampere Type

Power driver's seat* 20 Micro

Active chassis control module* 20 Micro

– – Micro

Sensus control module 10 Micro

– – MCaseB

– – Micro

Power front passenger seat* 20 Micro

– – Micro

TV* (certain markets only) 5 Micro

Primary fuse for fuses 52, 53, 57 and 58 15 Micro

A Vehicles with 48 V support battery only.
B This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information
• Fuses and fuseboxes (p. 628)
• Replacing fuses (p. 629)

642 * Option/accessory.
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Fuses in the cargo compartment

The fuses in the cargo compartment help pro-
tect electrical components such as the power
seats*, airbags and seat belt tensioners.

}}

* Option/accessory. 643
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

||

The fuse box is located on the right-hand side.

Fuse pliers are provided on the inside of the There are also spaces for several extra fuses in
fuse box cover to assist in removing and the distribution box in the engine compart-
inserting fuses. ment.

644
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Positions
Function Ampere Type
– – MCaseA

Central electrical module 40 MCaseA

Pneumatic suspension* compressor 40 MCaseA

– – MCaseA

– – MCaseA

– – MCaseA

Door module right side, rear 20 MCaseA

– – MCaseA
– –
– –
Power tailgate* 25 MCaseA

Power front passenger seat* 20 MCaseA

Door module right side, front
Towbar* control module 40 MCaseA

Seat belt tensioner module (right side) 40 MCaseA

Internal relay windings 5 Micro

}}

* Option/accessory. 645
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Function Ampere Type

– – Micro
– –
Door module left side, rear 20 Micro

USB hub/accessory port 5 Micro

– – Micro

Towbar* control module 25 MCaseA

Accessory module 40
Power driver seat* 20 MCaseA
Door module left side, front
Seat belt tensioner module (left side) 40 MCaseA

Park Assist Camera* 5 Micro

– – Micro

– – Micro

– – Micro

Feed when ignition is on 10 Micro

– – Micro

– – Micro

Heated rear seat (left side)* 15 Micro

646 * Option/accessory.
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Function Ampere Type

– – Micro

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* 5 Micro

Exterior reverse signal control module
– – Micro

Seat belt tensioner module, right 5 Micro

Emissions system actuator (gasoline, certain engine variants) 5 Micro

– – Micro

All Wheel Drive (AWD) control module* 15 Micro

Heated rear seat (right side)* 15 Micro

– – MCaseA
A This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information
• Fuses and fuseboxes (p. 628)
• Replacing fuses (p. 629)

* Option/accessory. 647
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Replacing bulbs NOTE Cleaning the interior

This vehicle is equipped with only LED15 Use cleaning agents and car care products
Bulbs for Active Bending Lights* contain
lights, which means it does not have any recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
traces of mercury and should therefore
replaceable bulbs. Contact a workshop14 if treat stains immediately. It is important to
always be deposited at an authorized Volvo
you experience any problems with the light- vacuum before using a cleaning agent.
workshop.
ing. CAUTION
If there is a problem with an LED15 light, the • Some colored clothing (for example,
entire lamp unit will normally need to be dark jeans and suede garments) may
replaced. stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is
NOTE important to clean and treat these
parts of the upholstery as soon as pos-
For information on lights not mentioned in sible.
the Owner's Manual, contact a Volvo
retailer or an authorized Volvo workshop. • Never use strong solvents such as
washer fluid, gasoline, mineral spirit or
concentrated alcohol to clean the inte-
NOTE rior as this can damage the upholstery
as well as other interior materials.
Exterior lighting such as headlights and
taillights may develop temporary conden- • Never spray cleaning agent directly
sation on the inside of the lens. This is nor- onto components that have electrical
mal. All exterior lighting is designed to buttons and controls. Wipe instead
resist this. Condensation is normally ven- with a damp cloth with cleaning agent.
ted out of the lamp housing once the light • Sharp objects and Velcro can damage
has been lit for some period of time. the car's textile upholstery.
• Only use cleaning agent on the type of
material it is intended for.

15 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

14 An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

648 * Option/accessory.
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Related information Cleaning the center display CAUTION

• Cleaning the center display (p. 649) Marks, stains, finger smudges etc. on the
The microfiber cloth must be free of sand
• Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner center display may affect its performance and
and dirt when cleaning the center display.
(p. 650) readability. Clean the screen regularly with a
microfiber cloth.
• Cleaning the seat belt (p. 651)
CAUTION
• Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats
(p. 652) When cleaning the center display, apply
only light pressure to the screen. Pressing
• Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 652)
too hard could damage the screen.
• Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 653)
• Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood CAUTION
surfaces (p. 654) Do not spray liquid or corrosive chemicals
directly onto the center display. Do not use
window cleaners, cleaning agents, aerosol
sprays, solvents, alcohol, ammonia or
detergents that contain abrasives.
1. Turn off the center display by pressing and
Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or
holding the Home button.
tissue paper, as these may scratch the cen-
2. Wipe the screen clean with the microfiber ter display.
cloth provided or use another microfiber
cloth of similar quality. Wipe the screen
Related information
with a clean, dry microfiber cloth using
• Cleaning the interior (p. 648)
small, circular motions. If necessary, mois-
ten the cloth slightly. • Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
(p. 650)
3. Reactivate the display by pressing the
Home button briefly. • Cleaning the seat belt (p. 651)
• Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats
(p. 652)
• Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 652)

}}

* Option/accessory. 649
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

• Cleaning the leather steering wheel Cleaning the head-up display* and Cleaning fabric upholstery and
(p. 653) instrument panel ceiling liner
• Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood Carefully wipe the glass covering the head-up Use of textile cleaner is recommended when
surfaces (p. 654) display unit with a clean and dry microfiber cleaning textile materials. Clean as needed
cloth. If necessary, the cloth may be slightly and treat stains immediately.
moistened. CAUTION
Never use strong stain removers. For difficult
cleaning conditions, a special cleaning agent Never scrape or rub a stain because this
can be purchased at a Volvo retailer. may damage the upholstery.

Related information
• Activating and deactivating the head-up CAUTION
display* (p. 148) Never use stain removers or strong sol-
• Head-up display* (p. 146) vents because these may damage the
upholstery.

Cleaning textile upholstery

1. Start by vacuuming the upholstery.
2. Follow the instructions of the textile
cleaner.
3. When cleaning upholstery, a spray extrac-
tion cleaner is recommended for sucking
up cleaning fluids and rinse water.

CAUTION
Certain dyed clothing (such as denim and
suede garments) may stain the upholstery.
Difficult stains, like oil, can be difficult to
remove.

650 * Option/accessory.
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

CAUTION • Cleaning the leather steering wheel Cleaning the seat belt
(p. 653) Use cleaning agents and car care products
Always clean all of the upholstery, even if it
• Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
only has isolated stains. This helps to pre-
surfaces (p. 654) treat stains immediately. It is important to
vent permanent water rings.
vacuum before using a cleaning agent.
Use water and a synthetic soap solution. Spe-
NOTE cially designed textile cleaning agents are
available for purchase at Volvo retailers. Make
Do not remove the upholstery when clean- sure the belt is dry before it is retracted.
ing.
Related information
Cleaning the ceiling liner • Cleaning the interior (p. 648)
1. Carefully brush the ceiling liner using a • Cleaning the center display (p. 649)
soft brush. • Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
2. Follow the instructions of the textile (p. 650)
cleaner. • Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats
3. Then use a soft, lint-free cloth to wipe the (p. 652)
ceiling liner. • Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 652)
• Cleaning the leather steering wheel
CAUTION (p. 653)
Failure to take care during cleaning could • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
lead to damage to the ceiling liner. surfaces (p. 654)

Related information
• Cleaning the interior (p. 648)
• Cleaning the center display (p. 649)
• Cleaning the seat belt (p. 651)
• Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats
(p. 652)
• Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 652)

* Option/accessory. 651
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Cleaning textile floor and inlay WARNING Cleaning leather upholstery*

mats Use cleaning agents and car care products
• Never use more than one inlay mat at a
Use of textile cleaner is recommended when recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
time on the driver's floor. If any other
cleaning textile mats. Clean regularly and treat stains immediately. It is important to
type of floor mat is used, remove the
treat stains immediately. It is important to vacuum before using a cleaning agent.
original mat from the driver's seat floor
vacuum before using a cleaning agent.
before driving. All types of mats must
Remove the inlay mats to clean the floor mats Volvo's leather upholstery* is treated to pro-
be securely anchored in the attach-
and inlay mats separately. Each inlay mat is tect its original appearance. Over time, sun-
ment points in the floor. Make sure the
secured into place with pins. light, grease, dirt, etc. could break down the
floor mat does not impede the move-
protective layer. This could result in scratches
1. Remove the inlay mat by grasping the ment of the brake pedal or accelerator
and cracking.
inlay mat at each pin and lifting the mat pedal in any way, as this could be a
straight up. serious safety hazard. Leather upholstery* is a natural product that
Volvo's floor mats are specially manu- changes and acquires a beautiful patina over
2. Use a vacuum to remove dust and dirt. •
factured for your vehicle. They must be time. Regular cleaning and treatments are
properly secured in the attachment required to preserve the qualities and color of
NOTE the leather. Volvo offers a comprehensive
points in the floor to help ensure they
Do not swing or strike the inlay mats vio- cannot slide and become trapped product, Volvo Leather Care KitWipes, for
lently against another object to remove dirt under the pedals. cleaning and treating leather upholstery.
as this could damage the mats. When used as directed, it helps preserve the
leather's protective coating.
Related information
3. After vacuuming, a specially designed tex- Cleaning the interior (p. 648) For optimal results, Volvo recommends clean-
•
tile cleaning agent should be used to ing and applying protective cream one to four
remove stains on floor mats. • Cleaning the center display (p. 649) times a year (or more often as needed). Volvo
• Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Volvo Leather
4. After cleaning, put the inlay mat back into
(p. 650) Softener 943 7429 are available for purchase
place by pressing it in at each pin.
• Cleaning the seat belt (p. 651) at Volvo retailers.
• Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 652) Cleaning the leather upholstery
• Cleaning the leather steering wheel 1. Apply the leather cleaner to a damp
(p. 653) sponge and squeeze it until the cleaner
foams.
• Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
surfaces (p. 654)

652 * Option/accessory.
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

2. Move the sponge in circular motions to Cleaning the leather steering Type 3 (dry dirt or dust)
apply the foam to the stain. wheel 1. Remove the dirt/dust using a soft brush.
3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the Use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and 2. Same procedure as for Type 1 stains.
sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain
and do not rub. treat stains immediately. It is important to Related information
vacuum before using a cleaning agent. Cleaning the interior (p. 648)
4. Dry the stain using a soft towel and let the •
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather dry completely. leather steering wheel with a plastic protector. • Cleaning the center display (p. 649)

Protecting the leather upholstery Volvo Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather • Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
1. Apply a small amount of leather protector Softener 943 7429 are recommended for (p. 650)
to a cloth and then apply the protector to cleaning the leather steering wheel. First, • Cleaning the seat belt (p. 651)
the leather using light circular movements. remove dirt, dust, etc. with a damp sponge or
cloth. • Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats
2. Let it dry for approximately 20 minutes. (p. 652)
> Protecting the leather upholstery CAUTION • Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 652)
makes it better able to withstand sun- • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
light's harmful UV rays. Sharp objects such as rings could damage
surfaces (p. 654)
the leather on the steering wheel.
Related information
• Cleaning the interior (p. 648) Treating stains on the steering wheel:
• Cleaning the center display (p. 649) Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or blood)
• Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner – Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the
(p. 650) steering wheel using a solution of 5%
• Cleaning the seat belt (p. 651) ammonia. For blood stains, mix approxi-
mately 2 dl (1 cup) of water with 25 g
• Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats
(one ounce) of salt and wipe the stain.
(p. 652)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel Type 2 (grease, oil, sauces or chocolate)
•
(p. 653) 1. Same procedure as for Type 1 stains.
• Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood 2. Finish by wiping the wheel with an
surfaces (p. 654) absorbent paper or towel.

* Option/accessory. 653
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Cleaning interior plastic, metal and • Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats Cleaning the exterior
wood surfaces (p. 652) The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
Use cleaning agents and car care products • Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 652) becomes dirty. This makes the vehicle easier
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and Cleaning the leather steering wheel to clean because dirt does not attach as
•
treat stains immediately. (p. 653) strongly. It also reduces the risk of scratches
A lightly dampened microfiber cloth is recom- and keeps the vehicle looking new. Wash the
mended for cleaning interior details and surfa- rims at a car wash or garage with an oil sepa-
ces. These cloths are available for purchase at rator. Use a car washing detergent recom-
Volvo retailers. mended by Volvo.
Never scrape or rub a stain. Never use strong Related information
stain removers. • Cleaning the exterior (p. 654)
• Polishing and waxing (p. 655)
CAUTION
• Hand washing (p. 656)
Do not use solvent containing alcohol to
• Automatic car washes (p. 657)
clean the instrument panel glass.
• High-pressure washing (p. 658)
• Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 659)
CAUTION
• Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
Keep in mind that glossy surfaces can be components (p. 659)
easily scratched. Wipe these surfaces with
a clean and dry microfiber cloth using • Cleaning rims (p. 660)
small, circular motions. If necessary, mois- • Corrosion protection (p. 661)
ten the cloth lightly with clean water.

Related information
• Cleaning the interior (p. 648)
• Cleaning the center display (p. 649)
• Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
(p. 650)
• Cleaning the seat belt (p. 651)

654 * Option/accessory.
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Polishing and waxing CAUTION • Automatic car washes (p. 657)

Polish and wax the vehicle when the paint is • High-pressure washing (p. 658)
Never polish or wax initially matte exterior
dull or to provide extra protection. The vehicle Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 659)
details on the vehicle. This could destroy •
does not need to be polished until it is at
the matte effect and make the surface per- • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
least a year old. However, it can be waxed
manently shiny. components (p. 659)
during the first year. Do not polish or wax the
vehicle in direct sunlight. The surface of the • Cleaning rims (p. 660)
vehicle should not be warmer than 45 °C CAUTION • Corrosion protection (p. 661)
(113 °F).
• Wash and dry the vehicle very carefully Avoid waxing and polishing plastic and
before polishing or waxing. Remove rubber.
asphalt and tar stains with asphalt If using degreaser on plastic and rubber,
remover or paint thinner. More stubborn only rub (if necessary) with slight pressure.
stains can be removed with a grinding Use a soft sponge.
paste designed for vehicle paint. Use
Polishing glossy trim moldings can wear
cleaning agents recommended by Volvo.
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
• Use polish first and then liquid or paste
wax. Follow the instructions on the pack- Polish containing abrasives must not be
age carefully. Many products contain both used.
polish and wax.
• A wide range of polymer-based waxes can CAUTION
be purchased today. These waxes are easy
Use cleaning agents recommended by
to use and produce a long-lasting, high-
Volvo. Other treatments, such as preserva-
gloss finish that protects the bodywork
tion, sealing, protection, luster sealing or
against oxidation, road dirt and fading.
similar, could damage the paintwork.
Paintwork damage caused by such treat-
ments are not covered by Volvo's warranty.

Related information
• Cleaning the exterior (p. 654)
• Hand washing (p. 656)

655
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Hand washing • If necessary, use cold degreaser on heavily CAUTION

The vehicle should be washed as soon as it soiled surfaces. Note that in such cases
the surfaces must not be hot from the sun. Dirty headlights do not work as well. Clean
becomes dirty. This makes the vehicle easier
them regularly, e.g. when refueling.
to clean because dirt does not attach as • Wash using a sponge, car washing deter-
strongly. It also reduces the risk of scratches gent and plenty of lukewarm water. Make Do not use corrosive cleaners. Use water
and keeps the vehicle looking new. Wash the sure that the sponge is clean. A dirty and a non-abrasive sponge.
vehicle in a car wash or garage with an oil sponge can scratch the paint.
separator and use car washing detergent. Clean the wiper blades with lukewarm
• NOTE
Use cleaning agents and car care products soap solution or car washing detergent.
recommended by Volvo. Exterior lighting such as headlights and
• Dry the vehicle using a clean, soft chamois taillights may develop temporary conden-
Important to keep in mind when or a squeegee. Try not to let drops of sation on the inside of the lens. This is nor-
handwashing your vehicle water dry in strong sunlight. This could mal. All exterior lighting is designed to
• Avoid washing the vehicle in direct sun- cause water drying stains that may need resist this. Condensation is normally ven-
light. This could cause the detergent or to be polished out. ted out of the lamp housing once the light
wax to dry out and become abrasive. • In areas with heavy industrial emissions, has been lit for some period of time.
• Remove bird droppings from paintwork as more frequent washing of the vehicle's
soon as possible. It contains chemicals exterior is recommended.
that affect and discolor paintwork very CAUTION
• Tar spots from asphalt may remain even
quickly. Use e.g. soft paper or a sponge after washing. Use a Volvo-recommended • Make sure that the panoramic roof*
soaked in lots of water. Consult an author- tar remover to remove these spots after and sun shade are closed before wash-
ized Volvo workshop for assistance washing the vehicle. ing the vehicle.
removing discoloration. Never use abrasive polishing agents on
•
• Hose down the underbody, including the WARNING the panoramic roof.
wheel housings and bumper. Always entrust engine washing to a work- Never use wax on the rubber seals
•
• Hose down the entire vehicle and remove shop. If the engine is hot, there is a risk of around the panoramic roof.
any loose dirt, droppings etc. to reduce fire.
the risk of scratches from washing. Do not
spray directly onto locks.

656 * Option/accessory.
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

CAUTION Automatic car washes CAUTION

The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
Remember to remove dirt from the drain For automatic car washes in which the
becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains,
holes in the doors and sills after washing vehicle is pulled forward on rolling wheels:
the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle
the vehicle.
clean. It could also lead to paint damage. 1. Before washing the vehicle, make sure
that the automatic rain sensor is deac-
Related information Washing your vehicle in an automatic car tivated. If it is not deactivated and
• Cleaning the exterior (p. 654) wash is a fast and easy way to keep your vehi- inadvertently starts, the wiper arms
• Polishing and waxing (p. 655) cle clean, but it does not reach all areas of the could be damaged.
vehicle. Volvo recommends washing your 2. To help prevent damage from the auto-
• Automatic car washes (p. 657) vehicle by hand or supplementing automatic matic car wash machinery, make sure
• High-pressure washing (p. 658) car washes with a hand wash. that the door mirrors are folded in,
• Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 659) antennas retracted or removed, and
• Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim NOTE any auxiliary lights secured.
components (p. 659) Volvo recommends not washing the vehi- 3. Drive into the automatic car wash.
• Cleaning rims (p. 660) cle in an automatic car wash during the 4. Turn off the "Automatic Braking when
first few months; the paintwork on new Stationary" function using the but-
• Corrosion protection (p. 661)
vehicles takes some time to fully harden.
Settings for automatically activating the ton in the tunnel console.
•
parking brake (p. 427) 5. Turn off the "Automatic Parking Brake
CAUTION Application" function in the center dis-
Before driving the vehicle into a car wash, play's Top view.
deactivate the Automatic Braking when 6. Turn off the engine by turning the start
Stationary and Automatic Parking Brake knob in the tunnel console clockwise.
Application functions. If the functions are Hold the knob in position for at least
not deactivated, the brake system will 2 seconds.
seize when the vehicle is stationary and the The vehicle is now ready for the automatic
vehicle will not be able to roll. car wash.

}}

657
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| CAUTION Related information High-pressure washing

• Cleaning the exterior (p. 654) The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
The system will automatically change to P
• Polishing and waxing (p. 655) becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains,
mode if the above steps are not followed.
the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle
In P mode, the wheels are locked, which • Hand washing (p. 656)
clean. It could also lead to paint damage.
they should not be when the vehicle is • High-pressure washing (p. 658) Wash the vehicle in a car wash or garage
being washed in a car wash.
• Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 659) with an oil separator. Use a car washing
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim detergent recommended by Volvo.
•
NOTE components (p. 659) If washing the vehicle with a high-pressure
wash, use sweeping movements and keep the
Keep in mind that if the vehicle is equipped • Cleaning rims (p. 660) nozzle at least 30 cm (13 in.) from the vehicle.
with the keyless locking and unlocking Corrosion protection (p. 661) Do not spray directly onto locks.
•
function*, the doors and tailgate/trunk lid
may open when washing the vehicle if the • Auto-hold brakes (p. 428)
Related information
remote key is within range. • Settings for automatically activating the • Cleaning the exterior (p. 654)
parking brake (p. 427)
• Polishing and waxing (p. 655)
Testing the brakes • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
• Hand washing (p. 656)
(p. 258)
• Automatic car washes (p. 657)
WARNING
• Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 659)
Always test the brakes after washing the
vehicle, including the parking brake, to • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
ensure moisture and corrosion do not components (p. 659)
attach the brake pads and impair brake • Cleaning rims (p. 660)
functionality.
• Corrosion protection (p. 661)
Lightly depress the brake pedal from time to
time when driving long distances in rain or
slush. The heat from the friction will help
warm up and dry the brake pads. Do the same
after starting the vehicle in very damp or cold
weather.

658 * Option/accessory.
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Cleaning the wiper blades • Corrosion protection (p. 661) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber
The vehicle should be washed as soon as it and trim components
becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains, The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains,
clean. It could also lead to paint damage. the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle
Wash the vehicle in a car wash or garage clean. It could also lead to paint damage. Use
with an oil separator. Use a car washing a car washing detergent recommended by
detergent recommended by Volvo. Volvo.
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
as well as insects, ice etc. on the windshield, retailers is recommended for the cleaning and
shorten the service life of wiper blades. care of colored plastic parts, rubber and trim
When cleaning, put the wiper blades in the components, e.g. glossy trim. Follow the
service position. usage instructions for the cleaning agent care-
fully.

NOTE Avoid using car washing detergents with a pH

value lower than 3.5 or higher than 11.5. Doing
Wash the wiper blades and windshield so could result in the discoloring of anodized
regularly with a lukewarm soap solution or aluminum surfaces* (as shown in the illustra-
vehicle shampoo. Do not use strong sol- tions below). Abrasive polishing agents are not
vents. recommended for these areas (as shown in
the illustrations below).
Related information
• Cleaning the exterior (p. 654)
• Polishing and waxing (p. 655)
• Hand washing (p. 656)
• Automatic car washes (p. 657)
• High-pressure washing (p. 658)
• Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 659)
• Cleaning rims (p. 660)
}}

* Option/accessory. 659
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| CAUTION Cleaning rims

The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
Avoid washing the vehicle with cleaner
becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains,
with a pH value below 3.5 or above 11.5.
the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle
This could cause discoloration of anodized
clean. It could also lead to paint damage.
aluminum components like the roof rail and
Wash the rims at a car wash or garage with
around the side windows.
an oil separator. Use a car washing detergent
Never use metal polishing agent on ano- recommended by Volvo.
dized aluminum components. This could
cause discoloration and destroy the sur- Use a rim cleaning agent recommended by
face treatment. Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents could damage the
Components that should be washed with a cleaning
product with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5. Related information surface and stain the chromed aluminum rims.
• Cleaning the exterior (p. 654)
Related information
CAUTION • Polishing and waxing (p. 655)
• Cleaning the exterior (p. 654)
Avoid waxing and polishing plastic and • Hand washing (p. 656)
• Polishing and waxing (p. 655)
rubber. • Automatic car washes (p. 657)
• Hand washing (p. 656)
If using degreaser on plastic and rubber, • High-pressure washing (p. 658)
• Automatic car washes (p. 657)
only rub (if necessary) with slight pressure. • Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 659)
Use a soft sponge. • High-pressure washing (p. 658)
• Cleaning rims (p. 660)
• Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
Polishing glossy trim moldings can wear Corrosion protection (p. 661)
• components (p. 659)
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
• Cleaning rims (p. 660)
Polish containing abrasives must not be
used. • Corrosion protection (p. 661)

660
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Corrosion protection • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim Paintwork

Your vehicle is constructed with protection components (p. 659) The paintwork consists of multiple layers. It is
against corrosion. • Cleaning rims (p. 660) an important part of the vehicle's corrosion
Corrosion protection for the body consists of protection and therefore needs to be checked
modern metallic protective coatings on the regularly.
sheet metal, a high-quality painting process, The most common types of paint damage are
corrosion-protected and minimized metal minor stone chips, scratches and damage to
overlap, and shielding plastic components, e.g. the edges of fenders, doors and bumpers.
abrasion protection and supplemental rust To help prevent corrosion, paint damage
inhibitor in exposed areas. In the chassis, should be rectified immediately.
exposed components of the wheel suspension
are made of corrosion-resistant cast alumi- Related information
num. • Touching up minor paint damage (p. 662)
• Color codes (p. 663)
Inspection and maintenance
The corrosion protection does not normally
require maintenance, but keeping the vehicle
clean helps reduce the risk of corrosion. The
use of strong alkaline or acidic cleaning fluids
should be avoided on shiny body components.
Any stone chips in the paint should be
touched up as soon as they are discovered.

Related information
• Cleaning the exterior (p. 654)
• Polishing and waxing (p. 655)
• Hand washing (p. 656)
• Automatic car washes (p. 657)
• High-pressure washing (p. 658)
• Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 659)

661
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Touching up minor paint damage Applying touch-up paint to a damaged 2. Light sanding with a very fine-grained
The paintwork is an important part of the surface sandpaper or similar may be required
vehicle's corrosion protection and therefore before painting (e.g. if there are uneven
needs to be checked regularly. The most edges). Clean the area carefully to remove
common types of paint damage are minor dirt, grease, salts, etc. and let it dry.
stone chips, scratches and damage to e.g. 3. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it
the edges of fenders, doors and bumpers. with a small brush, toothpick or similar.
To help prevent corrosion, paint damage When the primer is dry, apply one or more
should be rectified immediately. coats of paint and then a clear coat, letting
the paint dry between each application.
NOTE If there is a longer scratch, follow the same
Make sure the surface is clean and dry procedure as above, but first mask off the sur-
before performing any touch-ups to the rounding area to protect the undamaged paint.
paint. The surface temperature should be
Touch-up pens/sticks and spray paint are
at least 15 °C (59 °F). If the damage has not reached all the way
available at Volvo retailers.
down to the metal, then touch-up paint can be
Materials that might be needed applied immediately after the surface has been
cleaned. NOTE
• Primer ‒ special adhesive primer is availa-
ble in a spray can for e.g. plastic-covered 1. Place a strip of masking tape over the If the stone chip has not gone down to the
bumpers. damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that bare metal and an undamaged coat of
any loose flakes of paint adhere to it. paint remains, apply base coat and clear
• Base coat and clear coat ‒ available in coat immediately after cleaning the sur-
spray cans or as a touch-up pen/stick16. If the damage goes down to the bare face.
• Masking tape. metal, you may need to use primer first. If
the paint damage is on a plastic surface,
• Fine-grain sandpaper. an adhesive primer should be used for bet- Related information
ter results. Spray the primer into the lid of • Paintwork (p. 661)
the spray can and brush on thinly. • Color codes (p. 663)

16 Follow the instructions on the packaging for the touch-up pen/stick carefully.

662
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Color codes Changing rear window wipers

The wiper blades help remove water from the
Color code windshield and rear window. Along with the
The color code decal is placed on the vehicle's washer fluid, they are designed to clean the
left-side door pillar (B-pillar) between the front glass and help improve visibility while driving.
and rear doors and is visible when the left The windshield and rear window wiper
front door is open. blades can be replaced.

Sample color code (1): Canadian models.

Exterior color code

Secondary exterior color code (if applica-

ble)

Related information
• Paintwork (p. 661)
Sample color code (1): US models.
• Touching up minor paint damage (p. 662)
Exterior color code

Secondary exterior color code (if applica-

ble)

}}

663
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Changing rear window wipers 3. Press the new wiper blade until it clicks Replacing windshield wiper blades
into place. Check to make sure the blade The wiper blades help remove water from the
is securely in place. windshield and rear window. Along with the
4. Fold the wiper arm back toward the win- washer fluid, they are designed to clean the
dow. glass and help improve visibility while driving.
The windshield and rear window wiper
blades can be replaced.
CAUTION
Check the blades regularly. Neglected
maintenance shortens the life of the
blades.

Related information
Lift the wiper arm from the window and pull the Using the rain sensor (p. 181)
lower section of the blade to the right.
•
• Using the windshield and headlight wash-
Grasp the center of the wiper blade and ers (p. 183)
lift it from the window to the stop posi-
tion. • Using automatic rear window wiping
when backing up (p. 185)
NOTE • Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
Raise the wiper arms to the service position.
sor's memory function (p. 182)
When the wiper arm is halfway folded out, Service position is activated/deactivated via
it will stop in a locking position that helps • Using the rear window wiper/washer the function view in the center display when
prevent the arm from falling back onto the (p. 184) the car is stationary and the windshield wipers
rear window. The wiper arm must be • Filling washer fluid (p. 666) are not on.
pulled past the locking position stop in • Putting the wiper blades in service posi- Put the wiper blade in removal position by
order to change the wiper blade. tion (p. 665) folding it out from the wiper arm until it
• Replacing windshield wiper blades clicks.
Grip the lower part of the blade and pull to (p. 664) Press and hold the lock button on the
the right until the blade loosens from the wiper blade attachment.
• Using the windshield wipers (p. 180)
arm.
• Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 180)

664
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

While holding the button down, pull the NOTE Putting the wiper blades in service
blade straight out, parallel with the wiper position
arm. When changing wiper blades, make sure
The windshield wiper blades must be in the
that the blades are of different lengths. The
4. Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks service (vertical) position for certain opera-
blade on the driver's side is longer than the
into place. tions, e.g. replacing the blades.
one on the passenger side.
5. Fold the blade back toward the arm until it
clicks into place. The blade is no longer in Related information
its removal position and can once again be • Using the rain sensor (p. 181)
moved.
• Using the windshield and headlight wash-
6. Check to make sure the wiper blade is ers (p. 183)
securely in place.
• Using automatic rear window wiping
7. Press the wiper blade back against the when backing up (p. 185)
windshield. Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
•
Wiper blades come in varying lengths sor's memory function (p. 182)
• Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 184) Windshield wipers in the service position.
• Filling washer fluid (p. 666) The windshield wipers must be in the service
• Putting the wiper blades in service posi- position when replacing, washing or lifting the
tion (p. 665) blades (e.g. to scrape ice or snow from the
windshield).
• Changing rear window wipers (p. 663)
• Using the windshield wipers (p. 180) CAUTION
• Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 180)
Before placing the wipers in service posi-
tion, ensure that they have not frozen to
the windshield.

}}

665
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Activating/deactivating service CAUTION Filling washer fluid

position Washer fluid is used to keep the headlights,
The service position can be activated/deacti- If the wiper arms in service position are
windshield and rear window clean. Washer
vated when the vehicle is stationary and the raised from the windshield, they must be
fluid containing anti-freeze should be used in
windshield wipers are switched off. Service folded back against the windscreen before
very cold weather (below-freezing tempera-
position is activated/deactivated via Function activating wiping, washing or rain sensor
tures).
view in the center display: as well as before departure. This is to pre-
vent scratching the paint on the hood.
Tap the Wiper Service
Position button. The indica-
Related information
tor light in the button will illu-
• Using the rain sensor (p. 181)
minate when service position
is activated. The wipers will • Using the windshield and headlight wash-
move to the service position ers (p. 183)
when activated. To deactivate • Using automatic rear window wiping
the service position, tap Wiper Service when backing up (p. 185)
Position once. The indicator light in the but-
• Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
ton will go out when service position is deacti-
sor's memory function (p. 182)
vated.
• Using the rear window wiper/washer
Fill washer fluid into the reservoir with the
The wiper blades will also move out of the (p. 184)
blue cover. The reservoir is used for the wind-
service position if: Filling washer fluid (p. 666)
• shield washer, tailgate window washer and
• The windshield wipers are turned on. • Replacing windshield wiper blades headlight washer*.
• The windshield washers are turned on. (p. 664)
• The rain sensor is activated. • Changing rear window wipers (p. 663) NOTE
• The vehicle begins moving. • Using the windshield wipers (p. 180) When there is approximately 1 liter (1 qt) of
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 180) washer fluid remaining, the message
•
Washer fluid Level low, refill and the
symbol will be displayed in the
instrument panel.

666 * Option/accessory.
 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Recommended grade: Washer fluid recom- • Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
mended by Volvo, with frost protection during sor's memory function (p. 182)
cold weather and temperatures below the • Using the rear window wiper/washer
freezing point. (p. 184)
• Putting the wiper blades in service posi-
CAUTION tion (p. 665)
Use Volvo's original washer fluid or an • Replacing windshield wiper blades
equivalent fluid with the recommended pH (p. 664)
value between 6 and 8, diluted as recom-
• Changing rear window wipers (p. 663)
mended, e.g. in a 1:1 solution with pH-neu-
tral water. • Using the windshield wipers (p. 180)
• Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 180)
CAUTION • Opening and closing the hood (p. 617)
Use washer fluid with anti-freeze when
temperatures are below the freezing point
to help keep the pump, reservoir and hoses
from freezing.

Volume:
• Vehicles with headlight washing: 5.3 liters
(5.6 qts).
• Vehicles without headlight washing: 3.5
liters (3.7 qts).

Related information
• Using the rain sensor (p. 181)
• Using the windshield and headlight wash-
ers (p. 183)
• Using automatic rear window wiping
when backing up (p. 185)

667
SPECIFICATIONS
 SPECIFICATIONS

Type designations
The decals in the vehicle contain information
such as chassis number, type designation,
color code, etc.
Location of decals

The illustration is general and details may vary depending on market and model.

670
 SPECIFICATIONS

Vehicle Emission Control Information. Vehicle Emission Control Information. Tire inflation pressures. This label indi-
US models. Your Volvo is designed to meet all Canadian models. Your Volvo is designed to cates the correct inflation pressures for the
applicable emission standards, as evidenced meet all applicable emission standards, as evi- tires that were on the vehicle when it left the
by the certification label on the underside of denced by the certification label on the under- factory.
the hood. For further information regarding side of the hood. For further information regar-
these regulations, please consult your Volvo ding these regulations, please consult your
retailer. Volvo retailer.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The

VIN plate is located on the top left surface of
the dashboard. The Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) should always be quoted in all
correspondence concerning your vehicle with
the retailer and when ordering parts.
}}

671
 SPECIFICATIONS

|| NOTE
The decals shown in the Owner's Manual
do not claim to be exact reproductions of
those found in the vehicle. The purpose is
to show approximately how they look and
about where they are located on the vehi-
cle. The information that applies for your
vehicle in particular is found on the decal
on the vehicle.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Engine oil. This label contains the recom-
(FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Ministry mended engine oil specifications.
of Transport (CMVSS) standards (Canada).
Related information
• Air conditioning specifications (p. 679)
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable
safety standards, as evidenced by the certifi-
cation label on the driver's side B-pillar (the
structural member at the side of the vehicle, at
the rear of the driver's door opening). This
label also includes codes for paint color, etc.
For further information regarding these regula-
tions, please consult your Volvo retailer. U.S.
models have the upper decal; Canadian mod-
els have the lower one. Decal A/C. Refrigerant R1234yf.

672
 SPECIFICATIONS

Dimensions
The vehicle's length, height, etc. are shown in
the table.

Dimensions mm inches Dimensions mm inches Dimensions mm inches

A Ground clearanceA 211 8.3 G Load height 776 30.6 I Wheel track, rear 1657C 65.2C
B Wheelbase 2865 112.8 H Wheel track, front 1653C 65.1C 1653D 65.1D

C Length 4688 184.6 1649D 64.9D 1659E 65.3E

D Load length, floor, 1746 68.7 1655E 65.2E 1673F 65.9F

folded backrest 1668F 65.7F J Load width, floor 1010 39.8
E Load length, floor 960 37.8 K Width 1902 74.9
F HeightB 1658 65.3

}}

673
 SPECIFICATIONS

|| Dimensions mm inches
L Width incl. rearview 2117 83.3
mirrors
M Width incl. folded 1999 78.7
rearview mirrors
A For curb weight plus 1 person. (Varies slightly depending on
tire dimensions, chassis variant, etc.).
B Including roof antenna, at curb weight.
C Vehicles with 17/19-inch wheels.
D Vehicles with 20-inch wheels.
E Vehicles with 21-inch wheels.
F Vehicles with 22-inch wheels.

Related information
• Weights (p. 675)

674
 SPECIFICATIONS

Weights
The following table lists important weight
data for your vehicle.
Category USA Canada
(lbs) (kg)
Gross vehicle weight 5860 2660
Capacity weight 950 430
Permissible axle weights, front 2930 1330
Permissible axle weights, rear 3060 1390
Curb weight 4010–4760 1870–2160
Max. roof load 220 100

CAUTION
• When loading the vehicle, the maxi-
mum gross vehicle weight and permis-
sible axle weights may not be excee-
ded.

Related information
• Type designations (p. 670)
• Towing capacity and tongue weight
(p. 676)

675
 SPECIFICATIONS

Towing capacity and tongue Towing capacity and tongue weight are
weight shown in the table.

Category USA Canada

(lbs) (kg)
Without brakes: 1650 750
Max. trailer weights
With brakes: 3500 1580
Max. tongue weight – 350 150

CAUTION
• The maximum trailer weights listed are
only applicable for altitudes up to
3280 ft (1,000 m) above sea level.
With increasing altitude the engine
power and therefore the car's climbing
ability are impaired because of the
reduced air density, so the maximum
trailer weight has to be reduced
accordingly. The weight of the car and
trailer must be reduced by 10% for
every further 3280 ft (1,000 m) (or
part thereof).

Related information
• Type designations (p. 670)
• Weights (p. 675)
• Driving with a trailer (p. 472)
• Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 474)

676 * Option/accessory.
 SPECIFICATIONS

Engine specifications Recharge vehicles are powered by both a NOTE

Engine specifications (output, etc.) for each gasoline engine and an electric motor (ERAD
– Electric Rear Axle Drive). Not all engines are available on all markets.
engine variant are shown in the table below.
The specifications for Special Edition vehicles
may vary.

Engine Engine codeA Output Output Torque Torque Number of cylinders

(kW/rps) (hp/rpm) (Nm/rps) (ft. lbs./rpm)
T8 Recharge B4204T28 233/100 313/6000 400/37–90 295/2200–5400 4
T8 Recharge Polestar B4204T39 245/100 328/6000 430/75 317/4500 4
A The engine code, component and manufacturer serial numbers can be found on the engine.

Electric motor
Max. output: 65 kW (87 hp).
Torque: 240 Nm.

Related information
• Type designations (p. 670)
• Engine oil specifications (p. 678)

677
 SPECIFICATIONS

Engine oil specifications Oil viscosity Transmission fluid specifications

Engine oil of type VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 The wrong oil viscosity can shorten engine Under normal driving conditions, the trans-
must be used. Lower oil grades may not offer service life during normal use. mission fluid will not need to be changed dur-
the same fuel economy, engine performance VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 provides good fuel ing the transmission's service life. However,
or engine protection. economy and engine protection. See the vis- it may need to be changed if the vehicle is
Volvo recommends: cosity chart. driven frequently in adverse driving condi-
tions.

Automatic transmission
Prescribed transmission fluid: AW-1

Related information
• Type designations (p. 670)

Viscosity chart
General
See the Service and warranty booklet for infor- Oil volume
mation about oil change intervals. Engine oil volumes (including oil filter) are
shown in the table.
NOTE
Liter (approx) 5.6
This vehicle is delivered from the factory
with synthetic oil. US qts (approx) 5.9

Do not use oil additives.

Related information
• Type designations (p. 670)
• Checking and filling engine oil (p. 621)
• Engine oil (p. 620)

678
 SPECIFICATIONS

Brake fluid specifications Fuel tank volume Air conditioning specifications

The medium in the hydraulic brake system is The fuel tank's refillable volume is shown in The climate system in the vehicle uses a
called brake fluid and is used to transfer pres- the table below. freon-free R1234yf refrigerant. For informa-
sure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master All models tion regarding the refrigerant, refer to the
brake cylinder, which in turn actuates the decal located on the inside of the hood.
brake calipers. Liter (approx) 70
The prescribed grades and volumes for fluids
Recommended grade: Volvo Original or simi-
US gallons (approx) 18.5 and lubricants in the air conditioning system
lar fluid that meets a combination of Dot 4, 5.1
are shown below.
and ISO 4925 class 6.
Related information
Refueling (p. 459)
A/C Decal
•
NOTE Decal for R1234yf
• Octane rating (p. 462)
Changing or filling brake fluid should be
entrusted to an authorized Volvo work-
shop.

Related information
• Engine compartment overview (p. 619)

}}

679
 SPECIFICATIONS

|| Explanation of symbols for R1234yf Vehicles with R1234yf refrigerant Evaporator

Symbol Explanation
CAUTION
Caution
The A/C system evaporator must never be
repaired or replaced with a previously used
evaporator. The new evaporator must be
Mobile air condition system certified and labeled in accordance with
(MAC) SAE J2842.

Refrigerant amount.
Related information
Lubricant • Climate control system service (p. 617)

WARNING
The air conditioning system contains the
Only a trained and certified tech- refrigerant R1234yf under pressure. In
nician can perform service on the accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician
mobile air conditioning system Training for Safe Service and Containment
(MAC) of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C Sys-
tem), service and repairs to the refrigerant
Flammable refrigerant system may only be performed by trained
and certified technicians in order to ensure
the safety of the system.

Refrigerant Compressor oil

The refrigerant amount (charge level) is prin- Volume Prescribed grade
ted on a decal on the inside of the hood.
100 ml (3.38 fl. oz.) PAG SP-A2

680
 SPECIFICATIONS

Approved tire pressure the tire inflation placard for information spe-
The following tire pressures are recom- cific to the tires installed on your vehicle at
mended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the factory.

Tire dimensions Cold tire pressure for up to five persons

Front Rear
psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
235/60 R18
235/55 R19 35 (240) 35 (240)
255/45 R20
255/40 R21
38 (260) 38 (260)
265/35 R22
Temporary spare tire
60 (420) 60 (420)
T125/80R18

Related information
• Type designations (p. 670)
• Checking tire pressure (p. 565)
• Recommended tire pressure (p. 567)

681
INDEX INDEX

troubleshooting 296 Allergy and asthma-inducing sub-

1, 2, 3 ... WARNING 315 stances 208
4WD 436 Adjusting the steering wheel 202 All Wheel Drive, AWD 436
Advanced Air Cleaner 210 All Wheel Drive (AWD) 436
Airbag 55 All Wheel Drive (four-wheel drive) 436
A activation/deactivation 59 Android Auto 520, 521, 522
ABS driver's side 56
Antenna
anti-lock brakes 421 passenger side 56, 59
location 261
AC (Air conditioning) 227 Air bag, see Airbag 55
Apple CarPlay 516, 517, 519
Accessories and extra equipment 36 Air conditioning 227
Approach lighting 165
installation 37 Air conditioning, fluid
Apps 488
Accessory installation warning 37 volume and grade 679
Assistance at risk of collision 341
Active Bending Lights 162 Air distribution 210
activating/deactivating 342
air vents 210, 211
Adapting driving characteristics 438 at risk of run-off 342
changing 211
Adaptive Cruise Control 290 during collision risks from behind 344
defrosting 222
activating 293 during collision risks from oncoming
recirculation 221
auto-brake 319 traffic 343
table showing options 213
change cruise control functionality 297 limitations 345
Air quality 207, 208 Symbols and messages 346
controls 292
Advanced Air Cleaner 210
deactivate 294 Audio and media 486
allergy and asthma 208
display 292 Audio system
passenger compartment filter 209
limitations 296 HD digital radio 497
passing 314 Air recirculation 221
SiriusXM® Satellite radio 498, 499,
set time interval 318 Alarm 271 501
standby mode 295 deactivating 272
Auto-climate 220
stored speed 317 Alarm about slippery road conditions 280
switching target vehicles 316 Auto hold 428
Alarm on hazard warning flashers 280
Symbols and messages 298

683
 INDEX

Auto-hold brakes 428 Blind Spot Information 348 auto-braking with Adaptive Cruise
activating/deactivating 429 BLIS 348 Control 319
after collision 430 activating/deactivating 349 automatic when stationary 428
driver support 274 limitations 350 Brake Assist System, BAS 423
Automatic car wash 657 Symbols and messages 351 brake lights 164
brake system 421
Automatic high beam 161 Blower
emergency brake lights 164
Automatic locking 264 adjusting 224
Maintenance 424
air distribution 211
Automatic relocking 245, 259 on salted roads 424
air vents 211
Automatic transmission 431, 432 on wet roads 424
Bluetooth parking brake 425
kickdown 435
connect 513
oil 678 brake system
connecting vehicle to Internet 539
Trailer 472 fluid 679
phone 523
Auxiliary heater 237 settings 531
Book service and repair 611
Booster cushions 74
C
B Brake assist Camera sensor
Backrest after collision 430 see Camera 386
front seat, adjusting 188, 189, 192, Brake energy 422, 436 Camera unit 386
193, 194, 195 limitations 386
Brake fluid
rear seat, folding 198 maintenance and cleaning 389
grade 679
Battery Symbols and messages 391
Brake functions 421
hybrid battery 627 Capacity weight 585, 675
jump-start 465 Brake position 432
Care Key
Maintenance 625 Brakes 421 restricted remote key 252
recycling 628 anti-lock brakes, ABS 421 settings 253
starter battery 625 auto-brake with Pilot Assist 319
Cargo compartment 593
symbols on the battery 627
attachment points 596

684
 INDEX

cargo net 602 Changing target vehicle 316 City Safety 327
electrical outlet 590, 591 Charge braking for oncoming vehicles 336
Lighting 166 vehicle function 455 crossing traffic 333
Cargo compartment cover 597, 599 delayed evasive maneuver 335
Charge level
detecting obstacles 331
cargo net 602 vehicle function 455
evasive maneuver 334
Cargo net 602 Charging limitations 337
Car wash 654, 656, 657, 658, 659, 660 hybrid battery 395 limitations for evasive maneuvers 335
opening and closing the charging limitations in crossing traffic 334
Catalytic converter 463
door 401 setting warning distance 330
recovery 476
start charging 401 sub-functions 328
Cell phone, see Phone 524 Status 403, 405, 408 Symbols and messages 340
Center console 589 stop charging 410
Cleaning 652, 653, 654
Center display Charging cable 398 automatic car wash 657
change appearance 135 Charging current 396 car wash 654, 656, 657, 658, 659,
cleaning 649 660
Checking engine oil level 621
climate controls 216 center display 649
Function view 126 Child lock
Seat belts 651
handling 116, 119, 123, 128 activating/deactivating 263
textile upholstery 648, 650, 652
keyboard 130 Child restraints 66, 68 upholstery 648, 650, 651, 652,
messages 144, 145 booster cushions 74 653, 654
overview 114 convertible seats 72 wheels 660
settings 136, 137 infant seats 70
Cleaning wheels 660
switch off and change volume 135 integrated booster cushion 79
symbols in status bar 128 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors 77 Cleaning wiper blades 659
views 119 lower attachment points 77 CleanZone 207
Central locking 262 recalls and registration 68 Clean Zone Interior Package 208
top tether anchors 75
Certificate 534 Climate 204
Child safety 66 auto-regulation 220
Change of owner 138
Circuit breaker 399 blower control 224

685
 INDEX

parking 227 Connected Safety 280 Cross Traffic Alert 356

perceived temperature 205 activating/deactivating 281 activating/deactivating 357
Sensors 205 limitations 281 limitations 357
temperature control 225, 226 Connecting vehicle to Internet messages 359
voice control 206 No connection or poor connection 543 Cruise control 287
zones 204 via a mobile device (WiFi) 539 activating 288
Climate controls 216 via cellular phone (Bluetooth) 539 standby mode 290
center display 216 via vehicle's modem 540 stored speed 317
rear seat 216 Connect phone 524 turn off 289
Climate system 204, 216 Contact information 26 Curb weight 675
Refrigerant 679 Customer Privacy Policy 35
Control unit
repairs 617
charging status 405 CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package) 208
Clock, setting 98
Convertible seats 72
Collision 44, 49, 55, 64
coolant 623
Collision warner filling 623 D
crossing traffic rear 356
Cooling system Data
see City Safety 327
overheating 464 recording 33
Collision warning
Cornering assistance 312 transferring between vehicle and
from the rear 347
activating/deactivating 313 workshop 609
with Adaptive Cruise Control 315
limitations 313 Data sharing 544, 545
with Pilot Assist 315
Corner Traction Control 275 Daytime running lights 158
Color code, paintwork 663
Corrosion protection 661 Decals
Color codes 663
Covering location 670
Compass 482
cargo compartment 599 Defrosting 222
calibration 482
Crash, see Collision 44 Detecting obstacles
Condensation in headlights 656, 657,
658, 659 Crash event data 33 City Safety 331

686
 INDEX

Diagnosis Driver Alert Control 352 electric motor 436

via the workshop's Wi-Fi 609 activating/deactivating 353 Driving 454
Dimensions 673 limitations 354 Range 453
rest stop guidance 353 Electric parking brake 425
Dipstick, electronic 621
Driver performance 96 Electronic immobilizer 256
Direction of rotation 560
settings 97
Display emergency brake lights 164
Driver profile 140
driver information 88 Emission inspection readiness 606
edit 141, 142, 144
Display lighting 167 select 141 Energy distribution
Distance Alert 354 using map data 444
Driver support system 274
activating/deactivating 355 Drive mode 319 Engine
limitations 355 automatic start and stop of combus-
Drive systems 436
Set time interval 318 tion engine 437
Driving overheating 464
DivX® 512
cooling system 464 start 416
Door mirrors 173 with a trailer 472 turn off 418
compass 482
Driving through standing water 457 Engine braking 421, 432, 451
dimming 174
outer 173 driving with a trailer Engine compartment
power folding 174 towball load 676 coolant 623
resetting 174 towing capacity 676 engine oil 620
store position 190, 191 overview 619
Download Center 609 Engine drag control 275
use 610 E Engine oil 620
Driveline Electrical outlet 590 checking and filling 621
transmission 431 use 591 grade and volume 678
Drive mode 438 Electrical system 625 Engine shutdown 418
changing 443 Engine specifications 677
Electric drive motor
when using driver support 319
specifications 677

687
 INDEX

Engine temperature Front seats, power 189

high 464 adjusting passenger seat from driv-
G
Environment 28 er's seat 197 Gasoline grade 461
adjusting seat 189 Gauge
Ethanol content
lumbar support 195 fuel gauge 91
max. 10% by volume 461
massage 192, 193, 194 hybrid battery 92
Exterior dimensions 673 multifunction control 192, 193, 194, 195
Gear selector positions
Extra heater (Auxiliary heater) 237 side bolsters 195
automatic transmission 432
store position 190, 191
Glass, laminated/reinforced 170
FSC, environmental labeling 23
Glove compartment 592
F Fuel 461
Travel Link service 505 Gracenote® 511
Federal Clean Air Act 606
Fuel filling 459 Grocery bag holders 596
Ferry transport 445
Fuel gauge 91 Gross vehicle weight 675
Flooded road 457
Fuel requirements 461, 462
Fluids, volumes 666, 679
Fuel tank
Fluids and oils 623, 678, 679
volume 679 H
Fog lights
Fuse box 629 Handbrake 425
rear 163
Fuses 628 Hand wash 656
Four-C 445
below the glove compartment 637
Hard disk
Front seat in engine compartment 630
space 546
blower 224 in the cargo compartment 643
climate 216 replacing 629 Hazard warning flashers 164
heating 217, 218 HDC 451
temperature 225 HD radio 495
ventilation 219
Head restraint 199
Front seat manual 188
Head-up display 146
activating/deactivating 148

688
 INDEX

cleaning 650 HomeLink® remote control Infant seats 70

Distance Alert 354 programmable 478 Inflatable curtain 63
replacing windshield 617 Home safe lighting, Homesafe Lighting, Inflatable Curtain 63
settings 148 Follow me home lighting, follow-me-
store position 148, 190, 191 Inflating tires 584
home lighting 165
Heated wiper blades 180 Inflation pressure
Honk 201
adjusting 566
Heater 236 Hood, opening 617 Checking 565
auxiliary heater 237
Horn 201 decal with recommended pressure 567
parking heater 236
Hybrid battery 627 Inflation pressure monitoring 567
Heating
Charging 395 action 571
Seats 217, 218
Hybrid battery gauge 92 save new inflation pressure 569
steering wheel 220
Status 570
windows 223 Hybrid gauge 91
Inflation pressure table 681
Height adjustment 445, 448 Hybrid mode 438, 444
Information display 88, 90
high beams 160, 161
Infotainment (Audio and media) 486
High engine temperature 464
I Instrument cluster 88
Hill Descent Control 451, 452
settings 90
activate with function button 452
IAQS (Interior Air Quality System) 208
Instrument illumination 167
Hill Start Assist 430
IC (Inflatable Curtain) 63
Hill Start Assist (HSA) 430 Instrument lighting 167
ID, Volvo 26
Hoisting the vehicle 614 Instrument panel 88
Identification number 39 app menu 108, 109
Hold
Ignition mode 419, 420 hybrid-related symbols and mes-
vehicle function 455
sages 411
HomeLink® 478 Immobilizer 256
messages 110
Electronic immobilizer 256
programming 479 settings 90
type approval 481 Indicator symbols 99
Instruments and controls 86
use 480 Individual drive mode 438

689
 INDEX

Instruments overview Large Animal Detection (LAD) 331

left-hand drive vehicle 86
K
Launch function 435
Integrated booster cushion 79 Key 242
Leather upholstery, cleaning instruc-
folding down 82 Keyboard 130, 133 tions 652
folding up 80 change language 133
Leveling control 445
IntelliSafe Keyless settings 448
driver support 29 locking/unlocking 259
License agreement 102, 547
Interior Air Quality System 208 settings 260
touch-sensitive surfaces 258 Lifting tools 575
Intermittent wiping 181
Key tag 242 Light bulbs
Internet, see Internet-connected vehi- changing 648
cle 538
Light control 156, 167
Internet-connected vehicle 538
book service and repair 611 L Lighting
Active Bending Lights 162
No connection or poor connection 543 Labels approach lighting 165
send car data 612 location 670 automatic high beam 161
system updates 610
Laminated glass 170 brake lights 164
iPod®, connecting 514 control, instrument, display 167
Lamps
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors 77 changing 648 controls 156, 165
Trailer 475 daytime running lights 158
emergency brake lights 164
Lane Keeping Aid 320
Hazard warning flashers 164
J activating/deactivating 322
high beams 160, 161
display 326
Jack 575 home safe lighting 165
limitations 323
in passenger compartment 165
Jump-start 465 see Lane Keeping Aid 320
low beams 159
select assistance option 323
position lights 158
Symbols and messages 324
rear fog light 163
Language 136

690
 INDEX

settings 157 Low-speed driving 450 Messages in display 110, 144

Turn signals 162 activate with function button 451 handling 111, 145
Lighting, replacing bulbs 648 saved 112, 145

Limp home 431 Mileage 93

M electric motor 453
Load anchoring eyelets
cargo compartment 596 Misting
Maintained climate comfort 233
condensation in headlights 654, 657
Load anchoring hooks 596 start/stop 234
Mood lighting 166
Load carriers 595 Maintenance 606
adjusting 167
Load index 562 corrosion protection 661
Loading Max. axle weight 675
general 594 Max. roof load 675
load anchoring eyelets 596
N
Media player 507, 508, 509
long load 594 compatible file formats 515 Net
Lock indication 240 voice control 153 cargo compartment 602
setting 242 Messages and symbols
Locking/unlocking Adaptive Cruise Control 298
Tailgate 247, 260 Assistance at risk of collision 346 O
Locking wheel bolts 575 BLIS 351
Occupant safety 45
camera and radar unit 391
Locks Occupant weight sensor 59
City Safety 340
locking/unlocking 245
Cross Traffic Alert 359 Octane rating 462
Locks and remote keys 240 Lane Keeping Aid 324 Oil, see also Engine oil 678
Long-term storage 413 Park Assist Camera 373
Oil filter 620
Low battery charge level Park Assist Pilot 382
Parking Assist 364 Oil level 621
start battery 465
Pilot Assist 310 On-board diagnostics 606
Low beams 159
stability and traction control system 278
On-board Diagnostic socket 37
Lower the rear end 594

691
 INDEX

Option/accessory 21 Symbols and messages 373 Passenger compartment interior 588

Outside temperature gauge 98 trajectory lines 368 center console 589
Park Assist Pilot 375 electrical outlet 590
Overheating 464, 472
limitations 380 glove compartment 592
Owner's information 16 sun visor 593
parallel parking 376
OWNER'S MANUAL 21 perpendicular parking 376 Passenger compartment lighting 165
environmental labeling 23 pulling out of a parking space 379 adjusting 167
in cellular phone 20 Symbols and messages 382 auto switch 166
in the center display 17, 18 use 377 Passing assistance 314
Park Assist System 360 activating 314
parking personal information (Customer Privacy
P on hills 427 Policy) 35
Paddle at steering wheel 201 Parking Assist 360 Phone 523
Paint activating/deactivating 362 changing to another 527
color code 663 front, rear and sides 361 connect 524
paint damage and touch-up 661, limitations 363 connect automatically 526
662, 663 Symbols and messages 364 connect manually 526
Parking brake 425 delete 527
Panoramic roof 176
activating/deactivating 425 disconnect 526
opening and closing 177
automatic activation 427 phone call 527, 530
pinch protection 170
Low battery charge level 427 text message 528
sun shade 179
voice control 152
ventilation position 178 Parking climate 227
Symbols and messages 235 Phone charger 532
Parallel parking 375
Parking heater 236 Pilot Assist 300
Park Assist Camera 365
activating 304
activating 371 Passenger compartment filter 209
auto-brake 319
limitations 386 Passenger compartment heater (Parking controls 302
location and views 366 heater) 236 disengaged steering assistance 307
sensor field 370
display 303

692
 INDEX

limitations 308 Preconditioning 228 Rain sensor 181, 182

passing 314 start/stop 228 Rain sensor's memory function 182
set time interval 318 timer 229
Raise the rear end 594
standby mode 306 Pressure wash 658
stored speed 317 Rear camera 365
Privacy Policy (Customer Privacy Policy) 35
switching target vehicles 316 Rear Collision Warning 347
Symbols and messages 310 Private locking 269 limitations 347
turn off 305 activating/deactivating 269
Rear seat
WARNING 315 PROPOSITION 65 WARNING 465 climate 216
pinch protection 170 folding backrest 198
resetting 171 head restraint 199
PIN code 541 R heating 218
Private locking 269 Rearview/door mirrors
Radar unit 383
Polestar Engineered 445, 448 adjusting door mirrors 174
limitations 386
dimming 174
Polishing 655 maintenance and cleaning 389
heating 223
Position lights 158 Symbols and messages 391
interior 173
type approval 384
Power 677 Rearview mirror 173
electric motor 677 Radio 490
dimming 174
changing radio waveband and radio
Power folding door mirrors 174 Rear window
station 492
Power panoramic roof 176 HD radio 495 heating 223
Power save mode 465 RBDS 494 washers 184, 185
search radio station 492 wipers 184, 185
Power seats 189
settings 494 Recalls 47
Power windows 171, 172
SiriusXM® Satellite radio 498, 499, 501 Recharge
opening and closing 172
start 491 general 394
pinch protection 170
voice control 153
Precleaning 232 Recommendations when driving 456
Radio favorites 493
start/stop 232 Recommendations when loading 594

693
 INDEX

Recovery 477 speed camera information 284 seat belt tensioner 52

Refrigerant 617 Speed warning 284 securing child restraint systems 70,
climate system 679 Road trip 456 72, 74

Refueling Roll-over protection 275 Seat belt tensioner 52

filling 459 resetting 53
Roll Stability Control 275
fuel filler door, fuel flap 458 Seats
Roof load, max. weight 675
Regenerative braking 430 heating 217, 218
Run-off Mitigation 342 manual front seat 188
Remote immobilizer 256
power front seats 189
Remote key 242 store position 190, 191
battery replacement 248 ventilation 219
connecting to driver profile 142
S
whiplash protection 48
detachable key blade 253 Safety 44
Security code 269
loss 252 pregnancy 45
Range 247 Sensors
Safety belt, see Seat belt 49
air quality 209
Remote updates 609 Safety defects, reporting 46 Camera unit 386
Reporting safety defects 46 Safety mode 64 climate 205
Resetting door mirrors 174 starting/moving 65 Radar unit 383
Resetting settings 138 Sealing compound 579 Sensus
change of owner 138 connection and entertainment 30
Seat, see Seats 188
Driver profile 144 Sensus Navigation
Seat belt reminder 54
Resetting trip odometer 96 Road Sign Information 284
Seat belts 49
Road Sign Information 282 Service position 665
Automatic locking retractor/Emer-
activate/deactivate warnings 285 gency locking retractor 68 Service program 606
activating/deactivating 283 buckling/unbuckling 50 settings
display 283 pregnancy 45 Categories 139
limitations 286 seat belt reminder 54 contextual 137
Sensus Navigation 284
resetting 138

694
 INDEX

Shiftlock 435 Stability and traction control system 275 Storage compartments 588
Side airbag 62 sport mode 276, 277 center console 589
Symbols and messages 278 glove compartment 592
Side Impact Protection System 62, 63
Stains 648, 650, 651, 652, 653, 654 sun visor 593
SIM card 541
Start and lock system Stored speed 317
SIPS (Side Impact Protection Sys-
type designations 256 Sunroof
tem) 62, 63
Start battery 465, 625 pinch protection 170
Sirius Satellite radio
overload 465 Sun shade
Travel link 502
Start engine 416 panoramic roof 176, 179
SiriusXM® Satellite radio pinch protection 170
traffic information 498, 499, 501 Starting the engine
after a collision 65 Sun visor 593
Ski hatch 597 mirror lighting 166
Start the vehicle 416
Slippery conditions 457 Symbols
Steel cargo grid 600
Slippery road conditions 457 dynamic 88
Steering assistance at risk of collision 341 indicator symbols 99
Snow chains 578
Steering power level, see Steering wheel warning symbols 99
Software updates 33
resistance 274 Symbols and messages
Sound experience 487
Steering wheel 201, 202 center display's status bar 128
Sound settings 486, 529 heating 220 hybrid-related 411
phone 530 keypad 201 parking climate 235
playing media 508, 509 paddle 201 system updates 610
text message 529 steering wheel adjustment 202
Spare tire 576 Steering wheel keypad 201
handling 577
Speed camera information 284
Steering wheel paddles 433 T
Steering wheel resistance, speed-
activating/deactivating 285 Tailgate
dependent 274
Speed symbols, tires 562 closing and locking using button 265
Stone chips and scratches 661, 662, 663 locking/unlocking 247, 260
Spin control 275

695
 INDEX

open/close with foot movement 267 tread wear indicator 561 Trailer Stability Assist 276
unlocking from inside 263 winter tires 578 trailer 474
Technician certification 38 Tire sealing system 579 Trailer stabilizer 276, 474
Temperature Inflating tires 584 Trailer towing
adjusting 225, 226 use 580 trailer hitch 470
perceived 205 Tire tread 561 Transmission 431
Temperature monitoring 401 Tools 574 automatic 431, 432, 436
Temporary Spare 576 Top tether anchors (child restraint sys- Transmission fluid
Temporary tire sealing system 579 tems) 75 grade 678

Terms and conditions Top view 136 Travel Link 502

services 35 Total airing function 242 Fuel 505
users 544 Notifications 505
Towbar 470
Sports 507
Time interval to the vehicle ahead 318 removable, attaching, installing,
weather 503
Tires mounting 470
removable, removing, detaching 470 Tread depth 561
age 558
retractable 467 winter tires 578
designations 562
direction of rotation 560 Towing 476 Tread wear indicator 561
economy and wear 558 Towing capacity and towball load 676 Trip computer 93
glossary of terms 561 display in instrument panel 95
Towing eyelet 476
inflation pressure table 681 Trip odometer 93
pressure 681 TPMS - Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem 567 Trip odometer resetting 96
recommended 558
removing and installing 572 Traction control 275 Trip statistics 96
rotation when changing 558 settings 97
Traffic information 494
specifications 562, 681 Troubleshooting
Trailer
speed rating 562 Adaptive Cruise Control 296
driving with a trailer 472
storage 558 City Safety 337
Lamps 475
swaying 474 TSA - Trailer Stability Assist 474

696
 INDEX

Tunnel detection 159 Vehicle modem

connecting vehicle to Internet 540
W
Turn off engine 418
settings 541 Warning lights
Turn signals 162
Vehicle recovery 477 Adaptive Cruise Control 315
Type approval Pilot Assist 315
HomeLink® 481 Vehicle status 611
stability and traction control system 275
radar system 384 inflation pressure 570
Warning sound
Vehicle upholstery 648, 650, 651, 652,
parking brake 427
653, 654
warning symbols 99
U Vehicle weight 675
Warning symbols
Ventilation 210, 211
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 564 safety 44
Seats 219
Units 136 Warranties 606
Video 512, 514
Unlocking settings 513 Washer
settings 246 headlights 183
Voice control 149
with key blade 254 rear window 184, 185
climate 206
washer fluid, filling 666
USB phone 152
Windshield 183
socket for connecting media 514 radio and media 153
settings 154 Washer fluid 180, 666
use 150, 152, 153, 154 Waxing 655
V VOL mark 558 Weights
Volvo ID 26 Curb weight 675
Vehicle care 654, 656, 657, 658, 659,
create and register 27 Wheel bolts 575
660
leather upholstery 652 Wheels
cleaning 660
Vehicle Event Data 33
removing and installing 572
Vehicle functions Snow chains 578
in the center display 126
Vehicle key bat. low 248

697
 INDEX

Wheels and tires

Load index and speed symbol 562
Whiplash protection 48
Whiplash Protection System 48
WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) 48
Wi-Fi
connecting vehicle to Internet 539
delete network 543
sharing Internet connection, tether-
ing, hotspot 542
technology and security 544
Windows and glass 170
Windshield
projected image 146, 148
Windshield washing 183
Windshield wipers 180
rain sensor 181, 182
Winter driving 457
Snow chains 578
winter tires 578
Wiper blade 180
replacing 663, 664
service position 665
Wiper blade and washing fluid 180
Wiper blades, heated 180
WPC 532

698
 WARNING
California Proposition 65
Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-
senger vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To
minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands fre-
quently when servicing your vehicle. For
more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
vehicle.
TP 32117 (English - USA & Canada), AT 2017, MY21, Copyright © 2000-2020 Volvo Car Corporation